diff options
Diffstat (limited to 'old')
| -rw-r--r-- | old/hmskr10.txt | 35618 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/hmskr10.zip | bin | 0 -> 693373 bytes |
2 files changed, 35618 insertions, 0 deletions
diff --git a/old/hmskr10.txt b/old/hmskr10.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..d75f0c1 --- /dev/null +++ b/old/hmskr10.txt @@ -0,0 +1,35618 @@ +The Project Gutenberg Etext of Heimskringla, by Snorri Sturlson +The Chronicle of the Kings of Norway + + +Copyright laws are changing all over the world, be sure to check +the copyright laws for your country before posting these files!! + +Please take a look at the important information in this header. +We encourage you to keep this file on your own disk, keeping an +electronic path open for the next readers. Do not remove this. + + +**Welcome To The World of Free Plain Vanilla Electronic Texts** + +**Etexts Readable By Both Humans and By Computers, Since 1971** + +*These Etexts Prepared By Hundreds of Volunteers and Donations* + +Information on contacting Project Gutenberg to get Etexts, and +further information is included below. We need your donations. + + +Heimskringla +The Chronicle of the Kings of Norway + +by Snorri Sturlson + +July, 1996 [Etext #598] + + +The Project Gutenberg Etext of Heimskringla, by Snorri Sturlson +*****This file should be named hmskr10.txt or hmskr10.zip****** + +Corrected EDITIONS of our etexts get a new NUMBER, hmskr11.txt. +VERSIONS based on separate sources get new LETTER, hmskr10a.txt. + + +This electronic edition was edited, proofed, and prepared by +Douglas B. Killings (DeTroyes@AOL.COM), April 1996. + + +We are now trying to release all our books one month in advance +of the official release dates, for time for better editing. + +Please note: neither this list nor its contents are final till +midnight of the last day of the month of any such announcement. +The official release date of all Project Gutenberg Etexts is at +Midnight, Central Time, of the last day of the stated month. A +preliminary version may often be posted for suggestion, comment +and editing by those who wish to do so. To be sure you have an +up to date first edition [xxxxx10x.xxx] please check file sizes +in the first week of the next month. Since our ftp program has +a bug in it that scrambles the date [tried to fix and failed] a +look at the file size will have to do, but we will try to see a +new copy has at least one byte more or less. + + +Information about Project Gutenberg (one page) + +We produce about two million dollars for each hour we work. The +fifty hours is one conservative estimate for how long it we take +to get any etext selected, entered, proofread, edited, copyright +searched and analyzed, the copyright letters written, etc. This +projected audience is one hundred million readers. If our value +per text is nominally estimated at one dollar then we produce $2 +million dollars per hour this year as we release thirty-two text +files per month: or 400 more Etexts in 1996 for a total of 800. +If these reach just 10% of the computerized population, then the +total should reach 80 billion Etexts. + +The Goal of Project Gutenberg is to Give Away One Trillion Etext +Files by the December 31, 2001. [10,000 x 100,000,000=Trillion] +This is ten thousand titles each to one hundred million readers, +which is only 10% of the present number of computer users. 2001 +should have at least twice as many computer users as that, so it +will require us reaching less than 5% of the users in 2001. + + +We need your donations more than ever! + + +All donations should be made to "Project Gutenberg/BU": and are +tax deductible to the extent allowable by law. (BU = Benedictine +University). (Subscriptions to our paper newsletter go to BU.) + +For these and other matters, please mail to: + +Project Gutenberg +P. O. Box 2782 +Champaign, IL 61825 + +When all other email fails try our Executive Director: +Michael S. Hart <hart@pobox.com> + +We would prefer to send you this information by email +(Internet, Bitnet, Compuserve, ATTMAIL or MCImail). + +****** +If you have an FTP program (or emulator), please +FTP directly to the Project Gutenberg archives: +[Mac users, do NOT point and click. . .type] + +ftp uiarchive.cso.uiuc.edu +login: anonymous +password: your@login +cd etext/etext90 through /etext96 +or cd etext/articles [get suggest gut for more information] +dir [to see files] +get or mget [to get files. . .set bin for zip files] +GET INDEX?00.GUT +for a list of books +and +GET NEW GUT for general information +and +MGET GUT* for newsletters. + +**Information prepared by the Project Gutenberg legal advisor** +(Three Pages) + + +***START**THE SMALL PRINT!**FOR PUBLIC DOMAIN ETEXTS**START*** +Why is this "Small Print!" statement here? You know: lawyers. +They tell us you might sue us if there is something wrong with +your copy of this etext, even if you got it for free from +someone other than us, and even if what's wrong is not our +fault. So, among other things, this "Small Print!" statement +disclaims most of our liability to you. It also tells you how +you can distribute copies of this etext if you want to. + +*BEFORE!* YOU USE OR READ THIS ETEXT +By using or reading any part of this PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm +etext, you indicate that you understand, agree to and accept +this "Small Print!" statement. If you do not, you can receive +a refund of the money (if any) you paid for this etext by +sending a request within 30 days of receiving it to the person +you got it from. If you received this etext on a physical +medium (such as a disk), you must return it with your request. + +ABOUT PROJECT GUTENBERG-TM ETEXTS +This PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm etext, like most PROJECT GUTENBERG- +tm etexts, is a "public domain" work distributed by Professor +Michael S. Hart through the Project Gutenberg Association at +Benedictine University (the "Project"). Among other +things, this means that no one owns a United States copyright +on or for this work, so the Project (and you!) can copy and +distribute it in the United States without permission and +without paying copyright royalties. Special rules, set forth +below, apply if you wish to copy and distribute this etext +under the Project's "PROJECT GUTENBERG" trademark. + +To create these etexts, the Project expends considerable +efforts to identify, transcribe and proofread public domain +works. Despite these efforts, the Project's etexts and any +medium they may be on may contain "Defects". Among other +things, Defects may take the form of incomplete, inaccurate or +corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other +intellectual property infringement, a defective or damaged +disk or other etext medium, a computer virus, or computer +codes that damage or cannot be read by your equipment. + +LIMITED WARRANTY; DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES +But for the "Right of Replacement or Refund" described below, +[1] the Project (and any other party you may receive this +etext from as a PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm etext) disclaims all +liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including +legal fees, and [2] YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE OR +UNDER STRICT LIABILITY, OR FOR BREACH OF WARRANTY OR CONTRACT, +INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE +OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES, EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE +POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. + +If you discover a Defect in this etext within 90 days of +receiving it, you can receive a refund of the money (if any) +you paid for it by sending an explanatory note within that +time to the person you received it from. If you received it +on a physical medium, you must return it with your note, and +such person may choose to alternatively give you a replacement +copy. If you received it electronically, such person may +choose to alternatively give you a second opportunity to +receive it electronically. + +THIS ETEXT IS OTHERWISE PROVIDED TO YOU "AS-IS". NO OTHER +WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, ARE MADE TO YOU AS +TO THE ETEXT OR ANY MEDIUM IT MAY BE ON, INCLUDING BUT NOT +LIMITED TO WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A +PARTICULAR PURPOSE. + +Some states do not allow disclaimers of implied warranties or +the exclusion or limitation of consequential damages, so the +above disclaimers and exclusions may not apply to you, and you +may have other legal rights. + +INDEMNITY +You will indemnify and hold the Project, its directors, +officers, members and agents harmless from all liability, cost +and expense, including legal fees, that arise directly or +indirectly from any of the following that you do or cause: +[1] distribution of this etext, [2] alteration, modification, +or addition to the etext, or [3] any Defect. + +DISTRIBUTION UNDER "PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm" +You may distribute copies of this etext electronically, or by +disk, book or any other medium if you either delete this +"Small Print!" and all other references to Project Gutenberg, +or: + +[1] Only give exact copies of it. Among other things, this + requires that you do not remove, alter or modify the + etext or this "small print!" statement. You may however, + if you wish, distribute this etext in machine readable + binary, compressed, mark-up, or proprietary form, + including any form resulting from conversion by word pro- + cessing or hypertext software, but only so long as + *EITHER*: + + [*] The etext, when displayed, is clearly readable, and + does *not* contain characters other than those + intended by the author of the work, although tilde + (~), asterisk (*) and underline (_) characters may + be used to convey punctuation intended by the + author, and additional characters may be used to + indicate hypertext links; OR + + [*] The etext may be readily converted by the reader at + no expense into plain ASCII, EBCDIC or equivalent + form by the program that displays the etext (as is + the case, for instance, with most word processors); + OR + + [*] You provide, or agree to also provide on request at + no additional cost, fee or expense, a copy of the + etext in its original plain ASCII form (or in EBCDIC + or other equivalent proprietary form). + +[2] Honor the etext refund and replacement provisions of this + "Small Print!" statement. + +[3] Pay a trademark license fee to the Project of 20% of the + net profits you derive calculated using the method you + already use to calculate your applicable taxes. If you + don't derive profits, no royalty is due. Royalties are + payable to "Project Gutenberg Association / Benedictine + University" within the 60 days following each + date you prepare (or were legally required to prepare) + your annual (or equivalent periodic) tax return. + +WHAT IF YOU *WANT* TO SEND MONEY EVEN IF YOU DON'T HAVE TO? +The Project gratefully accepts contributions in money, time, +scanning machines, OCR software, public domain etexts, royalty +free copyright licenses, and every other sort of contribution +you can think of. Money should be paid to "Project Gutenberg +Association / Benedictine University". + +*END*THE SMALL PRINT! FOR PUBLIC DOMAIN ETEXTS*Ver.04.29.93*END* + + + + + +Heimskringla + +or + +The Chronicle of the Kings of Norway + +by + +Snorri Sturlson +(c.1179-1241) + +Originally written in Old Norse, app. 1225 A.D., by the poet and +historian Snorri Sturlson. + + +This electronic edition was edited, proofed, and prepared by +Douglas B. Killings (DeTroyes@AOL.COM), April 1996. + +***************************************************************** + +PREPARER'S NOTE: + +The "Heimskringla" of Snorri Sturlason is a collection of sagas +concerning the various rulers of Norway, from about A.D. 850 to +the year A.D. 1177. + +The Sagas covered in this work are the following: + +1. Halfdan the Black Saga +2. Harald Harfager's Saga +3. Hakon the Good's Saga +4. Saga of King Harald Grafeld and of Earl Hakon Son of Sigurd +5. King Olaf Trygvason's Saga +6. Saga of Olaf Haraldson (St. Olaf) +7. Saga of Magnus the Good +8. Saga of Harald Hardrade +9. Saga of Olaf Kyrre +10. Magnus Barefoot's Saga +11. Saga of Sigurd the Crusader and His Brothers Eystein and Olaf +12. Saga of Magnus the Blind and of Harald Gille +13. Saga of Sigurd, Inge, and Eystein, the Sons of Harald +14. Saga of Hakon Herdebreid ("Hakon the Broad-Shouldered") +15. Magnus Erlingson's Saga + +While scholars and historians continue to debate the historical +accuracy of Sturlason's work, the "Heimskringla" is still +considered an important original source for information on the +Viking Age, a period which Sturlason covers almost in its +entirety. + + +***************************************************************** + +PREFACE OF SNORRE STURLASON. + +In this book I have had old stories written down, as I have heard +them told by intelligent people, concerning chiefs who have have +held dominion in the northern countries, and who spoke the Danish +tongue; and also concerning some of their family branches, +according to what has been told me. Some of this is found in +ancient family registers, in which the pedigrees of kings and +other personages of high birth are reckoned up, and part is +written down after old songs and ballads which our forefathers +had for their amusement. Now, although we cannot just say what +truth there may be in these, yet we have the certainty that old +and wise men held them to be true. + +Thjodolf of Hvin was the skald of Harald Harfager, and he +composed a poem for King Rognvald the Mountain-high, which is +called "Ynglingatal." This Rognvald was a son of Olaf +Geirstadalf, the brother of King Halfdan the Black. In this +poem thirty of his forefathers are reckoned up, and the death and +burial-place of each are given. He begins with Fjolner, a son of +Yngvefrey, whom the Swedes, long after his time, worshipped and +sacrificed to, and from whom the race or family of the Ynglings +take their name. + +Eyvind Skaldaspiller also reckoned up the ancestors of Earl Hakon +the Great in a poem called "Haleygjatal", composed about Hakon; +and therein he mentions Saeming, a son of Yngvefrey, and he +likewise tells of the death and funeral rites of each. The lives +and times of the Yngling race were written from Thjodolf's +relation enlarged afterwards by the accounts of intelligent +people. + +As to funeral rites, the earliest age is called the Age of +Burning; because all the dead were consumed by fire, and over +their ashes were raised standing stones. But after Frey was +buried under a cairn at Upsala, many chiefs raised cairns, as +commonly as stones, to the memory of their relatives. + +The Age of Cairns began properly in Denmark after Dan Milkillate +had raised for himself a burial cairn, and ordered that he should +be buried in it on his death, with his royal ornaments and +armour, his horse and saddle-furniture, and other valuable goods; +and many of his descendants followed his example. But the +burning of the dead continued, long after that time, to be the +custom of the Swedes and Northmen. Iceland was occupied in the +time that Harald Harfager was the King of Norway. There were +skalds in Harald's court whose poems the people know by heart +even at the present day, together with all the songs about the +kings who have ruled in Norway since his time; and we rest the +foundations of our story principally upon the songs which were +sung in the presence of the chiefs themselves or of their sons, +and take all to be true that is found in such poems about their +feats and battles: for although it be the fashion with skalds to +praise most those in whose presence they are standing, yet no one +would dare to relete to a chief what he, and all those who heard +it, knew to be a false and imaginary, not a true account of his +deeds; because that would be mockery, not praise. + +OF THE PRIEST ARE FRODE + +The priest Are Frode (the learned), a son of Thorgils the son of +Geller, was the first man in this country who wrote down in the +Norse language narratives of events both old and new. In the +beginning of his book he wrote principally about the first +settlements in Iceland, the laws and government, and next of the +lagmen, and how long each had administered the law; and he +reckoned the years at first, until the time when Christianity was +introduced into Iceland, and afterwards reckoned from that to his +own times. To this he added many other subjects, such as the +lives and times of kings of Norway and Denmark, and also of +England; beside accounts of great events which have taken place +in this country itself. His narratives are considered by many +men of knowledge to be the most remarkable of all; because he was +a man of good understanding, and so old that his birth was as far +back as the year after Harald Sigurdson's fall. He wrote, as he +himself says, the lives and times of the kings of Norway from the +report of Od Kolson, a grandson of Hal of Sida. Od again took +his information from Thorgeir Afradskol, who was an intelligent +man, and so old that when Earl Hakon the Great was killed he was +dwelling at Nidarnes -- the same place at which King Olaf +Trygvason afterwards laid the foundation of the merchant town of +Nidaros (i.e., Throndhjem) which is now there. The priest Are +came, when seven years old, to Haukadal to Hal Thorarinson, and +was there fourteen years. Hal was a man of great knowledge and +of excellent memory; and he could even remember being baptized, +when he was three years old, by the priest Thanghrand, the year +before Christianity was established by law in Iceland. Are was +twelve years of age when Bishop Isleif died, and at his death +eighty years had elapsed since the fall of Olaf Trygvason. Hal +died nine years later than Bishop Isleif, and had attained nearly +the age of ninety-four years. Hal had traded between the two +countries, and had enjoyed intercourse with King Olaf the Saint, +by which he had gained greatly in reputation, and he had become +well acquainted with the kingdom of Norway. He had fixed his +residence in Haukadal when he was thirty years of age, and he had +dwelt there sixty-four years, as Are tells us. Teit, a son of +Bishop Isleif, was fostered in the house of Hal at Haukadal, and +afterwards dwelt there himself. He taught Are the priest, and +gave him information about many circumstances which Are +afterwards wrote down. Are also got many a piece of information +from Thurid, a daughter of the gode Snorre. She was wise and +intelligent, and remembered her father Snorre, who was nearly +thirty-five years of age when Christianity was introduced into +Iceland, and died a year after King Olaf the Saint's fall. So it +is not wonderful that Are the priest had good information about +ancient events both here in Iceland, and abroad, being a man +anxious for information, intelligent and of excellent memory, and +having besides learned much from old intelligent persons. But +the songs seem to me most reliable if they are sung correctly, +and judiciously interpreted. + + + +HALFDAN THE BLACK SAGA. + + +PRELIMINARY REMARKS. + +Of this saga there are other versions found in "Fagrskinna" and +in "Flateyjarbok". The "Flateyjarbok" version is to a great +extent a copy of Snorre. The story about Halfdan's dream is +found both in "Fagrskinna" and in "Flateyjarbok". The +probability is that both Snorre and the author of "Fagrskinna" +must have transcribed the same original text. -- Ed. + + + +1. HALFDAN FIGHTS WITH GANDALF AND SIGTRYG. + +Halfdan was a year old when his father was killed, and his mother +Asa set off immediately with him westwards to Agder, and set +herself there in the kingdom which her father Harald had +possessed. Halfdan grew up there, and soon became stout and +strong; and, by reason of his black hair, was called Halfdan the +Black. When he was eighteen years old he took his kingdom in +Agder, and went immediately to Vestfold, where he divided that +kingdom, as before related, with his brother Olaf. The same +autumn he went with an army to Vingulmark against King Gandalf. +They had many battles, and sometimes one, sometimes the other +gained the victory; but at last they agreed that Halfdan should +have half of Vingulmark, as his father Gudrod had had it before. +Then King Halfdan proceeded to Raumarike, and subdued it. King +Sigtryg, son of King Eystein, who then had his residence in +Hedemark, and who had subdued Raumarike before, having heard of +this, came out with his army against King Halfdan, and there was +great battle, in which King Halfdan was victorious; and just as +King Sigtryg and his troops were turning about to fly, an arrow +struck him under the left arm, and he fell dead. Halfdan then +laid the whole of Raumarike under his power. King Eystein's +second son, King Sigtryg's brother, was also called Eystein, and +was then king in Hedemark. As soon as Halfdan had returned to +Vestfold, King Eystein went out with his army to Raumarike, and +laid the whole country in subjection to him + + + +2. BATTLE BETWEEN HALFDAN AND EYSTEIN. + +When King Halfdan heard of these disturbances in Raumarike, he +again gathered his army together; and went out against King +Eystein. A battle took place between them, and Halfdan gained +the victory, and Eystein fled up to Hedemark, pursued by Halfdan. +Another battle took place, in which Halfdan was again victorious; +and Eystein fled northwards, up into the Dales to the herse +Gudbrand. There he was strengthened with new people, and in +winter he went towards Hedemark, and met Halfdan the Black upon a +large island which lies in the Mjosen lake. There a great battle +was fought, and many people on both sides were slain, but Halfdan +won the victory. There fell Guthorm, the son of the herse +Gudbrand, who was one of the finest men in the Uplands. Then +Eystein fled north up the valley, and sent his relation Halvard +Skalk to King Halfdan to beg for peace. On consideration of their +relationship, King Halfdan gave King Eystein half of Hedemark, +which he and his relations had held before; but kept to himself +Thoten, and the district called Land. He likewise appropriated +to himself Hadeland, and thus became a mighty king. + + + +3. HALFDAN'S MARRIAGE + +Halfdan the Black got a wife called Ragnhild, a daughter of +Harald Gulskeg (Goldbeard), who was a king in Sogn. They had a +son, to whom Harald gave his own name; and the boy was brought up +in Sogn, by his mother's father, King Harald. Now when this +Harald had lived out his days nearly, and was become weak, having +no son, he gave his dominions to his daughter's son Harald, and +gave him his title of king; and he died soon after. The same +winter his daughter Ragnhild died; and the following spring the +young Harald fell sick and died at ten years of age. As soon as +Halfdan the Black heard of his son's death, he took the road +northwards to Sogn with a great force, and was well received. He +claimed the heritage and dominion after his son; and no +opposition being made, he took the whole kingdom. Earl Atle +Mjove (the Slender), who was a friend of King Halfdan, came to +him from Gaular; and the king set him over the Sogn district, to +judge in the country according to the country's laws, and collect +scat upon the king's account. Thereafter King Halfdan proceeded +to his kingdom in the Uplands. + + + +4. HALFDAN'S STRIFE WITH GANDALF'S SONS. + +In autumn, King Halfdan proceeded to Vingulmark. One night when +he was there in guest quarters, it happened that about midnight a +man came to him who had been on the watch on horseback, and told +him a war force was come near to the house. The king instantly +got up, ordered his men to arm themselves, and went out of the +house and drew them up in battle order. At the same moment, +Gandalf's sons, Hysing and Helsing, made their appearance with a +large army. There was a great battle; but Halfdan being +overpowered by the numbers of people fled to the forest, leaving +many of his men on this spot. His foster-father, Olver Spake +(the Wise), fell here. The people now came in swarms to King +Halfdan, and he advanced to seek Gandalf's sons. They met at +Eid, near Lake Oieren, and fought there. Hysing and Helsing +fell, and their brother Hake saved himself by flight. King +Halfdan then took possession of the whole of Vingulmark, and Hake +fled to Alfheimar. + + + +5. HALFDAN'S MARRIAGE WITH HJORT'S DAUGHTER. + +Sigurd Hjort was the name of a king in Ringerike, who was stouter +and stronger than any other man, and his equal could not be seen +for a handsome appearance. His father was Helge Hvasse (the +Sharp); and his mother was Aslaug, a daughter of Sigurd the worm- +eyed, who again was a son of Ragnar Lodbrok. It is told of +Sigurd that when he was only twelve years old he killed in single +combat the berserk Hildebrand, and eleven others of his comrades; +and many are the deeds of manhood told of him in a long saga +about his feats. Sigurd had two children, one of whom was a +daughter, called Ragnhild, then twenty years of age, and an +excellent brisk girl. Her brother Guthorm was a youth. It is +related in regard to Sigurd's death that he had a custom of +riding out quite alone in the uninhabited forest to hunt the wild +beasts that are hurtful to man, and he was always very eager at +this sport. One day he rode out into the forest as usual, and +when he had ridden a long way he came out at a piece of cleared +land near to Hadeland. There the berserk Hake came against him +with thirty men, and they fought. Sigurd Hjort fell there, after +killing twelve of Hake's men; and Hake himself lost one hand, and +had three other wounds. Then Hake and his men rode to Sigurd's +house, where they took his daughter Ragnhild and her brother +Guthorm, and carried them, with much property and valuable +articles, home to Hadeland, where Hake had many great farms. He +ordered a feast to be prepared, intending to hold his wedding +with Ragnhild; but the time passed on account of his wounds, +which healed slowly; and the berserk Hake of Hadeland had to keep +his bed, on account of his wounds, all the autumn and beginning +of winter. Now King Halfdan was in Hedemark at the Yule +entertainments when he heard this news; and one morning early, +when the king was dressed, he called to him Harek Gand, and told +him to go over to Hadeland, and bring him Ragnhild, Sigurd +Hjort's daughter. Harek got ready with a hundred men, and made +his journey so that they came over the lake to Hake's house in +the grey of the morning, and beset all the doors and stairs of +the places where the house-servants slept. Then they broke into +the sleeping-room where Hake slept, took Ragnhild, with her +brother Guthorm, and all the goods that were there, and set fire +to the house-servants' place, and burnt all the people in it. +Then they covered over a magnificent waggon, placed Ragnhild and +Guthorm in it, and drove down upon the ice. Hake got up and went +after them a while; but when he came to the ice on the lake, he +turned his sword-hilt to the ground and let himself fall upon the +point, so that the sword went through him. He was buried under a +mound on the banks of the lake. When King Halfdan, who was very +quick of sight, saw the party returning over the frozen lake, and +with a covered waggon, he knew that their errand was accomplished +according to his desire. Thereupon he ordered the tables to be +set out, and sent people all round in the neighbourhood to invite +plenty of guests; and the same day there was a good feast which +was also Halfdan's marriage-feast with Ragnhild, who became a +great queen. Ragnhild's mother was Thorny, a daughter of +Klakharald king in Jutland, and a sister of Thrye Dannebod who +was married to the Danish king, Gorm the Old, who then ruled over +the Danish dominions. + + + +6. OF RAGNHILD'S DREAM. + +Ragnhild, who was wise and intelligent, dreamt great dreams. She +dreamt, for one, that she was standing out in her herb-garden, +and she took a thorn out of her shift; but while she was holding +the thorn in her hand it grew so that it became a great tree, one +end of which struck itself down into the earth, and it became +firmly rooted; and the other end of the tree raised itself so +high in the air that she could scarcely see over it, and it +became also wonderfully thick. The under part of the tree was +red with blood, but the stem upwards was beautifully green and +the branches white as snow. There were many and great limbs to +the tree, some high up, others low down; and so vast were the +tree's branches that they seemed to her to cover all Norway, and +even much more. + + + +7. OF HALFDAN'S DREAM. + +King Halfdan never had dreams, which appeared to him an +extraordinary circumstance; and he told it to a man called +Thorleif Spake (the Wise), and asked him what his advice was +about it. Thorleif said that what he himself did, when he wanted +to have any revelation by dream, was to take his sleep in a +swine-sty, and then it never failed that he had dreams. The king +did so, and the following dream was revealed to him. He thought +he had the most beautiful hair, which was all in ringlets; some +so long as to fall upon the ground, some reaching to the middle +of his legs, some to his knees, some to his loins or the middle +of his sides, some to his neck, and some were only as knots +springing from his head. These ringlets were of various colours; +but one ringlet surpassed all the others in beauty, lustre, and +size. This dream he told to Thorleif, who interpreted it thus: +-- There should be a great posterity from him, and his +descendants should rule over countries with great, but not all +with equally great, honour; but one of his race should be more +celebrated than all the others. It was the opinion of people +that this ringlet betokened King Olaf the Saint. + +King Halfdan was a wise man, a man of truth and uprightness -- +who made laws, observed them himself, and obliged others to +observe them. And that violence should not come in place of the +laws, he himself fixed the number of criminal acts in law, and +the compensations, mulcts, or penalties, for each case, according +to every one's birth and dignity (1). + +Queen Ragnhild gave birth to a son, and water was poured over +him, and the name of Harald given him, and he soon grew stout and +remarkably handsome. As he grew up he became very expert at all +feats, and showed also a good understanding. He was much beloved +by his mother, but less so by his father. + + +ENDNOTES: + +(1) The penalty, compensation, or manbod for every injury, due + the party injured, or to his family and next of kin if the + injury was the death or premeditated murder of the party, + appears to have been fixed for every rank and condition, + from the murder of the king down to the maiming or beating a + man's cattle or his slave. A man for whom no compensation + was due was a dishonored person, or an outlaw. It appears + to have been optional with the injured party, or his kin if + he had been killed, to take the mulct or compensation, or to + refuse it, and wait for an opportunity of taking vengeance + for the injury on the party who inflicted it, or on his kin. + A part of each mulct or compensation was due to the king; + and, these fines or penalties appear to have constituted a + great proportion of the king's revenues, and to have been + settled in the Things held in every district for + administering the law with the lagman. -- L. + + + +8. HALFDAN'S MEAT VANISHES AT A FEAST + +King Halfdan was at a Yule-feast in Hadeland, where a wonderful +thing happened one Yule evening. When the great number of guests +assembled were going to sit down to table, all the meat and all +the ale disappeared from the table. The king sat alone very +confused in mind; all the others set off, each to his home, in +consternation. That the king might come to some certainty about +what had occasioned this event, he ordered a Fin to be seized who +was particularly knowing, and tried to force him to disclose the +truth; but however much he tortured the man, he got nothing out +of him. The Fin sought help particularly from Harald, the king's +son, and Harald begged for mercy for him, but in vain. Then +Harald let him escape against the king's will, and accompanied +the man himself. On their journey they came to a place where the +man's chief had a great feast, and it appears they were well +received there. When they had been there until spring, the chief +said, "Thy father took it much amiss that in winter I took some +provisions from him, -- now I will repay it to thee by a joyful +piece of news: thy father is dead; and now thou shalt return +home, and take possession of the whole kingdom which he had, and +with it thou shalt lay the whole kingdom of Norway under thee." + + + +9. HALFDAN S DEATH. + +Halfdan the Black was driving from a feast in Hadeland, and it so +happened that his road lay over the lake called Rand. It was in +spring, and there was a great thaw. They drove across the bight +called Rykinsvik, where in winter there had been a pond broken in +the ice for cattle to drink at, and where the dung had fallen +upon the ice the thaw had eaten it into holes. Now as the king +drove over it the ice broke, and King Halfdan and many with him +perished. He was then forty years old. He had been one of the +most fortunate kings in respect of good seasons. The people +thought so much of him, that when his death was known and his +body was floated to Ringerike to bury it there, the people of +most consequence from Raumarike, Vestfold, and Hedemark came to +meet it. All desired to take the body with them to bury it in +their own district, and they thought that those who got it would +have good crops to expect. At last it was agreed to divide the +body into four parts. The head was laid in a mound at Stein in +Ringerike, and each of the others took his part home and laid it +in a mound; and these have since been called Halfdan's Mounds. + + + +HARALD HARFAGER'S SAGA. + + +1. HARALD'S STRIFE WITH HAKE AND HIS FATHER GANDALF. + +Harald (1) was but ten years old when he succeeded his father +(Halfdan the Black). He became a stout, strong, and comely man, +and withal prudent and manly. His mother's brother, Guthorm, was +leader of the hird, at the head of the government, and commander +(`hertogi') of the army. After Halfdan the Black's death, many +chiefs coveted the dominions he had left. Among these King +Gandalf was the first; then Hogne and Frode, sons of Eystein, +king of Hedemark; and also Hogne Karuson came from Ringerike. +Hake, the son of Gandalf, began with an expedition of 300 men +against Vestfold, marched by the main road through some valleys, +and expected to come suddenly upon King Harald; while his father +Gandalf sat at home with his army, and prepared to cross over the +fiord into Vestfold. When Duke Guthorm heard of this he gathered +an army, and marched up the country with King Harald against +Hake. They met in a valley, in which they fought a great battle, +and King Harald was victorious; and there fell King Hake and most +of his people. The place has since been called Hakadale. Then +King Harald and Duke Guthorm turned back, but they found King +Gandalf had come to Vestfold. The two armies marched against +each other, and met, and had a great battle; and it ended in King +Gandalf flying, after leaving most of his men dead on the spot, +and in that state he came back to his kingdom. Now when the sons +of King Eystein in Hedemark heard the news, they expected the war +would come upon them, and they sent a message to Hogne Karuson +and to Herse Gudbrand, and appointed a meeting with them at +Ringsaker in Hedemark. + +ENDNOTES: +(1) The first twenty chapters of this saga refer to Harald's + youth and his conquest of Norway. This portion of the saga + is of great importance to the Icelanders, as the settlement + of their Isle was a result of Harald's wars. The second + part of the saga (chaps. 21-46) treats of the disputes + between Harald's sons, of the jarls of Orkney, and of the + jarls of More. With this saga we enter the domain of + history. -- Ed. + + + +2. KING HARALD OVERCOMES FIVE KINGS. + +After the battle King Harald and Guthorm turned back, and went +with all the men they could gather through the forests towards +the Uplands. They found out where the Upland kings had appointed +their meeting-place, and came there about the time of midnight, +without the watchmen observing them until their army was before +the door of the house in which Hogne Karuson was, as well as that +in which Gudbrand slept. They set fire to both houses; but King +Eystein's two sons slipped out with their men, and fought for a +while, until both Hogne and Frode fell. After the fall of these +four chiefs, King Harald, by his relation Guthorm's success and +powers, subdued Hedemark, Ringerike, Gudbrandsdal, Hadeland, +Thoten, Raumarike, and the whole northern part of Vingulmark. +King Harald and Guthorm had thereafter war with King Gandalf, and +fought several battles with him; and in the last of them King +Gandalf was slain, and King Harald took the whole of his kingdom +as far south as the river Raum. + + + +3. OF GYDA, DAUGHTER OF EIRIE. + +King Harald sent his men to a girl called Gyda, daughter of King +Eirik of Hordaland, who was brought up as foster-child in the +house of a great bonde in Valdres. The king wanted her for his +concubine; for she was a remarkably handsome girl, but of high +spirit withal. Now when the messengers came there, and delivered +their errand to the girl, she answered, that she would not throw +herself away even to take a king for her husband, who had no +greater kingdom to rule over than a few districts. "And +methinks," said she, "it is wonderful that no king here in Norway +will make the whole country subject to him, in the same way as +Gorm the Old did in Denmark, or Eirik at Upsala." The messengers +thought her answer was dreadfully haughty, and asked what she +thought would come of such an answer; for Harald was so mighty a +man, that his invitation was good enough for her. But although +she had replied to their errand differently from what they +wished, they saw no chance, on this occasion, of taking her with +them against her will; so they prepared to return. When they +were ready, and the people followed them out, Gyda said to the +messengers, "Now tell to King Harald these my words. I will only +agree to be his 1awful wife upon the condition that he shall +first, for my sake, subject to himself the whole of Norway, so +that he may rule over that kingdom as freely and fully as King +Eirik over the Swedish dominions, or King Gorm over Denmark; for +only then, methinks, can he be called the king of a people." + + + +4. KING HARALD'S VOW. + +Now came the messengers back to King Harald, bringing him the +words of the girl, and saying she was so bold and foolish that +she well deserved that the king should send a greater troop of +people for her, and inflict on her some disgrace. Then answered +the king, "This girl has not spoken or done so much amiss that +she should be punished, but rather she should be thanked for her +words. She has reminded me," said he, "of something which it +appears to me wonderful I did not think of before. And now," +added he, "I make the solemn vow, and take God to witness, who +made me and rules over all things, that never shall I clip or +comb my hair until I have subdued the whole of Norway, with scat +(1), and duties, and domains; or if not, have died in the +attempt." Guthorm thanked the king warmly for his vow; adding, +that it was royal work to fulfil royal words. + +ENDNOTES: +(1) Scat was a land-tax, paid to the king in money, malt, meal, + or flesh-meat, from all lands, and was adjudged by the Thing + to each king upon his accession, and being proposed and + accepted as king. + + + +5. THE BATTLE IN ORKADAL. + +After this the two relations gather together a great force, and +prepare for an expedition to the Uplands, and northwards up the +valley (Gudbrandsdal), and north over Dovrefjeld; and when the +king came down to the inhabited land he ordered all the men to be +killed, and everything wide around to be delivered to the flames. +And when the people came to know this, they fled every one where +he could; some down the country to Orkadal, some to Gaulardal, +some to the forests. But some begged for peace, and obtained it, +on condition of joining the king and becoming his men. He met no +opposition until he came to Orkadal. There a crowd of people had +assembled, and he had his first battle with a king called +Gryting. Harald won the victory, and King Gryting was made +prisoner, and most of his people killed. He took service himself +under the king, and swore fidelity to him. Thereafer all the +people in Orkadal district went under King Harald, and became his +men. + + + +6. KING HARALD S LAWS FOR LAND PROPERTY. + +King Harald made this law over all the lands he conquered, that +all the udal property should belong to him; and that the bondes, +both great and small, should pay him land dues for their +possessions. Over every district he set an earl to judge +according to the law of the land and to justice, and also to +collect the land dues and the fines; and for this each earl +received a third part of the dues, and services, and fines, for +the support of his table and other expenses. Each earl had under +him four or more herses, each of whom had an estate of twenty +marks yearly income bestowed on him and was bound to support +twenty men-at-arms, and the earl sixty men, at their own +expenses. The king had increased the land dues and burdens so +much, that each of his earls had greater power and income than +the kings had before; and when that became known at Throndhjem, +many great men joined the king and took his service. + + + +7. BATTLE IN GAULARDAL. + +It is told that Earl Hakon Grjotgardson came to King Harald from +Yrjar, and brought a great crowd of men to his service. Then +King Harald went into Gaulardal, and had a great battle, in which +he slew two kings, and conquered their dominions; and these were +Gaulardal district and Strind district. He gave Earl Hakon +Strind district to rule over as earl. King Harald then proceeded +to Stjoradal, and had a third battle, in which he gained the +victory, and took that district also. There upon the Throndhjem +people assembled, and four kings met together with their troops. +The one ruled over Veradal, the second over Skaun, third over the +Sparbyggja district, and the fourth over Eyin Idre (Inderoen); +and this latter had also Eyna district. These four kings marched +with their men against King Harald, but he won the battle; and +some of these kings fell, and some fled. In all, King Harald +fought at the least eight battles, and slew eight kings, in the +Throndhjem district, and laid the whole of it under him. + + + +8. HARALD SEIZES NAUMUDAL DISTRICT. + +North in Naumudal were two brothers, kings, -- Herlaug and +Hrollaug; and they had been for three summers raising a mound or +tomb of stone and lime and of wood. Just as the work was +finished, the brothers got the news that King Harald was coming +upon them with his army. Then King Herlaug had a great quantity +of meat and drink brought into the mound, and went into it +himself, with eleven companions, and ordered the mound to be +covered up. King Hrollaug, on the contrary, went upon the summit +of the mound, on which the kings were wont to sit, and made a +throne to be erected, upon which he seated himself. Then he +ordered feather-beds to be laid upon the bench below, on which +the earls were wont to be seated, and threw himself down from his +high seat or throne into the earl's seat, giving himself the +title of earl. Now Hrollaug went to meet King Harald, gave up to +him his whole kingdom, offered to enter into his service, and +told him his whole proceeding. Then took King Harald a sword, +fastened it to Hrollaug's belt, bound a shield to his neck, and +made him thereupon an earl, and led him to his earl's seat; and +therewith gave him the district Naumudal, and set him as earl +over it ((A.D. 866)). (1) + +ENDNOTES: +(1) Before writing was in general use, this symbolical way of + performing all important legal acts appears to have entered + into the jurisprudence of all savage nations; and according + to Gibbon, chap. 44, "the jurisprudence of the first Romans + exhibited the scenes of a pantomime; the words were adapted + to the gestures, and the slightest error or neglect in the + forms of proceeding was sufficient to annul the substance of + the fairest claims." -- Ed. + + + +9. KING HARALD'S HOME AFFAIRS. + +King Harald then returned to Throndhjem, where he dwelt during +the winter, and always afterwards called it his home. He fixed +here his head residence, which is called Lade. This winter he +took to wife Asa, a daughter of Earl Hakon Grjotgardson, who then +stood in great favour and honour with the king. In spring the +king fitted out his ships. In winter he had caused a great +frigate (a dragon) to be built, and had it fitted-out in the most +splendid way, and brought his house-troops and his berserks on +board. The forecastle men were picked men, for they had the +king's banner. From the stem to the mid-hold was called rausn, +or the fore-defence; and there were the berserks. Such men only +were received into King Harald's house-troop as were remarkable +for strength, courage, and all kinds of dexterity; and they alone +got place in his ship, for he had a good choice of house-troops +from the best men of every district. King Harald had a great +army, many large ships, and many men of might followed him. +Hornklofe, in his poem called "Glymdrapa", tells of this; and +also that King Harald had a battle with the people of Orkadal, at +Opdal forest, before he went upon this expedition. + + "O'er the broad heath the bowstrings twang, + While high in air the arrows sang. + The iron shower drives to flight + The foeman from the bloody fight. + The warder of great Odin's shrine, + The fair-haired son of Odin's line, + Raises the voice which gives the cheer, + First in the track of wolf or bear. + His master voice drives them along + To Hel -- a destined, trembling throng; + And Nokve's ship, with glancing sides, + Must fly to the wild ocean's tides. -- + Must fly before the king who leads + Norse axe-men on their ocean steeds." + + + +10. BATTLE AT SOLSKEL + +King Harald moved out with his army from Throndhjem, and went +southwards to More. Hunthiof was the name of the king who ruled +over the district of More. Solve Klofe was the name of his son, +and both were great warriors. King Nokve, who ruled over +Raumsdal, was the brother of Solve's mother. Those chiefs +gathered a great force when they heard of King Harald, and came +against him. They met at Solskel, and there was a great battle, +which was gained by King Harald (A.D. 867). Hornklofe tells of +this battle: -- + + "Thus did the hero known to fame, + The leader of the shields, whose name + Strikes every heart with dire dismay, + Launch forth his war-ships to the fray. + Two kings he fought; but little strife + Was needed to cut short their life. + A clang of arms by the sea-shore, -- + And the shields' sound was heard no more." + +The two kings were slain, but Solve escaped by flight; and King +Harald laid both districts under his power. He stayed here long +in summer to establish law and order for the country people, and +set men to rule them, and keep them faithful to him; and in +autumn he prepared to return northwards to Throndhjem. Ragnvald +Earl of More, a son of Eystein Glumra, had the summer before +become one of Harald's men; and the king set him as chief over +these two districts, North More and Raumsdal; strengthened him +both with men of might and bondes, and gave him the help of +ships to defend the coast against enemies. He was called +Ragnvald the Mighty, or the Wise; and people say both names +suited him well. King Harald came back to Throndhjem about +winter. + + + +11. FALL OF KINGS ARNVID AND AUDBJORN. + +The following spring (A.D. 868) King Harald raised a great force +in Throndhjem, and gave out that he would proceed to South More. +Solve Klofe had passed the winter in his ships of war, plundering +in North More, and had killed many of King Harald's men; +pillaging some places, burning others, and making great ravage; +but sometimes he had been, during the winter, with his friend +King Arnvid in South More. Now when he heard that King Harald +was come with ships and a great army, he gathered people, and was +strong in men-at-arms; for many thought they had to take +vengeance of King Harald. Solve Klofe went southwards to +Firdafylke (the Fjord district), which King Audbjorn ruled over, +to ask him to help, and join his force to King Arnvid's and his +own. "For," said he, "it is now clear that we all have but one +course to take; and that is to rise, all as one man, against King +Harald, for we have strength enough, and fate must decide the +victory; for as to the other condition of becoming his servants, +that is no condition for us, who are not less noble than Harald. +My father thought it better to fall in battle for his kingdom, +than to go willingly into King Harald's service, or not to abide +the chance of weapons like the Naumudal kings." King Solve's +speech was such that King Audbjorn promised his help, and +gathered a great force together and went with it to King Arnvid, +and they had a great army. Now, they got news that King Harald +was come from the north, and they met within Solskel. And it was +the custom to lash the ships together, stem to stem; so it was +done now. King Harald laid his ship against King Arnvid's, and +there was the sharpest fight, and many men fell on both sides. +At last King Harald was raging with anger, and went forward to +the fore-deck, and slew so dreadfully that all the forecastle men +of Arnvid's ship were driven aft of the mast, and some fell. +Thereupon Harald boarded the ship, and King Arnvid's men tried to +save themselves by flight, and he himself was slain in his ship. +King Audbjorn also fell; but Solve fled. So says Hornklofe: -- + + "Against the hero's shield in vain + The arrow-storm fierce pours its rain. + The king stands on the blood-stained deck, + Trampling on many a stout foe's neck; + And high above the dinning stound + Of helm and axe, and ringing sound + Of blade and shield, and raven's cry, + Is heard his shout of `Victory!'" + +Of King Harald's men, fell his earls Asgaut and Asbjorn, together +with his brothers-in-law, Grjotgard and Herlaug, the sons of Earl +Hakon of Lade. Solve became afterwards a great sea-king, and +often did great damage in King Harald's dominions. + + + +12. KING VEMUND BURNT TO DEATH. + +After this battle (A.D. 868) King Harald subdued South More; but +Vemund, King Audbjorn's brother, still had Firdafylke. It was +now late in harvest, and King Harald's men gave him the counsel +not to proceed south-wards round Stad. Then King Harald set Earl +Ragnvald over South and North More and also Raumsdal, and he had +many people about him. King Harald returned to Throndhjem. The +same winter (A.D. 869) Ragnvald went over Eid, and southwards to +the Fjord district. There he heard news of King Vemund, and came +by night to a place called Naustdal, where King Vemund was living +in guest-quarters. Earl Ragnvald surrounded the house in which +they were quartered, and burnt the king in it, together with +ninety men. The came Berdlukare to Earl Ragnvald with a complete +armed long-ship, and they both returned to More. The earl took +all the ships Vemund had, and all the goods he could get hold of. +Berdlukare proceeded north to Throndhjem to King Harald, and +became his man; and dreadful berserk he was. + + + +13. DEATH OF EARLS HAKON, AND ATLE MJOVE. + +The following spring (A.D. 869) King Harald went southwards with +his fleet along the coast, and subdued Firdafylke. Then he +sailed eastward along the land until he came to Vik; but he left +Earl Hakon Grjotgardson behind, and set him over the Fjord +district. Earl Hakon sent word to Earl Atle Mjove that he should +leave Sogn district, and be earl over Gaular district, as he had +been before, alleging that King Harald had given Sogn district to +him. Earl Atle sent word that he would keep both Sogn district +and Gaular district, until he met King Harald. The two earls +quarreled about this so long, that both gathered troops. They +met at Fialar, in Stavanger fiord, and had a great battle, in +which Earl Hakon fell, and Earl Atle got a mortal wound, and his +men carried him to the island of Atley, where he died. So says +Eyvind Skaldaspiller: -- + + "He who stood a rooted oak, + Unshaken by the swordsman's stroke, + Amidst the whiz of arrows slain, + Has fallen upon Fjalar's plain. + There, by the ocean's rocky shore, + The waves are stained with the red gore + Of stout Earl Hakon Grjotgard's son, + And of brave warriors many a one." + + + +14. HARALD AND THE SWEDISH KING EIRIK. + +King Harald came with his fleet eastward to Viken and landed at +Tunsberg, which was then a trading town. He had then been four +years in Throndhjem, and in all that time had not been in Viken. +Here he heard the news that Eirik Eymundson, king of Sweden, had +laid under him Vermaland, and was taking scat or land-tax from +all the forest settlers; and also that he called the whole +country north to Svinasund, and west along the sea, West +Gautland; and which altogether he reckoned to his kingdom, and +took land-tax from it. Over this country he had set an earl, by +name Hrane Gauzke, who had the earldom between Svinasund and the +Gaut river, and was a mighty earl. And it was told to King +Harald that the Swedish king said he would not rest until he had +as great a kingdom in Viken as Sigurd Hring, or his son Ragnar +Lodbrok, had possessed; and that was Raumarike and Vestfold, all +the way to the isle Grenmar, and also Vingulmark, and all that +lay south of it. In all these districts many chiefs, and many +other people, had given obedience to the Swedish king. King +Harald was very angry at this, and summoned the bondes to a Thing +at Fold, where he laid an accusation against them for treason +towards him. Some bondes defended themselves from the +accusation, some paid fines, some were punished. He went thus +through the whole district during the summer, and in harvest he +did the same in Raumarike, and laid the two districts under his +power. Towards winter he heard that Eirik king of Sweden was, +with his court, going about in Vermaland in guest-quarters. + + + +15. HARALD AT A FEAST OF THE PEASANT AKE. + +King Harald takes his way across the Eid forest eastward, and +comes out in Vermaland, where he also orders feasts to be +prepared for himself. There was a man by name Ake, who was the +greatest of the bondes of Vermaland, very rich, and at that time +very aged. He sent men to King Harald, and invited him to a +feast, and the king promised to come on the day appointed. Ake +invited also King Eirik to a feast, and appointed the same day. +Ake had a great feasting hall, but it was old; and he made a new +hall, not less than the old one, and had it ornamented in the +most splendid way. The new hall he had hung with new hangings, +but the old had only its old ornaments. Now when the kings came +to the feast, King Eirik with his court was taken into the old +hall; but Harald with his followers into the new. The same +difference was in all the table furniture, and King Eirik and his +men had the old-fashioned vessels and horns, but all gilded and +splendid; while King Harald and his men had entirely new vessels +and horns adorned with gold, all with carved figures, and shining +like glass; and both companies had the best of liquor. Ake the +bonde had formerly been King Halfdan the Black s man. Now when +daylight came, and the feast was quite ended, and the kings made +themselves ready for their journey, and the horses were saddled, +came Ake before King Harald, leading in his hand his son Ubbe, a +boy of twelve years of age, and said, "If the goodwill I have +shown to thee, sire, in my feast, be worth thy friendship, show +it hereafter to my son. I give him to thee now for thy service." +The king thanked him with many agreeable words for his friendly +entertainment, and promised him his full friendship in return. +Then Ake brought out great presents, which he gave to the king, +and they gave each other thereafter the parting kiss. Ake went +next to the Swedish king, who was dressed and ready for the road, +but not in the best humour. Ake gave to him also good and +valuable gifts; but the king answered only with few words, and +mounted his horse. Ake followed the king on the road and talked +with him. The road led through a wood which was near to the +house; and when Ake came to the wood, the king said to him, "How +was it that thou madest such a difference between me and King +Harald as to give him the best of everything, although thou +knowest thou art my man?" "I think" answered Ake, "that there +failed in it nothing, king, either to you or to your attendants, +in friendly entertainment at this feast. But that all the +utensils for your drinking were old, was because you are now old; +but King Harald is in the bloom of youth, and therefore I gave +him the new things. And as to my being thy man, thou art just as +much my man." On this the king out with his sword, and gave Ake +his deathwound. King Harald was ready now also to mount his +horse, and desired that Ake should be called. The people went to +seek him; and some ran up the road that King Eirik had taken, and +found Ake there dead. They came back, and told the news to King +Harald, and he bids his men to be up, and avenge Ake the bonde. +And away rode he and his men the way King Eirik had taken, until +they came in sight of each other. Each for himself rode as hard +as he could, until Eirik came into the wood which divides +Gautland and Vermaland. There King Harald wheels about, and +returns to Vermaland, and lays the country under him, and kills +King Eirik's men wheresoever he can find them. In winter King +Harald returned to Raumarike, and dwelt there a while. + + + +16. HARALD'S JOURNEY TO TUNSBERG. + +King Harald went out in winter to his ships at Tunsberg, rigged +them, and sailed away eastward over the fiord, and subjected all +Vingulmark to his dominion. All winter he was out with his +ships, and marauded in Ranrike; so says Thorbjorn Hornklofe: -- + + "The Norseman's king is on the sea, + Tho' bitter wintry cold it be. -- + On the wild waves his Yule keeps he. + When our brisk king can get his way, + He'll no more by the fireside stay + Than the young sun; he makes us play + The game of the bright sun-god Frey. + But the soft Swede loves well the fire + The well-stuffed couch, the doway glove, + And from the hearth-seat will not move." + +The Gautlanders gathered people together all over the country. + + + +17. THE BATTLE IN GAUTLAND. + +In spring, when the ice was breaking up, the Gautlanders drove +stakes into the Gaut river to hinder King Harald with his ships +from coming to the land. But King Harald laid his ships +alongside the stakes, and plundered the country, and burnt all +around; so says Horn klofe: -- + + "The king who finds a dainty feast, + For battle-bird and prowling beast, + Has won in war the southern land + That lies along the ocean's strand. + The leader of the helmets, he + Who leads his ships o'er the dark sea, + Harald, whose high-rigged masts appear + Like antlered fronts of the wild deer, + Has laid his ships close alongside + Of the foe's piles with daring pride." + +Afterwards the Gautlanders came down to the strand with a great +army, and gave battle to King Harald, and great was the fall of +men. But it was King Harald who gained the day. Thus says +Hornklofe: -- + + "Whistles the battle-axe in its swing + O'er head the whizzing javelins sing, + Helmet and shield and hauberk ring; + The air-song of the lance is loud, + The arrows pipe in darkening cloud; + Through helm and mail the foemen feel + The blue edge of our king's good steel + Who can withstand our gallant king? + The Gautland men their flight must wing." + + + +18. HRANE GAUZKE'S DEATH. + +King Harald went far and wide through Gautland, and many were the +battles he fought there on both sides of the river, and in +general he was victorious. In one of these battles fell Hrane +Gauzke; and then the king took his whole land north of the river +and west of the Veneren, and also Vermaland. And after he turned +back there-from, he set Duke Guthorm as chief to defend the +country, and left a great force with him. King Harald himself +went first to the Uplands, where he remained a while, and then +proceeded northwards over the Dovrefjeld to Throndhjem, where he +dwelt for a long time. Harald began to have children. By Asa he +had four sons. The eldest was Guthorm. Halfdan the Black and +Halfdan the White were twins. Sigfrod was the fourth. They were +all brought up in Throndhjem with all honour. + + + +19. BATTLE IN HAFERSFJORD. + +News came in from the south land that the people of Hordaland and +Rogaland, Agder and Thelemark, were gathering, and bringing +together ships and weapons, and a great body of men. The leaders +of this were Eirik king of Hordaland; Sulke king of Rogaland, and +his brother Earl Sote: Kjotve the Rich, king of Agder, and his +son Thor Haklang; and from Thelemark two brothers, Hroald Hryg +and Had the Hard. Now when Harald got certain news of this, he +assembled his forces, set his ships on the water, made himself +ready with his men, and set out southwards along the coast, +gathering many people from every district. King Eirik heard of +this when he same south of Stad; and having assembled all the men +he could expect, he proceeded southwards to meet the force which +he knew was coming to his help from the east. The whole met +together north of Jadar, and went into Hafersfjord, where King +Harald was waiting with his forces. A great battle began, which +was both hard and long; but at last King Harald gained the day. +There King Eirik fell, and King Sulke, with his brother Earl +Sote. Thor Haklang, who was a great berserk, had laid his ship +against King Harald's, and there was above all measure a +desperate attack, until Thor Haklang fell, and his whole ship was +cleared of men. Then King Kjotve fled to a little isle outside, +on which there was a good place of strength. Thereafter all his +men fled, some to their ships, some up to the land; and the +latter ran southwards over the country of Jadar. So says +Hornklofe, viz.: -- + + "Has the news reached you? -- have you heard + Of the great fight at Hafersfjord, + Between our noble king brave Harald + And King Kjotve rich in gold? + The foeman came from out the East, + Keen for the fray as for a feast. + A gallant sight it was to see + Their fleet sweep o'er the dark-blue sea: + Each war-ship, with its threatening throat + Of dragon fierce or ravenous brute (1) + Grim gaping from the prow; its wales + Glittering with burnished shields, (2) like scales + Its crew of udal men of war, + Whose snow-white targets shone from far + And many a mailed spearman stout + From the West countries round about, + English and Scotch, a foreign host, + And swordamen from the far French coast. + And as the foemen's ships drew near, + The dreadful din you well might hear + Savage berserks roaring mad, + And champions fierce in wolf-skins clad, (3) + Howling like wolves; and clanking jar + Of many a mail-clad man of war. + Thus the foe came; but our brave king + Taught them to fly as fast again. + For when he saw their force come o'er, + He launched his war-ships from the shore. + On the deep sea he launched his fleet + And boldly rowed the foe to meet. + Fierce was the shock, and loud the clang + Of shields, until the fierce Haklang, + The foeman's famous berserk, fell. + Then from our men burst forth the yell + Of victory, and the King of Gold + Could not withstand our Harald bold, + But fled before his flaky locks + For shelter to the island rocks. + All in the bottom of the ships + The wounded lay, in ghastly heaps; + Backs up and faces down they lay + Under the row-seats stowed away; + And many a warrior's shield, I ween + Might on the warrior's back be seen, + To shield him as he fled amain + From the fierce stone-storm's pelting rain. + The mountain-folk, as I've heard say, + Ne'er stopped as they ran from the fray, + Till they had crossed the Jadar sea, + And reached their homes -- so keen each soul + To drown his fright in the mead bowl." + + +ENDNOTES: +(1) The war-ships were called dragons, from being decorated with + the head of a dragon, serpent, or other wild animal; and the + word "draco" was adopted in the Latin of the Middle Ages to + denote a ship of war of the larger class. The snekke was + the cutter or smaller war-ship. -- L. +(2) The shields were hung over the side-rails of the ships. -- + L. +(3) The wolf-skin pelts were nearly as good as armour against + the sword. + + + +20. HARALD SUPREME SOVEREIGN IN NORWAY. + +After this battle King Harald met no opposition in Norway, for +all his opponents and greatest enemies were cut off. But some, +and they were a great multitude, fled out of the country, and +thereby great districts were peopled. Jemtaland and +Helsingjaland were peopled then, although some Norwegians had +already set up their habitation there. In the discontent that +King Harald seized on the lands of Norway, the out-countries of +Iceland and the Farey Isles were discovered and peopled. The +Northmen had also a great resort to Hjaltland (Shetland Isles) +and many men left Norway, flying the country on account of King +Harald, and went on viking cruises into the West sea. In winter +they were in the Orkney Islands and Hebrides; but marauded in +summer in Norway, and did great damage. Many, however, were the +mighty men who took service under King Harald, and became his +men, and dwelt in the land with him. + + + +21. HARALD'S MARRIAGE AND HIS CHILDREN. + +When King Harald had now become sole king over all Norway, he +remembered what that proud girl had said to him; so he sent men +to her, and had her brought to him, and took her to his bed. And +these were their children: Alof -- she was the eldest; then was +their son Hrorek; then Sigtryg, Frode, and Thorgils. King Harald +had many wives and many children. Among them he had one wife, +who was called Ragnhild the Mighty, a daughter of King Eirik, +from Jutland; and by her he had a son, Eirik Blood-axe. He was +also married to Svanhild, a daughter of Earl Eystein; and their +sons were Olaf Geirstadaalf, Bjorn and Ragnar Rykkil. Lastly, +King Harald married Ashild, a daughter of Hring Dagson, up in +Ringerike; and their children were, Dag, Hring, Gudrod Skiria, +and Ingigerd. It is told that King Harald put away nine wives +when he married Ragnhild the Mighty. So says Hornklofe: -- + + "Harald, of noblest race the head, + A Danish wife took to his bed; + And out of doors nine wives he thrust, -- + The mothers of the princes first. + Who 'mong Holmrygians hold command, + And those who rule in Hordaland. + And then he packed from out the place + The children born of Holge's race." + +King Harald's children were all fostered and brought up by their +relations on the mother's side. Guthorm the Duke had poured +water over King Harald's eldest son and had given him his own +name. He set the child upon his knee, and was his foster-father, +and took him with himself eastward to Viken, and there he was +brought up in the house of Guthorm. Guthorm ruled the whole land +in Viken and the Uplands, when King Harald was absent. + + + +22. KING HARALD'S VOYAGE TO THE WEST. + +King Harald heard that the vikings, who were in the West sea in +winter, plundered far and wide in the middle part of Norway; and +therefore every summer he made an expedition to search the isles +and out-skerries (1) on the coast. Wheresoever the vikings heard +of him they all took to flight, and most of them out into the +open ocean. At last the king grew weary of this work, and +therefore one summer he sailed with his fleet right out into the +West sea. First he came to Hjaltland (Shetland), and he slew all +the vikings who could not save themselves by flight. Then King +Harald sailed southwards, to the Orkney Islands, and cleared them +all of vikings. Thereafter he proceeded to the Sudreys +(Hebrides), plundered there, and slew many vikings who formerly +had had men-at-arms under them. Many a battle was fought, and +King Harald was always victorious. He then plundered far and +wide in Scotland itself, and had a battle there. When he was +come westward as far as the Isle of Man, the report of his +exploits on the land had gone before him; for all the inhabitants +had fled over to Scotland, and the island was left entirely bare +both of people and goods, so that King Harald and his men made no +booty when they landed. So says Hornklofe: -- + + "The wise, the noble king, great + Whose hand so freely scatters gold, + Led many a northern shield to war + Against the town upon the shore. + The wolves soon gathered on the sand + Of that sea-shore; for Harald's hand + The Scottish army drove away, + And on the coast left wolves a prey." + +In this war fell Ivar, a son of Ragnvald, Earl of More; and King +Harald gave Ragnvald, as a compensation for the loss, the Orkney +and Shetland isles, when he sailed from the West; but Ragnvald +immediately gave both these countries to his brother Sigurd, who +remained behind them; and King Harald, before sailing eastward, +gave Sigurd the earldom of them. Thorstein the Red, a son of +Olaf the White and of Aud the Wealthy, entered into partnership +with him; and after plundering in Scotland, they subdued +Caithness and Sutherland, as far as Ekkjalsbakke. Earl Sigurd +killed Melbridge Tooth, a Scotch earl, and hung his head to his +stirrup-leather; but the calf of his leg were scratched by the +teeth, which were sticking out from the head, and the wound +caused inflammation in his leg, of which the earl died, and he +was laid in a mound at Ekkjalsbakke. His son Guthorm ruled over +these countries for about a year thereafter, and died without +children. Many vikings, both Danes and Northmen, set themselves +down then in those countries. + + +ENDNOTES: +(1) Skerries are the uninhabited dry or halt-tide rocks of a + coast. -- L. + + + +23. HARALD HAS HIS HAIR CLIPPED. + +After King Harald had subdued the whole land, he was one day at +a feast in More, given by Earl Ragnvald. Then King Harald went +into a bath, and had his hair dressed. Earl Ragnvald now cut his +hair, which had been uncut and uncombed for ten years; and +therefore the king had been called Lufa (i.e., with rough matted +hair). But then Earl Ragnvald gave him the distinguishing name +-- Harald Harfager (i.e., fair hair); and all who saw him agreed +that there was the greatest truth in the surname, for he had the +most beautiful and abundant head of hair. + + + +24. ROLF GANGER DRIVEN INTO BANISHMENT. + +Earl Ragnvald was King Harald's dearest friend, and the king had +the greatest regard for him. He was married to Hild, a daughter +of Rolf Nefia, and their sons were Rolf and Thorer. Earl +Ragnvald had also three sons by concubines, -- the one called +Hallad, the second Einar, the third Hrollaug; and all three were +grown men when their brothers born in marriage were still +children Rolf became a great viking, and was of so stout a growth +that no horse could carry him, and wheresoever he went he must go +on foot; and therefore he was called Rolf Ganger. He plundered +much in the East sea. One summer, as he was coming from the +eastward on a viking's expedition to the coast of Viken, he +landed there and made a cattle foray. As King Harald happened, +just at that time, to be in Viken, he heard of it, and was in a +great rage; for he had forbid, by the greatest punishment, the +plundering within the bounds of the country. The king assembled +a Thing, and had Rolf declared an outlaw over all Norway. When +Rolf's mother, Hild heard of it she hastened to the king, and +entreated peace for Rolf; but the king was so enraged that here +entreaty was of no avail. Then Hild spake these lines: -- + + "Think'st thou, King Harald, in thy anger, + To drive away my brave Rolf Ganger + Like a mad wolf, from out the land? + Why, Harald, raise thy mighty hand? + Why banish Nefia's gallant name-son, + The brother of brave udal-men? + Why is thy cruelty so fell? + Bethink thee, monarch, it is ill + With such a wolf at wolf to play, + Who, driven to the wild woods away + May make the king's best deer his prey." + +Rolf Ganger went afterwards over sea to the West to the Hebrides, +or Sudreys; and at last farther west to Valland, where he +plundered and subdued for himself a great earldom, which he +peopled with Northmen, from which that land is called Normandy. +Rolf Ganger's son was William, father to Richard, and grandfather +to another Richard, who was the father of Robert Longspear, and +grandfather of William the Bastard, from whom all the following +English kings are descended. From Rolf Ganger also are descended +the earls in Normandy. Queen Ragnhild the Mighty lived three +years after she came to Norway; and, after her death, her son and +King Harald's was taken to the herse Thorer Hroaldson, and Eirik +was fostered by him. + + + +25. OF THE FIN SVASE AND KING HARALD. + +King Harald, one winter, went about in guest-quarters in the +Uplands, and had ordered a Christmas feast to be prepared for him +at the farm Thoptar. On Christmas eve came Svase to the door, +just as the king went to table, and sent a message to the king to +ask if he would go out with him. The king was angry at such a +message, and the man who had brought it in took out with him a +reply of the king's displeasure. But Svase, notwithstanding, +desired that his message should be delivered a second time; +adding to it, that he was the Fin whose hut the king had promised +to visit, and which stood on the other side of the ridge. Now +the king went out, and promised to go with him, and went over the +ridge to his hut, although some of his men dissuaded him. There +stood Snaefrid, the daughter of Svase, a most beautiful girl; and +she filled a cup of mead for the king. But he took hold both of +the cup and of her hand. Immediately it was as if a hot fire +went through his body; and he wanted that very night to take her +to his bed. But Svase said that should not be unless by main +force, if he did not first make her his lawful wife. Now King +Harald made Snaefrid his lawful wife, and loved her so +passionately that he forgot his kingdom, and all that belonged to +his high dignity. They had four sons: the one was Sigurd Hrise; +the others Halfdan Haleg, Gudrod Ljome and Ragnvald Rettilbeine. +Thereafter Snaefrid died; but her corpse never changed, but was +as fresh and red as when she lived. The king sat always beside +her, and thought she would come to life again. And so it went on +for three years that he was sorrowing over her death, and the +people over his delusion. At last Thorleif the Wise succeeded, +by his prudence, in curing him of his delusion by accosting him +thus: -- "It is nowise wonderful, king, that thou grievest over +so beautiful and noble a wife, and bestowest costly coverlets and +beds of down on her corpse, as she desired; but these honours +fall short of what is due, as she still lies in the same clothes. +It would be more suitable to raise her, and change her dress." +As soon as the body was raised in the bed all sorts of corruption +and foul smells came from it, and it was necessary in all haste +to gather a pile of wood and burn it; but before this could be +done the body turned blue, and worms, toads, newts, paddocks, and +all sorts of ugly reptiles came out of it, and it sank into +ashes. Now the king came to his understanding again, threw the +madness out of his mind, and after that day ruled his kingdom as +before. He was strengthened and made joyful by his subjects, and +his subjects by him and the country by both. + + + +26. OF THJODOLF OF HVIN, THE SKALD. + +After King Harald had experienced the cunning of the Fin woman, +he was so angry that he drove from him the sons he had with her, +and would not suffer them before his eyes. But one of them, +Gudrod Ljome, went to his foster-father Thjodolf of Hvin, and +asked him to go to the king, who was then in the Uplands; for +Thjodolf was a great friend of the king. And so they went, and +came to the king's house late in the evening, and sat down +together unnoticed near the door. The king walked up and down +the floor casting his eye along the benches; for he had a feast +in the house, and the mead was just mixed. The king then +murmured out these lines: -- + + "Tell me, ye aged gray-haired heroes, + Who have come here to seek repose, + Wherefore must I so many keep + Of such a set, who, one and all, + Right dearly love their souls to steep, + From morn till night, in the mead-bowl?" + +Then Thjodolf replies: -- + + "A certain wealthy chief, I think, + Would gladly have had more to drink + With him, upon one bloody day, + When crowns were cracked in our sword-play." + +Thjodolf then took off his hat, and the king recognised him, and +gave him a friendly reception. Thjodolf then begged the king not +to cast off his sons; "for they would with great pleasure have +taken a better family descent upon the mother's side, if the king +had given it to them." The king assented, and told him to take +Gudrod with him as formerly; and he sent Halfdan and Sigurd to +Ringerike, and Ragnvald to Hadaland, and all was done as the king +ordered. They grew up to be very clever men, very expert in all +exercises. In these times King Harald sat in peace in the land, +and the land enjoyed quietness and good crops. + + + +27. OF EARL TORFEINAR'S OBTAINING ORKNEY. + +When Earl Ragnvald in More heard of the death of his brother Earl +Sigurd, and that the vikings were in possession of the country, +he sent his son Hallad westward, who took the title of earl to +begin with, and had many men-at-arms with him. When he arrived +at the Orkney Islands, he established himself in the country; but +both in harvest, winter, and spring, the vikings cruised about +the isles plundering the headlands, and committing depredations +on the coast. Then Earl Hallad grew tired of the business, +resigned his earldom, took up again his rights as an allodial +owner, and afterwards returned eastward into Norway. When Earl +Ragnvald heard of this he was ill pleased with Hallad, and said +his son were very unlike their ancestors. Then said Einar, "I +have enjoyed but little honour among you, and have little +affection here to lose: now if you will give me force enough, I +will go west to the islands, and promise you what at any rate +will please you -- that you shall never see me again." Earl +Ragnvald replied, that he would be glad if he never came back; +"For there is little hope," said he, "that thou will ever be an +honour to thy friends, as all thy kin on thy mother's side are +born slaves." Earl Ragnvald gave Einar a vessel completely +equipped, and he sailed with it into the West sea in harvest. +When he came to the Orkney Isles, two vikings, Thorer Treskeg and +Kalf Skurfa, were in his way with two vessels. He attacked them +instantly, gained the battle, and slew the two vikings. Then +this was sung: -- + + "Then gave he Treskeg to the trolls, + Torfeinar slew Skurfa." + +He was called Torfeinar, because he cut peat for fuel, there +being no firewood, as in Orkney there are no woods. He +afterwards was earl over the islands, and was a mighty man. He +was ugly, and blind of an eye, yet very sharp-sighted withal. + + + +28. KING EIRIK EYMUNDSON'S DEATH. + +Duke Guthorm dwelt principally at Tunsberg, and governed the +whole of Viken when the king was not there. He defended the +land, which, at that time, was much plundered by the vikings. +There were disturbances also up in Gautland as long as King Eirik +Eymundson lived; but he died when King Harald Harfager had been +ten years king of all Norway. + + + +29.GUTHORM'S DEATH IN TUNSBERG. + +After Eirik, his son Bjorn was king of Svithjod for fifty years. +He was father of Eirik the Victorious, and of Olaf the father of +Styrbjorn. Guthorm died on a bed of sickness at Tunsberg, and +King Harald gave his son Guthorm the government of that part of +his dominions and made him chief of it. + + + +30. EARL RAGNVALD BURNT IN HIS HOUSE. + +When King Harald was forty years of age many of his sons were +well advanced, and indeed they all came early to strength and +manhood. And now they began to take it ill that the king would +not give them any part of the kingdom, but put earls into every +district; for they thought earls were of inferior birth to them. +Then Halfdan Haleg and Gudrod Ljome set off one spring with a +great force, and came suddenly upon Earl Ragnvald, earl of More, +and surrounded the house in which he was, and burnt him and sixty +men in it. Thereafter Halfdan took three long-ships, and fitted +them out, and sailed into the West sea; but Gudrod set himself +down in the land which Ragnvald formerly had. Now when King +Harald heard this he set out with a great force against Gudrod, +who had no other way left but to surrender, and he was sent to +Agder. King Harald then set Earl Ragnvald's son Thorer over +More, and gave him his daughter Alof, called Arbot, in marriage. +Earl Thorer, called the Silent, got the same territory his father +Earl Ragnvald had possessed. + + + +31. HALFDAN HALEG'S DEATH. + +Halfdan Haleg came very unexpectedly to Orkney, and Earl Einar +immediately fled; but came back soon after about harvest time, +unnoticed by Halfdan. They met and after a short battle Halfdan +fled the same night. Einar and his men lay all night without +tents, and when it was light in the morning they searched the +whole island and killed every man they could lay hold of. Then +Einar said "What is that I see upon the isle of Rinansey? Is it +a man or a bird? Sometimes it raises itself up, and sometimes +lies down again." They went to it, and found it was Halfdan +Haleg, and took him prisoner. + +Earl Einar sang the following song the evening before he went +into this battle: -- + + "Where is the spear of Hrollaug? where + Is stout Rolf Ganger's bloody spear! + I see them not; yet never fear, + For Einar will not vengeance spare + Against his father's murderers, though + Hrollaug and Rolf are somewhat slow, + And silent Thorer sits add dreams + At home, beside the mead-bowl's streams." + +Thereafter Earl Einar went up to Halfdan, and cut a spread eagle +upon his back, by striking his sword through his back into his +belly, dividing his ribs from the backbone down to his loins, and +tearing out his lungs; and so Halfdan was killed. Einar then +sang: -- + + "For Ragnvald's death my sword is red: + Of vengeance it cannot be said + That Einar's share is left unsped. + So now, brave boys, let's raise a mound, -- + Heap stones and gravel on the ground + O'er Halfdan's corpse: this is the way + We Norsemen our scat duties pay." + +Then Earl Einar took possession of the Orkney Isles as before. +Now when these tidings came to Norway, Halfdan's brothers took it +much to heart, and thought that his death demanded vengeance; and +many were of the same opinion. When Einar heard this, he sang: +-- + + "Many a stout udal-man, I know, + Has cause to wish my head laid low; + And many an angry udal knife + Would gladly drink of Eina's life. + But ere they lay Earl Einar low, -- + Ere this stout heart betrays its cause, + Full many a heart will writhe, we know, + In the wolf's fangs, or eagle's claws." + + + +32. HARALD AND EINAR RECONCILED. + +King Harald now ordered a levy, and gathered a great force, with +which he proceeded westward to Orkney; and when Earl Einar heard +that King Harald was come, he fled over to Caithness. He made +the following verses on this occasion: -- + + "Many a bearded man must roam, + An exile from his house and home, + For cow or horse; but Halfdan's gore + Is red on Rinansey's wild shore. + A nobler deed -- on Harald's shield + The arm of one who ne'er will yield + Has left a scar. Let peasants dread + The vengeance of the Norsemen's head: + I reck not of his wrath, but sing, + `Do thy worst! -- I defy thee, king! --'" + +Men and messages, however, passed between the king and the earl, +and at last it came to a conference; and when they met the earl +submitted the case altogether to the king's decision, and the +king condemned the earl Einar and the Orkney people to pay a fine +of sixty marks of gold. As the bondes thought this was too heavy +for them to pay, the earl offered to pay the whole if they would +surrender their udal lands to him. This they all agreed to do: +the poor because they had but little pieces of land; the rich +because they could redeem their udal rights again when they +liked. Thus the earl paid the whole fine to the king, who +returned in harvest to Norway. The earls for a long time +afterwards possessed all the udal lands in Orkney, until Sigurd +son of Hlodver gave back the udal rights. + + + +33. DEATH OF GUTHORM AND HALFDAN THE WHITE. + +While King Harald's son Guthorm had the defence of Viken, he +sailed outside of the islands on the coast, and came in by one +of the mouths of the tributaries of the Gaut river. When he lay +there Solve Klofe came upon him, and immediately gave him battle, +and Guthorm fell. Halfdan the White and Halfdan the Black went +out on an expedition, and plundered in the East sea, and had a +battle in Eistland, where Halfdan the White fell. + + + +34. MARRIAGE OF EIRIK. + +Eirik, Harald's son, was fostered in the house of the herse +Thorer, son of Hroald, in the Fjord district. He was the most +beloved and honoured by King Harald of all his sons. When Eirik +was twelve years old, King Harald gave him five long-ships, with +which he went on an expedition, -- first in the Baltic; then +southwards to Denmark, Friesland, and Saxland; on which +expedition he passed four years. He then sailed out into the +West sea and plundered in Scotland, Bretland, Ireland, and +Valland, and passed four years more in this way. Then he sailed +north to Finmark, and all the way to Bjarmaland, where he had +many a battle, and won many a victory. When he came back to +Finmark, his men found a girl in a Lapland hut, whose equal for +beauty they never had seen. She said her name was Gunhild, and +that her father dwelt in Halogaland, and was called Ozur Tote. +"I am here," she said, "to learn sorcery from two of the most +knowing Fins in all Finmark, who are now out hunting. They both +want me in marriage. They are so skilful that they can hunt out +traces either upon the frozen or the thawed earth, like dogs; and +they can run so swiftly on skees that neither man nor beast can +come near them in speed. They hit whatever they take aim at, and +thus kill every man who comes near them. When they are angry the +very earth turns away in terror, and whatever living thing they +look upon then falls dead. Now ye must not come in their way; +but I will hide you here in the hut, and ye must try to get them +killed." They agreed to it, and she hid them, and then took a +leather bag, in which they thought there were ashes which she +took in her hand, and strewed both outside and inside of the hut. +Shortly after the Fins came home, and asked who had been there; +and she answered, "Nobody has been here." "That is wonderful," +said they, "we followed the traces close to the hut, and can find +none after that." Then they kindled a fire, and made ready their +meat, and Gunhild prepared her bed. It had so happened that +Gunhild had slept the three nights before, but the Fins had +watched the one upon the other, being jealous of each other. +"Now," she said to the Fins, "come here, and lie down one on each +side of me." On which they were very glad to do so. She laid an +arm round the neck of each and they went to sleep directly. She +roused them up; but they fell to sleep again instantly, and so +soundly the she scarcely could waken them. She even raised them +up in the bed, and still they slept. Thereupon she too two great +seal-skin bags, and put their heads in them, and tied them fast +under their arms; and then she gave a wink to the king~s men. +They run forth with their weapons, kill the two Fins, and drag +them out of the hut. That same night came such a dreadful +thunder-storm that the could not stir. Next morning they came to +the ship, taking Gunhild with them, and presented her to Eirik. +Eirik and his followers then sailed southwards to Halogaland and +he sent word to Ozur Tote, the girl's father, to meet him. Eirik +said he would take his daughter in marriage, to which Ozur Tote +consented, and Eirik took Gunhild and went southwards with her +(A.D. 922). + + + +35. HARALD DIVIDES HIS KINGDOM. + +When King Harald was fifty years of age many of his sons were +grown up, and some were dead. Many of them committed acts of +great violence in the country, and were in discord among +themselves. They drove some of the king's earls out of their +properties, and even killed some of them. Then the king called +together a numerous Thing in the south part of the country, and +summoned to it all the people of the Uplands. At this Thing he +gave to all his sons the title of king, and made a law that his +descendants in the male line should each succeed to the kingly +title and dignity; but his descendants by the female side only to +that of earl. And he divided the country among them thus: -- +Vingulmark, Raumarike, Vestfold and Thelamark, he bestowed on +Olaf, Bjorn, Sigtryg, Frode, and Thorgils. Hedemark and +Gudbrandsdal he gave to Dag, Hring, and Ragnar. To Snaefrid's +sons he gave Ringerike, Hadeland, Thoten, and the lands thereto +belonging. His son Guthorm, as before mentioned, he had set over +the country from Glommen to Svinasund and Ranrike. He had set +him to defend the country to the East, as before has been +written. King Harald himself generally dwelt in the middle of +the country, and Hrorek and Gudrod were generally with his court, +and had great estates in Hordaland and in Sogn. King Eirik was +also with his father King Harald; and the king loved and regarded +him the most of all his sons, and gave him Halogaland and North +More, and Raumsdal. North in Throndhjem he gave Halfdan the +Black, Halfdan the White, and Sigrod land to rule over. In each +of these districts he gave his sons the one half of his revenues, +together with the right to sit on a high-seat, -- a step higher +than earls, but a step lower than his own high-seat. His king's +seat each of his sons wanted for himself after his death, but he +himself destined it for Eirik. The Throndhjem people wanted +Halfdan the Black to succeed to it. The people of Viken, and the +Uplands, wanted those under whom they lived. And thereupon new +quarrels arose among the brothers; and because they thought their +dominions too little, they drove about in piratical expeditions. +In this way, as before related, Guthorm fell at the mouth of the +Gaut river, slain by Solve Klofe; upon which Olaf took the +kingdom he had possessed. Halfdan the White fell in Eistland, +Halfdan Haleg in Orkney. King Harald gave ships of war to +Thorgils and Frode, with which they went westward on a viking +cruise, and plundered in Scotland, Ireland, and Bretland. They +were the first of the Northmen who took Dublin. It is said that +Frode got poisoned drink there; but Thorgils was a long time king +over Dublin, until he fell into a snare of the Irish, and was +killed. + + + +36. DEATH OF RAGNVALD RETTILBEINE. + +Eirik Blood-axe expected to be head king over all his brothers +and King Harald intended he should be so; and the father and son +lived long together. Ragnvald Rettilbeine governed Hadaland, and +allowed himself to be instructed in the arts of witchcraft, and +became an area warlock. Now King Harald was a hater of all +witchcraft. There was a warlock in Hordaland called Vitgeir; and +when the king sent a message to him that he should give up his +art of witchcraft, he replied in this verse: -- + + "The danger surely is not great + From wizards born of mean estate, + When Harald's son in Hadeland, + King Ragnvald, to the art lays hand." + +But when King Harald heard this, King Eirik Blood-axe went by his +orders to the Uplands, and came to Hadeland and burned his +brother Ragnvald in a house, along with eighty other warlocks; +which work was much praised. + + + +37. DEATH OF GUDROD LJOME. + +Gudrod Ljome was in winter on a friendly visit to his foster- +father Thjodolf in Hvin, and had a well-manned ship, with which +he wanted to go north to Rogaland. It was blowing a heavy storm +at the time; but Gudrod was bent on sailing, and would not +consent to wait. Thjodolf sang thus: -- + + "Wait, Gudrod, till the storm is past, -- + Loose not thy long-ship while the blast + Howls over-head so furiously, -- + Trust not thy long-ship to the sea, -- + Loose not thy long-ship from the shore; + Hark to the ocean's angry roar! + See how the very stones are tost + By raging waves high on the coast! + Stay, Gudrod, till the tempest's o'er -- + Deep runs the sea off the Jadar's shore." + +Gudrod set off in spite of what Thjodolf could say: and when they +came off the Jadar the vessel sunk with them, and all on board +were lost. + + + +38. KING BJORN KAUPMAN'S DEATH. + +King Harald's son, Bjorn, ruled over Vestfold at that time, and +generally lived at Tunsberg, and went but little on war +expeditions. Tunsberg at that time was much frequented by +merchant vessels, both from Viken and the north country, and also +from the south, from Denmark, and Saxland. King Bjorn had also +merchant ships on voyages to other lands, by which he procured +for himself costly articles, and such things as he thought +needful; and therefore his brothers called him Farman (the +Seaman), and Kaupman (the Chapman). Bjorn was a man of sense and +understanding, and promised to become a good ruler. He made a +good and suitable marriage, and had a son by his wife, who was +named Gudrod. Eirik Blood-axe came from his Baltic cruise with +ships of war, and a great force, and required his brother Bjorn +to deliver to him King Harald's share of the scat and incomes of +Vestfold. But it had always been the custom before, that Bjorn +himself either delivered the money into the king's hands, or sent +men of his own with it; and therefore he would continue with the +old custom, and would not deliver the money. Eirik again wanted +provisions, tents, and liquor. The brothers quarrelled about +this; but Eirik got nothing and left the town. Bjorn went also +out of the town towards evening up to Saeheim. In the night +Eirik came back after Bjorn, and came to Saeheim just as Bjorn +and his men were seated at table drinking. Eirik surrounded the +house in which they were; but Bjorn with his men went out and +fought. Bjorn, and many men with him, fell. Eirik, on the other +hand, got a great booty, and proceeded northwards. But this work +was taken very ill by the people of Viken, and Eirik was much +disliked for it; and the report went that King Olaf would avenge +his brother Bjorn, whenever opportunity offered. King Bjorn lies +in the mound of Farmanshaug at Saeheim. + + + +39. RECONCILIATION OF THE KINGS. + +King Eirik went in winter northwards to More, and was at a feast +in Solve, within the point Agdanes; and when Halfdan the Black +heard of it he set out with his men, and surrounded the house in +which they were. Eirik slept in a room which stood detached by +itself, and he escaped into the forest with four others; but +Halfdan and his men burnt the main house, with all the people who +were in it. With this news Eirik came to King Harald, who was +very wroth at it, and assembled a great force against the +Throndhjem people. When Halfdan the Black heard this he levied +ships and men, so that he had a great force, and proceeded with +it to Stad, within Thorsbjerg. King Harald lay with his men at +Reinsletta. Now people went between them, and among others a +clever man called Guthorm Sindre, who was then in Halfdan the +Black's army, but had been formerly in the service of King +Harald, and was a great friend of both. Guthorm was a great +skald, and had once composed a song both about the father and the +son, for which they had offered him a reward. But he would take +nothing; but only asked that, some day or other, they should +grant him any request he should make, which they promised to do. +Now he presented himself to King Harald, brought words of peace +between them, and made the request to them both that they shou1d +be reconciled. So highly did the king esteem him, that in +consequence of his request they were reconciled. Many other able +men promoted this business as well as he; and it was so settled +that Halfdan should retain the whole of his kingdom as he had it +before, and should let his brother Eirik sit in peace. After +this event Jorun, the skald-maid, composed some verses in +"Sendibit" ("The Biting Message"): -- + + "I know that Harald Fairhair + Knew the dark deed of Halfdan. + To Harald Halfdan seemed + Angry and cruel." + + + +40. BIRTH OF HAKON THE GOOD. + +Earl Hakon Grjotgardson of Hlader had the whole rule over +Throndhjem when King Harald was anywhere away in the country; and +Hakon stood higher with the king than any in the country of +Throndhjem. After Hakon's death his son Sigurd succeeded to his +power in Throndhjem, and was the earl, and had his mansion at +Hlader. King Harald's sons, Halfdan the Black and Sigrod, who +had been before in the house of his father Earl Hakon, continued +to be brought up in his house. The sons of Harald and Sigurd +were about the same age. Earl Sigurd was one of the wisest men +of his time, and married Bergljot, a daughter of Earl Thorer the +Silent; and her mother was Alof Arbot, a daughter of Harald +Harfager. When King Harald began to grow old he generally dwelt +on some of his great farms in Hordaland; namely, Alreksstader or +Saeheim, Fitjar, Utstein, or Ogvaldsnes in the island Kormt. +When Harald was seventy years of age he begat a son with a girl +called Thora Mosterstang, because her family came from Moster. +She was descended from good people, being connected with Kare +(Aslakson) of Hordaland; and was moreover a very stout and +remarkably handsome girl. She was called the king's servant- +girl; for at that time many were subject to service to the +king who were of good birth, both men and women. Then it was the +custom, with people of consideration, to choose with great care +the man who should pour water over their children, and give them +a name. Now when the time came that Thora, who was then at +Moster, expected her confinement, she would to King Harald, who +was then living at Saeheim; and she went northwards in a ship +belonging to Earl Sigurd. They lay at night close to the land; +and there Thora brought forth a child upon the land, up among the +rocks, close to the ship's gangway, and it was a man child. Earl +Sigurd poured water over him, and called him Hakon, after his own +father, Hakon earl of Hlader. The boy soon grew handsome, large +in size, and very like his father King Harald. King Harald let +him follow his mother, and they were both in the king's house as +long as he was an infant. + + + +41. KING ATHELSTAN'S MESSAGE + +At this time a king called Aethelstan had taken the Kingdom of +England. He was called victorious and faithful. He sent men to +Norway to King Harald, with the errand that the messengers should +present him with a sword, with the hilt and handle gilt, and also +the whole sheath adorned with gold and silver, and set with +precious jewels. The ambassador presented the sword-hilt to the +king, saying, "Here is a sword which King Athelstan sends thee, +with the request that thou wilt accept it." The king took the +sword by the handle; whereupon the ambassador said, "Now thou +hast taken the sword according to our king's desire, and +therefore art thou his subject as thou hast taken his sword." +King Harald saw now that this was an insult, for he would be +subject to no man. But he remembered it was his rule, whenever +anything raised his anger, to collect himself, and let his +passion run off, and then take the matter into consideration +coolly. Now he did so, and consulted his friends, who all gave +him the advice to let the ambassadors, in the first place, go +home in safety. + + + +42. HAUK'S JOURNEY TO ENGLAND. + +The following summer King Harald sent a ship westward to England, +and gave the command of it to Hauk Habrok. He was a great +warrior, and very dear to the king. Into his hands he gave his +son Hakon. Hank proceeded westward tn England, and found King +Athelstan in London, where there was just at the time a great +feast and entertainment. When they came to the hall, Hauk told +his men how they should conduct themselves; namely, that he who +went first in should go last out, and all should stand in a row +at the table, at equal distance from each other; and each should +have his sword at his left side, but should fasten his cloak so +that his sword should not be seen. Then they went into the hall, +thirty in number. Hauk went up to the king and saluted him, and +the king bade him welcome. Then Hauk took the child Hakon, and +set it on the king's knee. The king looks at the boy, and asks +Hauk what the meaning of this is. Hauk replies, "Herald the king +bids thee foster his servant-girl's child." The king was in +great anger, and seized a sword which lay beside him, and drew +it, as if he was going to kill the child. Hauk says, "Thou hast +borne him on thy knee, and thou canst murder him if thou wilt; +but thou wilt not make an end of all King Harald's sons by so +doing." On that Hauk went out with all his men, and took the way +direct to his ship, and put to sea, -- for they were ready, -- +and came back to King Harald. The king was highly pleased with +this; for it is the common observation of all people, that the +man who fosters another's children is of less consideration than +the other. From these transactions between the two kings, it +appears that each wanted to be held greater than the other; but +in truth there was no injury, to the dignity of either, for each +was the upper king in his own kingdom till his dying day. + + + +43. HAKON, THE FOSTER-SON OF ATHELSTAN, IS BAPTIZED. + +King Athelstan had Hakon baptized, and brought up in the right +faith, and in good habits, and all sorts of good manners, and he +loved Hakon above all his relations; and Hakon was beloved by all +men. He was henceforth called Athelstan's foster-son. He was an +accomplished skald, and he was larger, stronger and more +beautiful than other men; he was a man of understanding and +eloquence, and also a good Christian. King Athelstan gave Hakon +a sword, of which the hilt and handle were gold, and the blade +still better; for with it Hakon cut down a mill-stone to the +centre eye, and the sword thereafter was called the Quernbite +(1). Better sword never came into Norway, and Hakon carried it +to his dying day. + + +ENDNOTES: +(1) Quern is the name of the small hand mill-stones still found + in use among the cottars in Orkney, Shetland, and the + Hebrides. This sword is mentioned in the Younger Edda. + There were many excellent swords in the olden time, and many + of them had proper names. + + + +44. EIRIK BROUGHT TO THE SOVEREIGNTY. + +When King Harald was eighty years of age (A.D. 930) he became +very heavy, and unable to travel through the country, or do the +business of a king. Then he brought his son Eirik to his +high-seat, and gave him the power and command over the whole +land. Now when King Harald's other sons heard this, King Halfdan +the Black also took a king's high-seat, and took all Throndhjem +land, with the consent of all the people, under his rule as upper +king. After the death of Bjorn the Chapman, his brother Olaf +took the command over Vestfold, and took Bjorn's son, Gudrod, as +his foster-child. Olaf's son was called Trygve; and the two +foster-brothers were about the same age, and were hopeful and +clever. Trygve, especially, was remarkable as a stout and strong +man. Now when the people of Viken heard that those of Hordaland +had taken Eirik as upper king, they did the same, and made Olaf +the upper king in Viken, which kingdom he retained. Eirik did +not like this at all. Two years after this, Halfdan the Black +died suddenly at a feast in Throndhjem and the general report was +that Gunhild had bribed a witch to give him a death-drink. +Thereafter the Throndhjem people took Sigrod to be their king. + + + +45. KING HARALD'S DEATH. + +King Harald lived three years after he gave Eirik the supreme +authority over his kingdom, and lived mostly on his great farms +which he possessed, some in Rogaland, and some in Hordaland. +Eirik and Gunhild had a son on whom King Harald poured water, and +gave him his own name, and the promise that he should be king +after his father Eirik. King Harald married most of his +daughters within the country to his earls, and from them many +great families are descended. Harald died on a bed of sickness +in Hogaland (A.D. 933), and was buried under a mound at Haugar in +Karmtsund. In Haugesund is a church, now standing; and not far +from the churchyard, at the north-west side, is King Harald +Harfager's mound; but his grave-stone stands west of the church, +and is thirteen feet and a half high, and two ells broad. One +stone was set at head and one at the feet; on the top lay the +slab, and below on both sides were laid small stones. The grave, +mound, and stone, are there to the present day. Harald Harfager +was, according to the report of men~of knowledge, or remarkably +handsome appearance, great and strong, and very generous and +affable to his men. He was a great warrior in his youth; and +people think that this was foretold by his mother's dream before +his birth, as the lowest part of the tree she dreamt of was red +as blood. The stem again was green and beautiful, which +betokened his flourishing kingdom; and that the tree was white at +the top showed that he should reach a grey-haired old age. The +branches and twigs showed forth his posterity, spread over the +whole land; for of his race, ever since. Norway has always had +kings. + + + +46. THE DEATH OF OLAF AND OF SIGROD. + +King Eirik took all the revenues (A.D. 934), which the king had +in the middle of the country, the next winter after King Harald's +decease. But Olaf took all the revenues eastward in Viken, and +their brother Sigrod all that of the Throndhjem country. Eirik +was very ill pleased with this; and the report went that he would +attempt with force to get the sole sovereignty over the country, +in the same way as his father had given it to him. Now when Olaf +and Sigrod heard this, messengers passed between them; and after +appointing a meeting place, Sigrod went eastward in spring to +Viken, and he and his brother Olaf met at Tunsberg, and remained +there a while. The same spring (A.D. 934), King Eirik levied a +great force, and ships and steered towards Viken. He got such a +strong steady gale that he sailed night and day, and came faster +than the news of him. When he came to Tunsberg, Olaf and Sigrod, +with their forces, went out of the town a little eastward to a +ridge, where they drew up their men in battle order; but as Eirik +had many more men he won the battle. Both brothers, Olaf and +Sigrod, fell there; and both their grave-mounds are upon the +ridge where they fell. Then King Eirik went through Viken, and +subdued it, and remained far into summer. Gudrod and Trygve fled +to the Uplands. Eirik was a stout handsome man, strong, and very +manly, -- a great and fortunate man of war; but bad-minded, +gruff, unfriendly, and silent. Gunhild, his wife, was the most +beautiful of women, -- clever, with much knowledge, and lively; +but a very false person, and very cruel in disposition. The +children of King Eirik and Gunhild were, Gamle, the oldest; then +Guthorm, Harald, Ragnfrod, Ragnhild, Erling, Gudrod, and Sigurd +Sleva. All were handsome, and of manly appearance (1). + + +ENDNOTES: +(1) Of Eirik, his wife, and children, see the following sagas. + + + +HAKON THE GOOD'S SAGA. + + +PRELIMINARY REMARKS. + +Of Eirik Blood-axe's five years' reign Snorre has no separate +saga. He appears not to have been beloved by the people and his +queen Gunhild seems to have had a bad influence on him. + +Other accounts of Hakon may be found in "Fagrskinna" (chaps. +25-34), "Agrip", "Historia", "Norvegiae", and in "Thjodrek" +(chap. 4). + +The reader is also referred to "Saxo", "Egla", "Laxdaela", +"Kormaks Saga", "Gisle Surssons Saga", "Halfred's Saga", +"Floamanna Saga", "Viga Glum's Saga", and to "Landnamabok". + +Skald mentioned in this Saga are: -- Glum Geirason, Thord +Sjarekson, Guthorm Sindre, Kormak Ogmundson, and Eyvind +Skaldaspiller. In the "Egla" are found many poems belonging to +this epoch by Egil Skallagrimson. + +In "Fagrskinna" is found a poem (not given by Snorre) which +Gunhild (his wife) had made on King Eirik after his death, +telling how Odin welcomed him to Valhal. The author or skald who +composed it is not known, but it is considered to be one of the +gems of old Norse poetry, and we here quote it in Vigfusson's +translation in his "Corpus Poeticum", vol. i. pp. 260, 261. +Gudbrand Vigfusson has filled up a few gaps from "Hakonarmat", +the poem at the end of this Saga. We have changed Vigfusson's +orthography of names, and brought them into harmony with the +spelling used in this work: -- Ed. + +"Odin wakes in the morning and cries, as he opens his eyes, with +his dream still fresh in his mind: -- `What dreams are these? I +thought I arose before daybreak to make Valhal ready for a host +of slain. I woke up the host of the chosen. I bade them ride up +to strew the benches, and to till up the beer-vats, and I bade +valkyries to bear the wine, as if a king were coming. I look for +the coming of some noble chiefs from the earth, wherefore my +heart is glad.' + +"Brage, Odin's counsellor, now wakes, as a great din is heard +without, and calls out: -- `What is that thundering? as if a +thousand men or some great host were tramping on -- the walls and +the benches are creaking withal -- as if Balder was coming back +to the ball of Odin?' + +"Odin answers: -- `Surely thou speakest foolishly, good Brage, +although thou art very wise. It thunders for Eirik the king, +that is coming to the hall of Odin.' + +"Then turning to his heroes, he cries: -- `Sigmund and Sinfjotle, +rise in haste and go forth to meet the prince! Bid him in if it +be Eirik, for it is he whom I look for.' + +"Sigmund answers: -- `Why lookest thou more for Eirik, the king, +to Odin's hall, than for other kings?' + +"Odin answers: -- `Because he has reddened his brand, and borne +his bloody sword in many a land.' + +"Quoth Sigmund: -- `Why didst thou rob him, the chosen king of +victory then, seeing thou thoughtest him so brave?' + +"Odin answered: -- `Because it is not surely to be known, when +the grey wolf shall come upon the seat of the god.' + +SECOND SCENE. -- Without Valhal. +Sigmund and Sinfjotle go outside the hall and meet Eirik. + +"Quoth Sigmund: -- `Hail to thee, Eirik, be welcome here, and +come into the hall, thou gallant king! Now I will ask thee, what +kings are these that follow thee from the clash of the sword +edges?' + +"Eirik answers: -- `They are five kings; I will tell thee all +their names; I myself am the sixth (the names followed in the +song, whereof the rest is lost.) + +"Fagrskinna" says "Hakonarmal" was the model of this poem. + + + +1. HAKON CHOSEN KING. + +Hakon, Athelstan's foster-son, was in England at the time (A.D. +934) he heard of his father King Harald's death, and he +immediately made himself ready to depart. King Athelstan gave +him men, and a choice of good ships, and fitted him out for his +journey most excellently. In harvest time he came to Norway, +where he heard of the death of his brothers, and that King Eirik +was then in Viken. Then Hakon sailed northwards to Throndhjem, +where he went to Sigurd earl of Hlader who was the ablest man in +Norway. He gave Hakon a good reception; and they made a league +with each other, by which Hakon promised great power to Sigurd if +he was made king. They assembled then a numerous Thing, and +Sigurd the earl recommended Hakon's cause to the Thing, and +proposed him to the bondes as king. Then Hakon himself stood up +and spoke; and the people said to each other, two and two, as +they heard him, "Herald Harfager is come again, grown and young." +The beginning of Hakon's speech was, that he offered himself to +the bondes as king, and desired from them the title of king, and +aid and forces to defend the kingdom. He promised, on the other +hand, to make all the bondes udal-holders, and give every man +udal rights to the land he lived on. This speech met such joyful +applause, that the whole public cried and shouted that they would +take him to be king. And so it was that the Throndhjem people +took Hakon, who was then fifteen years old, for king; and he took +a court or bodyguard, and servants, and proceeded through the +country. The news reached the Uplands that the people in +Throndhjem had taken to themselves a king, who in every respect +was like King Harald Harfager, -- with the difference, that +Harald had made all the people of the land vassals, and unfree; +but this Hakon wished well to every man, and offered the bondes +to give them their udal rights again, which Harald had taken from +them. All were rejoiced at this news, and it passed from mouth +to mouth, -- it flew, like fire in dry grass, through the whole +land, and eastward to the land's end. Many bondes came from the +Uplands to meet King Hakon. Some sent messengers, some tokens; +and all to the same effect -- that his men they would be: and the +king received all thankfully. + + + +2. KING HAKON'S PROGRESS THROUGH THE COUNTRY. + +Early in winter (935), the king went to the Uplands, and summoned +the people to a Thing; and there streamed all to him who could +come. He was proclaimed king at every Thing; and then he +proceeded eastward to Viken, where his brother's sons, Trygve and +Gudrod, and many others, came unto him, and complained of the +sorrow and evil his brother Eirik had wrought. The hatred to +King Eirik grew more and more, the more liking all men took to +King Hakon; and they got more boldness to say what they thought. +King Hakon gave Trygve and Gudrod the title of kings, and the +dominions which King Harald had bestowed on their fathers. +Trygve got Ranrike and Vingulmark, and Gudrod, Vestfold; but as +they were young, and in the years of childhood, he appointed able +men to rule the land for them. He gave them the country on the +same conditions as it had been given before, -- that they should +have half of the scat and revenues with him. Towards spring King +Hakon returned north, over the Uplands, to Throndhjem. + + + +3. EIRIK'S DEPARTURE FROM THE COUNTRY. + +King Hakon, early in spring, collected a great army at +Throndhjem, and fitted out ships. The people of Viken also had a +great force on foot, and intended to join Hakon. King Eirik also +levied people in the middle of the country; but it went badly +with him to gather people, for the leading men left him, and went +over to Hakon. As he saw himself not nearly strong enough to +oppose Hakon, he sailed (A.D. 935) out to the West sea with such +men as would follow him. He first sailed to Orkney, and took +many people with him from that country; and then went south +towards England, plundering in Scotland, and in the north parts +of England, wherever he could land. Athelstan, the king of +England, sent a message to Eirik, offering him dominions under +him in England; saying that King Harald his father was a good +friend of King Athelstan, and therefore he would do kindly +towards his sons. Messengers passed between the two kings; and +it came to an agreement that King Eirik should take +Northumberland as a fief from King Athelstan, and which land he +should defend against the Danes or other vikings. Eirik should +let himself be baptized, together with his wife and children, and +all the people who had followed him. Eirik accepted this offer, +and was baptized, and adopted the right faith. Northumberland is +called a fifth part of England. Eirik had his residence at York, +where Lodbrok's sons, it was said, had formerly been, and +Northumberland was principally inhabited by Northmen. Since +Lodbrok's sons had taken the country, Danes and Northmen often +plundered there, when the power of the land was out of their +hands. Many names of places in the country are Norwegian; as +Grimsby, Haukfliot, and many others. + + + +4. EIRIK'S DEATH. + +King Eirik had many people about him, for he kept many Northmen +who had come with him from the East; and also many of his friends +had joined him from Norway. But as he had little land, he went +on a cruise every summer, and plundered in Scotland, the +Hebrides, Ireland, and Bretland, by which he gathered property. +King Athelstan died on a sick bed, after a reign of fourteen +years, eight weeds, and three days. After him his brother +Jatmund was king of England, and he was no friend to the +Northmen. King Eirik, also, was in no great favour with him; and +the word went about that King Jatmund would set another chief +over Northumberland. Now when King Eirik heard this, he set off +on a viking cruise to the westward; and from the Orkneys took +with him the Earls Arnkel and Erlend, the sons of Earl Torfeinar. +Then he sailed to the Hebrides, where there were many vikings and +troop-kings, who joined their men to his. With all this force he +steered to Ireland first, where he took with him all the men he +could, and then to Bretland, and plundered; and sailed thereafter +south to England, and marauded there as elsewhere. The people +fled before him wherever he appeared. As King Eirik was a bold +warrior, and had a great force, he trusted so much to his people +that he penetrated far inland in the country, following and +plundering the fugitives. King Jatmund had set a king, who was +called Olaf, to defend the land; and he gathered an innumerable +mass of people, with whom he marched against King Eirik. A +dreadfu1 battle ensued, in which many Englishmen fell; but for +one who fell came three in his place out of the country behind, +and when evening came on the loss of men turned on the side of +the Northmen, and many people fell. Towards the end of the day, +King Eirik and five kings with him fell. Three of them were +Guthorm and his two sons, Ivar and Harek: there fell, also, +Sigurd and Ragnvald; and with them Torfeinar's two sons, Arnkel +and Erlend. Besides these, there was a great slaughter of +Northmen; and those who escaped went to Northumberland, and +brought the news to Gunhild and her sons (A.D. 941). + + + +5. GUNHILD AND HER SONS. + +When Gunhild and her sons knew for certain that King Eirik had +fallen, after having plundered the land of the King of England, +they thought there was no peace to be expected for them; and they +made themselves ready to depart from Northumberland, with all the +ships King Eirik had left, and all the men who would go with +them. They took also all the loose property, and goods which +they had gathered partly as taxes in England, partly as booty on +their expeditions. With their army they first steered northward +to Orkney, where Thorfin Hausakljufer was earl, a son of +Torfeinar, and took up their station there for a time. Eirik's +sons subdued these islands and Hjaltland, took scat for +themselves, and staid there all the winter; but went on viking +cruises in summer to the West, and plundered in Scotland and +Ireland. About this Glum Geirason sings: -- + + "The hero who knows well to ride + The sea-horse o'er the foamingtide, -- + He who in boyhood wild rode o'er + The seaman's horse to Skanea's shore. + And showed the Danes his galley's bow, + Right nobly scours the ocean now. + On Scotland's coast he lights the brand + Of flaming war; with conquering hand + Drives many a Scottish warrior tall + To the bright seats in Odin's hall. + The fire-spark, by the fiend of war + Fanned to a flame, soon spreads afar. + Crowds trembling fly, -- the southern foes + Fall thick beneath the hero's blows: + The hero's blade drips red with gore, + Staining the green sward on the shore." + + + +6. BATTLE IN JUTLAND. + +When King Eirik had left the country, King Hakon, Athelstan's +foster-son, subdued the whole of Norway. The first winter (A.D. +936) he visited the western parts, and then went north, and +settled in Throndhjem. But as no peace could be reasonably +looked for so long as King Eirik with his forces could come to +Norway from the West sea, he set himself with his men-at-arms in +the middle of the country, -- in the Fjord district, or in Sogn, +or Hordaland, or Rogaland. Hakon placed Sigurd earl of Hlader +over the whole Throradhjem district, as he and his father had +before had it under Harald Harfager. When King Hakon heard of +his brother Eirik's death, and also that his sons had no footing +in England, he thought there was not much to fear from them, and +he went with his troops one summer eastward to Viken. At that +time the Danes plundered often in Viken, and wrought much evil +there; but when they heard that King Hakon was come with a great +army, they got out of the way, to Halland; and those who were +nearest to King Hakon went out to sea, and over to Jotland +(Jutland). When the king heard of this, he sailed after them +with all his army. On arriving in Jutland he plundered all +round; and when the country people heard of it, they assembled in +a great body, and determined to defend their land, and fight. +There was a great battle; and King Hakon fought so boldly, that +he went forward before his banner without helmet or coat of mail. +King Hakon won the victory, and drove the fugitives far up the +country. So says Guthorm Sindre, in his song of Hakon: -- + + "Furrowing the deep-blue sea with oars, + The king pursues to Jutland's shores. + They met; and in the battle storm + Of clashing shields, full many a form + Of goodly warrior on the plain, + Full many a corpse by Hakon slain, + Glutted the ravens, who from far, + Scenting the banquet-feast of war, + Came in black flocks to Jutland's plains + To drink the blood-wine from the veins." + + + +7. BATTLE IN EYRARSUND (THE SOUND). + +Then Hakon steered southwards with his fleet to seek the vikings, +and so on to Sealand. He rowed with two cutters into the +Eyrarsund, where he found eleven viking ships, and instantly +attacked them. It ended in his gaining the victory, and clearing +the viking ships of all their men. So says Guthorm Sindre: -- + + "Hakon the Brave, whose skill all know + To bend in battle storm the bow, + Rushed o'er the waves to Sealand's tongue, + His two war-ships with gilt shields hung, + And cleared the decks with his blue sword + That rules the fate of war, on board + Eleven ships of the Vindland men. -- + Famous is Hakon's name since then." + + + +8. KING HAKON'S EXPEDITION TO DENMARK. + +Thereafter King Hakon carried war far and wide in Sealand; +plundering some, slaying others, taking some prisoners of war, +taking ransom from others, and all without opposition. Then +Hakon proceeded along the coast of Skane, pillaging everywhere, +levying taxes and ransome from the country, and killing all +vikings, both Danish and Vindish. He then went eastwards to the +district of Gautland, marauded there, and took great ransom from +the country. So says Guthorm Sindre: -- + + "Hakon, who midst the battle shock + Stands like a firmly-rooted oak, + Subdued all Sealand with the sword: + From Vindland vikings the sea-bord + Of Scania swept; and, with the shield + Of Odin clad, made Gautland yield + A ransom of the ruddy gold, + Which Hakon to his war-men bold + Gave with free hand, who in his feud + Against the arrow-storm had stood." + +King Hakon returned back in autumn with his army and an immense +booty; and remained all the winter (A.D. 946) in Viken to defend +it against the Danes and Gautlanders, if they should attack it. + + + +9. OF KING TRYGVE. + +In the same winter King Trygve Olafson returned from a viking +cruise in the West sea, having before ravaged in Ireland and +Scotland. In spring (A.D. 946) King Hakon went north, and set +his brother's son, King Trygve, over Viken to defend that country +against enemies. He gave him also in property all that he could +reconquer of the country in Denmark, which the summer before +King Hakon had subjected to payment of scat to him. So says +Guthorm: -- + + "King Hakon, whose sharp sword dyes red + The bright steel cap on many a head, + Has set a warrior brave and stout + The foreign foeman to keep out, -- + To keep that green land safe from war + Which black Night bore to dwarf Annar (1). + For many a carle whose trade's to wield + The battle-axe, and swing the shield, + On the swan's ocean-skates has come, + In white-winged ships, across the foam, -- + Across the sea, from far Ireland, + To war against the Norseman's land." + + +ENDNOTES: +(1) The dwarf Annar was the husband of Night, and Earth was + their daughter. -- L. + + + +10. OF GUNHILD S SONS. + +King Harald Gormson ruled over Denmark at that time. He took it +much amiss that King Hakon had made war in his dominions, and the +report went that he would take revenge; but this did not take +place so soon. When Gunhild and her sons heard there was enmity +between Denmark and Norway, they began to turn their course from +the West. They married King Eirik's daughter, Ragnhild, to +Arnfin, a son of Thorfin Hausakljufer; and as soon as Eirik's +sons went away, Thorfin took the earldom again over the Orkney +Islands. Gamle Eirikson was somewhat older than the other +brothers, but still he was not a grown man. When Gunhild and her +sons came from the westward to Denmark, they were well received +by King Harald. He gave them great fiefs in his kingdom, so that +they could maintain themselves and their men very well. He also +took Harald Eirikson to be his foster-son, set him on his knee, +and thereafter he was brought up at the Danish king's court. +Some of Eirik's sons went out on viking expeditions as soon as +they were old enough, and gathered property, ravaging all around +in the East sea. They grew up quickly to be handsome men, and +far beyond their years in strength and perfection. Glum Geirason +tells of one of them in the Grafeld song: -- + + "I've heard that, on the Eastland coast, + Great victories were won and lost. + The king, whose hand is ever graced + With gift to skald, his banner placed + On, and still on; while, midst the play + Of swords, sung sharp his good sword's sway + As strong in arm as free of gold, + He thinn'd the ranks of warriors bold." + +Then Eirik's sons turned northwards with their troops to Viken +and marauded there; but King Trygve kept troops on foot with +which he met them, and they had many a battle, in which the +victory was sometimes on one side, and sometimes on the other. +Sometimes Eirik's sons plundered in Viken, and sometimes Trygve +in Sealand and Halland. + + + +11. KING HAKON AS A LAW-GIVER. + +As long as Hakon was king in Norway, there was good peace between +the bondes and merchants; so that none did harm either to the +life or goods of the other. Good seasons also there were, both +by sea and land. King Hakon was of a remarkably cheerful +disposition, clever in words, and very condescending. He was a +man of great understanding also, and bestowed attention on law- +giving. He gave out the Gula-thing's laws on the advice of +Thorleif Spake (the Wise); also the Frosta-thing's laws on the +advice of Earl Sigurd, and of other Throndhjem men of wisdom. +Eidsiva-thing laws were first established in the country by +Halfdan the Black, as has before been written. + + + +12. THE BIRTH OF EARL HAKON THE GREAT. + +King Hakon kept Yule at Throndhjem, and Earl Sigurd had made a +feast for him at Hlader. The night of the first day of Yule the +earl's wife, Bergljot, was brought to bed of a boy-child, which +afterwards King Hakon poured water over, and gave him his own +name. The boy grew up, and became in his day a mighty and able +man, and was earl after his father, who was King Hakon's dearest +friend. + + + +13. OF EYSTEIN THE BAD. + +Eystein, a king of the Uplands, whom some called the Great, and +some the Bad, once on a time made war in Throndhjem, and subdued +Eyna district and Sparbyggia district, and set his own son Onund +over them; but the Throndhjem people killed him. Then King +Eystein made another inroad into Throndhjem, and ravaged the land +far and wide, and subdued it. He then offered the people either +his slave, who was called Thorer Faxe, or his dog, whose name was +Saur, to be their king. They preferred the dog, as they thought +they would sooner get rid of him. Now the dog was, by +witchcraft, gifted with three men's wisdom; and when he barked, +he spoke one word and barked two. A collar and chain of gold and +silver were made for him, and his courtiers carried him on their +shoulders when the weather or ways were foul. A throne was +erected for him, and he sat upon a high place, as kings are used +to sit. He dwelt on Eyin Idre (Idre Isle), and had his mansion +in a place now called Saurshaug. It is told that the occasion of +his death was that the wolves one day broke into his fold, and +his courtiers stirred him up to defend his cattle; but when he +ran down from his mound, and attacked the wolves, they tore him +into pieces. Many other extraordinary things were done by this +King Eystein against the Throndhjem people, and in consequence of +this persecution and trouble, many chiefs and people fled and +left their udal properties. + + + +14. JAMTALAND AND HELSINGJALAND. + +Ketil Jamte, a son of Earl Onund of Sparabu, went eastward across +the mountain ridge, and with him a great multitude, who took all +their farm-stock and goods with them. They cleared the woods, +and established large farms, and settled the country afterwards +called Jamtaland. Thorer Helsing, Ketil's grandson, on account +of a murder, ran away from Jamtaland and fled eastward through +the forest, and settled there. Many people followed, and that +country, which extends eastward down to the seacoast, was called +Helsingjaland; and its eastern parts are inhabited by Swedes. +Now when Harald Harfager took possession of the whole country +many people fled before him, both people of Throndhjem and of +Naumudal districts; and thus new settlers came to Jamtaland, and +some all the way to Helsingjaland. The Helsingjaland people +travelled into Svithiod for their merchandise, and thus became +altogether subjects of that country. The Jamtaland people, +again, were in a manner between the two countries; and nobody +cared about them, until Hakon entered into friendly intercourse +with Jamtaland, and made friends of the more powerful people. +Then they resorted to him, and promised him obedience and payment +of taxes, and became his subjects; for they saw nothing but what +was good in him, and being of Norwegian race they would rather +stand under his royal authority than under the king of Sweden: +and he gave them laws, and rights to their land. All the people +of Helsingjaland did the same, -- that is, all who were of +Norwegian race, from the other side of the great mountain ridge. + + + + +15. HAKON SPREADS CHRISTIANITY. + +King Hakon was a good Christian when he came to Norway; but as +the whole country was heathen, with much heathenish sacrifice, +and as many great people, as well as the favour of the common +people, were to be conciliated, he resolved to practice his +Christianity in private. But he kept Sundays, and the Friday +fasts, and some token of the greatest holy-days. He made a law +that the festival of Yule should begin at the same time as +Christian people held it, and that every man, under penalty, +should brew a meal of malt into ale, and therewith keep the Yule +holy as long as it lasted. Before him, the beginning of Yule, or +the slaughter night, was the night of mid-winter (Dec. 14), and +Yule was kept for three days thereafter. It was his intent, as +soon as he had set himself fast in the land, and had subjected +the whole to his power, to introduce Christianity. He went to +work first by enticing to Christianity the men who were dearest +to him; and many, out of friendship to him, allowed themselves to +be baptized, and some laid aside sacrifices. He dwelt long in +the Throndhjem district, for the strength of the country lay +there; and when he thought that, by the support of some powerful +people there, he could set up Christianity he sent a message to +England for a bishop and other teachers; and when they arrived in +Norway, Hakon made it known that he would proclaim Christianity +over all the land. The people of More and Raumsdal referred the +matter to the people of Throndhjem. King Hakon then had several +churches consecrated, and put priests into them; and when he came +to Throndhjem he summoned the bondes to a Thing, and invited them +to accept Christianity. They gave an answer to the effect that +they would defer the matter until the Frosta-thing, at which +there would be men from every district of the Throndhjem country, +and then they would give their determination upon this difficult +matter. + + + +16. ABOUT SACRIFICES. + +Sigurd, earl of Hlader, was one of the greatest men for +sacrifices, and so had Hakon his father been; and Sigurd always +presided on account of the king at all the festivals of sacrifice +in the Throndhjem country. It was an old custom, that when there +was to be sacrifice all the bondes should come to the spot where +the temple stood and bring with them all that they required while +the festival of the sacrifice lasted. To this festival all the +men brought ale with them; and all kinds of cattle, as well as +horses, were slaughtered, and all the blood that came from them +was called "hlaut", and the vessels in which it was collected +were called hlaut-vessels. Hlaut-staves were made, like +sprinkling brushes, with which the whole of the altars and the +temple walls, both outside and inside, were sprinkled over, and +also the people were sprinkled with the blood; but the flesh was +boiled into savoury meat for those present. The fire was in the +middle of the floor of the temple, and over it hung the kettles, +and the full goblets were handed across the fire; and he who made +the feast, and was a chief, blessed the full goblets, and all the +meat of the sacrifice. And first Odin's goblet was emptied for +victory and power to his king; thereafter, Niord's and Freyja's +goblets for peace and a good season. Then it was the custom of +many to empty the brage-goblet (1); and then the guests emptied a +goblet to the memory of departed friends, called the remembrance +goblet. Sigurd the earl was an open-handed man, who did what was +very much celebrated; namely, he made a great sacrifice festival +at Hlader of which he paid all the expenses. Kormak Ogmundson +sings of it in his ballad of Sigurd: -- + + "Of cup or platter need has none + The guest who seeks the generous one, -- + Sigurd the Generous, who can trace + His lineage from the giant race; + For Sigurd's hand is bounteous, free, -- + The guardian of the temples he. + He loves the gods, his liberal hand + Scatters his sword's gains o'er the land-" + + +ENDNOTES: +(1) The brage-goblet, over which vows were made. -- L. + + + +17. THE FROSTA-THING. + +King Hakon came to the Frosta-thing, at which a vast multitude of +people were assembled. And when the Thing was seated, the king +spoke to the people, and began his speech with saying, -- it was +his message and entreaty to the bondes and householding men, both +great and small, and to the whole public in general, young and +old, rich and poor, women as well as men, that they should all +allow themselves to be baptized, and should believe in one God, +and in Christ the son of Mary and refrain from all sacrifices and +heathen gods; and should keep holy the seventh day, and abstain +from all work on it, and keep a fast on the seventh day. As soon +as the king had proposed this to the bondes, great was the murmur +and noise among the crowd. They complained that the king wanted +to take their labour and their old faith from them, and the land +could not be cultivated in that way. The labouring men and +slaves thought that they could not work if they did not get meat; +and they said it was the character of King Hakon, and his father, +and all the family, to be generous enough with their money, but +sparing with their diet. Asbjorn of Medalhus in the Gaulardal +stood up, and answered thus to the king's proposal: -- + +"We bondes, King Hakon, when we elected thee to be our king, and +got back our udal rights at the Thing held in Throndhjem, thought +we had got into heaven; but now we don't know whether we have +really got back our freedom, or whether thou wishest to make +vassa1s of us again by this extraordinary proposal that we should +abandon the ancient faith which our fathers and forefathers have +held from the oldest times, in the times when the dead were +burnt, as well as since that they are laid under mounds, and +which, although they were braver than the people of our days, has +served us as a faith to the present time. We have also held thee +so dear, that we have allowed thee to rule and give law and right +to all the country. And even now we bondes will unanimously hold +by the law which thou givest us here in the Frosta-thing, and to +which we have also given our assent; and we will follow thee, and +have thee for our king, as long as there is a living man among us +bondes here in this Thing assembled. But thou, king, must use +some moderation towards us, and only require from us such things +as we can obey thee in, and are not impossible for us. If, +however, thou wilt take up this matter with a high hand, and wilt +try thy power and strength against us, we bondes have resolved +among ourselves to part with thee, and to take to ourselves some +other chief, who will so conduct himself towards us that we can +freely and safely enjoy that faith that suits our own +inclinations. Now, king, thou must choose one or other of these +conditions before the Thing is ended." + +The bondes gave loud applause to this speech, and said it +expressed their will, and they would stand or fall by what had +been spoken. When silence was again restored, Earl Sigurd said, +"It is King Hakon's will to give way to you, the bondes, and +never to separate himself from your friendship." The bondes +replied, that it was their desire that the king should offer a +sacrifice for peace and a good year, as his father was want to +do; and thereupon the noise and tumult ceased, and the Thing was +concluded. Earl Sigurd spoke to the king afterwards, and advised +him not to refuse altogether to do as the people desired, saying +there was nothing else for it but to give way to the will of the +bondes; "for it is, as thou hast heard thyself, the will and +earnest desire of the head-people, as well as of the multitude. +Hereafter we may find a good way to manage it." And in this +resolution the king and earl agreed (A.D. 950). + + + +18. KING HAKON OFFERS SACRIFICES. + +The harvest thereafter, towards the winter season, there was a +festival of sacrifice at Hlader, and the king came to it. It had +always been his custom before, when he was present at a place +where there was sacrifice, to take his meals in a little house by +himself, or with some few of his men; but the bondes grumbled +that he did not seat himself in his high-seat at these the most +joyous of the meetings of the people. The earl said that the +king should do so this time. The king accordingly sat upon his +high-seat. Now when the first full goblet was filled, Earl +Sigurd spoke some words over it, blessed it in Odin's name, and +drank to the king out of the horn; and the king then took it, and +made the sign of the cross over it. Then said Kar of Gryting, +"What does the king mean by doing so? Will he not sacrifice?" +Earl Sigurd replies, "The king is doing what all of you do, who +trust to your power and strength. He is blessing the full goblet +in the name of Thor, by making the sign of his hammer over it +before he drinks it." On this there was quietness for the +evening. The next day, when the people sat down to table, the +bondes pressed the king strongly to eat of horse-flesh (1); and +as he would on no account do so, they wanted him to drink of the +soup; and as he would not do this, they insisted he should at +least taste the gravy; and on his refusal they were going to lay +hands on him. Earl Sigurd came and made peace among them, by +asking the king to hold his mouth over the handle of the kettle, +upon which the fat smoke of the boiled horse-flesh had settled +itself; and the king first laid a linen cloth over the handle, +and then gaped over it, and returned to the high-seat; but +neither party was satisfied with this. + + +ENDNOTES: +(1) This eating of horse-flesh at these religious festivals was + considered the most direct proof of paganism in the + following times, and was punished by death or mutilation by + Saint Olaf. It was a ceremony apparently commemorative of + their Asiatic origin and ancestors. + + + +19. FEAST OF THE SACRIFICE AT MORE. + +The winter thereafter the king prepared a Yule feast in More, and +eight chiefs resolved with each other to meet at it. Four of +them were from without the Throndhjem district -- namely, Kar of +Gryting, Asbjorn of Medalhus, Thorberg of Varnes, and Orm from +Ljoxa; and from the Throndhjem district, Botolf of Olvishaug, +Narfe of Staf in Veradal, Thrand Hak from Egg, and Thorer Skeg +from Husaby in Eyin Idre. These eight men bound themselves, the +four first to root out Christianity in Norway, and the four +others to oblige the king to offer sacrifice to the gods. The +four first went in four ships southwards to More, and killed +three priests, and burnt three churches, and then they returned. +Now, when King Hakon and Earl Sigurd came to More with their +court, the bondes assembled in great numbers; and immediately, on +the first day of the feast, the bondes insisted hard with the +king that he should offer sacrifice, and threatened him with +violence if he refused. Earl Sigurd tried to make peace between +them, and brought it so far that the king took some bits of +horse-liver, and emptied all the goblets the bondes filled for +him without the sign of the cross; but as soon as the feast was +over, the king and the earl returned to Hlader. The king was +very ill pleased, and made himself ready to leave Throndhjem +forthwith with all his people; saying that the next time he came +to Throndhjem, he would come with such strength of men-at-arms +that he would repay the bondes for their enmity towards him. +Earl Sigurd entreated the king not to take it amiss of the +bondes; adding, that it was not wise to threaten them, or to make +war upon the people within the country, and especially in the +Throndhjem district, where the strength of the land lay; but the +king was so enraged that he would not listen to a word from +anybody. He went out from Throndhjem, and proceeded south to +More, where he remained the rest of the winter, and on to the +spring season (A.D. 950); and when summer came he assembled men, +and the report was that he intended with this army to attack the +Throndhjem people. + + + +20. BATTLE AT OGVALDSNES. + +But just as the king had embarked with a great force of troops, +the news was brought him from the south of the country, that +King Eirik's sons had come from Denmark to Viken and had driven +King Trygve Olafson from his ships at Sotanes, and then had +plundered far and wide around in Viken, and that many had +submitted to them. Now when King Hakon heard this news, he +thought that help was needed; and he sent word to Earl Sigurd, +and to the other chiefs from whom he could expect help, to hasten +to his assistance. Sigurd the earl came accordingly with a great +body of men, among whom were all the Throndhjem people who had +set upon him the hardest to offer sacrifice; and all made their +peace with the king, by the earl's persuasion. Now King Hakon +sailed south along the coast; and when he came south as far as +Stad, he heard that Eirik's sons were come to North Agder. Then +they advanced against each other, and met at Kormt. Both parties +left their ships there, and gave battle at Ogvaldsnes. Both +parties had a great force, and it was a great battle. King Hakon +went forward bravely, and King Guthorm Eirikson met him with his +troop, and they exchanged blows with each other. Guthorm fell, +and his standard was cut down. Many people fell around him. The +army of Eirik's sons then took flight to their ships and rowed +away with the loss of many a man. So says Guthorm Sindre: -- + + + "The king's voice waked the silent host + Who slept beside the wild sea-coast, + And bade the song of spear and sword + Over the battle plain be heard. + Where heroes' shields the loudest rang, + Where loudest was the sword-blade's clang, + By the sea-shore at Kormt Sound, + Hakon felled Guthorm to the ground." + +Now King Hakon returned to his ships, and pursued Gunhild's sons. +And both parties sailed all they could sail, until they came to +East Adger, from whence Eirik's sons set out to sea, and +southwards for Jutland (A.D. 950). Guthorm Sindre speaks of it +in his song: -- + + "And Guthorm's brothers too, who know + So skilfully to bend the bow, + The conquering hand must also feel + Of Hakon, god of the bright steel, -- + The sun-god, whose bright rays, that dart + Flame-like, are swords that pierce the heart. + Well I remember how the King + Hakon, the battle's life and spring, + O'er the wide ocean cleared away + Eirik's brave sons. They durst not stay, + But round their ships' sides hung their shields + And fled across the blue sea-fields." + +King Hakon returned then northwards to Norway, but Eirik's sons +remained a long time in Denmark. + + + +21. KING HAKON'S LAWS. + +King Hakon after this battle made a law, that all inhabited land +over the whole country along the sea-coast, and as far back from +it as the salmon swims up in the rivers, should be divided into +ship-raths according to the districts; and it was fixed by law +how many ships there should be from each district, and how great +each should be, when the whole people were called out on service. +For this outfit the whole inhabitants should be bound whenever a +foreign army came to the country. With this came also the order +that beacons should be erected upon the hills, so that every man +could see from the one to the other; and it is told that a +war-signal could thus be given in seven days, from the most +southerly beacon to the most northerly Thing-seat in Halogaland + + + +22. CONCERNING EIRIK'S SONS. + +Eirik's sons plundered much on the Baltic coasts and sometimes, +as before related, in Norway; but so long as Hakon ruled over +Norway there was in general good peace, and good seasons, and he +was the most beloved of kings. When Hakon had reigned about +twenty years in Norway (A.D. 954), Eirik's sons came from Denmark +with a powerful army, of which a great part consisted of the +people who had followed them on their expeditions; but a still +greater army of Danes had been placed at their disposal by King +Harald Gormson. They sailed with a fair wind from Vendil, and +came to Agder; and then sailed northwards, night and day, along +the coast. But the beacons were not fired, because it had been +usual to look for them lighted from the east onwards, and nobody +had observed them from the east coast; and besides King Hakon had +set heavy penalties for giving false alarm, by lighting the +beacons without occasion. The reason of this was, that ships of +war and vikings cruised about and plundered among the outlying +islands, and the country people took them for Eirik's sons, and +lighted the beacons, and set the whole country in trouble and +dread of war. Sometimes, no doubt, the sons of Eirik were there; +but having only their own troops, and no Danish army with them, +they returned to Denmark; and sometimes these were other vikings. +King Hakon was very angry at this, because it cost both trouble +and money to no purpose. The bondes also suffered by these false +alarms when they were given uselessly; and thus it happened that +no news of this expedition of Eirik's sons circulated through the +land until they had come as far north as Ulfasund, where they lay +for seven days. Then spies set off across Eid and northwards to +More. King Hakon was at that time in the island Frede, in North +More, at a place called Birkistrand, where he had a dwelling- +house, and had no troops with him, only his bodyguard or court, +and the neighbouring bondes he had invited to his house. + + + +23. OF EGIL ULSERK. + +The spies came to King Hakon, and told him that Eirik's sons, +with a great army, lay just to the south of Stad. Then he called +together the most understanding of the men about him, and asked +their opinion, whether he should fight with Eirik's sons, +although they had such a great multitude with them, or should set +off northwards to gather together more men. Now there was a +bonde there, by name Egil Ulserk, who was a very old man, but in +former days had been strong and stout beyond most men, and a +hardy man-at-arms withal, having long carried King Harald +Harfager's banner. Egil answered thus to the king's speech, -- +"I was in several battles with thy father Harald the king, and he +gave battle sometimes with many, sometimes with few people; but +he always came off with victory. Never did I hear him ask +counsel of his friends whether he should fly -- and neither shalt +thou get any such counsel from us, king; but as we know we have a +brave leader, thou shalt get a trusty following from us." Many +others agreed with this speech, and the king himself declared he +was most inclined to fight with such strength as they could +gather. It was so determined. The king split up a war-arrow, +which he sent off in all directions, and by that token a number +of men was collected in all haste. Then said Egil Ulserk, -- "At +one time the peace had lasted so long I was afraid I might come +to die the death of old age (1), within doors upon a bed of +straw, although I would rather fall in battle following my chief. +And now it may so turn out in the end as I wished it to be." + + +ENDNOTES: +(1) In all the sagas of this pagan time, the dying on a bed of + sickness is mentioned as a kind of derogatory end of a man + of any celebrity. -- L. + + +24. BATTLE AT FREDARBERG. + +Eirik's sons sailed northwards around Stad; as soon as the wind +suited; and when they had passed it, and heard where King Hakon +was, they sailed to meet him. King Hakon had nine ships, with +which he lay under Fredarberg in Feeysund; and Eirik's sons had +twenty ships, with which they brought up on the south side of the +same cape, in Feeysund. King Hakon sent them a message, asking +them to go upon the land; and telling them that he had hedged in +with hazel boughs a place of combat at Rastarkalf, where there is +a flat large field, at the foot of a long and rather low ridge. +Then Eirik's sons left their ships, and went northwards over the +neck of land within Fredarberg, and onward to Rastarkalf. Then +Egil asked King Hakon to give him ten men with ten banners, and +the king did so. Then Egil went with his men under the ridge; +but King Hakon went out upon the open field with his army, and +set up his banner, and drew up his army, saying, "Let us draw up +in a long line, that they may not surround us, as they have the +most men." And so it was done; and there was a severe battle, +and a very sharp attack. Then Egil Ulserk set up the ten banners +he had with him, and placed the men who carried them so that they +should go as near the summit of the ridge as possible, and +leaving a space between each of them. They went so near the +summit that the banners could be seen over it, and moved on as if +they were coming behind the army of Eirik's sons. Now when the +men who stood uppermost in the line of the troops of Eirik's sons +saw so many flying banners advancing high over the edge of the +ridge, they supposed a great force must be following, who would +come behind their army, and between them and their ships. They +made each other acquainted with what was going on in a loud +shout, and the whole took to flight; and when the king saw it, +they fled with the rest. King Hakon now pushes on briskly with +his people, pursuing the flying, and killing many. + + + +5. OF KING GAMLE. + +When Gamle Eirikson came up the ridge of the hill he turned +round, and he observed that not more people were following than +his men had been engaged with already, and he saw it was but a +stratagem of war; so he ordered the war-horns to be blown, his +banner to be set up, and he put his men in battle order. On +this, all his Northmen stood, and turned with him, but the Danes +fled to the ships; and when King Hakon and his men came thither, +there was again sharp conflict; but now Hakon had most people. +At last the Eirik's sons' force fled, and took the road south +about the hill; but a part of their army retreated upon the hill +southwards, followed by King Hakon. There is a flat field east +of the ridge which runs westward along the range of hills, and is +bounded on its west side by a steep ridge. Gamle's men retreated +towards this ground; but Hakon followed so closely that he killed +some, and others ran west over the ridge, and were killed on that +side of it. King Hakon did not part with them till the last man +of them was killed. + + + +26. KING GAMLE AND ULSERK FALL. + +Gamle Eirikson fled from the ridge down upon the plain to the +south of the hill. There he turned himself again, and waited +until more people gathered to him. All his brothers, and many +troops of their men, assembled there. Egil Ulserk was in front, +and in advance of Hakon's men, and made a stout attack. He and +King Gamle exchanged blows with each other, and King Gamle got a +grievous wound; but Egil fell, and many people with him. Then +came Hakon the king with the troops which had followed him, and a +new battle began. King Hakon pushed on, cutting down men on both +sides of him, and killing the one upon the top of the other. So +sings Guthorm Sindre: -- + + "Scared by the sharp sword's singing sound, + Brandished in air, the foe gave ground. + The boldest warrior cannot stand + Before King Hakon's conqueringhand; + And the king's banner ever dies + Where the spear-forests thickest rise. + Altho' the king had gained of old + Enough of Freyja's tears of gold (1), + He spared himself no more than tho' + He'd had no well-filled purse to show." + +When Eirik's sons saw their men falling all round, they turned +and fled to their ships; but those who had sought the ships +before had pushed off some of them from the land, while some of +them were still hauled up and on the strand. Now the sons of +Eirik and their men plunged into the sea, and betook themselves +to swimming. Gamle Eirikson was drowned; but the other sons of +Eirik reached their ships, and set sail with what men remained. +They steered southwards to Denmark, where they stopped a while, +very ill satisfied with their expedition. + + +ENDNOTES: +(1) Freyja's husband was Od; and her tears, when she wept at the + long absence of her husband, were tears of gold. Od's + wife's tears is the skald's expression here for gold -- + understood, no doubt, as readily as any allusion to Plutus + would convey the equivalent meaning in modern poetry. -- L. + + + +27. EGIL ULSERK'S BURIAL-GROUND. + +King Hakon took all the ships of the sons of Eirik that had been +left upon the strand, and had them drawn quite up, and brought on +the land. Then he ordered that Egil Ulserk, and all the men of +his army who had fallen, should be laid in the ships, and covered +entirely over with earth and stones. King Hakon made many of the +ships to be drawn up to the field of battle, and the hillocks +over them are to be seen to the present day a little to the south +of Fredarberg. At the time when King Hakon was killed, when Glum +Geirason, in his song, boasted of King Hakon's fall, Eyvind +Skaldaspiller composed these verses on this battle: -- + + "Our dauntless king with Gamle's gore + Sprinkled his bright sword o'er and o'er: + Sprinkled the gag that holds the mouth + Of the fell demon Fenriswolf (1). + Proud swelled our warriors' hearts when he + Drove Eirik's sons out to the sea, + With all their Guatland host: but now + Our warriors weep -- Hakon lies low!" + +High standing stones mark Egil Uslerk s grave. + + +ENDNOTES: +(1) The Fenriswolf. one of the children of Loke. begotten with a + giantess, was chained to a rock, and gagged by a sword + placed in his mouth, to prevent him devouring mankind. + Fenriswolf's gag is a skaldic expression for a sword. -- L. + + + +28. NEWS OF WAR COMES TO KING HAKON. + +When King Hakon, Athelstan's foster-son, had been king for +twenty-six years after his brother Eirik had left the country, it +happened (A.D. 960) that he was at a feast in Hordaland in the +house at Fitjar on the island Stord, and he had with him at the +feast his court and many of the peasants. And just as the king +was seated at the supper-table, his watchmen who were outside +observed many ships coming sailing along from the south, and not +very far from the island. Now, said the one to the other, they +should inform the king that they thought an armed force was +coming against them; but none thought it advisable to be the +bearer of an alarm of war to the king, as he had set heavy +penalties on those who raised such alarms falsely, yet they +thought it unsuitable that the king should remain in ignorance of +what they saw. Then one of them went into the room and asked +Eyvind Finson to come out as fast as possible, for it was very +needful. Eyvind immediately came out and went to where he could +see the ships, and saw directly that a great army was on the way; +and he returned in all haste into the room, and, placing himself +before the kind, said, "Short is the hour for acting, and long +the hour for feasting." The king cast his eyes upon him, and +said, "What now is in the way?" Eyvind said -- + + "Up king! the avengers are at hand! + Eirik's bold sons approach the land! + The Judgment of the sword they crave + Against their foe. Thy wrath I brave; + Tho' well I know 'tis no light thing + To bring war-tidings to the king + And tell him 'tis no time to rest. + Up! gird your armour to your breast: + Thy honour's dearer than my life; + Therefore I say, up to the strife!" + +Then said the king, "Thou art too brave a fellow, Eyvind, to +bring us any false alarm of war." The others all said it was a +true report. The king ordered the tables to be removed, and then +he went out to look at the ships; and when it could be clearly +seen that these were ships of war, the king asked his men what +resolution they should take -- whether to give battle with the +men they had, or go on board ship and sail away northwards along +the land. "For it is easy to see," said he, "that we must now +fight against a much greater force than we ever had against us +before; although we thought just the same the last time we fought +against Gunhild's sons." No one was in a hurry to give an answer +to the king; but at last Eyvind replied to the king's speech: -- + + "Thou who in the battle-plain + Hast often poured the sharp spear-rain! + Ill it beseems our warriors brave + To fly upon the ocean wave: + To fly upon the blue wave north, + When Harald from the south comes forth, + With many a ship riding in pride + Upon the foaming ocean-tide; + With many a ship and southern viking, -- + Let us take shield in hand, brave king!" + +The king replied, "Thy counsel, Eyvind, is manly, and after my +own heart; but I will hear the opinion of others upon this +matter." Now as the king's men thought they discerned what way +the king was inclined to take, they answered that they would +rather fall bravely and like men, than fly before the Danes; +adding, that they had often gained the victory against greater +odds of numbers. The king thanked them for their resolution, and +bade them arm themselves; and all the men did so. The king put +on his armour, and girded on his sword Kvernbit, and put a gilt +helmet upon his head, and took a spear (Kesja) in his hand, and a +shield by his side. He then drew up his courtmen and the bondes +in one body, and set up his banner. + + + +29. THE ARMAMENT OF EIRIK'S SONS. + +After Gamle's death King Harald, Eirik's son, was the chief of +the brothers, and he had a great army with him from Denmark. In +their army were also their mother's brothers, -- Eyvind Skreyja, +and Alf Askman, both strong and able men, and great man slayers. +The sons of Eirik brought up with their ships off the island, and +it is said that their force was not less than six to one, -- so +much stronger in men were Eirik's sons. + + + +30. KING HAKON'S BATTLE ARRAY. + +When King Hakon had drawn up his men, it is told of him that he +threw off his armour before the battle began. So sings Eyvind +Skaldaspiller, in Hakmarmal: -- + + "They found Blorn's brother bold + Under his banner as of old, + Ready for battle. Foes advance, -- + The front rank raise the shining lance: + And now begins the bloody fray! + Now! now begins Hild's wild play! + Our noble king, whose name strikes fear + Into each Danish heart, -- whose spear + Has single-handed spilt the blood + Of many a Danish noble, -- stood + Beneath his helmet's eagle wing + Amidst his guards; but the brave king + Scorned to wear armour, while his men + Bared naked breasts against the rain + Of spear and arrow, his breast-plate rung + Against the stones; and, blithe and gay, + He rushed into the thickest fray. + With golden helm, and naked breast, + Brave Hakon played at slaughter's feast." + +King Hakon selected willingly such men for his guard or court-men +as were distinguished for their strength and bravery, as his +father King Harald also used to do; and among these was Thoralf +Skolmson the Strong, who went on one side of the king. He had +helmet and shield, spear and sword; and his sword was called by +the name of Footbreadth. It was said that Thoralf and King Hakon +were equal in strength. Thord Sjarekson speaks of it in the poem +he composed concerning Thoralf: -- + + "The king's men went with merry words + To the sharp clash of shields and flame swords, + When these wild rovers of the sea + At Fitlar fought. Stout Thoralf he + Next to the Northmen's hero came, + Scattering wide round the battle flame + For in the storm of shields not one + Ventured like him with brave Hakon." + +When both lines met there was a hard combat, and much bloodshed. +The combatants threw their spears and then drew their swords. +Then King Hakon, and Thoralf with him, went in advance of the +banner, cutting down on both sides of them. So says Eyvind +Skaldaspiller: -- + + "The body-coats of naked steel, + The woven iron coats of mail, + Like water fly before the swing + Of Hakon's sword -- the champion-king. + About each Gotland war-man's head + Helm splits, like ice beneath the tread, + Cloven by the axe or sharp swordblade, + The brave king, foremost in the fight, + Dyes crimson-red the spotless white + Of his bright shield with foemen's gore. -- + Amidst the battle's wild uproar, + Wild pealing round from shore to shore." + + + +31. FALL OF SKREYJA AND ASKMAN. + +King Hakon was very conspicuous among other men, and also when +the sun shone his helmet glanced, and thereby many weapons were +directed at him. Then Eyvind Finson took a hat and put it over +the king's helmet. Now Eyvind Skreyja called out, "Does the king +of the Norsemen hide himself, or has he fled? Where is now the +golden helmet?" Then Eyvind, and his brother Alf with him, +pushed on like fools or madmen. King Hakon shouted to Eyvind, +"Come on as thou art coming, and thou shalt find the king of the +Norsemen." So says Eyvind Skaldaspiller: -- + + "The raiser of the storm of shields, + The conqueror in battle fields, -- + Hakon the brave, the warrior's friend, + Who scatters gold with liberal hand, + Heard Skreyja's taunt, and saw him rush, + Amidst the sharp spears' thickest push, + And loudly shouted in reply -- + `If thou wilt for the victory try, + The Norseman's king thou soon shall find! + Hold onwards, friend! Hast thou a mind!" + +It was also but a short space of time before Eyvind did come up +swinging his sword, and made a cut at the king; but Thoralf +thrust his shield so hard against Eyvind that he tottered with +the shock. Now the king takes his sword Kvernbit with both +hands, and hewed Eyvind through helm and head, and clove him down +to the shoulders. Thoralf also slew Alf Askman. So says Eyvind +Skaldaspiller: -- + + "With both his hands the gallant king + Swung round his sword, and to the chin + Clove Eyvind down: his faithless mail + Against it could no more avail, + Than the thin plank against the shock + When the ship's side beats on the rock. + By his bright sword with golden haft + Thro' helm, and head, and hair, was cleft + The Danish champion; and amain, + With terror smitten, fled his men." + +After this fall of the two brothers, King Hakon pressed on so +hard that all men gave way before his assault. Now fear came +over the army of Eirik's sons, and the men began to fly; and King +Hakon, who was at the head of his men, pressed on the flying, and +hewed down oft and hard. Then flew an arrow, one of the kind +called "flein", into Hakon's arm, into the muscles below the +shoulder; and it is said by many people that Gunhild's shoe-boy, +whose name was Kisping, ran out and forwards amidst the confusion +of arms, called out "Make room for the king-killer," and shot +King Hakon with the flein. Others again say that nobody could +tell who shot the king, which is indeed the most likely; for +spears, arrows, and all kinds of missiles flew as thick as a +snow-drift. Many of the people of Eirik's sons were killed, both +on the field of battle and on the way to the ships, and also on +the strand, and many threw themselves into the water. Many also, +among whom were Eirik's sons, got on board their ships, and rowed +away as fast as they could, and Hakon's men after them. So says +Thord Sjarekson: -- + + "The wolf. the murderer, and the thief, + Fled from before the people's chief: + Few breakers of the peace grew old + Under the Northmen's king so bold. + When gallant Hakon lost his life + Black was the day, and dire the strife. + It was bad work for Gunhild's sons, + Leading their pack of Hungry Danes + From out the south, to have to fly, + And many a bonde leave to die, + Leaning his heavy wounded head + On the oar-bench for feather-bed. + Thoralf was nearest to the side + Of gallant Hakon in the tide + Of battle; his the sword that best + Carved out the raven's bloody feast: + Amidst the heaps of foemen slain + He was named bravest on the plain." + + + +32. HAKON'S DEATH. + +When King Hakon came out to his ship he had his wound bound up; +but the blood ran from it so much and so constantly, that it +could not be stopped; and when the day was drawing to an end his +strength began to leave him. Then he told his men that he wanted +to go northwards to his house at Alreksstader; but when he came +north, as far as Hakonarhella Hill, they put in towards the land, +for by this time the king was almost lifeless. Then he called +his friends around him, and told them what he wished to be done +with regard to his kingdom. He had only one child, a daughter, +called Thora, and had no son. Now he told them to send a message +to Eirik's sons, that they should be kings over the country; but +asked them to hold his friends in respect and honour. "And if +fate," added he, "should prolong my life, I will, at any rate, +leave the country, and go to a Christian land, and do penance for +what I have done against God; but should I die in heathen land, +give me any burial you think fit." Shortly afterwards Hakon +expired, at the little hill on the shore-side at which he was +born. So great was the sorrow over Hakon's death, that he was +lamented both by friends and enemies; and they said that never +again would Norway see such a king. His friends removed his body +to Saeheim, in North Hordaland, and made a great mound, in which +they laid the king in full armour and in his best clothes, but +with no other goods. They spoke over his grave, as heathen +people are used to do, and wished him in Valhal. Eyvind +Skaldaspiller composed a poem on the death of King Hakon, and on +how well he was received in Valhal. The poem is called +"Hakonarmal": -- + + "In Odin's hall an empty place + Stands for a king of Yngve's race; + `Go, my valkyries,' Odin said, + `Go forth, my angels of the dead, + Gondul and Skogul, to the plain + Drenched with the battle's bloody rain, + And to the dying Hakon tell, + Here in Valhal shall he dwell.' + + "At Stord, so late a lonely shore, + Was heard the battle's wild uproar; + The lightning of the flashing sword + Burned fiercely at the shore of Stord. + From levelled halberd and spearhead + Life-blood was dropping fast and red; + And the keen arrows' biting sleet + Upon the shore at Stord fast beat. + + "Upon the thundering cloud of shield + Flashed bright the sword-storm o'er the field; + And on the plate-mail rattled loud + The arrow-shower's rushing cloud, + In Odin's tempest-weather, there + Swift whistling through the angry air; + And the spear-torrents swept away + Ranks of brave men from light of day. + + "With batter'd shield, and blood-smear'd sword + Slits one beside the shore of Stord, + With armour crushed and gashed sits he, + A grim and ghastly sight to see; + And round about in sorrow stand + The warriors of his gallant band: + Because the king of Dags' old race + In Odin's hall must fill a place. + + "Then up spake Gondul, standing near + Resting upon her long ash spear, -- + `Hakon! the gods' cause prospers well, + And thou in Odin's halls shalt dwell!' + The king beside the shore of Stord + The speech of the valkyrie heard, + Who sat there on his coal-black steed, + With shield on arm and helm on head. + + "Thoughtful, said Hakon, `Tell me why + Ruler of battles, victory + Is so dealt out on Stord's red plain? + Have we not well deserved to gain?' + `And is it not as well dealt out?' + Said Gondul. `Hearest thou not the shout? + The field is cleared -- the foemen run -- + The day is ours -- the battle won!' + + "Then Skogul said, `My coal-black steed, + Home to the gods I now must speed, + To their green home, to tell the tiding + That Hakon's self is thither riding.' + To Hermod and to Brage then + Said Odin, `Here, the first of men, + Brave Hakon comes, the Norsemen's king, -- + Go forth, my welcome to him bring.' + + "Fresh from the battle-field came in, + Dripping with blood, the Norsemen'a king. + `Methinks,' said he, great Odin's will + Is harsh, and bodes me further ill; + Thy son from off the field to-day + From victory to snatch away!' + But Odin said, `Be thine the joy + Valhal gives, my own brave boy!' + + "And Brage said, `Eight brothers here + Welcome thee to Valhal's cheer, + To drain the cup, or fights repeat + Where Hakon Eirik's earls beat.' + Quoth the stout king, 'And shall my gear, + Helm, sword, and mail-coat, axe and spear, + Be still at hand! 'Tis good to hold + Fast by our trusty friends of old.' + + "Well was it seen that Hakon still + Had saved the temples from all ill (1); + For the whole council of the gods + Welcomed the king to their abodes. + Happy the day when men are born + Like Hakon, who all base things scorn. -- + Win from the brave and honoured name, + And die amidst an endless fame. + + "Sooner shall Fenriswolf devour + The race of man from shore to shore, + Than such a grace to kingly crown + As gallant Hakon want renown. + Life, land, friends, riches, all will fly, + And we in slavery shall sigh. + But Hakon in the blessed abodes + For ever lives with the bright gods." + + +ENDNOTES: +(1) Hakon, although a Christian, appears to have favoured the + old religion, and spared the temples of Odin, and therefore + a place in Valhal is assigned him. -- L. + + + +SAGA OF KING HARALD GRAFELD AND OF EARL HAKON SON OF SIGURD. + + +PRELIMINARY REMARKS + +This saga might be called Gunhild's Saga, as she is the chief +person in it. The reign of King Harald and Earl Hakon is more +fully described in the next saga, that is, Olaf Trygvason's. +Other literature on this epoch: + +"Agrip" (chap. 8), "Historia Norvegia", (p. 12), "Thjodrek" +(chap. 5), "Saxo" (pp. 479-482), "Egla" (chaps. 81, 82), +"Floamanna" (chap. 12), "Fareyinga" (chaps. 2, 4, 10), "Halfred's +Saga" (chap. 2), "Hord Grimkelsons Saga" (chaps. 13, 18), +"Kormak" (chaps. 19-27), "Laxdaela" (chaps. 19-21), "Njala" +(chaps, 3-6). + +The skalds of this saga are: -- Glum Geirason, Kormak Agmundson, +Eyvind Skaldaspiller, and Einar Helgason Skalaglam. + + + +1. GOVERNMENT OF THE SONS OF EIRIK. + +When King Hakon was killed, the sons of Eirik took the +sovereignty of Norway. Harald, who was the oldest of the living +brothers, was over them in dignity. Their mother Gunhild, who +was called the King-mother, mixed herself much in the affairs of +the country. There were many chiefs in the land at that time. +There was Trygve Olafson in the Eastland, Gudrod Bjornson in +Vestfold, Sigurd earl of Hlader in the Throndhjem land; but +Gunhild's sons held the middle of the country the first winter. +There went messages and ambassadors between Gunhild's sons and +Trygve and Gudrod, and all was settled upon the footing that they +should hold from Gunhild's sons the same part of the country +which they formerly had held under King Hakon. A man called Glum +Geirason, who was King Harald's skald, and was a very brave man, +made this song upon King Hakon's death: -- + + "Gamle is avenged by Harald! + Great is thy deed, thou champion bold! + The rumour of it came to me + In distant lands beyond the sea, + How Harald gave King Hakon's blood + To Odin's ravens for their food." + +This song was much favoured. When Eyvind Finson heard of it he +composed the song which was given before, viz.: -- + + "Our dauntless king with Gamle's gore + Sprinkled his bright sword o'er and o'er," &c. + +This song also was much favoured, and was spread widely abroad; +and when King Harald came to hear of it, he laid a charge against +Evyind affecting his life; but friends made up the quarrel, on +the condition that Eyvind should in future be Harald's skald, as +he had formerly been King Hakon's. There was also some +relationship between them, as Gunhild, Eyvind's mother, was a +daughter of Earl Halfdan, and her mother was Ingibjorg, a +daughter of Harald Harfager. Thereafter Eyvind made a song about +King Harald: -- + + "Guardian of Norway, well we know + Thy heart failed not when from the bow + The piercing arrow-hail sharp rang + On shield and breast-plate, and the clang + Of sword resounded in the press + Of battle, like the splitting ice; + For Harald, wild wolf of the wood, + Must drink his fill of foeman's blood." + +Gunhild's sons resided mostly in the middle of the country, for +they did not think it safe for them to dwell among the people of +Throndhjem or of Viken, where King Hakon's best friends lived; +and also in both places there were many powerful men. Proposals +of agreement then passed between Gunhild~s sons and Earl Sigurd, + or they got no scat from the Throndhjem country; and at last an +agreement was concluded between the kings and the earl, and +confirmed by oath. Earl Sigurd was to get the same power in the +Throndhjem land which he had possessed under King Hakon, and on +that they considered themselves at peace. All Gunhild's sons had +the character of being penurious; and it was said they hid their +money in the ground. Eyvind Skaldaspiller made a song about +this: -- + + "Main-mast of battle! Harald bold! + In Hakon's days the skald wore gold + Upon his falcon's seat; he wore + Rolf Krake's seed, the yellow ore + Sown by him as he fled away, + The avenger Adils' speed to stay. + The gold crop grows upon the plain; + But Frode's girls so gay (1) in vain + Grind out the golden meal, while those + Who rule o'er Norway's realm like foes, + In mother earth's old bosom hide + The wealth which Hakon far and wide + Scattered with generous hand: the sun + Shone in the days of that great one, + On the gold band of Fulla's brow,(2) + On gold-ringed hands that bend the bow, + On the skald's hand; but of the ray + Of bright gold, glancing like the spray + Of sun-lit waves, no skald now sings -- + Buried are golden chains and rings." + +Now when King Harald heard this song, he sent a message to Eyvind +to come to him, and when Eyvind came made a charge against him of +being unfaithful. "And it ill becomes thee," said the king, "to +be my enemy, as thou hast entered into my service." Eyvind then +made these verses: -- + + "One lord I had before thee, Harald! + One dear-loved lord! Now am I old, + And do not wish to change again, -- + To that loved lord, through strife and pain, + Faithful I stood; still true to Hakon, -- + To my good king, and him alone. + But now I'm old and useless grown, + My hands are empty, wealth is flown; + I am but fir for a short space + In thy court-hall to fill a place." + +But King Harald forced Eyvind to submit himself to his clemency. +Eyvind had a great gold ring, which was called Molde, that had +been dug up out of the earth long since. This ring the King said +he must have as the mulet for the offence; and there was no help +for it. Then Eyvind sang: -- + + "I go across the ocean-foam, + Swift skating to my Iceland home + Upon the ocean-skates, fast driven + By gales by Thurse's witch fire given. + For from the falcon-bearing hand + Harald has plucked the gold snake band + My father wore -- by lawless might + Has taken what is mine by right." + +Eyvind went home; but it is not told that he ever came near the +king again. + + +ENDNOTES: +(1) Menja and Fenja were strong girls of the giant race, whom + Frode bought in Sweden to grind gold and good luck to him; + and their meal means gold. -- L. +(2) Fulla was one of Frig's attendants, who wore a gold band on + the forehead, and the figure means gold, -- that the sun + shone on gold rings on the hands of the skalds in Hakon's + days. -- L. + + + +2. CHRISTIANITY OF GUNHILD'S SONS. + +Gunhild's sons embraced Christianity in England, as told before; +but when they came to rule over Norway they made no progress in +spreading Christianity -- only they pulled down the temples of +the idols, and cast away the sacrifices where they had it in +their power, and raised great animosity by doing so. The good +crops of the country were soon wasted in their days, because +there were many kings, and each had his court about him. They +had therefore great expenses, and were very greedy. Besides, +they only observed those laws of King Hakon which suited +themselves. They were, however, all of them remarkably handsome +men -- stout, strong, and expert in all exercises. So says Glum +Geirason, in the verses he composed about Harald, Gunhild's son: +-- + + "The foeman's terror, Harald bold, + Had gained enough of yellow gold; + Had Heimdal's teeth (1) enough in store, + And understood twelve arts or more." + +The brothers sometimes went out on expeditions together, and +sometimes each on his own account. They were fierce, but brave +and active; and great warriors, and very successful. + + +ENDNOTES: +(1) Heimdal was one of the gods, whose horse was called Gold- + top; and the horse's teeth were of gold. + + + +3. COUNCILS BY GUNHILD AND HER SONS. + +Gunhild the King-mother, and her sons, often met, and talked +together upon the government of the country. Once Gunhild asked +her sons what they intended to do with their kingdom of +Throndhjem. "Ye have the title of king, as your forefathers had +before you; but ye have little land or people, and there are many +to divide with. In the East, at Viken, there are Trygve and +Gudrod; and they have some right, from relationship, to their +governments. There is besides Earl Sigurd ruling over the whole +Throndhjem country; and no reason can I see why ye let so large a +kingdom be ruled by an earl, and not by yourselves. It appears +wonderful to me that ye go every summer upon viking cruises +against other lands, and allow an earl within the country to take +your father's heritage from you. Your grandfather, whose name +you bear, King Harald, thought it but a small matter to take an +earl's life and land when he subdued all Norway, and held it +under him to old age." + +Harald replied, "It is not so easy, mother, to cut off Earl +Sigurd as to slay a kid or a calf. Earl Sigurd is of high birth, +powerful in relations, popular, and prudent; and I think if the +Throndhjem people knew for certain there was enmity between us, +they would all take his side, and we could expect only evil from +them. I don't think it would be safe for any of us brothers to +fall into the hands of the Throndhjem people." + +Then said Gunhild, "We shall go to work another way, and not put +ourselves forward. Harald and Erling shall come in harvest to +North More, and there I shall meet you, and we shall consult +together what is to be done." This was done. + + + +4. GUNHILD'S SONS AND GRJOTGARD. + +Earl Sigurd had a brother called Grjotgard, who was much younger, +and much less respected; in fact, was held in no title of honour. +He had many people, however, about him, and in summer went on +viking cruises, and gathered to himself property. Now King +Harald sent messengers to Throndhjem with offers of friendship, +and with presents. The messengers declared that King Harald was +willing to be on the same friendly terms with the earl that King +Hakon had been; adding, that they wished the earl to come to King +Harald, that their friendship might be put on a firm footing. +The Earl Sigurd received well the king's messengers and friendly +message, but said that on account of his many affairs he could +not come to the king. He sent many friendly gifts, and many glad +and grateful words to the king, in return for his friendship. +With this reply the messengers set off, and went to Grjotgard, +for whom they had the same message, and brought him good +presents, and offered him King Harald's friendship, and invited +him to visit the king. Grjotgard promised to come and at the +appointed time he paid a visit to King Harald and Gunhild, and +was received in the most friendly manner. They treated him on +the most intimate footing, so that Grjotgard had access to their +private consultations and secret councils. At last the +conversation, by an understanding between the king and queen, was +turned upon Earl Sigurd; and they spoke to Grjotgard about the +earl having kept him so long in obscurity, and asked him if he +would not join the king's brothers in an attack on the earl. If +he would join with them, the king promised Grjotgard that he +should be his earl, and have the same government that Sigurd had. +It came so far that a secret agreement was made between them, +that Grjotgard should spy out the most favourable opportunity of +attacking by surprise Earl Sigurd, and should give King Harald +notice of it. After this agreement Grjotgard returned home with +many good presents from the king. + + + +5. SIGURD BURNT IN A HOUSE IN STJORADAL + +Earl Sigurd went in harvest into Stjoradal to guest-quarters, and +from thence went to Oglo to a feast. The earl usually had many +people about him, for he did not trust the king; but now, after +friendly messages had passed between the king and him, he had no +great following of people with him. Then Grjotgard sent word to +the king that he could never expect a better opportunity to fall +upon Earl Sigurd; and immediately, that very evening, Harald and +Erling sailed into Throndhjem fjord with several ships and many +people. They sailed all night by starlight, and Grjotgard came +out to meet them. Late in the night they came to Oglo, where +Earl Sigurd was at the feast, and set fire to the house; and +burnt the house, the earl, and all his men. As soon as it was +daylight, they set out through the fjord, and south to More, +where they remained a long time. + + + +6. HISTORY OF HAKON, SIGURD'S SON. + +Hakon, the son of Earl Sigurd, was up in the interior of the +Throndhjem country when he heard this news. Great was the tumult +through all the Throndhjem land, and every vessel that could swim +was put into the water; and as soon as the people were gathered +together they took Earl Sigurd's son Hakon to be their earl and +the leader of the troops, and the whole body steered out of +Throndhjem fjord. When Gunhild's sons heard of this, they set +off southwards to Raumsdal and South More; and both parties kept +eye on each other by their spies. Earl Sigurd was killed two +years after the fall of King Hakon (A.D. 962). So says Eyvind +Skaldaspiller in the "Haleygjatal": -- + + "At Oglo. as I've heard, Earl Sigurd + Was burnt to death by Norway's lord, -- + Sigurd, who once on Hadding's grave + A feast to Odin's ravens gave. + In Oglo's hall, amidst the feast, + When bowls went round and ale flowed fast, + He perished: Harald lit the fire + Which burnt to death the son of Tyr." + +Earl Hakan, with the help of his friends, maintained himself in +the Throndhjem country for three years; and during that time +(A.D. 963-965) Gunhild's sons got no revenues from it. Hakon had +many a battle with Gunhild's sons, and many a man lost his life +on both sides. Of this Einar Skalaglam speaks in his lay, called +"Vellekla," which he composed about Earl Hakon: -- + + "The sharp bow-shooter on the sea + Spread wide his fleet, for well loved he + The battle storm: well loved the earl + His battle-banner to unfurl, + O'er the well-trampled battle-field + He raised the red-moon of his shield; + And often dared King Eirik's son + To try the fray with the Earl Hakon." + +And he also says- + + "Who is the man who'll dare to say + That Sigurd's son avoids the fray? + He gluts the raven -- he ne'er fears + The arrow's song or flight of spears, + With thundering sword he storms in war, + As Odin dreadful; or from far + He makes the arrow-shower fly + To swell the sail of victory. + The victory was dearly bought, + And many a viking-fight was fought + Before the swinger of the sword + Was of the eastern country lord." + +And Einar tells also how Earl Hakon avenged his father's +murderer: -- + + "I praise the man, my hero he, + Who in his good ship roves the sea, + Like bird of prey, intent to win + Red vengeance for his slaughtered kin. + From his blue sword the iron rain + That freezes life poured down amain + On him who took his father's life, + On him and his men in the strife. + To Odin many a soul was driven, -- + To Odin many a rich gift given. + Loud raged the storm on battle-field -- + Axe rang on helm, and sword on shield." + +The friends on both sides at last laid themselves between, and +brought proposals of peace; for the bondes suffered by this +strife and war in the land. At last it was brought to this, by +the advice of prudent men, that Earl Hakon should have the same +power in the Throndhjem land which his father Earl Sigurd had +enjoyed; and the kings, on the other hand, should have the same +dominion as King Hakon had: and this agreement was settled with +the fullest promises of fidelity to it. Afterwards a great +friendship arose between Earl Hakon and Gunhild, although they +sometimes attempted to deceive each other. And thus matters +stood for three years longer (A.D. 966-968), in which time Earl +Hakon sat quietly in his dominions. + + + +7. OF HARALD GRAFELD. + +King Hakon had generally his seat in Hordaland and Rogaland, and +also his brothers; but very often, also, they went to Hardanger. +One summer it happened that a vessel came from Iceland belonging +to Icelanders, and loaded with skins and peltry. They sailed to +Hardanger, where they heard the greatest number of people +assembled; but when the folks came to deal with them, nobody +would buy their skins. Then the steersman went to King Harald, +whom he had been acquainted with before, and complained of his +ill luck. The king promised to visit him, and did so. King +Harald was very condescending, and full of fun. He came with a +fully manned boat, looked at the skins, and then said to the +steersman, "Wilt thou give me a present of one of these gray- +skins?" "Willingly," said the steersman, "if it were ever so +many." On this the king wrapped himself up in a gray-skin, and +went back to his boat; but before they rowed away from the ship, +every man in his suite bought such another skin as the king wore +for himself. In a few days so many people came to buy skins, +that not half of them could be served with what they wanted; and +thereafter the king was called Harald Grafeld (Grayskin). + + + +8. EARL EIRIK'S BIRTH. + +Earl Hakon came one winter to the Uplands to a feast, and it so +happened that he had intercourse with a girl of mean birth. Some +time after the girl had to prepare for her confinement, and she +bore a child, a boy, who had water poured on him, and was named +Eirik. The mother carried the boy to Earl Hakon, and said that +he was the father. The earl placed him to be brought up with a +man called Thorleif the Wise, who dwelt in Medaldal, and was a +rich and powerful man, and a great friend of the earl. Eirik +gave hopes very early that he would become an able man, was +handsome in countenance, and stout and strong for a child; but +the earl did not pay much attention to him. The earl himself was +one of the handsomest men in countenance, -- not tall, but very +strong, and well practised in all kinds of exercises; and witha1 +prudent, of good understanding, and a deadly man at arms. + + + +9. KING TRYGVE OLAFSON'S MURDER. + +It happened one harvest (A.D. 962) that Earl Hakon, on a journey +in the Uplands, came to Hedemark; and King Trygve Olafson and +King Gudrod Bjornson met him there, and Dale-Gudbrand also came +to the meeting. They had agreed to meet, and they talked +together long by themselves; but so much only was known of their +business, that they were to be friends of each other. They +parted, and each went home to his own kingdom. Gunhild and her +sons came to hear of this meeting, and they suspected it must +have been to lay a treasonable plot against the kings; and they +often talked of this among themselves. When spring (A.D. 963) +began to set in, King Harald and his brother King Gudrod +proclaimed that they were to make a viking cruise, as usual, +either in the West sea, or the Baltic. The people accordingly +assembled, launched the ships into the sea, and made themselves +ready to sail. When they were drinking the farewell ale, -- and +they drank bravely, -- much and many things were talked over at +the drink-table, and, among other things, were comparisons +between different men, and at last between the kings themselves. +One said that King Harald excelled his brothers by far, and in +every way. On this King Gudrod was very angry, and said that he +was in no respect behind Harald, and was ready to prove it. +Instantly both parties were so inflamed that they challenged each +other to battle, and ran to their arms. But some of the guests +who were less drunk, and had more understanding, came between +them, and quieted them; and each went to his ship, but nobody +expected that they would all sail together. Gudrod sailed east +ward along the land, and Harald went out to sea, saying he would +go to the westward; but when he came outside of the islands he +steered east along the coast, outside of the rocks and isles. +Gudrod, again, sailed inside, through the usual channel, to +Viken, and eastwards to Folden. He then sent a message to King +Trygve to meet him, that they might make a cruise together in +summer in the Baltic to plunder. Trygve accepted willingly, and +as a friend, the invitation; and as heard King Gudrod had but few +people with him, he came to meet him with a single boat. They +met at Veggen, to the east of Sotanes; but just as they were come +to the meeting place, Gudrod's men ran up and killed King Trygve +and twelve men. He lies buried at a place called Trygve's Cairn +(A.D. 963). + + + +10. KING GUDROD'S FALL. + +King Harald sailed far outside of the rocks and isles; but set +his course to Viken, and came in the night-time to Tunsberg, and +heard that Gudrod Bjornson was at a feast a little way up the +country. Then King Harald set out immediately with his +followers, came in the night, and surrounded the house. King +Gudrod Bjornson went out with his people; but after a short +resistance he fell, and many men with him. Then King Harald +joined his brother King Gudrod, and they subdued all Viken. + + + +11. OF HARALD GRENSKE. + +King Gudrod Bjornson had made a good and suitable marriage, and +had by his wife a son called Harald, who had been sent to be +fostered to Grenland to a lenderman called Hroe the White. +Hroe's son, called Hrane Vidforle (the Far-travelled), was +Harald's foster-brother, and about the same age. After his +father Gudrod's fall, Harald, who was called Grenske, fled to the +Uplands, and with him his foster-brother Hrane, and a few people. +Harald staid a while there among his relations; but as Eirik's +sons sought after every man who interfered with them, and +especially those who might oppose them, Harald Grenske's friends +and relations advised him to leave the country. Harald therefore +went eastward into Svithjod, and sought shipmates, that he might +enter into company with those who went out a cruising to gather +property. Harald became in this way a remarkably able man. +There was a man in Svithjod at that time called Toste, one of the +most powerful and clever in the land among those who had no high +name or dignity; and he was a great warrior, who had been often +in battle, and was therefore called Skoglar-Toste. Harald +Grenske came into his company, and cruised with Toste in summer; +and wherever Harald came he was well thought of by every one. In +the winter Harald, after passing two years in the Uplands, took +up his abode with Toste, and lived five years with him. Toste +had a daughter, who was both young and handsome, but she was +proud and high-minded. She was called Sigrid, and was afterwards +married to the Swedish king, Eirik the Victorious, and had a son +by him, called Olaf the Swede, who was afterwards king of +Svithjod. King Eirik died in a sick-bed at Upsala ten years +after the death of Styrbjorn. + + + +12. EARL HAKON'S FEUDS. + +Gunhild's sons levied a great army in Viken (A.D. 963), and +sailed along the land northwards, collecting people and ships on +the way out of every district. They then made known their +intent, to proceed northwards with their army against Earl Hakon +in Throndhjem. When Earl Hakon heard this news, he also +collected men, and fitted out ships; and when he heard what an +overwhelming force Gunhild's sons had with them, he steered south +with his fleet to More, pillaging wherever he came, and killing +many people. He then sent the whole of the bonde army back to +Throndhjem; but he himself, with his men-at-arms, proceeded by +both the districts of More and Raumsdal, and had his spies out to +the south of Stad to spy the army of Gunhild's sons; and when he +heard they were come into the Fjords, and were waiting for a fair +wind to sail northwards round Stad, Earl Hakon set out to sea +from the north side of Stad, so far that his sails could not be +seen from the land, and then sailed eastward on a line with the +coast, and came to Denmark, from whence he sailed into the +Baltic, and pillaged there during the summer. Gunhild's sons +conducted their army north to Throndhjem, and remained there the +whole summer collecting the scat and duties. But when summer was +advanced they left Sigurd Slefa and Gudron behind; and the other +brothers returned eastward with the levied army they had taken up +in summer. + + + +13. OF EARL HAKON AND GUNHILD'S SONS. + +Earl Hakon, towards harvest (A.D. 963), sailed into the Bothnian +Gulf to Helsingjaland, drew his ships up there on the beach, and +took the land-ways through Helsingjaland and Jamtaland, and so +eastwards round the dividing ridge (the Kjol, or keel of the +country), and down into the Throndhjem district. Many people +streamed towards him, and he fitted out ships. When the sons of +Gunhild heard of this they got on board their ships, and sailed +out of the Fjord; and Earl Hakon came to his seat at Hlader, and +remained there all winter. The sons of Gunhild, on the other +hand, occupied More; and they and the earl attacked each other in +turns, killing each other's people. Earl Hakon kept his dominions +of Throndhjem, and was there generally in the winter; but in +summer he sometimes went to Helsingjaland, where he went on board +of his ships and sailed with them down into the Baltic, and +plundered there; and sometimes he remained in Throndhjem, and +kept an army on foot, so that Gunhild's sons could get no hold +northwards of Stad. + + + +14. SIGURD SLEFA'S MURDER. + +One summer Harald Grayskin with his troops went north to +Bjarmaland, where be forayed, and fought a great battle with the +inhabitants on the banks of the Vina (Dwina). King Harald gained +the victory, killed many people, plundered and wasted and burned +far and wide in the land, and made enormous booty. Glum Geirason +tells of it thus: -- + + "I saw the hero Harald chase + With bloody sword Bjarme's race: + They fly before him through the night, + All by their burning city's light. + On Dwina's bank, at Harald's word, + Arose the storm of spear and sword. + In such a wild war-cruise as this, + Great would he be who could bring peace." + +King Sigurd Slefa came to the Herse Klyp's house. Klyp was a son +of Thord, and a grandson of Hordakare, and was a man of power and +great family. He was not at home; but his wife Alof give a good +reception to the king, and made a great feast at which there was +much drinking. Alof was a daughter of Asbjorn, and sister to +Jarnskegge, north in Yrjar. Asbjorn's brother was called +Hreidar, who was father to Styrkar, whose son was Eindride, +father of Einar Tambaskielfer. In the night the king went to bed +to Alof against her will, and then set out on his journey. The +harvest thereafter, King Harald and his brother King Sigurd Slefa +went to Vors, and summoned the bondes to a Thing. There the +bondes fell on them, and would have killed them, but they escaped +and took different roads. King Harald went to Hardanger, but +King Sigurd to Alrekstader. Now when the Herse Klyp heard of +this, he and his relations assembled to attack the king; and +Vemund Volubrjot (1) was chief of their troop. Now when they +came to the house they attacked the king, and Herse Klyp, it is +said, ran him through with his sword and killed him; but +instantly Klyp was killed on the spot by Erling Gamle (A.D. 965). + + +ENDNOTES: +(1) Volubrjotr. -- Literally "the one who breaks the vala", that + is, breaks the skulls of witches. + + + +15. GRJOTGARD'S FALL. + +King Harald Grafeld and his brother King Gudrod gathered together +a great army in the east country, with which they set out +northwards to Throndhjem (A.D. 968). When Earl Hakon heard of it +he collected men, and set out to More, where he plundered. There +his father's brother, Grjotgard, had the command and defence of +the country on account of Gunhild's sons, and he assembled an +army by order of the kings. Earl Hakon advanced to meet him, and +gave him battle; and there fell Grjotgard and two other earls, +and many a man besides. So says Einar Skalaglam: -- + + "The helm-crown'd Hakon, brave as stout, + Again has put his foes to rout. + The bowl runs o'er with Odin's mead, (1) + That fires the skald when mighty deed + Has to be sung. Earl Hakon's sword, + In single combat, as I've heard, + Three sons of earls from this one fray + To dwell with Odin drove away." (2) + +Thereafter Earl Hakon went out to sea, and sailed outside the +coast, and came to Denmark. He went to the Danish King, Harald +Gormson, and was well received by him, and staid with him all +winter (A.D. 969). At that time there was also with the Danish +king a man called Harald, a son of Knut Gormson, and a brother's +son of King Harald. He was lately come home from a long viking +cruise, on which he had gathered great riches, and therefore he +was called Gold Harald. He thought he had a good chance of +coming to the Danish kingdom. + + +ENDNOTES: +(1) Odin's mead, called Bodn, was the blood or mead the sons of + Brage, the god of poets, drank to inspire them. -- L. +(2) To dwell with Odin, -- viz. slew them. -- L. + + + +16. KING ERLING'S FALL. + +King Harald Grafeld and his brothers proceeded northwards to +Throndhjem, where they met no opposition. They levied the +scat-duties, and all other revenues, and laid heavy penalties +upon the bondes; for the kings had for a long time received but +little income from Throndhjem, because Earl Hakon was there with +many troops, and was at variance with these kings. In autumn +(A.D. 968) King Harald went south with the greater part of the +men-at-arms, but King Erlin remained behind with his men. He +raised great contributions from the bondes, and pressed severely +on them; at which the bondes murmured greatly, and submitted to +their losses with impatience. In winter they gathered together +in a great force to go against King Erling, just as he was at a +feast; and they gave battle to him, and he with the most of his +men fell (A.D. 969). + + + +17. THE SEASONS IN NORWAY AT THIS TIME. + +While Gunhild's sons reigned in Norway the seasons were always +bad, and the longer they reigned the worse were the crops; and +the bondes laid the blame on them. They were very greedy, and +used the bondes harshly. It came at length to be so bad that +fish, as well as corn, were wanting. In Halogaland there was the +greatest famine and distress; for scarcely any corn grew, and +even snow was lying, and the cattle were bound in the byres (1) +all over the country until midsummer. Eyvind Skaldaspiller +describes it in his poem, as he came outside of his house and +found a thick snowdrift at that season: -- + + "Tis midsummer, yet deep snows rest + On Odin's mother's frozen breast: + Like Laplanders, our cattle-kind + In stall or stable we must bind." + + +ENDNOTES: +(1) Byres = gards or farms. + + + +18. THE ICELANDERS AND EYVIND THE SKALD. + +Eyvind composed a poem about the people of Iceland, for which +they rewarded him by each bonde giving him three silver pennies, +of full weight and white in the fracture. And when the silver +was brought together at the Althing, the people resolved to have +it purified, and made into a row of clasps; and after the +workmanship of the silver was paid, the row of clasps was valued +at fifty marks. This they sent to Eyvind; but Eyvind was obliged +to separate the clasps from each other, and sell them to buy food +for his household. But the same spring a shoal of herrings set +in upon the fishing ground beyond the coast-side, and Eyvind +manned a ship's boat with his house servants and cottars, and +rowed to where the herrings were come, and sang: -- + + "Now let the steed of ocean bound + O'er the North Sea with dashing sound: + Let nimble tern and screaming gull + Fly round and round -- our net is full. + Fain would I know if Fortune sends + A like provision to my friends. + Welcome provision 'tis, I wot, + That the whale drives to our cook's pot." + +So entirely were his movable goods exhausted, that he was obliged +to sell his arrows to buy herrings, or other meat for his table: +-- + + "Our arms and ornaments of gold + To buy us food we gladly sold: + The arrows of the bow gave we + For the bright arrows of the sea." (1) + + +ENDNOTES: +(1) Herrings, from their swift darting along, are called the + arrows of the sea. + + + +KING OLAF TRYGVASON'S SAGA. + + +PRELIMINARY REMARKS. + +Hitherto the narrative has been more or less fragmentary. With +Olaf Trygvason's Saga reliable history begins, and the narration +is full and connected. The story of Hakon the earl is +incorporated in this saga. + +Accounts of Olaf Trygvason may be found in Od the Monk's +legendary saga, in parts of "Agrip", "Historia Norvegiae", and in +Thjodrek. Icelandic works on this epoch are: + +"Egla", "Eyrbyggja", "Finboga", "Floamanna", "Faereyinga", +"Hallfredar Saga", "Havardar Saga", "Are's Islendinga-bok", +"Kristni Saga", "Laxdaela", "Ljosvetninga", "Njala", +"Orkneyinga", "Viga Glums Saga", and "Viga Styrs Saga". + +The skalds quoted are: Glum Geirason, Eyvind Finson, +Skaldaspiller, Einar Skalaglam, Tind Halkelson, Eyjolf Dadaskald, +Hallarstein, Halfred Vandraedaskald, Haldor Ukristne, Skule +Thorsteinson, and Thord Kolbeinson. + + + +1. OLAF TRYGVASON'S BIRTH. + +King Trygve Olafson had married a wife who was called Astrid. +She was a daughter of Eirik Bjodaskalle, a great man, who dwelt +at Oprustader. But after Trygve's death (A.D. 963) Astrid fled, +and privately took with her all the loose property she could. +Her foster-father, Thorolf Lusarskeg, followed her, and never +left her; and others of her faithful followers spied about to +discover her enemies, and where they were. Astrid was pregnant +with a child of King Trygve, and she went to a lake, and +concealed herself in a holm or small island in it with a few men. +Here her child was born, and it was a boy; and water was poured +over it, and it was called Olaf after the grandfather. Astrid +remained all summer here in concealment; but when the nights +became dark, and the day began to shorten and the weather to be +cold, she was obliged to take to the land, along with Thorolf and +a few other men. They did not seek for houses unless in the +night-time, when they came to them secretly; and they spoke to +nobody. One evening, towards dark, they came to Oprustader, +where Astrid's father Eirik dwelt, and privately sent a man to +Eirik to tell him; and Eirik took them to an out-house, and +spread a table for them with the best of food. When Astrid had +been here a short time her travelling attendants left her, and +none remained, behind with her but two servant girls, her child +Olaf, Thorolf Lusarskeg, and his son Thorgils, who was six years +old; and they remained all winter (A.D. 964). + + + +2. OF GUNHILD S SONS. + +After Trygve Olafson's murder, Harald Grafeld and his brother +Gudrod went to the farm which he owned; but Astrid was gone, and +they could learn no tidings of her. A loose report came to their +ears that she was pregnant to King Trygve; but they soon went +away northwards, as before related. As soon as they met their +mother Gunhild they told her all that had taken place. She +inquired particularly about Astrid, and they told her the report +they had heard; but as Gunhild's sons the same harvest and winter +after had bickerings with Earl Hakon, as before related, they did +not seek after Astrid and her son that winter. + + + +3. ASTRID'S JOURNEY. + +The spring after (A.D. 964) Gunhild sent spies to the Uplands, +and all the way down to Viken, to spy what they could about +Astrid; and her men came back, and could only tell her that +Astrid must be with her father Eirik, and it was probable was +bringing up her infant, the son of Trygve. Then Gunhild, without +delay, sent off men well furnished with arms and horses, and in +all a troop of thirty; and as their leader she sent a particular +friend of her own, a powerful man called Hakon. Her orders were +to go to Oprustader, to Eirik, and take King Trygve's son from +thence, and bring the child to her; and with these orders the men +went out. Now when they were come to the neighbourhood of +Oprustader, some of Eirik's friends observed the troop of +travellers, and about the close of the day brought him word of +their approach. Eirik immediately, in the night, made +preparation for Astrid's flight, gave her good guides, and send +her away eastward to Svithjod, to his good friend Hakon Gamle, +who was a powerful man there. Long before day they departed, and +towards evening they reached a domain called Skaun. Here they +saw a large mansion, towards which they went, and begged a +night's lodging. For the sake of concealment they were clad in +mean clothing. There dwelt here a bonde called Bjorn +Eiterkveisa, who was very rich, but very inhospitable. He drove +them away; and therefore, towards dark, they went to another +domain close by that was called Vidar. Thorstein was the name of +the bonde; and he gave them lodging, and took good care of them, +so that they slept well, and were well entertained. Early that +morning Gunhild's men had come to Oprustader, and inquired for +Astrid and her son. As Eirik told them she was not there, they +searched the whole house, and remained till late in the day +before they got any news of Astrid. Then they rode after her the +way she had taken, and late at night they came to Bjorn +Eiterkveisa in Skaun, and took up their quarters there. Hakon +asked Bjorn if he knew anything about Astrid, and he said some +people had been there in the evening wanting lodgings; "but I +drove them away, and I suppose they have gone to some of the +neighbouring houses." Thorstein's labourer was coming from the +forest, having left his work at nightfall, and called in at +Bjorn's house because it was in his way; and finding there were +guests come to the house, and learning their business, he comes +to Thorstein and tells him of it. As about a third part of the +night was still remaining, Thorstein wakens his guests and orders +them in an angry voice to go about their business; but as soon as +they were out of the house upon the road, Thorstein tells them +that Gunhild's messengers were at Bjorn's house, and are upon the +trace of them. They entreat of him to help them, and he gave +them a guide and some provisions. He conducted them through a +forest to a lake, in which there was an islet overgrown with +reeds. They waded out to the islet, and hid themselves among the +reeds. Early in the morning Hakon rode away from Bjorn's into +the township, and wherever he came he asked after Astrid; and +when he came to Thorstein's he asked if she had been there. He +said that some people had been there; but as soon as it was +daylight they had set off again, eastwards, to the forest. Hakon +made Thorstein go along with them, as he knew all the roads and +hiding-places. Thorstein went with them; but when they were come +into the woods, he led them right across the way Astrid had +taken. They went about and about the whole day to no purpose, as +they could find no trace of her, so they turned back to tell +Gunhild the end of their travel. Astrid and her friends +proceeded on their journey, and came to Svithjod, to Hakon Gamle +(the Old), where she and her son remained a long time, and had +friendly welcome. + + + +4. HAKON'S EMBASSY TO SWEDEN. + +When Gunhild, the mother of the kings, heard that Astrid and her +son Olaf were in the kingdom of Svithjod, she again sent Hakon, +with a good attendance, eastward, to Eirik king of Sweden, with +presents and messages of friendship. The ambassadors were well +received and well treated. Hakon, after a time, disclosed his +errand to the king, saying that Gunhild had sent him with the +request that the king would assist him in getting hold of Olaf +Trygvason, to conduct him to Norway, where Gunhild would bring +him up. The king gave Hakon people with him, and he rode with +them to Hakon the Old, where Hakon desired, with many friendly +expressions, that Olaf should go with him. Hakon the Old +returned a friendly answer, saying that it depended entirely upon +Olaf's mother. But Astrid would on no account listen to the +proposal; and the messengers had to return as they came, and to +tell King Eirik how the matter stood. The ambassadors then +prepared to return home, and asked the king for some assistance +to take the boy, whether Hakon the Old would or not. The king +gave them again some attendants; and when they came to Hakon the +Old, they again asked for the boy, and on his refusal to deliver +him they used high words and threatened violence. But one of the +slaves, Buste by name, attacked Hakon, and was going to kill him; +and they barely escaped from the thralls without a cudgelling, +and proceeded home to Norway to tell Gunhild their ill success, +and that they had only seen Olaf. + + + +5. OF SIGURD EIRIKSON. + +Astrid had a brother called Sigurd, a son of Eirik Bjodaskalle, +who had long been abroad in Gardarike (Russia) with King +Valdemar, and was there in great consideration. Astrid had now a +great inclination to travel to her brother there. Hakon the Old +gave her good attendants, and what was needful for the journey, +and she set out with some merchants. She had then been two years +(A.D. 965-966) with Hakon the Old, and Olaf was three years of +age. As they sailed out into the Baltic, they were captured by +vikings of Eistland, who made booty both of the people and goods, +killing some, and dividing others as slaves. Olaf was separated +from his mother, and an Eistland man called Klerkon got him as +his share along with Thorolf and Thorgils. Klerkon thought that +Thorolf was too old for a slave, and that there was not much work +to be got out of him, so he killed him; but took the boys with +him, and sold them to a man called Klerk for a stout and good +ram. A third man, called Reas, bought Olaf for a good cloak. +Reas had a wife called Rekon, and a son by her whose name was +Rekone. Olaf was long with them, was treated well, and was much +beloved by the people. Olaf was six years in Eistland in this +banishment (A.D. 987-972). + + + +6. OLAF IS SET FREE IN EISTLAND. + +Sigurd, the son of Eirik (Astrid's brother), came into Eistland +from Novgorod, on King Valdemar's business to collect the king's +taxes and rents. Sigurd came as a man of consequence, with many +followers and great magnificence. In the market-place he +happened to observe a remarkably handsome boy; and as he could +distinguish that he was a foreigner, he asked him his name and +family. He answered him, that his name was Olaf; that he was a +son of Trygve Olafson; and Astrid, a daughter of Eirik +Bjodaskalle, was his mother. Then Sigurd knew that the boy was +his sister's son, and asked him how he came there. Olaf told him +minutely all his adventures, and Sigurd told him to follow him to +the peasant Reas. When he came there he bought both the boys, +Olaf and Thorgils, and took them with him to Holmgard. But, for +the first, he made nothing known of Olaf's relationship to him, +but treated him well. + + + +7. KLERKON KILLED BY OLAF. + +Olaf Trygvason was one day in the market-place, where there was a +great number of people. He recognized Klerkon again, who had +killed his foster-father Thorolf Lusarskeg. Olaf had a little +axe in his hand, and with it he clove Klerkon's skull down to the +brain, and ran home to his lodging, and told his friend Sigurd +what he had done. Sigurd immediately took Olaf to Queen +Allogia's house, told her what had happened, and begged her to +protect the boy. She replied, that the boy appeared far too +comely to allow him to be slain; and she ordered her people to be +drawn out fully armed. In Holmgard the sacredness of peace is so +respected, that it is law there to slay whoever puts a man to +death except by judgment of law; and, according to this law and +usage, the whole people stormed and sought after the boy. It was +reported that he was in the Queen's house, and that there was a +number of armed men there. When this was told to the king, he +went there with his people, but would allow no bloodshed. It was +settled at last in peace, that the king should name the fine for +the murder; and the queen paid it. Olaf remained afterwards with +the queen, and was much beloved. It is a law at Holmgard, that +no man of royal descent shall stay there without the king's +permission. Sigurd therefore told the queen of what family Olaf +was, and for what reason he had come to Russia; namely, that he +could not remain with safety in his own country: and begged her +to speak to the king about it. She did so, and begged the king +to help a king's son whose fate had been so hard; and in +consequence of her entreaty the king promised to assist him, and +accordingly he received Olaf into his court, and treated him +nobly, and as a king's son. Olaf was nine years old when he came +to Russia, and he remained nine years more (A.D. 978-981) with +King Valdemar. Olaf was the handsomest of men, very stout and +strong, and in all bodily exercises he excelled every Northman +that ever was heard of. + + + +8. OF HAKON EARL OF HLADER. + +Earl Hakon, Sigurd's son, was with the Danish king, Harald +Gormson, the winter after he had fled from Norway before +Gunhild's sons. During the winter (A.D. 969) the earl had so +much care and sorrow that he took to bed, and passed many +sleepless nights, and ate and drank no more than was needful to +support his strength. Then he sent a private message to his +friends north in Throndhjem, and proposed to them that they +should kill King Erling, if they had an opportunity; adding, that +he would come to them in summer. The same winter the Throndhjem +people accordingly, as before related, killed King Erling. There +was great friendship between Earl Hakon and Gold Harald, and +Harald told Hakon all his intentions. He told him that he was +tired of a ship-life, and wanted to settle on the land; and asked +Hakon if he thought his brother King Harald would agree to divide +the kingdom with him if he asked it. "I think," replied Hakon, +"that the Danish king would not deny thy right; but the best way +to know is to speak to the king himself. I know for certain so +much, that you will not get a kingdom if you don't ask for it." +Soon after this conversation Gold Harald spoke to the king about +the matter, in the presence of many great men who were friends to +both; and Gold Harald asked King Harald to divide the kingdom +with him in two equal parts, to which his royal birth and the +custom of the Danish monarchy gave him right. The king was +highly incensed at this demand, and said that no man had asked +his father Gorm to be king over half of Denmark, nor yet his +grandfather King Hordaknut, or Sigurd Orm, or Ragnar Lodbrok; and +he was so exasperated and angry, that nobody ventured to speak of +it to him. + + + +9. OF GOLD HARALD. + +Gold Harald was now worse off than before; for he had got no +kingdom, and had got the king's anger by proposing it. He went +as usual to his friend Hakon, and complained to him of his fate, +and asked for good advice, and if he could help him to get his +share of the kingdom; saying that he would rather try force, and +the chance of war, than give it up. + +Hakon advised him not to speak to any man so that this should be +known; "for," said he, "it concerns thy life: and rather consider +with thyself what thou art man enough to undertake; for to +accomplish such a purpose requires a bold and firm man, who will +neither stick at good nor evil to do that which is intended; for +to take up great resolutions, and then to lay them aside, would +only end in dishonour." + +Go1d Harald replies -- "I will so carry on what I begin, that I +will not hesitate to kill Harald with my own hands, if I can come +thereby to the kingdom he denies me, and which is mine by right." +And so they separated. + +Now King Harald comes also to Earl Hakon, and tells him the +demand on his kingdom which Gold Harald had made, and also his +answer, and that he would upon no account consent to diminish his +kingdom. "And if Gold Harald persists in his demand, I will have +no hesitation in having him killed; for I will not trust him if +he does not renounce it." + +The earl answered, -- "My thoughts are, that Harald has carried +his demand so far that he cannot now let it drop, and I expect +nothing but war in the land; and that he will be able to gather a +great force, because his father was so beloved. And then it +would be a great enormity if you were to kill your relation; for, +as things now stand, all men would say that he was innocent. But +I am far from saying, or advising, that you should make yourself +a smaller king than your father Gorm was, who in many ways +enlarged, but never diminished his kingdom." + +The king replies, -- "What then is your advice, -- if I am +neither to divide my kingdom, nor to get rid of my fright and +danger?" + +"Let us meet again in a few days," said Earl Hakon, "and I will +then have considered the matter well, and will give you my advice +upon it." + +The king then went away with his people. + + + +10. COUNCILS HELD BY HAKON AND HARALD. + +Earl Hakon had now great reflection, and many opinions to weigh, +and he let only very few be in the house with him. In a few days +King Harald came again to the earl to speak with him, and ask if +he had yet considered fully the matter they had been talking of. + +"I have," said the earl, "considered it night and day ever since, +and find it most advisable that you retain and rule over the +whole of your kingdom just as your father left it; but that you +obtain for your relation Harald another kingdom, that he also may +enjoy honour and dignity." + +"What kind of kingdom is that," said the king, "which I can give +to Harald, that I may possess Denmark entire?" + +"It is Norway," said the earl. "The kings who are there are +oppressive to the people of the country, so that every man is +against them who has tax or service to pay." + +The king replies, -- "Norway is a large country, and the people +fierce, and not good to attack with a foreign army. We found +that sufficiently when Hakon defended that country; for we lost +many people, and gained no victory. Besides, Harald the son of +Eirik is my foster-son, and has sat on my knee." + +The earl answers, "I have long known that you have helped +Gunhild's sons with your force, and a bad return you have got for +it; but we shall get at Norway much more easily than by fighting +for it with all the Danish force. Send a message to your foster- +son Harald, Eirik's son, and offer him the lands and fiefs which +Gunhild's sons held before in Denmark. Appoint him a meeting, +and Gold Harald will soon conquer for himself a kingdom in Norway +from Harald Grafeld." + +The king replies, that it would be called a bad business to +deceive his own foster-son. + +"The Danes," answered the earl, "will rather say that it was +better to kill a Norwegian viking than a Danish, and your own +brother's son." + +They spoke so long over the matter, that they agreed on it. + + + +11. HARALD GORMSON'S MESSAGE TO NORWAY. + +Thereafter Gold Harald had a conference with Earl Hakon; and the +earl told him he had now advanced his business so far, that there +was hope a kingdom might stand open for him in Norway. "We can +then continue," said he, "our ancient friendship, and I can be of +the greatest use to you in Norway. Take first that kingdom. +King Harald is now very old, and has but one son, and cares but +little about him, as he is but the son of a concubine." + +The Earl talked so long to Gold Harald that the project pleased +him well; and the king, the earl, and Gold Harald often talked +over the business together. The Danish king then sent messengers +north to Norway to Harald Grafeld, and fitted them out +magnificently for their journey. They were well received by +Harald. The messengers told him that Earl Hakon was in Denmark, +but was lying dangerously sick, and almost out of his senses. +They then delivered from Harald, the Danish king, the invitation +to Harald Grafeld, his foster-son, to come to him and receive +investiture of the fiefs he and his brothers before him had +formerly held in Denmark; and appointing a meeting in Jutland. +Harald Grafeld laid the matter before his mother and other +friends. Their opinions were divided. Some thought that the +expedition was not without its danger, on account of the men with +whom they had to deal; but the most were in haste to begin the +journey, for at that time there was such a famine in Norway that +the kings could scarcely feed their men-at-arms; and on this +account the Fjord, on which the kings resided, usually got the +name of Hardanger (Hardacre). In Denmark, on the other hand, +there had been tolerably good crops; so that people thought that +if King Harald got fiefs, and something to rule over there they +would get some assistance. It was therefore concluded, before +the messengers returned, that Harald should travel to Denmark to +the Danish king in summer, and accept the conditions King Harald +offered. + + + +12. TREACHERY OF HARALD AND HAKON. + +Harald Grafeld went to Denmark in the summer (A.D. 969) with +three long-ships; and Herse Arinbjorn, from the Fjord district, +commanded one of them. King Harald sailed from Viken over to +Limfjord in Jutland, and landed at the narrow neck of land where +the Danish king was expected. Now when Gold Harald heard of +this, he sailed there with nine ships which he had fitted out +before for a viking cruise. Earl Hakon had also his war force on +foot; namely, twelve large ships, all ready, with which he +proposed to make an expedition. When Gold Harald had departed +Earl Hakon says to the king, "Now I don't know if we are not +sailing on an expedition, and yet are to pay the penalty of not +having joined it. Gold Harald may kill Harald Grafeld, and get +the kingdom of Norway; but you must not think he will be true to +you, although you do help him to so much power, for he told me in +winter that he would take your life if he could find opportunity +to do so. Now I will win Norway for you, and kill Gold Harald, +if you will promise me a good condition under you. I will be +your earl; swear an oath of fidelity to you, and, with your help, +conquer all Norway for you; hold the country under your rule; pay +you the scat and taxes; and you will be a greater king than your +father, as you will have two kingdoms under you." The king and +the earl agreed upon this, and Hakon set off to seek Gold Harald. + + + +13. DEATH OF HARALD GRAFELD. + +Gold Harald came to the neck of land at Limfjord, and immediately +challenged Harald Grafeld to battle; and although Harald had +fewer men, he went immediately on the land, prepared for battle, +and drew up his troops. Before the lines came together Harald +Grafeld urged on his men, and told them to draw their swords. He +himself advanced the foremost of the troop, hewing down on each +side. So says Glum Geirason, in Grafeld's lay: -- + + "Brave were thy words in battlefield, + Thou stainer of the snow-white shield! -- + Thou gallant war-god! With thy voice + Thou couldst the dying man rejoice: + The cheer of Harald could impart + Courage and life to every heart. + While swinging high the blood-smeared sword, + By arm and voice we knew our lord." + +There fell Harald Grafeld. So says Glum Geirason: -- + + "On Limfjord's strand, by the tide's flow, + Stern Fate has laid King Harald low; + The gallant viking-cruiser -- he + Who loved the isle-encircling sea. + The generous ruler of the land + Fell at the narrow Limfjord strand. + Enticed by Hakon's cunning speech + To his death-bed on Limfjord's beach." + +The most of King Harald's men fell with him. There also fell +Herse Arinbjorn. + +This happened fifteen years after the death of Hakon, Athelstan's +foster-son, and thirteen years after that of Sigurd earl of +Hlader. The priest Are Frode says that Earl Hakon was thirteen +years earl over his father's dominions in Throndhjem district +before the fall of Harald Grafeld; but, for the last six years of +Harald Grafeld's life, Are Frode says the Earl Hakon and +Gunhild's sons fought against each other, and drove each other +out of the land by turns. + + + +14. GOLD HARALD'S DEATH. + +Soon after Harald Grafeld's fall, Earl Hakon came up to Gold +Harald, and the earl immediately gave battle to Harald. Hakon +gained the victory, and Harald was made prisoner; but Hakon had +him immediately hanged on a gallows. Hakon then went to the +Danish king, and no doubt easily settled with him for the killing +his relative Gold Harald. + + + +15. DIVISION OF THE COUNTRY. + +Soon after King Harald Gormson ordered a levy of men over all his +kingdom, and sailed with 600 ships (1). There were with him Earl +Hakon, Harald Grenske, a son of King Gudrod, and many other great +men who had fled from their udal estates in Norway on account of +Gunhild's sons. The Danish king sailed with his fleet from the +south to Viken, where all the people of the country surrendered +to him. When he came to Tunsberg swarms of people joined him; +and King Harald gave to Earl Hakon the command of all the men who +came to him in Norway, and gave him the government over Rogaland, +Hordaland, Sogn, Fjord-district, South More, Raumsdal, and North +More. These seven districts gave King Harald to Earl Hakon to +rule over, with the same rights as Harald Harfager gave with them +to his sons; only with the difference, that Hakon should there, +as well as in Throndhjem, have the king's land-estates and land- +tax, and use the king's money and goods according to his +necessities whenever there was war in the country. King Harald +also gave Harald Grenske Vingulmark, Vestfold, and Agder all the +way to Lidandisnes (the Naze), together with the title of king; +and let him have these dominions with the same rights as his +family in former times had held them, and as Harald Harfager had +given with them to his sons. Harald Grenske was then eighteen +years old, and he became afterwards a celebrated man. Harald +king of Denmark returned home thereafter with all his army. + + +ENDNOTES: +(1) i.e., 720 ships, as they were counted by long hundreds, + 100=120. + + + +16. GUNHILD'S SONS LEAVE THE COUNTRY. + +Earl Hakon proceeded northwards along the coast with his force; +and when Gunhild and her sons got the tidings they proceeded to +gather troops, but were ill off for men. Then they took the same +resolution as before, to sail out to sea with such men as would +follow them away to the westward (A.D. 969). They came first to +the Orkney Islands, and remained there a while. There were in +Orkney then the Earls Hlodver. Arnfid, Ljot, and Skule, the sons +of Thorfin Hausakljufer. + +Earl Hakon now brought all the country under him, and remained +all winter (A.D. 970) in Throndhjem. Einar Skalaglam speaks of +his conquests in "Vellekla": -- + + "Norway's great watchman, Harald, now + May bind the silk snood on his brow -- + Seven provinces he seized. The realm + Prospers with Hakon at the helm." + +As Hakon the earl proceeded this summer along the coast +subjecting all the people to him, he ordered that over all his +dominions the temples and sacrifices should be restored, and +continued as of old. So it is said in the "Vellekla": -- + + "Hakon the earl, so good and wise, + Let all the ancient temples rise; -- + Thor's temples raised with fostering hand + That had been ruined through the land. + His valiant champions, who were slain + On battle-fields across the main, + To Thor, the thunder-god, may tell + How for the gods all turns out well. + The hardy warrior now once more + Offers the sacrifice of gore; + The shield-bearer in Loke's game + Invokes once more great Odin's name. + The green earth gladly yields her store, + As she was wont in days of yore, + Since the brave breaker of the spears + The holy shrines again uprears. + The earl has conquered with strong hand + All that lies north of Viken land: + In battle storm, and iron rain + Hakon spreads wide his sword's domain." + +The first winter that Hakon ruled over Norway the herrings set in +everywhere through the fjords to the land, and the seasons +ripened to a good crop all that had been sown. The people, +therefore, laid in seed for the next year, and got their lands +sowed, and had hope of good times. + + +17. HAKON'S BATTLE WITH RAGNFRED. + +King Ragnfred and King Gudrod, both sons of Gunhild and Eirik, +were now the only sons of Gunhild remaining in life. So says +Glum Geirason in Grafeld's lay: -- + + "When in the battle's bloody strife + The sword took noble Harald's life, + Half of my fortunes with him fell: + But his two brothers, I know well, + My loss would soon repair, should they + Again in Norway bear the sway, + And to their promises should stand, + If they return to rule the land." + +Ragnfred began his course in the spring after he had been a year +in the Orkney Islands. He sailed from thence to Norway, and had +with him fine troops, and large ships. When he came to Norway he +learnt that Earl Hakon was in Throndhjem; therefore he steered +northwards around Stad, and plundered in South More. Some people +submitted to him; for it often happens, when parties of armed men +scour over a country, that those who are nearest the danger seek +help where they think it may be expected. As soon as Earl Hakon +heard the news of disturbance in More, he fitted out ships, sent +the war-token through the land, made ready in all haste, and +proceeded out of the fjord. He had no difficulty in assembling +men. Ragnfred and Earl Hakon met at the north corner of More; +and Hakon, who had most men, but fewer ships, began the battle. +The combat was severe, but heaviest on Hakon's side; and as the +custom then was, they fought bow to bow, and there was a current +in the sound which drove all the ships in upon the land. The +earl ordered to row with the oars to the land where landing +seemed easiest. When the ships were all grounded, the earl with +all his men left them, and drew them up so far that the enemy +might not launch them down again, and then drew up his men on a +grass-field, and challenged Ragnfred to land. Ragnfred and his +men laid their vessels in along the land, and they shot at each +other a long time; but upon the land Ragnfred would not venture: +and so they separated. Ragnfred sailed with his fleet southwards +around Stad; for he was much afraid the whole forces of the +country would swarm around Hakon. Hakon, on his part, was not +inclined to try again a battle, for he thought the difference +between their ships in size was too great; so in harvest he went +north to Throndhjem, and staid there all winter (A.D. 971). King +Ragnfred consequently had all the country south of Stad at his +mercy; namely, Fjord district, Hordaland, Sogn, Rogaland; and he +had many people about him all winter. When spring approached he +ordered out the people and collected a large force. By going +about the districts he got many men, ships, and warlike stores +sent as he required. + + + +18. BATTLE BETWEEN HAKON AND RAGNFRED. + +Towards spring Earl Hakon ordered out all the men north in the +country; and got many people from Halogaland and Naumudal; so +that from Bryda to Stad he had men from all the sea-coast. +People flocked to him from all the Throndhjem district and from +Raumsdal. It was said for certain that he had men from four +great districts, and that seven earls followed him, and a +matchless number of men. So it is said in the "Vellekla": -- + + "Hakon, defender of the land, + Armed in the North his warrior-band + To Sogn's old shore his force he led, + And from all quarters thither sped + War-ships and men; and haste was made + By the young god of the sword-blade, + The hero-viking of the wave, + His wide domain from foes to save. + With shining keels seven kings sailed on + To meet this raven-feeding one. + When the clash came, the stunning sound + Was heard in Norway's farthest bound; + And sea-borne corpses, floating far, + Brought round the Naze news from the war." + +Earl Hakon sailed then with his fleet southwards around Stad; and +when he heard that King Ragnfred with his army had gone towards +Sogn, he turned there also with his men to meet him: and there +Ragnfred and Hakon met. Hakon came to the land with his ships, +marked out a battle-field with hazel branches for King Ragnfred, +and took ground for his own men in it. So it is told in the +"Vellekla": -- + + "In the fierce battle Ragnfred then + Met the grim foe of Vindland men; + And many a hero of great name + Fell in the sharp sword's bloody game. + The wielder of fell Narve's weapon, + The conquering hero, valiant Hakon + Had laid his war-ships on the strand, + And ranged his warriors on the land." + +There was a great battle; but Earl Hakon, having by far the most +people, gained the victory. It took place on the Thinganes, +where Sogn and Hordaland meet. + +King Rangfred fled to his ships, after 300 of his men had fallen. +So it is said in the "Vellekla":- + + "Sharp was the battle-strife, I ween, -- + Deadly and close it must have been, + Before, upon the bloody plain, + Three hundred corpses of the slain + Were stretched for the black raven's prey; + And when the conquerors took their way + To the sea-shore, they had to tread + O'er piled-up heaps of foemen dead." + +After this battle King Ragnfred fled from Norway; but Earl Hakon +restored peace to the country, and allowed the great army which +had followed him in summer to return home to the north country, +and he himself remained in the south that harvest and winter +(A.D. 972). + + + +19. EARL HAKON'S MARRIAGE. + +Earl Hakon married a girl called Thora, a daughter of the +powerful Skage Skoptason, and very beautiful she was. They had +two sons, Svein and Heming, and a daughter called Bergljot who +was afterwards married to Einar Tambaskielfer. Earl Hakon was +much addicted to women, and had many children; among others a +daughter Ragnhild, whom he married to Skopte Skagason, a brother +of Thora. The Earl loved Thora so much that he held Thora's +family in higher respect than any other people, and Skopte his +brother-in-law in particular; and he gave him many great fiefs in +More. Whenever they were on a cruise together, Skopte must lay +his ship nearest to the earl's, and no other ship was allowed to +come in between. + + + +20. DEATH OF SKOPTE. + +One summer that Earl Hakon was on a cruise, there was a ship with +him of which Thorleif Spake (the Wise) was steersman. In it was +also Eirik, Earl Hakon's son, then about ten or eleven years old. +Now in the evenings, as they came into harbour, Eirik would not +allow any ship but his to lie nearest to the earl's. But when +they came to the south, to More, they met Skopte the earl's +brother-in-law, with a well-manned ship; and as they rowed +towards the fleet, Skopte called out that Thorleif should move +out of the harbour to make room for him, and should go to the +roadstead. Eirik in haste took up the matter, and ordered Skopte +to go himself to the roadstead. When Earl Hakon heard that his +son thought himself too great to give place to Skopte, he called +to them immediately that they should haul out from their berth, +threatening them with chastisement if they did not. When +Thorleif heard this, he ordered his men to slip their land-cable, +and they did so; and Skopte laid his vessel next to the earl's as +he used to do. When they came together, Skopte brought the earl +all the news he had gathered, and the earl communicated to Skopte +all the news he had heard; and Skopte was therefore called +Tidindaskopte (the Newsman Skopte). The winter after (A.D. 973) +Eirik was with his foster-father Thorleif, and early in spring he +gathered a crew of followers, and Thorleif gave him a boat of +fifteen benches of rowers, with ship furniture, tents, and ship +provisions; and Eirik set out from the fjord, and southwards to +More. Tidindaskopte happened also to be going with a fully +manned boat of fifteen rowers' benches from one of his farms to +another, and Eirik went against him to have a battle. Skopte was +slain, but Eirik granted life to those of his men who were still +on their legs. So says Eyjolf Dadaskald in the "Banda Lay": -- + + "At eve the youth went out + To meet the warrior stout -- + To meet stout Skopte -- he + Whose war-ship roves the sea + Like force was on each side, + But in the whirling tide + The young wolf Eirik slew + Skopte, and all his crew + And he was a gallant one, + Dear to the Earl Hakon. + Up, youth of steel-hard breast -- + No time hast thou to rest! + Thy ocean wings spread wide -- + Speed o'er the foaming tide! + Speed on -- speed on thy way! + For here thou canst not stay." + +Eirik sailed along the land and came to Denmark, and went to King +Harald Gormson, and staid with him all winter (A.D. 974). In +spring the Danish king sent him north to Norway, and gave him an +earldom, and the government of Vingulmark and Raumarike, on the +same terms as the small scat-paying kings had formerly held these +domains. So says Eyjolf Dadaskald: -- + + "South through ocean's spray + His dragon flew away + To Gormson's hall renowned. + Where the bowl goes bravely round. + And the Danish king did place + This youth of noble race + Where, shield and sword in hand, + He would aye defend his land." + +Eirik became afterwards a great chief. + + + +21. OLAF TRYGVASON'S JOURNEY FROM RUSSIA. + +All this time Olaf Trygvason was in Gardarike (Russia), and +highly esteemed by King Valdemar, and beloved by the queen. King +Valdemar made him chief over the men-at-arms whom he sent out to +defend the land. So says Hallarsteid- + + "The hater of the niggard band, + The chief who loves the Northman's land, + Was only twelve years old when he + His Russian war-ships put to sea. + The wain that ploughs the sea was then + Loaded with war-gear by his men -- + With swords, and spears, and helms: and deep + Out to the sea his good ships sweep." + +Olaf had several battles, and was lucky as a leader of troops. +He himself kept a great many men-at-arms at his own expense out +of the pay the king gave him. Olaf was very generous to his men, +and therefore very popular. But then it came to pass, what so +often happens when a foreigner is raised to higher power and +dignity than men of the country, that many envied him because he +was so favoured by the king, and also not less so by the queen. +They hinted to the king that he should take care not to make Olaf +too powerful, -- "for such a man may be dangerous to you, if he +were to allow himself to be used for the purpose of doing you or +your kingdom harm; for he is extremely expert in all exercises +and feats, and very popular. We do not, indeed, know what it is +he can have to talk of so often with the queen." It was then the +custom among great monarchs that the queen should have half of +the court attendants, and she supported them at her own expense +out of the scat and revenue provided for her for that purpose. +It was so also at the court of King Valdemar that the queen had +an attendance as large as the king, and they vied with each other +about the finest men, each wanting to have such in their own +service. It so fell out that the king listened to such speeches, +and became somewhat silent and blunt towards Olaf. When Olaf +observed this, he told it to the queen; and also that he had a +great desire to travel to the Northern land, where his family +formerly had power and kingdoms, and where it was most likely he +would advance himself. The queen wished him a prosperous +journey, and said he would be found a brave man wherever he might +be. Olaf then made ready, went on board, and set out to sea in +the Baltic. + +As he was coming from the east he made the island of +Borgundarholm (Bornholm), where he landed and plundered. The +country people hastened down to the strand, and gave him battle; +but Olaf gained the victory, and a large booty. + + + +22. OLAF TRYGVASON'S MARRIAGE. + +While Olaf lay at Borgundarholm there came on bad weather, storm, +and a heavy sea, so that his ships could not lie there; and he +sailed southwards under Vindland, where they found a good +harbour. They conducted themselves very peacefully, and remained +some time. In Vindland there was then a king called Burizleif, +who had three daughters, -- Geira, Gunhild, and Astrid. The +king's daughter Geira had the power and government in that part +where Olaf and his people landed, and Dixen was the name of the +man who most usually advised Queen Geira. Now when they heard +that unknown people were came to the country, who were of +distinguished appearance, and conducted themselves peaceably, +Dixen repaired to them with a message from Queen Geira, inviting +the strangers to take up their winter abode with her; for the +summer was almost spent, and the weather was severe and stormy. +Now when Dixen came to the place he soon saw that the leader was +a distinguished man, both from family and personal appearance, +and he told Olaf the queen's invitation with the most kindly +message. Olaf willingly accepted the invitation, and went in +harvest (A.D. 982) to Queen Geira. They liked each other +exceedingly, and Olaf courted Queen Geira; and it was so settled +that Olaf married her the same winter, and was ruler, along +with Queen Geira, over her dominions. Halfred Vandredaskald +tells of these matters in the lay he composed about King Olaf: -- + + "Why should the deeds the hero did + In Bornholm and the East he hid? + His deadly weapon Olaf bold + Dyed red: why should not this be told?" + + + +23. EARL HAKON PAYS NO SCAT. + +Earl Hakon ruled over Norway, and paid no scat; because the +Danish king gave him all the scat revenue that belonged to the +king in Norway, for the expense and trouble he had in defending +the country against Gunhild's sons. + + + +24. HARALD OPPOSES CHRISTIANITY. + +The Emperor Otta (Otto) was at that time in the Saxon country, +and sent a message to King Harald, the Danish king, that he must +take on the true faith and be baptized, he and all his people +whom he ruled; "otherwise," says the emperor, "we will march +against him with an army." The Danish king ordered the land +defence to be fitted out, Danavirke (1) (the Danish wall) to be +well fortified, and his ships of war rigged out. He sent a +message also to Earl Hakon in Norway to come to him early in +spring, and with as many men as he could possibly raise. In +spring (A.D. 975) Earl Hakon levied an army over the whole +country which was very numerous, and with it he sailed to meet +the Danish king. The king received him in the most honourable +manner. Many other chiefs also joined the Danish king with their +men, so that he had gathered a very large army. + + +ENDNOTES: +(1) Danavirke. The Danish work was a wall of earth, stones, and + wood, with a deep ditch in front, and a castle at every + hundred fathoms, between the rivers Eider and Slien, + constructed by Harald Blatand (Bluetooth) to oppose the + progress of Charlemagne. Some traces of it still exist. + -- L. + + + +25. OLAF TRYGVASON'S WAR EXPEDITION. + +Olaf Trygvason had been all winter (A.D. 980) in Vindland, as +before related, and went the same winter to the baronies in +Vindland which had formerly been under Queen Geira, but had +withdrawn themselves from obedience and payment of taxes. There +Olaf made war, killed many people, burnt out others, took much +property, and laid all of them under subjection to him, and then +went back to his castle. Early in spring Olaf rigged out his +ships and set off to sea. He sailed to Skane and made a landing. +The people of the country assembled, and gave him battle; but +King Olaf conquered, and made a great booty. He then sailed +eastward to the island of Gotland, where he captured a merchant +vessel belonging to the people of Jamtaland. They made a brave +defence; but the end of it was that Olaf cleared the deck, killed +many of the men, and took all the goods. He had a third battle +in Gotland, in which he also gained the victory, and made a great +booty. So says Halfred Vandredaskald: -- + + "The king, so fierce in battle-fray, + First made the Vindland men give way: + The Gotlanders must tremble next; + And Scania's shores are sorely vexed + By the sharp pelting arrow shower + The hero and his warriors pour; + And then the Jamtaland men must fly, + Scared by his well-known battle-cry." + + + +26. OTTA AND HAKON IN BATTLE. + +The Emperor Otta assembled a great army from Saxland, Frakland, +Frisland, and Vindland. King Burizleif followed him with a large +army, and in it was his son-in-law, Olaf Trygvason. The emperor +had a great body of horsemen, and still greater of foot people, +and a great army from Holstein. Harald, the Danish king, sent +Earl Hakon with the army of Northmen that followed him southwards +to Danavirke, to defend his kingdom on that side. So it is told +in the "Vellekla": -- + + "Over the foaming salt sea spray + The Norse sea-horses took their way, + Racing across the ocean-plain + Southwards to Denmark's green domain. + The gallant chief of Hordaland + Sat at the helm with steady hand, + In casque and shield, his men to bring + From Dovre to his friend the king. + He steered his war-ships o'er the wave + To help the Danish king to save + Mordalf, who, with a gallant band + Was hastening from the Jutes' wild land, + Across the forest frontier rude, + With toil and pain through the thick wood. + Glad was the Danish king, I trow, + When he saw Hakon's galley's prow. + The monarch straightway gave command + To Hakon, with a steel-clad band, + To man the Dane-work's rampart stout, + And keep the foreign foemen out." + +The Emperor Otta came with his army from the south to Danavirke, +but Earl Hakon defended the rampart with his men. The Dane-work +(Danavirke) was constructed in this way: -- Two fjords run into +the land, one on each side; and in the farthest bight of these +fjords the Danes had made a great wall of stone, turf, and +timber, and dug a deep and broad ditch in front of it, and had +also built a castle over each gate of it. There was a hard +battle there, of which the "Vellekla" speaks: -- + + "Thick the storm of arrows flew, + Loud was the din, black was the view + Of close array of shield and spear + Of Vind, and Frank, and Saxon there. + But little recked our gallant men; + And loud the cry might be heard then + Of Norway's brave sea-roving son -- + 'On 'gainst the foe! On! Lead us on!" + +Earl Hakon drew up his people in ranks upon all the gate-towers +of the wall, but the greater part of them he kept marching along +the wall to make a defence wheresoever an attack was threatened. +Many of the emperor's people fell without making any impression +on the fortification, so the emperor turned back without farther +attempt at an assault on it. So it is said in the "Vellekla": -- + + "They who the eagle's feast provide + In ranked line fought side by side, + 'Gainst lines of war-men under shields\ + Close packed together on the fields, + Earl Hakon drive by daring deeds + The Saxons to their ocean-steeds; + And the young hero saves from fall + The Danavirke -- the people's wall." + +After this battle Earl Hakon went back to his ships, and intended +to sail home to Norway; but he did not get a favourable wind, and +lay for some time outside at Limafjord. + + + +27. HARALD AND HAKON ARE BAPTIZED. + +The Emperor Otta turned back with his troops to Slesvik, +collected his ships of war, and crossed the fjord of Sle into +Jutland. As soon as the Danish king heard of this he marched his +army against him, and there was a battle, in which the emperor at +last got the victory. The Danish king fled to Limafjord and took +refuge in the island Marsey. By the help of mediators who went +between the king and the emperor, a truce and a meeting between +them were agreed on. The Emperor Otta and the Danish king met +upon Marsey. There Bishop Poppo instructed King Harald in the +holy faith; he bore red hot irons in his hands, and exhibited his +unscorched hands to the king. Thereafter King Harald allowed +himself to be baptized, and also the whole Danish army. King +Harald, while he was in Marsey, had sent a message to Hakon that +he should come to his succour; and the earl had just reached the +island when the king had received baptism. The king sends word +to the earl to come to him, and when they met the king forced the +earl to allow himself also to be baptized. So Earl Hakon and all +the men who were with him were baptized; and the king gave them +priests and other learned men with them, and ordered that the +earl should make all the people in Norway be baptized. On that +they separated; and the earl went out to sea, there to wait for a +wind. + + + +28. HAKON RENOUNCES CHRISTIANITY. + +When a wind came with which he thought he could get clear out to +sea, he put all the learned men on shore again, and set off to +the ocean; but as the wind came round to the south-west, and at +last to west, he sailed eastward, out through Eyrarsund, ravaging +the land on both sides. He then sailed eastward along Skane, +plundering the country wherever he came. When he got east to the +skerries of East Gautland, he ran in and landed, and made a great +blood-sacrifice. There came two ravens flying which croaked +loudly; and now, thought the earl, the blood-offering has been +accepted by Odin, and he thought good luck would be with him any +day he liked to go to battle. Then he set fire to his ships, +landed his men, and went over all the country with armed hand. +Earl Ottar, who ruled over Gautland, came against him, and they +held a great battle with each other; but Earl Hakon gained the +day, and Earl Ottar and a great part of his men were killed. +Earl Hakon now drove with fire and sword over both the Gautlands, +until he came into Norway; and then he proceeded by land all the +way north to Throndhjem. The "Vellekla" tells about this: -- + + "On the silent battle-field, + In viking garb, with axe and shield, + The warrior, striding o'er the slain, + Asks of the gods `What days will gain?' + Two ravens, flying from the east, + Come croaking to the bloody feast: + The warrior knows what they foreshow -- + The days when Gautland blood will flow. + A viking-feast Earl Hakon kept, + The land with viking fury swept, + Harrying the land far from the shore + Where foray ne'er was known before. + Leaving the barren cold coast side, + He raged through Gautland far and wide, -- + Led many a gold-decked viking shield + O'er many a peaceful inland field. + Bodies on bodies Odin found + Heaped high upon each battle ground: + The moor, as if by witchcraft's power, + Grows green, enriched by bloody shower. + No wonder that the gods delight + To give such luck in every fight + To Hakon's men -- for he restores + Their temples on our Norway shores." + + + +29. THE EMPEROR OTTA RETURNS HOME. + +The Emperor Otta went back to his kingdom in the Saxon land, and +parted in friendship with the Danish king. It is said that the +Emperor Otta stood godfather to Svein, King Harald's son, and +gave him his name; so that he was baptized Otta Svein. King +Harald held fast by his Christianity to his dying day. + +King Burizleif went to Vindland, and his son-in-law King Olaf +went with him. This battle is related also by Halfred +Vandredaskald in his song on Olaf: -- + + "He who through the foaming surges + His white-winged ocean-coursers urges, + Hewed from the Danes, in armour dressed, + The iron bark off mail-clad breast." + + + +30. OLAF'S JOURNEY FROM VINDLAND. + +Olaf Trygvason was three years in Vindland (A.D. 982-984) when +Geira his queen fell sick, and she died of her illness. Olaf +felt his loss so great that he had no pleasure in Vindland after +it. He provided himself, therefore, with warships, and went out +again a plundering, and plundered first in Frisland, next in +Saxland, and then all the way to Flaemingjaland (Flanders). So +says Halfred Vandredaskald: -- + + "Olaf's broad axe of shining steel + For the shy wolf left many a meal. + The ill-shaped Saxon corpses lay + Heaped up, the witch-wife's horses' (1) prey. + She rides by night: at pools of blood. + Where Frisland men in daylight stood, + Her horses slake their thirst, and fly + On to the field where Flemings lie. + The raven-friend in Odin's dress -- + Olaf, who foes can well repress, + Left Flemish flesh for many a meal + With his broad axe of shining steel." + + +ENDNOTES: +(1) Ravens were the witches' horses. -- L. + + + +31. KING OLAF'S FORAYS. + +Thereafter Olaf Trygvason sailed to England, and ravaged wide +around in the land. He sailed all the way north to +Northumberland, where he plundered; and thence to Scotland, +where he marauded far and wide. Then he went to the Hebrides, +where he fought some battles; and then southwards to Man, where +he also fought. He ravaged far around in Ireland, and thence +steered to Bretland, which he laid waste with fire and sword, and +all the district called Cumberland. He sailed westward from +thence to Valland, and marauded there. When he left the west, +intending to sail to England, he came to the islands called the +Scilly Isles, lying westward from England in the ocean. Thus +tells Halfred Vandraskald of these events: -- + + The brave young king, who ne'er retreats, + The Englishman in England beats. + Death through Northumberland is spread + From battleaxe and broad spearhead. + Through Scotland with his spears he rides; + To Man his glancing ships he guides: + Feeding the wolves where'er he came, + The young king drove a bloody game. + The gallant bowmen in the isles + Slew foemen, who lay heaped in piles. + The Irish fled at Olaf's name -- + Fled from a young king seeking fame. + In Bretland, and in Cumberland, + People against him could not stand: + Thick on the fields their corpses lay, + To ravens and howling wolves a prey." + +Olaf Trygvason had been four years on this cruise (A.D. 985-988), +from the time he left Vindland till he came to the Scilly +Islands. + + + +32. KING OLAF IS BAPTIZED. + +While Olaf Trygvason lay in the Scilly Isles he heard of a seer, +or fortune-teller, on the islands, who could tell beforehand +things not yet done, and what he foretold many believed was +really fulfilled. Olaf became curious to try this man's gift of +prophecy. He therefore sent one of his men, who was the +handsomest and strongest, clothed him magnificently, and bade him +say he was the king; for Olaf was known in all countries as +handsomer, stronger, and braver than all others, although, after +he had left Russia, he retained no more of his name than that he +was called Ole, and was Russian. Now when the messenger came to +the fortune-teller, and gave himself out for the king, he got the +answer, "Thou art not the king, but I advise thee to be faithful +to thy king." And more he would not say to that man. The man +returned, and told Olaf, and his desire to meet the fortune- +teller was increased; and now he had no doubt of his being really +a fortune-teller. Olaf repaired himself to him, and, entering +into conversation, asked him if he could foresee how it would go +with him with regard to his kingdom, or of any other fortune he +was to have. The hermit replies in a holy spirit of prophecy, +"Thou wilt become a renowned king, and do celebrated deeds. Many +men wilt thou bring to faith and baptism, and both to thy own and +others' good; and that thou mayst have no doubt of the truth of +this answer, listen to these tokens: When thou comest to thy +ships many of thy people will conspire against thee, and then a +battle will follow in which many of thy men will fall, and thou +wilt be wounded almost to death, and carried upon a shield to thy +ship; yet after seven days thou shalt be well of thy wounds, and +immediately thou shalt let thyself be baptized." Soon after Olaf +went down to his ships, where he met some mutineers and people +who would destroy him and his men. A fight took place, and the +result was what the hermit had predicted, that Olaf was wounded, +and carried upon a shield to his ship, and that his wound was +healed in seven days. Then Olaf perceived that the man had +spoken truth, that he was a true fortune-teller, and had the gift +of prophecy. Olaf went once more to the hermit, and asked +particularly how he came to have such wisdom in foreseeing things +to be. The hermit replied, that the Christian God himself let +him know all that he desired; and he brought before Olaf many +great proofs of the power of the Almighty. In consequence of +this encouragement Olaf agreed to let himself be baptized, and he +and all his followers were baptized forthwith. He remained here +a long time, took the true faith, and got with him priests and +other learned men. + + + +33. OLAF MARRIES GYDA. + +In autumn (A.D. 988) Olaf sailed from Scilly to England, where he +put into a harbour, but proceeded in a friendly way; for England +was Christian, and he himself had become Christian. At this time +a summons to a Thing went through the country, that all men +should come to hold a Thing. Now when the Thing was assembled a +queen called Gyda came to it, a sister of Olaf Kvaran, who was +king of Dublin in Ireland. She had been married to a great earl +in England, and after his death she was at the head of his +dominions. In her territory there was a man called Alfvine, who +was a great champion and single-combat man. He had paid his +addresses to her; but she gave for answer, that she herself would +choose whom of the men in her dominions she would take in +marriage; and on that account the Thing was assembled, that she +might choose a husband. Alfvine came there dressed out in his +best clothes, and there were many well-dressed men at the +meeting. Olaf had come there also; but had on his bad-weather +clothes, and a coarse over-garment, and stood with his people +apart from the rest of the crowd. Gyda went round and looked at +each, to see if any appeared to her a suitable man. Now when she +came to where Olaf stood she looked at him straight in the face, +and asked "what sort of man he was?" + +He said, "I am called Ole; and I am a stranger here." + +Gyda replies, "Wilt thou have me if I choose thee?" + +"I will not say no to that," answered he; and he asked what her +name was, and her family, and descent. + +"I am called Gyda," said she; "and am daughter of the king of +Ireland, and was married in this country to an earl who ruled +over this territory. Since his death I have ruled over it, and +many have courted me, but none to whom I would choose to be +married." + +She was a young and handsome woman. They afterwards talked over +the matter together, and agreed, and Olaf and Gyda were +betrothed. + + + +34. KING OLAF AND ALFVINE'S DUEL. + +Alfvine was very ill pleased with this. It was the custom then +in England, if two strove for anything, to settle the matter by +single combat (1); and now Alfvine challenges Olaf Trygvason to +fight about this business. The time and place for the combat +were settled, and that each should have twelve men with him. +When they met, Olaf told his men to do exactly as they saw him +do. He had a large axe; and when Alfvine was going to cut at him +with his sword he hewed away the sword out of his hand, and with +the next blow struck down Alfvine himself. He then bound him +fast. It went in the same way with all Alfvine's men. They were +beaten down, bound, and carried to Olaf's lodging. Thereupon he +ordered Alfvine to quit the country, and never appear in it +again; and Olaf took all his property. Olaf in this way got Gyda +in marriage, and lived sometimes in England, and sometimes in +Ireland. + + +ENDNOTES: +(1) Holm-gang: so called because the combatants went to a holm + or uninhabited isle to fight in Norway. -- L. + + + +35. KING OLAF GETS HIS DOG VIGE. + +While Olaf was in Ireland he was once on an expedition which went +by sea. As they required to make a foray for provisions on the +coast, some of his men landed, and drove down a large herd of +cattle to the strand. Now a peasant came up, and entreated Olaf +to give him back the cows that belonged to him. Olaf told him to +take his cows, if he could distinguish them; "but don't delay our +march." The peasant had with him a large house-dog, which he put +in among the herd of cattle, in which many hundred head of beasts +were driven together. The dog ran into the herd, and drove out +exactly the number which the peasant had said he wanted; and all +were marked with the same mark, which showed that the dog knew +the right beasts, and was very sagacious. Olaf then asked the +peasant if he would sell him the dog. "I would rather give him +to you," said the peasant. Olaf immediately presented him with a +gold ring in return, and promised him his friendship in future. +This dog was called Vige, and was the very best of dogs, and Olaf +owned him long afterwards. + + + +36. HARALD GORMSON SAILS AGAINST ICELAND. + +The Danish king, Harald Gormson, heard that Earl Hakon had thrown +off Christianity, and had plundered far and wide in the Danish +land. The Danish king levied an army, with which he went to +Norway; and when he came to the country which Earl Hakon had to +rule over he laid waste the whole land, and came with his fleet +to some islands called Solunder. Only five houses were left +standing in Laeradal; but all the people fled up to the +mountains, and into the forest, taking with them all the moveable +goods they could carry with them. Then the Danish king proposed +to sail with his fleet to Iceland, to avenge the mockery and +scorn all the Icelanders had shown towards him; for they had made +a law in Iceland, that they should make as many lampoons against +the Danish king as there were headlands in his country; and the +reason was, because a vessel which belonged to certain Icelanders +was stranded in Denmark, and the Danes took all the property, and +called it wreck. One of the king's bailiffs called Birger was to +blame for this; but the lampoons were made against both. In the +lampoons were the following lines: -- + + "The gallant Harald in the field + Between his legs lets drop his shield; + Into a pony he was changed. + And kicked his shield, and safely ranged. + And Birger, he who dwells in halls + For safety built with four stone walls, + That these might be a worthy pair, + Was changed into a pony mare." + + + +37. HARALD SENDS A WARLOCK TO ICELAND. + +King Harald told a warlock to hie to Iceland in some altered +shape, and to try what he could learn there to tell him: and he +set out in the shape of a whale. And when he came near to the +land he went to the west side of Iceland, north around the land, +where he saw all the mountains and hills full of guardian- +spirits, some great, some small. When he came to Vapnafjord he +went in towards the land, intending to go on shore; but a huge +dragon rushed down the dale against him with a train of serpents, +paddocks, and toads, that blew poison towards him. Then he +turned to go westward around the land as far as Eyjafjord, and he +went into the fjord. Then a bird flew against him, which was so +great that its wings stretched over the mountains on either side +of the fjord, and many birds, great and small, with it. Then he +swam farther west, and then south into Breidafjord. When he came +into the fjord a large grey bull ran against him, wading into the +sea, and bellowing fearfully, and he was followed by a crowd of +land-spirits. From thence he went round by Reykjanes, and wanted +to land at Vikarsskeid, but there came down a hill-giant against +him with an iron staff in his hands. He was a head higher than +the mountains, and many other giants followed him. He then swam +eastward along the land, and there was nothing to see, he said, +but sand and vast deserts, and, without the skerries, high- +breaking surf; and the ocean between the countries was so wide +that a long-ship could not cross it. At that time Brodhelge +dwelt in Vapnafjord, Eyjolf Valgerdson in Eyjafjord, Thord Geller +in Breidafjord, and Thorod Gode in Olfus. Then the Danish king +turned about with his fleet, and sailed back to Denmark. + +Hakon the earl settled habitations again in the country that had +been laid waste, and paid no scat as long as he lived to Denmark. + + + +38. HARALD GORMSON'S DEATH. + +Svein, King Harald's son, who afterwards was called Tjuguskeg +(forked beard), asked his father King Harald for a part of his +kingdom; but now, as before, Harald would not listen to dividing +the Danish dominions, and giving him a kingdom. Svein collected +ships of war, and gave out that he was going on a viking cruise; +but when all his men were assembled, and the Jomsborg viking +Palnatoke had come to his assistance he ran into Sealand to +Isafjord, where his father had been for some time with his ships +ready to proceed on an expedition. Svein instantly gave battle, +and the combat was severe. So many people flew to assist King +Harald, that Svein was overpowered by numbers, and fled. But +King Harald received a wound which ended in his death: and Svein +was chosen King of Denmark. At this time Sigvalde was earl over +Jomsborg in Vindland. He was a son of King Strutharald, who had +ruled over Skane. Heming, and Thorkel the Tall, were Sigvalde's +brothers. Bue the Thick from Bornholm, and Sigurd his brother, +were also chiefs among the Jomsborg vikings: and also Vagn, a son +of Ake and Thorgunna, and a sister's son of Bue and Sigurd. Earl +Sigvalde had taken King Svein prisoner, and carried him to +Vindland, to Jomsborg, where he had forced him to make peace with +Burizleif, the king of the Vinds, and to take him as the peace- +maker between them. Earl Sigvalde was married to Astrid, a +daughter of King Burizleif; and told King Svein that if he did +not accept of his terms, he would deliver him into the hands of +the Vinds. The king knew that they would torture him to death, +and therefore agreed to accept the earl's mediation. The earl +delivered this judgment between them -- that King Svein should +marry Gunhild, King Burizleif's daughter; and King Burizleif +again Thyre, a daughter of Harald, and King Svein's sister; but +that each party should retain their own dominions, and there +should be peace between the countries. Then King Svein returned +home to Denmark with his wife Gunhild. Their sons were Harald +and Knut (Canute) the Great. At that time the Danes threatened +much to bring an army into Norway against Earl Hakon. + + + +39. VOW OF THE JOMSBORG VIKINGS. + +King Svein made a magnificent feast, to which he invited all the +chiefs in his dominions; for he would give the succession-feast, +or the heirship-ale, after his father Harald. A short time +before, Strutharald in Skane, and Vesete in Bornholm, father to +Bue the Thick and to Sigurd, had died; and King Svein sent word +to the Jomsborg vikings that Earl Sigvalde and Bue, and their +brothers, should come to him, and drink the funeral-ale for their +fathers in the same feast the king was giving. The Jomsborg +vikings came to the festival with their bravest men, forty ships +of them from Vindland, and twenty ships from Skane. Great was +the multitude of people assembled. The first day of the feast, +before King Svein went up into his father's high-seat, he drank +the bowl to his father's memory, and made the solemn vow, that +before three winters were past he would go over with his army to +England, and either kill King Adalrad (Ethelred), or chase him +out of the country. This heirship bowl all who were at the feast +drank. Thereafter for the chiefs of the Jomsborg vikings was +filled and drunk the largest horn to be found, and of the +strongest drink. When that bowl was emptied, all men drank +Christ's health; and again the fullest measure and the strongest +drink were handed to the Jomsborg vikings. The third bowl was to +the memory of Saint Michael, which was drunk by all. Thereafter +Earl Sigvalde emptied a remembrance bowl to his father's honour, +and made the solemn vow, that before three winters came to an end +he would go to Norway, and either kill Earl Hakon, or chase him +out of the country. Thereupon Thorkel the Tall, his brother, +made a solemn vow to follow his brother Sigvalde to Norway, and +not flinch from the battle so long as Sigvalde would fight there. +Then Bue the Thick vowed to follow them to Norway, and not flinch +so long as the other Jomsborg vikings fought. At last Vagn +Akason vowed that he would go with them to Norway, and not return +until he had slain Thorkel Leira, and gone to bed to his daughter +Ingebjorg without her friends' consent. Many other chiefs made +solemn vows about different things. Thus was the heirship-ale +drunk that day, but the next morning, when the Jomsborg vikings +had slept off their drink, they thought they had spoken more than +enough. They held a meeting to consult how they should proceed +with their undertaking, and they determined to fit out as +speedily as possible for the expedition; and without delay ships +and men-at-arms were prepared, and the news spread quickly. + + + +40. EIRIK AND HAKON MAKE A WAR LEVY. + +When Earl Eirik, the son of Hakon, who at that time was in +Raumarike, heard the tidings, he immediately gathered troops, and +went to the Uplands, and thence over the mountains to Throndhjem, +and joined his father Earl Hakon. Thord Kolbeinson speaks of +this in the lay of Eirik: -- + + "News from the south are flying round; + The bonde comes with look profound, + Bad news of bloody battles bringing, + Of steel-clad men, of weapons ringing. + I hear that in the Danish land + Long-sided ships slide down the strand, + And, floating with the rising tide, + The ocean-coursers soon will ride." + +The earls Hakon and Eirik had war-arrows split up and sent round +the Throndhjem country; and despatched messages to both the +Mores, North More and South More, and to Raumsdal, and also north +to Naumudal and Halogaland. They summoned all the country to +provide both men and ships. So it is said in Eirik's lay: + + "The skald must now a war-song raise, + The gallant active youth must praise, + Who o'er the ocean's field spreads forth + Ships, cutters, boats, from the far north. + His mighty fleet comes sailing by, -- + The people run to see them glide, + Mast after mast, by the coast-side." + +Earl Hakon set out immediately to the south, to More, to +reconnoitre and gather people; and Earl Eirik gathered an army +from the north to follow. + + + +41. EXPEDITION OF THE JOMSBORG VIKINGS. + +The Jomsborg vikings assembled their fleet in Limafjord, from +whence they went to sea with sixty sail of vessels. When they +came under the coast of Agder, they steered northwards to +Rogaland with their fleet, and began to plunder when they came +into the earl's territory; and so they sailed north along the +coast, plundering and burning. A man, by name Geirmund, sailed +in a light boat with a few men northwards to More, and there he +fell in with Earl Hakon, stood before his dinner table, and told +the earl the tidings of an army from Denmark having come to the +south end of the land. The earl asked if he had any certainty of +it. Then Geirmund stretched forth one arm, from which the hand +was cut off, and said, "Here is the token that the enemy is in +the land." Then the earl questioned him particularly about this +army. Geirmund says it consists of Jomsborg vikings, who have +killed many people, and plundered all around. "And hastily and +hotly they pushed on," says he "and I expect it will not be long +before they are upon you." On this the earl rode into every +fjord, going in along the one side of the land and out at the +other, collecting men; and thus he drove along night and day. He +sent spies out upon the upper ridges, and also southwards into +the Fjords; and he proceeded north to meet Eirik with his men. +This appears from Eirik's lay: -- + + "The earl, well skilled in war to speed + O'er the wild wave the viking-steed, + Now launched the high stems from the shore, + Which death to Sigvalde's vikings bore. + Rollers beneath the ships' keels crash, + Oar-blades loud in the grey sea splash, + And they who give the ravens food + Row fearless through the curling flood." + +Eirik hastened southwards with his forces the shortest way he +could. + + + +42. OF THE JOMSBORG VIKINGS. + +Earl Sigvalde steered with his fleet northwards around Stad, and +came to the land at the Herey Isles. Although the vikings fell +in with the country people, the people never told the truth about +what the earl was doing; and the vikings went on pillaging and +laying waste. They laid to their vessels at the outer end of Hod +Island, landed, plundered, and drove both men and cattle down to +the ships, killing all the men able to bear arms. + +As they were going back to their ships, came a bonde, walking +near to Bue's troop, who said to them, "Ye are not doing like +true warriors, to be driving cows and calves down to the strand, +while ye should be giving chase to the bear, since ye are coming +near to the bear's den." + +"What says the old man?" asked some. "Can he tell us anything +about Earl Hakon?" + +The peasant replies, "The earl went yesterday into the +Hjorundarfjord with one or two ships, certainly not more than +three, and then he had no news about you." + +Bue ran now with his people in all haste down to the ships, +leaving all the booty behind. Bue said, "Let us avail ourselves +now of this news we have got of the earl, and be the first to the +victory." When they came to their ships they rode off from the +land. Earl Sigvalde called to them, and asked what they were +about. They replied, "The earl is in the fjord;" on which Earl +Sigvalde with the whole fleet set off, and rowed north about the +island Hod. + + + +43. BATTLE WITH THE JOMSBORG VIKINGS. + +The earls Hakon and Eirik lay in Halkelsvik, where all their +forces were assembled. They had 150 ships, and they had heard +that the Jomsborg vikings had come in from sea, and lay at the +island Hod; and they, in consequence, rowed out to seek them. +When they reached a place called Hjorungavag they met each other, +and both sides drew up their ships in line for an attack. Earl +Sigvalde's banner was displayed in the midst of his army, and +right against it Earl Hakon arranged his force for attack. Earl +Sigvalde himself had 20 ships, but Earl Hakon had 60. In Earl's +army were these chiefs, -- Thorer Hjort from Halogaland, and +Styrkar from Gimsar. In the wing of the opposite array of the +Jomsborg vikings was Bue the Thick, and his brother Sigurd, with +20 ships. Against him Earl Eirik laid himself with 60 ships; and +with him were these chiefs, -- Gudbrand Hvite from the Uplands, +and Thorkel Leira from Viken. In the other wing of the Jomsborg +vikings' array was Vagn Akason with 20 ships; and against him +stood Svein the son of Hakon, in whose division was Skegge of +Yrjar at Uphaug, and Rognvald of Aervik at Stad, with 60 ships. +It is told in the Eirik's lay thus: -- + + "The bonde's ships along the coast + Sailed on to meet the foemen's host; + The stout earl's ships, with eagle flight, + Rushed on the Danes in bloody fight. + The Danish ships, of court-men full, + Were cleared of men, -- and many a hull + Was driving empty on the main, + With the warm corpses of the slain." + +Eyvind Skaldaspiller says also in the "Haleygja-tal": -- + + "Twas at the peep of day, -- + Our brave earl led the way; + His ocean horses bounding -- + His war-horns loudly sounding! + No joyful morn arose + For Yngve Frey's base foes + These Christian island-men + Wished themselves home again." + +Then the fleets came together, and one of the sharpest of +conflicts began. Many fell on both sides, but the most by far on +Hakon's side; for the Jomsborg vikings fought desperately, +sharply, and murderously, and shot right through the shields. So +many spears were thrown against Earl Hakon that his armour was +altogether split asunder, and he threw it off. So says Tind +Halkelson: -- + + "The ring-linked coat of strongest mail + Could not withstand the iron hail, + Though sewed with care and elbow bent, + By Norn (1), on its strength intent. + The fire of battle raged around, -- + Odin's steel shirt flew all unbound! + The earl his ring-mail from him flung, + Its steel rings on the wet deck rung; + Part of it fell into the sea, -- + A part was kept, a proof to be + How sharp and thick the arrow-flight + Among the sea-steeds in this fight." + + +ENDNOTES: +(1) Norn, one of the Fates, stands here for women, whose + business it was to sew the rings of iron upon the cloth + which made these ring-mail coats or shirts. The needles, + although some of them were of gold, appear to have been + without eyes, and used like shoemaker's awls. -- L. + + + +44. EARL SIGVALDE'S FLIGHT. + +The Jomsborg vikings had larger and higher-sided ships; and both +parties fought desperately. Vagn Akason laid his ship on board +of Svein Earl Hakon's son's ship, and Svein allowed his ship to +give way, and was on the point of flying. Then Earl Eirik came +up, and laid his ship alongside of Vagn, and then Vagn gave way, +and the ships came to lie in the same position as before. +Thereupon Eirik goes to the other wing, which had gone back a +little, and Bue had cut the ropes, intending to pursue them. +Then Eirik laid himself, board to board, alongside of Bue's ship, +and there was a severe combat hand to hand. Two or three of +Eirik's ships then laid themselves upon Bue's single vessel. A +thunder-storm came on at this moment, and such a heavy hail-storm +that every hailstone weighed a pennyweight. The Earl Sigvalde +cut his cable, turned his ship round, and took flight. Vagn +Akason called to him not to fly; but as Earl Sigvalde paid no +attention to what he said, Vagn threw his spear at him, and hit +the man at the helm. Earl Sigvalde rowed away with 35 ships, +leaving 25 of his fleet behind. + + + +45. BUE THROWS HIMSELF OVERBOARD. + +Then Earl Hakon laid his ship on the other side of Bue's ship, +and now came heavy blows on Bue's men. Vigfus, a son of +Vigaglum, took up an anvil with a sharp end, which lay upon +the deck, and on which a man had welded the hilt to his sword +just before, and being a very strong man cast the anvil with both +hands at the head of Aslak Holmskalle, and the end of it went +into his brains. Before this no weapon could wound this Aslak, +who was Bue's foster-brother, and forecastle commander, although +he could wound right and left. Another man among the strongest +and bravest was Havard Hoggande. In this attack Eirik's men +boarded Bue's ship, and went aft to the quarter-deck where Bue +stood. There Thorstein Midlang cut at Bue across his nose, so +that the nosepiece of his helmet was cut in two, and he got a +great wound; but Bue, in turn, cut at Thorstein's side, so that +the sword cut the man through. Then Bue lifted up two chests +full of gold, and called aloud, "Overboard all Bue s men," and +threw himself overboard with his two chests. Many of his people +sprang overboard with him. Some fell in the ship, for it was of +no use to call for quarter. Bue's ship was cleared of people +from stem to stern, and afterwards all the others, the one after +the other. + + + +46. VIKINGS BOUND TOGETHER IN ONE CHAIN. + +Earl Eirik then laid himself alongside of Vagn's ship, and there +was a brave defence; but at last this ship too was cleared, and +Vagn and thirty men were taken prisoners, and bound, and brought +to land. Then came up Thorkel Leira, and said, "Thou madest a +solemn vow, Vagn, to kill me, but now it seems more likely that I +will kill thee." Vagn and his men sat all upon a log of wood +together. Thorkel had an axe in his hands, with which he cut +at him who sat outmost on the log. Vagn and the other prisoners +were bound so that a rope was fastened on their feet, but they +had their hands free. One of them said, "I will stick this +cloak-pin that I have in my hand into the earth, if it be so that +I know anything, after my head is cut off." His head was cut +off, but the cloak-pin fell from his hand. There sat also a very +handsome man with long hair, who twisted his hair over his head, +put out his neck, and said, "Don't make my hair bloody." A man +took the hair in his hands and held it fast. Thorkel hewed with +his axe; but the viking twitched his head so strongly that he who +was holding his hair fell forwards, and the axe cut off both his +hands, and stuck fast in the earth. Then Earl Eirik came up, and +asked, "Who is that handsome man?" + +He replies, "I am called Sigurd, and am Bue's son. But are all +the Jomsborg vikings dead?" + +Eirik says, "Thou art certainly Boe's son. Wilt thou now take +life and peace?" + +"That depends," says he, "upon who it is that offers it." + +"He offers who has the power to do it -- Earl Eirik." + +"That will I," says he, "from his hands." And now the rope was +loosened from him. + +Then said Thorkel Leira, "Although thou should give all these men +life and peace, earl, Vagn Akason shall never come from this with +life." And he ran at him with uplifted axe; but the viking +Skarde swung himself in the rope, and let himself fall just +before Thorkel's feet, so that Thorkel ell over him, and Vagn +caught the axe and gave Thorkel a death-wound. Then said the +earl, "Vagn, wilt thou accept life?" + +"That I will," says he, "if you give it to all of us." + +"Loose them from the rope," said the earl, and it was done. +Eighteen were killed, and twelve got their lives. + + + +47. DEATH OF GISSUR OF VALDERS. + +Earl Hakon, and many with him, were sitting upon a piece of wood, +and a bow-string twanged from Bue's ship, and the arrow struck +Gissur from Valders, who was sitting next the earl, and was +clothed splendidly. Thereupon the people went on board, and +found Havard Hoggande standing on his knees at the ship's +railing, for his feet had been cut off (1), and he had a bow in +his hand. When they came on board the ship Havard asked, "Who +fell by that shaft?" + +They answered, "A man called Gissur." + +"Then my luck was less than I thought," said he. + +"Great enough was the misfortune," replied they; "but thou shalt +not make it greater." And they killed him on the spot. + +The dead were then ransacked, and the booty brought all together +to be divided; and there were twenty-five ships of the Jomsborg +vikings in the booty. So says Tind: + + "Many a viking's body lay + Dead on the deck this bloody day, + Before they cut their sun-dried ropes, + And in quick flight put all their hopes. + He whom the ravens know afar + Cleared five-and-twenty ships of war: + A proof that in the furious fight + None can withstand the Norsemen's might." + +Then the army dispersed. Earl Hakon went to Throndhjem, and was +much displeased that Earl Eirik had given quarter to Vagn Akason. +It was said that at this battle Earl Hakon had sacrificed for +victory his son, young Erling, to the gods; and instantly came +the hailstorm, and the defeat and slaughter of the Jomsborg +vikings. + +Earl Eirik went to the Uplands, and eastward by that route to his +own kingdom, taking Vagn Akason with him. Earl Eirik married +Vagn to Ingebjorg, a daughter of Thorkel Leira, and gave him a +good ship of war and all belonging to it, and a crew; and they +parted the best of friends. Then Vagn went home south to +Denmark, and became afterwards a man of great consideration, and +many great people are descended from him. + + +ENDNOTES: +(1) This traditionary tale of a warrior fighting on his knees + after his legs were cut off, appears to have been a popular + idea among the Northmen, and is related by their descendants + in the ballad o Chevy Chase. -- L. + + + +48. KING HARALD GRENSKE'S DEATH. + +Harald Grenske, as before related, was king in Vestfold, and was +married to Asta, a daughter of Gudbrand Kula. One summer (A.D. +994) Harald Grenske made an expedition to the Baltic to gather +property, and he came to Svithjod. Olaf the Swede was king +there, a son of Eirik the Victorious, and Sigrid, a daughter of +Skoglartoste. Sigrid was then a widow, and had many and great +estates in Svithjod. When she heard that her foster-brother was +come to the country a short distance from her, she sent men to +him to invite him to a feast. He did not neglect the invitation, +but came to her with a great attendance of his followers, and was +received in the most friendly way. He and the queen sat in the +high-seat, and drank together towards the evening, and all his +men were entertained in the most hospitable manner. At night, +when the king went to rest, a bed was put up for him with a +hanging of fine linen around it, and with costly bedclothes; but +in the lodging-house there were few men. When the king was +undressed, and had gone to bed, the queen came to him, filled a +bowl herself for him to drink, and was very gay, and pressed to +drink. The king was drunk above measure, and, indeed, so were +they both. Then he slept, and the queen went away, and laid +herself down also. Sigrid was a woman of the greatest +understanding, and clever in many things. In the morning there +was also the most excellent entertainment; but then it went on as +usual when people have drunk too much, that next day they take +care not to exceed. The queen was very gay, and she and the king +talked of many things with each other; among other things she +valued her property, and the dominions she had in Svithjod, as +nothing less than his property in Norway. With that observation +the king was nowise pleased, and he found no pleasure in anything +after that, but made himself ready for his journey in an ill +humor. On the other hand, the queen was remarkably gay, and made +him many presents, and followed him out to the road. Now Harald +returned about harvest to Norway, and was at home all winter; but +was very silent and cast down. In summer he went once more to +the Baltic with his ships, and steered to Svithjod. He sent a +message to Queen Sigrid that he wished to have a meeting with her +and she rode down to meet him. They talked together and he soon +brought out the proposal that she should marry him. She replied, +that this was foolish talk for him, who was so well married +already that he might think himself well off. Harald says, "Asta +is a good and clever woman; but she is not so well born as I am." +Sigrid replies, "It may be that thou art of higher birth, but I +think she is now pregnant with both your fortunes." They +exchanged but few words more before the queen rode away. King +Harald was now depressed in mind, and prepared himself again to +ride up the country to meet Queen Sigrid. Many of his people +dissuaded him; but nevertheless he set off with a great +attendance, and came to the house in which the queen dwelt. The +same evening came another king, called Vissavald, from Gardarike +(Russia), likewise to pay his addresses to Queen Sigrid. Lodging +was given to both the kings, and to all their people, in a great +old room of an out-building, and all the furniture was of the +same character; but there was no want of drink in the evening, +and that so strong that all were drunk, and the watch, both +inside and outside, fell fast asleep. Then Queen Sigrid ordered +an attack on them in the night, both with fire and sword. The +house was burnt, with all who were in it and those who slipped +out were put to the sword. Sigrid said that she would make these +small kings tired of coming to court her. She was afterwards +called Sigrid the Haughty (Storrada). + + + +49. BIRTH OF OLAF, SON OF HARALD GRENSKE. + +This happened the winter after the battle of the Jomsborg vikings +at Hjorungavag. When Harald went up the country after Sigrid, he +left Hrane behind with the ships to look after the men. Now when +Hrane heard that Harald was cut off, he returned to Norway the +shortest way he could, and told the news. He repaired first to +Asta, and related to her all that had happened on the journey, +and also on what errand Harald had visited Queen Sigrid. When +Asta got these tidings she set off directly to her father in the +Uplands, who received her well; but both were enraged at the +design which had been laid in Svithjod, and that King Harald had +intended to set her in a single condition. In summer (A.D. 995) +Asta, Gudbrand's daughter, was confined, and had a boy child, who +had water poured over him, and was called Olaf. Hrane himself +poured water over him, and the child was brought up at first in +the house of Gudbrand and his mother Asta. + + + +50. ABOUT EARL HAKON. + +Earl Hakon ruled over the whole outer part of Norway that lies on +the sea, and had thus sixteen districts under his sway. The +arrangement introduced by Harald Harfager, that there should be +an earl in each district, was afterward continued for a long +time; and thus Earl Hakon had sixteen earls under him. So says +the "Vellekla": -- + + "Who before has ever known + Sixteen earls subdued by one? + Who has seen all Norway's land + Conquered by one brave hero's hand? + It will be long in memory held, + How Hakon ruled by sword and shield. + When tales at the viking's mast go round, + His praise will every mouth resound." + +While Earl Hakon ruled over Norway there were good crops in the +land, and peace was well preserved in the country among the +bondes. The Earl, for the greater part of his lifetime, was +therefore much beloved by the bondes; but it happened, in the +longer course of time, that the earl became very intemperate in +his intercourse with women, and even carried it so far that he +made the daughters of people of consideration be carried away and +brought home to him; and after keeping them a week or two as +concubines, he sent them home. He drew upon himself the +indignation of me relations of these girls; and the bondes began +to murmur loudly, as the Throndhjem people have the custom of +doing when anything goes against their judgment. + + + +51. THORER KLAKKA'S JOURNEY. + +Earl Hakon, in the mean time, hears some whisper that to the +westward, over the Nor h sea, was a man called Ole, who was +looked upon as a king. From the conversation of some people, he +fell upon the suspicion that he must be of the royal race of +Norway. It was, indeed, said that this Ole was from Russia; but +the earl had heard that Trygve Olafson had had a son called Olaf, +who in his infancy had gone east to Gardarike, and had been +brought up by King Valdemar. The earl had carefully inquired +about this man, and had his suspicion that he must be the same +person who had now come to these western countries. The earl had +a very good friend called Thorer Klakka, who had been long upon +viking expeditions, sometimes also upon merchant voyages; so that +he was well acquainted all around. This Thorer Earl Hakon sends +over the North sea, and told him to make a merchant voyage to +Dublin, many were in the habit of doing, and carefully to +discover who this Ole was. Provided he got any certainty that he +was Olaf Trygvason, or any other of the Norwegian royal race, +then Thorer should endeavor to ensnare him by some deceit, and +bring him into the earl's power. + + + +52. OLAF TRYGVASON COMES TO NORWAY. + +On this Thorer sails westward to Ireland, and hears that Ole is +in Dublin with his wife's father King Olaf Kvaran. Thorer, who +was a plausible man, immediately got acquainted with Ole; and as +they often met, and had long conversations together, Ole began to +inquire about news from Norway, and above all of the Upland kings +and great people, -- which of them were in life, and what +dominations they now had. He asked also about Earl Hakon, and if +he was much liked in the country. Thorer replies, that the earl +is such a powerful man that no one dares to speak otherwise than +he would like; but that comes from there being nobody else in the +country to look to. "Yet, to say the truth, I know it to be the +mind of many brave men, and of whole communities, that they would +much rather see a king of Harald Harfager's race come to the +kingdom. But we know of no one suited for this, especially now +that it is proved how vain every attack on Earl Hakon must be." +As they often talked together in the same strain, Olaf disclosed +to Thorer his name and family, and asked him his opinion, and +whether he thought the bondes would take him for their king if he +were to appear in Norway. Thorer encouraged him very eagerly to +the enterprise, and praised him and his talents highly. Then +Olaf's inclination to go to the heritage of his ancestors became +strong. Olaf sailed accordingly, accompanied by Thorer, with +five ships; first to the Hebrides, and from thence to the +Orkneys. At that time Earl Sigurd, Hlodver's son, lay in +Osmundswall, in the island South Ronaldsa, with a ship of war, on +his way to Caithness. Just at the same time Olaf was sailing +with his fleet from the westward to the islands, and ran into the +same harbour, because Pentland Firth was not to be passed at that +tide. When the king was informed that the earl was there, he +made him be called; and when the earl came on board to speak with +the king, after a few words only had passed between them, the +king says the earl must allow himself to be baptized, and all the +people of the country also, or he should be put to death +directly; and he assured the earl he would lay waste the islands +with fire and sword, if the people did not adopt Christianity. +In the position the earl found himself, he preferred becoming +Christian, and he and all who were with him were baptized. +Afterwards the earl took an oath to the king, went into his +service, and gave him his son, whose name was Hvelp (Whelp), or +Hunde (Dog), as an hostage; and the king took Hvelp to Norway +with him. Thereafter Olaf went out to sea to the eastward, and +made the land at Morster Island, where he first touched the +ground of Norway. He had high mass sung in a tent, and +afterwards on the spot a church was built. Thorer Klakka said +now to the king, that the best plan for him would be not to make +it known who he was, or to let any report about him get abroad; +but to seek out Earl Hakon as fast as possible and fall upon him +by surprise. King Olaf did so, sailing northward day and night, +when wind permitted, and did not let the people of the country +know who it was that was sailing in such haste. When he came +north to Agdanes, he heard that the earl was in the fjord, and +was in discord with the bondes. On hearing this, Thorer saw that +things were going in a very different way from what he expected; +for after the battle with the Jomsborg vikings all men in Norway +were the most sincere friends of the earl on account of the +victory he had gained, and of the peace and security he had given +to the country; and now it unfortunately turns out that a great +chief has come to the country at a time when the bondes are in +arms against the earl. + + + +53. EARL HAKON'S FLIGHT. + +Earl Hakon was at a feast in Medalhus in Gaulardal and his ships +lay out by Viggja. There was a powerful bonde, by name Orm +Lyrgja, who dwelt in Bunes, who had a wife called Gudrun, a +daughter of Bergthor of Lundar. She was called the Lundasol; for +she was the most-beautiful of women. The earl sent his slaves to +Orm, with the errand that they should bring Orm's wife, Gudrun, +to the earl. The thralls tell their errand, and Orm bids them +first seat themselves to supper; but before they had done eating, +many people from the neighbourhood, to whom Orm had sent notice, +had gathered together: and now Orm declared he would not send +Gudrun with the messengers. Gudrun told the thralls to tell the +earl that she would not come to him, unless he sent Thora of +Rimul after her. Thora was a woman of great influence, and one +of the earl's best beloved. The thralls say that they will come +another time, and both the bonde and his wife would be made to +repent of it; and they departed with many threats. Orm, on the +other hand, sent out a message-token to all the neighbouring +country, and with it the message to attack Earl Hakon with +weapons and kill him. He sent also a message to Haldor in +Skerdingsstedja, who also sent out his message-token. A short +time before, the earl had taken away the wife of a man called +Brynjolf, and there had very nearly been an insurrection about +that business. Having now again got this message-token, the +people made a general revolt, and set out all to Medalhus. When +the earl heard of this, he left the house with his followers, and +concealed himself in a deep glen, now called Jarlsdal (Earl's +Dale). Later in the day, the earl got news of the bondes' army. +They had beset all the roads; but believed the earl had escaped +to his ships, which his son Erlend, a remarkably handsome and +hopeful young man, had the command of. When night came the earl +dispersed his people, and ordered them to go through the forest +roads into Orkadal; "for nobody will molest you," said he, "when +I am not with you. Send a message to Erlend to sail out of the +fjord, and meet me in More. In the mean time I will conceal +myself from the bondes." Then the earl went his way with one +thrall or slave, called Kark, attending him. There was ice upon +the Gaul (the river of Gaulardal), and the earl drove his horse +upon it, and left his coat lying upon the ice. They then went to +a hole, since called Jarlshella (the Earl's Hole), where they +slept. When Kark awoke he told his dream, -- that a black +threatening mad had come into the hole, and was angry that people +should have entered it; and that the man had said, "Ulle is +dead." The earl said that his son Erlend must be killed. Kark +slept again and was again disturbed in his sleep; and when he +awoke he told his dream, -- that the same man had again appeared +to him, and bade him tell the earl that all the sounds were +closed. From this dream the earl began to suspect that it +betokened a short life to him. They stood up, and went to the +house of Rimul. The earl now sends Kark to Thora, and begs of +her to come secretly to him. She did so and received the earl +kindly and he begged her to conceal him for a few nights until +the army of the bondes had dispersed. "Here about my house," +said she, "you will be hunted after, both inside and outside; for +many know that I would willingly help you if I can. There is but +one place about the house where they could never expect to find +such a man as you, and that is the swine-stye." When they came +there the earl said, "Well, let it be made ready for us; as to +save our life is the first and foremost concern." The slave dug +a great hole in it, bore away the earth that he dug out, and laid +wood over it. Thora brought the tidings to the earl that Olaf +Trygvason had come from sea into the fjord, and had killed his +son Erlend. Then the earl and Kark both went into the hole. +Thora covered it with wood, and threw earth and dung over it, and +drove the swine upon the top of it. The swine-style was under a +great stone. + + + +54. ERLEND'S DEATH. + +Olaf Trygvason came from sea into the fjord with five long-ships, +and Erlend, Hakon's son, rowed towards him with three ships. +When the vessels came near to each other, Erlend suspected they +might be enemies, and turned towards the land. When Olaf and his +followers saw long-ships coming in haste out of the fjord, and +rowing towards them, they thought Earl Hakon must be here; and +they put out all oars to follow them. As soon as Erlend and his +ships got near the land they rowed aground instantly, jumped +overboard, and took to the land; but at the same instant Olaf's +ship came up with them. Olaf saw a remarkably handsome man +swimming in the water, and laid hold of a tiller and threw it at +him. The tiller struck Erlend, the son of Hakon the earl, on the +head, and clove it to the brain; and there left Erlend his life. +Olaf and his people killed many; but some escaped, and some were +made prisoners, and got life and freedom that they might go and +tell what had happened. They learned then that the bondes had +driven away Earl Hakon, and that he had fled, and his troops were +all dispersed. + + + +55. EARL HAKON'S DEATH. + +The bondes then met Olaf, to the joy of both, and they made an +agreement together. The bondes took Olaf to be their king, and +resolved, one and all, to seek out Earl Hakon. They went up +Gaulardal; for it seemed to them likely that if the earl was +concealed in any house it must be at Rimul, for Thora was his +dearest friend in that valley. They come up, therefore, and +search everywhere, outside and inside the house, but could not +find him. Then Olaf held a House Thing (trusting), or council +out in the yard, and stood upon a great stone which lay beside +the swine-stye, and made a speech to the people, in which he +promised to enrich the man with rewards and honours who should +kill the earl. This speech was heard by the earl and the thrall +Kark. They had a light in their room. + +"Why art thou so pale," says the earl, "and now again black as +earth? Thou hast not the intention to betray me?" + +"By no means," replies Kark. + +"We were born on the same night," says the earl, "and the time +will be short between our deaths." + +King Olaf went away in the evening. When night came the earl +kept himself awake but Kark slept, and was disturbed in his +sleep. The earl woke him, and asked him "what he was dreaming +of?" + +He answered, "I was at Hlader and Olaf Trygvason was laying a +gold ring about my neck." + +The earl says, "It will be a red ring Olaf will lay about thy +neck if he catches thee. Take care of that! From me thou shalt +enjoy all that is good, therefore betray me not." + +They then kept themselves awake both; the one, as it were, +watching upon the other. But towards day the earl suddenly +dropped asleep; but his sleep was so unquiet that he drew his +heels under him, and raised his neck, as if going to rise, and +screamed dreadfully high. On this Kark, dreadfully alarmed, drew +a large knife out of his belt, stuck it in the earl's throat, and +cut it across, and killed Earl Hakon. Then Kark cut off the +earl's head, and ran away. Late in the day he came to Hlader, +where he delivered the earl's head to King Olaf, and told all +these circumstances of his own and Earl Hakon's doings. Olaf had +him taken out and beheaded. + + + +56. EARL HAKON'S HEAD. + +King Olaf, and a vast number of bondes with him, then went out to +Nidarholm, and had with him the heads of Earl Hakon and Kark. +This holm was used then for a place of execution of thieves and +ill-doers, and there stood a gallows on it. He had the heads of +the earl and of Kark hung upon it, and the whole army of the +bondes cast stones at them, screaming and shouting that the one +worthless fellow had followed the other. They then sent up to +Gaulardal for the earl's dead body. So great was the enmity of +the Throndhjem people against Earl Hakon, that no man could +venture to call him by any other name than Hakon the Bad; and he +was so called long after those days. Yet, sooth to say of Earl +Hakon, he was in many respects fitted to be a chief: first, +because he was descended from a high race; then because he had +understanding and knowledge to direct a government; also manly +courage in battle to gain victories, and good luck in killing his +enemies. So says Thorleif Raudfeldson: -- + + "In Norway's land was never known + A braver earl than the brave Hakon. + At sea, beneath the clear moon's light, + No braver man e'er sought to fight. + Nine kings to Odin's wide domain + Were sent, by Hakon's right hand slain! + So well the raven-flocks were fed -- + So well the wolves were filled with dead!" + +Earl Hakon was very generous; but the greatest misfortunes +attended even such a chief at the end of his days: and the great +cause of this was that the time was come when heathen sacrifices +and idolatrous worship were doomed to fall, and the holy faith +and good customs to come in their place. + + + +57. OLAF TRYGVASON ELECTED KING. + +Olaf Trvgvason was chosen at Throndhjem by the General Thing to +be the king over the whole country, as Harald Harfager had been. +The whole public and the people throughout all the land would +listen to nothing else than that Olaf Trygvason should be king. +Then Olaf went round the whole country, and brought it under his +rule, and all the people of Norway gave in their submission; and +also the chiefs in the Uplands and in Viken, who before had held +their lands as fiefs from the Danish king, now became King Olaf's +men, and held their hands from him. He went thus through the +whole country during the first winter (A.D. 996) and the +following summer. Earl Eirik, the son of Earl Hakon, his brother +Svein, and their friends and relations, fled out of the country, +and went east to Sweden to King Olaf the Swede, who gave them a +good reception. So says Thord Kolbeinson: -- + + "O thou whom bad men drove away, + After the bondes by foul play, + Took Hakon's life! Fate will pursue + These bloody wolves, and make them rue. + When the host came from out the West, + Like some tall stately war-ship's mast, + I saw the son of Trygve stand, + Surveying proud his native land." + +And again, -- + + "Eirik has more upon his mind, + Against the new Norse king designed, + Than by his words he seems to show -- + And truly it may well be so. + Stubborn and stiff are Throndhjem men, + But Throndhjem's earl may come again; + In Swedish land he knows no rest -- + Fierce wrath is gathering in his breast." + + + +58. LODIN'S MARRIAGE + +Lodin was the name of a man from Viken who was rich and of good +family. He went often on merchant voyages, and sometimes on +viking cruises. It happened one summer that he went on a +merchant voyage with much merchandise in a ship of his own. He +directed his course first to Eistland, and was there at a market +in summer. To the place at which the market was held many +merchant goods were brought, and also many thralls or slaves for +sale. There Lodin saw a woman who was to be sold as a slave: and +on looking at her he knew her to be Astrid Eirik's daughter, who +had been married to King Trygve. But now she was altogether +unlike what she had been when he last saw her; for now she was +pale, meagre in countenance, and ill clad. He went up to her, +and asked her how matters stood with her. She replied, "It is +heavy to be told; for I have been sold as a slave, and now again +I am brought here for sale." After speaking together a little +Astrid knew him, and begged him to buy her; and bring her home to +her friends. "On this condition," said he, "I will bring thee +home tn Norway, that thou wilt marry me." Now as Astrid stood in +great need, and moreover knew that Lodin was a man of high birth, +rich, and brave, she promised to do so for her ransom. Lodin +accordingly bought Astrid, took her home to Norway with him, and +married her with her friends' consent. Their children were +Thorkel Nefia, Ingerid, and Ingegerd. Ingebjorg and Astrid were +daughters of Astrid by King Trygve. Eirik Bjodaskalle's sons +were Sigird, Karlshofud, Jostein, and Thorkel Dydril, who were +all rich and brave people who had estates east in the country. +In Viken in the east dwelt two brothers, rich and of good +descent; one called Thorgeir, and the other Hyrning; and they +married Lodin and Astrid's daughters, Ingerid and Ingegerd. + + + +59. OLAF BAPTIZES THE COUNTRY OF VIKEN. + +When Harald Gormson, king of Denmark, had adopted Christianity, +he sent a message over all his kingdom that all people should be +baptized, and converted to the true faith. He himself followed +his message, and used power and violence where nothing else would +do. He sent two earls, Urguthrjot and Brimilskjar, with many +people to Norway, to proclaim Christianity there. In Viken, +which stood directly under the king's power, this succeeded, and +many were baptized of the country folk. But when Svein Forked- +beard, immediately after his father King Harald's death, went out +on war expeditions in Saxland, Frisland, and at last in England, +the Northmen who had taken up Christianity returned back to +heathen sacrifices, just as before; and the people in the north +of the country did the same. But now that Olaf Trygvason was +king of Norway, he remained long during the summer (A.D. 996) in +Viken, where many of his relatives and some of his brothers-in- +law were settled, and also many who had been great friends of his +father; so that he was received with the greatest affection. +Olaf called together his mother's brothers, his stepfather Lodin, +and his brothers-in-law Thorgeir and Hyrning, to speak with them, +and to disclose with the greatest care the business which he +desired they themselves should approve of, and support with all +their power; namely, the proclaiming Christianity over all his +kingdom. He would, he declared, either bring it to this, that +all Norway should be Christian, or die. "I shall make you all," +said he, "great and mighty men in promoting this work; for I +trust to you most, as blood relations or brothers-in-law." All +agreed to do what he asked, and to follow him in what he desired. +King Olaf immediately made it known to the public that he +recommended Christianity to all the people in his kingdom, which +message was well received and approved of by those who had before +given him their promise; and these being the most powerful among +the people assembled, the others followed their example, and +all the inhabitants of the east part of Viken allowed themselves +to be baptized. The king then went to the north part of Viken +and invited every man to accept Christianity; and those who +opposed him he punished severely, killing some, mutilating +others, and driving some into banishment. At length he brought +it so far, that all the kingdom which his father King Trvgve had +ruled over, and also that of his relation Harald Grenske, +accepted of Christianity; and during that summer (A.D. 996) and +the following winter (A.D. 997) all Viken was made Christian. + + + +60. OF THE HORDALAND PEOPLE. + +Early in spring (A.D. 997) King Olaf set out from Viken with a +great force northwards to Agder, and proclaimed that every man +should be baptized. And thus the people received Christianity, +for nobody dared oppose the king's will, wheresoever he came. In +Hordaland, however, were many bold and great men of Hordakare's +race. He, namely, had left four sons, -- the first Thorleif +Spake; the second, Ogmund, father of Thorolf Skialg, who was +father of Erling of Sole; the third was Thord father of the Herse +Klyp who killed King Sigurd Slefa, Gunhild's son; and lastly, +Olmod, father of Askel, whose son was Aslak Fitjaskalle; and that +family branch was the greatest and most considered in Hordaland. +Now when this family heard the bad tidings, that the king was +coming along the country from the eastward with a great force, +and was breaking the ancient law of the people, and imposing +punishment and hard conditions on all who opposed him, the +relatives appointed a meeting to take counsel with each other, +for they knew the king would come down upon them at once: and +they all resolved to appear in force at the Gula-Thing, there to +hold a conference with King Olaf Trygvason. + + + +61. ROGALAND BAPTIZED. + +When King Olaf came to Rogaland, he immediately summoned the +people to a Thing; and when the bondes received the message- +token for a Thing, they assembled in great numbers well armed. +After they had come together, they resolved to choose three men, +the best speakers of the whole, who should answer King Olaf, and +argue with the king; and especially should decline to accept of +anything against the old law, even if the king should require it +of them. Now when the bondes came to the Thing, and the Thing +was formed, King Olaf arose, and at first spoke good-humoredly to +the people; but they observed he wanted them to accept +Christianity, with all his fine words: and in the conclusion he +let them know that those who should speak against him, and not +submit to his proposal, must expect his displeasure and +punishment, and all the ill that it was in his power to inflict. +When he had ended his speech, one of the bondes stood up, who was +considered the most eloquent, and who had been chosen as the +first who should reply to King Olaf. But when he would begin to +speak such a cough seized him, and such a difficulty of +breathing, that he could not bring out a word, and had to sit +down again. Then another bonde stood up, resolved not to let an +answer be wanting, although it had gone so ill with the former: +but he stammered so that he could not get a word uttered, and all +present set up a laughter, amid which the bonde sat down again. +And now the third stood up to make a speech against King Olaf's; +but when he began he became so hoarse and husky in his throat, +that nobody could hear a word he said, and he also had to sit +down. There was none of the bondes now to speak against the +king, and as nobody answered him there was no opposition; and it +came to this, that all agreed to what the king had proposed. All +the people of the Thing accordingly were baptized before the +Thing was dissolved. + + + +62. ERLING SKJALGSON'S WOOING. + +King Olaf went with his men-at-arms to the Gula-Thing; for the +bondes had sent him word that they would reply there to his +speech. When both parties had come to the Thing, the king +desired first to have a conference with the chief people of the +country; and when the meeting was numerous the king set forth his +errand, -- that he desired them, according to his proposal, to +allow themselves to be baptized. Then said Olmod the Old, "We +relations have considered together this matter, and have come to +one resolution. If thou thinkest, king, to force us who are +related together to such things as to break our old law, or to +bring us under thyself by any sort of violence, then will we +stand against thee with all our might: and be the victory to him +to whom fate ordains it. But if thou, king, wilt advance our +relations' fortunes, then thou shalt have leave to do as thou +desirest, and we will all serve thee with zeal in thy purpose." + +The king replies, "What do you propose for obtaining this +agreement?" + +Then answers Olmod, "The first is, that thou wilt give thy sister +Astrid in marriage to Erling Skjalgson, our relation, whom we +look upon as the most hopeful young man in all Norway." + +King Olaf replied, that this marriage appeared to him also very +suitable; "as Erling is a man of good birth, and a good-looking +man in appearance: but Astrid herself must answer to this +proposal." + +Thereupon the king spoke to his sister. She said, "It is but of +little use that I am a king's sister, and a king~s daughter, if I +must marry a man who has no high dignity or office. I will +rather wait a few years for a better match." Thus ended this +conference. + + +63. HORDALAND BAPTIZED. + +King Olaf took a falcon that belonged to Astrid, plucked off all +its feathers, and then sent it to her. Then said Astrid, "Angry +is my brother." And she stood up, and went to the king, who +received her kindly, and she said that she left it to the king to +determine her marriage. "I think," said the king, "that I must +have power enough in this land to raise any man I please to high +dignity." Then the king ordered Olmod and Erling to be called +to a conference, and all their relations; and the marriage was +determined upon, and Astrid betrothed to Erling. Thereafter the +king held the Thing, and recommended Christianity to the bondes; +and as Olmod, and Erling, and all their relations, took upon +themselves the most active part in forwarding the king's desire, +nobody dared to speak against it; and all the people were +baptized, and adopted Christianity. + + + +64. ERLING SKJALGSON'S WEDDING. + +Erling Skjalgson had his wedding in summer, and a great many +people were assembled at it. King Olaf was also there, and +offered Erling an earldom. Erling replied thus: "All my +relations have been herses only, and I will take no higher title +than they have; but this I will accept from thee, king, that thou +makest me the greatest of that title in the country." The king +consented; and at his departure the king invested his brother-in +law Erling with all the land north of the Sognefjord, and east to +the Lidandisnes, on the same terms as Harald Harfager had given +land to his sons, as before related. + + + +65. RAUMSDAL AND FJORD-DISTRICTS BAPTIZED. + +The same harvest King Olaf summoned the bondes to a Thing of the +four districts at Dragseid, in Stad: and there the people from +Sogn, the Fjord-districts, South More, and Raumsdal, were +summoned to meet. King Olaf came there with a great many people +who had followed him from the eastward, and also with those who +had joined him from Rogaland and Hordaland. When the king came +to the Thing, he proposed to them there, as elsewhere, +Christianity; and as the king had such a powerful host with him, +they were frightened. The king offered them two conditions, -- +either to accept Christianity, or to fight. But the bondes saw +they were in no condition to fight the king, and resolved, +therefore, that all the people should agree to be baptized. The +king proceeded afterwards to North More, and baptized all that +district. He then sailed to Hlader, in Throndhjem; had the +temple there razed to the ground; took all the ornaments and all +property out of the temple, and from the gods in it; and among +other things the great gold ring which Earl Hakon had ordered to +be made, and which hung in the door of the temple; and then had +the temple burnt. But when the bondes heard of this, they sent +out a war-arrow as a token through the whole district, ordering +out a warlike force, and intended to meet the king with it. In +the meantime King Olaf sailed with a war force out of the fjord +along the coast northward, intending to proceed to Halogaland, +and baptize there. When he came north to Bjarnaurar, he heard +from Halogaland that a force was assembled there to defend the +country against the king. The chiefs of this force were Harek of +Thjotta, Thorer Hjort from Vagar, and Eyvind Kinrifa. Now when +King Olaf heard this, he turned about and sailed southwards along +the land; and when he got south of Stad proceeded at his leisure, +and came early in winter (A.D. 998) all the way east to Viken. + + + +66. OLAF PROPOSES MARRIAGE TO QUEEN SIGRID. + +Queen Sigrid in Svithjod, who had for surname the Haughty, sat in +her mansion, and during the same winter messengers went between +King Olaf and Sigrid to propose his courtship to her, and she had +no objection; and the matter was fully and fast resolved upon. +Thereupon King Olaf sent to Queen Sigrid the great gold ring he +had taken from the temple door of Hlader, which was considered a +distinguished ornament. The meeting for concluding the business +was appointed to be in spring on the frontier, at the Gaut river. +Now the ring which King Olaf had sent Queen Sigrid was highly +prized by all men; yet the queen's gold-smiths, two brothers, who +took the ring in their hands, and weighed it, spoke quietly to +each other about it, and in a manner that made the queen call +them to her, and ask "what they smiled at?" But they would not +say a word, and she commanded them to say what it was they had +discovered. Then they said the ring is false. Upon this she +ordered the ring to be broken into pieces, and it was found to be +copper inside. Then the queen was enraged, and said that Olaf +would deceive her in more ways than this one. In the same year +(A.D. 998) King Olaf went into Ringenke, and there the people +also were baptized. + + + +67. OLAF HARALDSON BAPTIZED. + +Asta, the daughter of Gudbrand, soon after the fall of Harald +Grenske married again a man who was called Sigurd Syr, who was a +king in Ringerike. Sigurd was a son of Halfdan, and grandson of +Sigurd Hrise, who was a son of Harald Harfager. Olaf, the son of +Asta and Harald Grenske, lived with Asta, and was brought up from +childhood in the house of his stepfather, Sigurd Syr. Now when +King Olaf Trygvason came to Ringerike to spread Christianity, +Sigurd Syr and his wife allowed themselves to be baptized, along +with Olaf her son; and Olaf Trygvason was godfather to Olaf, the +stepson of Harald Grenske. Olaf was then three years old. Olaf +returned from thence to Viken, where he remained all winter. He +had now been three years king in Norway (A.D. 998). + + + +68. MEETING OF OLAF AND SIGRID. + +Early in spring (A.D. 998) King Olaf went eastwards to +Konungahella to the meeting with Queen Sigrid; and when they met +the business was considered about which the winter before they +had held communication, namely, their marriage; and the business +seemed likely to be concluded. But when Olaf insisted that +Sigrid should let herself be baptized, she answered thus: -- "I +must not part from the faith which I have held, and my +forefathers before me; and, on the other hand, I shall make no +objection to your believing in the god that pleases you best." +Then King Olaf was enraged, and answered in a passion, "Why +should I care to have thee, an old faded woman, and a heathen +jade?" and therewith struck her in the face with his glove which +he held in his hands, rose up, and they parted. Sigrid said, +"This may some day be thy death." The king set off to Viken, the +queen to Svithjod. + + + +69. THE BURNING OF WARLOCKS. + +Then the king proceeded to Tunsberg, and held a Thing, at which +he declared in a speech that all the men of whom it should be +known to a certainty that they dealt with evil spirits, or in +witchcraft, or were sorcerers, should be banished forth of the +land. Thereafter the king had all the neighborhood ransacked +after such people, and called them all before him; and when they +were brought to the Thing there was a man among them called +Eyvind Kelda, a grandson of Ragnvald Rettilbeine, Harald +Harfager's son. Eyvind was a sorcerer, and particularly knowing +in witchcraft. The king let all these men be seated in one room, +which was well adorned, and made a great feast for them, and gave +them strong drink in plenty. Now when they were all very drunk, +he ordered the house be set on fire, and it and all the people +within it were consumed, all but Eyvind Kelda, who contrived to +escape by the smoke-hole in the roof. And when he had got a long +way off, he met some people on the road going to the king, and he +told them to tell the king that Eyvind Kelda had slipped away +from the fire, and would never come again in King Olaf's power, +but would carry on his arts of witchcraft as much as ever. When +the people came to the king with such a message from Eyvind, the +king was ill pleased that Eyvind had escaped death. + + + +70. EYVIND KELDA'S DEATH. + +When spring (A.D. 998) came King Olaf went out to Viken, and was +on visits to his great farms. He sent notice over all Viken that +he would call out an army in summer, and proceed to the north +parts of the country. Then he went north to Agder; and when +Easter was approaching he took the road to Rogaland with 300 +(=360) men, and came on Easter evening north to Ogvaldsnes, in +Kormt Island, where an Easter feast was prepared for him. That +same night came Eyvind Kelda to the island with a well-manned +long-ship, of which the whole crew consisted of sorcerers and +other dealers with evil spirits. Eyvind went from his ship to +the land with his followers, and there they played many of their +pranks of witchcraft. Eyvind clothed them with caps of darkness, +and so thick a mist that the king and his men could see nothing +of them; but when they came near to the house at Ogvaldsnes, it +became clear day. Then it went differently from what Eyvind had +intended: for now there came just such a darkness over him and +his comrades in witchcraft as they had made before, so that they +could see no more from their eyes than from the back of their +heads but went round and round in a circle upon the island. When +the king's watchman saw them going about, without knowing what +people these were, they told the king. Thereupon he rose up with +his people, put on his clothes, and when he saw Eyvind with his +men wandering about he ordered his men to arm, and examine what +folk these were. The king's men discovered it was Eyvind, took +him and all his company prisoners, and brought them to the king. +Eyvind now told all he had done on his journey. Then the king +ordered these all to be taken out to a skerry which was under +water in flood tide, and there to be left bound. Eyvind and all +with him left their lives on this rock, and the skerry is still +called Skrattasker. + + + +71. OLAF AND ODIN'S APPARITION. + +It is related that once on a time King Olaf was at a feast at +this Ogvaldsnes, and one eventide there came to him an old man +very gifted in words, and with a broad-brimmed hat upon his head. +He was one-eyed, and had something to tell of every land. He +entered into conversation with the king; and as the king found +much pleasure in the guest's speech, he asked him concerning many +things, to which the guest gave good answers: and the king sat up +late in the evening. Among other things, the king asked him if +he knew who the Ogvald had been who had given his name both to +the ness and to the house. The guest replied, that this Ogvald +was a king, and a very valiant man, and that he made great +sacrifices to a cow which he had with him wherever he went, and +considered it good for his health to drink her milk. This same +King Ogvald had a battle with a king called Varin, in which +battle Ogvald fell. He was buried under a mound close to the +house; "and there stands his stone over him, and close to it his +cow also is laid." Such and many other things, and ancient +events, the king inquired after. Now, when the king had sat late +into the night, the bishop reminded him that it was time to go to +bed, and the king did so. But after the king was undressed, and +had laid himself in bed, the guest sat upon the foot-stool before +the bed, and still spoke long with the king; for after one tale +was ended, he still wanted a new one. Then the bishop observed +to the king, it was time to go to sleep, and the king did so; and +the guest went out. Soon after the king awoke, asked for the +guest, and ordered him to be called, but the guest was not to be +found. The morning after, the king ordered his cook and cellar- +master to be called, and asked if any strange person had been +with them. They said, that as they were making ready the meat a +man came to them, and observed that they were cooking very poor +meat for the king's table; whereupon he gave them two thick and +fat pieces of beef, which they boiled with the rest of the meat. +Then the king ordered that all the meat should be thrown away, +and said this man can be no other than the Odin whom the heathens +have so long worshipped; and added, "but Odin shall not deceive +us." + + + +72. THE THING IN THRONDHJEM. + +King Olaf collected a great army in the east of the country +towards summer, and sailed with it north to Nidaros in the +Throndhjem country. From thence he sent a message-token over all +the fjord, calling the people of eight different districts to a +Thing; but the bondes changed the Thing-token into a war-token; +and called together all men, free and unfree, in all the +Throndhjem land. Now when the king met the Thing, the whole +people came fully armed. After the Thing was seated, the king +spoke, and invited them to adopt Christianity; but he had only +spoken a short time when the bondes called out to him to be +silent, or they would attack him and drive him away. "We did +so," said they, "with Hakon foster-son of Athelstan, when he +brought us the same message, and we held him in quite as much +respect as we hold thee." When King Olaf saw how incensed the +bondes were, and that they had such a war force that he could +make no resistance, he turned his speech as if he would give way +to the bondes, and said, "I wish only to be in a good +understanding with you as of old; and I will come to where ye +hold your greatest sacrifice-festival, and see your customs, and +thereafter we shall consider which to hold by." And in this all +agreed; and as the king spoke mildly and friendly with the +bondes, their answer was appeased, and their conference with the +king went off peacefully. At the close of it a midsummer +sacrifice was fixed to take place in Maeren, and all chiefs and +great bondes to attend it as usual. The king was to be at it. + + + +73. JARNSKEGGE OR IRON BEARD. + +There was a great bonde called Skegge, and sometimes Jarnskegge, +or Iron Beard, who dwelt in Uphaug in Yrjar. He spoke first at +the Thing to Olaf; and was the foremost man of the bondes in +speaking against Christianity. The Thing was concluded in this +way for that time, -- the bondes returned home, and the king went +to Hlader. + + +74. THE FEAST AT HLADER. + +King Olaf lay with his ships in the river Nid, and had thirty +vessels, which were manned with many brave people; but the king +himself was often at Hlader, with his court attendants. As the +time now was approaching at which the sacrifices should be made +at Maeren, the king prepared a great feast at Hlader, and sent a +message to the districts of Strind, Gaulardal, and out to +Orkadal, to invite the chiefs and other great bondes. When the +feast was ready, and the chiefs assembled, there was a handsome +entertainment the first evening, at which plenty of liquor went +round. and the guests were made very drunk. The night after they +all slept in peace. The following morning, when the king was +dressed, he had the early mass sung before him; and when the mass +was over, ordered to sound the trumpets for a House Thing: upon +which all his men left the ships to come up to the Thing. When +the Thing was seated, the king stood up, and spoke thus: "We held +a Thing at Frosta, and there I invited the bondes to allow +themselves to be baptized; but they, on the other hand, invited +me to offer sacrifice to their gods, as King Hakon, Athelstan's +foster-son, had done; and thereafter it was agreed upon between +us that we should meet at Maerin, and there make a great +sacrifice. Now if I, along with you, shall turn again to making +sacrifice, then will I make the greatest of sacrifices that are +in use; and I will sacrifice men. But I will not select slaves +or malefactors for this, but will take the greatest men only to +be offered to the gods; and for this I select Orm Lygra of +Medalhus, Styrkar of Gimsar, Kar of Gryting, Asbjorn Thorbergson +of Varnes, Orm of Lyxa, Haldor of Skerdingsstedja;" and besides +these he named five others of the principal men. All these, he +said, he would offer in sacrifice to the gods for peace and a +fruitful season; and ordered them to be laid hold of immediately. +Now when the bondes saw that they were not strong enough to make +head against the king, they asked for peace, and submitted wholly +to the king's pleasure. So it was settled that all the bondes +who had come there should be baptized, and should take an oath to +the king to hold by the right faith, and to renounce sacrifice to +the gods. The king then kept all these men as hostages who came +to his feast, until they sent him their sons, brothers, or other +near relations. + + +75. OF THE THING IN THRONDHJEM. + +King Olaf went in with all his forces into the Throndhjem +country; and when he came to Maeren all among the chiefs of the +Throndhjem people who were most opposed to Christianity were +assembled, and had with them all the great bondes who had before +made sacrifice at that place. There was thus a greater multitude +of bondes than there had been at the Frosta-Thing. Now the king +let the people be summoned to the Thing, where both parties met +armed; and when the Thing was seated the king made a speech, in +which he told the people to go over to Christianity. Jarnskegge +replies on the part of the bondes, and says that the will of the +bondes is now, as formerly, that the king should not break their +laws. "We want, king," said he, "that thou shouldst offer +sacrifice, as other kings before thee have done." All the bondes +applauded his speech with a loud shout, and said they would have +all things according to what Skegge said. Then the king said he +would go into the temple of their gods with them, and see what +the practices were when they sacrificed. The bondes thought well +of this proceeding, and both parties went to the temple. + + + +76. THE THRONDHJEM PEOPLE BAPTIZED. + +Now King Olaf entered into the temple with some few of his men +and a few bondes; and when the king came to where their gods +were, Thor, as the most considered among their gods, sat there +adorned with gold and silver. The king lifted up his gold-inlaid +axe which he carried in his hands, and struck Thor so that the +image rolled down from its seat. Then the king's men turned to +and threw down all the gods from their seats; and while the king +was in the temple, Jarnskegge was killed outside of the temple +doors, and the king's men did it. When the king came forth out +of the temple he offered the bondes two conditions, -- that all +should accept of Christianity forthwith, or that they should +fight with him. But as Skegge was killed, there was no leader in +the bondes' army to raise the banner against King Olaf; so they +took the other condition, to surrender to the king's will and +obey his order. Then King Olaf had all the people present +baptized, and took hostages from them for their remaining true to +Christianity; and he sent his men round to every district, and no +man in the Throndhjem country opposed Christianity, but all +people took baptism. + + + +77. A TOWN IN THE THRONDHJEM COUNTRY. + +King Olaf with his people went out to Nidaros, and made houses on +the flat side of the river Nid, which he raised to be a merchant +town, and gave people ground to build houses upon. The king's +house he had built just opposite Skipakrok; and he transported +thither, in harvest, all that was necessary for his winter +residence, and had many people about him there. + + + +78. KING OLAF'S MARRIAGE. + +King Olaf appointed a meeting with the relations of Jarnskegge, +and offered them the compensation or penalty for his bloodshed; +for there were many bold men who had an interest in that +business. Jarnskegge had a daughter called Gudrun; and at last +it was agreed upon between the parties that the king should take +her in marriage. When the wedding day came King Olaf and Gudrun +went to bed together. As soon as Gudrun, the first night they +lay together, thought the king was asleep, she drew a knife, with +which she intended to run him through; but the king saw it, took +the knife from her, got out of bed, and went to his men, and told +them what had happened. Gudrun also took her clothes, and went +away along with all her men who had followed her thither. Gudrun +never came into the king's bed again. + + + +79. BUILDING OF THE SHIP CRANE. + +The same autumn (A.D. 998) King Olaf laid the keel of a great +long-ship out on the strand at the river Nid. It was a snekkja; +and he employed many carpenters upon her, so that early in winter +the vessel was ready. It had thirty benches for rowers, was high +in stem and stern, but was not broad. The king called this ship +Tranen (the Crane). After Jarnskegge's death his body was +carried to Yrjar, and lies there in the Skegge mound on Austrat. + + + +80. THANGBRAND THE PRIEST GOES TO ICELAND. + +When King Olaf Trygvason had been two years king of Norway (A.D. +997), there was a Saxon priest in his house who was called +Thangbrand, a passionate, ungovernable man, and a great man- +slayer; but he was a good scholar, and a clever man. The king +would not have him in his house upon account of his misdeeds; but +gave him the errand to go to Iceland, and bring that land to the +Christian faith. The king gave him a merchant vessel: and, as +far as we know of this voyage of his, he landed first in Iceland +at Austfjord in the southern Alptfjord, and passed the winter in +the house of Hal of Sida. Thangbrand proclaimed Christianity in +Iceland, and on his persuasion Hal and all his house people, and +many other chiefs, allowed themselves to be baptized; but there +were many more who spoke against it. Thorvald Veile and +Veterlide the skald composed a satire about Thangbrand; but he +killed them both outright. Thangbrand was two years in Iceland, +and was the death of three men before he left it. + + + +81. OF SIGURD AND HAUK. + +There was a man called Sigurd, and another called Hauk, both of +Halogaland, who often made merchant voyages. One summer (A.D. +998) they had made a voyage westward to England; and when they +came back to Norway they sailed northwards along the coast, and +at North More they met King Olaf's people. When it was told the +king that some Halogaland people were come who were heathen, he +ordered the steersmen to be brought to him, and he asked them if +they would consent to be baptized; to which they replied, no. +The king spoke with them in many ways, but to no purpose. He +then threatened them with death and torture: but they would not +allow themselves to be moved. He then had them laid in irons, +and kept them in chains in his house for some time, and often +conversed with them, but in vain. At last one night they +disappeared, without any man being able to conjecture how they +got away. But about harvest they came north to Harek of Thjotta, +who received them kindly, and with whom they stopped all winter +(A.D. 999), and were hospitably entertained. + + + +82. OF HAREK OF THJOTTA. + +It happened one good-weather day in spring (A.D. 999) that Harek +was at home in his house with only few people, and time hung +heavy on his hands. Sigurd asked him if he would row a little +for amusement. Harek was willing; and they went to the shore, +and drew down a six-oared skiff; and Sigurd took the mast and +rigging belonging to the boat out of the boat-house, for they +often used to sail when they went for amusement on the water. +Harek went out into the boat to hang the rudder. The brothers +Sigurd and Hauk, who were very strong men, were fully armed, as +they were used to go about at home among the peasants. Before +they went out to the boat they threw into her some butter-kits +and a bread-chest, and carried between them a great keg of ale. +When they had rowed a short way from the island the brothers +hoisted the sail, while Harek was seated at the helm; and they +sailed away from the island. Then the two brothers went aft to +where Harek the bonde was sitting; and Sigurd says to him, "Now +thou must choose one of these conditions, -- first, that we +brothers direct this voyage; or, if not, that we bind thee fast +and take the command; or, third, that we kill thee." Harek saw +how matters stood with him. As a single man, he was not better +than one of those brothers, even if he had been as well armed; so +it appeared to him wisest to let them determine the course to +steer, and bound himself by oath to abide by this condition. On +this Sigurd took the helm, and steered south along the land, the +brothers taking particular care that they did not encounter +people. The wind was very favourable; and they held on sailing +along until they came south to Throndhjem and to Nidaros, where +they found the king. Then the king called Harek to him, and in a +conference desired him to be baptized. Harek made objections; +and although the king and Harek talked over it many times, +sometimes in the presence of other people, and sometimes alone, +they could not agree upon it. At last the king says to Harek, +"Now thou mayst return home, and I will do thee no injury; partly +because we are related together, and partly that thou mayst not +have it to say that I caught thee by a trick: but know for +certain that I intend to come north next summer to visit you +Halogalanders, and ye shall then see if I am not able to punish +those who reject Christianity." Harek was well pleased to get +away as fast as he could. King Olaf gave Harek a good boat of +ten or twelve pair of oars, and let it be fitted out with the +best of everything needful; and besides he gave Harek thirty men, +all lads of mettle, and well appointed. + + + +83. EYVIND KINRIFA'S DEATH. + +Harek of Thjotta went away from the town as fast as he could; but +Hauk and Sigurd remained in the king's house, and both took +baptism. Harek pursued his voyage until he came to Thjotta. He +sent immediately a message to his friend Eyvind Kinrifa, with the +word that he had been with King Olaf; but would not let himself +be cowed down to accept Christianity. The message at the same +time informed him that King Olaf intended coming to the north in +summer against them, and they must be at their posts to defend +themselves; it also begged Eyvind to come and visit him, the +sooner the better. When this message was delivered to Eyvind, he +saw how very necessary it was to devise some counsel to avoid +falling into the king's hands. He set out, therefore, in a light +vessel with a few hands as fast as he could. When he came to +Thjotta he was received by Harek in the most friendly way, and +they immediately entered into conversation with each other behind +the house. When they had spoken together but a short time, King +Olaf's men, who had secretly followed Harek to the north, came +up, and took Eyvind prisoner, and carried him away to their ship. +They did not halt on their voyage until they came to Throndhjem, +and presented themselves to King Olaf at Nidaros. Then Eyvind +was brought up to a conference with the king, who asked him to +allow himself to be baptized, like other people; but Eyvind +decidedly answered he would not. The king still, with persuasive +words, urged him to accept Christianity, and both he and the +bishop used many suitable arguments; but Eyvind would not allow +himself to be moved. The king offered him gifts and great fiefs, +but Eyvind refused all. Then the king threatened him with +tortures and death, but Eyvind was steadfast. Then the king +ordered a pan of glowing coals to be placed upon Eyvind's belly, +which burst asunder. Eyvind cried, "Take away the pan, and I +will say something before I die," which also was done. The king +said, "Wilt thou now, Eyvind, believe in Christ?" "No," said +Eyvind, "I can take no baptism; for I am an evil spirit put into +a man's body by the sorcery of Fins because in no other way could +my father and mother have a child." With that died Eyvind, who +had been one of the greatest sorcerers. + + + +84. HALOGALAND MADE CHRISTIAN. + +The spring after (A.D. 999) King Olaf fitted out and manned his +ships, and commanded himself his ship the Crane. He had many and +smart people with him; and when he was ready, he sailed +northwards with his fleet past Bryda, and to Halogaland. +Wheresoever he came to the land, or to the islands, he held a +Thing, and told the people to accept the right faith, and to be +baptized. No man dared to say anything against it, and the whole +country he passed through was made Christian. King Olaf was a +guest in the house of Harek of Thjotta, who was baptized with all +his people. At parting the king gave Harek good presents; and he +entered into the king's service, and got fiefs, and the +privileges of lendsman from the king. + + + +85. THORER HJORT'S DEATH. + +There was a bonde, by name Raud the Strong, who dwelt in Godey +in Salten fjord. Raud was a very rich man, who had many house +servants; and likewise was a powerful man, who had many Fins in +his service when he wanted them. Raud was a great idolater, and +very skillful in witchcraft, and was a great friend of Thorer +Hjort, before spoken of. Both were great chiefs. Now when they +heard that King Olaf was coming with a great force from the south +to Halogaland, they gathered together an army, ordered out ships, +and they too had a great force on foot. Raud had a large ship +with a gilded head formed like a dragon, which ship had thirty +rowing benches, and even for that kind of ship was very large. +Thorer Hjort had also a large ship. These men sailed southwards +with their ships against King Olaf, and as soon as they met gave +battle. A great battle there was, and a great fall of men; but +principally on the side of the Halogalanders, whose ships were +cleared of men, so that a great terror came upon them. Raud +rode with his dragon out to sea, and set sail. Raud had always a +fair wind wheresoever he wished to sail, which came from his arts +of witchcraft; and, to make a short story, he came home to Godey. +Thorer Hjort fled from the ships up to the land: but King Olaf +landed people, followed those who fled, and killed them. Usually +the king was the foremost in such skirmishes, and was so now. +When the king saw where Thorer Hjort, who was quicker on foot +than any man, was running to, he ran after him with his dog Vige. +The king said, "Vige! Vige! Catch the deer." Vige ran straight +in upon him; on which Thorer halted, and the king threw a spear +at him. Thorer struck with his sword at the dog, and gave him a +great wound; but at the same moment the king's spear flew under +Thorer's arm, and went through and through him, and came out at +his other-side. There Thorer left his life; but Vige was carried +to the ships. + + + +86. KING OLAF'S VOYAGE TO GODEY. + +King Olaf gave life and freedom to all the men who asked it and +agreed to become Christian. King Olaf sailed with his fleet +northwards along the coast, and baptized all the people among +whom he came; and when he came north to Salten fjord, he intended +to sail into it to look for Raud, but a dreadful tempest and +storm was raging in the fjord. They lay there a whole week, in +which the same weather was raging within the fjord, while without +there was a fine brisk wind only, fair for proceeding north along +the land. Then the king continued his voyage north to Omd, where +all the people submitted to Christianity. Then the king turned +about and sailed to the south again; but when he came to the +north side of Salten fjord, the same tempest was blowing, and the +sea ran high out from the fjord, and the same kind of storm +prevailed for several days while the king was lying there. Then +the king applied to Bishop Sigurd, and asked him if he knew any +counsel about it; and the bishop said he would try if God would +give him power to conquer these arts of the Devil. + + + +87. OF RAUD'S BEING TORTURED. + +Bishop Sigurd took all his mass robes and went forward to the bow +of the king's ship; ordered tapers to be lighted, and incense to +be brought out. Then he set the crucifix upon the stem of the +vessel, read the Evangelist and many prayers, besprinkled the +whole ship with holy water, and then ordered the ship-tent to be +stowed away, and to row into the fjord. The king ordered all the +other ships to follow him. Now when all was ready on board the +Crane to row, she went into the fjord without the rowers finding +any wind; and the sea was curled about their keel track like as +in a calm, so quiet and still was the water; yet on each side of +them the waves were lashing up so high that they hid the sight of +the mountains. And so the one ship followed the other in the +smooth sea track; and they proceeded this way the whole day and +night, until they reached Godey. Now when they came to Raud's +house his great ship, the dragon, was afloat close to the land. +King Olaf went up to the house immediately with his people; made +an attack on the loft in which Raud was sleeping, and broke it +open. The men rushed in: Raud was taken and bound, and of the +people with him some were killed and some made prisoners. Then +the king's men went to a lodging in which Raud's house servants +slept, and killed some, bound others, and beat others. Then the +king ordered Raud to be brought before him, and offered him +baptism. "And," says the king, "I will not take thy property +from thee, but rather be thy friend, if thou wilt make thyself +worthy to be so." Raud exclaimed with all his might against the +proposal, saying he would never believe in Christ, and making his +scoff of God. Then the king was wroth, and said Raud should die +the worst of deaths. And the king ordered him to be bound to a +beam of wood, with his face uppermost, and a round pin of wood +set between his teeth to force his mouth open. Then the king +ordered an adder to be stuck into the mouth of him; but the +serpent would not go into his mouth, but shrunk back when Raud +breathed against it. Now the king ordered a hollow branch of an +angelica root to be stuck into Raud's mouth; others say the king +put his horn into his mouth, and forced the serpent to go in by +holding a red-hot iron before the opening. So the serpent crept +into the mouth of Raud and down his throat, and gnawed its way +out of his side; and thus Raud perished. King Olaf took here +much gold and silver, and other property of weapons, and many +sorts of precious effects; and all the men who were with Raud he +either had baptized, or if they refused had them killed or +tortured. Then the king took the dragonship which Raud had +owned, and steered it himself; for it was a much larger and +handsomer vessel than the Crane. In front it had a dragon's +head, and aft a crook, which turned up, and ended with the figure +of the dragon's tail. The carved work on each side of the stem +and stern was gilded. This ship the king called the Serpent. +When the sails were hoisted they represented, as it were, the +dragon's wings; and the ship was the handsomest in all Norway. +The islands on which Raud dwelt were called Gylling and Haering; +but the whole islands together were called Godey Isles, and the +current between the isles and the mainland the Godey Stream. +King Olaf baptized the whole people of the fjord, and then sailed +southwards along the land; and on this voyage happened much and +various things, which are set down in tales and sagas, -- namely, +how witches and evil spirits tormented his men, and sometimes +himself; but we will rather write about what occurred when King +Olaf made Norway Christian, or in the other countries in which he +advanced Christianity. The same autumn Olaf with his fleet +returned to Throndhjem, and landed at Nidaros, where he took up +his winter abode. What I am now going to write about concerns +the Icelanders. + + + +88. OF THE ICELANDERS. + +Kjartan Olafson, a son's son of Hoskuld, and a daughter's son of +Egil Skallagrimson, came the same autumn (A.D. 999) from Iceland +to Nidaros, and he was considered to be the most agreeable and +hopeful man of any born in Iceland. There was also Haldor, a son +of Gudmund of Modruveller; and Kolbein, a son of Thord, Frey's +gode, and a brother's son of Brennuflose; together with Sverting, +a son of the gode Runolf. All these were heathens; and besides +them there were many more, -- some men of power, others common +men of no property. There came also from Iceland considerable +people, who, by Thangbrand's help, had been made Christians; +namely, Gissur the white, a son of Teit Ketilbjornson; and his +mother was Alof, daughter of herse Bodvar, who was the son of +Vikingakare. Bodvar's brother was Sigurd, father of Eirik +Bjodaskalle, whose daughter Astrid was King Olaf's mother. +Hjalte Skeggjason was the name of another Iceland man, who was +married to Vilborg, Gissur the White's daughter. Hjalte was also +a Christian; and King Olaf was very friendly to his relations +Gissur and Hjalte, who live with him. But the Iceland men who +directed the ships, and were heathens, tried to sail away as soon +as the king came to the town of Nidaros, for they were told the +king forced all men to become Christians; but the wind came stiff +against them, and drove them back to Nidarholm. They who +directed the ships were Thorarin Nefjulson, the skald Halfred +Ottarson, Brand the Generous, and Thorleik, Brand's son. It was +told the king that there were Icelanders with ships there, and +all were heathen, and wanted to fly from a meeting with the king. +Then the king sent them a message forbidding them to sail, and +ordering them to bring their ships up to the town, which they +did, but without discharging the cargoes. (They carried on their +dealings and held a market at the king's pier. In spring they +tried three times to slip away, but never succeeded; so they +continued lying at the king's pier. It happened one fine day +that many set out to swim for amusement, and among them was a man +who distinguished himself above the others in all bodily +exercises. Kjartan challenged Halfred Vandredaskald to try +himself in swimming against this man, but he declined it. "Then +will I make a trial," said Kjartan, casting off his clothes, and +springing into the water. Then he set after the man, seizes hold +of his foot, and dives with him under water. They come up again, +and without speaking a word dive again, and are much longer under +water than the first time. They come up again, and without +saying a word dive a third time, until Kjartan thought it was +time to come up again, which, however, he could in no way +accomplish, which showed sufficiently the difference in their +strength. They were under water so long that Kjartan was almost +drowned. They then came up, and swam to land. This Northman +asked what the Icelander's name was. Kjartan tells his name. + +He says, "Thou art a good swimmer; but art thou expert also in +other exercises?" + +Kjartan replied, that such expertness was of no great value. + +The Northman asks, "Why dost thou not inquire of me such things +as I have asked thee about?" + +Kjartan replies, "It is all one to me who thou art, or what thy +name is." + +"Then will I," says he, "tell thee: I am Olaf Trygvason." + +He asked Kjartan much about Iceland, which he answered generally, +and wanted to withdraw as hastily as he could; but the king said, +"Here is a cloak which I will give thee, Kjartan." And Kjartan +took the cloak with many thanks.)" (1) + + +ENDNOTES: +(1) The part included in parenthesis is not found in the + original text of "Heimskringla", but taken from "Codex + Frisianus". + + + +89. BAPTISM OF THE ICELANDERS. + +When Michaelmas came, the king had high mass sung with great +splendour. The Icelanders went there, listening to the fine +singing and the sound of the bells; and when they came back to +their ships every man told his opinion of the Christian man's +worship. Kjartan expressed his pleasure at it, but most of the +others scoffed at it; and it went according to the proverb, "the +king had many ears," for this was told to the king. He sent +immediately that very day a message to Kjartan to come to him. +Kjartan went with some men, and the king received him kindly. +Kjartan was a very stout and handsome man, and of ready and +agreeable speech. After the king and Kjartan had conversed a +little, the king asked him to adopt Christianity. Kjartan +replies, that he would not say no to that, if he thereby obtained +the king's friendship; and as the king promised him the fullest +friendship, they were soon agreed. The next day Kjartan was +baptized, together with his relation Bolle Thorlakson, and all +their fellow-travelers. Kjartan and Bolle were the king's guests +as long as they were in their white baptismal clothes, and the +king had much kindness for them. Wherever they came they were +looked upon as people of distinction. + + + +90. HALFRED VANDREDASKALD BAPTIZED. + +As King Olaf one day was walking in the street some men met him, +and he who went the foremost saluted the king. The king asked +the man his name, and he called himself Halfred. + +"Art thou the skald?" said the king. + +"I can compose poetry," replied he. + +"Wilt thou then adopt Christianity, and come into my service?" +asked the king. + +"If I am baptized," replies he, "it must be on one condition, -- +that thou thyself art my godfather; for no other will I have." + +The king replies, "That I will do." And Halfred was baptized, +the king holding him during the baptism. + +Afterwards the king said, "Wilt thou enter into my service?" + +Halfred replied, "I was formerly in Earl Hakon's court; but now I +will neither enter into thine nor into any other service, unless +thou promise me it shall never be my lot to be driven away from +thee." + +"It has been reported to me," said the king, "that thou are +neither so prudent nor so obedient as to fulfil my commands." + +"In that case," replied Halfred, "put me to death." + +"Thou art a skald who composes difficulties," says the king; "but +into my service, Halfred, thou shalt be received." + +Halfred says, "if I am to be named the composer of difficulties, +what cost thou give me, king, on my name-day?" + +The king gave him a sword without a scabbard, and said, "Now +compose me a song upon this sword, and let the word sword be in +every line of the strophe." Halfred sang thus: + + "This sword of swords is my reward. + For him who knows to wield a sword, + And with his sword to serve his lord, + Yet wants a sword, his lot is hard. + I would I had my good lord's leave + For this good sword a sheath to choose: + I'm worth three swords when men use, + But for the sword-sheath now I grieve." + +Then the king gave him the scabbard, observing that the word +sword was wanting in one line of his strophe. "But there instead +are three swords in one of the lines," says Halfred. "That is +true," replies the king. -- Out of Halfred's lays we have taken +the most of the true and faithful accounts that are here related +about Olaf Trygvason. + + + +91. THANGBRAND RETURNS FROM ICELAND. + +The same harvest (A.D. 999) Thangbrand the priest came back from +Iceland to King Olaf, and told the ill success of his journey; +namely, that the Icelanders had made lampoons about him; and that +some even sought to kill him, and there was little hope of that +country ever being made Christian. King Olaf was so enraged at +this, that he ordered all the Icelanders to be assembled by sound +of horn, and was going to kill all who were in the town, but +Kjartan, Gissur, and Hjalte, with the other Icelanders who had +become Christians, went to him, and said, "King, thou must not +fail from thy word -- that however much any man may irritate +thee, thou wilt forgive him if he turn from heathenism and become +Christian. All the Icelanders here are willing to be baptized; +and through them we may find means to bring Christianity into +Iceland: for there are many amongst them, sons of considerable +people in Iceland, whose friends can advance the cause; but the +priest Thangbrand proceeded there as he did here in the court, +with violence and manslaughter, and such conduct the people there +would not submit to." The king harkened to those remonstrances; +and all the Iceland men who were there were baptized. + + + +92. OF KING OLAF'S FEATS. + +King Olaf was more expert in all exercises than any man in Norway +whose memory is preserved to us in sagas; and he was stronger and +more agile than most men, and many stories are written down about +it. One is that he ascended the Smalsarhorn, and fixed his +shield upon the very peak. Another is, that one of his followers +had climbed up the peak after him, until he came to where he +could neither get up nor down; but the king came to his help, +climbed up to him, took him under his arm, and bore him to the +flat ground. King Olaf could run across the oars outside of the +vessel while his men were rowing the Serpent. He could play with +three daggers, so that one was always in the air, and he took the +one falling by the handle. He could walk all round upon the +ship's rails, could strike and cut equally well with both hands, +and could cast two spears at once. King Olaf was a very merry +frolicsome man; gay and social; was very violent in all respects; +was very generous; was very finical in his dress, but in battle +he exceeded all in bravery. He was distinguished for cruelty +when he was enraged, and tortured many of his enemies. Some he +burnt in fire; some he had torn in pieces by mad dogs; some he +had mutilated, or cast down from high precipices. On this +account his friends were attached to him warmly, and his enemies +feared him greatly; and thus he made such a fortunate advance in +his undertakings, for some obeyed his will out of the friendliest +zeal, and others out of dread. + + + +93. BAPTISM OF LEIF EIRIKSON. + +Leif, a son of Eirik the Red, who first settled in Greenland, +came this summer (A.D. 999) from Greenland to Norway; and as he +met King Olaf he adopted Christianity, and passed the winter +(A.D. 1000) with the king. + + + +94. FALL OF KING GUDROD. + +Gudrod, a son of Eirik Bloodaxe and Gunhild, had been ravaging in +the west countries ever since he fled from Norway before the Earl +Hakon. But the summer before mentioned (A.D. 999), where King +Olaf Trygvason had ruled four years over Norway, Gudrod came to +the country, and had many ships of war with him. He had sailed +from England; and when he thought himself near to the Norway +coast, he steered south along the land, to the quarter where it +was least likely King Olaf would be. Gudrod sailed in this way +south to Viken; and as soon as he came to the land he began to +plunder, to subject the people to him, and to demand that they +should accept of him as king. Now as the country people saw that +a great army was come upon them, they desired peace and terms. +They offered King Gudrod to send a Thing-message over all the +country, and to accept of him at the Thing as king, rather than +suffer from his army; but they desired delay until a fixed day, +while the token of the Thing's assembling was going round through +the land. The king demanded maintenance during the time this +delay lasted. The bondes preferred entertaining the king as a +guest, by turns, as long as he required it; and the king accepted +of the proposal to go about with some of his men as a guest from +place to place in the land, while others of his men remained to +guard the ships. When King Olaf's relations, Hyrning and +Thorgeir, heard of this, they gathered men, fitted out ships, and +went northwards to Viken. They came in the night with their men +to a place at which King Gudrod was living as a guest, and +attacked him with fire and weapons; and there King Gudrod fell, +and most of his followers. Of those who were with his ships some +were killed, some slipped away and fled to great distances; and +now were all the sons of Eirik and Gunhild dead. + + + +95. BUILDING OF THE SHIP LONG SERPENT. + +The winter after, King Olaf came from Halogaland (A.D. 1000), he +had a great vessel built at Hladhamrar, which was larger than any +ship in the country, and of which the beam-knees are still to be +seen. The length of keel that rested upon the grass was seventy- +four ells. Thorberg Skafhog was the man's name who was the +master-builder of the ship; but there were many others besides, +-- some to fell wood, some to shape it, some to make nails, some +to carry timber; and all that was used was of the best. The ship +was both long and broad and high-sided, and strongly timbered. + +While they were planking the ship, it happened that Thorberg had +to go home to his farm upon some urgent business; and as he +remained there a long time, the ship was planked up on both sides +when he came back. In the evening the king went out, and +Thorberg with him, to see how the vessel looked, and everybody +said that never was seen so large and so beautiful a ship of +war. Then the king returned to the town. Early next morning the +king returns again to the ship, and Thorberg with him. The +carpenters were there before them, but all were standing idle +with their arms across. The king asked, "what was the matter?" +They said the ship was destroyed; for somebody had gone from, +stem to stern, and cut one deep notch after the other down the +one side of the planking. When the king came nearer he saw it +was so, and said, with an oath, "The man shall die who has thus +destroyed the vessel out of envy, if he can be discovered, and I +shall bestow a great reward on whoever finds him out." + +"I can tell you, king," said Thorberg, "who has done this piece +of work." -- + +"I don't think," replies the king, "that any one is so likely to +find it out as thou art." + +Thorberg says, "I will tell you, king, who did it. I did it +myself." + +The king says, "Thou must restore it all to the same condition as +before, or thy life shall pay for it." + +Then Thorberg went and chipped the planks until the deep notches +were all smoothed and made even with the rest; and the king and +all present declared that the ship was much handsomer on the side +of the hull which Thorberg, had chipped, and bade him shape the +other side in the same way; and gave him great thanks for the +improvement. Afterwards Thorberg was the master builder of the +ship until she was entirely finished. The ship was a dragon, +built after the one the king had captured in Halogaland; but this +ship was far larger, and more carefully put together in all her +parts. The king called this ship Serpent the Long, and the +other Serpent the Short. The long Serpent had thirty-four +benches for rowers. The head and the arched tail were both gilt, +and the bulwarks were as high as in sea-going ships. This ship +was the best and most costly ship ever made in Norway. + + + +96. EARL EIRIK, THE SON OF HAKON. + +Earl Eirik, the son of Earl Hakon, and his brothers, with many +other valiant men their relations, had left the country after +Earl Hakon's fall. Earl Eirik went eastwards to Svithjod, to +Olaf, the Swedish king, and he and his people were well received. +King Olaf gave the earl peace and freedom in the land, and great +fiefs; so that he could support himself and his men well. Thord +Kolbeinson speaks of this in the verses before given. Many +people who fled from the country on account of King Olaf +Trygvason came out of Norway to Earl Eirik; and the earl resolved +to fit out ships and go a-cruising, in order to get property for +himself and his people. First he steered to Gotland, and lay +there long in summer watching for merchant vessels sailing +towards the land, or for vikings. Sometimes he landed and +ravaged all round upon the sea-coasts. So it is told in the +"Banda-drapa": -- + + "Eirik, as we have lately heard, + Has waked the song of shield and sword -- + Has waked the slumbering storm of shields + Upon the vikings' water-fields: + From Gotland's lonely shore has gone + Far up the land, and battles won: + And o'er the sea his name is spread, + To friends a shield, to foes a dread." + +Afterwards Earl Eirik sailed south to Vindland, and at Stauren +found some viking ships, and gave them battle. Eirik gained the +victory, and slew the vikings. So it is told in the "Banda- +drapa": -- + + "Earl Eirik, he who stoutly wields + The battle-axe in storm of shields, + With his long ships surprised the foe + At Stauren, and their strength laid low + Many a corpse floats round the shore; + The strand with dead is studded o'er: + The raven tears their sea-bleached skins -- + The land thrives well when Eirik wins." + + + +97. EIRIK'S FORAY ON THE BALTIC COASTS. + +Earl Eirik sailed back to Sweden in autumn, and staid there all +winter (A.D. 997); but in the spring fitted out his war force +again, and sailed up the Baltic. When he came to Valdemar's +dominions he began to plunder and kill the inhabitants, and burn +the dwellings everywhere as he came along, and to lay waste the +country. He came to Aldeigiuburg, and besieged it until he took +the castle; and he killed many people, broke down and burned the +castle, and then carried destruction all around far and wide in +Gardarike. So it is told in the "Banda-drapa": -- + + "The generous earl, brave and bold, + Who scatters his bright shining gold, + Eirik with fire-scattering hand, + Wasted the Russian monarch's land, -- + With arrow-shower, and storm of war, + Wasted the land of Valdemar. + Aldeiga burns, and Eirik's might + Scours through all Russia by its light." + +Earl Eirik was five years in all on this foray; and when he +returned from Gardarike he ravaged all Adalsysla and Eysysla, and +took there four viking ships from the Danes and killed every man +on board. So it is told in the "Banda-drapa": -- + + "Among the isles flies round the word, + That Eirik's blood-devouring sword + Has flashed like fire in the sound, + And wasted all the land around. + And Eirik too, the bold in fight, + Has broken down the robber-might + Of four great vikings, and has slain + All of the crew -- nor spared one Dane. + In Gautland he has seized the town, + In Syssels harried up and down; + And all the people in dismay + Fled to the forests far away. + By land or sea, in field or wave, + What can withstand this earl brave? + All fly before his fiery hand -- + God save the earl, and keep the land." + +When Eirik had been a year in Sweden he went over to Denmark +(A.D. 996) to King Svein Tjuguskeg, the Danish king, and courted +his daughter Gyda. The proposal was accepted, and Earl Eirik +married Gyda; and a year after (A.D. 997) they had a son, who was +called Hakon. Earl Eirik was in the winter in Denmark, or +sometimes in Sweden; but in summer he went a-cruising. + + + +98. KING SVEIN'S MARRIAGE. + +The Danish king, Svein Tjuguskeg, was married to Gunhild, a +daughter of Burizleif, king of the Vinds. But in the times we +have just been speaking of it happened that Queen Gunhild fell +sick and died. Soon after King Svein married Sigrid the Haughty, +a daughter of Skoglartoste, and mother of the Swedish king Olaf; +and by means of this relationship there was great friendship +between the kings and Earl Eirik, Hakon's son. + + + +99. KING BURIZLEIF'S MARRIAGE. + +Burizleif, the king of the Vinds, complained to his relation Earl +Sigvalde, that the agreement was broken which Sigvalde had made +between King Svein and King Burizleif, by which Burizleif was to +get in marriage Thyre, Harald's daughter, a sister of King Svein: +but that marriage had not proceeded, for Thyre had given positive +no to the proposal to marry her to an old and heathen king. +"Now," said King Burizleif to Earl Sigvalde, "I must have the +promise fulfilled." And he told Earl Sigvalde to go to Denmark, +and bring him Thyre as his queen. Earl Sigvalde loses no time, +but goes to King Svein of Denmark, explains to him the case; and +brings it so far by his persuasion, that the king delivered his +sister Thyre into his hands. With her went some female +attendants, and her foster-father, by name Ozur Agason, a man of +great power, and some other people. In the agreement between the +king and the earl, it was settled that Thyre should have in +property the possessions which Queen Gunhild had enjoyed in +Vindland, besides other great properties as bride-gifts. Thyre +wept sorely, and went very unwillingly. When the earl came to +Vindland, Burizleif held his wedding with Queen Thyre, and +received her in marriage; bus as long as she was among heathens +she would neither eat nor drink with them, and this lasted for +seven days. + + + +100. OLAF GETS THYRE IN MARRIAGE. + +It happened one night that Queen Thyre and Ozur ran away in the +dark, and into the woods, and, to be short in our story, came at +last to Denmark. But here Thyre did not dare to remain, knowing +that if her brother King Svein heard of her, he would send her +back directly to Vindland. She went on, therefore, secretly to +Norway, and never stayed her journey until she fell in with King +Olaf, by whom she was kindly received. Thyre related to the king +her sorrows, and entreated his advice in her need, and protection +in his kingdom. Thyre was a well-spoken woman, and the king had +pleasure in her conversation. He saw she was a handsome woman, +and it came into his mind that she would be a good match; so he +turns the conversation that way, and asks if she will marry him. +Now, as she saw that her situation was such that she could not +help herself, and considered what a luck it was for her to marry +so celebrated a man, she bade him to dispose himself of her hand +and fate; and, after nearer conversation, King Olaf took Thyre in +marriage. This wedding was held in harvest after the king +returned from Halogaland (A.D. 999), and King Olaf and Queen +Thyre remained all winter (A.D. 1000) at Nidaros. + +The following spring Queen Thyre complained often to King Olaf, +and wept bitterly over it, that she who had so great property in +Vindland had no goods or possessions here in the country that +were suitable for a queen; and sometimes she would entreat the +king with fine words to get her property restored to her, and +saying that King Burizleif was so great a friend of King Olaf +that he would not deny King Olaf anything if they were to meet. +But when King Olaf's friends heard of such speeches, they +dissuaded him from any such expedition. It is related at the +king one day early in spring was walking in the street, and met a +man in the market with many, and, for that early season, +remarkably large angelica roots. The king took a great stalk of +the angelica in his hand, and went home to Queen Thyre's lodging. +Thyre sat in her room weeping as the king came in. The king +said, "Set here, queen, is a great angelica stalk, which I give +thee." She threw it away, and said, "A greater present Harald +Gormson gave to my mother; and he was not afraid to go out of the +land and take his own. That was shown when he came here to +Norway, and laid waste the greater part of the land, and seized +on all the scat and revenues; and thou darest not go across the +Danish dominions for this brother of mine, King Svein." As she +spoke thus, King Olaf sprang up, and answered with loud oath, +"Never did I fear thy brother King Svein; and if we meet he shall +give way before me!" + + + +101. OLAF'S LEVY FOR WAR. + +Soon after the king convoked a Thing in the town, and proclaimed +to all the public, that in summer would go abroad upon an +expedition out of the country, and would raise both ships and men +from every district; and at the same time fixed how many ships +would have from the whole Throndhjem fjord. Then he sent his +message-token south and north, both along the sea-coast and up in +the interior of the country, to let an army be gathered. The +king ordered the Long Serpent to be put into the water, along +with all his other ships both small and great. He himself +steered the Long Serpent. When the crews were taken out for the +ships, they were so carefully selected that no man on board the +Long Serpent was older than sixty or younger than twenty years, +and all were men distinguished for strength and courage. Those +who were Olaf's bodyguard were in particular chosen men, both of +the natives and of foreigners, and the boldest and strongest. + + + +102. CREW ON BOARD OF THE LONG SERPENT. + +Ulf the Red was the name of the man who bore King Olaf's banner, +and was in the forecastle of the Long Serpent; and with him was +Kolbjorn the marshal, Thorstein Uxafot, and Vikar of Tiundaland, +a brother of Arnliot Gelline. By the bulkhead next the +forecastle were Vak Raumason from Gaut River, Berse the Strong, +An Skyte from Jamtaland, Thrand the Strong from Thelamork, and +his brother Uthyrmer. Besides these were, of Halogaland men, +Thrand Skjalge and Ogmund Sande, Hlodver Lange from Saltvik, and +Harek Hvasse; together with these Throndhjem men -- Ketil the +High, Thorfin Eisle, Havard and his brothers from Orkadal. The +following were in the fore-hold: Bjorn from Studla, Bork from the +fjords. Thorgrim Thjodolfson from Hvin, Asbjorn and Orm, Thord +from Njardarlog, Thorstein the White from Oprustadar, Arnor from +More, Halstein and Hauk from the Fjord district, Eyvind Snak, +Bergthor Bestil, Halkel from Fialer, Olaf Dreng, Arnfin from +Sogn, Sigurd Bild, Einar from Hordaland, and Fin, and Ketil from +Rogaland and Grjotgard the Brisk. The following were in the hold +next the mast: Einar Tambaskelfer, who was not reckoned as fully +experienced, being only eighteen years old; Thorstein Hlifarson, +Thorolf, Ivar Smetta, and Orm Skogarnef. Many other valiant men +were in the Serpent, although we cannot tell all their names. In +every half division of the hold were eight men, and each and all +chosen men; and in the fore-hold were thirty men. It was a +common saying among people, that the Long Serpent's crew was as +distinguished for bravery, strength, and daring, among other men, +as the Long Serpent was distinguished among other ships. Thorkel +Nefja, the king's brother, commanded the Short Serpent; and +Thorkel Dydril and Jostein, the king's mother's brothers, had the +Crane; and both these ships were well manned. King Olaf had +eleven large ships from Throndhjem, besides vessels with twenty +rowers' benches, smaller vessels, and provision-vessels. + + + +103. ICELAND BAPTIZED. + +When King Olaf had nearly rigged out his fleet in Nidaros, he +appointed men over the Throndhjem country in all districts and +communities. He also sent to Iceland Gissur the White and Hjalte +Skeggjason, to proclaim Christianity there; and sent with them a +priest called Thormod, along with several men in holy orders. +But he retained with him, as hostages, four Icelanders whom he +thought the most important; namely, Kjartan Olafson, Haldor +Gudmundson, Kolbein Thordson, and Sverting Runolfson. Of Gissur +and Hjalte's progress, it is related that they came to Iceland +before the Althing, and went to the Thing; and in that Thing +Christianity was introduced by law into Iceland, and in the +course of the summer all the people were baptized (A.D. 1000). + + + +104. GREENLAND BAPTIZED + +The same spring King Olaf also sent Leif Eirikson (A.D. 1000) to +Greenland to proclaim Christianity there, and Leif went there +that summer. In the ocean he took up the crew of a ship which +had been lost, and who were clinging to the wreck. He also found +Vinland the Good; arrived about harvest in Greenland; and had +with him for it a priest and other teachers, with whom he went to +Brattahild to lodge with his father Eirik. People called him +afterwards Leif the Lucky: but his father Eirik said that his +luck and ill luck balanced each other; for if Leif had saved a +wreck in the ocean, he had brought a hurtful person with him to +Greenland, and that was the priest. + + + +105. RAGNVALD SENDS MESSENGERS TO OLAF. + +The winter after King Olaf had baptized Halogaland, he and Queen +Thyre were in Nidaros; and the summer before Queen Thyre had +brought King Olaf a boy child, which was both stout and +promising, and was called Harald, after its mother's father. The +king and queen loved the infant exceedingly, and rejoiced in the +hope that it would grow up and inherit after its father; but it +lived barely a year after its birth, which both took much to +heart. In that winter were many Icelanders and other clever men +in King Olaf's house, as before related. His sister Ingebjorg, +Trygve's daughter, King Olaf's sister, was also at the court at +that time. She was beautiful in appearance, modest and frank +with the people, had a steady manly judgment, and was beloved of +all. She was very fond of the Icelanders who were there, but +most of Kjartan Olafson, for he had been longer than the others +in the king's house; and he found it always amusing to converse +with her, for she had both understanding and cleverness in talk. +The king was always gay and full of mirth in his intercourse with +people; and often asked about the manners of the great men and +chiefs in the neighbouring countries, when strangers from Denmark +or Sweden came to see him. The summer before Halfred +Vandredaskald had come from Gautland, where he had been with Earl +Ragnvald, Ulf's son, who had lately come to the government of +West Gautland. Ulf, Ragnvald's father, was a brother of Sigurd +the Haughty; so that King Olaf the Swede and Earl Ragnvald were +brother's and sister's children. Halfred told Olaf many things +about the earl: he said he was an able chief, excellently fitted +for governing, generous with money, brave and steady in +friendship. Halfred said also the earl desired much the +friendship of King Olaf, and had spoken of making court +Ingebjorg, Trygve's daughter. The same winter came ambassadors +from Gautland, and fell in with King Olaf in the north, in +Nidaros, and brought the message which Halfred had spoken of, -- +that the earl desired to be King Olaf's entire friend, and wished +to become his brother-in-law by obtaining his sister Ingebjorg in +marriage. Therewith the ambassadors laid before the king +sufficient tokens in proof that in reality they came from the +earl on this errand. The king listened with approbation to their +speech; but said that Ingebjorg must determine on his assent to +the marriage. The king then talked to his sister about the +matter, and asked her opinion about it. She answered to this +effect, -- "I have been with you for some time, and you have +shown brotherly care and tender respect for me ever since you +came to the country. I will agree therefore to your proposal +about my marriage, provided that you do not marry me to a heathen +man." The king said it should be as she wished. The king then +spoke to the ambassadors; and it was settled before they +departed that in summer Earl Ragnvald should meet the king in the +east parts of the country, to enter into the fullest friendship +with each other, and when they met they would settle about the +marriage. With this reply the earl's messengers went westward, +and King Olaf remained all winter in Nidaros in great splendour, +and with many people about him. + + + +106. OLAF SENDS EXPEDITION TO VINDLAND. + +King Olaf proceeded in summer with his ships and men southwards +along the land (and past Stad. With him were Queen Thyre and +Ingebjorg, Trygveis daughter, the king's sister). Many of his +friends also joined him, and other persons of consequence who had +prepared themselves to travel with the king. The first man among +these was his brother-in-law, Erling Skjalgson, who had with him +a large ship of thirty benches of rowers, and which was in every +respect well equipt. His brothers-in-law Hyrning and Thorgeir +also joined him, each of whom for himself steered a large vessel; +and many other powerful men besides followed him. (With all this +war-force he sailed southwards along the land; but when he came +south as far as Rogaland he stopped there, for Erling Skjalgson +had prepared for him a splendid feast at Sole. There Earl +Ragnvald, Ulf's son, from Gautland, came to meet the king, and to +settle the business which had been proposed ;n winter in the +messages between them, namely, the marriage with Ingebjorg the +king's sister. Olaf received him kindly; and when the matter +came to be spoken of, the king said he would keep his word, and +marry his sister Ingebjorg to him, provided he would accept the +true faith, and make all his subjects he ruled over in his land +be baptized; The earl agreed to this, and he and all his +followers were baptized. Now was the feast enlarged that Erling +had prepared, for the earl held his wedding there with Ingebjorg +the king's sister. King Olaf had now married off all his +sisters. The earl, with Ingebjorg, set out on his way home; and +the king sent learned men with him to baptize the people in +Gautland, and to teach them the right faith and morals. The king +and the earl parted in the greatest friendship.) + + + +107. OLAF'S EXPEDITION VINDLAND. + +(After his sister Ingebjorg's wedding, the king made ready in all +haste to leave the country with his army, which was both great +and made up of fine men.) When he left the land and sailed +southwards he had sixty ships of war, with which he sailed past +Denmark, and in through the Sound, and on to Vindland. He +appointed a meeting with King Burizleif; and when the kings met, +they spoke about the property which King Olaf demanded, and the +conference went off peaceably, as a good account was given of the +properties which King Olaf thought himself entitled to there. He +passed here much of the summer, and found many of his old +friends. + + + +108. CONSPIRACY AGAINST KING OLAF. + +The Danish king, Svein Tjuguskeg, was married, as before related, +to Sigrid the Haughty. Sigrid was King Olaf Trygvason's greatest +enemy; the cause of which, as before said, was that King Olaf had +broken off with her, and had struck her in the face. She urged +King Svein much to give battle to King Olaf Trygvason; saying +that he had reason enough, as Olaf had married his sister Thyre +without his leave, "and that your predecessors would not have +submitted to." Such persuasions Sigrid had often in her mouth; +and at last she brought it so far that Svein resolved firmly on +doing so. Early in spring King Svein sent messengers eastward +into Svithjod, to his son-in-law Olaf, the Swedish king, and to +Earl Eirik; and informed them that King Olaf of Norway was +levying men for an expedition, and intended in summer to go to +Vindland. To this news the Danish king added an invitation to +the Swedish king and Earl Eirik to meet King Svein with an army, +so that all together they might make an attack; on King Olaf +Trygvason. The Swedish king and Earl Eirik were ready enough for +this, and immediately assembled a great fleet and an army through +all Svithjod, with which they sailed southwards to Denmark, and +arrived there after King Olaf Trygvason had sailed to the +eastward. Haldor the Unchristian tells of this in his lay on +Earl Eirik: -- + + "The king-subduer raised a host + Of warriors on the Swedish coast. + The brave went southwards to the fight, + Who love the sword-storm's gleaming light; + The brave, who fill the wild wolf's mouth, + Followed bold Eirik to the south; + The brave, who sport in blood -- each one + With the bold earl to sea is gone." + +The Swedish king and Earl Eirik sailed to meet the Danish king, +and they had all, when together, an immense force. + + + +109. EARL SIGVALDE'S TREACHEROUS PLANS. + +At the same time that king Svein sent a message to Svithjod for +an army, he sent Earl Sigvalde to Vindland to spy out King Olaf +Trygvason's proceedings, and to bring it about by cunning devices +that King Svein and King Olaf should fall in with each other. So +Sigvalde sets out to go to Vindland. First, he came to Jomsborg, +and then he sought out King Olaf Trygvason. There was much +friendship in their conversation, and the earl got himself into +great favour with the king. Astrid, the Earl's wife, King +Burizleif's daughter, was a great friend of King Olaf Trygvason, +particularly on account of the connection which had been between +them when Olaf was married to her sister Geira. Earl Sigvalde +was a prudent, ready-minded man; and as he had got a voice in +King Olaf's council, he put him off much from sailing homewards, +finding various reasons for delay. Olaf's people were in the +highest degree dissatisfied with this; for the men were anxious +to get home, and they lay ready to sail, waiting only for a wind. +At last Earl Sigvalde got a secret message from Denmark that the +Swedish king's army was arrived from the east, and that Earl +Eirik's also was ready; and that all these chiefs had resolved to +sail eastwards to Vindland, and wait for King Olaf at an island +which is called Svold. They also desired the earl to contrive +matters so that they should meet King Olaf there. + + + +110. KING OLAF'S VOYAGE FROM VINDLAND. + +There came first a flying report to Vindland that the Danish +king, Svein, had fitted out an army; and it was soon whispered +that he intended to attack King Olaf. But Earl Sigvalde says to +King Olaf, "It never can be King Svein's intention to venture +with the Danish force alone, to give battle to thee with such a +powerful army; but if thou hast any suspicion that evil is on +foot, I will follow thee with my force (at that time it was +considered a great matter to have Jomsborg vikings with an army), +and I will give thee eleven well-manned ships." The king +accepted this offer; and as the light breeze of wind that came +was favourable, he ordered the ships to get under weigh, and the +war-horns to sound the departure. The sails were hoisted and all +the small vessels, sailing fastest, got out to sea before the +others. The earl, who sailed nearest to the king's ship, called +to those on board to tell the king to sail in his keel-track: +"For I know where the water is deepest between the islands and in +the sounds, and these large ships require the deepest." Then the +earl sailed first with his eleven ships, and the king followed +with his large ships, also eleven in number; but the whole of the +rest of the fleet sailed out to sea. Now when Earl Sigvalde came +sailing close under the island Svold, a skiff rowed out to inform +the earl that the Danish king's army was lying in the harbour +before them. Then the earl ordered the sails of his vessels to +be struck, and they rowed in under the island. Haldor the +Unchristian says: -- + + "From out the south bold Trygve's son + With one-and-seventy ships came on, + To dye his sword in bloody fight, + Against the Danish foeman's might. + But the false earl the king betrayed; + And treacherous Sigvalde, it is said, + Deserted from King Olaf's fleet, + And basely fled, the Danes to meet." + +It is said here that King Olaf and Earl Sigvalde had seventy sail +of vessels: and one more, when they sailed from the south. + + + +111. CONSULTATION OF THE KINGS. + +The Danish King Svein, the Swedish King Olaf, and Earl Eirik, +were there with all their forces (1000). The weather being fine +and clear sunshine, all these chiefs, with a great suite, went +out on the isle to see the vessels sailing out at sea, and many +of them crowded together; and they saw among them one large and +glancing ship. The two kings said, "That is a large and very +beautiful vessel: that will be the Long Serpent." + +Earl Eirik replied, "That is not the Long Serpent." And he was +right; for it was the ship belonging to Eindride of Gimsar. + +Soon after they saw another vessel coming sailing along much +larger than the first; then says King Svein, "Olaf Trygvason must +be afraid, for he does not venture to sail with the figure-head +of the dragon upon his ship." + +Says Earl Eirik, "That is not the king's ship yet; for I know +that ship by the coloured stripes of cloth in her sail. That is +Erling Skialgson's. Let him sail; for it is the better for us +that the ship is away from Olaf's fleet, so well equipt as she +is." + +Soon after they saw and knew Earl Sigvalde's ships, which turned +in and laid themselves under the island. Then they saw three +ships coming along under sail, and one of them very large. King +Svein ordered his men to go to their ships, "for there comes the +Long Serpent." + +Earl Eirik says, "Many other great and stately vessels have they +besides the Long Serpent. Let us wait a little." + +Then said many, "Earl Eirik will not fight and avenge his father; +and it is a great shame that it should be told that we lay here +with so great a force, and allowed King Olaf to sail out to sea +before our eyes." + +But when they had spoken thus for a short time, they saw four +ships coming sailing along, of which one had a large dragon-head +richly gilt. Then King Svein stood up and said, "That dragon +shall carry me this evening high, for I shall steer it." + +Then said many, "The Long Serpent is indeed a wonderfully large +and beautiful vessel, and it shows a great mind to have built +such a ship." + +Earl Eirik said so loud that several persons heard him, "If King +Olaf had no ether vessels but only that one, King Svein would +never take it from him with the Danish force alone." + +Thereafter all the people rushed on board their ships, took down +the tents, and in all haste made ready for battle. + +While the chiefs were speaking among themselves as above related, +they saw three very large ships coming sailing along, and at last +after them a fourth, and that was the Long Serpent. Of the large +ships which had gone before, and which they had taken for the +Long Serpent, the first was the Crane; the one after that was the +Short Serpent; and when they really, saw the Long Serpent, all +knew, and nobody had a word to say against it, that it must be +Olaf Trygvason who was sailing in such a vessel; and they went to +their ships to arm for the fight. + +An agreement had been concluded among the chiefs, King Svein, +King Olaf the Swede, and Earl Eirik, that they should divide +Norway among them in three parts, in case they succeeded against +Olaf Trygvason; but that he of the chiefs who should first board +the Serpent should have her, and all the booty found in her, and +each should have the ships he cleared for himself. Earl Eirik +had a large ship of war which he used upon his viking +expeditions; and there was an iron beard or comb above on both +sides of the stem, and below it a thick iron plate as broad as +the combs, which went down quite to the gunnel. + + + +112. OF KING OLAF'S PEOPLE. + +When Earl Sigvalde with his vessels rowed in under the island, +Thorkel Dydril of the Crane, and the other ship commanders who +sailed with him, saw that he turned his ships towards the isle, +and thereupon let fall the sails, and rowed after him, calling +out, and asking why he sailed that way. The Earl answered, that +he was waiting for king Olaf, as he feared there were enemies in +the water. They lay upon their oars until Thorkel Nefia came up +with the Short Serpent and the three ships which followed him. +When they told them the same they too struck sail, and let the +ships drive, waiting for king Olaf. But when the king sailed in +towards the isle, the whole enemies' fleet came rowing within +them out to the Sound. When they saw this they begged the king +to hold on his way, and not risk battle with so great a force. +The king replied, high on the quarter-deck where he stood, +"Strike the sails; never shall men of mine think of flight. I +never fled from battle. Let God dispose of my life, but flight I +shall never take." It was done as the king commanded. Halfred +tells of it thus: -- + + "And far and wide the saying bold + Of the brave warrior shall be told. + The king, in many a fray well tried, + To his brave champions round him cried, + `My men shall never learn from me + From the dark weapon-cloud to flee.' + Nor were the brave words spoken then + Forgotten by his faithful men." + + + +113. OLAF'S SHIPS PREPARED FOR BATTLE. + +King Olaf ordered the war-horns to sound for all his ships to +close up to each other. The king's ship lay in the middle of the +line, and on one side lay the Little Serpent, and on the other +the Crane; and as they made fast the stems together (1), the Long +Serpent's stem and the short Serpent's were made fast together; +but when the king saw it he called out to his men, and ordered +them to lay the larger ship more in advance, so that its stern +should not lie so far behind in the fleet. + +Then says Ulf the Red, "If the Long Serpent is to lie as much +more ahead of the other ships as she is longer than them, we +shall have hard work of it here on the forecastle." + +The king replies, "I did not think I had a forecastle man afraid +as well as red." + +Says Ulf, "Defend thou the quarterdeck as I shall the +forecastle." + +The king had a bow in his hands, and laid an arrow on the string, +and aimed at Ulf. + +Ulf said, "Shoot another way, king, where it is more needful: my +work is thy gain." + + +ENDNOTES: +(1) The mode of fighting in sea battles appears, from this and + many other descriptions, to have been for each party to bind + together the stems and sterns of their own ships, forming + them thus into a compact body as soon aa the fleets came + within fighting distance, or within spears' throw. They + appear to have fought principally from the forecastles; and + to have used grappling irons for dragging a vessel out of + the line, or within boarding distance. -- L. + + + +114. OF KING OLAF. + +King Olaf stood on the Serpent's quarterdeck, high over the +others. He had a gilt shield, and a helmet inlaid with gold; +over his armour he had a short red coat, and was easy to be +distinguished from other men. When King Olaf saw that the +scattered forces of the enemy gathered themselves together under +the banners of their ships, he asked, "Who is the chief of the +force right opposite to us?" + +He was answered, that it was King Svein with the Danish army. + +The king replies, "We are not afraid of these soft Danes, for +there is no bravery in them; but who are the troops on the right +of the Danes?" + +He was answered, that it was King Olaf with the Swedish forces. + +"Better it were," says King Olaf, "for these Swedes to be sitting +at home killing their sacrifices, than to be venturing under our +weapons from the Long Serpent. But who owns the large ships on +the larboard side of the Danes?" + +"That is Earl Eirik Hakonson," say they. + +The king replies, "He, methinks, has good reason for meeting us; +and we may expect the sharpest conflict with these men, for they +are Norsemen like ourselves." + + + +115. THE BATTLE BEGINS. + +The kings now laid out their oars, and prepared to attack (A.D. +1000). King Svein laid his ship against the Long Serpent. +Outside of him Olaf the Swede laid himself, and set his ship's +stern against the outermost ship of King Olaf's line; and on the +other side lay Earl Eirik. Then a hard combat began. Earl +Sigvalde held back with the oars on his ships, and did not join +the fray. So says Skule Thorsteinson, who at that time was with +Earl Eirik: -- + + "I followed Sigvalde in my youth, + And gallant Eirik, and in truth + The' now I am grown stiff and old, + In the spear-song I once was bold. + Where arrows whistled on the shore + Of Svold fjord my shield I bore, + And stood amidst the loudest clash + When swords on shields made fearful crash." + +And Halfred also sings thus: -- + + "In truth I think the gallant king, + Midst such a foemen's gathering, + Would be the better of some score + Of his tight Throndhjem lads, or more; + For many a chief has run away, + And left our brave king in the fray, + Two great kings' power to withstand, + And one great earl's, with his small band, + The king who dares such mighty deed + A hero for his skald would need." + + + +116. FLIGHT OF SVEIN AND OLAF THE SWEDE. + +This battle was one of the severest told of, and many were the +people slain. The forecastle men of the Long Serpent, the Little +Serpent, and the Crane, threw grapplings and stem chains into +King Svein's ship, and used their weapons well against the people +standing below them, for they cleared the decks of all the ships +they could lay fast hold of; and King Svein, and all the men who +escaped, fled to other vessels, and laid themselves out of +bow-shot. It went with this force just as King Olaf Trygvason +had foreseen. Then King Olaf the Swede laid himself in their +place; but when he came near the great ships it went with him as +with them, for he lost many men and some ships, and was obliged +to get away. But Earl Eirik laid his ship side by side with the +outermost of King Olaf's ships, thinned it of men, cut the +cables, and let it drive. Then he laid alongside of the next, +and fought until he had cleared it of men also. Now all the +people who were in the smaller ships began to run into the +larger, and the earl cut them loose as fast as he cleared them of +men. The Danes and Swedes laid themselves now out of shooting +distance all around Olaf's ship; but Earl Eirik lay always close +alongside of the ships, and used hid swords and battle-axes, and +as fast as people fell in his vessel others, Danes and Swedes, +came in their place. So says Haldor, the Unchristian: -- + + "Sharp was the clang of shield and sword, + And shrill the song of spears on board, + And whistling arrows thickly flew + Against the Serpent's gallant crew. + And still fresh foemen, it is said, + Earl Eirik to her long side led; + Whole armies of his Danes and Swedes, + Wielding on high their blue sword-blades." + +Then the fight became most severe, and many people fell. But at +last it came to this, that all King Olaf Trygvason's ships were +cleared of men except the Long Serpent, on board of which all who +could still carry their arms were gathered. Then Earl Eirik lay +with his ship by the side of the Serpent, and the fight went on +with battle-axe and sword. So says Haldor: -- + + "Hard pressed on every side by foes, + The Serpent reels beneath the blows; + Crash go the shields around the bow! + Breast-plates and breasts pierced thro' and thro! + In the sword-storm the Holm beside, + The earl's ship lay alongside + The king's Long Serpent of the sea -- + Fate gave the earl the victory." + + + +117. OF EARL EIRIK. + +Earl Eirik was in the forehold of his ship, where a cover of +shields (1) had been set up. In the fight, both hewing weapons, +sword, and axe, and the thrust of spears had been used; and all +that could be used as weapon for casting was cast. Some used +bows, some threw spears with the hand. So many weapons were cast +into the Serpent, and so thick flew spears and arrows, that the +shields could scarcely receive them, for on all sides the Serpent +was surrounded by war-ships. Then King Olaf's men became so mad +with rage, that they ran on board of the enemies ships, to get at +the people with stroke of sword and kill them; but many did not +lay themselves so near the Serpent, in order to escape the close +encounter with battle-axe or sword; and thus the most of Olaf's +men went overboard and sank under their weapons, thinking they +were fighting on plain ground. So says Halfred: -- + + "The daring lads shrink not from death; -- + O'erboard they leap, and sink beneath + The Serpent's keel: all armed they leap, + And down they sink five fathoms deep. + The foe was daunted at the cheers; + The king, who still the Serpent steers, + In such a strait -- beset with foes -- + Wanted but some more lads like those." + + +ENDNOTES: +(1) Both in land and sea fights the commanders appear to have + been protected from missile weapons, -- stones, arrows, + spears, -- by a shieldburg: that is, by a party of men + bearing shields surrounding them in such a way that the + shields were a parapet, covering those within the circle. + The Romans had a similar military arrangement of shields in + sieges -- the testudo. -- L. + + + +118. OF EINAR TAMBARSKELVER. + +Einar Tambarskelver, one of the sharpest of bowshooters, stood by +the mast, and shot with his bow. Einar shot an arrow at Earl +Eirik, which hit the tiller end just above the earl's head so +hard that it entered the wood up to the arrow-shaft. The earl +looked that way, and asked if they knew who had shot; and at the +same moment another arrow flew between his hand and his side, and +into the stuffing of the chief's stool, so that the barb stood +far out on the other side. Then said the earl to a man called +Fin, -- but some say he was of Fin (Laplander) race, and was a +superior archer, -- "Shoot that tall man by the mast." Fin shot; +and the arrow hit the middle of Einar's bow just at the moment +that Einar was drawing it, and the bow was split in two parts. + +"What is that."cried King Olaf, "that broke with such a noise?" + +"Norway, king, from thy hands," cried Einar. + +"No! not quite so much as that," says the king; "take my bow, +and shoot," flinging the bow to him. + +Einar took the bow, and drew it over the head of the arrow. "Too +weak, too weak," said he, "for the bow of a mighty king!" and, +throwing the bow aside, he took sword and shield, and fought +Valiantly. + + + +119. OLAF GIVES HIS MEN SHARP SWORDS. + +The king stood on the gangways of the Long Serpent. and shot the +greater part of the day; sometimes with the bow, sometimes with +the spear, and always throwing two spears at once. He looked +down over the ship's sides, and saw that his men struck briskly +with their swords, and yet wounded but seldom. Then he called +aloud, "Why do ye strike so gently that ye seldom cut?" One +among the people answered, "The swords are blunt and full of +notches." Then the king went down into the forehold, opened the +chest under the throne, and took out many sharp swords, which he +handed to his men; but as he stretched down his right hand with +them, some observed that blood was running down under his steel +glove, but no one knew where he was wounded. + + + +120. THE SERPENT BOARDED. + +Desperate was the defence in the Serpent, and there was the +heaviest destruction of men done by the forecastle crew, and +those of the forehold, for in both places the men were chosen +men, and the ship was highest, but in the middle of the ship the +people were thinned. Now when Earl Eirik saw there were but few +people remaining beside the ship's mast, he determined to board; +and he entered the Serpent with four others. Then came Hyrning, +the king's brother-in-law, and some others against him, and there +was the most severe combat; and at last the earl was forced to +leap back on board his own ship again, and some who had +accompanied him were killed, and others wounded. Thord +Kolbeinson alludes to this: -- + + "On Odin's deck, all wet with blood, + The helm-adorned hero stood; + And gallant Hyrning honour gained, + Clearing all round with sword deep stained. + The high mountain peaks shall fall, + Ere men forget this to recall." + +Now the fight became hot indeed, and many men fell on board the +Serpent; and the men on board of her began to be thinned off, and +the defence to be weaker. The earl resolved to board the Serpent +again, and again he met with a warm reception. When the +forecastle men of the Serpent saw what he was doing, they went +aft and made a desperate fight; but so many men of the Serpent +had fallen, that the ship's sides were in many places quite bare +of defenders; and the earl's men poured in all around into the +vessel, and all the men who were still able to defend the ship +crowded aft to the king, and arrayed themselves for his defence. +So says Haldor the Unchristian: -- + + "Eirik cheers on his men, -- + `On to the charge again!' + The gallant few + Of Olaf's crew + Must refuge take + On the quarter-deck. + Around the king + They stand in ring; + Their shields enclose + The king from foes, + And the few who still remain + Fight madly, but in vain. + Eirik cheers on his men -- + `On to the charge again!'" + + + +121. THE SERPENT'S DECKS CLEARED. + +Kolbjorn the marshal, who had on clothes and arms like the kings, +and was a remarkably stout and handsome man, went up to king on +the quarter-deck. The battle was still going on fiercely even in +the forehold (1). But as many of the earl's men had now got into +the Serpent as could find room, and his ships lay all round her, +and few were the people left in the Serpent for defence against +so great a force; and in a short time most of the Serpent's men +fell, brave and stout though they were. King Olaf and Kolbjorn +the marshal both sprang overboard, each on his own side of the +ship; but the earl's men had laid out boats around the Serpent, +and killed those who leaped overboard. Now when the king had +sprung overboard, they tried to seize him with their hands, and +bring him to Earl Eirik; but King Olaf threw his shield over his +head, and sank beneath the waters. Kolbjorn held his shield +behind him to protect himself from the spears cast at him from +the ships which lay round the Serpent, and he fell so upon his +shield that it came under him, so that he could not sink so +quickly. He was thus taken and brought into a boat, and they +supposed he was the king. He was brought before the earl; and +when the earl saw it was Kolbjorn, and not the king, he gave him +his life. At the same moment all of King Olaf's men who were in +life sprang overboard from the Serpent; and Thorkel Nefia, the +king's brother, was the last of all the men who sprang overboard. +It is thus told concerning the king by Halfred: -- + + "The Serpent and the Crane + Lay wrecks upon the main. + On his sword he cast a glance, -- + With it he saw no chance. + To his marshal, who of yore + Many a war-chance had come o'er, + He spoke a word -- then drew in breath, + And sprang to his deep-sea death." + + +ENDNOTES: +(1) From the occasional descriptions of vessels in this and + other battles, it may be inferred that even the Long + Serpent, described in the 95tb chapter as of 150 feet of + keel was only docked fore and aft; the thirty-four benches + for rowers occupying the open area in the middle, and + probably gangways running along the side for communicating + from the quarter-deck to the forcastle. -- L. + + + +122. REPORT AMONG THE PEOPLE. + +Earl Sigvalde. as before related, came from Vindland, in company +with King Olaf, with ten ships; but the eleventh ship was manned +with the men of Astrid, the king's daughter, the wife of Earl +Sigvalde. Now when King Olaf sprang overboard, the whole army +raised a shout of victory; and then Earl Sigvalde and his men put +their oars in the water and rowed towards the battle. Haldor the +Unchristian tells of it thus: -- + + "Then first the Vindland vessels came + Into the fight with little fame; + The fight still lingered on the wave, + Tho' hope was gone with Olaf brave. + War, like a full-fed ravenous beast, + Still oped her grim jaws for the feast. + The few who stood now quickly fled, + When the shout told -- `Olaf is dead!'" + +But the Vindland cutter, in which Astrid's men were, rowed back +to Vindland; and the report went immediately abroad and was told +by many, that King Olaf had cast off his coat-of-mail under +water, and had swum, diving under the longships, until he came to +the Vindland cutter, and that Astrid's men had conveyed him to +Vindland: and many tales have been made since about the +adventures of Olaf the king. Halfred speaks thus about it: -- + + "Does Olaf live? or is he dead? + Has he the hungry ravens fed? + I scarcely know what I should say, + For many tell the tale each way. + This I can say, nor fear to lie, + That he was wounded grievously -- + So wounded in this bloody strife, + He scarce could come away with life." + +But however this may have been, King Olaf Trygvason never came +back again to his kingdom of Norway. Halfred Vandredaskald +speaks also thus about it: + + "The witness who reports this thing + Of Trygvason, our gallant king, + Once served the king, and truth should tell, + For Olaf hated lies like hell. + If Olaf 'scaped from this sword-thing, + Worse fate, I fear, befel our king + Than people guess, or e'er can know, + For he was hemm'd in by the foe. + From the far east some news is rife + Of king sore wounded saving life; + His death, too sure, leaves me no care + For cobweb rumours in the air. + It never was the will of fate + That Olaf from such perilous strait + Should 'scape with life! this truth may grieve -- + `What people wish they soon believe.'" + + + +123. OF EARL EIRIK, THE SON OF HAKON. + +By this victory Earl Eirik Hakonson became owner of the Long +Serpent, and made a great booty besides; and he steered the +Serpent from the battle. So says Haldor: -- + + "Olaf, with glittering helmet crowned, + Had steered the Serpent through the Sound; + And people dressed their boats, and cheered + As Olaf's fleet in splendour steered. + But the descendent of great Heming, + Whose race tells many a gallant sea-king, + His blue sword in red life-blood stained, + And bravely Olaf's long ship gained." + +Svein, a son of Earl Hakon, and Earl Eirik's brother, was engaged +at this time to marry Holmfrid, a daughter of King Olaf the +Swedish king. Now when Svein the Danish king, Olaf the Swedish +king, and Earl Eirik divided the kingdom of Norway between them, +King Olaf got four districts in the Throndhjem country, and also +the districts of More and Raumsdal; and in the east part of the +land he got Ranrike, from the Gaut river to Svinasund. Olaf gave +these dominions into Earl Svein's hands, on the same conditions +as the sub kings or earls had held them formerly from the upper- +king of the country. Earl Eirik got four districts in the +Throndhjem country, and Halogaland, Naumudal, the Fjord +districts, Sogn, Hordaland, Rogaland, and North Agder, all the +way to the Naze. So says Thord Kolbeinson: -- + + "All chiefs within our land + On Eirik's side now stand: + Erling alone, I know + Remains Earl Eirik's foe. + All praise our generous earl, -- + He gives, and is no churl: + All men are well content + Fate such a chief has sent. + From Veiga to Agder they, + Well pleased, the earl obey; + And all will by him stand, + To guard the Norsemen's land. + And now the news is spread + That mighty Svein is dead, + And luck is gone from those + Who were the Norsemen's foes." + +The Danish king Svein retained Viken as he had held it before, +but he gave Raumarike and Hedemark to Earl Eirik. Svein Hakonson +got the title of earl from Olaf the Swedish king. Svein was one +of the handsomest men ever seen. The earls Eirik and Svein both +allowed themselves to be baptized, and took up the true faith; +but as long as they ruled in Norway they allowed every one to do +as he pleased in holding by his Christianity. But, on the other +hand, they held fast by the old laws, and all the old rights and +customs of the land, and were excellent men and good rulers. +Earl Eirik had most to say of the two brothers in all matters of +government. + + + +SAGA OF OLAF HARALDSON. (1) + + +PRELIMINARY REMARKS. + +Olaf Haraldson the Saint's Saga is the longest, the most +important, and the most finished of all the sagas in +"Heimskringla". The life of Olaf will be found treated more or +less freely in "Agrip", in "Historia Norvegiae", in "Thjodrek the +Monk", in the legendary saga, and in "Fagrskinna". Other old +Norse literature relating to this epoch: + +Are's "Islendingabok", "Landnama", "Kristni Saga", "Biskupa- +sogur", "Njala", "Gunlaugs Saga", "Ormstungu", "Bjarnar Saga +Hitdaelakappa", "Hallfredar Thattr Vandraedaskalde", "Eyrbyggia", +"Viga Styrs Saga", "Laxdaela", "Fostbraedra", "Gretla", +"Liosvetninga", "Faereyinga", "Orkneyinga". + +Olaf Haraldson was born 995, went as a viking at the age of +twelve, 1007; visited England, one summer and three winters, +1009-1012; in France two summers and one winter, 1012-1013; +spent the winter in Normandy, 1014; returned to Norway and was +recognized as King, April 3, 1015; fled from Norway the winter +of 1028-1029; fell at Stiklestad, July 29 (or August 31), 1030. + +Skalds quoted in this saga are: -- Ottar Svarte, Sigvat Skald, +Thord Kolbeinson, Berse Torfason, Brynjolf, Arnor Jarlaskald, +Thord Siarekson, Harek, Thorarin Loftunga, Halvard Hareksblese, +Bjarne Gulbraskald, Jokul Bardson, Thormod Kolbrunarskald, +Gissur, Thorfin Mun, Hofgardaref. + + +ENDNOTES: +(1) King Olaf the Saint reigned from about the year 1015 to + 1030. The death of King Olaf Trygvason was in the year + 1000: and Earl Eirik held the government for the Danish and + Swedish kings about fifteen years. -- L. + + + +1. OF SAINT OLAF'S BRINGING UP. + +Olaf, Harald Grenske's son, was brought up by his stepfather +Sigurd Syr and his mother Asta. Hrane the Far-travelled lived in +the house of Asta, and fostered this Olaf Haraldson. Olaf came +early to manhood, was handsome in countenance, middle-sized in +growth, and was even when very young of good understanding and +ready speech. Sigurd his stepfather was a careful householder, +who kept his people closely to their work, and often went about +himself to inspect his corn-rigs and meadowland, the cattle, and +also the smith-work, or whatsoever his people had on hand to do. + + + +2. OF OLAF AND KING SIGURD SYR. + +It happened one day that King Sigurd wanted to ride from home, +but there was nobody about the house; so he told his stepson Olaf +to saddle his horse. Olaf went to the goats' pen, took out the +he-goat that was the largest, led him forth, and put the king's +saddle on him, and then went in and told King Sigurd he had +saddled his riding horse. Now when King Sigurd came out and saw +what Olaf had done, he said "It is easy to see that thou wilt +little regard my orders; and thy mother will think it right that +I order thee to do nothing that is against thy own inclination. +I see well enough that we are of different dispositions, and that +thou art far more proud than I am." Olaf answered little, but +went his way laughing. + + + +3. OF RING OLAF'S ACCOMPLISHMENTS. + +When Olaf Haraldson grew up he was not tall, but middle-sized in +height, although very thick, and of good strength. He had light +brown hair, and a broad face, which was white and red. He had +particularly fine eyes, which were beautiful and piercing, so +that one was afraid to look him in the face when he was angry. +Olaf was very expert in all bodily exercises, understood well to +handle his bow, and was distinguished particularly in throwing +his spear by hand: he was a great swimmer, and very handy, and +very exact and knowing in all kinds of smithwork, whether he +himself or others made the thing. He was distinct and acute in +conversation, and was soon perfect in understanding and strength. +He was beloved by his friends and acquaintances, eager in his +amusements, and one who always liked to be the first, as it was +suitable he should be from his birth and dignity. He was called +Olaf the Great. + + + +4. KING OLAF'S WAR EXPEDITION. + +Olaf Haraldson was twelve years old when he, for the first time, +went on board a ship of war (A.D. 1007). His mother Asta got +Hrane, who was called the foster-father of kings, to command a +ship of war and take Olaf under his charge; for Hrane had often +been on war expeditions. When Olaf in this way got a ship and +men, the crew gave him the title of king; for it was the custom +that those commanders of troops who were of kingly descent, on +going out upon a viking cruise, received the title of king +immediately although they had no land or kingdom. Hrane sat at +the helm; and some say that Olaf himself was but a common rower, +although he was king of the men-at-arms. They steered east along +the land, and came first to Denmark. So says Ottar Svarte, in +his lay which he made about King Olaf: -- + + "Young was the king when from his home + He first began in ships to roam, + His ocean-steed to ride + To Denmark o'er the tide. + Well exercised art thou in truth -- + In manhood's earnest work, brave youth! + Out from the distant north + Mighty hast thou come forth." + +Towards autumn he sailed eastward to the Swedish dominions, and +there harried and burnt all the country round; for he thought he +had good cause of hostility against the Swedes, as they killed +his father Harald. Ottar Svarte says distinctly that he came +from the east, out by way of Denmark: -- + + "Thy ship from shore to shore, + With many a well-plied car, + Across the Baltic foam is dancing. -- + Shields, and spears, and helms glancing! + Hoist high the swelling sail + To catch the freshening gale! + There's food for the raven-flight + Where thy sail-winged ship shall light; + Thy landing-tread + The people dread; + And the wolf howls for a feast + On the shore-side in the east." + + + +5. OLAF'S FIRST BATTLE. + +The same autumn Olaf had his first battle at Sotasker, which lies +in the Swedish skerry circle. He fought there with some vikings, +whose leader was Sote. Olaf had much fewer men, but his ships +were larger, and he had his ships between some blind rocks, which +made it difficult for the vikings to get alongside; and Olaf's +men threw grappling irons into the ships which came nearest, drew +them up to their own vessels, and cleared them of men. The +vikings took to flight after losing many men. Sigvat the skald +tells of this fight in the lay in which he reckons up King Olaf's +battles: -- + + "They launch his ship where waves are foaming -- + To the sea shore + Both mast and oar, + And sent his o'er the seas a-roaming. + Where did the sea-king first draw blood? + In the battle shock + At Sote's rock; + The wolves howl over their fresh food." + + + +6. FORAY IN SVITHJOD. + +King Olaf steered thereafter eastwards to Svithjod, and into the +Lag (the Maelar lake), and ravaged the land on both sides. He +sailed all the way up to Sigtuna, and laid his ships close to the +old Sigtuna. The Swedes say the stone-heaps are still to be seen +which Olaf had laid under the ends of the gangways from the shore +to the ships. When autumn was advanced, Olaf Haraldson heard +that Olaf the Swedish king was assembling an army, and also that +he had laid iron chains across Stoksund (the channel between the +Maelar lake and the sea), and had laid troops there; for the +Swedish king thought that Olaf Haraldson would be kept in there +till frost came, and he thought little of Olaf's force knowing he +had but few people. Now when King Olaf Haraldson came to +Stoksund he could not get through, as there was a castle west of +the sound, and men-at-arms lay on the south; and he heard that +the Swedish king was come there with a great army and many ships. +He therefore dug a canal across the flat land Agnafit out to the +sea. Over all Svithjod all the running waters fall into the +Maelar lake; but the only outlet of it to the sea is so small +that many rivers are wider, and when much rain or snow falls the +water rushes in a great cataract out by Stoksund, and the lake +rises high and floods the land. It fell heavy rain just at this +time; and as the canal was dug out to the sea, the water and +stream rushed into it. Then Olaf had all the rudders unshipped +and hoisted all sail aloft. It was blowing a strong breeze +astern, and they steered with their oars, and the ships came in a +rush over all the shallows, and got into the sea without any +damage. Now went the Swedes to their king, Olaf, and told him +that Olaf the Great had slipped out to sea; on which the king was +enraged against those who should have watched that Olaf did not +get away. This passage has since been called King's Sound; but +large vessels cannot pass through it, unless the waters are very +high. Some relate that the Swedes were aware that Olaf had cut +across the tongue of land, and that the water was falling out +that way; and they flocked to it with the intention to hinder +Olaf from getting away, but the water undermined the banks on +each side so that they fell in with the people, and many were +drowned: but the Swedes contradict this as a false report, and +deny the loss of people. The king sailed to Gotland in harvest, +and prepared to plunder; but the Gotlanders assembled, and sent +men to the king, offering him a scat. The king found this would +suit him, and he received the scat, and remained there all +winter. So says Ottar Svarte: -- + + "Thou seaman-prince! thy men are paid: + The scat on Gotlanders is laid; + Young man or old + To our seamen bold + Must pay, to save his head: + The Yngling princes fled, + Eysvssel people bled; + Who can't defend the wealth they have + Must die, or share with the rover brave." + + + +7. THE SECOND BATTLE. + +It is related here that King Olaf, when spring set in, sailed +east to Eysyssel, and landed and plundered; the Eysyssel men came +down to the strand and grave him battle. King Olaf gained the +victory, pursued those who fled, and laid waste the land with +fire and sword. It is told that when King Olaf first came to +Eysvssel they offered him scat, and when the scat was to be +brought down to the strand the king came to meet it with an armed +force, and that was not what the bondes there expected; for they +had brought no scat, but only their weapons with which they +fought against the king, as before related. So says Sigvat the +skald: -- + + "With much deceit and bustle + To the heath of Eysyssel + The bondes brought the king, + To get scat at their weapon-thing. + But Olaf was too wise + To be taken by surprise; + Their legs scarce bore them off + O'er the common test enough." + + + +8. THE THIRD BATTLE. + +After this they sailed to Finland and plundered there, and went +up the country. All the people fled to the forest, and they had +emptied their houses of all household goods. The king went far +up the country, and through some woods, and came to some +dwellings in a valley called Herdaler, -- where, however, they +made but small booty, and saw no people; and as it was getting +late in the day, the king turned back to his ships. Now when +they came into the woods again people rushed upon them from all +quarters, and made a severe attack. The king told his men to +cover themselves with their shields, but before they got out of +the woods he lost many people, and many were wounded; but at +last, late in the evening, he got to the ships. The Finlanders +conjured up in the night, by their witchcraft, a dreadful storm +and bad weather on the sea; but the king ordered the anchors to +be weighed and sail hoisted, and beat off all night to the +outside of the land. The king's luck prevailed more than the +Finlanders' witchcraft; for he had the luck to beat round the +Balagard's side in the night. and so got out to sea. But the +Finnish army proceeded on land, making the same progress as the +king made with his ships. So says Sigvat: -- + + "The third fight was at Herdaler, where + The men of Finland met in war + The hero of the royal race, + With ringing sword-blades face to face. + Off Balagard's shore the waves + Ran hollow; but the sea-king saves + His hard-pressed ship, and gains the lee + Of the east coast through the wild sea." + + + +9. THE FOURTH BATTLE IN SUDERVIK. + +King Olaf sailed from thence to Denmark, where he met Thorkel the +Tall, brother of Earl Sigvalde, and went into partnership with +him; for he was just ready to set out on a cruise. They sailed +southwards to the Jutland coast, to a place called Sudervik, +where they overcame many viking ships. The vikings, who usually +have many people to command, give themselves the title of kings, +although they have no lands to rule over. King Olaf went into +battle with them, and it was severe; but King Olaf gained the +victory, and a great booty. So says Sigvat: -- + + "Hark! hark! The war-shout + Through Sudervik rings, + And the vikings bring out + To fight the two kings. + Great honour, I'm told, + Won these vikings so bold: + But their bold fight was vain, + For the two brave kings gain." + + + +10. THE FIFTH BATTLE IN FRIESLAND. + +King Olaf sailed from thence south to Friesland, and lay under +the strand of Kinlima in dreadful weather. The king landed with +his men; but the people of the country rode down to the strand +against them, and he fought them. So says Sigvat: -- + + "Under Kinlima's cliff, + This battle is the fifth. + The brave sea-rovers stand + All on the glittering sand; + And down the horsemen ride + To the edge of the rippling tide: + But Olaf taught the peasant band + To know the weight of a viking's hand." + + + +11. DEATH OF KING SVEIN FORKED BEARD. + +The king sailed from thence westward to England. It was then the +case that the Danish king, Svein Forked Beard, was at that time +in England with a Danish army, and had been fixed there for some +time, and had seized upon King Ethelred's kingdom. The Danes had +spread themselves so widely over England, that it was come so far +that King Ethelred had departed from the country, and had gone +south to Valland. The same autumn that King Olaf came to +England, it happened that King Svein died suddenly in the night +in his bed; and it is said by Englishmen that Edmund the Saint +killed him, in the same way that the holy Mercurius had killed +the apostate Julian. When Ethelred, the king of the English, +heard this in Flanders, he returned directly to England; and no +sooner was he come back, than he sent an invitation to all the +men who would enter into his pay, to join him in recovering the +country. Then many people flocked to him; and among others, came +King Olaf with a great troop of Northmen to his aid. They +steered first to London, and sailed into the Thames with their +fleet; but the Danes had a castle within. On the other side of +the river is a great trading place, which is called Sudvirke. +There the Danes had raised a great work, dug large ditches, and +within had built a bulwark of stone, timber, and turf, where they +had stationed a strong army. King Ethelred ordered a great +assault; but the Danes defended themselves bravely, and King +Ethelred could make nothing of it. Between the castle and +Southwark (Sudvirke) there was a bridge, so broad that two +wagons could pass each other upon it. On the bridge were raised +barricades, both towers and wooden parapets, in the direction of +the river, which were nearly breast high; and under the bridge +were piles driven into the bottom of the river. Now when the +attack was made the troops stood on the bridge everywhere, and +defended themselves. King Ethelred was very anxious to get +possession of the bridge, and he called together all the chiefs +to consult how they should get the bridge broken down. Then said +King Olaf he would attempt to lay his fleet alongside of it, if +the other ships would do the same. It was then determined in +this council that they should lay their war forces under the +bridge; and each made himself ready with ships and men. + + + +12. THE SIXTH BATTLE. + +King Olaf ordered great platforms of floating wood to be tied +together with hazel bands, and for this he took down old houses; +and with these, as a roof, he covered over his ships so widely, +that it reached over the ships' sides. Under this screen he set +pillars so high and stout, that there both was room for swinging +their swords, and the roofs were strong enough to withstand the +stones cast down upon them. Now when the fleet and men were +ready, they rode up along the river; but when they came near the +bridge, there were cast down upon them so many stones and missile +weapons, such as arrows and spears, that neither helmet nor +shield could hold out against it; and the ships themselves were +so greatly damaged, that many retreated out of it. But King +Olaf, and the Northmen's fleet with him, rowed quite up under the +bridge, laid their cables around the piles which supported it, +and then rowed off with all the ships as hard as they could down +the stream. The piles were thus shaken in the bottom, and were +loosened under the bridge. Now as the armed troops stood thick +of men upon the bridge, and there were likewise many heaps of +stones and other weapons upon it, and the piles under it being +loosened and broken, the bridge gave way; and a great part of the +men upon it fell into the river, and all the ethers fled, some +into the castle, some into Southwark. Thereafter Southwark was +stormed and taken. Now when the people in the castle saw that +the river Thames was mastered, and that they could not hinder the +passage of ships up into the country, they became afraid, +surrendered the tower, and took Ethelred to be their king. So +says Ottar Svarte: -- + + "London Bridge is broken down. -- + Gold is won, and bright renown. + Shields resounding, + War-horns sounding, + Hild is shouting in the din! + Arrows singing, + Mail-coats ringing -- + Odin makes our Olaf win!" + +And he also composed these: -- + + "King Ethelred has found a friend: + Brave Olaf will his throne defend -- + In bloody fight + Maintain his right, + Win back his land + With blood-red hand, + And Edmund's son upon his throne replace -- + Edmund, the star of every royal race!" + +Sigvat also relates as follows: -- + + "At London Bridge stout Olaf gave + Odin's law to his war-men brave -- + `To win or die!' + And their foemen fly. + Some by the dyke-side refuge gain -- + Some in their tents on Southwark plain! + The sixth attack + Brought victory back." + + + +13. THE SEVENTH BATTLE. + +King Olaf passed all the winter with King Ethelred, and had a +great battle at Hringmara Heath in Ulfkel's land, the domain +which Ulfkel Snilling at that time held; and here again the king +was victorious. So says Sigvat the skald: -- + + "To Ulfkel's land came Olaf bold, + A seventh sword-thing he would hold. + The race of Ella filled the plain -- + Few of them slept at home again! + Hringmara heath + Was a bed of death: + Harfager's heir + Dealt slaughter there." + +And Ottar sings of this battle thus: -- + + "From Hringmara field + The chime of war, + Sword striking shield, + Rings from afar. + The living fly; + The dead piled high + The moor enrich; + Red runs the ditch." + +The country far around was then brought in subjection to King +Ethelred: but the Thingmen (1) and the Danes held many castles, +besides a great part of the country. + + +ENDNOTES: +(1) Thing-men were hired men-at-arms; called Thing-men probably + from being men above the class of thralls or unfree men, and + entitled to appear at Things, as being udal-born to land at + home. + + + +14. EIGHTH AND NINTH BATTLES OF OLAF. + +King Olaf was commander of all the forces when they went against +Canterbury; and they fought there until they took the town, +killing many people and burning the castle. So says Ottar +Svarte: -- + + "All in the grey of morn + Broad Canterbury's forced. + Black smoke from house-roofs borne + Hides fire that does its worst; + And many a man laid low + By the battle-axe's blow, + Waked by the Norsemen's cries, + Scarce had time to rub his eyes." + +Sigvat reckons this King Olaf's eighth battle: -- + + "Of this eighth battle I can tell + How it was fought, and what befell, + The castle tower + With all his power + He could not take, + Nor would forsake. + The Perthmen fought, + Nor quarter sought; + By death or flight + They left the fight. + Olaf could not this earl stout + From Canterbury quite drive out." + +At this time King Olaf was entrusted with the whole land defence +of England, and he sailed round the land with his ships of War. +He laid his ships at land at Nyjamoda, where the troops of the +Thingmen were, and gave them battle and gained the victory. So +says Sigvat the skald: -- + + "The youthful king stained red the hair + Of Angeln men, and dyed his spear + At Newport in their hearts' dark blood: + And where the Danes the thickest stood -- + Where the shrill storm round Olaf's head + Of spear and arrow thickest fled. + There thickest lay the Thingmen dead! + Nine battles now of Olaf bold, + Battle by battle, I have told." + +King Olaf then scoured all over the country, taking scat of the +people and plundering where it was refused. So says Ottar: -- + + "The English race could not resist thee, + With money thou madest them assist thee; + Unsparingly thou madest them pay + A scat to thee in every way; + Money, if money could be got -- + Goods, cattle, household gear, if not. + Thy gathered spoil, borne to the strand, + Was the best wealth of English land." + +Olaf remained here for three years (A.D. 1010-1012). + + + +15. THE TENTH BATTLE. + +The third year King Ethelred died, and his sons Edmund and Edward +took the government (A.D. 1012). Then Olaf sailed southwards out +to sea, and had a battle at Hringsfjord, and took a castle +situated at Holar, where vikings resorted, and burnt the castle. +So says Sigvat the skald: -- + + "Of the tenth battle now I tell, + Where it was fought, and what befell. + Up on the hill in Hringsfjord fair + A robber nest hung in the air: + The people followed our brave chief, + And razed the tower of the viking thief. + Such rock and tower, such roosting-place, + Was ne'er since held by the roving race." + + + +16. ELEVENTH, TWELFTH AND THIRTEENTH BATTLES. + +Then King Olaf proceeded westwards to Grislupollar, and fought +there with vikings at Williamsby; and there also King Olaf gained +the victory. So says Sigvat: -- + + "The eleventh battle now I tell, + Where it was fought, and what befell. + At Grislupol our young fir's name + O'ertopped the forest trees in fame: + Brave Olaf's name -- nought else was heard + But Olaf's name, and arm, and sword. + Of three great earls, I have heard say, + His sword crushed helm and head that day." + +Next he fought westward on Fetlafjord, as Sigvat tells: -- + + "The twelfth fight was at Fetlafjord, + Where Olaf's honour-seeking sword + Gave the wild wolf's devouring teeth + A feast of warriors doomed to death." + +From thence King Olaf sailed southwards to Seljupollar, where he +had a battle. He took there a castle called Gunvaldsborg, which +was very large and old. He also made prisoner the earl who ruled +over the castle and who was called Geirfin. After a conference +with the men of the castle, he laid a scat upon the town and +earl, as ransom, of twelve thousand gold shillings: which was +also paid by those on whom it was imposed. So says Sigvat: -- + + "The thirteenth battle now I tell, + Where it was fought, and what befell. + In Seljupol was fought the fray, + And many did not survive the day. + The king went early to the shore, + To Gunvaldsborg's old castle-tower; + And a rich earl was taken there, + Whose name was Geridin, I am sure." + + + +17. FOURTEENTH BATTLE AND OLAF'S DREAM. + +Thereafter King Olaf steered with his fleet westward to Karlsar, +and tarried there and had a fight. And while King Olaf was lying +in Karlsa river waiting a wind, and intending to sail up to +Norvasund, and then on to the land of Jerusalem, he dreamt a +remarkable dream -- that there came to him a great and important +man, but of a terrible appearance withal, who spoke to him, and +told him to give up his purpose of proceeding to that land. +"Return back to thy udal, for thou shalt be king over Norway for +ever." He interpreted this dream to mean that he should be king +over the country, and his posterity after him for a long time. + + + +18. FIFTEENTH BATTLE. + +After this appearance to him he turned about, and came to Poitou, +where he plundered and burnt a merchant town called Varrande. Of +this Ottar speaks: -- + + "Our young king, blythe and gay, + Is foremost in the fray: + Poitou he plunders, Tuskland burns, -- + He fights and wins where'er he turns." + +And also Sigvat says: -- + + "The Norsemen's king is on his cruise, + His blue steel staining, + Rich booty gaining, + And all men trembling at the news. + The Norsemen's kings up on the Loire: + Rich Partheney + In ashes lay; + Far inland reached the Norsemen's spear." + + + +19. OF THE EARLS OF ROUEN. + +King Olaf had been two summers and one winter in the west in +Valland on this cruise; and thirteen years had now passed since +the fall of King Olaf Trygvason. During this time earls had +ruled over Norway; first Hakon's sons Eirik and Svein, and +afterwards Eirik's sons Hakon and Svein. Hakon was a sister's +son of King Canute, the son of Svein. During this time there +were two earls in Valland, William and Robert; their father was +Richard earl of Rouen. They ruled over Normandy. Their sister +was Queen Emma, whom the English king Ethelred had married; and +their sons were Edmund, Edward the Good, Edwy, and Edgar. +Richard the earl of Rouen was a son of Richard the son of William +Long Spear, who was the son of Rolf Ganger, the earl who first +conquered Normandy; and he again was a son of Ragnvald the +Mighty, earl of More, as before related. From Rolf Ganger are +descended the earls of Rouen, who have long reckoned themselves +of kin to the chiefs in Norway, and hold them in such respect +that they always were the greatest friends of the Northmen; and +every Northman found a friendly country in Normandy, if he +required it. To Normandy King Olaf came in autumn (A.D. 1013), +and remained all winter (A.D. 1014) in the river Seine in good +peace and quiet. + + + +20. OF EINAR TAMBASKELFER. + +After Olaf Trygvason's fall, Earl Eirik gave peace to Einar +Tambaskelfer, the son of Eindride Styrkarson; and Einar went +north with the earl to Norway. It is said that Einar was the +strongest man and the best archer that ever was in Norway. His +shooting was sharp beyond all others; for with a blunt arrow he +shot through a raw, soft ox-hide, hanging over a beam. He was +better than any man at running on snow-shoes, was a great man +at all exercises, was of high family, and rich. The earls Eirik +and Svein married their sister Bergliot to Einar. Their son was +named Eindride. The earls gave Einar great fiefs in Orkadal, so +that he was one of the most powerful and able men in the +Throndhjem country, and was also a great friend of the earls, and +a great support and aid to them. + + + +21. OF ERLING SKIALGSON. + +When Olaf Trygvason ruled over Norway, he gave his brother-in-law +Erling half of the land scat, and royal revenues between the Naze +and Sogn. His other sister he married to the Earl Ragnvald +Ulfson, who long ruled over West Gautland. Ragnvald's father, +Ulf, was a brother of Sigrid the Haughty, the mother of Olaf the +Swedish king. Earl Eirik was ill pleased that Erling Skialgson +had so large a dominion, and he took to himself all the king's +estates, which King Olaf had given to Erling. But Erling levied, +as before, all the land scat in Rogaland; and thus the +inhabitants had often to pay him the land scat, otherwise he laid +waste their land. The earl made little of the business, for no +bailiff of his could live there, and the earl could only come +there in guest-quarters, when he had a great many people with +him. So says Sigvat: -- + + "Olaf the king + Thought the bonde Erling + A man who would grace + His own royal race. + One sister the king + Gave the bonde Erling; + And one to an earl, + And she saved him in peril." + +Earl Eirik did not venture to fight with Erling, because he had +very powerful and very many friends, and was himself rich and +popular, and kept always as many retainers about him as if he +held a king's court. Erling vas often out in summer on +plundering expeditions, and procured for himself means of living; +for he continued his usual way of high and splendid living, +although now he had fewer and less convenient fiefs than in the +time of his brother-in-law King Olaf Trygvason. Erling was one +of the handsomest, largest, and strongest men; a better warrior +than any other; and in all exercises he was like King Olaf +himself. He was, besides, a man of understanding, jealous in +everything he undertook, and a deadly man at arms. Sigvat talks +thus of him: -- + + "No earl or baron, young or old, + Match with this bonde brave can hold. + Mild was brave Erling, all men say, + When not engaged in bloody fray: + His courage he kept hid until + The fight began, then foremost still + Erling was seen in war's wild game, + And famous still is Erling's name." + +It was a common saying among the people, that Erling had been the +most valiant who ever held lands under a king in Norway. Erlings +and Astrid s children were these -- Aslak, Skialg, Sigurd, Lodin, +Thorer, and Ragnhild, who was married to Thorberg Arnason. +Erling had always with him ninety free-born men or more, and both +winter and summer it was the custom in his house to drink at the +mid-day meal according to a measure (1), but at the night meal +there was no measure in drinking. When the earl was in the +neighbourhood he had 200 (2) men or more. He never went to sea +with less than a fully-manned ship of twenty benches of rowers. +Erling had also a ship of thirty-two benches of rowers, which was +besides, very large for that size. and which he used in viking +cruises, or on an expedition; and in it there were 200 men at the +very least. + + +ENDNOTES: +(1) There were silver-studs in a row from the rim to the bottom + of the drinking born or cup; and as it went round each drank + till the stud appeared above the liquor. This was drinking + by measure. -- L. +(2) I.e., 240. + + + +22. OF THE HERSE ERLING SKIALGSON. + +Erling had always at home on his farm thirty slaves, besides +other serving-people. He gave his slaves a certain day's work; +but after it he gave them leisure, and leave that each should +work in the twilight and at night for himself, and as he pleased. +He gave them arable land to sow corn in, and let them apply their +crops to their own use. He laid upon each a certain quantity of +labour to work themselves free by doing it; and there were many +who bought their freedom in this way in one year, or in the +second year, and all who had any luck could make themselves free +within three years. With this money he bought other slaves: and +to some of his freed people he showed how to work in the herring- +fishery, to others he showed some useful handicraft; and some +cleared his outfields and set up houses. He helped all to +prosperity. + + + +23. OF EARL EIRIK. + +When Earl Eirik had ruled over Norway for twelve years. there +came a message to him from his brother-in-law King Canute, the +Danish king, that he should go with him on an expedition westward +to England; for Eirik was very celebrated for his campaigns, as +he had gained the victory in the two hardest engagements which +had ever been fought in the north countries. The one was that in +which the Earls Hakon and Eirik fought with the Jomsborg vikings; +the other that in which Earl Eirik fought with King Olaf +Trygvason. Thord Kolbeinson speaks of this: -- + + "A song of praise + Again I raise. + To the earl bold + The word is told, + That Knut the Brave + His aid would crave; + The earl, I knew, + To friend stands true." + +The earl would not sleep upon the message of the king, but sailed +immediately out of the country, leaving behind his son Earl Hakon +to take care of Norway; and, as he was but seventeen years of +age, Einar Tambaskelfer was to be at his hand to rule the country +for him. + +Eirik met King Canute in England, and was with him when he took +the castle of London. Earl Eirik had a battle also to the +westward of the castle of London, and killed Ulfkel Snilling. So +says Thord Kolbeinson: -- + + "West of London town we passed, + And our ocean-steeds made fast, + And a bloody fight begin, + Eng1and's lands to lose or win. + Blue sword and shining spear + Laid Ulfkel's dead corpse there, + Our Thingmen hear the war-shower sounding + Our grey arrows from their shields rebounding." + +Earl Eirik was a winter in England, and had many battles there. +The following autumn he intended to make a pilgrimage to Rome, +but he died in England of a bloody flux. + + + +24. THE MURDER OF EDMUND. + +King Canute came to England the summer that King Ethelred died, +and had many battles with Ethelred's sons, in which the victory +was sometimes on one side, sometimes on the other. Then King +Canute took Queen Emma in marriage; and their children were +Harald, Hardacanute, and Gunhild. King Canute then made an +agreement with King Edmund, that each of them should have a half +of England. In the same month Henry Strion murdered King Edmund. +King Canute then drove all Ethelred's sons out of England. So +says Sigvat: -- + + "Now all the sons of Ethelred + Were either fallen, or had fled: + Some slain by Canute, -- some they say, + To save their lives had run away." + + + +25. OLAF AND ETHELRED'S SONS. + +King Ethelred's sons came to Rouen in Valland from England, to +their mother's brother, the same summer that King Olaf Haraldson +came from the west from his viking cruise, and they were all +during the winter in Normandy together. They made an agreement +with each other that King Olaf should have Northumberland, if +they could succeed in taking England from the Danes. Therefore +about harvest, Olaf sent his foster-father Hrane to England to +collect men-at-arms; and Ethelred's sons sent tokens to their +friends and relations with him. King Olaf, besides, gave him +much money with him to attract people to them. Hrane was all +winter in England, and got promises from many powerful men of +fidelity, as the people of the country would rather have native +kings over them; but the Danish power had become so great in +England, that all the people were brought under their dominion. + + + +26. BATTLE OF KING OLAF. + +In spring (A.D. 1014) King Olaf and King Ethelred's sons set out +together to the west, and came to a place in England called +Jungufurda, where they landed with their army and moved forward +against the castle. Many men were there who had promised them +their aid. They took the castle; and killed many people. Now +when King Canute's men heard of this they assembled an army, and +were soon in such force that Ethelred's sons could not stand +against it; and they saw no other way left but to return to +Rouen. Then King Olaf separated from them, and would not go back +to Valland, but sailed northwards along England, all the way to +Northumberland, where he put into a haven at a place called +Valde; and in a battle there with the townspeople and merchants +he gained the victory, and a great booty. + + + +27. OLAF'S EXPEDITION TO NORWAY. + +King Olaf left his long-ships there behind, but made ready two +ships of burden; and had with him 220 men in them, well-armed, +and chosen people. He sailed out to sea northwards in harvest, +but encountered a tremendous storm and they were in danger of +being lost; but as they had a chosen crew, and the king s luck +with them, all went on well. So says Ottar: -- + + "Olaf, great stem of kings, is brave -- + Bold in the fight, bold on the wave. + No thought of fear + Thy heart comes near. + Undaunted, 'midst the roaring flood, + Firm at his post each shipman stood; + And thy two ships stout + The gale stood out." + +And further he says: -- + + "Thou able chief! with thy fearless crew + Thou meetest, with skill and courage true, + The wild sea's wrath + On thy ocean path. + Though waves mast-high were breaking round. + Thou findest the middle of Norway's ground, + With helm in hand + On Saela's strand." + +It is related here that King Olaf came from the sea to the very +middle of Norway; and the isle is called Saela where they landed, +and is outside of Stad. King Olaf said he thought it must be a +lucky day for them, since they had landed at Saela in Norway; and +observed it was a good omen that it so happened. As they were +going up in the isle, the king slipped with one foot in a place +where there was clay, but supported himself with the other foot. +Then said he "The king falls." "Nay," replies Hrane, "thou didst +not fall, king, but set fast foot in the soil." The king laughed +thereat, and said, "It may be so if God will." They went down +again thereafter to their ships, and sailed to Ulfasund, where +they heard that Earl Hakon was south in Sogn, and was expected +north as soon as wind allowed with a single ship. + + + +28. HAKON TAKEN PRISONER BY OLAF. + +King Olaf steered his ships within the ordinary ships' course +when he came abreast of Fjaler district, and ran into +Saudungssund. There he laid his two vessels one on each side of +the sound. with a thick cable between them. At the same moment +Hakon, Earl Eirik's son, came rowing into the sound with a manned +ship; and as they thought these were but two merchant-vessels +that were lying in the sound, they rowed between them. Then Olaf +and his men draw the cable up right under Hakon's ship's keel and +wind it up with the capstan. As soon as the vessel's course was +stopped her stern was lifted up, and her bow plunged down; so +that the water came in at her fore-end and over both sides, and +she upset. King Olaf's people took Earl Hakon and all his men +whom they could get hold of out of the water, and made them +prisoners; but some they killed with stones and other weapons, +and some were drowned. So says Ottar: -- + + "The black ravens wade + In the blood from thy blade. + Young Hakon so gay, + With his ship, is thy prey: + His ship, with its gear, + Thou hast ta'en; and art here, + Thy forefather's land + From the earl to demand." + +Earl Hakon was led up to the king's ship. He was the handsomest +man that could be seen. He had long hair, as fine as silk, bound +about his bead with a gold ornament. + +When he sat down in the fore-hold, the king said to him, "It is +not false what is said of your family, that ye are handsome +people to look at; but now your luck has deserted you." + +Hakon the earl replied, "It has always been the case that success +is changeable; and there is no luck in the matter. It has gone +with your family as with mine, to have by turns the better lot. +I am little beyond childhood in years; and at any rate we could +not have defended ourselves, as we did not expect any attack on +the way. It may turn out better with us another time." + +Then said King Olaf, "Dost thou not apprehend that thou art in +that condition that, hereafter, there can be neither victory nor +defeat for thee?" + +The earl replies, "That is what thou only canst determine, king, +according to thy pleasure." + +Olaf says, "What wilt thou give me, earl, if for this time I let +thee go, whole and unhurt?" + +The earl asks what he would take. + +"Nothing," says the king, "except that thou shalt leave the +country, give up thy kingdom, and take an oath that thou shalt +never go into battle against me." + +The earl answered, that he would do so. And now Earl Hakon took +the oath that he would never fight against Olaf, or seek to +defend Norway against him, or attack him; and King Olaf thereupon +gave him and all his men life and peace. The earl got back the +ship which had brought him there, and he and his men rowed their +way. Thus says Sigvat of him: -- + + "In old Saudungs sound + The king Earl Hakon found, + Who little thought that there + A foeman was so near. + The best and fairest youth + Earl Hakon was in truth, + That speaks the Danish tongue, + And of the race of great Hakon." + + + +29. HAKON'S DEPARTURE FROM NORWAY. + +After this (A.D. 1014) the earl made ready as fast as possible to +leave the country and sail over to England. He met King Canute, +his mother's brother, there, and told him all that had taken +place between him and King Olaf. King Canute received him +remarkably well, placed him in his court in his own house, and +gave him great power in his kingdom. Earl Hakon dwelt a long +time with King Canute. During the time Svein and Hakon ruled +over Norway, a reconciliation with Erling Skialgson was effected, +and secured by Aslak, Erling's son, marrying Gunhild, Earl +Svein's daughter; and the father and son, Erling and Aslak, +retained all the fiefs which King Olaf Trygvason had given to +Erling. Thus Erling became a firm friend of the earl's, and +their mutual friendship was confirmed by oath. + + + +30. ASTA RECEIVES HER SON OLAF. + +King Olaf went now eastward along the land, holding Things with +the bondes all over the country. Many went willingly with him; +but some, who were Earl Svein's friends or relations, spoke +against him. Therefore King Olaf sailed in all haste eastward to +Viken; went in there with his ships; set them on the land; and +proceeded up the country, in order to meet his stepfather, Sigurd +Syr. When he came to Vestfold he was received in a friendly way +by many who had been his father's friends or acquaintances; and +also there and in Folden were many of his family. In autumn +(A.D. 1014) he proceeded up the country to his stepfather King +Sigurd's, and came there one day very early. As Olaf was coming +near to the house, some of the servants ran beforehand to the +house, and into the room. Olaf's mother, Asta, was sitting in +the room, and around her some of her girls. When the servants +told her of King Olaf's approach, and that he might soon be +expected, Asta stood up directly, and ordered the men and girls +to put everything in the best order. She ordered four girls to +bring out all that belonged to the decoration of the room and put +it in order with hangings and benches. Two fellows brought straw +for the floor, two brought forward four-cornered tables and the +drinking-jugs, two bore out victuals and placed the meat on the +table, two she sent away from the house to procure in the +greatest haste all that was needed, and two carried in the ale; +and all the other serving men and girls went outside of the +house. Messengers went to seek King Sigurd wherever he might be, +and brought to him his dress-clothes, and his horse with gilt +saddle, and his bridle, which was gilt and set with precious +stones. Four men she sent off to the four quarters of the +country to invite all the great people to a feast, which she +prepared as a rejoicing for her son's return. All who were +before in the house she made to dress themselves with the best +they had, and lent clothes to those who had none suitable. + + + +31. KING SIGURD'S DRESS. + +King Sigurd Syr was standing in his corn-field when the +messengers came to him and brought him the news, and also told +him all that Asta was doing at home in the house. He had many +people on his farm. Some were then shearing corn, some bound it +together, some drove it to the building, some unloaded it and put +it in stack or barn; but the king, and two men with him, went +sometimes into the field, sometimes to the place where the corn +was put into the barn. His dress, it is told, was this: -- he +had a blue kirtle and blue breeches; shoes which were laced about +the legs; a grey cloak, and a grey wide-brimmed hat; a veil +before his face; a staff in his hand with a gilt-silver head on +it and a silver ring around it. Of Sigurd's living and +disposition it is related that he was a very gain-making man who +attended carefully to his cattle and husbandry, and managed his +housekeeping himself. He was nowise given to pomp, and was +rather taciturn. But he was a man of the best understanding in +Norway, and also excessively wealthy in movable property. +Peaceful he was, and nowise haughty. His wife Asta was generous +and high-minded. Their children were, Guthorm, the eldest; then +Gunhild; the next Halfdan, Ingerid, and Harald. The messengers +said to Sigurd, "Asta told us to bring thee word how much it lay +at her heart that thou shouldst on this occasion comport thyself +in the fashion of great men, and show a disposition more akin to +Harald Harfager's race than to thy mother's father's, Hrane Thin- +nose, or Earl Nereid the Old, although they too were very wise +men." The king replies, "The news ye bring me is weighty, and ye +bring it forward in great heat. Already before now Asta has been +taken up much with people who were not so near to her; and I see +she is still of the same disposition. She takes this up with +great warmth; but can she lead her son out of the business with +the same splendour she is leading him into it? If it is to +proceed so methinks they who mix themselves up in it regard +little property or life. For this man, King Olaf, goes against a +great superiority of power; and the wrath of the Danish and +Swedish kings lies at the foot of his determination, if he +ventures to go against them." + + + +32. OF THE FEAST. + +When the king had said this he sat down, and made them take off +his shoes, and put corduvan boots on, to which he bound his gold +spurs. Then he put off his cloak and coat, and dressed himself +in his finest clothes, with a scarlet cloak over all; girded on +his sword, set a gilded helmet upon his head, and mounted his +horse. He sent his labouring people out to the neighbourhood, +and gathered to him thirty well-clothed men, and rode home with +them. As they rode up to the house, and were near the room, they +saw on the other side of the house the banners of Olaf coming +waving; and there was he himself, with about 100 men all well +equipped. People were gathered over all upon the house-tops. +King Sigurd immediately saluted his stepson from horseback in a +friendly way, and invited him and his men to come in and drink a +cup with him. Asta, on the contrary, went up and kissed her son, +and invited him to stay with her; and land, and people, and all +the good she could do for him stood at his service. King Olaf +thanked her kindly for her invitation. Then she took him by the +hand, and led him into the room to the high-seat. King Sigurd +got men to take charge of their clothes, and give their horses +corn; and then he himself went to his high-seat, and the feast +was made with the greatest splendour. + + + +33. CONVERSATION OF OLAF AND SIGURD. + +King Olaf had not been long here before he one day called his +stepfather King Sigurd, his mother Asta, and his foster-father +Hrane to a conference and consultation. Olaf began thus: "It has +so happened," said he, "as is well known to you, that I have +returned to this country after a very long sojourn in foreign +parts, during all which time I and my men have had nothing for +our support but what we captured in war, for which we have often +hazarded both life and soul: for many an innocent man have we +deprived of his property, and some of their lives; and foreigners +are now sitting in the possessions which my father, his father, +and their forefathers for a long series of generations owned, and +to which I have udal right. They have not been content with +this, but have taken to themselves also the properties of all our +relations who are descended from Harald Harfager. To some they +have left little, to others nothing at all. Now I will disclose +to you what I have long concealed in my own mind, that I intend +to take the heritage of my forefathers; but I will not wait upon +the Danish or Swedish king to supplicate the least thing from +them, although they for the time call that their property which +was Harald Harfager's heritage. To say the truth, I intend +rather to seek my patrimony with battle-axe and sword, and that +with the help of all my friends and relations, and of those who +in this business will take my side. And in this matter I will so +lay hand to the work that one of two things shall happen, -- +either I shall lay all this kingdom under my rule which they got +into their hands by the slaughter of my kinsman Olaf Trygvason, +or I shall fall here upon my inheritance in the land of my +fathers. Now I expect of thee, Sigurd, my stepfather, as well as +other men here in the country who have udal right of succession +to the kingdom, according to the law made by King Harald +Harfager, that nothing shall be of such importance to you as to +prevent you from throwing off the disgrace from our family of +being slow at supporting the man who comes forward to raise up +again our race. But whether ye show any manhood in this affair +or not, I know the inclination of the people well, -- that all +want to be free from the slavery of foreign masters, and will +give aid and strength to the attempt. I have not proposed this +matter to any before thee, because I know thou art a man of +understanding, and can best judge how this my purpose shall be +brought forward in the beginning, and whether we shall, in all +quietness, talk about it to a few persons, or instantly declare +it to the people at large. I have already shown my teeth by +taking prisoner the Earl Hakon, who has now left the country, and +given me, under oath, the part of the kingdom which he had +before; and I think it will be easier to have Earl Svein alone to +deal with, than if both were defending the country against us." + +King Sigurd answers, "It is no small affair, King Olaf, thou hast +in thy mind; and thy purpose comes more, methinks, from hasty +pride than from prudence. But it may be there is a wide +difference between my humble ways and the high thoughts thou +hast; for whilst yet in thy childhood thou wast full always of +ambition and desire of command, and now thou art experienced in +battles, and hast formed thyself upon the manner of foreign +chiefs. I know therefore well, that as thou hast taken this into +thy head, it is useless to dissuade thee from it; and also it is +not to be denied that it goes to the heart of all who have +courage in them, that the whole Harfager race and kingdom should +go to the ground. But I will not bind myself by any promise, +before I know the views and intentions of other Upland kings; but +thou hast done well in letting me know thy purpose, before +declaring it publicly to the people. I will promise thee, +however, my interest with the kings, and other chiefs, and +country people; and also, King Olaf, all my property stands to +thy aid, and to strengthen thee. But we will only produce the +matter to the community so soon as we see some progress, and +expect some strength to this undertaking; for thou canst easily +perceive that it is a daring measure to enter into strife with +Olaf the Swedish king, and Canute, who is king both of Denmark +and England; and thou requirest great support under thee, if it +is to succeed. It is not unlikely, in my opinion, that thou wilt +get good support from the people, as the commonalty always loves +what is new; and it went so before, when Olaf Trygvason came here +to the country, that all rejoiced at it, although he did not long +enjoy the kingdom." + +When the consultation had proceeded so far, Asta took up the +word. "For my part, my son, I am rejoiced at thy arrival, but +much more at thy advancing thy honour. I will spare nothing for +that purpose that stands in my power, although it be but little +help that can be expected from me. But if a choice could be +made, I would rather that thou shouldst be the supreme king of +Norway, even if thou shouldst not sit longer in thy kingdom than +Olaf Trygvason did, than that thou shouldst not be a greater king +than Sigurd Syr is, and die the death of old age." With this the +conference closed. King Olaf remained here a while with all his +men. King Sigurd entertained them, day about, the one day with +fish and milk, the other day with flesh-meat and ale. + + + +34. KINGS IN THE UPLAND DISTRICTS. + +At that time there were many kings in the Uplands who had +districts to rule over, and the most of them were descended from +Harald Harfager. In Hedemark two brothers ruled -- Hrorek and +Ring; in Gudbrandsdal, Gudrod; and there was also a king in +Raumarike; and one had Hadaland and Thoten; and in Valders also +there was a king. With these district-kings Sigurd had a meeting +up in Hadaland, and Olaf Haraldson also met with them. To these +district-kings whom Sigurd had assembled he set forth his stepson +Olaf's purpose, and asked their aid, both of men and in counsel +and consent; and represented to them how necessary it was to cast +off the yoke which the Danes and Swedes had laid upon them. He +said that there was now a man before them who could head such an +enterprise; and he recounted the many brave actions which Olaf +had achieved upon his war-expeditions. + +Then King Hrorek says, "True it is that Harald Harfager's kingdom +has gone to decay, none of his race being supreme king over +Norway. But the people here in the country have experienced many +things. When King Hakon, Athelstan's foster-son, was king, all +were content; but when Gunhild's sons ruled over the country, all +were so weary of their tyranny and injustice that they would +rather have foreign men as kings, and be themselves more their +own rulers; for the foreign kings were usually abroad and cared +little about the customs of the people if the scat they laid on +the country was paid. When enmity arose between the Danish king +Harald and Earl Hakon, the Jomsborg vikings made an expedition +against Norway; then the whole people arose, and threw the +hostilities from themselves; and thereafter the people encouraged +Earl Hakon to keep the country, and defend it with sword and +spear against the Danish king. But when he had set himself fast +in the kingdom with the help of the people, he became so hard and +overbearing towards the country-folks, that they would no longer +suffer him. The Throndhjem people killed him, and raised to the +kingly power Olaf Trygvason, who was of the udal succession to +the kingdom, and in all respects well fitted to be a chief. The +whole country's desire was to make him supreme king, and raise +again the kingdom which Harald Harfager had made for himself. +But when King Olaf thought himself quite firmly seated in his +kingdom, no man could rule his own concerns for him. With us +small kings he was so unreasonable, as to take to himself not +only all the scat and duties which Harald Harfager had levied +from us, but a great deal more. The people at last had so little +freedom under him, that it was not allowed to every man to +believe in what god he pleased. Now since he has been taken away +we have kept friendly with the Danish king; have received great +help from him when we have had any occasion for it; and have been +allowed to rule ourselves, and live in peace and quiet in the +inland country, and without any overburden. I am therefore +content that things be as they are, for I do not see what better +rights I am to enjoy by one of my relations ruling over the +country; and if I am to be no better off, I will take no part in +the affair." + +Then said King Ring, his brother, "I will also declare my opinion +that it is better for me, if I hold the same power and property +as now, that my relative is king over Norway, rather than a +foreign chief, so that our family may again raise its head in the +land. It is, besides, my opinion about this man Olaf, that his +fate and luck must determine whether he is to obtain the kingdom +or not; and if he succeed in making himself supreme king, then he +will be the best off who has best deserved his friendship. At +present he has in no respect greater power than any of us; nay, +indeed, he has less; as we have lands and kingdoms to rule over, +and he has nothing, and we are equally entitled by the udal right +to the kingdom as he is himself. Now, if we will be his men, +give him our aid, allow him to take the highest dignity in the +country, and stand by him with our strength, how should he not +reward us well, and hold it in remembrance to our great +advantage, if he be the honourable man I believe him to be, and +all say he is? Therefore let us join the adventure, say I, and +bind ourselves in friendship with him." + +Then the others, one after the other, stood up and spoke; and the +conclusion was, that the most of them determined to enter into a +league with King Olaf. He promised them his perfect friendship, +and that he would hold by and improve the country's laws and +rights, if he became supreme king of Norway. This league was +confirmed by oath. + + + +35. OLAF GETS THE TITLE OF KING FROM THE THING. + +Thereafter the kings summoned a Thing, and there King Olaf set +forth this determination to all the people, and his demand on the +kingly power. He desires that the bondes should receive him as +king; and promises, on the other hand, to allow them to retain +their ancient laws, and to defend the land from foreign masters +and chiefs. On this point he spoke well, and long; and he got +great praise for his speech. Then the kings rose and spoke, the +one after the other, and supported his cause, and this message to +the people. At last it came to this, that King Olaf was +proclaimed king over the whole country, and the kingdom adjudged +to him according to law in the Uplands (A.D. 1014). + + + +36. KING OLAF TRAVELS IN THE UPLANDS. + +King Olaf began immediately his progress through the country, +appointing feasts before him wherever there were royal farms. +First he travelled round in Hadaland, and then he proceeded north +to Gudbrandsdal. And now it went as King Sigurd Syr had +foretold, that people streamed to him from all quarters; and he +did not appear to have need for half of them, for he had nearly +300 men. But the entertainments bespoken did not half serve; for +it had been the custom that kings went about in guest-quarters in +the Uplands with 60 or 70 men only, and never with more than 100 +men. The king therefore hastened over the country, only stopping +one night at the same place. When he came north to Dovrefield, +he arranged his journey so that he came over the mountain and +down upon the north side of it, and then came to Opdal, where he +remained all night. Afterwards he proceeded through Opdal +forest, and came out at Medaldal, where he proclaimed a Thing, +and summoned the bondes to meet him at it. The king made a +speech to the Thing, and asked the bondes to accept him as king; +and promised, on his part, the laws and rights which King Olaf +Trygvason had offered them. The bondes had no strength to make +opposition to the king; so the result was that they received him +as king, and confirmed it by oath: but they sent word to Orkadal +and Skaun of all that they knew concerning Olaf's proceedings. + + + +37. LEVY AGAINST OLAF IN THRONDHJEM. + +Einar Tambaskelfer had a farm and house at Husaby in Skaun; and +now when he got news of Olaf's proceedings, he immediately split +up a war-arrow, and sent it out as a token to the four quarters +-- north, south, east, west, -- to call together all free and +unfree men in full equipment of war: therewith the message, that +they were to defend the land against King Olaf. The message- +stick went to Orkadal, and thence to Gaulardal, where the whole +war-force was to assemble. + + + +38. OLAF'S PROGRESS IN THRONDHJEM. + +King Olaf proceeded with his men down into Orkadal, and advanced +in peace and with all gentleness; but when he came to Griotar he +met the assembled bondes, amounting to more than 700 men. Then +the king arrayed his army, for he thought the bondes were to give +battle. When the bondes saw this, they also began to put their +men in order; but it went on very slowly, for they had not agreed +beforehand who among them should be commander. Now when King +Olaf saw there was confusion among the bondes, he sent to them +Thorer Gudbrandson; and when he came he told them King Olaf did +not want to fight them, but named twelve of the ablest men in +their flock of people, who were desired to come to King Olaf. +The bondes agreed to this; and the twelve men went over a rising +ground which is there, and came to the place where the king's +army stood in array. The king said to them, "Ye bondes have done +well to give me an opportunity to speak with you, for now I will +explain to you my errand here to the Throndhjem country. First I +must tell you, what ye already must have heard, that Earl Hakon +and I met in summer; and the issue of our meeting was, that he +gave me the whole kingdom he possessed in the Throndhjem country, +which, as ye know, consists of Orkadal, Gaulardal, Strind, and +Eyna district. As a proof of this, I have here with me the very +men who were present, and saw the earl's and my own hands given +upon it, and heard the word and oath, and witnessed the agreement +the earl made with me. Now I offer you peace and law, the same +as King Olaf Trygvason offered before me." + +The king spoke well, and long; and ended by proposing to the +bondes two conditions -- either to go into his service and be +subject to him, or to fight him. Thereupon the twelve bondes +went back to their people, and told the issue of their errand, +and considered with the people what they should resolve upon. +Although they discussed the matter backwards and forwards for a +while, they preferred at last to submit to the king; and it was +confirmed by the oath of the bondes. The king now proceeded on +his journey, and the bondes made feasts for him. The king then +proceeded to the sea-coast, and got ships; and among others he +got a long-ship of twenty benches of rowers from Gunnar of +Gelmin; another ship of twenty benches he got from Loden of +Viggia; and three ships of twenty benches from the farm of Angrar +on the ness which farm Earl Hakon had possessed, but a steward +managed it for him, by name Bard White. The king had, besides, +four or five boats; and with these vessels he went in all haste +into the fjord of Throndhjem. + + + +39. OF EARL SVEIN'S PROCEEDINGS. + +Earl Svein was at that time far up in the Throndhjem fjord at +Steinker, which at that time was a merchant town, and was there +preparing for the yule festival (A.D. 1015). When Einar +Tambaskelfer heard that the Orkadal people had submitted to King +Olaf, he sent men to Earl Svein to bring him the tidings. They +went first to Nidaros, and took a rowing-boat which belonged to +Einar, with which they went out into the fjord, and came one day +late in the evening to Steinker, where they brought to the earl +the news about all King Olaf's proceedings. The earl owned a +long-ship, which was lying afloat and rigged just outside the +town: and immediately, in the evening, he ordered all his movable +goods, his people's clothes, and also meat and drink, as much as +the vessel could carry, to be put on board, rowed immediately out +in the night-time, and came with daybreak to Skarnsund. There he +saw King Olaf rowing in with his fleet into the fjord. The earl +turned towards the land within Masarvik, where there was a thick +wood, and lay so near the rocks that the leaves and branches hung +over the vessel. They cut down some large trees, which they laid +over the quarter on the sea-side, so that the ship could not be +seen for leaves, especially as it was scarcely clear daylight +when the king came rowing past them. The weather was calm, and +the king rowed in among the islands; and when the king's fleet +was out of sight the earl rowed out of the fjord, and on to +Frosta, where his kingdom lay, and there he landed. + + + +40. EARL SVEIN'S AND EINAR'S CONSULTATIONS. + +Earl Svein sent men out to Gaulardal to his brother-in-law, Einar +Tambaskelfer; and when Einar came the earl told him how it had +been with him and King Olaf, and that now he would assemble men +to go out against King Olaf, and fight him. + +Einar answers, "We should go to work cautiously, and find out +what King Olaf intends doing; and not let him hear anything +concerning us but that we are quiet. It may happen that if he +hears nothing about our assembling people, he may sit quietly +where he is in Steinker all the Yule; for there is plenty +prepared for him for the Yule feast: but if he hears we are +assembling men, he will set right out of the fjord with his +vessels, and we shall not get hold of him." Einar's advice was +taken; and the earl went to Stjoradal, into guest-quarters among +the bondes. + +When King Olaf came to Steinker he collected all the meat +prepared for the Yule feast, and made it be put on board, +procured some transport vessels, took meat and drink with him, +and got ready to sail as fast as possible, and went out all the +way to Nidaros. Here King Olaf Trygvason had laid the foundation +of a merchant town, and had built a king's house: but before that +Nidaros was only a single house, as before related. When Earl +Eirik came to the country, he applied all his attention to his +house of Lade, where his father had had his main residence, and +he neglected the houses which Olaf had erected at the Nid; so +that some were fallen down, and those which stood were scarcely +habitable. King Olaf went now with his ships up the Nid, made +all the houses to be put in order directly that were still +standing, and built anew those that had fallen down, and employed +in this work a great many people. Then he had all the meat and +drink brought on shore to the houses, and prepared to hold Yule +there; so Earl Svein and Einar had to fall upon some other plan. + + + +41. OF SIGVAT THE SKALD. + +There was an Iceland man called Thord Sigvaldaskald, who had been +long with Earl Sigvalde, and afterwards with the earl's brother, +Thorkel the Tall; but after the earl's death Thord had become a +merchant. He met King Olaf on his viking cruise in the west, and +entered into his service, and followed him afterwards. He was +with the king when the incidents above related took place. Thord +had a son called Sigvat fostered in the house of Thorkel at +Apavatn, in Iceland. When he was nearly a grown man he went out +of the country with some merchants; and the ship came in autumn +to the Throndhjem country, and the crew lodged in the hered +(district). The same winter King Olaf came to Throndhjem, as +just now related by us. Now when Sigvat heard that his father +Thord was with the king, he went to him, and stayed a while with +him. Sigvat was a good skald at an early age. He made a lay in +honour of King Olaf, and asked the king to listen to it. The +king said he did not want poems composed about him, and said he +did not understand the skald's craft. Then Sigvat sang: -- + + "Rider of dark-blue ocean's steeds! + Allow one skald to sing thy deeds; + And listen to the song of one + Who can sing well, if any can. + For should the king despise all others, + And show no favour to my brothers, + Yet I may all men's favour claim, + Who sing, still of our great king's fame." + +King Olaf gave Sigvat as a reward for his verse a gold ring that +weighed half a mark, and Sigvat was made one of King Olaf's +court-men. Then Sigvat sang: -- + + "I willingly receive this sword -- + By land or sea, on shore, on board, + I trust that I shall ever be + Worthy the sword received from thee. + A faithful follower thou hast bound -- + A generous master I have found; + Master and servant both have made + Just what best suits them by this trade." + +Earl Svein had, according to custom, taken one half of the +harbour-dues from the Iceland ship-traders about autumn (A.D. +1014); for the Earls Eirik and Hakon had always taken one half of +these and all other revenues in the Throndhjem country. Now when +King Olaf came there, he sent his men to demand that half of the +tax from the Iceland traders; and they went up to the king's +house and asked Sigvat to help them. He went to the king, and +sang: -- + + "My prayer, I trust, will not be vain -- + No gold by it have I to gain: + All that the king himself here wins + Is not red gold, but a few skins. + it is not right that these poor men + Their harbour-dues should pay again. + That they paid once I know is true; + Remit, great king, what scarce is due." + + + +42. OF EARL SVEIN. + +Earl Svein and Einar Tambaskelfer gathered a large armed force, +with which they came by the upper road into Gaulardal, and so +down to Nidaros, with nearly 2000 men. King Olaf's men were out +upon the Gaular ridge, and had a guard on horseback. They became +aware that a force was coming down the Gaulardal, and they +brought word of it to the king about midnight. The king got up +immediately, ordered the people to be wakened, and they went on +board of the ships, bearing all their clothes and arms on board, +and all that they could take with them, and then rowed out of the +river. Then came the earl's men to the town at the same moment, +took all the Christmas provision, and set fire to the houses. +King Olaf went out of the fjord down to Orkadal, and there landed +the men from their ships. From Orkadal they went up to the +mountains, and over the mountains eastwards into Gudbrandsdal. +In the lines composed about Kleng Brusason, it is said that Earl +Eirik burned the town of Nidaros: -- + + "The king's half-finished hall, + Rafters, root, and all, + Is burned down by the river's side; + The flame spreads o'er the city wide." + + + +43. OF KING OLAF. + +King Olaf went southwards through Gudbrandsdal, and thence out to +Hedemark. In the depth of winter (A.D. 1015) he went about in +guest-quarters; but when spring returned he collected men, and +went to Viken. He had with him many people from Hedemark, whom +the kings had given him; and also many powerful people from among +the bondes joined him, among whom Ketil Kalf from Ringanes. He +had also people from Raumarike. His stepfather, Sigurd Syr, gave +him the help also of a great body of men. They went down from +thence to the coast, and made ready to put to sea from Viken. +The fleet, which was manned with many fine fellows, went out then +to Tunsberg. + + + +44. OF EARL SVEIN'S FORCES. + +After Yule (A.D. 1015) Earl Svein gathers all the men of the +Throndhjem country, proclaims a levy for an expedition, and fits +out ships. At that time there were in the Throndhjem country a +great number of lendermen; and many of them were so powerful and +well-born, that they descended from earls, or even from the royal +race, which in a short course of generations reckoned to Harald +Harfager, and they were also very rich. These lendermen were of +great help to the kings or earls who ruled the land; for it was +as if the lenderman had the bonde-people of each district in his +power. Earl Svein being a good friend of the lendermen, it was +easy for him to collect people. His brother-in-law, Einar +Tambaskelfer, was on his side, and with him many other lendermen; +and among them many, both lendermen and bondes, who the winter +before had taken the oath of fidelity to King Olaf. When they +were ready for sea they went directly out of the fjord, steering +south along the land, and drawing men from every district. When +they came farther south, abreast of Rogaland, Erling Skialgson +came to meet them, with many people and many lendermen with him. +Now they steered eastward with their whole fleet to Viken, and +Earl Svein ran in there towards the end of Easter. The earl +steered his fleet to Grenmar, and ran into Nesjar (A.D. 1015). + + + +45. KING OLAF S FORCES. + +King Olaf steered his fleet out from Viken, until the two fleets +were not far from each other, and they got news of each other the +Saturday before Palm Sunday. King Olaf himself had a ship called +the Carl's Head, on the bow of which a king's head was carved +out, and he himself had carved it. This head was used long after +in Norway on ships which kings steered themselves. + + + +46. KING OLAF'S SPEECH. + +As soon as day dawned on Sunday morning, King Olaf got up, put on +his clothes, went to the land, and ordered to sound the signal +for the whole army to come on shore. Then he made a speech to +the troops, and told the whole assembly that he had heard there +was but a short distance between them and Earl Svein. "Now," +said he, "we shall make ready; for it can be but a short time +until we meet. Let the people arm, and every man be at the post +that has been appointed him, so that all may be ready when I +order the signal to sound for casting off from the land. Then +let us row off at once; and so that none go on before the rest of +the ships, and none lag behind when I row out of the harbour: for +we cannot tell if we shall find the earl where he was lying, or +if he has come out to meet us. When we do meet, and the battle +begins, let people be alert to bring all our ships in close +order, and ready to bind them together. Let us spare ourselves +in the beginning, and take care of our weapons, that we do not +cast them into the sea, or shoot them away in the air to no +purpose. But when the fight becomes hot and the ships are bound +together, then let each man show what is in him of manly spirit." + + + +47. OF THE BATTLE AT NESJAR. + +King Olaf had in his ship 100 men armed in coats of ring-mail, +and in foreign helmets. The most of his men had white shields, +on which the holy cross was gilt; but some had painted it in blue +or red. He had also had the cross painted in front on all the +helmets, in a pale colour. He had a white banner on which was a +serpent figured. He ordered a mass to be read before him, went +on board ship, and ordered his people to refresh themselves with +meat and drink. He then ordered the war-horns to sound to +battle, to leave the harbour, and row off to seek the earl. Now +when they came to the harbour where the earl had lain, the earl's +men were armed, and beginning to row out of the harbour; but when +they saw the king's fleet coming they began to bind the ships +together, to set up their banners, and to make ready for the +fight. When King Olaf saw this he hastened the rowing, laid his +ship alongside the earl's, and the battle began. So says Sigvat +the skald: -- + + "Boldly the king did then pursue + Earl Svein, nor let him out of view. + The blood ran down the reindeer's flank + Of each sea-king -- his vessel's plank. + Nor did the earl's stout warriors spare + In battle-brunt the sword and spear. + Earl Svein his ships of war pushed on, + And lashed their stout stems one to one." + +It is said that King Olaf brought his ships into battle while +Svein was still lying in the harbour. Sigvat the skald was +himself in the fight; and in summer, just after the battle, he +composed a lay, which is called the "Nesjar Song", in which he +tells particularly the circumstances: -- + + "In the fierce fight 'tis known how near + The scorner of the ice-cold spear + Laid the Charles' head the earl on board, + All eastward of the Agder fjord." + +Then was the conflict exceedingly sharp, and it was long before +it could be seen how it was to go in the end. Many fell on both +sides, and many were the wounded. So says Sigvat: -- + + "No urging did the earl require, + Midst spear and sword -- the battle's fire; + No urging did the brave king need + The ravens in this shield-storm to feed. + Of limb-lopping enough was there, + And ghastly wounds of sword and spear. + Never, I think, was rougher play + Than both the armies had that day." + +The earl had most men, but the king had a chosen crew in his +ship, who had followed him in all his wars; and, besides, they +were so excellently equipped, as before related, that each man +had a coat of ring-mail, so that he could not be wounded. So +says Sigvat: -- + + "Our lads, broad-shouldered, tall, and hale, + Drew on their cold shirts of ring-mail. + Soon sword on sword was shrilly ringing, + And in the air the spears were singing. + Under our helms we hid our hair, + For thick flew arrows through the air. + Right glad was I our gallant crew, + Steel-clad from head to foot, to view." + + + +48. EARL SVEIN'S FLIGHT. + +When the men began to fall on board the earl's ships, and many +appeared wounded, so that the sides of the vessels were but +thinly beset with men, the crew of King Olaf prepared to board. +Their banner was brought up to the ship that was nearest the +earl's, and the king himself followed the banner. So says +Sigvat: -- + + "`On with the king!' his banners waving: + `On with the king!' the spears he's braving! + `On, steel-clad men! and storm the deck, + Slippery with blood and strewed with wreck. + A different work ye have to share, + His banner in war-storm to bear, + From your fair girl's, who round the hall + Brings the full mead-bowl to us all.'" + +Now was the severest fighting. Many of Svein's men fell, and +some sprang overboard. So says Sigvat: -- + + "Into the ship our brave lads spring, -- + On shield and helm their red blades ring; + The air resounds with stroke on stroke, -- + The shields are cleft, the helms are broke. + The wounded bonde o'er the side + Falls shrieking in the blood-stained tide -- + The deck is cleared with wild uproar -- + The dead crew float about the shore." + +And also these lines: -- + + "The shields we brought from home were white, + Now they are red-stained in the fight: + This work was fit for those who wore + Ringed coats-of-mail their breasts before. + Where for the foe blunted the best sword + I saw our young king climb on board. + He stormed the first; we followed him -- + The war-birds now in blood may swim." + +Now defeat began to come down upon the earl's men. The king's +men pressed upon the earl's ship and entered it; but when the +earl saw how it was going, he called out to his forecastle-men to +cut the cables and cast the ship loose, which they did. Then the +king's men threw grapplings over the timber heads of the ship, +and so held her fast to their own; but the earl ordered the +timber heads to be cut away, which was done. So says Sigvat: -- + + "The earl, his noble ship to save, + To cut the posts loud order gave. + The ship escaped: our greedy eyes + Had looked on her as a clear prize. + The earl escaped; but ere he fled + We feasted Odin's fowls with dead: -- + With many a goodly corpse that floated + Round our ship's stern his birds were bloated." + +Einar Tambaskelfer had laid his ship right alongside the earl's. +They threw an anchor over the bows of the earl's ship, and thus +towed her away, and they slipped out of the fjord together. +Thereafter the whole of the earl's fleet took to flight, and +rowed out of the fjord. The skald Berse Torfason was on the +forecastle of the earl's ship; and as it was gliding past the +king's fleet, King Olaf called out to him -- for he knew Berse, +who was distinguished as a remarkably handsome man, always well +equipped in clothes and arms -- "Farewell, Berse!" He replied, +"Farewell, king!" So says Berse himself, in a poem he composed +when he fell into King Olaf's power, and was laid in prison and +in fetters on board a ship: -- + + "Olaf the Brave + A `farewell' gave, + (No time was there to parley long,) + To me who knows the art of song. + The skald was fain + `Farewell' again + In the same terms back to send -- + The rule in arms to foe or friend. + Earl Svein's distress + I well can guess, + When flight he was compelled to take: + His fortunes I will ne'er forsake, + Though I lie here + In chains a year, + In thy great vessel all forlorn, + To crouch to thee I still will scorn: + I still will say, + No milder sway + Than from thy foe this land e'er knew: + To him, my early friend, I'm true." + + + +49. EARL SVEIN LEAVES THE COUNTRY. + +Now some of the earl's men fled up the country, some surrendered +at discretion; but Svein and his followers rowed out of the +fjord, and the chiefs laid their vessels together to talk with +each other, for the earl wanted counsel from his lendermen. +Erling Skialgson advised that they should sail north, collect +people, and fight King Olaf again; but as they had lost many +people, the most were of opinion that the earl should leave the +country, and repair to his brother-in-law the Swedish King, and +strengthen himself there with men. Einar Tambaskelfer approved +also of that advice, as they had no power to hold battle against +Olaf. So they discharged their fleet. The earl sailed across +Folden, and with him Einar Tambaskelfer. Erling Skialgson again, +and likewise many other lendermen who would not abandon their +udal possessions, went north to their homes; and Erling had many +people that summer about him. + + + +50. OLAF'S AND SIGURD'S CONSULTATION. + +When King Olaf and his men saw that the earl had gathered his +ships together, Sigurd Syr was in haste for pursuing the earl, +and letting steel decide their cause. But King Olaf replies, +that he would first see what the earl intended doing -- whether +he would keep his force together or discharge his fleet. Sigurd +Syr said, "It is for thee, king, to command; but," he adds, "I +fear, from thy disposition and wilfulness, that thou wilt some +day be betrayed by trusting to those great people, for they are +accustomed of old to bid defiance to their sovereigns." There +was no attack made, for it was soon seen that the earl's fleet +was dispersing. Then King Olaf ransacked the slain, and remained +there some days to divide the booty. At that time Sigvat made +these verses: -- + + "The tale I tell is true + To their homes returned but few + Of Svein's men who came to meet + King Olaf's gallant fleet. + From the North these warmen came + To try the bloody game, -- + On the waves their corpses borne + Show the game that Sunday morn. + The Throndhjem girls so fair + Their jeers, I think, will spare, + For the king's force was but small + That emptied Throndhjem's hall. + But if they will have their jeer, + They may ask their sweethearts dear, + Why they have returned shorn + Who went to shear that Sunday morn." + +And also these: -- + + "Now will the king's power rise, + For the Upland men still prize + The king who o'er the sea + Steers to bloody victory. + Earl Svein! thou now wilt know + That our lads can make blood flow -- + That the Hedemarkers hale + Can do more than tap good ale." + +King Olaf gave his stepfather King Sigurd Syr, and the other +chiefs who had assisted him, handsome presents at parting. He +gave Ketil of Ringanes a yacht of fifteen benches of rowers, +which Ketil brought up the Raum river and into the Mjosen lake. + + + +51. OF KING OLAF. + +King Olaf sent spies out to trace the earl's doings (A.D. 1015); +and when he found that the earl had left the country he sailed +out west, and to Viken, where many people came to him. At the +Thing there he was taken as king, and so he proceeded all the way +to the Naze; and when he heard that Erling Skialgson had gathered +a large force, he did not tarry in North Agder, but sailed with a +steady fair wind to the Throndhjem country; for there it appeared +to him was the greatest strength of the land, if he could subdue +it for himself while the earl was abroad. When Olaf came to +Throndhjem there was no opposition, and he was elected there to +be king. In harvest (A.D. 1015) he took his seat in the town of +Nidaros, and collected the needful winter provision (A.D. 1016). +He built a king's house, and raised Clement's church on the spot +on which it now stands. He parcelled out building ground, which +he gave to bondes, merchants, or others who he thought would +build. There he sat down with many men-at-arms around him; for +he put no great confidence in the Throndhjem people, if the earl +should return to the country. The people of the interior of the +Throndhjem country showed this clearly, for he got no land-scat +from them. + + + +52. PLAN OF SVEIN AND THE SWEDISH KING. + +Earl Svein went first to Svithjod to his brother-in-law Olaf the +Swedish king, told him all that had happened between him and Olaf +the Thick, and asked his advice about what he should now +undertake. The king said that the earl should stay with him if +he liked, and get such a portion of his kingdom to rule over as +should seem to him sufficient; "or otherwise," says he, "I will +give thee help of forces to conquer the country again from Olaf." +The earl chose the latter; for all those among his men who had +great possessions in Norway, which was the case with many who +were with him, were anxious to get back; and in the council they +held about this, it was resolved that in winter they should take +the land-way over Helsingjaland and Jamtaland, and so down into +the Throndhjem land; for the earl reckoned most upon the faithful +help and strength of the Throndhjem people of the interior as +soon as he should appear there. In the meantime, however, it was +determined to take a cruise in summer in the Baltic to gather +property. + + + +53. EARL SVEIN'S DEATH. + +Earl Svein went eastward with his forces to Russia, and passed +the summer (A.D. 1015) in marauding there; but on the approach of +autumn returned with his ships to Svithjod. There he fell into a +sickness, which proved fatal. After the earl's death some of the +people who had followed him remained in Svithjod; others went to +Helsingjaland, thence to Jamtaland, and so from the east over the +dividing ridge of the country to the Throndhjem district, where +they told all that had happened upon their journey: and thus the +truth of Earl Svein's death was known (A.D. 1016). + + + +54. OF THE THRONDHJEM PEOPLE. + +Einar Tambaskelfer, and the people who had followed him went in +winter to the Swedish king, and were received in a friendly +manner. There were also among them many who had followed the +earl. The Swedish king took it much amiss that Olaf the Thick +had set himself down in his scat-lands, and driven the earl out +of them, and therefore he threatened the king with his heaviest +vengeance when opportunity offered. He said that Olaf ought not +to have had the presumption to take the dominions which the earl +had held of him; and all the Swedish king's men agreed with him. +But the Throndhjem people, when they heard for certain that the +earl was dead. and could not be expected back to Norway, turned +all to obedience to King Olaf. Many came from the interior of +the Throndhjem country, and became King Olaf's men; others sent +word and tokens that they would service him. Then, in autumn, he +went into the interior of Throndhjem, and held Things with the +bondes, and was received as king in each district. He returned +to Nidaros, and brought there all the king's scat and revenue, +and had his winter-seat provided there (A.D. 1016). + + + +55. OF KING OLAF'S HOUSEHOLD. + +King Olaf built a king's house in Nidaros, and in it was a large +room for his court, with doors at both ends. The king's high- +seat was in the middle of the room; and within sat his court- +bishop, Grimkel, and next him his other priests; without them sat +his counsellors; and in the other high-seat opposite to the king +sat his marshal, Bjorn, and next to him his pursuivants. When +people of importance came to him, they also had a seat of honour. +The ale was drunk by the fire-light. He divided the service +among his men after the fashion of other kings. He had in his +house sixty court-men and thirty pursuivants; and to them he gave +pay and certain regulations. He had also thirty house-servants +to do the needful work about the house, and procure what was +required. He had, besides, many slaves. At the house were many +outbuildings, in which the court-men slept. There was also a +large room, in which the king held his court-meetings. + + + +56. OF KING OLAF'S HABITS. + +It was King Olaf's custom to rise betimes in the morning, put on +his clothes, wash his hands, and then go to the church and hear +the matins and morning mass. Thereafter he went to the Thing- +meeting, to bring people to agreement with each other, or to talk +of one or the other matter that appeared to him necessary. He +invited to him great and small who were known to be men of +understanding. He often made them recite to him the laws which +Hakon Athelstan's foster-son had made for Throndhjem; and after +considering them with those men of understanding, he ordered laws +adding to or taking from those established before. But Christian +privileges he settled according to the advice of Bishop Grimbel +and other learned priests; and bent his whole mind to uprooting +heathenism, and old customs which he thought contrary to +Christianity. And he succeeded so far that the bondes accepted +of the laws which the king proposed. So says Sigvat: -- + + "The king, who at the helm guides + His warlike ship through clashing tides, + Now gives one law for all the land -- + A heavenly law, which long will stand." + +King Olaf was a good and very gentle man, of little speech, and +open-handed although greedy of money. Sigvat the skald, as +before related, was in King Olaf's house, and several Iceland +men. The king asked particularly how Christianity was observed +in Iceland, and it appeared to him to be very far from where it +ought to be; for, as to observing Christian practices, it was +told the king that it was permitted there to eat horse-flesh, to +expose infants as heathens do, besides many other things contrary +to Christianity. They also told the king about many principal +men who were then in Iceland. Skapte Thorodson was then the +lagman of the country. He inquired also of those who were best +acquainted with it about the state of people in other distant +countries; and his inquiries turned principally on how +Christianity was observed in the Orkney, Shetland, and Farey +Islands: and, as far as he could learn, it was far from being as +he could have wished. Such conversation was usually carried on +by him; or else he spoke about the laws and rights of the +country. + + + +57. KING OLAF'S MESSENGERS. + +The same winter (A.D. 1016) came messengers from the Swedish +king, Olaf the Swede, out of Svithjod: and their leaders were two +brothers, Thorgaut Skarde and Asgaut the bailiff; and they, had +twenty-four men with them, when they came from the eastward, over +the ridge of the country down into Veradal, they summoned a Thing +of the bondes, talked to them, and demanded of them scat and +duties upon account of the king of Sweden. But the bondes, after +consulting with each other, determined only to pay the scat which +the Swedish king required in so far as King Olaf required none +upon his account, but refused to pay scat to both. The +messengers proceeded farther down the valley; but received at +every Thing they held the same answer, and no money. They went +forward to Skaun, held a Thing there, and demanded scat; but it +went there as before. Then they came to Stjoradal, and summoned +a Thing, but the bondes would not come to it. Now the messengers +saw that their business was a failure; and Thorgaut proposed that +they should turn about, and go eastward again. "I do not think," +says Asgaut, "that we have performed the king's errand unless we +go to King Olaf the Thick, since the bondes refer the matter to +him." He was their commander; so they proceeded to the town +(Nidaros), and took lodging there. The day after they presented +themselves to the king, just as he was seated at table, saluted +him, and said they came with a message of the Swedish king. The +king told them to come to him next day. Next day the king, +having heard mass, went to his Thing-house, ordered the +messengers of the Swedish king to be called, and told them to +produce their message. Then Thorgaut spoke, and told first what +his errand was, and next how the Throndhjem people of the +interior had replied to it; and asked the king's decision on the +business, that they might know what result their errand there was +to have. The king answers, "While the earls ruled over the +country, it was not to be wondered at if the country people +thought themselves bound to obey them, as they were at least of +the royal race of the kingdom. But it would have been more just +if those earls had given assistance and service to the kings who +had a right to the country, rather than to foreign kings, or to +stir up opposition to their lawful kings, depriving them of their +land and kingdom. With regard to Olaf the Swede, who calls +himself entitled to the kingdom of Norway, I, who in fact am so +entitled, can see no ground for his claim; but well remember the +skaith and damage we have suffered from him and his relations." + +Then says Asgaut. "It is not wonderful that thou art called Olaf +the Thick, seeing thou answerest so haughtily to such a prince's +message, and canst not see clearly how heavy the king's wrath +will be for thee to support, as many have experienced who had +greater strength than thou appearest to have. But if thou +wishest to keep hold of thy kingdom, it will be best for thee to +come to the king, and be his man; and we shall beg him to give +thee this kingdom in fief under him." + +The king replies with all gentleness, "I will give thee an +advice, Asgaut, in return. Go back to the east again to thy +king, and tell him that early in spring I will make myself ready, +and will proceed eastward to the ancient frontier that divided +formerly the kingdom of the kings of Norway from Sweden. There +he may come if he likes, that we may conclude a peace with each +other; and each of us will retain the kingdom to which he is +born." + +Now the messengers turned back to their lodging, and prepared for +their departure, and the king went to table. The messengers came +back soon after to the king's house; but the doorkeepers saw it, +and reported it to the king, who told them not to let the +messengers in. "I will not speak with them," said he. Then the +messengers went off, and Thorgaut said he would now return home +with his men; but Asgaut insisted still that he would go forward +with the king's errand: so they separated. Thorgaut proceeded +accordingly through Strind; but Asgaut went into Gaulardal and +Orkadal, and intended proceeding southwards to More, to deliver +his king's message. When King Olaf came to the knowledge of this +he sent out his pursuivants after them, who found them at the +ness in Stein, bound their hands behind their backs, and led them +down to the point called Gaularas, where they raised a gallows, +and hanged them so that they could be seen by those who travelled +the usual sea-way out of the fjord. Thorgaut heard this news +before he had travelled far on his way home through the +Throndhjem country; and he hastened on his journey until he came +to the Swedish king, and told him how it had gone with them. The +king was highly enraged when he heard the account of it; and he +had no lack of high words. + + + +58. OLAF AND ERLING RECONCILED. + +The spring thereafter (A.D. 1016) King Olaf Haraldson calls out +an army from the Throndhjem land, and makes ready to proceed +eastward. Some of the Iceland traders were then ready to sail +from Norway. With them King Olaf sent word and token to Hjalte +Skeggjason, and summoned him to come to him, and at the same time +sent a verbal message to Skapte the lagman, and other men who +principally took part in the lawgiving of Iceland, to take out of +the law whatever appeared contrary to Christianity. He sent, +besides, a message of friendship to the people in general. The +king then proceeded southwards himself along the coast, stopping +at every district, and holding Things with the bondes; and in +each Thing he ordered the Christian law to be read, together with +the message of salvation thereunto belonging, and with which many +ill customs and much heathenism were swept away at once among the +common people: for the earls had kept well the old laws and +rights of the country; but with respect to keeping Christianity, +they had allowed every man to do as he liked. It was thus come +so far that the people were baptized in the most places on the +sea-coast, but the most of them were ignorant of Christian law. +In the upper ends of the valleys, and in the habitations among +the mountains, the greater part of the people were heathen; for +when the common man is left to himself, the faith he has been +taught in his childhood is that which has the strongest hold over +his inclination. But the king threatened the most violent +proceedings against great or small, who, after the king's +message, would not adopt Christianity. In the meantime Olaf was +proclaimed king in every Law Thing in the country, and no man +spoke against him. While he lay in Karmtsund messengers went +between him and Erling Skjalgson, who endeavoured to make peace +between them; and the meeting was appointed in Whitings Isle. +When they met they spoke with each other about agreement +together; but Erling found something else than he expected in the +conversation: for when he insisted on having all the fiefs which +Olaf Trygvason, and afterwards the Earls Svein and Hakon, had +given him, and on that condition would be his man and dutiful +friend, the king answered, "It appears to me, Erling, that it +would be no bad bargain for thee to get as great fiefs from me +for thy aid and friendship as thou hadst from Earl Eirik, a man +who had done thee the greatest injury by the bloodshed of thy +men; but even if I let thee remain the greatest lenderman in +Norway, I will bestow my fiefs according to my own will, and not +act as if ye lendermen had udal right to my ancestor's heritage, +and I was obliged to buy your services with manifold rewards." +Erling had no disposition to sue for even the smallest thing; and +he saw that the king was not easily dealt with. He saw also that +he had only two conditions before him: the one was to make no +agreement with the king, and stand by the consequences; the other +to leave it entirely to the king's pleasure. Although it was +much against his inclination, he chose the latter, and merely +said to the king, "The service will be the most useful to thee +which I give with a free will." And thus their conference ended. +Erling's relations and friends came to him afterwards, and +advised him to give way, and proceed with more prudence and less +pride. "Thou wilt still," they said, "be the most important and +most respected lenderman in Norway, both on account of thy own +and thy relations' abilities and great wealth." Erling found +that this was prudent advice, and that they who gave it did so +with a good intention, and he followed it accordingly. Erling +went into the king's service on such conditions as the king +himself should determine and please. Thereafter they separated +in some shape reconciled, and Olaf went his way eastward along +the coast (A.D. 1016). + + + +59. EILIF OF GAUTLAND'S MURDER. + +As soon as it was reported that Olaf had come to Viken, the Danes +who had offices under the Danish king set off for Denmark, +without waiting for King Olaf. But King Olaf sailed in along +Viken, holding Things with the bondes. All the people of the +country submitted to him, and thereafter he took all the king's +taxes, and remained the summer (A.D. 1016) in Viken. He then +sailed east from Tunsberg across the fjord, and all the way east +to Svinasund. There the Swedish king's dominions begin, and he +had set officers over this country; namely, Eilif Gautske over +the north part, and Hroe Skialge over the east part, all the way +to the Gaut river. Hroe had family friends on both sides of the +river, and also great farms on Hising Island, and was besides a +mighty and very rich man. Eilif was also of great family, and +very wealthy. Now when King Olaf came to Ranrike he summoned the +people to a Thing, and all who dwelt on the sea-coast or in the +out-islands came to him. Now when the Thing was seated the +king's marshal, Bjorn, held a speech to them, in which he told +the bondes to receive Olaf as their king, in the same way as had +been done in all other parts of Norway. Then stood up a bold +bonde by name Brynjolf Ulfalde, and said, "We bondes know where +the division-boundaries between the Norway and Danish and Swedish +kings' lands have stood by rights in old times; namely, that the +Gaut river divided their lands between the Vener lake and the +sea; but towards the north the forests until Eid forest, and from +thence the ridge of the country all north to Finmark. We know, +also, that by turns they have made inroads upon each other's +territories, and that the Swedes have long had power all the way +to Svinasund. But, sooth to say, I know that it is the +inclination of many rather to serve the king of Norway, but they +dare not; for the Swedish king's dominions surround us, both +eastward, southwards, and also up the country; and besides, it +may be expected that the king of Norway must soon go to the +north, where the strength of his kingdom lies, and then we have +no power to withstand the Gautlanders. Now it is for the king to +give us good counsel, for we have great desire to be his men." +After the Thing, in the evening, Brynjolf was in the king's tent, +and the day after likewise, and they had much private +conversation together. Then the king proceeded eastwards along +Viken. Now when Eilif heard of his arrival, he sent out spies to +discover what he was about; but he himself, with thirty men, kept +himself high up in the habitations among the hills, where he had +gathered together bondes. Many of the bondes came to King Olaf, +but some sent friendly messages to him. People went between King +Olaf and Eilif, and they entreated each separately to hold a +Thing-meeting between themselves, and make peace in one way or +another. They told Eilif that they might expect violent +treatment from King Olaf if they opposed his orders; but promised +Eilif he should not want men. It was determined that they should +come down from the high country, and hold a thing with the bondes +and the king. King Olaf thereupon sent the chief of his +pursuivants, Thorer Lange, with six men, to Brynjolf. They were +equipped with their coats-of-mail under their cloaks, and their +hats over their helmets. The following day the bondes came in +crowds down with Eilif; and in his suite was Brynjolf, and with +him Thorer. The king laid his ships close to a rocky knoll that +stuck out into the sea, and upon it the king went with his +people, and sat down. Below was a flat field, on which the +bondes' force was; but Eilif's men were drawn up, forming a +shield-fence before him. Bjorn the marshal spoke long and +cleverly upon the king's account, and when he sat down Eilif +arose to speak; but at the same moment Thorer Lange rose, drew +his sword, and struck Eilif on the neck, so that his head flew +off. Then the whole bonde-force started up; but the Gautland men +set off in full flight and Thorer with his people killed several +of them. Now when the crowd was settled again, and the noise +over the king stood up, and told the bondes to seat themselves. +They did so, and then much was spoken. The end of it was that +they submitted to the king, and promised fidelity to him; and he, +on the other hand, promised not to desert them, but to remain at +hand until the discord between him and the Swedish Olaf was +settled in one way or other. King Olaf then brought the whole +northern district under his power, and went in summer eastward as +far as the Gaut river, and got all the king's scat among the +islands. But when summer (A.D. 1016) was drawing towards an end +he returned north to Viken, and sailed up the Raum river to a +waterfall called Sarp. On the north side of the fall, a point of +land juts out into the river. There the king ordered a rampart +to be built right across the ness, of stone, turf, and wood, and +a ditch to be dug in front of it; so that it was a large earthen +fort or burgh, which he made a merchant town of. He had a king's +house put up, and ordered the building of Mary church. He also +laid out plans for other houses, and got people to build on them. +In harvest (A.D. 1016) he let everything be gathered there that +was useful for his winter residence (A.D. 1017), and sat there +with a great many people, and the rest he quartered in the +neighbouring districts. The king prohibited all exports from +Viken to Gautland of herrings and salt, which the Gautland people +could ill do without. This year the king held a great Yule +feast, to which he invited many great bondes. + + + +60. THE HISTORY OF EYVIND URARHORN. + +There was a man called Eyvind Urarhorn, who was a great man, of +high birth, who had his descent from the East Agder country. +Every summer he went out on a viking cruise, sometimes to the +West sea, sometimes to the Baltic, sometimes south to Flanders, +and had a well-armed cutter (snekkia) of twenty benches of +rowers. He had been also at Nesjar, and given his aid to the +king; and when they separated the king promised him his favour, +and Eyvind, again, promised to come to the king's aid whenever he +was required. This winter (A.D. 1017) Eyvind was at the Yule +feast of the king, and received goodly gifts from him. Brynjolf +Ulfalde was also with the king, and he received a Yule present +from the king of a gold-mounted sword, and also a farm called +Vettaland, which is a very large head-farm of the district. +Brynjolf composed a song about these gifts, of which the refrain +was -- + + "The song-famed hero to my hand + Gave a good sword, and Vettaland." + +The king afterwards gave him the title of Lenderman, and Brynjolf +was ever after the king's greatest friend. + + + +61. THRAND WHITE'S MURDER. + +This winter (A.D. 1017) Thrand White from Throndhjem went east to +Jamtaland, to take up scat upon account of King Olaf. But when +he had collected the scat he was surprised by men of the Swedish +king, who killed him and his men, twelve in all, and brought the +scat to the Swedish king. King Olaf was very ill-pleased when he +heard this news. + + + +62. CHRISTIANITY PROCLAIMED IN VIKEN. + +King Olaf made Christian law to be proclaimed in Viken, in the +same way as in the North country. It succeeded well, because the +people of Viken were better acquainted with the Christian customs +than the people in the north; for, both winter and summer, there +were many merchants in Viken, both Danish and Saxon. The people +of Viken, also, had much trading intercourse with England, and +Saxony, and Flanders, and Denmark; and some had been on viking +expeditions, and had had their winter abode in Christian lands. + + + +63. HROE'S FALL. + +About spring-time (A.D. 1017) King Olaf sent a message that +Eyvind Urarhorn should come to him; and they spake together in +private for a long time. Thereafter Eyvind made himself ready +for a viking cruise. He sailed south towards Viken, and brought +up at the Eikreys Isles without Hising Isle. There he heard that +Hroe Skialge had gone northwards towards Ordost, and had there +made a levy of men and goods on account of the Swedish king, and +was expected from the north. Eyvind rowed in by Haugasund, and +Hroe came rowing from the north, and they met in the sound and +fought. Hroe fell there, with nearly thirty men; and Eyvind took +all the goods Hroe had with him. Eyvind then proceeded to the +Baltic, and was all summer on a viking cruise. + + + +64. FALL OF GUDLEIK AND THORGAUT. + +There was a man called Gudleik Gerske, who came originally from +Agder. He was a great merchant, who went far and wide by sea, +was very rich, and drove a trade with various countries. He +often went east to Gardarike (Russia), and therefore was called +Gudleik Gerske (the Russian). This spring (A.D. 1017) Gudleik +fitted out his ship, and intended to go east in summer to Russia. +King Olaf sent a message to him that he wanted to speak to him; +and when Gudleik came to the king he told him he would go in +partnership with him, and told him to purchase some costly +articles which were difficult to be had in this country. Gudleik +said that it should be according to the king's desire. The king +ordered as much money to be delivered to Gudleik as he thought +sufficient, and then Gudleik set out for the Baltic. They lay in +a sound in Gotland; and there it happened, as it often does, that +people cannot keep their own secrets, and the people of the +country came to know that in this ship was Olaf the Thick's +partner. Gudleik went in summer eastwards to Novgorod, where he +bought fine and costly clothes, which he intended for the king as +a state dress; and also precious furs, and remarkably splendid +table utensils. In autumn (A.D. 1017), as Gudleik was returning +from the east, he met a contrary wind, and lay for a long time at +the island Eyland. There came Thorgaut Skarde, who in autumn had +heard of Gudleik's course, in a long-ship against him, and gave +him battle. They fought long, and Gudleik and his people +defended themselves for a long time; but the numbers against them +were great, and Gudleik and many of his ship's crew fell, and a +great many of them were wounded. Thorgaut took all their goods, +and King Olaf's, and he and his comrades divided the booty among +them equally; but he said the Swedish king ought to have the +precious articles of King Olaf, as these, he said, should be +considered as part of the scat due to him from Norway. +Thereafter Thorgaut proceeded east to Svithjod. These tidings +were soon known; and as Eyvind Urarhorn came soon after to +Eyland, he heard the news, and sailed east after Thorgaut and his +troop, and overtook them among the Swedish isles on the coast, +and gave battle. There Thorgaut and the most of his men were +killed, and the rest sprang overboard. Eyvind took all the goods +and all the costly articles of King Olaf which they had captured +from Gudleik, and went with these back to Norway in autumn, and +delivered to King Olaf his precious wares. The king thanked him +in the most friendly way for his proceeding, and promised him +anew his favour and friendship. At this time Olaf had been three +years king over Norway (A.D. 1015-1017). + + + +65. MEETING OF OLAF AND RAGNVALD. + +The same summer (A.D. 1017) King Olaf ordered a levy, and went +out eastwards to the Gaut river, where he lay a great part of the +summer. Messages were passing between King Olaf, Earl Ragnvald, +and the earl's wife, Ingebjorg, the daughter of Trygve. She was +very zealous about giving King Olaf of Norway every kind of help, +and made it a matter of her deepest interest. For this there +were two causes. She had a great friendship for King Olaf; and +also she could never forget that the Swedish king had been one at +the death of her brother, Olaf Trygvason; and also that he, on +that account only, had any presence to rule over Norway. The +earl, by her persuasion, turned much towards friendship with King +Olaf; and it proceeded so far that the earl and the king +appointed a meeting, and met at the Gaut river. They talked +together of many things, but especially of the Norwegian and +Swedish kings' relations with each other; both agreeing, as was +the truth also, that it was the greatest loss, both to the people +of Viken and of Gautland, that there was no peace for trade +between the two countries; and at last both agreed upon a peace, +and still-stand of arms between them until next summer; and they +parted with mutual gifts and friendly speeches. + + + +66. KING OLAF THE SWEDE. + +The king thereupon returned north to Viken, and had all the royal +revenues up to the Gaut river; and all the people of the country +there had submitted to him. King Olaf the Swede had so great a +hatred of Olaf Haraldson, that no man dared to call him by his +right name in the king's hearing. They called him the thick man; +and never named him without some hard by-name. + + + +67. ACCOUNT OF THEIR RECONCILIATION. + +The bondes in Viken spoke with each other about there being +nothing for it but that the kings should make peace and a league +with each other, and insisted upon it that they were badly used +by the kings going to war; but nobody was so bold as to bring +these murmurs before the king. At last they begged Bjorn the +marshal to bring this matter before the king, and entreat him to +send messengers to the Swedish king to offer peace on his side. +Bjorn was disinclined to do this, and put it off from himself +with excuses; but on the entreaties of many of his friends, he +promised at last to speak of it to the king; but declared, at the +same time, that he knew it would be taken very ill by the king to +propose that he should give way in anything to the Swedish king. +The same summer (A.D. 1017) Hjalte Skeggjason came over to Norway +from Iceland, according to the message sent him by King Olaf, and +went directly to the king. He was well received by the king, who +told him to lodge in his house, and gave him a seat beside Bjorn +the marshal, and Hjalte became his comrade at table. There was +good-fellowship immediately between them. + +Once, when King Olaf had assembled the people and bondes to +consult upon the good of the country, Bjorn the marshal said, +"What think you, king, of the strife that is between the Swedish +king and you? Many people have fallen on both sides, without its +being at all more determined than before what each of you shall +have of the kingdom. You have now been sitting in Viken one +winter and two summers, and the whole country to the north is +lying behind your back unseen; and the men who have property or +udal rights in the north are weary of sitting here. Now it is +the wish of the lendermen, of your other people, and of the +bondes that this should come to an end. There is now a truce, +agreement, and peace with the earl, and the West Gautland people +who are nearest to us; and it appears to the people it would be +best that you sent messengers to the Swedish king to offer a +reconciliation on your side; and, without doubt, many who are +about the Swedish king will support the proposal, for it is a +common gain for those who dwell in both countries, both here and +there." This speech of Bjorn's received great applause. + +Then the king said, "It is fair, Bjorn, that the advice thou hast +given should be carried out by thyself. Thou shalt undertake +this embassy thyself, and enjoy the good of it, if thou hast +advised well; and if it involve any man in danger, thou hast +involved thyself in it. Moreover, it belongs to thy office to +declare to the multitude what I wish to have told." Then the +king stood up, went to the church, and had high mass sung before +him; and thereafter went to table. + +The following day Hjalte said to Bjorn, "Why art thou so +melancholy, man? Art thou sick, or art thou angry at any one?" +Bjorn tells Hjalte his conversation with the king, and says it is +a very dangerous errand. + +Hjalte says, "It is their lot who follow kings that they enjoy +high honours, and are more respected than other men, but stand +often in danger of their lives: and they must understand how to +bear both parts of their lot. The king's luck is great; and much +honour will be gained by this business, if it succeed." + +Bjorn answered, "Since thou makest so light of this business in +thy speech, wilt thou go with me? The king has promised that I +shall have companions with me on the journey." + +"Certainly," says Hjalte; "I will follow thee, if thou wilt: for +never again shall I fall in with such a comrade if we part." + + + +68. JOURNEY OF BJORN THE MARSHAL. + +A few days afterwards. when the king was at a Thing-meeting, +Bjorn came with eleven others. He says to the king that they +were now ready to proceed on their mission, and that their horses +stood saddled at the door. "And now," says he, "I would know +with what errand I am to go, or what orders thou givest us." + +The king replies, "Ye shall carry these my words to the Swedish +king -- that I will establish peace between our countries up to +the frontier which Olaf Trygvason had before me; and each shall +bind himself faithfully not to trespass over it. But with regard +to the loss of people, no man must mention it if peace there is +to be; for the Swedish king cannot with money pay for the men the +Swedes have deprived us of." Thereupon the king rose, and went +out with Bjorn and his followers; and he took a gold-mounted +sword and a gold ring, and said, in handing over the sword to +Bjorn, "This I give thee: it was given to me in summer by Earl +Ragnvald. To him ye shall go; and bring him word from me to +advance your errand with his counsel and strength. This thy +errand I will think well fulfilled if thou hearest the Swedish +king's own words, be they yea or nay: and this gold ring thou +shalt give Earl Ragnvald. These are tokens (1) he must know +well." + +Hjalte went up to the king, saluted him, and said, "We need much, +king, that thy luck attend us;" and wished that they might meet +again in good health. + +The king asked where Hjalte was going. + +"With Bjorn," said he. + +The king said, "It will assist much to the good success of the +journey that thou goest too, for thy good fortune has often been +proved; and be assured that I shall wish that all my luck, if +that be of any weight, may attend thee and thy company." + +Bjorn and his followers rode their way, and came to Earl +Ragnvald's court, where they were well received. Bjorn was a +celebrated and generally known man, -- known by sight and speech +to all who had ever seen King Olaf; for at every Thing, Bjorn +stood up and told the king's message. Ingebjorg, the earl's +wife, went up to Hjalte and looked at him. She recognized him, +for she was living with her brother Olaf Trygvason when Hjalte +was there: and she knew how to reckon up the relationship between +King Olaf and Vilborg, the wife of Hjalte; for Eirik Bjodaskalle +father of Astrid, King Olaf Trygvason's mother, and Bodvar father +of Olaf, mother of Gissur White the father of Vilborg, were +brother's sons of the lenderman Vikingakare of Vors. + +They enjoyed here good entertainment. One day Bjorn entered into +conversation with the earl and Ingebjorg, in which he set forth +his errand, and produced to the earl his tokens. + +The earl replies, "What hast thou done, Bjorn, that the king +wishes thy death? For, so far from thy errand having any +success, I do not think a man can be found who could speak these +words to the Swedish king without incurring wrath and punishment. +King Olaf, king of Sweden, is too proud for any man to speak to +him on anything he is angry at." + +Then Bjorn says, "Nothing has happened to me that King Olaf is +offended at; but many of his disposition act both for themselves +and others, in a way that only men who are daring can succeed in. +But as yet all his plans have had good success, and I think this +will turn out well too; so I assure you, earl, that I will +actually travel to the Swedish king, and not turn back before I +have brought to his ears every word that King Olaf told me to say +to him, unless death prevent me, or that I am in bonds, and +cannot perform my errand; and this I must do, whether you give +any aid or no aid to me in fulfilling the king's wishes." + +Then said IngebJorg, "I will soon declare my opinion. I think, +earl, thou must turn all thy attention to supporting King Olaf +the king of Norway's desire that this message be laid before the +Swedish king, in whatever way he may answer it. Although the +Swedish king's anger should be incurred, and our power and +property be at stake, yet will I rather run the risk, than that +it should be said the message of King Olaf was neglected from +fear of the Swedish king. Thou hast that birth, strength of +relations, and other means, that here in the Swedish land it is +free to thee to tell thy mind, if it be right and worthy of being +heard, whether it be listened to by few or many, great or little +people, or by the king himself." + +The earl replies, "It is known to every one how thou urgest me: +it may be, according to thy counsel, that I should promise the +king's men to follow them, so that they may get their errand laid +before the Swedish king, whether he take it ill or take it well. +But I will have my own counsel followed, and will not run hastily +into Bjorn's or any other man's measures, in such a highly +important matter. It is my will that ye all remain here with me, +so long as I think it necessary for the purpose of rightly +forwarding this mission." Now as the earl had thus given them to +understand that he would support them in the business, Bjorn +thanked him most kindly, and with the assurance that his advice +should rule them altogether. Thereafter Bjorn and his fellow- +travellers remained very long in the earl's house. + + +ENDNOTES: +(1) Before writing was a common accomplishment in courts, the + only way of accrediting a special messenger between kings + and great men was by giving the messenger a token; that is. + some article well known by the person receiving the message + to be the property of and valued by the person sending it. + + + +69. CONVERSATION OF BJORN AND INGEBJORG. + +Ingebjorg was particularly kind to them; and Bjorn often spoke +with her about the matter, and was ill at ease that their journey +was so long delayed. Hjalte and the others often spoke together +also about the matter; and Hjalte said; "I will go to the king if +ye like; for I am not a man of Norway, and the Swedes can have +nothing to say to me. I have heard that there are Iceland men in +the king's house who are my acquaintances, and are well treated; +namely, the skalds Gissur Black and Ottar Black. From them I +shall get out what I can about the Swedish king; and if the +business will really be so difficult as it now appears, or if +there be any other way of promoting it, I can easily devise some +errand that may appear suitable for me." + +This counsel appeared to Bjorn and Ingebjorg to be the wisest, +and they resolved upon it among themselves. Ingebjorg put Hjalte +in a position to travel; gave him two Gautland men with him, and +ordered them to follow him, and assist him with their service, +and also to go wherever he might have occasion to send them. +Besides, Ingebjorg gave him twenty marks of weighed silver money +for travelling expenses, and sent word and token by him to the +Swedish king Olaf's daughter, Ingegerd, that she should give all +her assistance to Hjalte's business, whenever he should find +himself under the necessity of craving her help. Hjalte set off +as soon as he was ready. When he came to King Olaf he soon found +the skalds Gissur and Ottar, and they were very glad at his +coming. Without delay they went to the king, and told him that a +man was come who was their countryman, and one of the most +considerable in their native land, and requested the king to +receive him well. The king told them to take Hjalte and his +fellow-travellers into their company and quarters. Now when +Hjalte had resided there a short time, and got acquainted with +people, he was much respected by everybody. The skalds were +often in the king's house, for they were well-spoken men; and +often in the daytime they sat in front of the king's high-seat, +and Hjalte, to whom they paid the highest respect in all things, +by their side. He became thus known to the king, who willingly +entered into conversation with him, and heard from him news about +Iceland. + + + +70. OF SIGVAT THE SKALD. + +It happened that before Bjorn set out from home he asked Sigvat +the skald, who at that time was with King Olaf, to accompany him +on his journey. It was a journey for which people had no great +inclination. There was, however, great friendship between Bjorn +and Sigvat. Then Sigvat sang: -- + + "With the king's marshals all have I, + In days gone by, + Lived joyously, -- + With all who on the king attend, + And knee before him humbly bend, + Bjorn, thou oft hast ta'en my part -- + Pleaded with art, + And touched the heart. + Bjorn! brave stainer of the sword, + Thou art my friend -- I trust thy word." + +While they were riding up to Gautland, Sigvat made these verses: +-- + + "Down the Fjord sweep wind and rain, + Our stout ship's sails and tackle strain; + Wet to the skin. + We're sound within, + And gaily o'er the waves are dancing, + Our sea-steed o'er the waves high prancing! + Through Lister sea + Flying all free; + Off from the wind with swelling sail, + We merrily scud before the gale, + And reach the sound + Where we were bound. + And now our ship, so gay and grand, + Glides past the green and lovely land, + And at the isle + Moors for a while. + Our horse-hoofs now leave hasty print; + We ride -- of ease there's scanty stint -- + In heat and haste + O'er Gautland's waste: + Though in a hurry to be married, + The king can't say that we have tarried." + +One evening late they were riding through Gautland, and Sigvat +made these verses: -- + + "The weary horse will at nightfall + Gallop right well to reach his stall; + When night meets day, with hasty hoof + He plies the road to reach a roof. + Far from the Danes, we now may ride + Safely by stream or mountain-side; + But, in this twilight, in some ditch + The horse and rider both may pitch." + +They rode through the merchant town of Skara, and down the street +to the earl's house. He sang: -- + + "The shy sweet girls, from window high + In wonder peep at the sparks that fly + From our horses heels, as down the street + Of the earl's town we ride so fleet. + Spur on! -- that every pretty lass + May hear our horse-hoofs as we pass + Clatter upon the stones so hard, + And echo round the paved court-yard." + + + +71. HJALTE SKEGGJASON WHILE HE WAS IN SVITHIOD. + +One day Hjalte, and the skalds with him, went before the king, +and he began thus: -- "It has so happened, king, as is known to +you, that I have come here after a long and difficult journey; +but when I had once crossed the ocean and heard of your +greatness, it appeared to me unwise to go back without having +seen you in your splendour and glory. Now it is a law between +Iceland and Norway, that Iceland men pay landing due when they +come into Norway, but while I was coming across the sea I took +myself all the landing dues from my ship's people; but knowing +that thou have the greatest right to all the power in Norway, I +hastened hither to deliver to you the landing dues." With this +he showed the silver to the king, and laid ten marks of silver in +Gissur Black's lap. + +The king replies, "Few have brought us any such dues from Norway +for some time; and now, Hjalte, I will return you my warmest +thanks for having given yourself so much trouble to bring us the +landing dues, rather than pay them to our enemies. But I will +that thou shouldst take this money from me as a gift, and with it +my friendship." + +Hjalte thanked the king with many words, and from that day set +himself in great favour with the king, and often spoke with him; +for the king thought, what was true, that he was a man of much +understanding and eloquence. Now Hjalte told Gissur and Ottar +that he was sent with tokens to the king's daughter Ingegerd, to +obtain her protection and friendship; and he begged of them to +procure him some opportunity to speak with her. They answered, +that this was an easy thing to do; and went one day to her house, +where she sat at the drinking table with many men. She received +the skalds in a friendly manner, for they were known to her. +Hjalte brought her a salutation from the earl's wife, Ingebjorg; +and said she had sent him here to obtain friendly help and +succour from her, and in proof whereof produced his tokens. The +king's daughter received him also kindly, and said he should be +welcome to her friendship. They sat there till late in the day +drinking. The king's daughter made Hjalte tell her much news, +and invited him to come often and converse with her. He did so: +came there often, and spoke with the king's daughter; and at last +entrusted her with the purpose of Bjorn's and his comrade's +journey, and asked her how she thought the Swedish king would +receive the proposal that there should be a reconciliation +between the kings. The king's daughter replied, that, in her +opinion, it would be a useless attempt to propose to the king any +reconciliation with Olaf the Thick; for the king was so enraged +against him, that he would not suffer his name to be mentioned +before him. It happened one day that Hjalte was sitting with the +king and talking to him, and the king was very merry and drunk. +Then Hjalte said, "Manifold splendour and grandeur have I seen +here; and I have now witnessed with my eyes what I have often +heard of, that no monarch in the north is so magnificent: but it +is very vexatious that we who come so far to visit it have a road +so long and troublesome, both on account of the great ocean, but +more especially because it is not safe to travel through Norway +for those who are coming here in a friendly disposition. But why +is there no one to bring proposals for a peace between you and +King Olaf the Thick? I heard much in Norway, and in west +Gautland, of the general desire that this peace should have taken +place; and it has been told me for truth, as the Norway king's +words, that he earnestly desires to be reconciled to you; and the +reason I know is, that he feels how much less his power is than +yours. It is even said that he intends to pay his court to your +daughter Ingegerd; and that would lead to a useful peace, for I +have heard from people of credit that he is a remarkably +distinguished man." + +The king answers. "Thou must not speak thus, Hjalte; but for this +time I will not take it amiss of thee, as thou dost not know what +people have to avoid here. That fat fellow shall not be called +king in my court, and there is by no means the stuff in him that +people talk of: and thou must see thyself that such a connection +is not suitable; for I am the tenth king in Upsala who, relation +after relation, has been sole monarch over the Swedish, and many +other great lands, and all have been the superior kings over +other kings in the northern countries. But Norway is little +inhabited, and the inhabitants are scattered. There have only +been small kings there; and although Harald Harfager was the +greatest king in that country, and strove against the small +kings, and subdued them, yet he knew so well his position that he +did not covet the Swedish dominions, and therefore the Swedish +kings let him sit in peace, especially as there was relationship +between them. Thereafter, while Hakon Athelstan's foster-son was +in Norway he sat in peace, until he began to maraud in Gautland +and Denmark; on which a war-force came upon him, and took from +him both life and land. Gunhild's sons also were cut off when +they became disobedient to the Danish kings; and Harald Gormson +joined Norway to his own dominions, and made it subject to scat +to him. And we reckon Harald Gormson to be of less power and +consideration than the Upsala kings, for our relation Styrbjorn +subdued him, and Harald became his man; and yet Eirik the +Victorious, my father, rose over Styrbjorn's head when it came to +a trial between them. When Olaf Trygvason came to Norway and +proclaimed himself king, we would not permit it, but we went with +King Svein, and cut him off; and thus we have appropriated +Norway, as thou hast not heard, and with no less right than if I +had gained it in battle, and by conquering the kings who ruled it +before. Now thou canst well suppose, as a man of sense, that I +will not let slip the kingdom of Norway for this thick fellow. +It is wonderful he does not remember how narrowly he made his +escape, when we had penned him in in the Malar lake. Although he +slipped away with life from thence, he ought, methinks, to have +something else in his mind than to hold out against us Swedes. +Now, Hjalte, thou must never again open thy mouth in my presence +on such a subject." + +Hjalte saw sufficiently that there was no hope of the king's +listening to any proposal of a peace, and desisted from speaking +of it, and turned the conversation to something else. When +Hjalte, afterwards, came into discourse with the king's daughter +Ingegerd, he tells her his conversation with the king. She told +him she expected such an answer from the king. Hjalte begged of +her to say a good word to the king about the matter, but she +thought the king would listen as little to what she said: "But +speak about it I will, if thou requirest it." Hjalte assured her +he would be thankful for the attempt. One day the king's +daughter Ingegerd had a conversation with her father Olaf; and as +she found her father was in a particularly good humour, she said, +"What is now thy intention with regard to the strife with Olaf +the Thick? There are many who complain about it, having lost +their property by it; others have lost their relations by the +Northmen, and all their peace and quiet; so that none of your men +see any harm that can be done to Norway. It would be a bad +counsel if thou sought the dominion over Norway; for it is a poor +country, difficult to come at, and the people dangerous: for the +men there will rather have any other for their king than thee. +If I might advise, thou wouldst let go all thoughts about Norway, +and not desire Olaf's heritage; and rather turn thyself to the +kingdoms in the East country, which thy forefathers the former +Swedish kings had, and which our relation Styrbjorn lately +subdued, and let the thick Olaf possess the heritage of his +forefathers and make peace with him." + +The king replies in a rage, "It is thy counsel, Ingegerd, that I +should let slip the kingdom of Norway, and give thee in marriage +to this thick Olaf. - No," says he, "something else shall first +take place. Rather than that, I shall, at the Upsala Thing in +winter, issue a proclamation to all Swedes, that the whole people +shall assemble for an expedition, and go to their ships before +the ice is off the waters; and I will proceed to Norway, and lay +waste the land with fire and sword, and burn everything, to +punish them for their want of fidelity." + +The king was so mad with rage that nobody ventured to say a word, +and she went away. Hjalte, who was watching for her, immediately +went to her and asked how her errand to the king had turned out. +She answered, it turned out as she had expected; that none could +venture to put in a word with the king; but, on the contrary, he +had used threats; and she begged Hjalte never to speak of the +matter again before the king. As Hjalte and Ingegerd spoke +together often, Olaf the Thick was often the subject, and he told +her about him and his manners; and Hjalte praised the king of +Norway what he could, but said no more than was the truth, and +she could well perceive it. Once, in a conversation, Hjalte said +to her, "May I be permitted, daughter of the king, to tell thee +what lies in my mind?" + +"Speak freely," says she; "but so that I alone can hear it." + +"Then," said Hjalte, "what would be thy answer, if the Norway +king Olaf sent messengers to thee with the errand to propose +marriage to thee?" + +She blushed, and answered slowly but gently, "I have not made up +my mind to answer to that; but if Olaf be in all respects so +perfect as thou tellest me, I could wish for no other husband; +unless, indeed, thou hast gilded him over with thy praise more +than sufficiently." + +Hjalte replied, that he had in no respect spoken better of the +king than was true. They often spoke together on the same +subject. Ingegerd begged Hjalte to be cautious not to mention it +to any other person, for the king would be enraged against him if +it came to his knowledge. Hjalte only spoke of it to the skalds +Gissur and Ottar, who thought it was the most happy plan, if it +could but be carried into effect. Ottar, who was a man of great +power of conversation, and much beloved in the court, soon +brought up the subject before the king's daughter, and recounted +to her, as Hjalte had done, all King Olaf's excellent qualities. +Often spoke Hjalte and the others about him; and now that Hjalte +knew the result of his mission, he sent those Gautland men away +who had accompanied him, and let them return to the earl with +letters (1) which the king's daughter Ingegerd sent to the earl +and Ingebjorg. Hjalte also let them give a hint to the earl +about the conversation he had had with Ingegerd, and her answer +thereto: and the messengers came with it to the earl a little +before Yule. + + +ENDNOTES: +(1) This seems the first notice we have in the sagas of written + letters being sent instead of tokens and verbal messages. -- + L. + + + +72. OLAF'S JOURNEY TO THE UPLANDS. + +When King Olaf had despatched Bjorn and his followers to +Gautland, he sent other people also to the Uplands, with the +errand that they should have guest-quarters prepared for him, as +he intended that winter (A.D. 1018) to live as guest in the +Uplands; for it had been the custom of former kings to make a +progress in guest-quarters every third year in the Uplands. In +autumn he began his progress from Sarpsborg, and went first to +Vingulmark. He ordered his progress so that he came first to +lodge in the neighbourhood of the forest habitations, and +summoned to him all the men of the habitations who dwelt at the +greatest distance from the head-habitations of the district; and +he inquired particularly how it stood with their Christianity, +and, where improvement was needful, he taught them the right +customs. If any there were who would not renounce heathen ways, +he took the matter so zealously that he drove some out of the +country, mutilated others of hands or feet, or stung their eyes +out; hung up some, cut down some with the sword; but let none go +unpunished who would not serve God. He went thus through the +whole district, sparing neither great nor small. He gave them +teachers, and placed these as thickly in the country as he saw +needful. In this manner he went about in that district, and had +300 deadly men-at-arms with him; and then proceeded to Raumarike. +He soon perceived that Christianity was thriving less the farther +he proceeded into the interior of the country. He went forward +everywhere in the same way, converting all the people to the +right faith, and severely punishing all who would not listen to +his word. + + + +73.TREACHERY OF THE UPLAND KINGS. + +Now when the king who at that time ruled in Raumarike heard of +this, he thought it was a very bad affair; for every day came men +to him, both great and small, who told him what was doing. +Therefore this king resolved to go up to Hedemark, and consult +King Hrorek, who was the most eminent for understanding of the +kings who at that time were in the country. Now when these kings +spoke with each other, they agreed to send a message to Gudrod, +the valley-king north in the Gudbrandsdal, and likewise to the +king who was in Hadaland, and bid them to come to Hedemark, to +meet Hrorek and the other kings there. They did not spare their +travelling; for five kings met in Hedemark, at a place called +Ringsaker. Ring, King Hrorek's brother, was the fifth of these +kings. The kings had first a private conference together, in +which he who came from Raumarike first took up the word, and told +of King Olaf's proceedings, and of the disturbance he was causing +both by killing and mutilating people. Some he drove out of the +country, some he deprived of their offices or property if they +spoke anything against him; and, besides, he was travelling over +the country with a great army, not with the number of people +fixed by law for a royal progress in guest-quarters. He added, +that he had fled hither upon account of this disturbance, and +many powerful people with him had fled from their udal properties +in Raumarike. "But although as yet the evil is nearest to us, it +will be but a short time before ye will also be exposed to it; +therefore it is best that we all consider together what +resolution we shall take." When he had ended his speech, Hrorek +was desired to speak; and he said, "Now is the day come that I +foretold when we had had our meeting at Hadaland, and ye were all +so eager to raise Olaf over our heads; namely, that as soon as he +was the supreme master of the country we would find it hard to +hold him by the horns. We have but two things now to do: the one +is, to go all of us to him, and let him do with us as he likes, +which I think is the best thing we can do; or the other is, to +rise against him before he has gone farther through the country. +Although he has 300 or 400 men, that is not too great a force for +us to meet, if we are only all in movement together: but, in +general, there is less success and advantage to be gained when +several of equal strength are joined together, than when one +alone stands at the head of his own force; therefore it is my +advice, that we do not venture to try our luck against Olaf +Haraldson." + +Thereafter each of the kings spoke according to his own mind some +dissuading from going out against King Olaf, others urging it; +and no determination was come to, as each had his own reasons to +produce. + +Then Gudrod, the valley-king, took up the word, and spoke: -- "It +appears wonderful to me, that ye make such a long roundabout in +coming to a resolution; and probably ye are frightened for him. +We are here five kings, and none of less high birth than Olaf. +We gave him the strength to fight with Earl Svein, and with our +forces he has brought the country under his power. But if he +grudges each of us the little kingdom he had before, and +threatens us with tortures, or gives us ill words, then, say I +for myself, that I will withdraw myself from the king's slavery; +and I do not call him a man among you who is afraid to cut him +off, if he come into your hands here up in Hedemark. And this I +can tell you, that we shall never bear our heads in safety while +Olaf is in life." After this encouragement they all agreed to +his determination. + +Then said Hrorek, "With regard to this determination, it appears +to me necessary to make our agreement so strong that no one shall +fail in his promise to the other. Therefore, if ye determine +upon attacking Olaf at a fixed time, when he comes here to +Hedemark, I will not trust much to you if some are north in the +valleys, others up in Hedemark; but if our resolution is to come +to anything, we must remain here assembled together day and +night." + +This the kings agreed to, and kept themselves there all +assembled, ordering a feast to be provided for them at Ringsaker, +and drank there a cup to success; sending out spies to Raumarike, +and when one set came in sending out others, so that day and +night they had intelligence of Olaf's proceedings, and of the +numbers of his men. King Olaf went about in Raumarike in +guest-quarters, and altogether in the way before related; but as +the provision of the guest-quarter was not always sufficient, +upon account of his numerous followers, he laid it upon the +bondes to give additional contributions wherever he found it +necessary to stay. In some places he stayed longer, in others, +shorter than was fixed; and his journey down to the lake Miosen +was shorter than had been fixed on. The kings, after taking +their resolution, sent out message-tokens, and summoned all the +lendermen and powerful bondes from all the districts thereabout; +and when they had assembled the kings had a private meeting with +them, and made their determination known, setting a day for +gathering together and carrying it into effect; and it was +settled among them that each of the kings should have 300 (1) +men. Then they sent away the lendermen to gather the people, and +meet all at the appointed place. The most approved of the +measure; but it happened here, as it usually does, that every one +has some friend even among his enemies. + + +ENDNOTES: +(1) I.e., 360. + + + +74. MUTILATING OF THE UPLAND KINGS. + +Ketil of Ringanes was at this meeting. Now when he came home in +the evening he took his supper, put on his clothes, and went down +with his house-servants to the lake; took a light vessel which he +had, the same that King Olaf had made him a present of, and +launched it on the water. They found in the boat-house +everything ready to their hands; betook themselves to their oars, +and rowed out into the lake. Ketil had forty well-armed men with +him, and came early in the morning to the end of the lake. He +set off immediately with twenty men, leaving the other twenty to +look after the ship. King Olaf was at that time at Eid, in the +upper end of Raumarike. Thither Ketil arrived just as the king +was coming from matins. The king received Ketil kindly. He said +he must speak with the king in all haste; and they had a private +conference together. There Ketil tells the king the resolution +which the kings had taken, and their agreement, which he had come +to the certain knowledge of. When the king learnt this he called +his people together, and sent some out to collect riding-horses +in the country; others he sent down to the lake to take all the +rowing-vessels they could lay hold of, and keep them for his use. +Thereafter he went to the church, had mass sung before him, and +then sat down to table. After his meal he got ready, and +hastened down to the lake, where the vessels were coming to meet +him. He himself went on board the light vessel, and as many men +with him as it could stow, and all the rest of his followers took +such boats as they could get hold of; and when it was getting +late in the evening they set out from the land, in still and calm +weather. He rowed up the water with 400 men, and came with them +to Ringsaker before day dawned; and the watchmen were not aware +of the army before they were come into the very court. Ketil +knew well in what houses the kings slept, and the king had all +these houses surrounded and guarded, so that nobody could get +out; and so they stood till daylight. The kings had not people +enough to make resistance, but were all taken prisoners, and led +before the king. Hrorek was an able but obstinate man, whose +fidelity the king could not trust to if he made peace with him; +therefore he ordered both his eyes to be punched out, and took +him in that condition about with him. He ordered Gudrod's tongue +to be cut out; but Ring and two others he banished from Norway, +under oath never to return. Of the lendermen and bondes who had +actually taken part in the traitorous design, some he drove out +of the country, some he mutilated, and with others he made peace. +Ottar Black tells of this: -- + + "The giver of rings of gold, + The army leader bold, + In vengeance springs + On the Hedemark kings. + Olaf the bold and great, + Repays their foul deceit -- + In full repays + Their treacherous ways. + He drives with steel-clad hand + The small kings from the land, -- + Greater by far + In deed of war. + The king who dwelt most north + Tongueless must wander forth: + All fly away + In great dismay. + King Olaf now rules o'er + What five kings ruled before. + To Eid's old bound + Extends his ground. + No kings in days of yore + E'er won so much before: + That this is so + All Norsemen know." + +King Olaf took possession of the land these five kings had +possessed, and took hostages from the lendermen and bondes in it. +He took money instead of guest-quarters from the country north of +the valley district, and from Hedemark; and then returned to +Raumarike, and so west to Hadaland. This winter (A.D. 1018) his +stepfather Sigurd Syr died; and King Olaf went to Ringerike, +where his mother Asta made a great feast for him. Olaf alone +bore the title of king now in Norway. + + + +75. KING OLAF'S HALF-BROTHERS. + +It is told that when King Olaf was on his visit to his mother +Asta, she brought out her children, and showed them to him. The +king took his brother Guthorm on the one knee, and his brother +Halfdan on the other. The king looked at Guthorm, made a wry +face, and pretended to be angry at them: at which the boys were +afraid. Then Asta brought her youngest son, called Harald, who +was three years old, to him. The king made a wry face at him +also; but he looked the king in the face without regarding it. +The king took the boy by the hair, and plucked it; but the boy +seized the king's whiskers, and gave them a tug. "Then," said +the king, "thou wilt be revengeful, my friend, some day." The +following day the king was walking with his mother about the +farm, and they came to a playground, where Asta's sons, Guthorm +and Halfdan, were amusing themselves. They were building great +houses and barns in their play, and were supposing them full of +cattle and sheep; and close beside them, in a clay pool, Harald +was busy with chips of wood, sailing them, in his sport along the +edge. The king asked him what these were; and he answered, these +were his ships of war. The king laughed, and said, "The time may +come, friend, when thou wilt command ships." + +Then the king called to him Halfdan and Guthorm; and first he +asked Guthorm, "What wouldst thou like best to have?" + +"Corn land," replied he. + +"And how great wouldst thou like thy corn land to be?" + +"I would have the whole ness that goes out into the lake sown +with corn every summer." On that ness there are ten farms. + +The king replies, "There would be a great deal of corn there." +And, turning to Halfdan, he asked, "And what wouldst thou like +best to have?" + +"Cows," he replied. + +"How many wouldst thou like to have?" + +"When they went to the lake to be watered I would have so many, +that they stood as tight round the lake as they could stand." + +"That would be a great housekeeping," said the king; "and therein +ye take after your father." + +Then the king says to Harald, "And what wouldst thou like best to +have?" + +"House-servants." + +"And how many wouldst thou have?" + +"Oh! so many I would like to have as would eat up my brother +Halfdan's cows at a single meal." + +The king laughed, and said to Asta, "Here, mother, thou art +bringing up a king." And more is not related of them on this +occasion. + + + +76. THE DIVISION OF THE COUNTRY. + +In Svithjod it was the old custom, as long as heathenism +prevailed, that the chief sacrifice took place in Goe month at +Upsala. Then sacrifice was offered for peace, and victory to the +king; and thither came people from all parts of Svithjod. All +the Things of the Swedes, also, were held there, and markets, and +meetings for buying, which continued for a week: and after +Christianity was introduced into Svithjod, the Things and fairs +were held there as before. After Christianity had taken root in +Svithjod, and the kings would no longer dwell in Upsala, the +market-time was moved to Candlemas, and it has since continued +so, and it lasts only three days. There is then the Swedish +Thing also, and people from all quarters come there. Svithjod is +divided into many parts. One part is West Gautland, Vermaland, +and the Marks, with what belongs to them; and this part of the +kingdom is so large, that the bishop who is set over it has 1100 +churches under him. The other part is East Gautland, where there +is also a bishop's seat, to which the islands of Gotland and +Eyland belong; and forming all together a still greater +bishopric. In Svithjod itself there is a part of the country +called Sudermanland, where there is also a bishopric. Then comes +Westmanland, or Fiathrundaland, which is also a bishopric. The +third portion of Svithjod proper is called Tiundaland; the fourth +Attandaland; the fifth Sialand, and what belongs to it lies +eastward along the coast. Tiundaland is the best and most +inhabited part of Svithjod, under which the other kingdoms stand. +There Upsala is situated, the seat of the king and archbishop; +and from it Upsala-audr, or the domain of the Swedish kings, +takes its name. Each of these divisions of the country has its +Lag-thing, and its own laws in many parts. Over each is a +lagman, who rules principally in affairs of the bondes: for that +becomes law which he, by his speech, determines them to make law: +and if king, earl, or bishop goes through the country, and holds +a Thing with the bondes, the lagmen reply on account of the +bondes, and they all follow their lagmen; so that even the most +powerful men scarcely dare to come to their Al-thing without +regarding the bondes' and lagmen's law. And in all matters in +which the laws differ from each other, Upsala-law is the +directing law; and the other lagmen are under the lagman who +dwells in Tiundaland. + + + +77. OF THE LAGMAN THORGNY. + +In Tiundaland there was a lagman who was called Thorgny, whose +father was called Thorgny Thorgnyson. His forefathers had for a +long course of years, and during many kings' times, been lagmen +of Tiundaland. At this time Thorgny was old, and had a great +court about him. He was considered one of the wisest men in +Sweden, and was Earl Ragnvald's relation and foster-father. + + + +78. MEETING OF RAGNVALD AND INGEGERD. + +Now we must go back in our story to the time when the men whom +the king's daughter Ingegerd and Hjalte had sent from the east +came to Earl Ragnvald. They relate their errand to the earl and +his wife Ingebjorg, and tell how the king's daughter had oft +spoken to the Swedish king about a peace between him and King +Olaf the Thick, and that she was a great friend of King Olaf; but +that the Swedish king flew into a passion every time she named +Olaf, so that she had no hopes of any peace. The Earl told Bjorn +the news he had received from the east; but Bjorn gave the same +reply, that he would not turn back until he had met the Swedish +king, and said the earl had promised to go with him. Now the +winter was passing fast, and immediately after Yule the earl made +himself ready to travel with sixty men, among whom where the +marshal Bjorn and his companions. The earl proceeded eastward +all the way to Svithjod; but when he came a little way into the +country he sent his men before him to Upsala with a message to +Ingegerd the king's daughter to come out to meet him at +Ullaraker, where she had a large farm. When the king's daughter +got the earl's message she made herself ready immediately to +travel with a large attendance, and Hjalte accompanied her. But +before he took his departure he went to King Olaf, and said, +"Continue always to be the most fortunate of monarchs! Such +splendour as I have seen about thee I have in truth never +witnessed elsewhere, and wheresoever I come it shall not be +concealed. Now, king, may I entreat thy favour and friendship in +time to come?" + +The king replies, "Why art thou in so great a haste, and where +art thou going?" + +Hjalte replies, "I am to ride out to Ullaraker with Ingegerd thy +daughter." + +The king says, "Farewell, then: a man thou art of understanding +and politeness, and well suited to live with people of rank." + +Thereupon Hjalte withdrew. + +The king's daughter Ingegerd rode to her farm in Ullaraker, and +ordered a great feast to be prepared for the earl. When the earl +arrived he was welcomed with gladness, and he remained there +several days. The earl and the king's daughter talked much, and +of many things, but most about the Swedish and Norwegian kings; +and she told the earl that in her opinion there was no hope of +peace between them. + +Then said the earl, "How wouldst thou like it, my cousin, if Olaf +king of Norway were to pay his addresses to thee? It appears to +us that it would contribute most towards a settled peace if there +was relationship established between the kings; but I would not +support such a matter if it were against thy inclination." + +She replies, "My father disposes of my hand; but among all my +other relations thou art he whose advice I would rather follow in +weighty affairs. Dost thou think it would be advisable?" The +earl recommended it to her strongly, and reckoned up many +excellent achievements of King Olaf's. He told her, in +particular, about what had lately been done; that King Olaf in an +hours time one morning had taken five kings prisoners, deprived +them all of their governments, and laid their kingdoms and +properties under his own power. Much they talked about the +business, and in all their conversations they perfectly agreed +with each other. When the earl was ready he took leave, and +proceeded on his way, taking Hjalte with him. + + + +79. RAGNVALD AND THORGNY. + +Earl Ragnvald came towards evening one day to the house of Lagman +Thorgny. It was a great and stately mansion, and many people +stood outside, who received the earl kindly, and took care of the +horses and baggage. The earl went into the room, where there was +a number of people. In the high-seat sat an old man; and never +had Bjorn or his companions seen a man so stout. His beard was +so long that it lay upon his knee, and was spread over his whole +breast; and the man, moreover, was handsome and stately in +appearance. The earl went forward and saluted him. Thorgny +received him joyfully and kindly, and bade him go to the seat he +was accustomed to take. The earl seated himself on the other +side, opposite Thorgny. They remained there some days before the +earl disclosed his errand, and then he asked Thorgny to go with +him into the conversing room. Bjorn and his followers went there +with the earl. Then the earl began, and told how Olaf king of +Norway had sent these men hither to conclude a peaceful +agreement. He showed at great length what injury it was of to +the West Gautland people, that there was hostility between their +country and Norway. He further related that Olaf the king of +Norway had sent ambassadors, who were here present, and to whom +he had promised he would attend them to the Swedish king; but he +added, "The Swedish king takes the matter so grievously, that he +has uttered menaces against those who entertain it. Now so it +is, my foster-father, that I do not trust to myself in this +matter; but am come on a visit to thee to get good counsel and +help from thee in the matter." + +Now when the earl had done speaking Thorgny sat silent for a +while, and then took up the word. "Ye have curious dispositions +who are so ambitious of honour and renown, and yet have no +prudence or counsel in you when you get into any mischief. Why +did you not consider, before you gave your promise to this +adventure, that you had no power to stand against King Olaf? In +my opinion it is not a less honourable condition to be in the +number of bondes and have one's words free, and be able to say +what one will, even if the king be present. But I must go to the +Upsala Thing, and give thee such help that without fear thou +canst speak before the king what thou findest good." + +The earl thanked him for the promise, remained with Thorgny, and +rode with him to the Upsala Thing. There was a great assemblage +of people at the Thing, and King Olaf was there with his court. + + + +80. OF THE UPSALA THING. + +The first day the Thing sat, King Olaf was seated on a stool, and +his court stood in a circle around him. Right opposite to him +sat Earl Ragnvald and Thorgny in the Thing upon one stool, and +before them the earl's court and Thorgny's house-people. Behind +their stool stood the bonde community, all in a circle around +them. Some stood upon hillocks and heights, in order to hear the +better. Now when the king's messages, which are usually handled +in the Things, were produced and settled, the marshal Bjorn rose +beside the earl's stool, and said aloud, "King Olaf sends me here +with the message that he will offer to the Swedish king peace, +and the frontiers that in old times were fixed between Norway and +Svithjod." He spoke so loud that the Swedish king could +distinctly hear him; but at first, when he heard King Olaf's name +spoken, he thought the speaker had some message or business of +his own to execute; but when he heard of peace, and the frontiers +between Norway and Svithjod, he saw from what root it came, and +sprang up, and called out that the man should be silent, for that +such speeches were useless. Thereupon Bjorn sat down; and when +the noise had ceased Earl Ragnvald stood up and made a speech. + +He spoke of Olaf the Thick's message, and proposal of peace to +Olaf the Swedish king; and that all the West Gautland people sent +their entreaty to Olaf that he would make peace with the king of +Norway. He recounted all the evils the West Gautlanders were +suffering under; that they must go without all the things from +Norway which were necessary in their households; and, on the +other hand, were exposed to attack and hostility whenever the +king of Norway gathered an army and made an inroad on them. The +earl added, that Olaf the Norway king had sent men hither with +the intent to obtain Ingegerd the king's daughter in marriage. + +When the earl had done speaking Olaf the Swedish king stood up +and replied, and was altogether against listening to any +proposals of peace, and made many and heavy reproaches against +the earl for his impudence in entering into a peaceful truce with +the thick fellow, and making up a peaceful friendship with him, +and which in truth he considered treason against himself. He +added, that it would be well deserved if Earl Ragnvald were +driven out of the kingdom. The earl had, in his opinion, the +influence of his wife Ingebjorg to thank for what might happen; +and it was the most imprudent fancy he could have fallen upon to +take up with such a wife. The king spoke long and bitterly, +turning his speech always against Olaf the Thick. When he sat +down not a sound was to be heard at first. + + + +81. THORGNY'S SPEECH. + +Then Thorgny stood up; and when he arose all the bondes stood up +who had before been sitting, and rushed together from all parts +to listen to what Lagman Thorgny would say. At first there was a +great din of people and weapons; but when the noise was settled +into silent listening, Thorguy made his speech. "The disposition +of Swedish kings is different now from what it has been formerly. +My grandfather Thorgny could well remember the Upsala king Eirik +Eymundson, and used to say of him that when he was in his best +years he went out every summer on expeditions to different +countries, and conquered for himself Finland, Kirjalaland, +Courland, Esthonia, and the eastern countries all around; and at +the present day the earth-bulwarks, ramparts, and other great +works which he made are to be seen. And, more over, he was not +so proud that he would not listen to people who had anything to +say to him. My father, again, was a long time with King Bjorn, +and was well acquainted with his ways and manners. In Bjorn's +lifetime his kingdom stood in great power, and no kind of want +was felt, and he was gay and sociable with his friends. I also +remember King Eirik the Victorious, and was with him on many a +war-expedition. He enlarged the Swedish dominion, and defended +it manfully; and it was also easy and agreeable to communicate +our opinions to him. But the king we have now got allows no man +to presume to talk with him, unless it be what he desires to +hear. On this alone he applies all his power, while he allows +his scat-lands in other countries to go from him through laziness +and weakness. He wants to have the Norway kingdom laid under +him, which no Swedish king before him ever desired, and therewith +brings war and distress on many a man. Now it is our will, we +bondes, that thou King Olaf make peace with the Norway king, Olaf +the Thick, and marry thy daughter Ingegerd to him. Wilt thou, +however, reconquer the kingdoms in the east countries which thy +relations and forefathers had there, we will all for that purpose +follow thee to the war. But if thou wilt not do as we desire, we +will now attack thee, and put thee to death; for we will no +longer suffer law and peace to be disturbed. So our forefathers +went to work when they drowned five kings in a morass at the +Mula-thing, and they were filled with the same insupportable +pride thou hast shown towards us. Now tell us, in all haste, +what resolution thou wilt take." Then the whole public approved, +with clash of arms and shouts, the lagman's speech. + +The king stands up and says he will let things go according to +the desire of the bondes. "All Swedish kings," he said, "have +done so, and have allowed the bondes to rule in all according to +their will." The murmur among the bondes then came to an end, +and the chiefs, the king, the earl, and Thorgny talked together, +and concluded a truce and reconciliation, on the part of the +Swedish king, according to the terms which the king of Norway had +proposed by his ambassadors; and it was resolved at the Thing +that Ingegerd, the king's daughter, should be married to Olaf +Haraldson. The king left it to the earl to make the contract +feast, and gave him full powers to conclude this marriage affair; +and after this was settled at the Thing, they separated. When +the earl returned homewards, he and the king's daughter Ingegerd +had a meeting, at which they talked between themselves over this +matter. She sent Olaf a long cloak of fine linen richly +embroidered with gold, and with silk points. The earl returned +to Gautland, and Bjorn with him; and after staying with him a +short time, Bjorn and his company returned to Norway. When he +came to King Olaf he told him the result of his errand, and the +king returned him many thanks for his conduct, and said Bjorn had +had great success in bringing his errand to so favourabie a +conclusion against such animosity. + + + +82. OF KING HROREK'S TREACHERY. + +On the approach of spring (A.D. 1018) King Olaf went down to the +coast, had his ships rigged out, summoned troops to him, and +proceeded in spring out from Viken to the Naze, and so north to +Hordaland. He then sent messages to all the lendermen, selected +the most considerable men in each district, and made the most +splendid preparations to meet his bride. The wedding-feast was +to be in autumn, at the Gaut river, on the frontiers of the two +countries. King Olaf had with him the blind king Hrorek. When +his wound was healed, the king gave him two men to serve him, let +him sit in the high-seat by his side, and kept him in meat and +clothes in no respect Norse than he had kept himself before. +Hrorek was taciturn, and answered short and cross when any one +spoke to him. It was his custom to make his footboy, when he +went out in the daytime, lead him away from people, and then to +beat the lad until he ran away. He would then complain to King +Olaf that the lad would not serve him. The king changed his +servants, but it was as before; no servant would hold it out with +King Hrorek. Then the king appointed a man called Svein to wait +upon and serve King Hrorek. He was Hrorek's relation, and had +formerly been in his service. Hrorek continued with his habits +of moroseness, and of solitary walks; but when he and Svein were +alone together, he was merry and talkative. He used to bring up +many things which had happened in former days when he was king. +He alluded, too, to the man who had, in his former days, torn him +from his kingdom and happiness, and made him live on alms. "It +is hardest of all," says he, "that thou and my other relations, +who ought to be men of bravery, are so degenerated that thou wilt +not avenge the shame and disgrace brought upon our race." Such +discourse he often brought out. Svein said, they had too great a +power to deal with, while they themselves had but little means. +Hrorek said, "Why should we live longer as mutilated men with +disgrace? I, a blind man, may conquer them as well as they +conquered me when I was asleep. Come then, let us kill this +thick Olaf. He is not afraid for himself at present. I will lay +the plan, and would not spare my hands if I could use them, but +that I cannot by reason of my blindness; therefore thou must use +the weapons against him, and as soon as Olaf is killed I can see +well enough that his power must come into the hands of his +enemies, and it may well be that I shall be king, and thou shalt +be my earl." So much persuasion he used that Svein at last +agreed to join in the deed. The plan was so laid that when the +king was ready to go to vespers, Svein stood on the threshold +with a drawn dagger under his cloak. Now when the king came out +of the room, it so happened that he walked quicker than Svein +expected; and when he looked the king in the face he grew pale, +and then white as a corpse, and his hand sank down. The king +observed his terror and said, "What is this, Svein? Wilt thou +betray me?" Svein threw down his cloak and dagger, and fell at +the king's feet, saying, "All is in Gods hands and thine, king!" +The king ordered his men to seize Svein, and he was put in irons. +The king ordered Hrorek's seat to be moved to another bench. He +gave Svein his life, and he left the country. The king appointed +a different lodging for Hrorek to sleep in from that in which he +slept himself, and in which many of his court-people slept. He +set two of his court-men, who had been long with him, and whose +fidelity he had proof of, to attend Hrorek day and night; but it +is not said whether they were people of high birth or not. King +Hrorek's mood was very different at different times. Sometimes +he would sit silent for days together, so that no man could get a +word out of him; and sometimes he was so merry and gay, that +people found a joke in every word he said. Sometimes his words +were very bitter. He was sometimes in a mood that he would drink +them all under the benches, and made all his neighbours drunk; +but in general he drank but little. King Olaf gave him plenty of +pocket-money. When he went to his lodgings he would often, +before going to bed, have some stoups of mead brought in, which +he gave to all the men in the house to drink, so that he was much +liked. + + + +83. OF LITTLE FIN. + +There was a man from the Uplands called Fin the Little, and some +said of him that he was of Finnish (1) race. He was a remarkable +little man, but so swift of foot that no horse could overtake +him. He was a particularly well-excercised runner with snow- +shoes, and shooter with the bow. He had long been in the service +of King Hrorek, and often employed in errands of trust. He knew +the roads in all the Upland hills, and was well known to all the +great people. Now when King Hrorek was set under guards on the +journey Fin would often slip in among the men of the guard, and +followed, in general, with the lads and serving-men; but as often +as he could he waited upon Hrorek, and entered into conversation +with him. The king, however, only spoke a word or two with him +at a time, to prevent suspicion. In spring, when they came a +little way beyond Viken, Fin disappeared from the army for some +days, but came back, and stayed with them a while. This happened +often, without anyone observing it particularly; for there were +many such hangers-on with the army. + + +ENDNOTES: +(1) The Laplanders are called Fins In Norway and Sweden. -- L. + + + +84. MURDER OF OLAF'S COURT-MEN. + +King Olaf came to Tunsberg before Easter (A.D. 1018), and +remained there late in spring. Many merchant vessels came to the +town, both from Saxon-land and Denmark, and from Viken, and from +the north parts of the country. There was a great assemblage of +people; and as the times were good, there was many a drinking +meeting. It happened one evening that King Hrorek came rather +late to his lodging; and as he had drunk a great deal, he was +remarkably merry. Little Fin came to him with a stoup of mead +with herbs in it, and very strong. The king made every one in +the house drunk, until they fell asleep each in his berth. Fin +had gone away, and a light was burning in the lodging. Hrorek +waked the men who usually followed him, and told them he wanted +to go out into the yard. They had a lantern with them, for +outside it was pitch dark. Out in the yard there was a large +privy standing upon pillars, and a stair to go up to it. While +Hrorek and his guards were in the yard they heard a man say, "Cut +down that devil;" and presently a crash, as if somebody fell. +Hrorek said, "These fellows must be dead drunk to be fighting +with each other so: run and separate them." They rushed out; but +when they came out upon the steps both of them were killed: the +man who went out the last was the first killed. There were +twelve of Hrorek's men there, and among them Sigurd Hit, who had +been his banner-man, and also little Fin. They drew the dead +bodies up between the houses, took the king with them, ran out to +a boat they had in readiness, and rowed away. Sigvat the skald +slept in King Olaf's lodgings. He got up in the night, and his +footboy with him, and went to the privy. But as they were +returning, on going down the stairs Sigvat's foot slipped, and he +fell on his knee; and when he put out his hands he felt the +stairs wet. "I think," said he, laughing, "the king must have +given many of us tottering legs tonight." When they came into +the house in which light was burning the footboy said, "Have you +hurt yourself that you are all over so bloody?" He replied, "I +am not wounded, but something must have happened here." +Thereupon he wakened Thord Folason, who was standard-bearer, and +his bedfellow. They went out with a light, and soon found the +blood. They traced it, and found the corpses, and knew them. +They saw also a great stump of a tree in which clearly a gash had +been cut, which, as was afterwards known, had been done as a +stratagem to entice those out who had been killed. Sigvat and +Thord spoke together and agreed it was highly necessary to let +the king know of this without delay. They immediately sent a lad +to the lodging where Hrorek had been. All the men in it were +asleep; but the king was gone. He wakened the men who were in +the house, and told them what had happened. The men arose, and +ran out to the yard where the bodies were; but, however needful +it appeared to be that the king should know it, nobody dared to +waken him. + +Then said Sigvat to Thord, "What wilt thou rather do, comrade, +waken the king, or tell him the tidings?" + +Thord replies, "I do not dare to waken him, and I would rather +tell him the news." + +Then said Sigvat, "There is minch of the night still to pass, and +before morning Hrorek may get himself concealed in such a way +that it may be difficult to find him; but as yet he cannot be +very far off, for the bodies are still warm. We must never let +the disgrace rest upon us of concealing this treason from the +king. Go thou, up to the lodging, and wait for me there." + +Sigvat then went to the church, and told the bell-ringer to toll +for the souls of the king's court-men, naming the men who were +killed. The-bell-ringer did as he was told. The king awoke at +the ringing, sat up in his bed, and asked if it was already the +hours of matins. + +Thord replies, "It is worse than that, for there has occurred a +very important affair. Hrorek is fled, and two of the court-men +are killed." + +The king asked how this had taken place, and Thord told him all +he knew. The king got up immediately, ordered to sound the call +for a meeting of the court, and when the people were assembled he +named men to go out to every quarter from the town, by sea and +land, to search for Hrorek. Thorer Lange took a boat, and set +off with thirty men; and when day dawned they saw two small boats +before them in the channel, and when they saw each other both +parties rowed as hard as they could. King Hrorek was there with +thirty men. When they came quite close to each other Hrorek and +his men turned towards the land, and all sprang on shore except +the king, who sat on the aft seat. He bade them farewell, and +wished they might meet each other again in better luck. At the +same moment Thorer with his company rowed to the land. Fin the +Little shot off an arrow, which hit Thorer in the middle of the +body, and was his death; and Sigurd Hit, with his men, ran up +into the forest. Thorer's men took his body, and transported it, +together with Hrorek, to Tunsberg. King Olaf undertook himself +thereafter to look after King Hrorek, made him be carefully +guarded, and took good care of his treason, for which reason he +had a watch over him night and day. King Hrorek thereafter was +very gay, and nobody could observe but that he was in every way +well satisfied. + + + +85. OF HROREK'S ASSAULT. + +It happened on Ascension-day that King Olaf went to high mass, +and the bishop went in procession around the church, and +conducted the king; and when they came back to the church the +bishop led the king to his seat on the north side of the choir. +There Hrorek sat next to the king, and concealed his countenance +in his upper cloak. When Olaf had seated himself Hrorek laid his +hand on the king's shoulder, and felt it. + +"Thou hast fine clothes on, cousin, today," said he. + +King Olaf replies, "It is a festival today, in remembrance that +Jesus Christ ascended to heaven from earth." + +King Hrorek says, "I understand nothing about it so as to hold in +my mind what ye tell me about Christ. Much of what ye tell me +appears to me incredible, although many wonderful things may have +come to pass in old times." + +When the mass was finished Olaf stood up, held his hands up over +his head, and bowed down before the altar, so that his cloak hung +down behind his shoulders. Then King Hrorek started up hastily +and sharply, and struck at the king with a long knife of the kind +called ryting; but the blow was received in the upper cloak at +the shoulder, because the king was bending himself forwards. The +clothes were much cut, but the king was not wounded. When the +king perceived the attack he sprang upon the floor; and Hrorek +struck at him again with the knife, but did not reach him, and +said, "Art thou flying, Olaf, from me, a blind men?" The king +ordered his men to seize him and lead him out of the church, +which was done. After this attempt many hastened to King Olaf, +and advised that King Hrorek should be killed. "It is," said +they, "tempting your luck in the highest degree, king, to keep +him with you, and protect him, whatever mischief he may +undertake; for night and day he thinks upon taking your life. +And if you send him away, we know no one who can watch him so +that he will not in all probability escape; and if once he gets +loose he will assemble a great multitude, and do much evil." + +The king replies, "You say truly that many a one has suffered +death for less offence than Hrorek's; but willingly I would not +darken the victory I gained over the Upland kings, when in one +morning hour I took five kings prisoners, and got all their +kingdoms: but yet, as they were my relations, I should not be +their murderer but upon need. As yet I can scarcely see whether +Hrorek puts me in the necessity of killing him or not." + +It was to feel if King Olaf had armour on or not that Hrorek had +laid his hand on the king's shoulder. + + + +86. KING HROREK'S JOURNEY TO ICELAND. + +There was an Iceland man, by name Thorarin Nefiulfson, who had +his relations in the north of the country. He was not of high +birth, but particularly prudent, eloquent, and agreeable in +conversation with people of distinction. He was also a far- +travelled man, who had been long in foreign parts. Thorarin was +a remarkably ugly man, principally because he had very ungainly +limbs. He had great ugly hands, and his feet were still uglier. +Thorarin was in Tunsberg when this event happened which has just +been related, and he was known to King Olaf by their having had +conversations together. Thorarin was just then done with rigging +out a merchant vessel which he owned, and with which he intended +to go to Iceland in summer. King Olaf had Thorarin with him as a +guest for some days, and conversed much with him; and Thorarin +even slept in the king's lodgings. One morning early the king +awoke while the others were still sleeping. The sun had newly +risen in the sky, and there was much light within. The king saw +that Thorarin had stretched out one of his feet from under the +bed-clothes, and he looked at the foot a while. In the meantime +the others in the lodging awoke; and the king said to Thorarin, +"I have been awake for a while, and have seen a sight which was +worth seeing; and that is a man's foot so ugly that I do not +think an uglier can be found in this merchant town." Thereupon +he told the others to look at it, and see if it was not so; and +all agreed with the king. When Thorarin observed what they were +talking about, he said, "There are few things for which you +cannot find a match, and that may be the case here." + +The king says, "I would rather say that such another ugly foot +cannot be found in the town, and I would lay any wager upon it." + +Then said Thorarin, "I am willing to bet that I shall find an +uglier foot still in the town." + +The king -- "Then he who wins shall have the right to get any +demand from the other he chooses to make." + +"Be it so," said Thorarin. Thereupon he stretches out his other +foot from under the bed-clothes, and it was in no way handsomer +than the other, and moreover, wanted the little toe. "There," +said Thorarin, "see now, king, my other foot, which is so much +uglier; and, besides, has no little toe. Now I have won." + +The king replies, "That other foot was so much uglier than this +one by having five ugly toes upon it, and this has only four; and +now I have won the choice of asking something from thee." + +"The sovereign's decision must be right," says Thorarin; "but +what does the king require of me?" + +"To take Hrorek," said the king, "to Greenland, and deliver him +to Leif Eirikson." + +Thorarin replies, "I have never been in Greenland." + +The king -- "Thou, who art a far-travelled man, wilt now have an +opportunity of seeing Greenland, if thou hast never been there +before." + +At first Thorarin did not say much about it; but as the king +insisted on his wish he did not entirely decline, but said, "I +will let you hear, king, what my desire would have been had I +gained the wager. It would have been to be received into your +body of court-men; and if you will grant me that, I will be the +more zealous now in fulfilling your pleasure." The king gave his +consent, and Thorarin was made one of the court-men. Then +Thorarin rigged out his vessel, and when he was ready he took on +board King Hrorek. When Thorarin took leave of King Olaf, he +said, "Should it now turn out, king, as is not improbable, and +often happens, that we cannot effect the voyage to Greenland, but +must run for Iceland or other countries, how shall I get rid of +this king in a way that will be satisfactory to you?" + +The king -- "If thou comest to Iceland, deliver him into the +hands of Gudmund Eyolfson, or of Skapte, the lagman, or of some +other chief who will receive my tokens and message of friendship. +But if thou comest to other countries nearer to this, do so with +him that thou canst know with certainty that King Hrorek never +again shall appear in Norway; but do so only when thou seest no +other way of doing whatsoever." + +When Thorarin was ready for sea, and got a wind, he sailed +outside of all the rocks and islands, and when he was to the +north of the Naze set right out into the ocean. He did not +immediately get a good wind, but he avoided coming near the land. +He sailed until he made land which he knew, in the south part of +Iceland, and sailed west around the land out into the Greenland +ocean. + +There he encountered heavy storms, and drove long about upon the +ocean; but when summer was coming to an end he landed again in +Iceland in Breidafjord. Thorgils Arason (1) was the first man of +any consequence who came to him. Thorarin brings him the king's +salutation, message, and tokens, with which was the desire about +King Hrorek's reception. Thorgils received these in a friendly +way, and invited King Hrorek to his house, where he stayed all +winter. But he did not like being there, and begged that +Thorgils would let him go to Gudmund; saying he had heard some +time or other that there in Gudmund's house, was the most +sumptuous way of living in Iceland, and that it was intended he +should be in Gudmund's hands. Thorgils let him have his desire, +and conducted him with some men to Gudmund at Modruveller. +Gudmund received Hrorek kindly on account of the king's message, +and he stayed there the next winter. He did not like being there +either; and then Gudmund gave him a habitation upon a small farm +called Kalfskin, where there were but few neighbours. There +Hrorek passed the third winter, and said that since he had laid +down his kingdom he thought himself most comfortably situated +here; for here he was most respected by all. The summer after +Hrorek fell sick, and died; and it is said he is the only king +whose bones rest in Iceland. Thorarin Nefiulfson was afterwards +for a long time upon voyages; but sometimes he was with King +Olaf. + + +ENDNOTES: +(1) Thorgils was the son of Are Marson, who visited America + (Vindland). Thorgils, who was still alive in the year 1024, + was noted for his kindness toward all persecuted persons. + + + +87. BATTLE IN ULFREKS-FJORD. + +The summer that Thorarin went with Hrorek to Iceland, Hjalte +Skeggjason went also to Iceland, and King Olaf gave him many +friendly gifts with him when they parted. The same summer Eyvind +Urarhorn went on an expedition to the west sea, and came in +autumn to Ireland, to the Irish king Konofogor (1). In autumn +Einar earl of Orkney and this Irish king met in Ulfreks-fjord, +and there was a great battle, in which Konofogor gained the +victory, having many more people. The earl fled with a single +ship and came back about autumn to Orkney, after losing most of +his men and all the booty they had made. The earl was much +displeased with his expedition, and threw the blame upon the +Northmen, who had been in the battle on the side of the Irish +king, for making him lose the victory. + + +ENDNOTES: +(1) Konofogor's Irish name was Connor. + + + +88. OLAF PREPARES FOR HIS BRIDAL JOURNEY. + +Now we begin again our story where we let it slip -- at King +Olaf's travelling to his bridal, to receive his betrothed +Ingegerd the king's daughter. The king had a great body of men +with him, and so chosen a body that all the great people he could +lay hold of followed him; and every man of consequence had a +chosen band of men with him distinguished by birth or other +qualifications. The whole were well appointed, and equipped in +ships, weapons, and clothes. They steered the fleet eastwards to +Konungahella; but when they arrived there they heard nothing of +the Swedish king and none of his men had come there. King Olaf +remained a long time in summer (A.D. 1018) at Konungahella, and +endeavored carefully to make out what people said of the Swedish +king's movements, or what were his designs; but no person could +tell him anything for certain about it. Then he sent men up to +Gautland to Earl Ragnvald, to ask him if he knew how it came to +pass that the Swedish king did not come to the meeting agreed on. +The earl replies, that he did not know. "But as soon," said he, +"as I hear, I shall send some of my men to King Olaf, to let him +know if there be any other cause for the delay than the multitude +of affairs; as it often happens that the Swedish king's movements +are delayed by this more than he could have expected." + + + +89. OF THE SWEDISH KING'S CHILDREN. + +This Swedish king, Olaf Eirikson, had first a concubine who was +called Edla, a daughter of an earl of Vindland, who had been +captured in war, and therefore was called the king's slave-girl. +Their children were Emund, Astrid, Holmfrid.... They had, +besides, a son, who was born the day before St. Jacob's-day. +When the boy was to be christened the bishop called him Jacob, +which the Swedes did not like, as there never had been a Swedish +king called Jacob. All King Olaf's children were handsome in +appearance, and clever from childhood. The queen was proud, and +did not behave well towards her step-children; therefore the king +sent his son Emund to Vindland, to be fostered by his mother's +relations, where he for a long time neglected his Christianity. +The king's daughter, Astrid, was brought up in West Gautland, in +the house of a worthy man called Egil. She was a very lovely +girl: her words came well into her conversation; she was merry, +but modest, and very generous. When she was grown up she was +often in her father's house, and every man thought well of her. +King Olaf was haughty and harsh in his speech. He took very ill +the uproar and clamour the country people had raised against him +at the Upsala Thing, as they had threatened him with violence, +for which he laid the chief blame on Earl Ragnvald. He made no +preparation for the bridal, according to the agreement to marry +his daughter Ingegerd to Olaf the king of Norway, and to meet him +on the borders for that purpose. As the summer advanced many of +his men were anxious to know what the kings intentions were; +whether to keep to the agreement with King Olaf, or break his +word, and with it the peace of the country. But no one was so +bold as to ask the king, although they complained of it to +Ingegerd, and besought her to find out what the king intended. +She replied "I have no inclination to speak to the king again +about the matters between him and King Olaf; for he answered me +ill enough once before when I brought forward Olaf's name." In +the meantime Ingegerd, the king's daughter, took it to heart, +became melancholy and sorrowful and yet very curious to know what +the king intended. She had much suspicion that he would not keep +his word and promise to King Olaf; for he appeared quite enraged +whenever Olaf the Thick's name was in any way mentioned. + + + +90. OF THE SWEDISH KING OLAF'S HUNTING. + +One morning early the king rode out with his dogs and falcons, +and his men around him. When they let slip the falcons the +king's falcon killed two black-cocks in one flight, and three in +another. The dogs ran and brought the birds when they had fallen +to the ground. The king ran after them, took the game from them +himself, was delighted with his sport, and said, "It will be long +before the most of you have such success." They agreed in this; +adding, that in their opinion no king had such luck in hunting as +he had. Then the king rode home with his followers in high +spirits. Ingegerd, the king's daughter, was just going out of +her lodging when the king came riding into the yard, and she +turned round and saluted him. He saluted her in return, +laughing; produced the birds, and told her the success of his +chase. + +"Dost thou know of any king," said he, "who made so great a +capture in so short a time?" + +"It is indeed," replied she, "a good morning's hunting, to have +got five black-cocks; but it was a still better when, in one +morning, the king of Norway, Olaf, took five kings, and subdued +all their kingdoms." + +When the king heard this he sprang from his horse, turned to +Ingegerd, and said, "Thou shalt know, Ingegerd, that however +great thy love may be for this man, thou shalt never get him, nor +he get thee. I will marry thee to some chief with whom I can be +in friendship; but never can I be a friend of the man who has +robbed me of my kingdom, and done me great mischief by marauding +and killing through the land." With that their conversation +broke off, and each went away. + + + +91. OLAF THE NORWAY KING'S COUNSELS. + +Ingegerd, the king's daughter, had now full certainty of King +Olaf's intention, and immediately sent men to West Gautland to +Earl Ragnvald, and let him know how it stood with the Swedish +king, and that the agreement made with the king of Norway was +broken; and advising the earl and people of West Gautland to be +upon their guard, as no peace from the people of Norway was to be +expected. When the earl got this news he sent a message through +all his kingdom, and told the people to be cautious, and prepared +in case of war or pillage from the side of Norway. He also sent +men to King Olaf the Thick, and let him know the message he had +received, and likewise that he wished for himself to hold peace +and friendship with King Olaf; and therefore he begged him not to +pillage in his kingdom. When this message came to King Olaf it +made him both angry and sorry; and for some days nobody got a +word from him. He then held a House-Thing with his men, and in +it Bjorn arose, and first took the word. He began his speech by +telling that he had proceeded eastward last winter to establish a +peace, and he told how kindly Earl Ragnvald had received him; +and, on the other hand, how crossly and heavily the Swedish king +had accepted the proposal. "And the agreement," said he, "which +was made, was made more by means of the strength of the people, +the power of Thorgny, and the aid of the earl, than by the king's +good-will. Now, on these grounds, we know for certain that it is +the king who has caused the breach of the agreement; therefore we +ought by no means to make the earl suffer, for it is proved that +he is King Olaf's firm friend." The king wished now to hear from +the chiefs and other leaders of troops what course he should +adopt. "Whether shall we go against Gautland, and maraud there +with such men as we have got; or is there any other course that +appears to you more advisable?" He spoke both long and well. + +Thereafter many powerful men spoke, and all were at last agreed +in dissuading from hostilities. They argued thus: -- "Although +we are a numerous body of men who are assembled here, yet they +are all only people of weight and power; but, for a war +expedition, young men who are in quest of property and +consideration are more suitable. It is also the custom of people +of weight and power, when they go into battle or strife, to have +many people with them whom they can send out before them for +their defence; for the men do not fight worse who have little +property, but even better than those who are brought up in the +midst of wealth." After these considerations the king resolved +to dismiss this army from any expedition, and to give every man +leave to return home; but proclaimed, at the same time, that next +summer the people over the whole country would be called out in a +general levy, to march immediately against the Swedish king, and +punish him for his want of faith. All thought well of this plan. +Then the king returned northwards to Viken, and took his abode at +Sarpsborg in autumn, and ordered all things necessary for winter +provision to be collected there; and he remained there all winter +(A.D. 1019) with a great retinue. + + + +92. SIGVAT THE SKALD'S JOURNEY EASTWARDS. + +People talked variously about Earl Ragnvald; some said he was +King Olaf's sincere friend; others did not think this likely, and +thought it stood in his power to warn the Swedish king to keep +his word, and the agreement concluded on between him and King +Olaf. Sigvat the poet often expressed himself in conversation as +Earl Ragnvald's great friend, and often spoke of him to King +Olaf; and he offered to the king to travel to Earl Ragnvald's and +spy after the Swedish kings doings, and to attempt, if possible, +to get the settlement of the agreement. The king thought well of +this plan; for he oft, and with pleasure, spoke to his +confidential friends about Ingegerd, the king's daughter. Early +in winter (A.D. 1019) Sigvat the skald, with two companions, left +Sarpsborg, and proceeded eastwards over the moors to Gautland. +Before Sigvat and King Olaf parted he composed these verses: -- + + "Sit happy in thy hall, O king! + Till I come back, and good news bring: + The skald will bid thee now farewell, + Till he brings news well worth to tell. + He wishes to the helmed hero + Health, and long life, and a tull flow + Of honour, riches. and success -- + And, parting, ends his song with this. + The farewell word is spoken now __ + The word that to the heart lies nearest; + And yet, O king! before I go, + One word on what I hold the dearest, + I fain would say, "O! may God save + To thee the bravest of the brave, + The land, which is thy right by birth!" + This is my dearest with on earth." + +Then they proceeded eastwards towards Eid, and had difficulty in +crossing the river in a little cobble; but they escaped, though +with danger: and Sigvat sang: -- + + "On shore the crazy boat I drew, + Wet to the skin, and frightened too; + For truly there was danger then; + The mocking hill elves laughed again. + To see us in this cobble sailing, + And all our sea-skill unavailing. + But better did it end, you see, + Than any of us could foresee." + +Then they went through the Eid forest, and Sigvat sang: -- + + "A hundred miles through Eid's old wood, + And devil an alehouse, bad or good, -- + A hundred miles, and tree and sky + Were all that met the weary eye. + With many a grumble, many a groan. + A hundred miles we trudged right on; + And every king's man of us bore + On each foot-sole a bleeding sore." + +They came then through Gautland, and in the evening reached a +farm-house called Hof. The door was bolted so that they could +not come in; and the servants told them it was a fast-day, and +they could not get admittance. Sigvat sang: -- + + "Now up to Hof in haste I hie, + And round the house and yard I pry. + Doors are fast locked -- but yet within, + Methinks, I hear some stir and din. + I peep, with nose close to the ground. + Below the door, but small cheer found. + My trouble with few words was paid -- + "`Tis holy time,' the house-folkd said. + Heathens! to shove me thus away! + I' the foul fiend's claws may you all lay." + +Then they came to another farm, where the good-wife was standing +at the door. and told them not to come in, for they were busy +with a sacrifice to the elves. Sigvat sang of it thus: -- + + "`My poor lad, enter not, I pray!' + Thus to me did the old wife say; + `For all of us are heathens here, + And I for Odin's wrath do fear.' + The ugly witch drove me away, + Like scared wolf sneaking from his prey. + When she told me that there within + Was sacrifice to foul Odin." + +Another evening, they came to three bondes, all of them of the +name of Olver, who drove them away. Sigvat sang: -- + + "Three of one name, + To their great shame, + The traveller late + Drove from their gate! + Travellers may come + From our viking-home, + Unbidden guests + At these Olvers' feasts." + +They went on farther that evening, and came to a fourth bonde, +who was considered the most hospitable man in the country; but he +drove them away also. Then Sigvat sang: -- + + "Then on I went to seek night's rest + From one who was said to be the best, + The kindest host in the land around, + And there I hoped to have quarters found. + But, faith,'twas little use to try; + For not so much as raise an eye + Would this huge wielder of the spade: + If he's the hest, it must he said + Bad is the best, and the skald's praise + Cannot be given to churls like these. + I almost wished that Asta's son + In the Eid forest had been one + When we, his men, were even put + Lodging to crave in a heathen's hut. + I knew not where the earl to find; + Four times driven off by men unkind, + I wandered now the whole night o'er, + Driven like a dog from door to door." + +Now when they came to Earl Ragnvald's the earl said they must +have had a severe journey. Then Sigvat sang: -- + + "The message-bearers of the king + From Norway came his words to bring; + And truly for their master they + Hard work have done before to-day. + We did not loiter on the road, + But on we pushed for thy abode: + Thy folk, in sooth, were not so kind + That we cared much to lag hehind. + But Eid to rest safe we found, + From robbers free to the eastern bound: + This praise to thee, great earl, is due -- + The skald says only what is true." + +Earl Ragnvald gave Sigvat a gold arm-ring, and a woman said "he +had not made the journey with his black eyes for nothing." +Sigvat sang: -- + + "My coal-black eyes + Dost thou despise? + They have lighted me + Across the sea + To gain this golden prize: + They have lighted me, + Thy eyes to see, + O'er Iceland's main, + O'er hill and plain: + Where Nanna's lad would fear to be + They have lighted me." + +Sigvat was long entertained kindly and well in the house of Earl +Ragnvald. The earl heard by letters, sent by Ingegerd the king's +daughter, that ambassadors from King Jarisleif were come from +Russia to King Olaf of Svithjod to ask his daughter Ingegerd in +marriage, and that King Olaf had given them hopes that he would +agree to it. About the same time King Olaf's daughter Astrid +came to Earl Ragnvald's court, and a great feast was made for +her. Sigvat soon became acquainted by conversation with the +king's daughter, and she knew him by name and family, for Ottar +the skald, Sigvat's sister's son, had long intimate acquaintance +with King Olaf, the Swedish king. Among other things talked of, +Earl Ragnvald asked Sigvat if the king of Norway would not marry +the king's daughter Astrid. "If he would do that," said he, "I +think we need not ask the Swedish king for his consent." +Astrid, the kings daughter, said exactly the same. Soon after +Sigvat returns home, and comes to King Olaf at Sarpsborg a little +before Yule. + +When Sigvat came home to King Olaf he went into the hall, and, +looking around on the walls, he sang: -- + + "When our men their arms are taking + The raven's wings with greed are shaking; + When they come back to drink in hall + Brave spoil they bring to deck the wall -- + Shield, helms, and panzers (1), all in row, + Stripped in the field from lifeless fow. + In truth no royal nail comes near + Thy splendid hall in precious gear." + +Afterwards Sigvat told of his journey, and sang these verses: -- + + "The king's court-guards desire to hear + About our journey and our cheer, + Our ships in autumn reach the sound, + But long the way to Swedish ground. + With joyless weather, wind and raind, + And pinching cold, and feet in pain -- + With sleep, fatigue, and want oppressed, + No songs had we -- we scarce had rest." + +And when he came into conversation with the king he sang: -- + + "When first I met the earl I told + How our king loved a friend so bold; + How in his heart he loved a man + With hand to do, and head to plan. + Thou generous king! with zeal and care + I sought to advance thy great affair; + For messengers from Russian land + Had come to ask Ingegerd's hand. + The earl, thy friend, bids thee, who art + So mild and generous of heart, + His servants all who here may come + To cherish in thy royal home; + And thine who may come to the east + In Ragnvald's hall shall find a feast -- + In Ragnvald's house shall find a home -- + At Ragnvald's court be still welcome. + When first I came the people's mind + Incensed by Eirik's son I find; + And he refused the wish to meet, + Alleging treachery and deceit. + But I explained how it was here, + For earl and king, advantage clear + With thee to hold the strictest peace, + And make all force and foray cease. + The earl is wise, and understands + The need of peace for both the lands; + And he entreats thee not to break + The present peace for vengeance's sake!" + +He immediately tells King Olaf the news he had heard; and at +first the king was much cast down when he heard of King +Jarisleif's suit, and he said he expected nothing but evil from +King Olaf; but wished he might be able to return it in such a way +as Olaf should remember. A while afterwards the king asks Sigvat +about various news from Gautland. Sigvat spoke a great deal +about Astrid, the kings daughter; how beautiful she was, how +agreeable in her conversation; and that all declared she was in +no respect behind her sister Ingegerd. The king listened with +pleasure to this. Then Sigvat told him the conversation he and +Astrid had had between themselves, and the king was delighted at +the idea. "The Swedish king," said he, "will scarcely think that +I will dare to marry a daughter of his without his consent." But +this speech of his was not known generally. King Olaf and Sigvat +the skald often spoke about it. The king inquired particularly +of Sigvat what he knew about Earl Ragnvald, and "if he be truly +our friend," said the king. Sigvat said that the earl was King +Olaf's best friend, and sang these verses: -- + + "The mighty Olaf should not cease + With him to hold good terms and peace; + For this good earl unwearied shows + He is thy friend where all are foes. + Of all who dwell by the East Sea + So friendly no man is as he: + At all their Things he takes thy part, + And is thy firm friend, hand and heart." + + +ENDNOTES: +(1) The Pantzer -- a complete suit of plate-armour. + + + +93. RAGNVALD AND ASTRA'S JOURNEY. + +After Yule (A.D. 1019), Thord Skotakol, a sister's son of Sigvat, +attended by one of Sigvat's footboys, who had been with Sigvat +the autumn before in Gautland, went quite secretly from the +court, and proceeded to Gautland. When they came to Earl +Ragnvald's court, they produced the tokens which Olaf himself had +sent to the earl, that he might place confidence in Thord. +Without delay the earl made himself ready for a journey, as did +Astrid, the king's daughter; and the earl took with him 120 men, +who were chosen both from among his courtmen and the sons of +great bondes, and who were carefully equipped in all things, +clothes, weapons, and horses. Then they rode northwards to +Sarpsborg, and came there at Candlemas. + + + +94. OF KING OLAF'S MARRIAGE. + +King Olaf had put all things in order in the best style. There +were all sorts of liquors of the best that could be got, and all +other preparations of the same quality. Many people of +consequence were summoned in from their residences. When the +earl arrived with his retinue the king received him particularly +well; and the earl was shown to a large, good, and remarkably +well-furnished house for his lodging; and serving-men and others +were appointed to wait on him; and nothing was wanting, in any +respect, that could grace a feast. Now when the entertainment +had lasted some days, the king, the earl, and Astrid had a +conference together; and the result of it was, that Earl Ragnvald +contracted Astrid, daughter of the Swedish king Olaf, to Olaf +king of Norway, with the same dowry which had before been settled +that her sister Ingegerd should have from home. King Olaf, on +his part, should give Astrid the same bride-gift that had been +intended for her sister Ingegerd. Thereupon an eke was made to +the feast, and King Olaf and Queen Astrid's wedding was drunk in +great festivity. Earl Ragnvald then returned to Gautland, and +the king gave the earl many great and good gifts at parting; and +they parted the dearest of friends, which they continued to be +while they lived. + + + +95. THE AGREEMENT BROKEN BY OLAF. + +The spring (A.D. 1019) thereafter came ambassadors from King +Jarisleif in Novgorod to Svithjod, to treat more particularly +about the promise given by King Olaf the preceding summer to +marry his daughter Ingegerd to King Jarisleif. King Olaf tallied +about the business with Ingegerd, and told her it was his +pleasure that she should marry King Jarisleif. She replied. "If +I marry King Jarisleif, I must have as my bride-gift the town and +earldom of Ladoga." The Russian ambassadors agreed to this, on +the part of their sovereign. Then said Ingegerd, "If I go east +to Russia, I must choose the man in Svithjod whom I think most +suitable to accompany me; and I must stipulate that he shall not +have any less title, or in any respect less dignity, privilege, +and consideration there, than he has, here." This the king and +the ambassadors agreed to, and gave their hands upon it in +confirmation of the condition. + +"And who," asked the king, "is the man thou wilt take with thee +as thy attendant?" + +"That man," she replied, "is my relation Earl Ragnvald." + +The king replies, "I have resolved to reward Earl Ragnvald in a +different manner for his treason against his master in going to +Norway with my daughter, and giving her as a concubine to that +fellow, who he knew was my greatest enemy. I shall hang him up +this summer." + +Then Ingegerd begged her father to be true to the promise he had +made her, and had confirmed by giving his hand upon it. By her +entreaties it was at last agreed that the king should promise to +let Earl Ragnvald go in peace from Svithjod, but that he should +never again appear in the king's presence, or come back to +Svithjod while Olaf reigned. Ingegerd then sent messengers to +the earl to bring him these tidings, and to appoint a place of +meeting. The earl immediately prepared for his journey; rode up +to East Gautland; procured there a vessel, and, with his retinue, +joined Ingegerd, and they proceeded together eastward to Russia. +There Ingegerd was married to King Jarisleif; and their children +were Valdemar, Vissivald, and Holte the Bold. Queen Ingegerd +gave Earl Ragnvald the town of Ladoga, and earldom belonging to +it. Earl Ragnvald was there a long time, and was a celebrated +man. His sons and Ingebjorg's were Earl Ulf and Earl Eilif. + + + +96. HISTORY OF THE LAGMAN EMUND. + +There was a man called Emund of Skara, who was lagman of west +Gautland, and was a man of great understanding and eloquence, and +of high birth, great connection, and very wealthy; but was +considered deceitful, and not to be trusted. He was the most +powerful man in West Gautland after the earl was gone. The same +spring (A.D. 1019) that Earl Ragnvald left Gautland the Gautland +people held a Thing among themselves, and often expressed their +anxiety to each other about what the Swedish king might do. They +heard he was incensed because they had rather held in friendship +with the king of Norway than striven against him; and he was also +enraged against those who had attended his daughter Astrid to +Norway. Some proposed to seek help and support from the king of +Norway, and to offer him their services; others dissuaded from +this measure, as West Gautland had no strength to oppose to the +Swedes. "And the king of Norway," said they, "is far from us, +the chief strength of his country very distant; and therefore let +us first send men to the Swedish king to attempt to come to some +reconciliation with him. If that fail, we can still turn to the +king of Norway." Then the bondes asked Emund to undertake this +mission, to which he agreed; and he proceeded with thirty men to +East Gautland, where there were many of his relations and +friends, who received him hospitably. He conversed there with +the most prudent men about this difficult business; and they were +all unanimous on one point, -- that the king's treatment of them +was against law and reason. From thence Emund went into +Svithjod, and conversed with many men of consequence, who all +expressed themselves in the same way. Emund continued his +journey thus, until one day, towards evening, he arrived at +Upsala, where he and his retinue took a good lodging, and stayed +there all night. The next day Emund waited upon the king, who +was just then sitting in the Thing surrounded by many people. +Emund went before him, bent his knee, and saluted him. The king +looked at him, saluted him, and asked him what news he brought. + +Emund replies, "There is little news among us Gautlanders; but it +appears to us a piece of remarkable news that the proud, stupid +Atte, in Vermaland, whom we look upon as a great sportsman, went +up to the forest in winter with his snow-shoes and his bow. +After he had got as many furs in the mountains as filled his +hand-sledge so full that he could scarcely drag it, he returned +home from the woods. But on the way he saw a squirrel in the +trees, and shot at it, but did not hit; at which he was so angry, +that he left the sledge to run after the squirrel: but still the +squirrel sprang where the wood was thickest, sometimes among the +roots of the trees, sometimes in the branches, sometimes among +the arms that stretch from tree to tree. When Atte shot at it +the arrows flew too high or too low, and the squirrel never +jumped so that Atte could get a fair aim at him. He was so eager +upon this chase that he ran the whole day after the squirrel, and +yet could not get hold of it. It was now getting dark; so he +threw himself down upon the snow, as he was wont, and lay there +all night in a heavy snow-storm. Next day Atte got up to look +after his sledge, but never did he find it again; and so he +returned home. And this is the only news, king, I have to tell." + +The king says, "This is news of but little importance, if it be +all thou hast to tell." + +Ernund replies, "Lately something happened which may well be +called news. Gaute Tofason went with five warships out of the +Gaut river, and when he was lying at the Eikrey Isles there came +five large Danish merchant-ships there. Gaute and his men +immediately took four of the great vessels, and made a great +booty without the loss of a man: but the fifth vessel slipped out +to sea, and sailed away. Gaute gave chase with one ship, and at +first came nearer to them; but as the wind increased, the Danes +got away. Then Gaute wanted to turn back; but a storm came on so +that he lost his ship at Hlesey, with all the goods, and the +greater part of his crew. In the meantime his people were +waiting for him at the Eikrey Isles: but the Danes came over in +fifteen merchant-ships, killed them all, and took all the booty +they had made. So but little luck had they with their greed of +plunder." + +The king replied. "That is great news, and worth being told; but +what now is thy errand here?" + +Emund replies, "I travel, sire, to obtain your judgment in a +difficult case, in which our law and the Upsala law do not +agree." + +The king asks, "What is thy appeal case?" + +Emund replies, "There were two noble-born men of equal birth, but +unequal in property and disposition. They quarrelled about some +land, and did each other much damage; but most was done to him +who was the more powerful of the two. This quarrel, however, was +settled, and judged of at a General Thing; and the judgment was, +that the most powerful should pay a compensation. But at the +first payment, instead of paying a goose, he paid a gosling; for +an old swine he paid a sucking pig; and for a mark of stamped +gold only a half- mark, and for the other half-mark nothing but +clay and dirt; and, moreover, threatened, in the most violent +way, the people whom he forced to receive such goods in payment. +Now, sire, what is your judgment?" + +The king replies, "He shall pay the full equivalent whom the +judgment ordered to do so, and that faithfully; and further, +threefold to his king: and if payment be not made within a year +and a day, he shall be cut off from all his property, his goods +confiscated, and half go the king's house, and half to the other +party." + +Emund took witnesses to this judgment among the most considerable +of the men who were present, according to the laws which were +held in the Upsala Thing. He then saluted the king, and went his +way; and other men brought their cases before the king, and he +sat late in the day upon the cases of the people. Now when the +king came to table, he asked where Lagman Emund was. It was +answered, he was home at his lodgings. "Then," said the king, +"go after him, and tell him to be my guest to-day." Thereafter +the dishes were borne in; then came the musicians with harps, +fiddles, and musical instruments; and lastly, the cup-bearers. +The king was particularly merry, and had many great people at +table with him, so that he thought little of Emund. The king +drank the whole day, and slept all the night after; but in the +morning the king awoke, and recollected what Emund had said the +day before: and when he had put on his clothes, he let his wise +men be summoned to him; for he had always twelve of the wisest +men who sat in judgment with him, and treated the more difficult +cases; and that was no easy business, for the king was ill- +pleased if the judgment was not according to justice, and yet it +was of no use to contradict him. In this meeting the king +ordered Lagman Emund to be called before them. The messenger +returned, and said, "Sire, Lagman Emund rode away yesterday as +soon as he had dined." "Then," said the king, "tell me, ye good +chiefs, what may have been the meaning of that law-case which +Emund laid before us yesterday?" + +They replied, "You must have considered it yourself, if you think +there was any other meaning under it than what he said." + +The king replied, "By the two noble-born men whom he spoke of, +who were at variance, and of whom one was more powerful than the +other, and who did each other damage, he must have meant us and +Olaf the Thick." + +They answered, "It is, sire, as you say." + +The king -- "Our case was judged at the Upsala Thing. But what +was his meaning when he said that bad payment was made; namely, a +gosling for a goose, a pig for a swine, and clay and dirt for +half of the money instead of gold?" + +Arnvid the Blind replied, "Sire, red gold and clay are things +very unlike; but the difference is still greater between king and +slave. You promised Olaf the Thick your daughter Ingegerd, who, +in all branches of her descent, is born of kings, and of the +Upland Swedish race of kings, which is the most noble in the +North; for it is traced up to the gods themselves. But now Olaf +has got Astrid; and although she is a king's child, her mother +was but a slave-woman, and, besides, of Vindish race. Great +difference, indeed, must there be between these kings, when the +one takes thankfully such a match; and now it is evident, as +might be expected, that no Northman is to be placed by the side +of the Upsala kings. Let us all give thanks that it has so +turned out; for the gods have long protected their descendants, +although many now neglect this faith." + +There were three brothers: -- Arnvid the Blind, who had a great +understanding, but was so weak-sighted that he was scarcely fit +for war; the second was Thorvid the Stammerer, who could not +utter two words together at one time, but was remarkably bold and +courageous; the third was Freyvid the Deaf, who was hard of +hearing. All these brothers were rich and powerful men, of noble +birth, great wisdom, and all very dear to the king. + +Then said King Olaf, "What means that which Emund said about Atte +the Dull?" + +None made any reply, but the one looked at the other. + +"Speak freely," said the king. + +Then said Thorvid the Stammerer, "Atte -- quarrel -- some -- +greedy -- jealous -- deceitful -- dull." + +Then said the king, "To whom are these words of reproach and +mockery applied?" + +Freyvid the Deaf replied, "We will speak more clearly if we have +your permission." + +The king -- "Speak freely, Freyvid, what you will." + +Freyvid took up the word, and spoke. "My brother Thorvid, who is +considered to be the wisest of us brothers, holds the words +`quarrelsome, greedy, jealous, dull,' to be one and the same +thing; for it applies to him who is weary of peace, longs for +small things without attaining them, while he lets great and +useful things pass away as they came. I am deaf; yet so loud +have many spoken out, that I can perceive that all men, both +great and small, take it ill that you have not kept your promise +to the king of Norway; and, worse than that, that you broke the +decision of the community as it was delivered at Upsala Thing. +You need not fear either the king of Norway, or the king of +Denmark, or any other, so long as the Swedish army will follow +you; but if the people of the country unanimously turn against +you, we, your friends, see no counsel that can be of advantage to +you." + +The king asks, "Who is the chief who dares to betray the country +and me?" + +Freyvid replies, "All Swedes desire to have the ancient laws, and +their full rights. Look but here, sire, how many chiefs are +sitting in council with you. I think, in truth, we are but six +whom you call your councillors: all the others, so far as I know, +have ridden forth through the districts to hold Things with the +people; and we will not conceal it from you, that the message- +token has gone forth to assemble a Retribution-thing (1). All of +us brothers have been invited to take part in the decisions of +this council, but none of us will bear the name of traitor to the +sovereign; for that our father never was." + +Then the king said, "What council shall we take in this dangerous +affair that is in our hands? Good chiefs give me council, that I +may keep my kingdom, and the heritage of my forefathers; for I +cannot enter into strife against the whole Swedish force." + +Arnvid the Blind replies, "Sire, it is my advice that you ride +down to Aros with such men as will follow you; take your ship +there and go out into the Maeler lake; summon all people to meet +you; proceed no longer with haughtiness, but promise every man +the law and rights of old established in the country; keep back +in this way the message-token, for it cannot as yet, in so short +a time have travelled far through the land. Send, then those of +your men in whom you have the most confidence to those who have +this business on hand, and try if this uproar can be appeased." + +The king says that he will adopt this advice. "I will," says he, +"that ye brothers undertake this business; for I trust to you the +most among my men." + +Thorvid the Stammerer said, "I remain behind. Let Jacob, your +son, go with them, for that is necessary." + +Then said Freyvid, "Let us do as Thorvid says: he will not leave +you, and I and Arnvid must travel." + +This counsel was followed. Olaf went to his ships, and set out +into the Maelar lake, and many people came to him. The brothers +Arnvid and Freyvid rode out to Ullaraker, and had with them the +king's son Jacob; but they kept it a secret that he was there. +The brothers observed that there was a great concourse and war- +gathering, for the bondes held the Thing night and day. When +Arnvid and Freyvid met their relations and friends, they said +they would join with the people; and many agreed to leave the +management of the business in the hands of the brothers. But +all, as one man, declared they would no longer have King Olaf +over them, and no longer suffer his unlawful proceedings, and +over-weening pride which would not listen to any man's +remonstrances, even when the great chiefs spoke the truth to him. +When Freyvid observed the heat of the people, he saw in what a +bad situation the king's cause was. He summoned the chiefs of +the land to a meeting with him and addressed them thus: -- "It +appears to me, that if we are to depose Olaf Eirikson from his +kingdom, we Swedes of the Uplands should be the leading men in +it: for so it has always been, that the counsel which the Upland +chiefs have resolved among themselves has always been followed +by the men of the rest of the country. Our forefathers did not +need to take advice from the West Gautlanders about the +government of the Swedes. Now we will not be so degenerate as to +need Emund to give us counsel; but let us, friends and relations, +unite ourselves for the purpose of coming to a determination." +All agreed to this, and thought it was well said. Thereafter the +people joined this union which the Upland chiefs made among +themselves, and Freyvid and Arnvid were chiefs of the whole +assemblage. When Emund heard this he suspected how the matter +would end, and went to both the brothers to have a conversation +with them. Then Freyvid asked Emund, "Who, in your opinion, +should we take for king, in case Olaf Eirikson's days are at an +end?" + +Emund -- "He whom we think best suited to it, whether he be of +the race of chiefs or not." + +Freyvid answers, "We Uplanders will not, in our time, have the +kingdom go out of the old race of our ancestors, which has given +us kings for a long course of generations, so long as we have so +good a choice as now. King Olaf has two sons, one of whom we +will choose for king, although there is a great difference +between them. The one is noble-born, and of Swedish race on both +sides; the other is a slave-woman's son, and of Vindish race on +the mother's side." + +This decision was received with loud applause, and all would have +Jacob for king. + +Then said Emund. "Ye Upland Swedes have the power this time to +determinate the matter; but I will tell you what will happen: -- +some of those who now will listen to nothing but that the kingdom +remain in the old race will live to see the day when they will +wish the kingdom in another race, as being of more advantage." + +Thereupon the brothers Freyvid and Arnvid led the king's son +Jacob into the Thing, and saluted him with the title of king; and +the Swedes gave him the name of Onund, which he afterwards +retained as long as he lived. He was then ten or twelve years +old. Thereafter King Onund took a court, and chose chiefs to be +around him; and they had as many attendants in their suite as +were thought necessary, so that he gave the whole assemblage of +bondes leave to return home. After that ambassadors went between +the two kings; and at last they had a meeting, and came to an +agreement. Olaf was to remain king over the country as long as +he lived; but should hold peace and be reconciled with King Olaf +of Norway, and also with all who had taken part in this business. +Onund should also be king, and have a part of the land, such as +the father and son should agree upon; but should be bound to +support the bondes in case King Olaf did anything which the +bondes would not suffer. + + +ENDNOTES: +(1) Refsithing -- a Thing for punishment by penalty or death for + crimes and misdemeanours. -- L. + + + +97. MEETING OF RECONCILIATION BETWEEN THE KINGS, AND THEIR GAME + AT DICE. + +Thereafter ambassadors were sent to Norway to King Olaf, with the +errand that he should come with his retinue to a meeting at +Konungahella with the Swedish kings, and that the Swedish kings +would there confirm their reconciliation. When King Olaf heard +this message, he was willing, now as formerly, to enter into the +agreement, and proceeded to the appointed place. There the +Swedish kings also came; and the relations, when they met, bound +themselves mutually to peace and agreement. Olaf the Swedish +king was then remarkably mild in manner, and agreeable to talk +with. Thorstein Frode relates of this meeting, that there was an +inhabited district in Hising which had sometimes belonged to +Norway, and sometimes to Gautland. The kings came to the +agreement between themselves that they would cast lots by the +dice to determine who should have this property, and that he who +threw the highest should have the district. The Swedish king +threw two sixes, and said King Olaf need scarcely throw. He +replied, while shaking the dice in his hand, "Although there be +two sixes on the dice, it would be easy, sire, for God Almighty +to let them turn up in my favour." Then he threw, and had sixes +also. Now the Swedish king threw again, and had again two sixes. +Olaf king of Norway then threw, and had six upon one dice, and +the other split in two, so as to make seven eyes in all upon it; +and the district was adjudged to the king of Norway. We have +heard nothing else of any interest that took place at this +meeting; and the kings separated the dearest of friends with each +other. + + + +98. OF OLAF OF NORWAY, AFTER THE MEETING. + +After the events now related Olaf returned with his people to +Viken. He went first to Tunsberg, and remained there a short +time, and then proceeded to the north of the country. In +harvest-time he sailed north to Throndhjem, and had winter +provision laid in there, and remained there all winter (A.D. +1090). Olaf Haraldson was now sole and supreme king of Norway, +and the whole of that sovereignty, as Harald Harfager had +possessed it, and had the advantage over that monarch of being +the only king in the land. By a peaceful agreement he had also +recovered that part of the country which Olaf the Swedish king +had before occupied; and that part of the country which the +Danish king had got he retook by force, and ruled over it as +elsewhere in the country. The Danish king Canute ruled at that +time both over Denmark and England; but he himself was in England +for the most part, and set chiefs over the country in Denmark, +without at that time making any claim upon Norway. + + + +99. HISTORY OF THE EARLS OF ORKNEY. + +It is related that in the days of Harald Harfager, the king of +Norway, the islands of Orkney, which before had been only a +resort for vikings, were settled . The first earl in the Orkney +Islands was called Sigurd, who was a son of Eystein Giumra, and +brother of Ragnvald earl of More. After Sigurd his son Guthorm +was earl for one year. After him Torf-Einar, a son of Ragnvald, +took the earldom, and was long earl, and was a man of great +power. Halfdan Haleg, a son of Harald Harfager, assaulted Torf- +Einar, and drove him from the Orkney Islands; but Einar came back +and killed Halfdan in the island Ronaldsha. Thereafter King +Harald came with an army to the Orkney Islands. Einar fled to +Scotland, and King Harald made the people of the Orkney Islands +give up their udal properties, and hold them under oath from him. +Thereafter the king and earl were reconciled, so that the earl +became the king's man, and took the country as a fief from him; +but that it should pay no scat or feu-duty, as it was at that +time much plundered by vikings. The earl paid the king sixty +marks of gold; and then King Harald went to plunder in Scotland, +as related in the "Glym Drapa". After Torf-Einar, his sons +Arnkel, Erlend, and Thorfin Hausakljufer (1) ruled over these +lands. In their days came Eirik Blood-axe from Norway, and +subdued these earls. Arnkel and Erlend fell in a war expedition; +but Thorfin ruled the country long, and became an old man. His +sons were Arnfin, Havard, Hlodver, Liot, and Skule. Their mother +was Grelad, a daughter of Earl Dungad of Caithness. Her mother +was Groa, a daughter of Thorstein Raud. In the latter days of +Earl Thorfin came Eirik Blood-axe's sons, who had fled from Earl +Hakon out of Norway, and committed great excesses in Orkney. +Earl Thorfin died on a bed of sickness, and his sons after him +ruled over the country, and there are many stories concerning +them. Hlodver lived the longest of them, and ruled alone over +this country. His son was Sigurd the Thick, who took the earldom +after him, and became a powerful man and a great warrior. In his +days came Olaf Trygvason from his viking expedition in the +western ocean, with his troops, landed in Orkney and took Earl +Sigurd prisoner in South Ronaldsha, where he lay with one ship. +King Olaf allowed the earl to ransom his life by letting himself +be baptized, adopting the true faith, becoming his man, and +introducing Christianity into all the Orkney Islands. As a +hostage, King Olaf took his son, who was called Hunde or Whelp. +Then Olaf went to Norway, and became king; and Hunde was several +years with King Olaf in Norway, and died there. After his death +Earl Sigurd showed no obedience or fealty to King Olaf. He +married a daughter of the Scottish king Malcolm, and their son +was called Thorfin. Earl Sigurd had, besides, older sons; +namely, Sumarlide, Bruse, and Einar Rangmund. Four or five years +after Olaf Tryrgvason's fall Earl Sigurd went to Ireland, leaving +his eldest sons to rule the country, and sending Thorfin to his +mother's father, the Scottish king. On this expedition Earl +Sigurd fell in Brian's battle (l). When the news was received in +Orkney, the brothers Sumarlide, Bruse, and Einar were chosen +earls, and the country was divided into three parts among them. +Thorfin Sigurdson was five years old when Earl Sigurd fell. When +the Scottish king heard of the earl's death he gave his relation +Thorfin Caithness and Sutherland, with the title of earl, and +appointed good men to rule the land for him. Earl Thorfin was +ripe in all ways as soon as he was grown up: he was stout and +strong, but ugly; and as soon as he was a grown man it was easy +to see that he was a severe and cruel but a very clever man. So +says Arnor, the earls' skald: -- + + "Under the rim of heaven no other, + So young in years as Einar's brother, + In battle had a braver hand, + Or stouter, to defend the land." + + + +ENDNOTES: +(1) Hausakljufer -- the splitter of skulls. -- L. +(2) Brian's battle is supposed to have taken place on the 23rd + April 1014, at Clontart, near Dublin; and is known in Irish + history as the battle of Clontarf, and was one of the + bloodiest of the age. It was fought between a viking called + Sigtryg and Brian king of Munster, who gained the victory, + but lost his life. -- L. + + + +100. OF THE EARLS EINAR AND BRUSE. + +The brothers Einar and Bruse were very unlike in disposition. +Bruse was a soft-minded, peaceable man, -- sociable, eloquent, +and of good understanding. Einar was obstinate, taciturn, and +dull; but ambitious, greedy of money, and withal a great warrior. +Sumarlide, the eldest of the brothers, was in disposition like +Bruse, and lived not long, but died in his bed. After his death +Thorfin claimed his share of the Orkney Islands. Einar replied, +that Thorfin had the dominions which their father Sigurd had +possessed, namely, Caithness and Sutherland, which he insisted +were much larger than a third part of Orkney; therefore he would +not consent to Thorfin's having any share. Bruse, on the other +hand, was willing, he said, to divide with him. "I do not- +desire," he said, "more than the third part of the land, and +which of right belongs to me." Then Einar took possession of two +parts of the country, by which he became a powerful man, +surrounded by many followers. He was often in summer out on +marauding expeditions, and called out great numbers of the people +to join him; but it went always unpleasantly with the division of +the booty made on his viking cruises. Then the bondes grew weary +of all these burdens; but Earl Einar held fast by them with +severity, calling in all services laid upon the people, and +allowing no opposition from any man; for he was excessively proud +and overbearing. And now there came dearth and scarcity in his +lands, in consequence of the services and money outlay exacted +from the bondes; while in the part of the country belonging to +Bruse there were peace and plenty, and therefore he was the best +beloved by the bondes. + + + +101. OF THORKEL AMUNDASON. + +There was a rich and powerful man who was called Amunde, who +dwelt in Hrossey at Sandvik, in Hlaupandanes. His son, called +Thorkel, was one of the ablest men in the islands. Amunde was a +man of the best understanding, and most respected in Orkney. One +spring Earl Einar proclaimed a levy for an expedition, as usual. +The bondes murmured greatly against it, and applied to Amunde +with the entreaty that he would intercede with the earl for them. +He replied, that the earl was not a man who would listen to other +people, and insisted that it was of no use to make any entreaty +to the earl about it. "As things now stand, there is a good +understanding between me and the earl; but, in my opinion, there +would be much danger of our quarrelling, on account of our +different dispositions and views on both sides; therefore I will +have nothing to do with it." They then applied to Thorkel, who +was also very loath to interfere, but promised at last to do so, +in consequence of the great entreaty of the people. Amunde +thought he had given his promise too hastily. Now when the earl +held a Thing, Thorkel spoke on account of the people, and +entreated the earl to spare the people from such heavy burdens, +recounting their necessitous condition. The earl replies +favourably, saying that he would take Thorkel's advice. "I had +intended to go out from the country with six ships, but now I +will only take three with me; but thou must not come again, +Thorkel, with any such request." The bondes thanked Thorkel for +his assistance, and the earl set out on a viking cruise, and came +back in autumn. The spring after, the earl made the same levy as +usual, and held a Thing with the bondes. Then Thorkel again made +a speech, in which he entreated the earl to spare the people. +The earl now was angry, and said the lot of the bondes should be +made worse in consequence of his intercession; and worked himself +up into such a rage, that he vowed they should not both come next +spring to the Thing in a whole skin. Then the Thing was closed. +When Amunde heard what the earl and Thorkel had said at the +Thing, he told Thorkel to leave the country, and he went over to +Caithness to Earl Thorfin. Thorkel was afterwards a long time +there, and brought up the earl in his youth, and was on that +account called Thorkel the Fosterer; and he became a very +celebrated man. + + + +102. THE AGREEMENT OF THE EARLS. + +There were many powerful men who fled from their udal properties +in Orkney on account of Earl Einar's violence, and the most fled +over to Caithness to Earl Thorfin: but some fled from the Orkney +Islands to Norway, and some to other countries. When Earl +Thorfin was grown up he sent a message to his brother Einar, and +demanded the part of the dominion which he thought belonged to +him in Orkney; namely, a third of the islands. Einar was nowise +inclined to diminish his possessions. When Thorfin found this he +collected a warforce in Caithness, and proceeded to the islands. +As soon as Earl Einar heard of this he collected people, and +resolved to defend his country. Earl Bruse also collected men, +and went out to meet them, and bring about some agreement between +them. An agreement was at last concluded, that Thorfin should +have a third part of the islands, as of right belonging to him, +but that Bruse and Einar should lay their two parts together, and +Einar alone should rule over them; but if the one died before the +other, the longest liver should inherit the whole. This +agreement seemed reasonable, as Bruse had a son called Ragnvald, +but Einar had no son. Earl Thorfin set men to rule over his land +in Orkney, but he himself was generally in Caithness. Earl Einar +was generally on viking expeditions to Ireland, Scotland, and +Bretland. + + + +103. EYVIND URARHORN'S MURDER. + +One summer (A.D. 1018) that Earl Einar marauded in Ireland, he +fought in Ulfreks-fjord with the Irish king Konofogor, as has +been related before, and suffered there a great defeat. The +summer after this (A.D. 1019) Eyvind Urarhorn was coming from the +west from Ireland, intending to go to Norway; but the weather was +boisterous, and the current against him, so he ran into +Osmundwall, and lay there wind-bound for some time. When Earl +Einar heard of this, he hastened thither with many people, took +Eyvind prisoner, and ordered him to be put to death, but spared +the lives of most of his people. In autumn they proceeded to +Norway to King Olaf, and told him Eyvind was killed. The king +said little about it, but one could see that he considered it a +great and vexatious loss; for he did not usually say much if +anything turned out contrary to his wishes. Earl Thorfin sent +Thorkel Fosterer to the islands to gather in his scat. Now, as +Einar gave Thorkel the greatest blame for the dispute in which +Thorfin had made claim to the islands, Thorkel came suddenly back +to Caithness from Orkney, and told Earl Thorfin that he had +learnt that Earl Einar would have murdered him if his friends and +relations had not given him notice to escape. "Now," says he, +"it is come so far between the earl and me, that either some +thing decisive between us must take place if we meet, or I must +remove to such a distance that his power will not reach me." The +earl encouraged Thorkel much to go east to Norway to King Olaf. +"Thou wilt be highly respected," says he, "wherever thou comest +among honourable men; and I know so well thy disposition and the +earl's, that it will not be long before ye come to extremities." +Thereupon Thorkel made himself ready, and proceeded in autumn to +Norway, and then to King Olaf, with whom he stayed the whole +winter (A.D. 1020), and was in high favour. The king often +entered into conversation with him, and he thought, what was +true, that Thorkel was a high-minded man, of good understanding. +In his conversations with Thorkel, the king found a great +difference in his description of the two earls; for Thorkel was a +great friend of Earl Thorfin, but had much to say against Einar. +Early in spring (A.D. 1020) the king sent a ship west over the +sea to Earl Thorfin, with the invitation to come east and visit +him in Norway. The earl did not decline the invitation, for it +was accompanied by assurances of friendship. + + + +104. EARL EINAR'S MURDER. + +Earl Thorfin went east to Norway, and came to King Olaf, from +whom he received a kind reception, and stayed till late in the +summer. When he was preparing to return westwards again, King +Olaf made him a present of a large and fully-rigged long-ship. +Thorkel the Fosterer joined company with the earl, who gave him +the ship which he brought with him from the west. The king and +the earl took leave of each other tenderly. In autumn Earl +Thorfin came to Orkney, and when Earl Einar heard of it he went +on board his ships with a numerous band of men. Earl Bruse came +up to his two brothers, and endeavoured to mediate between them, +and a peace was concluded and confirmed by oath. Thorkel +Fosterer was to be in peace and friendship with Earl Einar; and +it was agreed that each of them should give a feast to the other, +and that the earl should first be Thorkel's guest at Sandwick. +When the earl came to the feast he was entertained in the best +manner; but the earl was not cheerful. There was a great room, +in which there were doors at each end. The day the earl should +depart Thorkel was to accompany him to the other feast; and +Thorkel sent men before, who should examine the road they had to +travel that day. The spies came back, and said to Thorkel they +had discovered three ambushes. "And we think," said they, "there +is deceit on foot." When Thorkel heard this he lengthened out +his preparations for the journey, and gathered people about him. +The earl told him to get ready, as it was time to be on +horseback. Thorkel answered, that he had many things to put in +order first, and went out and in frequently. There was a fire +upon the floor. At last he went in at one door, followed by an +Iceland man from Eastfjord, called Halvard, who locked the door +after him. Thorkel went in between the fire and the place where +the earl was sitting. The earl asked, "Art thou ready at last, +Thorkel?" + +Thorkel answers, "Now I am ready;" and struck the earl upon the +head so that he fell upon the floor. + +Then said the Icelander, "I never saw people so foolish as not to +drag the earl out of the fire;" and took a stick, which he set +under the earl's neck, and put him upright on the bench. Thorkel +and his two comrades then went in all haste out of the other door +opposite to that by which they went in, and Thorkel's men were +standing without fully armed. The earl's men now went in, and +took hold of the earl. He was already dead, so nobody thought of +avenging him: and also the whole was done so quickly; for nobody +expected such a deed from Thorkel, and all supposed that there +really was, as before related, a friendship fixed between the +earl and Thorkel. The most who were within were unarmed, and +they were partly Thorkel's good friends; and to this may be +added, that fate had decreed a longer life to Thorkel. When +Thorkel came out he had not fewer men with him than the earl's +troop. Thorkel went to his ship, and the earl's men went their +way. The same day Thorkel sailed out eastwards into the sea. +This happened after winter; but he came safely to Norway, went as +fast as he could to Olaf, and was well received by him. The king +expressed his satisfaction at this deed, and Thorkel was with him +all winter (A.D. 1091). + + + +105. AGREEMENT BETWEEN KING OLAF AND EARL BRUSE. + +After Earl Einar's fall Bruse took the part of the country which +he had possessed; for it was known to many men on what conditions +Einar and Bruse had entered into a partnership. Although Thorfin +thought it would be more just that each of them had half of the +islands, Bruse retained the two-thirds of the country that winter +(A.D. 1021). In spring, however, Thorfin produced his claim, and +demanded the half of the country; but Bruse would not consent. +They held Things and meetings about the business; and although +their friends endeavoured to settle it, Thorfin would not be +content with less than the half of the islands, and insisted that +Bruse, with his disposition, would have enough even with a third +part. Bruse replies, "When I took my heritage after my father I +was well satisfied with a third part of the country, and there +was nobody to dispute it with me; and now I have succeeded to +another third in heritage after my brother, according to a lawful +agreement between us; and although I am not powerful enough to +maintain a feud against thee, my brother, I will seek some other +way, rather than willingly renounce my property." With this +their meeting ended. But Bruse saw that he had no strength to +contend against Thorfin, because Thorfin had both a greater +dominion and also could have aid from his mother's brother, the +Scottish king. He resolved, therefore, to go out of the country; +and he went eastward to King Olaf, and had with him his son +Ragnvald, then ten years old. When the earl came to the king he +was well received. The earl now declared his errand, and told +the king the circumstances of the whole dispute between him and +his brother, and asked help to defend his kingdom of Orkney; +promising, in return, the fullest friendship towards King Olaf. +In his answer, the king began with showing how Harald Harfager +had appropriated to himself all udal rights in Orkney, and that +the earls, since that time, have constantly held the country as a +fief, not as their udal property. "As a sufficient proof of +which," said he, "when Eirik Blood-axe and his sons were in +Orkney the earls were subject to them; and also when my relation +Olaf Trygvason came there thy father, Earl Sigurd, became his +man. Now I have taken heritage after King Olaf, and I will give +thee the condition to become my man and then I will give thee the +islands as a fief; and we shall try if I cannot give thee aid +that will he more to the purpose than Thorfin can get from the +Scottish king. If thou wilt not accept of these terms, then will +I win back my udal property there in the West, as our forefathers +and relations of old possessed it." + +The earl carefully considered this speech, laid it before his +friends, and demanded their advice if he should agree to it, and +enter into such terms with King Olaf and become his vassal. "But +I do not see what my lot will be at my departure if I say no; for +the king has clearly enough declared his claim upon Orkney; and +from his great power, and our being in his hands, it is easy for +him to make our destiny what he pleases." + +Although the earl saw that there was much to be considered for +and against it he chose the condition to deliver himself and his +dominion into the king's power. Thereupon the king took the +earl's power, and the government over all the earl's lands, and +the earl became his vassal under oath of fealty. + + + +106. THE EARL'S AGREEMENT TO THE KING'S TERMS. + +Thorfin the earl heard that his brother Bruse had gone east to +King Olaf to seek support from him; but as Thorfin had been on a +visit to King Olaf before, and had concluded a friendship with +him, he thought his case would stand well with the king, and that +many would support it; but he believed that many more would do so +if he went there himself. Earl Thorfin resolved, therefore, to +go east himself without delay; and he thought there would be so +little difference between the time of his arrival and Bruse's, +that Bruse's errand could not be accomplished before he came to +King Olaf. But it went otherwise than Earl Thorfin had expected; +for when he came to the king the agreement between the king and +Bruse was already concluded and settled, and Earl Thorfin did not +know a word about Bruse's having surrendered his udal domains +until he came to King Olaf. As soon as Earl Thorfin and King +Olaf met, the king made the same demand upon the kingdom of +Orkney that he had done to Earl Bruse, and required that Thorfin +should voluntarily deliver over to the king that part of the +country which he had possessed hitherto. The earl answered in a +friendly and respectful way, that the king's friendship lay near +to his heart: "And if you think, sire, that my help against other +chiefs can be of use, you have already every claim to it; but I +cannot be your vessel for service, as I am an earl of the +Scottish king, and owe fealty to him." + +As the king found that the earl, by his answer, declined +fulfilling the demand he had made, he said, "Earl, if thou wilt +not become my vassal, there is another condition; namely, that I +will place over the Orkney Islands the man I please, and require +thy oath that thou wilt make no claim upon these lands, but allow +whoever I place over them to sit in peace. If thou wilt not +accept of either of these conditions, he who is to rule over +these lands may expect hostility from thee, and thou must not +think it strange if like meet like in this business." + +The earl begged of the king some time to consider the matter. +The king did so, and gave the earl time to take the counsel of +his friends on the choosing one or other of these conditions. +Then the earl requested a delay until next summer, that he might +go over the sea to the west, for his proper counsellors were all +at home, and he himself was but a child in respect of age; but +the king required that he should now make his election of one or +other of the conditions. Thorkel Fosterer was then with the +king, and he privately sent a person to Earl Thorfin, and told +him, whatever his intentions might be, not to think of leaving +Olaf without being reconciled with him, as he stood entirely in +Olaf's power. From such hints the earl saw there was no other +way than to let the king have his own will. It was no doubt a +hard condition to have no hope of ever regaining his paternal +heritage, and moreover to bind himself by oath to allow those to +enjoy in peace his domain who had no hereditary right to it; but +seeing it was uncertain how he could get away, he resolved to +submit to the king and become his vassal, as Bruse had done. The +king observed that Thorfin was more high-minded, and less +disposed to suffer subjection than Bruse, and therefore he +trusted less to Thorfin than to Bruse; and he considered also +that Thorfin would trust to the aid of the Scottish king, if he +broke the agreement. The king also had discernment enough to +perceive that Bruse, although slow to enter into an agreement, +would promise nothing but what he intended to keep; but as to +Thorfin when he had once made up his mind he went readily into +every proposal and made no attempt to obtain any alteration of +the king's first conditions: therefore the king had his +suspicions that the earl would infringe the agreement. + + + +107. EARL THORFIN'S DEPARTURE, AND RECONCILIATION WITH THORKEL. + +When the king had carefully considered the whole matter by +himself, he ordered the signal to sound for a General Thing, to +which he called in the earls. Then said the king, "I will now +make known to the public our agreement with the Orkney earls. +They have now acknowledged my right of property to Orkney and +Shetland, and have both become my vassals, all which they have +confirmed by oath; and now I will invest them with these lands as +a fief: namely, Bruse with one third part and Thorfin with one +third, as they formerly enjoyed them; but the other third which +Einar Rangmund had, I adjudge as fallen to my domain, because he +killed Eyvind Urarhorn, my court-man, partner, and dear friend; +and that part of the land I will manage as I think proper. I +have also my earls, to tell you it is my pleasure that ye enter +into an agreement with Thorkel Amundason for the murder of your +brother Einar, for I will take that business, if ye agree +thereto, within my own jurisdiction." The earls agreed to this, +as to everything else that the king proposed. Thorkel came +forward, and surrendered to the king's judgment of the case, and +the Thing concluded. King Olaf awarded as great a penalty for +Earl Einar's murder as for three lendermen; but as Einar himself +was the cause of the act, one third of the mulct fell to the +ground. Thereafter Earl Thorfin asked the king's leave to +depart, and as soon as he obtained it made ready for sea with all +speed. It happened one day, when all was ready for the voyage, +the earl sat in his ship drinking; and Thorkel Amundason came +unexpectedly to him, laid his head upon the earl's knee, and bade +him do with him what he pleased. The earl asked why he did so. +"We are, you know, reconciled men, according to the king's +decision; so stand up, Thorkel." + +Thorkel replied, "The agreement which the king made as between me +and Bruse stands good; but what regards the agreement with thee +thou alone must determine. Although the king made conditions for +my property and safe residence in Orkney, yet I know so well thy +disposition that there is no going to the islands for me, unless +I go there in peace with thee, Earl Thorfin; and therefore I am +willing to promise never to return to Orkney, whatever the king +may desire." + +The earl remained silent; and first, after a long pause, he said, +"If thou wilt rather, Thorkel, that I shall judge between us than +trust to the king's judgment, then let the beginning of our +reconciliation be, that you go with me to the Orkney Islands, +live with me, and never leave me but with my will, and be bound +to defend my land, and execute all that I want done, as long as +we both are in life." + +Thorkel replies, "This shall be entirely at thy pleasure, earl, +as well as everything else in my power." Then Thorkel went on, +and solemnly ratified this agreement. The earl said he would +talk afterwards about the mulct of money, but took Thorkel's oath +upon the conditions. Thorkel immediately made ready to accompany +the earl on his voyage. The earl set off as soon as all was +ready, and never again were King Olaf and Thorfin together. + + + +108. EARL BRUSE'S DEPARTURE. + +Earl Bruse remained behind, and took his time to get ready. +Before his departure the king sent for him, and said, "It appears +to me, earl, that in thee I have a man on the west side of the +sea on whose fidelity I can depend; therefore I intend to give +thee the two parts of the country which thou formerly hadst to +rule over; for I will not that thou shouldst be a less powerful +man after entering into my service than before: but I will secure +thy fidelity by keeping thy son Ragnvald with me. I see well +enough that with two parts of the country and my help, thou wilt +be able to defend what is thy own against thy brother Thorfin." +Bruse was thankful for getting two thirds instead of one third of +the country, and soon after he set out, and came about autumn to +Orkney; but Ragnvald, Bruse's son, remained behind in the East +with King Olaf. Ragnvald was one of the handsomest men that +could be seen, -- his hair long, and yellow as silk; and he soon +grew up, stout and tall, and he was a very able and superb man, +both of great understanding and polite manners. He was long with +King Olaf. Otter Svarte speaks of these affairs in the poem he +composed about King Olaf: -- + + "From Shetland, far off in the cold North Sea, + Come chiefs who desire to be subject to thee: + No king so well known for his will, and his might, + To defend his own people from scaith or unright. + These isles of the West midst the ocean's wild roar, + Scarcely heard the voice of their sovereign before; + Our bravest of sovereigns before could scarce bring + These islesmen so proud to acknowledge their king." + + + +109. OF THE EARLS THORFIN AND BRUSE. + +The brothers Thorfin and Bruse came west to Orkney; and Bruse +took the two parts of the country under his rule, and Thorfin the +third part. Thorfin was usually in Caithness and elsewhere in +Scotland; but placed men of his own over the islands. It was +left to Bruse alone to defend the islands, which at that time +were severely scourged by vikings; for the Northmen and Danes +went much on viking cruises in the west sea, and frequently +touched at Orkney on the way to or from the west, and plundered, +and took provisions and cattle from the coast. Bruse often +complained of his brother Thorfin, that he made no equipment of +war for the defence of Orkney and Shetland, yet levied his share +of the scat and duties. Then Thorfin offered to him to exchange, +and that Bruse should have one third and Thorfin two thirds of +the land, but should undertake the defence of the land, for the +whole. Although this exchange did not take place immediately, it +is related in the saga of the earls that it was agreed upon at +last; and that Thorfin had two parts and Bruse only one, when +Canute the Great subdued Norway and King Olaf fled the country. +Earl Thorfin Sigurdson has been the ablest earl of these islands, +and has had the greatest dominion of all the Orkney earls; for he +had under him Orkney, Shetland, and the Hebudes, besides very +great possessions in Scotland and Ireland. Arnor, the earls' +skald, tells of his possessions: -- + + "From Thurso-skerry to Dublin, + All people hold with good Thorfin -- + All people love his sway, + And the generous chief obey." + +Thorfin was a very great warrior. He came to the earldom at five +years of age, ruled more than sixty years, and died in his bed +about the last days of Harald Sigurdson. But Bruse died in the +days of Canute the Great, a short time after the fall of Saint +Olaf. + + + +110. OF HAREK OF THJOTTA. + +Having now gone through this second story, we shall return to +that which we left, -- at King Olaf Haraldson having concluded +peace with King Olaf the Swedish king, and having the same summer +gone north to Throndhjem (1019). He had then been king in Norway +five years (A.D. 1015-1019). In harvest time he prepared to take +his winter residence at Nidaros, and he remained all winter there +(A.D. 1020). Thorkel the Fosterer, Amunde's son, as before +related, was all that winter with him. King Olaf inquired very +carefully how it stood with Christianity throughout the land, and +learnt that it was not observed at all to the north of +Halogaland, and was far from being observed as it should be in +Naumudal, and the interior of Throndhjem. There was a man by +name Harek, a son of Eyvind Skaldaspiller, who dwelt in an island +called Thjotta in Halogaland. Eyvind had not been a rich man, +but was of high family and high mind. In Thjotta, at first, +there dwelt many small bondes; but Harek began with buying a farm +not very large and lived on it, and in a few years he had got all +the bondes that were there before out of the way; so that he had +the whole island, and built a large head-mansion. He soon became +very rich; for he was a very prudent man, and very successful. +He had long been greatly respected by the chiefs; and being +related to the kings of Norway, had been raised by them to high +dignities. Harek's father's mother Gunhild was a daughter of +Earl Halfdan, and Ingebjorg, Harald Harfager's daughter. At the +time the circumstance happened which we are going to relate he +was somewhat advanced in years. Harek was the most respected man +in Halogaland, and for a long time had the Lapland trade, and did +the king's business in Lapland; sometimes alone, sometimes with +others joined to him. He had not himself been to wait on King +Olaf, but messages had passed between them, and all was on the +most friendly footing. This winter (A.D. 1020) that Olaf was in +Nidaros, messengers passed between the king and Harek of Thjotta. +Then the king made it known that he intended going north to +Halogaland, and as far north as the land's end; but the people of +Halogaland expected no good from this expedition. + + + +111. OF THE PEOPLE OF HALOGALAND. + +Olaf rigged out five ships in spring (A.D. 1020), and had with +him about 300 men. When he was ready for sea he set northwards +along the land; and when he came to Naumudal district he summoned +the bondes to a Thing, and at every Thing was accepted as king. +He also made the laws to be read there as elsewhere, by which the +people are commanded to observe Christianity; and he threatened +every man with loss of life, and limbs, and property who would +not subject himself to Christian law. He inflicted severe +punishments on many men, great as well as small, and left no +district until the people had consented to adopt the holy faith. +The most of the men of power and of the great bondes made feasts +for the king, and so he proceeded all the way north to +Halogaland. Harek of Thjotta also made a feast for the king, at +which there was a great multitude of guests, and the feast was +very splendid. Harek was made lenderman, and got the same +privileges he had enjoyed under the former chiefs of the country. + + + +112. OF ASMUND GRANKELSON. + +There was a man called Grankel, or Granketil, who was a rich +bonde, and at this time rather advanced in age. In his youth he +had been on viking cruises, and had been a powerful fighter; for +he possessed great readiness in all sorts of bodily exercises. +His son Asmund was equal to his father in all these, and in some, +indeed, he excelled him. There were many who said that with +respect to comeliness, strength, and bodily expertness, he might +be considered the third remarkably distinguished for these that +Norway had ever produced. The first was Hakon Athelstan's +foster-son; the second, Olaf Trygvason. Grankel invited King +Olaf to a feast, which was very magnificent; and at parting +Grankel presented the king with many honourable gifts and tokens +of friendship. The king invited Asmund, with many persuasions, +to follow him; and as Asmund could not decline the honours +offered him, he got ready to travel with the king, became his +man, and stood in high favour with him. The king remained in +Halogaland the greater part of the summer, went to all the +Things, and baptized all the people. Thorer Hund dwelt at that +time in the island Bjarkey. He was the most powerful man in the +North, and also became one of Olaf's lendermen. Many sons of +great bondes resolved also to follow King Olaf from Halogaland. +Towards the end of summer King Olaf left the North, and sailed +back to Throndhjem, and landed at Nidaros, where he passed the +winter (A.D. 1021). It was then that Thorkel the Fosterer came +from the West from Orkney, after killing Einar Rangmumd, as +before related. This autumn corn was dear in Throndhjem, after a +long course of good seasons, and the farther north the dearer was +the corn; but there was corn enough in the East country, and in +the Uplands, and it was of great help to the people of Throndhjem +that many had old corn remaining beside them. + + + +113. OF THE SACRIFICES OF THE THRONDHJEM PEOPLE. + +In autumn the news was brought to King Olaf that the bondes had +had a great feast on the first winter-day's eve, at which there +was a numerous attendance and much drinking; and it was told the +king that all the remembrance-cups to the Asas, or old gods, were +blessed according to the old heathen forms; and it was added, +that cattle and horses had been slain, and the altars sprinkled +with their blood, and the sacrifices accompanied with the prayer +that was made to obtain good seasons. It was also reported that +all men saw clearly that the gods were offended at the Halogaland +people turning Christian. Now when the king heard this news he +sent men into the Throndhjem country, and ordered several bondes, +whose names he gave, to appear before him. There was a man +called Olver of Eggja, so called after his farm on which he +lived. He was powerful, of great family, and the head-man of +those who on account of the bondes appeared before the king. +Now, when they came to the king, he told them these accusations; +to which Olver, on behalf of the bondes, replied, that they had +had no other feasts that harvest than their usual entertainments, +and social meetings, and friendly drinking parties. "But as to +what may have been told you of the words which may have fallen +from us Throndhjem people in our drinking parties, men of +understanding would take good care not to use such language; but +I cannot hinder drunken or foolish people's talk." Olver was a +man of clever speech, and bold in what he said, and defended the +bondes against such accusations. In the end, the king said the +people of the interior of Thorndhjem must themselves give the +best testimony to their being in the right faith. The bondes got +leave to return home, and set off as soon as they were ready. + + + +114. OF THE SACRIFICES BY THE PEOPLE OF THE INTERIOR OF THE + THRONDHJEM DISTRICT. + +Afterwards, when winter was advanced, it was told the king that +the people of the interior of Throndhjem had assembled in great +number at Maerin, and that there was a great sacrifice in the +middle of winter, at which they sacrificed offerings for peace +and a good season. Now when the king knew this on good authority +to be true, he sent men and messages into the interior, and +summoned the bondes whom he thought of most understanding into +the town. The bondes held a council among themselves about this +message; and all those who had been upon the same occasion in the +beginning of winter were now very unwilling to make the journey. +Olver, however, at the desire of all the bondes, allowed himself +to be persuaded. When he came to the town he went immediately +before the king, and they talked together. The king made the +same accusation against the bondes, that they had held a mid- +winter sacrifice. Olver replies, that this accusation against +the bondes was false. "We had," said he, "Yule feasts and +drinking feasts wide around in the districts; and the bondes do +not prepare their feasts so sparingly, sire, that there is not +much left over, which people consume long afterwards. At Maerin +there is a great farm, with a large house on it, and a great +neighbourhood all around it, and it is the great delight of the +people to drink many together in company." The king said little +in reply, but looked angry, as he thought he knew the truth of +the matter better than it was now represented. He ordered the +bondes to return home. "I shall some time or other," said he, +"come to the truth of what you are now concealing, and in such a +way that ye shall not be able to contradict it. But, however, +that may be, do not try such things again." The bondes returned +home, and told the result of their journey, and that the king was +altogether enraged. + + + +115. MURDER OF OLVER OF EGGJA. + +At Easter (A.D. 1021) the king held a feast, to which he had +invited many of the townspeople as well as bondes. After Easter +he ordered his ships to be launched into the water, oars and +tackle to be put on board, decks to be laid in the ships, and +tilts (1) and rigging to be set up, and to be laid ready for sea +at the piers. Immediately after Easter he sent men into Veradal. +There was a man called Thoralde, who was the king's bailiff, and +who managed the king's farm there at Haug; and to him the king +sent a message to come to him as quickly as possible. Thoralde +did not decline the journey, but went immediately to the town +with the messenger. The king called him in and in a private +conversation asked him what truth there was in what had been told +him of the principles and living of the people of the interior +of Throndhjem, and if it really was so that they practised +sacrifices to heathen gods. "I will," says the king, "that thou +declare to me the things as they are, and as thou knowest to be +true; for it is thy duty to tell me the truth, as thou art my +man." + +Thoralde replies, "Sire, I will first tell you that I have +brought here to the town my two children, my wife, and all my +loose property that I could take with me, and if thou desirest to +know the truth it shall be told according to thy command; but +if I declare it, thou must take care of me and mine." + +The king replies, "Say only what is true on what I ask thee, and +I will take care that no evil befall thee." + +Then said Thoralde, "If I must say the truth, king, as it is, I +must declare that in the interior of the Throndhjem land almost +all the people are heathen in faith, although some of them are +baptized. It is their custom to offer sacrifice in autumn for a +good winter, a second at mid-winter, and a third in summer. In +this the people of Eyna, Sparby, Veradal, and Skaun partake. +There are twelve men who preside over these sacrifice-feasts; and +in spring it is Olver who has to get the feast in order, and he +is now busy transporting to Maerin everything needful for it." +Now when the king had got to the truth with a certainty, he +ordered the signal to be sounded for his men to assemble, and for +the men-at-arms to go on board ship. He appointed men to steer +the ships, and leaders for the people, and ordered how the people +should be divided among the vessels. All was got ready in haste, +and with five ships and 300 men he steered up the fjord. The +wind was favourable, the ships sailed briskly before it, and +nobody could have thought that the king would be so soon there. +The king came in the night time to Maerin, and immediately +surrounded the house with a ring of armed men. Olver was taken, +and the king ordered him to be put to death, and many other men +besides. Then the king took all the provision for the feast, and +had it brought to his ships; and also all the goods, both +furniture, clothes, and valuables, which the people had brought +there, and divided the booty among his men. The king also let +all the bondes he thought had the greatest part in the business +be plundered by his men-at-arms. Some were taken prisoners and +laid in irons, some ran away, and many were robbed of their +goods. Thereafter the bondes were summoned to a Thing; but +because he had taken many powerful men prisoners, and held them +in his power, their friends and relations resolved to promise +obedience to the king, so that there was no insurrection against +the king on this occasion. He thus brought the whole people back +to the right faith, gave them teachers, and built and consecrated +churches. The king let Olver lie without fine paid for his +bloodshed, and all that he possessed was adjudged to the king; +and of the men he judged the most guilty, some he ordered to be +executed, some he maimed, some he drove out of the country, and +took fines from others. The king then returned to Nidaros. + + +ENDNOTES: +(1) The ships appear to have been decked fore and aft only; and + in the middle, where the rowers sat, to have had tilts or + tents set up at night to sleep under. -- L. + + + +116. OF THE SONS OF ARNE. + +There was a man called Arne Arnmodson, who was married to Thora, +Thorstein Galge's daughter. Their children were Kalf, Fin, +Thorberg, Amunde, Kolbjorn, Arnbjorn, and Arne. Their daughter, +who was called Ragnhild, was married to Harek of Thjotta. Arne +was a lenderman, powerful, and of ability, and a great friend of +King Olaf. At that time his sons Kalf and Fin were with the +king, and in great favour. The wife whom Olver of Eggja had left +was young and handsome, of great family, and rich, so that he who +got her might be considered to have made an excellent marriage; +and her land was in the gift of the king. She and Olver had two +sons, who were still in infancy. Kalf Arneson begged of the king +that he would give him to wife the widow of Olver; and out of +friendship the king agreed to it, and with her he got all the +property Olver had possessed. The king at the same time made him +his lenderman, and gave him an office in the interior of the +Throndhjem country. Kalf became a great chief, and was a man of +very great understanding. + + + +117. KING OLAF'S JOURNEY TO THE UPLANDS. + +When King Olaf had been seven years (A.D. 1015-1021) in Norway +the earls Thorfin and Bruse came to him, as before related, in +the summer, from Orkney, and he became master of their land. The +same summer Olaf went to North and South More, and in autumn to +Raumsdal. He left his ships there, and came to the Uplands, and +to Lesjar. Here he laid hold of all the best men, and forced +them, both at Lesjar and Dovre, either to receive Christianity or +suffer death, if they were not so lucky as to escape. After they +received Christianity, the king took their sons in his hands as +hostages for their fidelity. The king stayed several nights at a +farm in Lesjar called Boar, where he placed priests. Then he +proceeded over Orkadal and Lorodal, and came down from the +Uplands at a place called Stafabrekka. There a river runs along +the valley, called the Otta, and a beautiful hamlet, by name +Loar, lies on both sides of the river, and the king could see far +down over the whole neighbourhood. "A pity it is," said the +king, "so beautiful a hamlet should be burnt." And he proceeded +down the valley with his people, and was all night on a farm +called Nes. The king took his lodging in a loft, where he slept +himself; and it stands to the present day, without anything in it +having been altered since. The king was five days there, and +summoned by message-token the people to a Thing, both for the +districts of Vagar, Lear, and Hedal; and gave out the message +along with the token, that they must either receive Christianity +and give their sons as hostages, or see their habitations burnt. +They came before the king, and submitted to his pleasure; but +some fled south down the valley. + + + +118. THE STORY OF DALE-GUDBRAND. + +There was a man called Dale-Gudbrand, who was like a king in the +valley (Gudbrandsdal), but was only herse in title. Sigvat the +skald compared him for wealth and landed property to Erling +Skjalgson. Sigvat sang thus concerning Erling: -- + + "I know but one who can compare + With Erling for broad lands and gear -- + Gudbrand is he, whose wide domains + Are most like where some small king reigns. + These two great bondes, I would say, + Equal each other every way. + He lies who says that he can find + One by the other left behind." + +Gudbrand had a son, who is here spoken of. Now when Gudbrand +received the tidings that King Olaf was come to Lear, and obliged +people to accept Christianity, he sent out a message-token, and +summoned all the men in the valley to meet him at a farm called +Hundthorp. All came, so that the number could not be told; for +there is a lake in the neighbourhood called Laugen, so that +people could come to the place both by land and by water. There +Gudbrand held a Thing with them, and said, "A man is come to Loar +who is called Olaf, and will force upon us another faith than +what we had before, and will break in pieces all our gods. He +says that he has a much greater and more powerful god; and it is +wonderful that the earth does not burst asunder under him, or +that our god lets him go about unpunished when he dares to talk +such things. I know this for certain, that if we carry Thor, who +has always stood by us, out of our temple that is standing upon +this farm, Olaf's god will melt away, and he and his men be made +nothing so soon as Thor looks upon them." Then the bondes all +shouted as one person that Olaf should never get away with life +if he came to them; and they thought he would never dare to come +farther south through the valley. They chose out 700 men to go +northwards to Breida, to watch his movements. The leader of this +band was Gudbrand's son, eighteen years of age, and with him were +many other men of importance. When they came to a farm called +Hof they heard of the king; and they remained three nights there. +People streamed to them from all parts, from Lesjar, Loar, and +Vagar, who did not wish to receive Christianity. The king and +Bishop Sigurd fixed teachers in Loaf and in Vagar. From thence +they went round Vagarost, and came down into the valley at Sil, +where they stayed all night, and heard the news that a great +force of men were assembled against them. The bondes who were in +Breida heard also of the king's arrival, and prepared for battle. +As soon as the king arose in the morning he put on his armour, +and went southwards over the Sil plains, and did not halt until +he came to Breida, where he saw a great army ready for battle. +Then the king drew up his troops, rode himself at the head of +them, and began a speech to the bondes, in which he invited them +to adopt Christianity. They replied, "We shall give thee +something else to do to-day than to be mocking us;" and raised a +general shout, striking also upon their shields with their +weapons. Then the king's men ran forward and threw their spears; +but the bondes turned round instantly and fled, so that only few +men remained behind. Gudbrand's son was taken prisoner; but the +king gave him his life, and took him with him. The king was four +days here. Then the king said to Gudbrand's son, "Go home now to +thy father, and tell him I expect to be with him soon." + +He went accordingly, and told his father the news, that they had +fallen in with the king, and fought with him; but that their +whole army, in the very beginning, took flight. "I was taken +prisoner," said he, "but the king gave me my life and liberty, +and told me to say to thee that he will soon be here. And now we +have not 200 men of the force we raised against him; therefore I +advise thee, father, not to give battle to that man." + +Says Gudbrand, "It is easy to see that all courage has left thee, +and it was an unlucky hour ye went out to the field. Thy +proceeding will live long in the remembrance of people, and I see +that thy fastening thy faith on the folly that man is going about +with has brought upon thee and thy men so great a disgrace." + +But the night after, Gudbrand dreamt that there came to him a man +surrounded by light, who brought great terror with him, and said +to him, "Thy son made no glorious expedition against King Olaf; +but still less honour wilt thou gather for thyself by holding a +battle with him. Thou with all thy people wilt fall; wolves will +drag thee, and all thine, away; ravens wilt tear thee in +stripes." At this dreadful vision he was much afraid, and tells +it to Thord Istermage, who was chief over the valley. He +replies, "The very same vision came to me." In the morning they +ordered the signal to sound for a Thing, and said that it +appeared to them advisable to hold a Thing with the man who had +come from the north with this new teaching, to know if there was +any truth in it. Gudbrand then said to his son, "Go thou, and +twelve men with thee, to the king who gave thee thy life." He +went straightway, and found the king, and laid before him their +errand; namely, that the bondes would hold a Thing with him, and +make a truce between them and him. The king was content; and +they bound themselves by faith and law mutually to hold the peace +so long as the Thing lasted. After this was settled the men +returned to Gudbrand and Thord, and told them there was made a +firm agreement for a truce. The king, after the battle with the +son of Gudbrand, had proceeded to Lidstad, and remained there for +five days: afterwards he went out to meet the bondes, and hold a +Thing with them. On that day there fell a heavy rain. When the +Thing was seated, the king stood up and said that the people in +Lesjar, Loaf, and Vagar had received Christianity, broken down +their houses of sacrifice, and believed now in the true God who +had made heaven and earth and knows all things. + +Thereupon the king sat down, and Gudbrand replies, "We know +nothing of him whom thou speakest about. Dost thou call him God, +whom neither thou nor any one else can see? But we have a god +who call be seen every day, although he is not out to-day, +because the weather is wet, and he will appear to thee terrible +and very grand; and I expect that fear will mix with your very +blood when he comes into the Thing. But since thou sayest thy +God is so great, let him make it so that to-morrow we have a +cloudy day but without rain, and then let us meet again." + +The king accordingly returned home to his lodging, taking +Gudbrand's son as a hostage; but he gave them a man as hostage in +exchange. In the evening the king asked Gudbrand's son what like +their god was. He replied, that he bore the likeness of Thor; +had a hammer in his hand; was of great size, but hollow within; +and had a high stand, upon which he stood when he was out. +"Neither gold nor silver are wanting about him, and every day he +receives four cakes of bread, besides meat." They then went to +bed, but the king watched all night in prayer. When day dawned +the king went to mass, then to table, and from thence to the +Thing. The weather was such as Gudbrand desired. Now the bishop +stood up in his choir-robes, with bishop's coif upon his head, +and bishop's staff in his hands. He spoke to the bondes of the +true faith, told the many wonderful acts of God, and concluded +his speech well. + +Thord Istermage replies, "Many things we are told of by this +horned man with the staff in his hand crooked at the top like a +ram's horn; but since ye say, comrades, that your god is so +powerful, and can do so many wonders, tell him to make it clear +sunshine to-morrow forenoon, and then we shall meet here again, +and do one of two things, -- either agree with you about this +business, or fight you." And they separated for the day. + + + +119. DALE-GUDBRAND IS BAPTIZED. + +There was a man with King Olaf called Kolbein Sterke (the +strong), who came from a family in the Fjord district. Usually +he was so equipped that he was girt with a sword, and besides +carried a great stake, otherwise called a club, in his hands. +The king told Kolbein to stand nearest to him in the morning; and +gave orders to his people to go down in the night to where the +ships of the bondes lay and bore holes in them, and to set loose +their horses on the farms where they were; all which was done. +Now the king was in prayer all the night, beseeching God of His +goodness and mercy to release him from evil. When mass was +ended, and morning was grey, the king went to the Thing. When he +came there some bondes had already arrived, and they saw a great +crowd coming along, and bearing among them a huge man's image +glancing with gold and silver. When the bondes who were at the +Thing saw it they started up, and bowed themselves down before +the ugly idol. Thereupon it was set down upon the Thing-field; +and on the one side of it sat the bondes, and on the other the +king and his people. + +Then Dale-Gudbrand stood up, and said, "Where now, king, is thy +god? I think he will now carry his head lower; and neither thou, +nor the man with the horn whom ye call bishop, and sits there +beside thee, are so bold to-day as on the former days; for now +our god, who rules over all, is come, and looks on you with an +angry eye; and now I see well enough that ye are terrified, and +scarcely dare to raise your eyes. Throw away now all your +opposition, and believe in the god who has all your fate in his +hands." + +The king now whispers to Kolbein Sterke, without the bondes +perceiving it, "If it come so in the course of my speech that the +bondes look another way than towards their idol, strike him as +hard as thou canst with thy club." + +The king then stood up and spoke. "Much hast thou talked to us +this morning, and greatly hast thou wondered that thou canst not +see our God; but we expect that he will soon come to us. Thou +wouldst frighten us with thy god, who is both blind and deaf, and +can neither save himself nor others, and cannot even move about +without being carried; but now I expect it will be but a short +time before he meets his fate: for turn your eyes towards the +east, -- behold our God advancing in great light." + +The sun was rising, and all turned to look. At that moment +Kolbein gave their god a stroke, so that the idol burst asunder; +and there ran out of it mice as big almost as cats, and reptiles, +and adders. The bondes were so terrified that some fled to their +ships; but when they sprang out upon them they filled with water, +and could not get away. Others ran to their horses, but could +not find them. The king then ordered the bondes to be called +together, saying he wanted to speak with them; on which the +bondes came back, and the Thing was again seated. + +The king rose up and said, "I do not understand what your noise +and running mean. Ye see yourselves what your god can do, -- the +idol ye adorned with gold and silver, and brought meat and +provisions to. Ye see now that the protecting powers who used it +were the mice and adders, reptiles and paddocks; and they do ill +who trust to such, and will not abandon this folly. Take now +your gold and ornaments that are lying strewed about on the +grass, and give them to your wives and daughters; but never hang +them hereafter upon stock or stone. Here are now two conditions +between us to choose upon, -- either accept Christianity, or +fight this very day; and the victory be to them to whom the God +we worship gives it." + +Then Dale-Gudbrand stood up and said, "We have sustained great +damage upon our god; but since he will not help us, we will +believe in the God thou believest in." + +Then all received Christianity. The bishop baptized Gudbrand and +his son. King Olaf and Bishop Sigurd left behind them teachers, +and they who met as enemies parted as friends; and Gudbrand built +a church in the valley. + + + +120. HEDEMARK BAPTIZED. + +King Olaf proceeded from thence to Hedemark, and baptized there; +but as he had formerly carried away their kings as prisoners, he +did not venture himself, after such a deed, to go far into the +country with few people at that time, but a small part of +Hedemark was baptized; but the king did not desist from his +expedition before he had introduced Christianity over all +Hedemark, consecrated churches, and placed teachers. He then +went to Hadaland and Thoten, improving the customs of the people, +and persisting until all the country was baptized. He then went +to Ringerike, where also all people went over to Christianity. +The people of Raumarike then heard that Olaf intended coming to +them, and they gathered a great force. They said among +themselves that the journey Olaf had made among them the last +time was not to be forgotten, and he should never proceed so +again. The king, notwithstanding, prepared for the journey. Now +when the king went up into Raumarike with his forces, the +multitude of bondes came against him at a river called Nitja; and +the bondes had a strong army, and began the battle as soon as +they met; but they soon fell short, and took to flight. They +were forced by this battle into a better disposition, and +immediately received Christianity; and the king scoured the whole +district, and did not leave it until all the people were made +Christians. He then went east to Soleys, and baptized that +neighbourhood. The skald Ottar Black came to him there, and +begged to be received among his men. Olaf the Swedish king had +died the winter before (A.D. 1021), and Onund, the son of Olaf, +was now the sole king over all Sweden. King Olaf returned, when +the winter (A.D. 1022) was far advanced, to Raumarike. There he +assembled a numerous Thing, at a place where the Eidsvold Things +have since been held. He made a law, that the Upland people +should resort to this Thing, and that Eidsvold laws should be +good through all the districts of the Uplands, and wide around in +other quarters, which also has taken place. As spring was +advancing, he rigged his ships, and went by sea to Tunsberg. He +remained there during the spring, and the time the town was most +frequented, and goods from other countries were brought to the +town for sale. There had been a good year in Viken, and +tolerable as far north as Stad; but it was a very dear time in +all the country north of there. + + + +121. RECONCILIATION OF THE KING AND EINAR. + +In spring (A.D. 1022) King Olaf sent a message west to Agder, and +north all the way to Hordaland and Rogaland, prohibiting the +exporting or selling of corn, malt, or meal; adding, that he, as +usual, would come there with his people in guest-quarters. The +message went round all the districts; but the king remained in +Viken all summer, and went east to the boundary of the country. +Einar Tambaskelfer had been with the Swedish king Olaf since the +death of his relation Earl Svein, and had, as the khag's man, +received great fiefs from him. Now that the king was dead, Einar +had a great desire to come into friendship agreement with Olaf; +and the same spring messages passed between them about it. While +the king was lying in the Gaut river, Einar Tambaskelfer came +there with some men; and after treating about an agreement, it +was settled that Einar should go north to Throndhjem, and there +take possession of all the lands and property which Bergliot had +received in dower. Thereupon Einar took his way north; but the +king remained behind in Viken, and remained long in Sarpsborg in +autumn (A.D. 1022), and during the first part of winter. + + + +122. RECONCILIATION OF THE KING AND ERLING. + +Erling Skjalgson held his dominion so, that all north from Sogn +Lake, and east to the Naze, the bondes stood under him; and +although he had much smaller royal fiefs than formerly, still so +great a dread of him prevailed that nobody dared to do anything +against his will, so that the king thought his power too great. +There was a man called Aslak Fitiaskalle, who was powerful and of +high birth. Erling's father Skjalg, and Aslak's father Askel, +were brother's sons. Aslak was a great friend of King Olaf, and +the king settled him in South Hordaland, where he gave him a +great fief, and great income, and ordered him in no respect to +give way to Erling. But this came to nothing when the king was +not in the neighbourhood; for then Erling would reign as he used +to do, and was not more humble because Aslak would thrust himself +forward as his equal. At last the strife went so far that Aslak +could not keep his place, but hastened to King Olaf, and told him +the circumstances between him and Erling. The king told Aslak to +remain with him until he should meet Erling; and sent a message +to Erling that he should come to him in spring at Tunsberg. When +they all arrived there they held a meeting at which the king said +to him, "It is told me concerning thy government, Erling, that no +man from Sogn Lake to the Naze can enjoy his freedom for thee; +although there are many men there who consider themselves born to +udal rights, and have their privileges like others born as they +are. Now, here is your relation Aslak, who appears to have +suffered great inconvenience from your conduct; and I do not know +whether he himself is in fault, or whether he suffers because I +have placed him to defend what is mine; and although I name him, +there are many others who have brought the same complaint before +us, both among those who are placed in office in our districts, +and among the bailiffs who have our farms to manage, and are +obliged to entertain me and my people." + +Erling replies to this, "I will answer at once. I deny +altogether that I have ever injured Aslak, or any one else, for +being in your service; but this I will not deny, that it is now, +as it has long been, that each of us relations will willingly be +greater than the other: and, moreover, I freely acknowledge that +I am ready to bow my neck to thee, King Olaf; but it is more +difficult for me to stoop before one who is of slave descent in +all his generation, although he is now your bailiff, or before +others who are but equal to him in descent, although you bestow +honours on them." + +Now the friends of both interfered, and entreated that they would +be reconciled; saying, that the king never could have such +powerful aid as from Erling, "if he was your friend entirely." +On the other hand, they represent to Erling that he should give +up to the king; for if he was in friendship with the king, it +would be easy to do with all the others what he pleased. The +meeting accordingly ended so that Erling should retain the fiefs +he formerly had, and every complaint the king had against Erling +should be dropped; but Skjalg, Erling's son, should come to the +king, and remain in his power. Then Aslak returned to his +dominions, and the two were in some sort reconciled. Erling +returned home also to his domains, and followed his own way of +ruling them. + + + +123. HERE BEGINS THE STORY OF ASBJORN SELSBANE. + +There was a man named Sigurd Thoreson, a brother of Thorer Hund +of Bjarkey Island. Sigurd was married to Sigrid Skjalg's +daughter, a sister of Erling. Their son, called Asbjorn, became +as he grew up a very able man. Sigurd dwelt at Omd in +Thrandarnes, and was a very rich and respected man. He had not +gone into the king's service; and Thorer in so far had attained +higher dignity than his brother, that he was the king's +lenderman. But at home, on his farm, Sigurd stood in no respect +behind his brother in splendour and magnificence. As long as +heathenism prevailed, Sigurd usually had three sacrifices every +year: one on winter-night's eve, one on mid-winter's eve, and the +third in summer. Although he had adopted Christianity, he +continued the same custom with his feasts: he had, namely, a +great friendly entertainment at harvest time; a Yule feast in +winter, to which he invited many; the third feast he had about +Easter, to which also he invited many guests. He continued this +fashion as long as he lived. Sigurd died on a bed of sickness +when Asbjorn was eighteen years old. He was the only heir of his +father, and he followed his father's custom of holding three +festivals every year. Soon after Asbjorn came to his heritage +the course of seasons began to grow worse, and the corn harvests +of the people to fail; but Asbjorn held his usual feasts, and +helped himself by having old corn, and an old provision laid up +of all that was useful. But when one year had passed and another +came, and the crops were no better than the year before, Sigrid +wished that some if not all of the feasts should be given up. +That Asbjorn would not consent to, but went round in harvest +among his friends, buying corn where he could get it, and some he +received in presents. He thus kept his feasts this winter also; +but the spring after people got but little seed into the ground, +for they had to buy the seed-corn. Then Sigurd spoke of +diminishing the number of their house-servants. That Asbjorn +would not consent to, but held by the old fashion of the house in +all things. In summer (A.D. 1022) it appeared again that there +would be a bad year for corn; and to this came the report from +the south that King Olaf prohibited all export of corn, malt, or +meal from the southern to the northern parts of the country. +Then Asbjorn perceived that it would be difficult to procure what +was necessary for a house-keeping, and resolved to put into the +water a vessel for carrying goods which he had, and which was +large enough to go to sea with. The ship was good, all that +belonged to her was of the best, and in the sails were stripes of +cloth of various colours. Asbjorn made himself ready for a +voyage, and put to sea with twenty men. They sailed from the +north in summer; and nothing is told of their voyage until one +day, about the time the days begin to shorten, they came to +Karmtsund, and landed at Augvaldsnes. Up in the island Karmt +there is a large farm, not far from the sea, and a large house +upon it called Augvaldsnes, which was a king's house, with an +excellent farm, which Thorer Sel, who was the king's bailiff, had +under his management. Thorer was a man of low birth, but had +swung himself up in the world as an active man; and he was polite +in speech, showy in clothes, and fond of distinction, and not apt +to give way to others, in which he was supported by the favour of +the king. He was besides quick in speech, straightforward, and +free in conversation. Asbjorn, with his company, brought up +there for the night; and in the morning, when it was light, +Thorer went down to the vessel with some men, and inquired who +commanded the splendid ship. Asbjorn named his own and his +father's name. Thorer asks where the voyage was intended for, +and what was the errand. + +Asbjorn replies, that he wanted to buy corn and malt; saying, as +was true, that it was a very dear time north in the country. +"But we are told that here the seasons are good; and wilt thou, +farmer, sell us corn? I see that here are great corn stacks, and +it would be very convenient if we had not to travel farther." + +Thorer replies, "I will give thee the information that thou +needst not go farther to buy corn, or travel about here in +Rogaland; for I can tell thee that thou must turn about, and not +travel farther, for the king forbids carrying corn out of this to +the north of the country. Sail back again, Halogalander, for +that will be thy safest course." + +Asbjorn replies, "If it be so, bonde, as thou sayest, that we can +get no corn here to buy, I will, notwithstanding, go forward upon +my errand, and visit my family in Sole, and see my relation +Erling's habitation." + +Thorer: "How near is thy relationship to Erling?" + +Asbjorn: "My mother is his sister." + +Thorer: "It may be that I have spoken heedlessly, if so be that +thou art sister's son of Erling." + +Thereupon Asbjorn and his crew struck their tents, and turned the +ship to sea. Thorer called after them. "A good voyage, and come +here again on your way back." Asbjorn promised to do so, sailed +away, and came in the evening to Jadar. Asbjorn went on shore +with ten men; the other ten men watched the ship. When Asbjorn +came to the house he was very well received, and Erling was very +glad to see him, placed him beside himself, and asked him all the +news in the north of the country. Asbjorn concealed nothing of +his business from him; and Erling said it happened unfortunately +that the king had just forbid the sale of corn. "And I know no +man here." says he, "who has courage to break the king's order, +and I find it difficult to keep well with the king, so many are +trying to break our friendship." + +Asbjorn replies, "It is late before we learn the truth. In my +childhood I was taught that my mother was freeborn throughout her +whole descent, and that Erling of Sole was her boldest relation; +and now I hear thee say that thou hast not the freedom, for the +king's slaves here in Jadar, to do with thy own corn what thou +pleasest." + +Erling looked at him, smiled through his teeth, and said, "Ye +Halogalanders know less of the king's power than we do here; but +a bold man thou mayst be at home in thy conversation. Let us now +drink, my friend, and we shall see tomorrow what can be done in +thy business." + +They did so, and were very merry all the evening. The following +day Erling and Asbjorn talked over the matter again, and Erling +said. "I have found out a way for you to purchase corn, Asbjorn. +It is the same thing to you whoever is the seller." He answered +that he did not care of whom he bought the corn, if he got a good +right to his purchase. Erling said. "It appears to me probable +that my slaves have quite as much corn as you require to buy; and +they are not subject to law, or land regulation, like other men." +Asbjorn agreed to the proposal. The slaves were now spoken to +about the purchase, and they brought forward corn and malt, which +they sold to Asbjorn, so that he loaded his vessel with what he +wanted. When he was ready for sea Erling followed him on the +road, made him presents of friendship, and they took a kind +farewell of each other. Asbjorn got a good breeze, landed in the +evening at Karmtsund, near to Augvaldsnes, and remained there for +the night. Thorer Sel had heard of Asbjorn's voyage, and also +that his vessel was deeply laden. Thorer summoned people to him +in the night, so that before daylight he had sixty men; and with +these he went against Asbjorn as soon as it was light, and went +out to the ship just as Asbjorn and his men were putting on their +clothes. Asbjorn saluted Thorer, and Thorer asked what kind of +goods Asbjorn had in the vessel. + +He replied, "Corn and malt." + +Thorer said, "Then Erling is doing as he usually does, and +despising the king's orders, and is unwearied in opposing him in +all things, insomuch that it is wonderful the king suffers it." + +Thorer went on scolding in this way, and when he was silent +Asbjorn said that Erling's slaves had owned the corn. + +Thorer replied hastily, that he did not regard Erling's tricks. +"And now, Asbjorn, there is no help for it; ye must either go on +shore, or we will throw you overboard; for we will not be +troubled with you while we are discharging the cargo." + +Asbjorn saw that he had not men enough to resist Thorer; +therefore he and his people landed, and Thorer took the whole +cargo out of the vessel. When the vessel was discharged Thorer +went through the ship, and observed. "Ye Halogalanders have good +sails: take the old sail of our vessel and give it them; it is +good enough for those who are sailing in a light vessel." Thus +the sails were exchanged. When this was done Asbjorn and his +comrades sailed away north along the coast, and did not stop +until they reached home early in whiter. This expedition was +talked of far and wide, and Asbjorn had no trouble that winter in +making feasts at home. Thorer Hund invited Asbjorn and his +mother, and also all whom they pleased to take along with him, to +a Yule feast; but Asbjorn sat at home, and would not travel, and +it was to be seen that Thorer thought Asbjorn despised his +invitation, since he would not come. Thorer scoffed much at +Asbjorn's voyage. "Now," said he, "it is evident that Asbjorn +makes a great difference in his respect towards his relations; +for in summer he took the greatest trouble to visit his relation +Erling in Jadar, and now will not take the trouble to come to me +in the next house. I don't know if he thinks there may be a +Thorer Sel in his way upon every holm." Such words, and the like +sarcasms, Asbjorn heard of; and very ill satisfied he was with +his voyage, which had thus made him a laughing-stock to the +country, and he remained at home all winter, and went to no +feasts. + + + +124. MURDER OF THORER SEL. + +Asbjorn had a long-ship standing in the noust (shipshed), and it +was a snekke (cutter) of twenty benches; and after Candlemas +(February 2, 1023), he had the vessel put in the water, brought +out all his furniture, and rigged her out. He then summoned to +him his friends and people, so that he had nearly ninety men all +well armed. When he was ready for sea, and got a wind, he sailed +south along the coast, but as the wind did not suit, they +advanced but slowly. When they came farther south they steered +outside the rocks, without the usual ships' channel, keeping to +sea as much as it was possible to do so. Nothing is related of +his voyage before the fifth day of Easter (April 18, 1023), when, +about evening, they came on the outside of Karmt Island. This +island is so shaped that it is very long, but not broad at its +widest part; and without it lies the usual ships' channel. It is +thickly inhabited; but where the island is exposed to the ocean +great tracts of it are uncultivated. Asbjorn and his men landed +at a place in the island that was uninhabited. After they had +set up their ship-tents Asbjorn said, "Now ye must remain here +and wait for me. I will go on land in the isle, and spy what +news there may be which we know nothing of." Asbjorn had on mean +clothes, a broadbrimmed hat, a fork in his hand, but had girt on +his sword under his clothes. He went up to the land, and in +through the island; and when he came upon a hillock, from which +he could see the house on Augvaldsnes, and on as far as +Karmtsund, he saw people in all quarters flocking together by +land and by sea, and all going up to the house of Augvaldsnes. +This seemed to him extraordinary; and therefore he went up +quietly to a house close by, in which servants were cooking meat. +From their conversation he discovered immediately that the king +Olaf had come there to a feast, and that he had just sat down to +table. Asbjorn turned then to the feasting-room, and when he +came into the ante-room one was going in and another coming out; +but nobody took notice of him. The hall-door was open, and he +saw that Thorer Sel stood before the table of the high-seat. It +was getting late in the evening, and Asbjorn heard people ask +Thorer what had taken place between him and Asbjorn; and Thorer +had a long story about it, in which he evidently departed from +the truth. Among other things he heard a man say, "How did +Asbjorn behave when you discharged his vessel?" Thorer replied, +"When we were taking out the cargo he bore it tolerably, but not +well; and when we took the sail from him he wept." When Asbjorn +heard this he suddenly drew his sword, rushed into the hall, and +cut at Thorer. The stroke took him in the neck, so that the head +fell upon the table before the king, and the body at his feet, +and the table-cloth was soiled with blood from top to bottom. +The king ordered him to be seized and taken out. This was done. +They laid hands on Asbjorn, and took him from the hall. The +table-furniture and table-cloths were removed, and also Thorer's +corpse, and all the blood wiped up. The king was enraged to the +highest; but remained quiet in speech, as he always was when in +anger. + + + +125. OF SKJALG, THE SON OF ERLING SKJALGSON. + +Skjalg Erlingson stood up, went before the king, and said, "Now +may it go, as it often does, that every case will admit of +alleviation. I will pay thee the mulct for the bloodshed on +account of this man, so that he may retain life and limbs. All +the rest determine and do, king, according to thy pleasure." + +The king replies, "Is it not a matter of death, Skjalg, that a +man break the Easter peace; and in the next place that he kills a +man in the king's lodging; and in the third that he makes my feet +his execution-block, although that may appear a small matter to +thee and thy father?" + +Skjalg replies, "It is ill done, king, in as far as it displeases +thee; but the deed is, otherwise, done excellently well. But if +the deed appear to thee so important, and be so contrary to thy +will, yet may I expect something for my services from thee; and +certainly there are many who will say that thou didst well." + +The king replies, "Although thou hast made me greatly indebted to +thee, Skjalg, for thy services, yet I will not for thy sake break +the law, or cast away my own dignity." + +Then Skjalg turned round, and went out of the hall. Twelve men +who had come with Skjalg all followed him, and many others went +out with him. Skjalg said to Thorarin Nefiulfson, "If thou wilt +have me for a friend, take care that this man be not killed +before Sunday." Thereupon Skjalg and his men set off, took a +rowing boat which he had, and rowed south as fast as they could, +and came to Jadar with the first glimpse of morning. They went +up instantly to the house, and to the loft in which Erling slept. +Skjalg rushed so hard against the door that it burst asunder at +the nails. Erling and the others who were within started up. He +was in one spring upon his legs, grasped his shield and sword, +and rushed to the door, demanding who was there. Skjalg named +himself, and begs him to open the door. Erling replies, "It was +most likely to be thee who hast behaved so foolishly; or is there +any one who is pursuing thee?" Thereupon the door was unlocked. +Then said Skjalg, "Although it appears to thee that I am so +hasty, I suppose our relation Asbjorn will not think my +proceedings too quick; for he sits in chains there in the north +at Augvaldsnes, and it would be but manly to hasten back and +stand by him." The father and son then had a conversation +together, and Skjalg related the whole circumstances of Thorer +Sel's murder. + + + +126. OF THORARIN NEFIULFSON. + +King Olaf took his seat again when everything in the hall was put +in order, and was enraged beyond measure. He asked how it was +with the murderer. He was answered, that he was sitting out upon +the doorstep under guard. + +The king says, "Why is he not put to death?" + +Thorarin Nefiulfson replies, "Sire, would you not call it murder +to kill a man in the night-time?" + +The king answers, "Put him in irons then, and kill him in the +morning." + +Then Asbjorn was laid in chains, and locked up in a house for the +night. The day after the king heard the morning mass, and then +went to the Thing, where he sat till high mass. As he was going +to mass he said to Thorarin, "Is not the sun high enough now in +the heavens that your friend Asbjorn may be hanged?" + +Thorarin bowed before the king, and said, "Sire, it was said by +Bishop Sigurd on Friday last, that the King who has all things in +his power had to endure great temptation of spirit; and blessed +is he who rather imitates him, than those who condemned the man +to death, or those who caused his slaughter. It is not long till +tomorrow, and that is a working day." + +The king looked at him, and said, "Thou must take care then that +he is not put to death to-day; but take him under thy charge, and +know for certain that thy own life shall answer for it if he +escape in any way." + +Then the king went away. Thorarin went also to where Asbjorn lay +in irons, took off his chains, and brought him to a small room, +where he had meat and drink set before him, and told him what the +king had determined in case Asbjorn ran away. Asbjorn replies, +that Thorarin need not be afraid of him. Thorarin sat a long +while with him during the day, and slept there all night. On +Saturday the king arose and went to the early mass, and from +thence he went to the Thing, where a great many bondes were +assembled, who had many complaints to be determined. The king +sat there long in the day, and it was late before the people went +to high mass. Thereafter the king went to table. When he had +got meat he sat drinking for a while, so that the tables were not +removed. Thorarin went out to the priest who had the church +under his care, and gave him two marks of silver to ring in the +Sabbath as soon as the king's table was taken away. When the +king had drunk as much as he wished the tables were removed. +Then said the king, that it was now time for the slaves to go to +the murderer and put him to death. In the same moment the bell +rang in the Sabbath. + +Then Thorarin went before the king, and said, "The Sabbath-peace +this man must have, although he has done evil." + +The king said, "Do thou take care, Thorarin, that he do not +escape." + +The king then went to the church, and attended the vesper +service, and Thorarin sat the whole day with Asbjorn. On Sunday +the bishop visited Asbjorn, confessed him, and gave him orders to +hear high mass. Thorarin then went to the king, and asked him to +appoint men to guard the murderer. "I will now," he said, "be +free of this charge." The king thanked him for his care, and +ordered men to watch over Asbjorn, who was again laid in chains. +When the people went to high mass Asbjorn was led to the church, +and he stood outside of the church with his guard; but the king +and all the people stood in the church at mass. + + + +127. ERLING'S RECONCILIATION WITH KING OLAF. + +Now we must again take up our story where we left it, -- that +Erling and his son Skjalg held a council on this affair, and +according to the resolution of Erling, and of Skjalg and his +other sons, it was determined to assemble a force and send out +message-tokens. A great multitude of people accordingly came +together. They got ready with all speed, rigged their ships, and +when they reckoned upon their force they found they had nearly +1500 men. With this war-force they set off, and came on Sunday +to Augvaldsnes on Karmt Island. They went straight up to the +house with all the men, and arrived just as the Scripture lesson +was read. They went directly to the church, took Asbjorn, and +broke off his chains. At the tumult and clash of arms all who +were outside of the church ran into it; but they who were in the +church looked all towards them, except the king, who stood still, +without looking around him. Erling and his sons drew up their +men on each side of the path which led from the church to the +hall, and Erling with his sons stood next to the hall. When high +mass was finished the king went immediately out of the church, +and first went through the open space between the ranks drawn up, +and then his retinue, man by man; and as he came to the door +Erling placed himself before the door, bowed to the king, and +saluted him. The king saluted him in return, and prayed God to +help him. Erling took up the word first, and said, "My relation, +Asbjorn, it is reported to me, has been guilty of misdemeanor, +king; and it is a great one, if he has done anything that incurs +your displeasure. Now I am come to entreat for him peace, and +such penalties as you yourself may determine; but that thereby he +redeem life and limb, and his remaining here in his native land." + +The king replies, "It appears to me, Erling, that thou thinkest +the case of Asbjorn is now in thy own power, and I do not +therefore know why thou speakest now as if thou wouldst offer +terms for him. I think thou hast drawn together these forces +because thou are determined to settle what is between us." + +Erling replies, "Thou only, king, shalt determine, and determine +so that we shall be reconciled." + +The king: "Thinkest thou, Erling, to make me afraid? And art +thou come here in such force with that expectation? No, that +shall not be; and if that be thy thought, I must in no way turn +and fly." + +Erling replies, "Thou hast no occasion to remind me how often I +have come to meet thee with fewer men than thou hadst. But now I +shall not conceal what lies in my mind, namely, that it is my +will that we now enter into a reconciliation; for otherwise I +expect we shall never meet again." Erling was then as red as +blood in the face. + +Now Bishop Sigurd came forward to the king and said, "Sire, I +entreat you on God Almighty's account to be reconciled with +Erling according to his offer, -- that the man shall retain life +and limb, but that thou shalt determine according to thy pleasure +all the other conditions." + +The king replies, "You will determine." + +Then said the bishop, "Erling, do thou give security for Asbjorn, +such as the king thinks sufficient, and then leave the conditions +to the mercy of the king, and leave all in his power." + +Erling gave a surety to the king on his part, which he accepted. + +Thereupon Asbjorn received his life and safety, and delivered +himself into the king's power, and kissed his hand. + +Erling then withdrew with his forces, without exchanging +salutation with the king; and the king went into the hall, +followed by Asbjorn. The king thereafter made known the terms of +reconciliation to be these: -- "In the first place, Asbjorn, thou +must submit to the law of the land, which commands that the man +who kills a servant of the king must undertake his service, if +the king will. Now I will that thou shalt undertake the office +of bailiff which Thorer Sel had, and manage my estate here in +Augvaldsnes." Asbjorn replies, that it should be according to +the king's will; "but I must first go home to my farm, and put +things in order there." The king was satisfied with this, and +proceeded to another guest-quarter. Asbjorn made himself ready +with his comrades, who all kept themselves concealed in a quiet +creek during the time Asbjorn was away from them. They had had +their spies out to learn how it went with him, and would not +depart without having some certain news of him. + + + +128. OF THORER HUND AND ASBJORN SELSBANE. + +Asbjorn then set out on his voyage, and about spring (A.D. 1023) +got home to his farm. After this exploit he was always called +Asbjorn Selsbane. Asbjorn had not been long at home before he +and his relation Thorer met and conversed together, and Thorer +asked Asbjorn particularly all about his journey, and about all +the circumstances which had happened on the course of it. +Asbjorn told everything as it had taken place. + +Then said Thorer, "Thou thinkest that thou hast well rubbed out +the disgrace of having been plundered in last harvest." + +"I think so," replies Asbjorn; "and what is thy opinion, cousin?" + +"That I will soon tell thee," said Thorer. "Thy first expedition +to the south of the country was indeed very disgraceful, and that +disgrace has been redeemed; but this expedition is both a +disgrace to thee and to thy family, if it end in thy becoming the +king's slave, and being put on a footing with that worst of men, +Thorer Sel. Show that thou art manly enough to sit here on thy +own property, and we thy relations shall so support thee that +thou wilt never more come into such trouble." + +Asbjorn found this advice much to his mind; and before they +parted it was firmly, determined that Asbjorn should remain on +his farm, and not go back to the king or enter into his service. +And he did so, and sat quietly at home on his farm. + + + +129. KING OLAF BAPTIZES IN VORS AND VALDERS. + +After King Olaf and Erling Skjalgson had this meeting at +Augvaldsnes, new differences arose between them, and increased +so much that they ended in perfect enmity. In spring (A.D. 1023) +the king proceeded to guest-quarters in Hordaland, and went up +also to Vors, because he heard there was but little of the true +faith among the people there. He held a Thing with the bondes at +a place called Vang, and a number of bondes came to it fully +armed. The king ordered them to adopt Christianity; but they +challenged him to battle, and it proceeded so far that the men +were drawn up on both sides. But when it came to the point such +a fear entered into the blood of the bondes that none would +advance or command, and they chose the part which was most to +their advantage; namely, to obey the king and receive +Christianity; and before the king left them they were all +baptized. One day it happened that the king was riding on his +way a singing of psalms, and when he came right opposite some +hills he halted and said, "Man after man shall relate these my +words, that I think it not advisable for any king of Norway to +travel hereafter between these hills." And it is a saying among +the people that the most kings since that time have avoided it. +The king proceeded to Ostrarfjord, and came to his ships, with +which he went north to Sogn, and had his living in guest-quarters +there in summer (A.D. 1023); when autumn approached he turned in +towards the Fjord district, and went from thence to Valders, +where the people were still heathen. The king hastened up to the +lake in Valders, came unexpectedly on the bondes, seized their +vessels, and went on board of them with all his men. He then +sent out message-tokens, and appointed a Thing so near the lake +that he could use the vessels if he found he required them. The +bondes resorted to the Thing in a great and well-armed host; and +when he commanded them to accept Christianity the bondes shouted +against him, told him to be silent, and made a great uproar and +clashing of weapons. But when the king saw that they would not +listen to what he would teach them, and also that they had too +great a force to contend with, he turned his discourse, and asked +if there were people at the Thing who had disputes with each +other which they wished him to settle. It was soon found by the +conversation of the bondes that they had many quarrels among +themselves, although they had all joined in speaking against +Christianity. When the bondes began to set forth their own +cases, each endeavored to get some upon his side to support him; +and this lasted the whole day long until evening, when the Thing +was concluded. When the bondes had heard that the king had +travelled to Valders, and was come into their neighborhood, they +had sent out message-tokens summoning the free and the unfree to +meet in arms, and with this force they had advanced against the +king; so that the neighbourhood all around was left without +people. When the Thing was concluded the bondes still remained +assembled; and when the king observed this he went on board his +ships, rowed in the night right across the water, landed in the +country there, and began to plunder and burn. The day after the +king's men rowed from one point of land to another, and over all +the king ordered the habitations to be set on fire. Now when the +bondes who were assembled saw what the king was doing, namely, +plundering and burning, and saw the smoke and flame of their +houses, they dispersed, and each hastened to his own home to see +if he could find those he had left. As soon as there came a +dispersion among the crowd, the one slipped away after the other, +until the whole multitude was dissolved. Then the king rowed +across the lake again, burning also on that side of the country. +Now came the bondes to him begging for mercy, and offering to +submit to him. He gave every man who came to him peace if he +desired it, and restored to him his goods; and nobody refused to +adopt Christianity. The king then had the people christened, and +took hostages from the bondes. He ordered churches to be built +and consecrated, and placed teachers in them. He remained a long +time here in autumn, and had his ships drawn across the neck of +land between the two lakes. The king did not go far from the +sides of the lakes into the country, for he did not much trust +the bondes. When the king thought that frost might be expected, +he went further up the country, and came to Thoten. Arnor, the +earl's skald, tells how King Olaf burnt in the Uplands, in the +poem he composed concerning the king's brother King Harald: -- + + "Against the Upland people wroth, + Olaf, to most so mild, went forth: + The houses burning, + All people mourning; + Who could not fly + Hung on gallows high. + It was, I think, in Olaf's race + The Upland people to oppress." + +Afterwards King Olaf went north through the valleys to +Dovrefield, and did not halt until he reached the Throndhjem +district and arrived at Nidaros, where he had ordered winter +provision to be collected, and remained all winter (A.D. 1024). +This was the tenth year of his reign. + + + +130. OF EINAR TAMBASKELFER. + +The summer before Einar Tambaskelfer left the country, and went +westward to England (A.D. 1023). There he met his relative Earl +Hakon, and stayed some time with him. He then visited King +Canute, from whom he received great presents. Einar then went +south all the way to Rome, and came back the following summer +(A.D. 1024), and returned to his house and land. King Olaf and +Einar did not meet this time. + + + +131. THE BIRTH OF KING MAGNUS. + +There was a girl whose name was Alfhild, and who was usually +called the king's slave-woman, although she was of good descent. +She was a remarkably handsome girl, and lived in King Olaf's +court. It was reported this spring that Alfhild was with child, +and the king's confidential friends knew that he was father of +the child. It happened one night that Alfhild was taken ill, and +only few people were at hand; namely, some women, priests, Sigvat +the skald, and a few others. Alfhild was so ill that she was +nearly dead; and when she was delivered of a man-child, it was +some time before they could discover whether the child was in +life. But when the infant drew breath, although very weak, the +priest told Sigvat to hasten to the king, and tell him of the +event. + +He replies, "I dare not on any account waken the king; for he has +forbid that any man should break his sleep until he awakens of +himself." + +The priest replies, "It is of necessity that this child be +immediately baptized, for it appears to me there is but little +life in it." + +Sigvat said, "I would rather venture to take upon me to let thee +baptize the child, than to awaken the king; and I will take it +upon myself if anything be amiss, and will give the child a +name." + +They did so; and the child was baptized, and got the name of +Magnus. The next morning, when the king awoke and had dressed +himself, the circumstance was told him. He ordered Sigvat to be +called, and said. "How camest thou to be so bold as to have my +child baptized before I knew anything about it?" + +Sigvat replies, "Because I would rather give two men to God than +one to the devil." + +The king -- "What meanest thou?" + +Sigvat -- "The child was near death, and must have been the +devil's if it had died as a heathen, and now it is God's. And I +knew besides that if thou shouldst be so angry on this account +that it affected my life, I would be God's also." + +The king asked, "But why didst thou call him Magnus, which is not +a name of our race?" + +Sigvat -- "I called him after King Carl Magnus, who, I knew, had +been the best man in the world." + +Then said the king, "Thou art a very lucky man, Sigvat; but it is +not wonderful that luck should accompany understanding. It is +only wonderful how it sometimes happens that luck attends +ignorant men, and that foolish counsel turns out lucky." The +king was overjoyed at the circumstance. The boy grew up, and +gave good promise as he advanced in age. + + + +132. THE MURDER OF ASBJORN SELSBANE. + +The same spring (A.D. 1024) the king gave into the hands of +Asmund Grankelson the half of the sheriffdom of the district of +Halogaland, which Harek of Thjotta had formerly held, partly in +fief, partly for defraying the king's entertainment in guest- +quarters. Asmund had a ship manned with nearly thirty well-armed +men. When Asmund came north he met Harek, and told him what the +king had determined with regard to the district, and produced to +him the tokens of the king's full powers. Harek said, "The king +had the right to give the sheriffdom to whom he pleased; but the +former sovereigns had not been in use to diminish our rights who +are entitled by birth to hold powers from the king, and to give +them into the hands of the peasants who never before held such +offices." But although it was evident that it was against +Harek's inclination, he allowed Asmund to take the sheriffdom +according to the king's order. Then Asmund proceeded home to his +father, stayed there a short time, and then went north to +Halogaland to his sheriffdom; and he came north to Langey Island, +where there dwelt two brothers called Gunstein and Karle, both +very rich and respectable men. Gunstein, the eldest of the +brothers, was a good husbandman. Karle was a handsome man in +appearance, and splendid in his dress; and both were, in many +respects, expert in all feats. Asmund was well received by them, +remained with them a while, and collected such revenues of his +sheriffdom as he could get. Karle spoke with Asmund of his wish +to go south with him and take service in the court of King Olaf, +to which Asmund encouraged him much, promising his influence with +the king for obtaining for Karle such a situation as he desired; +and Karle accordingly accompanied Asmund. Asmund heard that +Asbjorn, who had killed Thorer Sel, had gone to the market- +meeting of Vagar with a large ship of burden manned with nearly +twenty men, and that he was now expected from the south. Asmund +and his retinue proceeded on their way southwards along the coast +with a contrary wind, but there was little of it. They saw some +of the fleet for Vagar sailing towards them; and they privately +inquired of them about Asbjorn, and were told he was upon the way +coming from the south. Asmund and Karle were bedfellows, and +excellent friends. One day, as Asmund and his people were rowing +through a sound, a ship of burden came sailing towards them. The +ship was easily known, having high bulwarks, was painted with +white and red colours, and coloured cloth was woven in the sail. +Karle said to Asmund, "Thou hast often said thou wast curious to +see Asbjorn who killed Thorer Sel; and if I know one ship from +another, that is his which is coming sailing along." + +Asmund replies, "Be so good, comrade, and tell me which is he +when thou seest him." + +When the ships came alongside of each other, "That is Asbjorn," +said Karle; "the man sitting at the helm in a blue cloak." + +Asmund replies, "I shall make his blue cloak red;" threw a spear +at Asbjorn, and hit him in the middle of the body, so that it +flew through and through him, and stuck fast in the upper part of +the stern-post; and Asbjorn fell down dead from the helm. Then +each vessel sailed on its course, and Asbjorn's body was carried +north to Thrandarnes. Then Sigrid sent a message to Bjarkey Isle +to Thorer Hund, who came to her while they were, in the usual +way, dressing the corpse of Asbjorn. When he returned Sigrid +gave presents to all her friends, and followed Thorer to his +ship; but before they parted she said, "It has so fallen out, +Thorer, that my son has suffered by thy friendly counsel, but he +did not retain life to reward thee for it; but although I have +not his ability yet will I show my good will. Here is a gift I +give thee, which I expect thou wilt use. Here is the spear which +went through Asbjorn my son, and there is still blood upon it, to +remind thee that it fits the wound thou hast seen on the corpse +of thy brother's son Asbjorn. It would be a manly deed, if thou +shouldst throw this spear from thy hand so that it stood in +Olaf's breast; and this I can tell thee, that thou wilt be named +coward in every man's mouth, if thou dost not avenge Asbjorn." +Thereupon she turned about, and went her way. + +Thorer was so enraged at her words that he could not speak. He +neither thought of casting the spear from him, nor took notice of +the gangway; so that he would have fallen into the sea, if his +men had not laid hold of him as he was going on board his ship. +It was a feathered spear; not large, but the handle was gold- +mounted. Now Thorer rowed away with his people, and went home to +Bjarkey Isle. Asmund and his companions also proceeded on their +way until they came south to Throndhjem, where they waited on +King Olaf; and Asmund related to the king all that had happened +on the voyage. Karle became one of the king's court-men, and the +friendship continued between him and Asmund. They did not keep +secret the words that had passed between Asmund and Karle before +Asbjorn was killed; for they even told them to the king. But +then it happened, according to the proverb, that every one has a +friend in the midst of his enemies. There were some present who +took notice of the words, and they reached Thorer Hund's ears. + + + +133. OF KING OLAF. + +When spring (A.D. 1024) was advanced King Olaf rigged out his +ships, and sailed southwards in summer along the land. He held +Things with the bondes on the way, settled the law business of +the people, put to rights the faith of the country, and collected +the king's taxes wherever he came. In autumn he proceeded south +to the frontier of the country; and King Olaf had now made the +people Christians in all the great districts, and everywhere, by +laws, had introduced order into the country. He had also, as +before related, brought the Orkney Islands under his power, and +by messages had made many friends in Iceland, Greenland, and the +Farey Islands. King Olaf had sent timber for building a church +to Iceland, of which a church was built upon the Thing-field +where the General Thing is held, and had sent a bell for it, +which is still there. This was after the Iceland people had +altered their laws, and introduced Christianity, according to the +word King Olaf had sent them. After that time, many considerable +persons came from Iceland, and entered into King Olaf's service; +as Thorkel Eyjolfson, and Thorleif Bollason, Thord Kolbeinson, +Thord Barkarson, Thorgeir Havarson, Thormod Kalbrunar-skald. +King Olaf had sent many friendly presents to chief people in +Iceland; and they in return sent him such things as they had +which they thought most acceptable. Under this show of +friendship which the king gave Iceland were concealed many things +which afterwards appeared. + + + +134. KING OLAF'S MESSAGE TO ICELAND, AND THE COUNSELS OF THE + ICELANDERS. + +King Olaf this summer (A.D. 1024) sent Thorarin Nefiulfson to +Iceland on his errands; and Thorarin went out of Throndhjem fjord +along with the king, and followed him south to More. From thence +Thorarin went out to sea, and got such a favourable breeze that +after four days sail he landed at the Westman Isles, in Iceland. +He proceeded immediately to the Althing, and came just as the +people were upon the Lawhillock, to which he repaired. When the +cases of the people before the Thing had been determined +according to law, Thorarin Nefiulfson took up the word as +follows: -- "We parted four days ago from King Olaf Haraldson, +who sends God Almighty's and his own salutation to all the chiefs +and principal men of the land; as also to all the people in +general, men and women, young and old, rich and poor. He also +lets you know that he will be your sovereign if ye will become +his subjects, so that he and you will be friends, assisting each +other in all that is good." + +The people replied in a friendly way, that they would gladly be +the king's friends, if he would be a friend of the people of +their country. + +Then Thorarin again took up the word: -- "This follows in +addition to the king's message, that he will in friendship desire +of the people of the north district that they give him the +island, or out-rock, which lies at the mouth of Eyfjord, and is +called Grimsey, for which he will give you from his country +whatever good the people of the district may desire. He sends +this message particularly to Gudmund of Modruvellir to support +this matter, because he understands that Gudmund has most +influence in that quarter." + +Gudmund replies, "My inclination is greatly for King Olaf's +friendship, and that I consider much more useful than the out- +rock he desires. But the king has not heard rightly if he think +I have more power in this matter than any other, for the island +is a common. We, however, who have the most use of the isle, +will hold a meeting among ourselves about it." + +Then the people went to their tent-houses; and the Northland +people had a meeting among themselves, and talked over the +business, and every one spoke according to his judgment. Gudmund +supported the matter, and many others formed their opinions by +his. Then some asked why his brother Einar did not speak on the +subject. "We think he has the clearest insight into most +things." + +Einar answers, "I have said so little about the matter because +nobody has asked me about it; but if I may give my opinion, our +countrymen might just as well make themselves at once liable to +land-scat to King Olaf, and submit to all his exactions as he has +them among his people in Norway; and this heavy burden we will +lay not only upon ourselves, but on our sons, and their sons, and +all our race, and on all the community dwelling and living in +this land, which never after will be free from this slavery. Now +although this king is a good man, as I well believe him to be, +yet it must be hereafter, when kings succeed each other, that +some will be good. and some bad. Therefore if the people of this +country will preserve the freedom they have enjoyed since the +land was first inhabited, it is not advisable to give the king +the smallest spot to fasten himself upon the country by, and not +to give him any kind of scat or service that can have the +appearance of a duty. On the other hand, I think it very proper +that the people send the king such friendly presents of hawks or +horses, tents or sails, or such things which are suitable gifts; +and these are well applied if they are repaid with friendship. +But as to Grimsey Isle, I have to say, that although nothing is +drawn from it that can serve for food, yet it could support a +great war-force cruising from thence in long-ships; and then, I +doubt not, there would be distress enough at every poor peasant's +door." + +When Einar had thus explained the proper connection of the +matter, the whole community were of one mind that such a thing +should not be permitted; and Thorarin saw sufficiently well what +the result of his errand was to be. + + + +135. THE ANSWER OF THE ICELANDERS. + +The day following, Thorarin went again to the Lawhill, and +brought forward his errand in the following words: -- "King Olaf +sends his message to his friends here in the country, among whom +he reckons Gudmund Eyjolfson, Snorre Gode, Thorkel Eyjolfson, +Skapte the lagman, and Thorstein Halson, and desires them by me +to come to him on a friendly visit; and adds, that ye must not +excuse yourselves, if you regard his friendship as worth +anything." In their answer they thanked the king for his message +and added, that they would afterwards give a reply to it by +Thorarin when they had more closely considered the matter with +their friends. The chiefs now weighed the matter among +themselves, and each gave his own opinion about the journey. +Snorre and Skapte dissuaded from such a dangerous proceeding with +the people of Norway; namely, that all the men who had the most +to say in the country should at once leave Iceland. They added, +that from this message, and from what Einar had said, they had +the suspicion that the king intended to use force and strong +measures against the Icelanders if he ruled in the country. +Gudmund and Thorkel Eyjolfson insisted much that they should +follow King Olaf's invitation, and called it a journey of honour. +But when they had considered the matter on all sides, it was at +last resolved that they should not travel themselves, but that +each of them should send in his place a man whom they thought +best suited for it. After this determination the Thing was +closed, and there was no journey that summer. Thorarin made two +voyages that summer, and about harvest was back again at King +Olaf's, and reported the result of his mission, and that some of +the chiefs, or their sons, would come from Iceland according to +his message. + + + +136. OF THE PEOPLE OF THE FAREY ISLANDS. + +The same summer (A.D. 1024) there came from the Farey Islands to +Norway, on the king's invitation, Gille the lagman, Leif +Ossurson, Thoralf of Dimun, and many other bondes' sons. Thord +of Gata made himself ready for the voyage; but just as he was +setting out he got a stroke of palsy, and could not come, so he +remained behind. Now when the people from the Farey Isles +arrived at King Olaf's, he called them to him to a conference, +and explained the purpose of the journey he had made them take, +namely, that he would have scat from the Farey Islands, and also +that the people there should be subject to the laws which the +king should give them. In that meeting it appeared from the +king's words that he would make the Farey people who had come +answerable, and would bind them by oath to conclude this union. +He also offered to the men whom he thought the ablest to take +them into his service, and bestow honour and friendship on them. +These Farey men understood the king's words so, that they must +dread the turn the matter might take if they did not submit to +all that the king desired. Although they held several meetings +about the business before it ended, the king's desire at last +prevailed. Leif, Gille, and Thoralf went into the king's +service, and became his courtmen; and they, with all their +travelling companions, swore the oath to King Olaf, that the law +and land privilege which he set them should be observed in the +Farey Islands, and also the scat be levied that he laid upon +them. Thereafter the Farey people prepared for their return +home, and at their departure the king gave those who had entered +into his service presents in testimony of his friendship, and +they went their way. Now the king ordered a ship to be rigged, +manned it, and sent men to the Farey Islands to receive the scat +from the inhabitants which they should pay him. It was late +before they were ready; but they set off at last: and of their +journey all that is to be told is, that they did not come back, +and no scat either, the following summer; for nobody had come to +the Farey Isles, and no man had demanded scat there. + + + +137. OF THE MARRIAGE OF KETIL AND OF THORD TO THE KING'S SISTERS. + +King Olaf proceeded about harvest time to Viken, and sent a +message before him to the Uplands that they should prepare guest- +quarters for him, as he intended to be there in winter. +Afterwards he made ready for his journey, and went to the +Uplands, and remained the winter there; going about in guest- +quarters, and putting things to rights where he saw it needful, +advancing also the cause of Christianity wheresoever it was +requisite. It happened while King Olaf was in Hedemark that +Ketil Kalf of Ringanes courted Gunhild, a daughter of Sigurd Syr +and of King Olaf's mother Asta. Gunhild was a sister of King +Olaf, and therefore it belonged to the king to give consent and +determination to the business. He took it in a friendly way; for +he know Ketil, that he was of high birth, wealthy, and of good +understanding, and a great chief; and also he had long been a +great friend of King Olaf, as before related. All these +circumstances induced the king to approve of the match, and so it +was that Ketil got Gunhild. King Olaf was present at the +wedding. From thence the king went north to Gudbrandsdal, where +he was entertained in guest-quarters. There dwelt a man, by name +Thord Guthormson, on a farm called Steig; and he was the most +powerful man in the north end of the valley. When Thord and the +king met, Thord made proposals for Isrid, the daughter of +Gudbrand, and the sister of King Olaf's mother, as it belonged to +the king to give consent. After the matter was considered, it +was determined that the marriage should proceed, and Thord got +Isrid. Afterwards Thord was the king's faithful friend, and also +many of Thord's relations and friends, who followed his +footsteps. From thence King Olaf returned south through Thoten +and Hadaland, from thence to Ringerike, and so to Viken. In +spring (A.D. 1025) he went to Tunsberg, and stayed there while +there was the market-meeting, and a great resort of people. He +then had his vessels rigged out, and had many people about him. + + + +138. OF THE ICELANDERS. + +The same summer (A.D. 1025) came Stein, a son of the lagman +Skapte, from Iceland, in compliance with King Olaf's message; and +with him Thorod, a son of Snorre the gode, and Geller, a son of +Thorkel Eyjolfson, and Egil, a son of Hal of Sida, brother of +Thorstein Hal. Gudmund Eyjolfson had died the winter before. +These Iceland men repaired to King Olaf as soon as they had +opportunity; and when they met the king they were well received, +and all were in his house. The same summer King Olaf heard that +the ship was missing which he had sent the summer before to the +Farey Islands after the scat, and nobody knew what had become of +it. The king fitted out another ship, manned it, and sent it to +the Farey Islands for the scat. They got under weigh, and +proceeded to sea; but as little was ever heard of this vessel as +of the former one, and many conjectures were made about what had +become of them. + + + +139. HERE BEGINS THE STORY OF CANUTE THE GREAT. + +During this time Canute the Great, called by some Canute the Old, +was king of England and Denmark. Canute the Great was a son of +Svein Haraldson Forkedbeard, whose forefathers, for a long course +of generations, had ruled over Denmark. Harald Gormson, Canute's +grandfather, had conquered Norway after the fall of Harald +Grafeld, Gunhild's son, had taken scat from it, and had placed +Earl Hakon the Great to defend the country. The Danish King, +Svein Haraldson, ruled also over Norway, and placed his son-in- +law Earl Eirik, the son of Earl Hakon, to defend the country. +The brothers Eirik and Svein, Earl Hakon's sons, ruled the land +until Earl Eirik went west to England, on the invitation of his +brother-in-law Canute the Great, when he left behind his son Earl +Hakon, sister's son of Canute the Great, to govern Norway. But +when Olaf the Thick came first to Norway, as before related, he +took prisoner Earl Hakon the son of Eirik, and deposed him from +the kingdom. Then Hakon proceeded to his mother's brother, +Canute the Great, and had been with him constantly until the time +to which here in our saga we have now come. Canute the Great had +conquered England by blows and weapons, and had a long struggle +before the people of the land were subdued. But when he had set +himself perfectly firm in the government of the country, he +remembered that he also had right to a kingdom which he had not +brought under his authority; and that was Norway. He thought he +had hereditary right to all Norway; and his sister's son Hakon, +who had held a part of it, appeared to him to have lost it with +disgrace. The reason why Canute and Hakon had remained quiet +with respect to their claims upon Norway was, that when King Olaf +Haraldson landed in Norway the people and commonalty ran together +in crowds, and would hear of nothing but that Olaf should be king +over all the country, although some afterwards, who thought that +the people upon account of his power had no self-government left +to them, went out of the country. Many powerful men, or rich +bondes sons, had therefore gone to Canute the Great, and +pretended various errands; and every one who came to Canute and +desired his friendship was loaded with presents. With Canute, +too, could be seen greater splendour and pomp than elsewhere, +both with regard to the multitude of people who were daily in +attendance, and also to the other magnificent things about the +houses he owned and dwelt in himself. Canute the Great drew scat +and revenue from the people who were the richest of all in +northern lands; and in the same proportion as he had greater +revenues than other kings, he also made greater presents than +other kings. In his whole kingdom peace was so well established, +that no man dared break it. The people of the country kept the +peace towards each other, and had their old country law: and for +this he was greatly celebrated in all countries. And many of +those who came from Norway represented their hardships to Earl +Hakon, and some even to King Canute himself; and that the Norway +people were ready to turn back to the government of King Canute, +or Earl Hakon, and receive deliverance from them. This +conversation suited well the earl's inclination, and he carried +it to the king, and begged of him to try if King Olaf would not +surrender the kingdom, or at least come to an agreement to divide +it; and many supported the earl's views. + + + +140. CANUTE'S MESSAGE TO KING OLAF. + +Canute the Great sent men from the West, from England, to Norway, +and equipped them magnificently for the journey. They were +bearers of the English king Canute's letter and seal. They came +about spring (A.D. 1025) to the king of Norway, Olaf Haraldson, +in Tunsberg. Now when it was told the king that ambassadors had +arrived from Canute the Great he was ill at ease, and said that +Canute had not sent messengers hither with any messages that +could be of advantage to him or his people; and it was some days +before the ambassadors could come before the king. But when they +got permission to speak to him they appeared before the king, and +made known King Canute's letter, and their errand which +accompanied it; namely, "that King Canute considers all Norway as +his property, and insists that his forefathers before him have +possessed that kingdom; but as King Canute offers peace to all +countries, he will also offer peace to all here, if it can be so +settled, and will not invade Norway with his army if it can be +avoided. Now if King Olaf Haraldson wishes to remain king of +Norway, he will come to King Canute, and receive his kingdom as a +fief from him, become his vassal, and pay the scat which the +earls before him formerly paid." Thereupon they presented their +letters, which contained precisely the same conditions. + +Then King Olaf replies, "I have heard say, by old stories, that +the Danish king Gorm was considered but a small king of a few +people, for he ruled over Denmark alone; but the kings who +succeeded him thought that was too little. It has since come so +far that King Canute rules over Denmark and England, and has +conquered for himself a great part of Scotland. Now he claims +also my paternal heritage, and will then show some moderation in +his covetousness. Does he wish to rule over all the countries of +the North? Will he eat up all the kail in England? He shall do +so, and reduce that country to a desert, before I lay my head in +his hands, or show him any other kind of vassalage. Now ye shall +tell him these my words, -- I will defend Norway with battle-axe +and sword as long as life is given me, and will pay scat to no +man for my kingdom." + +After this answer King Canute's ambassadors made themselves ready +for their journey home, and were by no means rejoiced at the +success of their errand. + +Sigvat the skald had been with King Canute, who had given him a +gold ring that weighed half a mark. The skald Berse +Skaldtorfason was also there, and to him King Canute gave two +gold rings, each weighing two marks, and besides a sword inlaid +with gold. Sigvat made this song about it: -- + + "When we came o'er the wave, you cub, + When we came o'er the wave, + To me one ring, to thee two rings, + The mighty Canute gave: + One mark to me, + Four marks to thee, -- + A sword too, fine and brave. + Now God knows well, + And skalds can tell, + What justice here would crave." + +Sigvat the skald was very intimate with King Canute's messengers, +and asked them many questions. They answered all his inquiries +about their conversation with King Olaf, and the result of their +message. They said the king listened unwillingly to their +proposals. "And we do not know," say they, "to what he is +trusting when he refuses becoming King Canute's vassal, and going +to him, which would be the best thing he could do; for King +Canute is so mild that however much a chief may have done against +him, he is pardoned if he only show himself obedient. It is but +lately that two kings came to him from the North, from Fife in +Scotland, and he gave up his wrath against them, and allowed them +to retain all the lands they had possessed before, and gave them +besides very valuable gifts." Then Sigvat sang: -- + + "From the North land, the midst of Fife, + Two kings came begging peace and life; + Craving from Canute life and peace, -- + May Olaf's good luck never cease! + May he, our gallant Norse king, never + Be brought, like these, his head to offer + As ransom to a living man + For the broad lands his sword has won." + +King Canute's ambassadors proceeded on their way back, and had a +favourable breeze across the sea. They came to King Canute, and +told him the result of their errand, and King Olaf's last words. +King Canute replies, "King Olaf guesses wrong, if he thinks I +shall eat up all the kail in England; for I will let him see that +there is something else than kail under my ribs, and cold kail it +shall be for him." The same summer (A.D. 1025) Aslak and Skjalg, +the sons of Erling of Jadar, came from Norway to King Canute, and +were well received; for Aslak was married to Sigrid, a daughter +of Earl Svein Hakonson, and she and Earl Hakon Eirikson were +brothers' children. King Canute gave these brothers great fiefs +over there, and they stood in great favour. + + + +141. KING OLAF'S ALLIANCE WITH ONUND THE KING OF SVITHJOD. + +King Olaf summoned to him all the lendermen, and had a great many +people about him this summer (A.D. 1025), for a report was abroad +that King Canute would come from England. People had heard from +merchant vessels that Canute was assembling a great army in +England. When summer was advanced, some affirmed and others +denied that the army would come. King Olaf was all summer in +Viken, and had spies out to learn if Canute was come to Denmark. +In autumn (A.D. 1025) he sent messengers eastward to Svithjod to +his brother-in-law King Onund, and let him know King Canute's +demand upon Norway; adding, that, in his opinion, if Canute +subdued Norway, King Onund would not long enjoy the Swedish +dominions in peace. He thought it advisable, therefore, that +they should unite for their defence. "And then," said he, "we +will have strength enough to hold out against Canute." King +Onund received King Olaf's message favourably, and replied to it, +that he for his part would make common cause with King Olaf, so +that each of them should stand by the one who first required help +with all the strength of his kingdom. In these messages between +them it was also determined that they should have a meeting, and +consult with each other. The following winter (A.D. 1026) King +Onund intended to travel across West Gautland, and King Olaf made +preparations for taking his winter abode at Sarpsborg. + + + +142. KING CANUTE'S AMBASSADORS TO ONUND OF SVITHJOD. + +In autumn King Canute the Great came to Denmark, and remained +there all winter (A.D. 1026) with a numerous army. It was told +him that ambassadors with messages had been passing between the +Swedish and Norwegian kings, and that some great plans must be +concerting between them. In winter King Canute sent messengers +to Svithjod, to King Onund, with great gifts and messages of +friendship. He also told Onund that he might sit altogether +quiet in this strife between him and Olaf the Thick; "for thou, +Onund," says he, "and thy kingdom, shall be in peace as far as I +am concerned." When the ambassadors came to King Onund they +presented the gifts which King Canute sent him, together with the +friendly message. King Onund did not hear their speech very +willingly, and the ambassadors could observe that King Onund was +most inclined to a friendship with King Olaf. They returned +accordingly, and told King Canute the result of their errand, and +told him not to depend much upon the friendship of King Onund. + + + +143. THE EXPEDITION TO BJARMALAND. + +This winter (A.D. 1026) King Olaf sat in Sarpsborg, and was +surrounded by a very great army of people. He sent the +Halogalander Karle to the north country upon his business. Karle +went first to the Uplands, then across the Dovrefield, and came +down to Nidaros, where he received as much money as he had the +king's order for, together with a good ship, such as he thought +suitable for the voyage which the king had ordered him upon; and +that was to proceed north to Bjarmaland. It was settled that the +king should be in partnership with Karle, and each of them have +the half of the profit. Early in spring Karle directed his +course to Halogaland, where his brother Gunstein prepared to +accompany him, having his own merchant goods with him. There +were about twenty-five men in the ship; and in spring they sailed +north to Finmark. When Thorer Hund heard this, he sent a man to +the brothers with the verbal message that he intended in summer +to go to Bjarmaland, and that he would sail with them, and that +they should divide what booty they made equally between them. +Karle sent him back the message that Thorer must have twenty-five +men as they had, and they were willing to divide the booty that +might be taken equally, but not the merchant goods which each had +for himself. When Thorer's messenger came back he had put a +stout long-ship he owned into the water, and rigged it, and he +had put eighty men on board of his house-servants. Thorer alone +had the command over this crew, and he alone had all the goods +they might acquire on the cruise. When Thorer was ready for sea +he set out northwards along the coast, and found Karle a little +north of Sandver. They then proceeded with good wind. Gunstein +said to his brother, as soon as they met Thorer, that in his +opinion Thorer was strongly manned. "I think," said he, "we had +better turn back than sail so entirely in Thorer's power, for I +do not trust him." Karle replies, "I will not turn back, +although if I had known when we were at home on Langey Isle that +Thorer Hund would join us on this voyage with so large a crew as +he has, I would have taken more hands with us." The brothers +spoke about it to Thorer, and asked what was the meaning of his +taking more people with him than was agreed upon between them. +He replies, "We have a large ship which requires many hands, and +methinks there cannot be too many brave lads for so dangerous a +cruise." They went in summer as fast in general as the vessels +could go. When the wind was light the ship of the brothers +sailed fastest, and they separated; but when the wind freshened +Thorer overtook them. They were seldom together, but always in +sight of each other. When they came to Bjarmaland they went +straight to the merchant town, and the market began. All who had +money to pay with got filled up with goods. Thorer also got a +number of furs, and of beaver and sable skins. Karle had a +considerable sum of money with him, with which he purchased skins +and furs. When the fair was at an end they went out of the Vina +river, and then the truce of the country people was also at an +end. When they came out of the river they held a seaman's +council, and Thorer asked the crews if they would like to go on +the land and get booty. + +They replied, that they would like it well enough, if they saw +the booty before their eyes. + +Thorer replies, that there was booty to be got, if the voyage +proved fortunate; but that in all probability there would be +danger in the attempt. + +All said they would try, if there was any chance of booty. +Thorer explained, that it was so established in this land, that +when a rich man died all his movable goods were divided between +the dead man and his heirs. He got the half part, or the third +part, or sometimes less, and that part was carried out into the +forest and buried, -- sometimes under a mound, sometimes in the +earth, and sometimes even a house was built over it. He tells +them at the same time to get ready for this expedition at the +fall of day. It was resolved that one should not desert the +other, and none should hold back when the commander ordered them +to come on board again. They now left people behind to take care +of the ships, and went on land, where they found flat fields at +first, and then great forests. Thorer went first, and the +brothers Karle and Gunstein in rear. Thorer commanded the people +to observe the utmost silence. "And let us peel the bark off the +trees," says he, "so that one tree-mark can be seen from the +other." They came to a large cleared opening, where there was a +high fence upon which there was a gate that was locked. Six men +of the country people held watch every night at this fence, two +at a time keeping guard, each two for a third part of the night, +when Thorer and his men came to the fence the guard had gone +home, and those who should relieve them had not yet come upon +guard. Thorer went to the fence, stuck his axe up in it above +his head, hauled himself up by it, and so came over the fence, +and inside the gate. Karle had also come over the fence, and to +the inside of the gate; so that both came at once to the port, +took the bar away, and opened the port; and then the people got +in within the fence. Then said Thorer, "Within this fence there +is a mound in which gold, and silver, and earth are all mixed +together: seize that. But within here stands the Bjarmaland +people's god Jomala: let no one be so presumptuous as to rob +him." Thereupon they went to the mound and took as much of the +money as they could carry away in their clothes, with which, as +might be expected, much earth was mixed. Thereafter Thorer said +that the people now should retreat. "And ye brothers, Karle and +Gunstein," says he, "do ye lead the way, and I will go last." +They all went accordingly out of the gate: but Thorer went back +to Jomala, and took a silver bowl that stood upon his knee full +of silver money. He put the silver in his purse, and put his arm +within the handle of the bowl, and so went out of the gate. The +whole troop had come without the fence; but when they perceived +that Thorer had stayed behind, Karle returned to trace him, and +when they met upon the path Thorer had the silver bowl with him. +Thereupon Karle immediately ran to Jomala; and observing he had a +thick gold ornament hanging around his neck, he lifted his axe, +cut the string with which the ornament was tied behind his neck, +and the stroke was so strong that the head of Jomala rang with +such a great sound that they were all astonished. Karle seized +the ornament, and they all hastened away. But the moment the +sound was made the watchmen came forward upon the cleared space, +and blew their horns. Immediately the sound of the loor (1) was +heard all around from every quarter, calling the people together. +They hastened to the forest, and rushed into it; and heard the +shouts and cries on the other side of the Bjarmaland people in +pursuit. Thorer Hund went the last of the whole troop; and +before him went two men carrying a great sack between them, in +which was something that was like ashes. Thorer took this in his +hand, and strewed it upon the footpath, and sometimes over the +people. They came thus out of the woods, and upon the fields, +but heard incessantly the Bjarmaland people pursuing with shouts +and dreadful yells. The army of the Bjarmaland people rushed out +after them upon the field, and on both sides of them; but neither +the people nor their weapons came so near as to do them any harm: +from which they perceived that the Bjarmaland people did not see +them. Now when they reached their ships Karle and his brother +went on board; for they were the foremost, and Thorer was far +behind on the land. As soon as Karle and his men were on board +they struck their tents, cast loose their land ropes, hoisted +their sails, and their ship in all haste went to sea. Thorer and +his people, on the other hand, did not get on so quickly, as +their vessel was heavier to manage; so that when they got under +sail, Karle and his people were far off from land. Both vessels +sailed across the White sea (Gandvik) . The nights were clear, so +that both ships sailed night and day; until one day, towards the +time the day turns to shorten, Karle and his people took up the +land near an island, let down the sail, cast anchor, and waited +until the slack-tide set in, for there was a strong rost before +them. Now Thorer came up, and lay at anchor there also. Thorer +and his people then put out a boat, went into it, and rowed to +Karle's ship. Thorer came on board, and the brothers saluted +him. Thorer told Karle to give him the ornament. "I think," +said he, "that I have best earned the ornaments that have been +taken, for methinks ye have to thank me for getting away without +any loss of men; and also I think thou, Karle, set us in the +greatest fright." + +Karle replies, "King Olaf has the half part of all the goods I +gather on this voyage, and I intend the ornament for him. Go to +him, if you like, and it is possible he will give thee the +ornament, although I took it from Jomala." + +Then Thorer insisted that they should go upon the island, and +divide the booty. + +Gunstein says, "It is now the turn of the tide, and it is time to +sail." Whereupon they began to raise their anchor. + +When Thorer saw that, he returned to his boat and rowed to his +own ship. Karle and his men had hoisted sail, and were come a +long way before Thorer got under way. They now sailed so that +the brothers were always in advance, and both vessels made all +the haste they could. They sailed thus until they came to +Geirsver, which is the first roadstead of the traders to the +North. They both came there towards evening, and lay in the +harbour near the landing-place. Thorer's ship lay inside, and +the brothers' the outside vessel in the port. When Thorer had +set up his tents he went on shore, and many of his men with him. +They went to Karle's ship, which was well provided. Thorer +hailed the ship, and told the commanders to come on shore; on +which the brothers, and some men with them, went on the land. +Now Thorer began the same discourse, and told them to bring the +goods they got in booty to the land to have them divided. The +brothers thought that was not necessary, until they had arrived +at their own neighbourhood. Thorer said it was unusual not to +divide booty but at their own home, and thus to be left to the +honour of other people. They spoke some words about it, but +could not agree. Then Thorer turned away; but had not gone far +before he came back, and tells his comrades to wait there. +Thereupon he calls to Karle, and says he wants to speak with him +alone. Karle went to meet him; and when he came near, Thorer +struck at him with a spear, so that it went through him. +"There," said Thorer, "now thou hast learnt to know a Bjarkey +Island man. I thought thou shouldst feel Asbjorn's spear." +Karle died instantly, and Thorer with his people went immediately +on board their ship. When Gunstein and his men saw Karle fall +they ran instantly to him, took his body and carried it on board +their ship, struck their tents, and cast off from the pier, and +left the land. When Thorer and his men saw this, they took down +their tents and made preparations to follow. But as they were +hoisting the sail the fastenings to the mast broke in two, and +the sail fell down across the ship, which caused a great delay +before they could hoist the sail again. Gunstein had already got +a long way ahead before Thorer's ship fetched way, and now they +used both sails and oars. Gunstein did the same. On both sides +they made great way day and night; but so that they did not gain +much on each other, although when they came to the small sounds +among the islands Gunstein's vessel was lighter in turning. But +Thorer's ship made way upon them, so that when they came up to +Lengjuvik, Gunstein turned towards the land, and with all his men +ran up into the country, and left his ship. A little after +Thorer came there with his ship, sprang upon the land after them, +and pursued them. There was a woman who helped Gunstein to +conceal himself, and it is told that she was much acquainted with +witchcraft. Thorer and his men returned to the vessels, and took +all the goods out of Gunstein's vessel, and put on board stones +in place of the cargo, and then hauled the ship out into the +fjord, cut a hole in its bottom, and sank it to the bottom. +Thereafter Thorer, with his people, returned home to Bjarkey +Isle. Gunstein and his people proceeded in small boats at first, +and lay concealed by day, until they had passed Bjarkey, and had +got beyond Thorer's district. Gunstein went home first to Langey +Isle for a short time, and then proceeded south without any halt, +until he came south to Throndhjem, and there found King Olaf, to +whom he told all that had happened on this Bjarmaland expedition. +The king was ill-pleased with the voyage, but told Gunstein to +remain with him, promising to assist him when opportunity +offered. Gunstein took the invitation with thanks, and stayed +with King Olaf. + + +ENDNOTES: +(1) Ludr -- the loor -- is a long tube or roll of birch-bark + used as a horn by the herdboys in the mountains in Norway. + -- L. + + + +144. MEETING OF KING OLAF AND KING ONUND. + +King Olaf was, as before related, in Sarpsborg the winter (A.D. +1026) that King Canute was in Denmark. The Swedish king Onund +rode across West Gautland the same winter, and had thirty hundred +(3600) men with him. Men and messages passed between them; and +they agreed to meet in spring at Konungahella. The meeting had +been postponed, because they wished to know before they met what +King Canute intended doing. As it was now approaching towards +winter, King Canute made ready to go over to England with his +forces, and left his son Hardaknut to rule in Denmark, and with +him Earl Ulf, a son of Thorgils Sprakaleg. Ulf was married to +Astrid, King Svein's daughter, and sister of Canute the Great. +Their son Svein was afterwards king of Denmark. Earl Ulf was a +very distinguished man. When the kings Olaf and Onund heard that +Canute the Great had gone west to England, they hastened to hold +their conference, and met at Konungahella, on the Gaut river. +They had a joyful meeting, and had many friendly conversations, +of which something might become known to the public; but they +also spake often a great deal between themselves, with none but +themselves two present, of which only some things afterwards were +carried into effect, and thus became known to every one. At +parting the kings presented each other with gifts, and parted the +best of friends. King Onund went up into Gautland, and Olaf +northwards to Viken, and afterwards to Agder, and thence +northwards along the coast, but lay a long time at Egersund +waiting a wind. Here he heard that Erling Skjalgson, and the +inhabitants of Jadar with him, had assembled a large force. One +day the king's people were talking among themselves whether the +wind was south or south-west, and whether with that wind they +could sail past Jadar or not. The most said it was impossible to +fetch round. Then answers Haldor Brynjolfson, "I am of opinion +that we would go round Jadar with this wind fast enough if Erling +Skjalgson had prepared a feast for us at Sole." Then King Olaf +ordered the tents to be struck, and the vessels to be hauled out, +which was done. They sailed the same day past Jadar with the +best wind, and in the evening reached Hirtingsey, from whence the +king proceeded to Hordaland, and was entertained there in guest- +quarters. + + + +145. THORALF'S MURDER. + +The same summer (A.D. 1026) a ship sailed from Norway to the +Farey Islands, with messengers carrying a verbal message from +King Olaf, that one of his court-men, Leif Ossurson, or Lagman +Gille, or Thoralf of Dimun, should come over to him from the +Farey Islands. Now when this message came to the Farey Islands, +and was delivered to those whom it concerned, they held a meeting +among themselves, to consider what might lie under this message, +and they were all of opinion that the king wanted to inquire into +the real state of the event which some said had taken place upon +the islands; namely, the failure and disappearance of the former +messengers of the king, and the loss of the two ships, of which +not a man had been saved. It was resolved that Thoralf should +undertake the journey. He got himself ready, and rigged out a +merchant-vessel belonging to himself, manned with ten or twelve +men. When it was ready, waiting a wind, it happened, at Austrey, +in the house of Thrand of Gata, that he went one fine day into +the room where his brother's two sons, Sigurd and Thord, sons of +Thorlak, were lying upon the benches in the room. Gaut the Red +was also there, who was one of their relations and a man of +distinction. Sigurd was the oldest, and their leader in all +things. Thord had a distinguished name, and was called Thord the +Low, although in reality he was uncommonly tall, and yet in +proportion more strong than large. Then Thrand said, "How many +things are changed in the course of a man's life! When we were +young, it was rare for young people who were able to do anything +to sit or lie still upon a fine day, and our forefathers would +scarcely have believed that Thoralf of Dimun would be bolder and +more active than ye are. I believe the vessel I have standing +here in the boat-house will be so old that it will rot under its +coat of tar. Here are all the houses full of wool, which is +neither used nor sold. It should not be so if I were a few +winters younger." Sigurd sprang up, called upon Gaut and Thord, +and said he would not endure Thrand's scoffs. They went out to +the houseservants, and launched the vessel upon the water, +brought down a cargo, and loaded the ship. They had no want of a +cargo at home, and the vessel's rigging was in good order, so +that in a few days they were ready for sea. There were ten or +twelve men in the vessel. Thoralf's ship and theirs had the same +wind, and they were generally in sight of each other. They came +to the land at Herna in the evening, and Sigurd with his vessel +lay outside on the strand, but so that there was not much +distance between the two ships. It happened towards evening, +when it was dark, that just as Thoralf and his people were +preparing to go to bed, Thoralf and another went on shore for a +certain purpose. When they were ready, they prepared to return +on board. The man who had accompanied Thoralf related afterwards +this story, -- that a cloth was thrown over his head, and that he +was lifted up from the ground, and he heard a great bustle. He +was taken away, and thrown head foremost down; but there was sea +under him, and he sank under the water. When he got to land, he +went to the place where he and Thoralf had been parted, and there +he found Thoralf with his head cloven down to his shoulders, and +dead. When the ship's people heard of it they carried the body +out to the ship, and let it remain there all night. King Olaf +was at that time in guest-quarters at Lygra, and thither they +sent a message. Now a Thing was called by message-token, and the +king came to the Thing. He had also ordered the Farey people of +both vessels to be summoned, and they appeared at the Thing. Now +when the Thing was seated, the king stood up and said, "Here an +event has happened which (and it is well that it is so) is very +seldom heard of. Here has a good man been put to death, without +any cause. Is there any man upon the Thing who can say who has +done it?" + +Nobody could answer. + +"Then," said the king, "I cannot conceal my suspicion that this +deed has been done by the Farey people themselves. It appears to +me that it has been done in this way, -- that Sigurd Thorlakson +has killed the man, and Thord the Low has cast his comrade into +the sea. I think, too, that the motives to this must have been +to hinder Thoralf from telling about the misdeed of which he had +information; namely, the murder which I suspect was committed +upon my messengers." + +When he had ended his speech, Sigurd Thorlakson stood up, and +desired to be heard. "I have never before," said he, "spoken at +a Thing, and I do not expect to be looked upon as a man of ready +words. But I think there is sufficient necessity before me to +reply something to this. I will venture to make a guess that the +speech the king has made comes from some man's tongue who is of +far less understanding and goodness than he is, and has evidently +proceeded from those who are our enemies. It is speaking +improbabilities to say that I could be Thoralf's murderer; for +he was my foster-brother and good friend. Had the case been +otherwise, and had there been anything outstanding between me and +Thoralf, yet I am surely born with sufficient understanding to +have done this deed in the Farey Islands, rather than here +between your hands, sire. But I am ready to clear myself, and my +whole ship's crew, of this act, and to make oath according to +what stands in your laws. Or, if ye find it more satisfactory, I +offer to clear myself by the ordeal of hot iron; and I wish, +sire, that you may be present yourself at the proof." + +When Sigurd had ceased to speak there were many who supported his +case, and begged the king that Sigurd might be allowed to clear +himself of this accusation. They thought that Sigurd had spoken +well, and that the accusation against him might be untrue. + +The king replies, "It may be with regard to this man very +differently, and if he is belied in any respect he must be a good +man; and if not, he is the boldest I have ever met with: and I +believe this is the case, and that he will bear witness to it +himself." + +At the desire of the people, the king took Sigurd's obligation to +take the iron ordeal; he should come the following day to Lygra, +where the bishop should preside at the ordeal; and so the Thing +closed. The king went back to Lygra, and Sigurd and his comrades +to their ship. + +As soon as it began to be dark at night Sigurd said to his ship's +people. "To say the truth, we have come into a great misfortune; +for a great lie is got up against us, and this king is a +deceitful, crafty man. Our fate is easy to be foreseen where he +rules; for first he made Thoralf be slain, and then made us the +misdoers, without benefit of redemption by fine. For him it is +an easy matter to manage the iron ordeal, so that I fear he will +come ill off who tries it against him. Now there is coming a +brisk mountain breeze, blowing right out of the sound and off the +land; and it is my advice that we hoist our sail, and set out to +sea. Let Thrand himself come with his wool to market another +summer; but if I get away, it is my opinion I shall never think +of coming to Norway again." + +His comrades thought the advice good, hoisted their sail, and in +the night-time took to the open sea with all speed. They did not +stop until they came to Farey, and home to Gata. Thrand was ill- +pleased with their voyage, and they did not answer him in a very +friendly way; but they remained at home, however, with Thrand. +The morning after, King Olaf heard of Sigurd's departure, and +heavy reports went round about this case; and there were many who +believed that the accusation against Sigurd was true, although +they had denied and opposed it before the king. King Olaf spoke +but little about the matter, but seemed to know of a certainty +that the suspicion he had taken up was founded in truth. The +king afterwards proceeded in his progress, taking up his abode +where it was provided for him. + + + +146. OF THE ICELANDERS. + +King Olaf called before him the men who had come from Iceland, +Thorod Snorrason, Geller Thorkelson, Stein Skaptason, and Egil +Halson, and spoke to them thus: -- "Ye have spoken to me much in +summer about making yourselves ready to return to Iceland, and I +have never given you a distinct answer. Now I will tell you what +my intention is. Thee, Geller, I propose to allow to return, if +thou wilt carry my message there; but none of the other +Icelanders who are now here may go to Iceland before I have heard +how the message which thou, Geller, shalt bring thither has been +received." + +When the king had made this resolution known, it appeared to +those who had a great desire to return, and were thus forbidden, +that they were unreasonably and hardly dealt with, and that they +were placed in the condition of unfree men. In the meantime +Geller got ready for his journey, and sailed in summer (A.D. +1026) to Iceland, taking with him the message he was to bring +before the Thing the following summer (A.D. 1027). The king's +message was, that he required the Icelanders to adopt the laws +which he had set in Norway, also to pay him thane-tax and nose- +tax (1); namely, a penny for every nose, and the penny at the +rate of ten pennies to the yard of wadmal (2). At the same time +he promised them his friendship if they accepted, and threatened +them with all his vengeance if they refused his proposals. + +The people sat long in deliberation on this business; but at last +they were unanimous in refusing all the taxes and burdens which +were demanded of them. That summer Geller returned back from +Iceland to Norway to King Olaf, and found him in autumn in the +east in Viken, just as he had come from Gautland; of which I +shall speak hereafter in this story of King Olaf. Towards the +end of autumn King Olaf repaired north to Throndhjem, and went +with his people to Nidaros, where he ordered a winter residence +to be prepared for him. The winter (A.D. 1027) that he passed +here in the merchant-town of Nidaros was the thirteenth year of +his reign. + + +ENDNOTES: +(1) Nefgildi (nef=nose), a nose-tax or poll-tax payable to the + king. This ancient "nose-tax" was also imposed by the + Norsemen on conquered countries, the penalty for defaulters + being the loss of their nose. +(2) Wadmal was the coarse woollen cloth made in Iceland, and so + generally used for clothing that it was a measure of value + in the North, like money, for other commodities. -- L. + + + +147. OF THE JAMTALAND PEOPLE. + +There was once a man called Ketil Jamte, a son of Earl Onund of +Sparby, in the Throndhjem district. He fled over the ridge of +mountains from Eystein Illrade, cleared the forest, and settled +the country now called the province of Jamtaland. A great many +people joined him from the Throndhjem land, on account of the +disturbances there; for this King Eystein had laid taxes on the +Throndhjem people, and set his dog, called Saur, to be king over +them. Thorer Helsing was Ketil's grandson, and he colonised the +province called Helsingjaland, which is named after him. When +Harald Harfager subdued the kingdom by force, many people fled +out of the country from him, both Throndhjem people and Naumudal +people, and thus new settlements were added to Jamtaland; and +some settlers went even eastwards to Helsingjaland and down to +the Baltic coast, and all became subjects of the Swedish king. +While Hakon Athelstan's foster-son was over Norway there was +peace, and merchant traffic from Throndhjem to Jamtaland; and, as +he was an excellent king, the Jamtalanders came from the east to +him, paid him scat, and he gave them laws and administered +justice. They would rather submit to his government than to the +Swedish king's, because they were of Norwegian race; and all the +Helsingjaland people, who had their descent from the north side +of the mountain ridge, did the same. This continued long after +those times, until Olaf the Thick and the Swedish king Olaf +quarrelled about the boundaries. Then the Jamtaland and +Helsingjaland people went back to the Swedish king; and then the +forest of Eid was the eastern boundary of the land, and the +mountain ridge, or keel of the country, the northern: and the +Swedish king took scat of Helsingjaland, and also of Jamtaland. +Now, thought the king of Norway, Olaf, in consequence of the +agreement between him and the Swedish king, the scat of Jamtaland +should be paid differently than before; although it had long been +established that the Jamtaland people paid their scat to the +Swedish king, and that he appointed officers over the country. +The Swedes would listen to nothing, but that all the land to the +east of the keel of the country belonged to the Swedish king. +Now this went so, as it often happens, that although the kings +were brothers-in-law and relations, each would hold fast the +dominions which he thought he had a right to. King Olaf had sent +a message round in Jamtaland, declaring it to be his will that +the Jamtaland people should be subject to him, threatening them +with violence if they refused; but the Jamtaland people preferred +being subjects of the Swedish king. + + + +148. STEIN'S STORY. + +The Icelanders, Thorod Snorrason and Stein Skaptason, were ill- +pleased at not being allowed to do as they liked. Stein was a +remarkably handsome man, dexterous at all feats, a great poet, +splendid in his apparel, and very ambitious of distinction. His +father, Skapte, had composed a poem on King Olaf, which he had +taught Stein, with the intention that he should bring it to King +Olaf. Stein could not now restrain himself from making the king +reproaches in word and speech, both in verse and prose. Both he +and Thorod were imprudent in their conversation, and said the +king would be looked upon as a worse man than those who, under +faith and law, had sent their sons to him, as he now treated them +as men without liberty. The king was angry at this. One day +Stein stood before the king, and asked if he would listen to the +poem which his father Skapte had composed about him. The king +replies, "Thou must first repeat that, Stein, which thou hast +composed about me." Stein replies, that it was not the case that +he had composed any. "I am no skald, sire," said he; "and if I +even could compose anything, it, and all that concerns me, would +appear to thee of little value." Stein then went out, but +thought he perceived what the king alluded to. Thorgeir, one of +the king's land-bailiffs, who managed one of his farms in +Orkadal, happened to be present, and heard the conversation of +the king and Stein, and soon afterwards Thorgeir returned home. +One night Stein left the city, and his footboy with him. They +went up Gaularas and into Orkadal. One evening they came to one +of the king's farms which Thorgeir had the management of, and +Thorgeir invited Stein to pass the night there, and asked where +he was travelling to. Stein begged the loan of a horse and +sledge, for he saw they were just driving home corn. + +Thorgeir replies, "I do not exactly see how it stands with thy +journey, and if thou art travelling with the king's leave. The +other day, methinks, the words were not very sweet that passed +between the king and thee." + +Stein said, "If it be so that I am not my own master for the +king, yet I will not submit to such treatment from his slaves;" +and, drawing his sword, he killed the landbailiff. Then he took +the horse, put the boy upon him, and sat himself in the sledge, +and so drove the whole night. They travelled until they came to +Surnadal in More. There they had themselves ferried across the +fjord, and proceeded onwards as fast as they could. They told +nobody about the murder, but wherever they came called themselves +king's men, and met good entertainment everywhere. One day at +last they came towards evening to Giske Isle, to Thorberg +Arnason's house. He was not at home himself, but his wife +Ragnhild, a daughter of Erling Skjalgson, was. There Stein was +well received, because formerly there had been great friendship +between them. It had once happened, namely, that Stein, on his +voyage from Iceland with his own vessel, had come to Giske from +sea, and had anchored at the island. At that time Ragnhild was +in the pains of childbirth, and very ill, and there was no priest +on the island, or in the neighbourhood of it. There came a +message to the merchant-vessel to inquire if, by chance, there +was a priest on board. There happened to be a priest in the +vessel, who was called Bard; but he was a young man from +Westfjord, who had little learning. The messengers begged the +priest to go with them, but he thought it was a difficult matter: +for he knew his own ignorance, and would not go. Stein added his +word to persuade the priest. The priest replies, "I will go if +thou wilt go with me; for then I will have confidence, if I +should require advice." Stein said he was willing; and they went +forthwith to the house, and to where Ragnhild was in labour. +Soon after she brought forth a female child, which appeared to be +rather weak. Then the priest baptized the infant, and Stein held +it at the baptism, at which it got the name of Thora; and Stein +gave it a gold ring. Ragnhild promised Stein her perfect +friendship, and bade him come to her whenever he thought he +required her help. Stein replied that he would hold no other +female child at baptism, and then they parted. Now it was come +to the time when Stein required this kind promise of Ragnhild to +be fulfilled, and he told her what had happened, and that the +king's wrath had fallen upon him. She answered, that all the aid +she could give should stand at his service; but bade him wait for +Thorberg's arrival. She then showed him to a seat beside her son +Eystein Orre, who was then twelve years old. Stein presented +gifts to Ragnhild and Eystein. Thorberg had already heard how +Stein had conducted himself before he got home, and was rather +vexed at it. Ragnhild went to him, and told him how matters +stood with Stein, and begged Thorberg to receive him, and take +care of him. + +Thorberg replies, "I have heard that the king, after sending out +a message-token, held a Thing concerning the murder of Thorgeir, +and has condemned Stein as having fled the country, and likewise +that the king is highly incensed: and I have too much sense to +take the cause of a foreigner in hand, and draw upon myself the +king's wrath. Let Stein, therefore, withdraw from hence as +quickly as thou canst." + +Ragnhild replied, that they should either both go or both stay. + +Thorberg told her to go where she pleased. "For I expect," said +he, "that wherever thou goest thou wilt soon come back, for here +is thy importance greatest." + +Her son Eystein Orre then stood forward, and said he would not +stay behind if Ragnhild goes. + +Thorberg said that they showed themselves very stiff and +obstinate in this matter. "And it appears that ye must have your +way in it, since ye take it so near to heart; but thou art +reckoning too much, Ragnhild, upon thy descent, in paying so +little regard to King Olaf's word." + +Ragnhild replied, "If thou art so much afraid to keep Stein with +thee here, go with him to my father Erling, or give him +attendants, so that he may get there in safety." Thorberg said +he would not send Stein there; "for there are enough of things +besides to enrage the king against Erling." Stein thus remained +there all winter (A.D. 1027). + +After Yule a king's messenger came to Thorberg, with the order +that Thorberg should come to him before midsummer; and the order +was serious and severe. Thorberg laid it before his friends, and +asked their advice if he should venture to go to the king after +what had taken place. The greater number dissuaded him, and +thought it more advisable to let Stein slip out of his hands than +to venture within the king's power: but Thorberg himself had +rather more inclination not to decline the journey. Soon after +Thorberg went to his brother Fin, told him the circumstances, and +asked him to accompany him. Fin replied, that he thought it +foolish to be so completely under woman's influence that he dared +not, on account of his wife, keep the fealty and law of his +sovereign. + +"Thou art free," replied Thorberg, "to go with me or not; but I +believe it is more fear of the king than love to him that keeps +thee back." And so they parted in anger. + +Then Thorberg went to his brother Arne Arnason, and asked him to +go with him to the king. Arne says, "It appears to me wonderful +that such a sensible, prudent man, should fall into such a +misfortune, without necessity, as to incur the king's +indignation. It might be excused if it were thy relation or +foster-brother whom thou hadst thus sheltered; but not at all +that thou shouldst take up an Iceland man, and harbour the king's +outlaw, to the injury of thyself and all thy relations." + +Thorberg replies, "It stands good, according to the proverb, -- a +rotten branch will be found in every tree. My father's greatest +misfortune evidently was that he had such ill luck in producing +sons that at last he produced one incapable of acting, and +without any resemblance to our race, and whom in truth I never +would have called brother, if it were not that it would have been +to my mother's shame to have refused." + +Thorberg turned away in a gloomy temper, and went home. +Thereafter he sent a message to his brother Kalf in the +Throndhjem district, and begged him to meet him at Agdanes; and +when the messengers found Kalf he promised, without more ado, to +make the journey. Ragnhild sent men east to Jadar to her father +Erling, and begged him to send people. Erling's sons, Sigurd and +Thord, came out, each with a ship of twenty benches of rowers and +ninety men. When they came north Thorberg received them +joyfully, entertained them well, and prepared for the voyage with +them. Thorberg had also a vessel with twenty benches, and they +steered their course northwards. When they came to the mouth of +the Throndhjem fjord Thorberg's two brothers, Fin and Arne, were +there already, with two ships each of twenty benches. Thorberg +met his brothers with joy, and observed that his whetstone had +taken effect; and Fin replied he seldom needed sharpening for +such work. Then they proceeded north with all their forces to +Throndhjem, and Stein was along with them. When they came to +Agdanes, Kaff Arnason was there before them; and he also had a +wellmanned ship of twenty benches. With this war-force they +sailed up to Nidaros, where they lay all night. The morning +after they had a consultation with each other. Kalf and Erling's +sons were for attacking the town with all their forces, and +leaving the event to fate; but Thorberg wished that they should +first proceed with moderation, and make an offer; in which +opinion Fin and Arne also concurred. It was accordingly resolved +that Fin and Arne, with a few men, should first wait upon the +king. The king had previously heard that they had come so strong +in men, and was therefore very sharp in his speech. Fin offered +to pay mulct for Thorberg, and also for Stein, and bade the king +to fix what the penalties should be, however large; stipulating +only for Thorberg safety and his fiefs, and for Stein life and +limb. + +The king replies, "It appears to me that ye come from home so +equipped that ye can determine half as much as I can myself, or +more; but this I expected least of all from you brothers, that ye +should come against me with an army; and this counsel, I can +observe, has its origin from the people of Jadar; but ye have no +occasion to offer me money in mulct." + +Fin replies, "We brothers have collected men, not to offer +hostility to you, sire, but to offer rather our services; but if +you will bear down Thorberg altogether, we must all go to King +Canute the Great with such forces as we have." + +Then the king looked at him, and said, "If ye brothers will give +your oaths that ye will follow me in the country and out of the +country, and not part from me without my leave and permission, +and shall not conceal from me any treasonable design that may +come to your knowledge against me, then will I agree to a peace +with you brothers." + +Then Fin returned to his forces, and told the conditions which +the king had proposed to them. Now they held a council upon it, +and Thorberg, for his part, said he would accept the terms +offered. "I have no wish," says he, "to fly from my property, +and seek foreign masters; but, on the contrary, will always +consider it an honour to follow King Olaf, and be where he is." +Then says Kalf, "I will make no oath to King Olaf, but will be +with him always, so long as I retain my fiefs and dignities, and +so long as the king will be my friend; and my opinion is that we +should all do the same." Fin says, "we will venture to let King +Olaf himself determine in this matter." Arne Arnason says, "I +was resolved to follow thee, brother Thorberg, even if thou hadst +given battle to King Olaf, and I shall certainly not leave thee +for listening to better counsel; so I intend to follow thee and +Fin, and accept the conditions ye have taken." + +Thereupon the brothers Thorberg, Fin, and Arne, went on board a +vessel, rowed into the fjord, and waited upon the king. The +agreement went accordingly into fulfillment, so that the brothers +gave their oaths to the king. Then Thorberg endeavored to make +peace for Stein with the king; but the king replied that Stein +might for him depart in safety, and go where he pleased, but "in +my house he can never be again." Then Thorberg and his brothers +went back to their men. Kalf went to Eggja, and Fin to the king; +and Thorberg, with the other men, went south to their homes. +Stein went with Erling's sons; but early in the spring (A.D. +1027) he went west to England into the service of Canute the +Great, and was long with him, and was treated with great +distinction. + + + +149. FIN ARNASON"S EXPEDITION TO HALOGALAND. + +Now when Fin Arnason had been a short time with King Olaf, the +king called him to a conference, along with some other persons he +usually held consultation with; and in this conference the king +spoke to this effect: -- "The decision remains fixed in my mind +that in spring I should raise the whole country to a levy both of +men and ships, and then proceed, with all the force I can muster, +against King Canute the Great: for I know for certain that he +does not intend to treat as a jest the claim he has awakened upon +my kingdom. Now I let thee know my will, Fin Arnason, that thou +proceed on my errand to Halogaland, and raise the people there to +an expedition, men and ships, and summon that force to meet me at +Agdanes." Then the king named other men whom he sent to +Throndhjem, and some southwards in the country, and he commanded +that this order should be circulated through the whole land. Of +Fin's voyage we have to relate that he had with him a ship with +about thirty men, and when he was ready for sea he prosecuted his +journey until he came to Halogaland. There he summoned the +bondes to a Thing, laid before them his errand, and craved a +levy. The bondes in that district had large vessels, suited to a +levy expedition, and they obeyed the king's message, and rigged +their ships. Now when Fin came farther north in Halogaland he +held a Thing again, and sent some of his men from him to crave a +levy where he thought it necessary. He sent also men to Bjarkey +Island to Thorer Hund, and there, as elsewhere, craved the quota +to the levy. When the message came to Thorer he made himself +ready, and manned with his house-servants the same vessel he had +sailed with on his cruise to Bjarmaland, and which he equipped at +his own expense. Fin summoned all the people of Halogaland who +were to the north to meet at Vagar. There came a great fleet +together in spring, and they waited there until Fin returned from +the North. Thorer Hund had also come there. When Fin arrived he +ordered the signal to sound for all the people of the levy to +attend a House-Thing; and at it all the men produced their +weapons, and also the fighting men from each ship-district were +mustered. When that was all finished Fin said, "I have also to +bring thee a salutation, Thorer Hund, from King Olaf, and to ask +thee what thou wilt offer him for the murder of his court-man +Karle, or for the robbery in taking the king's goods north in +Lengjuvik. I have the king's orders to settle that business, and +I wait thy answer to it." + +Thorer looked about him, and saw standing on both sides many +fully armed men, among whom were Gunstein and others of Karle's +kindred. Then said Thorer, "My proposal is soon made. I will +refer altogether to the king's pleasure the matter he thinks he +has against me." + +Fin replies, "Thou must put up with a less honour; for thou must +refer the matter altogether to my decision, if any agreement is +to take place." + +Thorer replies, "And even then I think it will stand well with my +case, and therefore I will not decline referring it to thee." + +Thereupon Thorer came forward, and confirmed what he said by +giving his hand upon it; and Fin repeated first all the words he +should say. + +Fin now pronounced his decision upon the agreement, -- that +Thorer should pay to the king ten marks of gold, and to Gunstein +and the other kindred ten marks, and for the robbery and loss of +goods ten marks more; and all which should be paid immediately. + +Thorer says, "This is a heavy money mulct." + +"Without it," replies Fin, "there will be no agreement." + +Thorer says, there must time be allowed to gather so much in loan +from his followers; but Fin told him to pay immediately on the +spot; and besides, Thorer should lay down the great ornament +which he took from Karle when he was dead. Thorer asserted that +he had not got the ornament. Then Gunstein pressed forward, and +said that Karle had the ornament around his neck when they +parted, but it was gone when they took up his corpse. Thorer +said he had not observed any ornament; but if there was any such +thing, it must be lying at home in Bjarkey. Then Fin put the +point of his spear to Thorer's breast, and said that he must +instantly produce the ornament; on which Thorer took the ornament +from his neck and gave it to Fin. Thereafter Thorer turned away, +and went on board his ship. Fin, with many other men, followed +him, went through the whole vessel, and took up the hatches. At +the mast they saw two very large casks; and Fin asked, "What are +these puncheons?" + +Thorer replies, "It is my liquor." + +Fin says, "Why don't you give us something to drink then, +comrade, since you have so much liquor?" + +Thorer ordered his men to run off a bowlfull from the puncheons, +from which Fin and his people got liquor of the best quality. +Now Fin ordered Thorer to pay the mulcts. Thorer went backwards +and forwards through the ship, speaking now to the one, now to +the other, and Fin calling out to produce the pence. Thorer +begged him to go to the shore, and said he would bring the money +there, and Fin with his men went on shore. Then Thorer came and +paid silver; of which, from one purse, there were weighed ten +marks. Thereafter Thorer brought many knotted nightcaps; and in +some was one mark, in others half a mark, and in others some +small money. "This is money my friends and other good people +have lent me," said he; "for I think all my travelling money is +gone." Then Thorer went back again to his ship, and returned, +and paid the silver by little and little; and this lasted so long +that the day was drawing towards evening. When the Thing had +closed the people had gone to their vessels, and made ready to +depart; and as fast as they were ready they hoisted sail and set +out, so that most of them were under sail. When Fin saw that +they were most of them under sail, he ordered his men to get +ready too; but as yet little more than a third part of the mulct +had been paid. Then Fin said, "This goes on very slowly, Thorer, +with the payment. I see it costs thee a great deal to pay money. +I shall now let it stand for the present, and what remains thou +shalt pay to the king himself." Fin then got up and went away. + +Thorer replies, "I am well enough pleased, Fin, to part now; but +the good will is not wanting to pay this debt, so that both thou +and the king shall say it is not unpaid." + +Then Fin went on board his ship, and followed the rest of his +fleet. Thorer was late before he was ready to come out of the +harbour. When the sails were hoisted he steered out over +Westfjord, and went to sea, keeping south along the land so far +off that the hill-tops were half sunk, and soon the land +altogether was sunk from view by the sea. Thorer held this +course until he got into the English sea, and landed in England. +He betook himself to King Canute forthwith, and was well received +by him. It then came out that Thorer had with him a great deal +of property; and, with other things, all the money he and Karle +had taken in Bjarmaland. In the great liquor-casks there were +sides within the outer sides, and the liquor was between them. +The rest of the casks were filled with furs, and beaver and sable +skins. Thorer was then with King Canute. Fin came with his +forces to King Olaf, and related to him how all had gone upon his +voyage, and told at the same time his suspicion that Thorer had +left the country, and gone west to England to King Canute. "And +there I fear he will cause as much trouble." + +The king replies, "I believe that Thorer must be our enemy, and +it appears to me always better to have him at a distance than +near." + + + +150. DISPUTE BETWEEN HAREK AND ASMUND. + +Asmund Grankelson had been this winter (A.D. 1027) in Halogaland +in his sheriffdom, and was at home with his father Grankel. +There lies a rock out in the sea, on which there is both seal and +bird catching, and a fishing ground, and egg-gathering; and from +old times it had been an appendage to the farm which Grankel +owned, but now Harek of Thjotta laid claim to it. It had gone so +far, that some years he had taken by force all the gain of this +rock; but Asmund and his father thought that they might expect +the king's help in all cases in which the right was upon their +side. Both father and son went therefore in spring to Harek, and +brought him a message and tokens from King Olaf that he should +drop his claim. Harek answered Asmund crossly, because he had +gone to the king with such insinuations -- "for the just right is +upon my side. Thou shouldst learn moderation, Asmund, although +thou hast so much confidence in the king's favour. It has +succeeded with thee to kill some chiefs, and leave their +slaughter unpaid for by any mulct; and also to plunder us, +although we thought ourselves at least equal to all of equal +birth, and thou art far from being my equal in family." + +Asmund replies, "Many have experienced from thee, Harek, that +thou art of great connections, and too great power; and many in +consequence have suffered loss in their property through thee. +But it is likely that now thou must turn thyself elsewhere, and +not against us with thy violence, and not go altogether against +law, as thou art now doing." Then they separated. + +Harek sent ten or twelve of his house-servants with a large +rowing boat, with which they rowed to the rock, took all that was +to be got upon it, and loaded their boat. But when they were +ready to return home, Asmund Grankelson came with thirty men, and +ordered them to give up all they had taken. Harek's house- +servants were not quick in complying, so that Asmund attacked +them. Some of Harek's men were cudgelled, some wounded, some +thrown into the sea, and all they had caught was taken from on +board of their boat, and Asmund and his people took it along with +them. Then Harek's servants came home, and told him the event. +Harek replies, "That is called news indeed that seldom happens; +never before has it happened that my people have been beaten." + +The matter dropped. Harek never spoke about it, but was very +cheerful. In spring, however, Harek rigged out a cutter of +twenty seats of rowers, and manned it with his house-servants, +and the ship was remarkably well fitted out both with people and +all necessary equipment; and Harek went to the levy; but when he +came to King Olaf, Asmund was there before him. The king +summoned Harek and Asmund to him, and reconciled them so that +they left the matter entirely to him. Asmund then produced +witnesses to prove that Grankel had owned the rock, and the king +gave judgment accordingly. The case had a one-sided result. No +mulct was paid for Harek's house-servants, and the rock was +declared to be Grankel's. Harek observed it was no disgrace to +obey the king's decision, whatever way the case itself was +decided. + + + +151. THOROD'S STORY. + +Thorod Snorrason had remained in Norway, according to King Olaf's +commands, when Geller Thorkelson got leave to go to Iceland, as +before related. He remained there (A.D. 1027) with King Olaf, +but was ill pleased that he was not free to travel where he +pleased. Early in winter, King Olaf, when he was in Nidaros, +made it known that he would send people to Jamtaland to collect +the scat; but nobody had any great desire to go on this business, +after the fate of those whom King Olaf had sent before, namely, +Thrand White and others, twelve in number, who lost their lives, +as before related; and the Jamtalanders had ever since been +subject to the Swedish king. Thorod Snorrason now offered to +undertake this journey, for he cared little what became of him if +he could but become his own master again. The king consented, +and Thorod set out with eleven men in company. They came east to +Jamtaland, and went to a man called Thorar, who was lagman, and a +person in high estimation. They met with a hospitable reception; +and when they had been there a while, they explained their +business to Thorar. He replied, that other men and chiefs of the +country had in all respects as much power and right to give an +answer as he had, and for that purpose he would call together a +Thing. It was so done; the message-token was sent out, and a +numerous Thing assembled. Thorar went to the Thing, but the +messengers in the meantime remained at home. At the Thing, +Thorar laid the business before the people, but all were +unanimous that no scat should be paid to the king of Norway; and +some were for hanging the messengers, others for sacrificing them +to the gods. At last it was resolved to hold them fast until the +king of Sweden's sheriffs arrived, and they could treat them as +they pleased with consent of the people; and that, in the +meantime, this decision should be concealed, and the messengers +treated well, and detained under pretext that they must wait +until the scat is collected; and that they should be separated, +and placed two and two, as if for the convenience of boarding +them. Thorod and another remained in Thorar's house. There was +a great Yule feast and ale-drinking, to which each brought his +own liquor; for there were many peasants in the village, who all +drank in company together at Yule. There was another village not +far distant, where Thorar's brother-in-law dwelt, who was a rich +and powerful man, and had a grown-up son. The brothers-in-law +intended to pass the Yule in drinking feasts, half of it at the +house of the one and half with the other; and the feast began at +Thorar's house. The brothers-in-law drank together, and Thorod +and the sons of the peasants by themselves; and it was a drinking +match. In the evening words arose, and comparisons between the +men of Sweden and of Norway, and then between their kings both of +former times and at the present, and of the manslaughters and +robberies that had taken place between the countries. Then said +the peasants sons, "If our king has lost most people, his +sheriffs will make it even with the lives of twelve men when they +come from the south after Yule; and ye little know, ye silly +fools, why ye are kept here." Thorod took notice of these words, +and many made jest about it, and scoffed at them and their king. +When the ale began to talk out of the hearts of the Jamtalanders, +what Thorod had before long suspected became evident. The day +after Thorod and his comrade took all their clothes and weapons, +and laid them ready; and at night, when the people were all +asleep, they fled to the forest. The next morning, when the +Jamtalanders were aware of their flight, men set out after them +with dogs to trace them, and found them in a wood in which they +had concealed themselves. They brought them home to a room in +which there was a deep cellar, into which they were thrown, and +the door locked upon them. They had little meat, and only the +clothes they had on them. In the middle of Yule, Thorar, with +all his freeborn men, went to his brother's-in-law, where he was +to be a guest until the last of Yule. Thorar's slaves were to +keep guard upon the cellar, and they were provided with plenty of +liquor; but as they observed no moderation in drinking, they +became towards evening confused in the head with the ale. As +they were quite drunk, those who had to bring meat to the +prisoners in the cellar said among themselves that they should +want for nothing. Thorod amused the slaves by singing to them. +They said he was a clever man, and gave him a large candle that +was lighted; and the slaves who were in went to call the others +to come in; but they were all so confused with the ale, that in +going out they neither locked the cellar nor the room after them. +Now Thorod and his comrades tore up their skin clothes in strips, +knotted them together, made a noose at one end, and threw up the +rope on the floor of the room. It fastened itself around a +chest, by which they tried to haul themselves up. Thorod lifted +up his comrade until he stood on his shoulders, and from thence +scrambled up through the hatchhole. There was no want of ropes +in the chamber, and he threw a rope down to Thorod; but when he +tried to draw him up, he could not move him from the spot. Then +Thorod told him to cast the rope over a cross-beam that was in +the house, make a loop in it, and place as much wood and stones +in the loop as would outweigh him; and the heavy weight went down +into the cellar, and Thorod was drawn up by it. Now they took as +much clothes as they required in the room; and among other things +they took some reindeer hides, out of which they cut sandals, and +bound them under their feet, with the hoofs of the reindeer feet +trailing behind. But before they set off they set fire to a +large corn barn which was close by, and then ran out into the +pitch-dark night. The barn blazed, and set fire to many other +houses in the village. Thorod and his comrade travelled the +whole night until they came to a lonely wood, where they +concealed themselves when it was daylight. In the morning they +were missed. There was chase made with dogs to trace the +footsteps all round the house; but the hounds always came back to +the house, for they had the smell of the reindeer hoofs, and +followed the scent back on the road that the hoofs had left, and +therefore could not find the right direction. Thorod and his +comrade wandered long about in the desert forest, and came one +evening to a small house, and went in. A man and a woman were +sitting by the fire. The man called himself Thorer, and said it +was his wife who was sitting there, and the hut belonged to them. +The peasant asked them to stop there, at which they were well +pleased. He told them that he had come to this place, because he +had fled from the inhabited district on account of a murder. +Thorod and his comrade were well received, and they all got their +supper at the fireside; and then the benches were cleared for +them, and they lay down to sleep, but the fire was still burning +with a clear light. Thorod saw a man come in from another house, +and never had he seen so stout a man. He was dressed in a +scarlet cloak beset with gold clasps, and was of very handsome +appearance. Thorod heard him scold them for taking guests, when +they had scarcely food for themselves. The housewife said, "Be +not angry, brother; seldom such a thing happens; and rather do +them some good too, for thou hast better opportunity to do so +than we." Thorod heard also the stout man named by the name of +Arnliot Gelline, and observed that the woman of the house was his +sister. Thorod had heard speak of Arnliot as the greatest-of +robbers and malefactors. Thorod and his companion slept the +first part of the night, for they were wearied with walking; but +when a third of the night was still to come, Arnliot awoke them, +told them to get up, and make ready to depart. They arose +immediately, put on their clothes, and some breakfast was given +them; and Arnliot gave each of them also a pair of skees. +Arnliot made himself ready to accompany them, and got upon his +skees, which were both broad and long; but scarcely had he swung +his skee-staff before he was a long way past them. He waited for +them, and said they would make no progress in this way, and told +them to stand upon the edge of his skees beside him. They did +so. Thorod stood nearest to him, and held by Arnliot's belt, and +his comrade held by him. Arnliot strode on as quickly with them +both, as if he was alone and without any weight. The following +day they came, towards night, to a lodge for travellers, struck +fire, and prepared some food; but Arnliot told them to throw away +nothing of their food, neither bones nor crumbs. Arnliot took a +silver plate out of the pocket of his cloak, and ate from it. +When they were done eating, Arnliot gathered up the remains of +their meal, and they prepared to go to sleep. In the other end +of the house there was a loft upon cross-beams, and Arnliot and +the others went up, and laid themselves down to sleep. Arnliot +had a large halberd, of which the upper part was mounted with +gold, and the shaft was so long that with his arm stretched out +he could scarcely touch the top of it; and he was girt with a +sword. They had both their weapons and their clothes up in the +loft beside them. Arnliot, who lay outermost in the loft, told +them to be perfectly quiet. Soon after twelve men came to the +house, who were merchants going with their wares to Jamtaland; +and when they came into the house they made a great disturbance, +were merry, and made a great fire before them; and when they took +their supper they cast away all the bones around them. They then +prepared to go to sleep, and laid themselves down upon the +benches around the fire. When they, had been asleep a short +time, a huge witch came into the house; and when she came in, she +carefully swept together all the bones and whatever was of food +kind into a heap, and threw it into her mouth. Then she gripped +the man who was nearest to her, riving and tearing him asunder, +and threw him upon the fire. The others awoke in dreadful +fright, and sprang up, but she took them, and put them one by one +to death, so that only one remained in life. He ran under the +loft calling for help, and if there was any one on the loft to +help him. Arnliot reached down his hand, seized him by the +shoulder, and drew him up into the loft. The witch-wife had +turned towards the fire, and began to eat the men who were +roasting. Now Arnliot stood up, took his halberd, and struck her +between the shoulders, so that the point came out at her breast. +She writhed with it, gave a dreadful shriek, and sprang up. The +halberd slipped from Arnliot's hands, and she ran out with it. +Arnliot then went in; cleared away the dead corpses out of the +house; set the door and the door-posts up, for she had torn them +down in going out; and they slept the rest of the night. When +the day broke they got up; and first they took their breakfast. +When they had got food, Arnliot said, "Now we must part here. Ye +can proceed upon the new-traced path the merchants have made in +coming here yesterday. In the meantime I will seek after my +halberd, and in reward for my labour I will take so much of the +goods these men had with them as I find useful to me. Thou, +Thorod, must take my salutation to King Olaf; and say to him that +he is the man I am most desirous to see, although my salutation +may appear to him of little worth." Then he took his silver +plate, wiped it dry with a cloth, and said, "Give King Olaf this +plate; salute him, and say it is from me." Then they made +themselves ready for their journey, and parted. Thorod went on +with his comrade and the man of the merchants company who had +escaped. He proceeded until he came to King Olaf in the town +(Nidaros); told the king all that had happened, and presented to +him the silver plate. The king said it was wrong that Arnliot +himself had not come to him; "for it is a pity so brave a hero, +and so distinguished a man, should have given himself up to +misdeeds." + +Thorod remained the rest of the winter with the king, and in +summer got leave to return to Iceland; and he and King Olaf +parted the best of friends. + + + +152. KING OLAF'S LEVY OF MEN. + +King Olaf made ready in spring (A.D. 1027) to leave Nidaros, and +many people were assembled about him, both from Throndhjem and +the Northern country; and when he was ready he proceeded first +with his men to More, where he gathered the men of the levy, and +did the same at Raumsdal. He went from thence to South More. He +lay a long time at the Herey Isles waiting for his forces; and he +often held House-things, as many reports came to his ears about +which he thought it necessary to hold councils. In one of these +Things he made a speech, in which he spoke of the loss he +suffered from the Farey islanders. "The scat which they promised +me," he said, "is not forthcoming; and I now intend to send men +thither after it." Then he proposed to different men to +undertake this expedition; but the answer was, that all declined +the adventure. + +Then there stood up a stout and very remarkable looking man in +the Thing. He was clad in a red kirtle, had a helmet on his +head, a sword in his belt, and a large halberd in his hands. He +took up the word and said, "In truth here is a great want of men. +Ye have a good king; but ye are bad servants who say no to this +expedition he offers you, although ye have received many gifts of +friendship and tokens of honour from him. I have hitherto been +no friend of the king, and he has been my enemy, and says, +besides, that he has good grounds for being so. Now, I offer, +sire, to go upon this expedition, if no better will undertake +it." + +The king answers, "Who is this brave man who replies to my offer? +Thou showest thyself different from the other men here present, +in offering thyself for this expedition from which they excuse +themselves, although I expected they would willingly have +undertaken it; but I do not know thee in the least, and do not +know thy name." + +He replies, "My name, sire, is not difficult to know, and I think +thou hast heard my name before. I am Karl Morske." + +The king -- "So this is Karl! I have indeed heard thy name +before; and, to say the truth, there was a time when our meeting +must have been such, if I had had my will; that thou shouldst not +have had to tell it now. But I will not show myself worse than +thou, but will join my thanks and my favour to the side of the +help thou hast offered me. Now thou shalt come to me, Karl, and +be my guest to-day; and then we shall consult together about this +business." Karl said it should be so. + + + +153. KARL MORSKE'S STORY. + +Karl Morske had been a viking, and a celebrated robber. Often +had the king sent out men against him, and wished to make an end +of him; but Karl, who was a man of high connection, was quick in +all his doing's, and besides a man of great dexterity, and expert +in all feats. Now when Karl had undertaken this business the +king was reconciled to him, gave him his friendship, and let him +be fitted out in the best manner for this expedition. There were +about twenty men in the ship; and the king sent messages to his +friends in the Farey Islands, and recommended him also to Leif +Ossurson and Lagman Gille, for aid and defence; and for this +purpose furnished Karl with tokens of the full powers given him. +Karl set out as soon as he was ready; and as he got a favourable +breeze soon came to the Farey Islands, and landed at Thorshavn, +in the island Straumey. A Thing was called, to which there came +a great number of people. Thrand of Gata came with a great +retinue, and Leif and Gille came there also, with many in their +following. After they had set up their tents, and put themselves +in order, they went to Karl Morske, and saluted each other on +both sides in a friendly way. Then Karl produced King Olaf's +words, tokens, and friendly message to Leif and Gille, who +received them in a friendly manner, invited Karl to come to them, +and promised him to support his errand, and give him all the aid +in their power, for which he thanked them. Soon after came +Thrand of Gata, who also received Karl in the most friendly +manner, and said he was glad to see so able a man coming to their +country on the king's business, which they were all bound to +promote. "I will insist, Karl," says he, "on thy taking-up thy +winter abode with me, together with all those of thy people who +may appear to thee necessary for thy dignity." + +Karl replies, that he had already settled to lodge with Leif; +"otherwise I would with great pleasure have accepted thy +invitation." + +"Then fate has given great honour to Leif," says Thrand; "but is +there any other way in which I can be of service?" + +Karl replies, that he would do him a great service by collecting +the scat of the eastern island, and of all the northern islands. + +Thrand said it was both his duty and interest to assist in the +king's business, and thereupon Thrand returned to his tent; and +at that Thing nothing else worth speaking of occurred. Karl took +up his abode with Leif Ossurson, and was there all winter (A.D. +1028). Leif collected the scat of Straumey Island, and all the +islands south of it. The spring after Thrand of Gata fell ill, +and had sore eyes and other complaints; but he prepared to attend +the Thing, as was his custom. When he came to the Thing he had +his tent put up, and within it another black tent, that the light +might not penetrate. After some days of the Thing had passed, +Leif and Karl came to Thrand's tent, with a great many people, +and found some persons standing outside. They asked if Thrand +was in the tent, and were told he was. Leif told them to bid +Thrand come out, as he and Karl had some business with him. They +came back, and said that Thrand had sore eyes, and could not come +out; "but he begs thee, Leif, to come to him within." Leif told +his comrades to come carefully into the tent, and not to press +forward, and that he who came last in should go out first. Leif +went in first, followed by Karl, and then his comrades; and all +fully armed as if they were going into battle. Leif went into +the black tent and asked if Thrand was there. Thrand answered +and saluted Leif. Leif returned his salutation, and asked if he +had brought the scat from the northern islands, and if he would +pay the scat that had been collected. Thrand replies, that he +had not forgotten what had been spoken of between him and Karl, +and that he would now pay over the scat. "Here is a purse, Leif, +full of silver, which thou canst receive." Leif looked around, +and saw but few people in the tent, of whom some were lying upon +the benches, and a few were sitting up. Then Leif went to +Thrand, and took the purse, and carried it into the outer tent, +where it was light, turned out the money on his shield, groped +about in it with his hand, and told Karl to look at the silver. +When they had looked at it a while, Karl asked Leif what he +thought of the silver. He replied, "I am thinking where the bad +money that is in the north isles can have come from." Thrand +heard this, and said, "Do you not think, Leif, the silver is +good?" "No," says he. Thrand replies, "Our relations, then, are +rascals not to be trusted. I sent them in spring to collect the +scat in the north isles, as I could not myself go anywhere, and +they have allowed themselves to be bribed by the bondes to take +false money, which nobody looks upon as current and good; it is +better, therefore, Leif, to look at this silver which has been +paid me as land-rent." Leif thereupon carried back this silver, +and received another bag, which he carried to Karl, and they +looked over the money together. Karl asked Leif what he thought +of this money. He answered, that it appeared to him so bad that +it would not be taken in payment, however little hope there might +be of getting a debt paid in any other way: "therefore I will not +take this money upon the king's account." A man who had been +lying on the bench now cast the skin coverlet off which he had +drawn over his head, and said, "True is the old word, -- he grows +worse who grows older: so it is with thee, Thrand, who allowest +Karl Morske to handle thy money all the day." This was Gaut the +Red. Thrand sprang up at Gaut's words, and reprimanded his +relation with many angry words. At last he said that Leif should +leave this silver, and take a bag which his own peasants had +brought him in spring. "And although I am weak-sighted, yet my +own hand is the truest test." Another man who was lying on the +bench raised himself now upon his elbow; and this was Thord the +Low. He said, "These are no ordinary reproaches we suffer from +Karl Morske, and therefore he well deserves a reward for them." +Leif in the meantime took the bag, and carried it to Karl; and +when they cast their eyes on the money, Leif said, "We need not +look long at this silver, for here the one piece of money is +better than the other; and this is the money we will have. Let a +man come to be present at the counting it out." Thrand says that +he thought Leif was the fittest man to do it upon his account. +Leif and Karl thereupon went a short way from the tent, sat down. +and counted and weighed the silver. Karl took the helmet off his +head, and received in it the weighed silver. They saw a man +coming to them who had a stick with an axe-head on it in his +hand, a hat low upon his head, and a short green cloak. He was +bare-legged, and had linen breeches on tied at the knee. He laid +his stick down in the field, and went to Karl and said, "Take +care, Karl Morske, that thou does not hurt thyself against my +axe-stick." Immediately a man came running and calls with great +haste to Leif Ossurson, telling him to come as quickly as +possible to Lagman Gille's tent; "for," says he, "Sirurd +Thorlakson ran in just now into the mouth of the tent, and gave +one of Gille's men a desperate wound." Leif rose up instantly, +and went off to Gille's tent along with his men. Karl remained +sitting, and the Norway people stood around in all corners. Gaut +immediately sprang up, and struck with a hand-axe over the heads +of the people, and the stroke came on Karl's head; but the wound +was slight. Thord the Low seized the stick-axe, which lay in the +field at his side, and struck the axe-blade right into Karl's +skull. Many people now streamed out of Thrand's tent. Karl was +carried away dead. Thrand was much grieved at this event, and +offered money-mulcts for his relations; but Leif and Gille, who +had to prosecute the business, would accept no mulct. Sigurd was +banished the country for having wounded Gille's tent comrade, and +Gaut and Thord for the murder of Karl. The Norway people rigged +out the vessel which Karl had with him, and sailed eastward to +Olaf, and gave him these tidings. He was in no pleasant humour +at it, and threatened a speedy vengeance; but it was not allotted +by fate to King Olaf to revenge himself on Thrand and his +relations, because of the hostilities which had begun in Norway, +and which are now to be related. And there is nothing more to be +told of what happened after King Olaf sent men to the Farey +Islands to take scat of them. But great strife arose after +Karl's death in the Farey Islands between the family of Thrand of +Gata and Leif Ossurson, and of which there are great sagas. + + + +154. KING OLAF'S EXPEDITION WITH HIS LEVY. + +Now we must proceed with the relation we began before, -- that +King Olaf set out with his men, and raised a levy over the whole +country (A.D. 1027). All lendermen in the North followed him +excepting Einar Tambaskelfer, who sat quietly at home upon his +farm since his return to the country, and did not serve the king. +Einar had great estates and wealth, although he held no fiefs +from the king, and he lived splendidly. King Olaf sailed with +his fleet south around Stad, and many people from the districts +around joined him. King Olaf himself had a ship which he had got +built the winter before (A.D. 1027), and which was called the +Visund (1). It was a very large ship, with a bison's head gilded +all over upon the bow. Sigvat the skald speaks thus of it: -- + + "Trygvason's Long Serpent bore, + Grim gaping o'er the waves before, + A dragon's head with open throat, + When last the hero was afloat: + His cruise was closed, + As God disposed. + Olaf has raised a bison's head, + Which proudly seems the waves to tread. + While o'er its golden forehead dashing + The waves its glittering horns are washing: + May God dispose + A luckier close." + +The king went on to Hordaland; there he heard the news that +Erling Skjalgson had left the country with a great force, and +four or five ships. He himself had a large war-ship, and his +sons had three of twenty rowing-banks each; and they had sailed +westward to England to Canute the Great. Then King Olaf sailed +eastward along the land with a mighty war-force, and he inquired +everywhere if anything was known of Canute's proceedings; and all +agreed in saying he was in England but added that he was fitting +out a levy, and intended coming to Norway. As Olaf had a large +fleet, and could not discover with certainty where he should go +to meet King Canute, and as his people were dissatisfied with +lying quiet in one place with so large an armament, he resolved +to sail with his fleet south to Denmark, and took with him all +the men who were best appointed and most warlike; and he gave +leave to the others to return home. Now the people whom he +thought of little use having gone home, King Olaf had many +excellent and stout men-at-arms besides those who, as before +related, had fled the country, or sat quietly at home; and most +of the chief men and lendermen of Norway were along with him. + + +ENDNOTES: +(1) Visundr is the buffalo; although the modern bison, or + American animal of that name, might have been known through + the Greenland colonists, who in this reign had visited some + parts of America. -- L. + + + +155. OF KING OLAF AND KING ONUND. + +When King Olaf sailed to Denmark, he set his course for Seeland; +and when he came there he made incursions on the land, and began +to plunder. The country people were severely treated; some were +killed, some bound and dragged to the ships. All who could do so +took to flight, and made no opposition. King Olaf committed +there the greatest ravages. While Olaf was in Seeland, the news +came that King Onund Olafson of Sweden had raised a levy, and +fallen upon Scania, and was ravaging there; and then it became +known what the resolution had been that the two kings had taken +at the Gaut river, where they had concluded a union and +friendship, and had bound themselves to oppose King Canute. King +Onund continued his march until he met his brother-in-law King +Olaf. When they met they made proclamation both to their own +people and to the people of the country, that they intended to +conquer Denmark; and asked the support of the people of the +country for this purpose. And it happened, as we find examples +of everywhere, that if hostilities are brought upon the people of +a country not strong enough to withstand, the greatest number +will submit to the conditions by which peace can be purchased at +any rate. So it happened here that many men went into the +service of the kings, and agreed to submit to them. Wheresoever +they went they laid the country all round subjection to them, and +otherwise laid waste all with fire and sword. + +Of this foray Sigvat the skald speaks, in a ballad he composed +concerning King Canute the Great: -- + + "`Canute is on the sea!' + The news is told, + And the Norsemen bold + Repeat it with great glee. + And it runs from mouth to mouth -- + `On a lucky day + We came away + From Throndhjem to the south.' + Across the cold East sea, + The Swedish king + His host did bring, + To gain great victory. + King Onund came to fight, + In Seeland's plains, + Against the Danes, + With his steel-clad men so bright. + Canute is on the land; + Side to side + His long-ships ride + Along the yellow strand. + Where waves wash the green banks, + Mast to mast, + All bound fast, + His great fleet lies in ranks." + + + +154. OF KING CANUTE THE GREAT. + +King Canute had heard in England that King Olaf of Norway had +called out a levy, and had gone with his forces to Denmark, and +was making great ravages in his dominions there. Canute began to +gather people, and he had speedily collected a great army and a +numerous fleet. Earl Hakon was second in command over the whole. + +Sigvat the skald came this summer (A.D. 1027) from the West, from +Ruda (Rouen) in Valland, and with him was a man called Berg. +They had made a merchant voyage there the summer before. Sigvat +had made a little poem about this journey, called "The Western +Traveller's Song," which begins thus: -- + + "Berg! many a merry morn was pass'd, + When our vessel was made fast, + And we lay on the glittering tide + or Rouen river's western side." + +When Sigvat came to England he went directly to King Canute, and +asked his leave to proceed to Norway; for King Canute had +forbidden all merchant vessels to sail until he himself was ready +with his fleet. When Sigvat arrived he went to the house in +which the king was lodged; but the doors were locked, and he had +to stand a long time outside, but when he got admittance he +obtained the permission he desired. He then sang: -- + + "The way to Jutland's king I sought; + A little patience I was taught. + The doors were shut -- all full within; + The udaller could not get in. + But Gorm's great son did condescend + To his own chamber me to send, + And grant my prayer -- although I'm one + Whose arms the fetters' weight have known." + +When Sigvat became aware that King Canute was equipping an +armament against King Olaf, and knew what a mighty force King +Canute had, he made these lines: -- + + "The mighty Canute, and Earl Hakon, + Have leagued themselves, and counsel taken + Against King Olaf's life, + And are ready for the strife. + In spite of king and earl, I say, + `I love him well -- may he get away:' + On the Fields, wild and dreary, + With him I'd live, and ne'er be weary." + +Sigvat made many other songs concerning this expedition of Canute +and Hakon. He made this among others: -- + + "`Twas not the earl's intention then + 'Twixt Olaf and the udalmen + Peace to establish, and the land + Upright to hold with Northman's hand; + But ever with deceit and lies + Eirik's descendant, Hakon, tries + To make ill-will and discontent, + Till all the udalmen are bent + Against King Olaf's rule to rise." + + + +157. OF KING CANUTE'S SHIP THE DRAGON. + +Canute the Great was at last ready with his fleet, and left the +land; and a vast number of men he had, and ships frightfully +large. He himself had a dragon-ship, so large that it had sixty +banks of rowers, and the head was gilt all over. Earl Hakon had +another dragon of forty banks, and it also had a gilt figure- +head. The sails of both were in stripes of blue, red, and green, +and the vessels were painted all above the water-stroke; and all +that belonged to their equipment was most splendid. They had +also many other huge ships remarkably well fitted out, and grand. +Sigvat the skald talks of this in his song on Canute: -- + + "Canute is out beneath the sky -- + Canute of the clear blue eye! + The king is out on the ocean's breast, + Leading his grand fleet from the West. + On to the East the ship-masts glide, + Glancing and bright each long-ship's side. + The conqueror of great Ethelred, + Canute, is there, his foemen's dread: + His dragon with her sails of blue, + All bright and brilliant to the view, + High hoisted on the yard arms wide, + Carries great Canute o'er the tide. + Brave is the royal progress -- fast + The proud ship's keel obeys the mast, + Dashes through foam, and gains the land, + Raising a surge on Limfjord's strand." + +It is related that King Canute sailed with this vast force from +England, and came with all his force safely to Denmark, where he +went into Limfjord, and there he found gathered besides a large +army of the men of the country. + + + +158. HARDAKNUT TAKEN TO BE KING IN DENMARK. + +Earl Ulf Sprakalegson had been set as protector over Denmark when +King Canute went to England, and the king had intrusted his son +Hardaknut in the earl's hands. This took place the summer before +(A.D. 1026), as we related. But the earl immediately gave it out +that King Canute had, at parting, made known to him his will and +desire that the Danes should take his son Hardaknut as king over +the Danish dominions. "On that account," says the earl, "he gave +the matter into our hands; as I, and many other chiefs and +leading men here in the country, have often complained to King +Canute of the evil consequences to the country of being without a +king, and that former kings thought it honour and power enough to +rule over the Danish kingdom alone; and in the times that are +past many kings have ruled over this kingdom. But now there are +greater difficulties than have ever been before; for we have been +so fortunate hitherto as to live without disturbance from foreign +kings, but now we hear the king of Norway is going to attack us, +to which is added the fear of the people that the Swedish king +will join him; and now King Canute is in England." The earl then +produced King Canute's letter and seal, confirming all that the +earl asserted. Many other chiefs supported this business; and in +consequence of all these persuasions the people resolved to take +Hardaknut as king, which was done at the same Thing. The Queen +Emma had been principal promoter of this determination; for she +had got the letter to be written, and provided with the seal, +having cunningly got hold of the king's signet; but from him it +was all concealed. Now when Hardaknut and Earl Ulf heard for +certain that King Olaf was come from Norway with a large army, +they went to Jutland, where the greatest strength of the Danish +kingdom lies, sent out message-tokens, and summoned to them a +great force; but when they heard the Swedish king was also come +with his army, they thought they would not have strength enough +to give battle to both, and therefore kept their army together in +Jutland, and resolved to defend that country against the kings. +The whole of their ships they assembled in Limfjord, and waited +thus for King Canute. Now when they heard that King Canute had +come from the West to Limfjord they sent men to him, and to Queen +Emma, and begged her to find out if the king was angry at them or +not, and to let them know. The queen talked over the matter with +him, and said, "Your son Hardaknut will pay the full mulct the +king may demand, if he has done anything which is thought to be +against the king." He replies, that Hardaknut has not done this +of his own judgement. "And therefore," says he, "it has turned +out as might have been expected, that when he, a child, and +without understanding, wanted to be called king, the country, +when any evil came and an enemy appeared, must be conquered by +foreign princes, if our might had not come to his aid. If he +will have any reconciliation with me let him come to me, and lay +down the mock title of king he has given himself." The queen +sent these very words to Hardaknut, and at the same time she +begged him not to decline coming; for, as she truly observed, he +had no force to stand against his father. When this message came +to Hardaknut he asked the advice of the earl and other chief +people who were with him; but it was soon found that when the +people heard King Canute the Old was arrived they all streamed to +him, and seemed to have no confidence but in him alone. Then +Earl Ulf and his fellows saw they had but two roads to take; +either to go to the king and leave all to his mercy, or to fly +the country. All pressed Hardaknut to go to his father, which +advice he followed. When they met he fell at his father's feet, +and laid his seal, which accompanied the kingly title, on his +knee. King Canute took Hardaknut by the hand, and placed him in +as high a seat as he used to sit in before. Earl UIf sent his +son Svein, who was a sister's son of King Canute, and the same +age as Hardaknut, to the king. He prayed for grace and +reconciliation for his father, and offered himself as hostage for +the earl. King Canute ordered him to tell the earl to assemble +his men and ships, and come to him, and then they would talk of +reconciliation. The earl did so. + + + +159. FORAY IN SCANIA. + +When King Olaf and King Onund heard that King Canute was come +from the West, and also that he had a vast force, they sailed +east to Scania, and allowed themselves to ravage and burn in the +districts there, and then proceeded eastward along the land to +the frontier of Sweden. As soon as the country people heard that +King Canute was come from the West, no one thought of going into +the service of the two kings. + +Now the kings sailed eastward along the coast, and brought up in +a river called Helga, and remained there some time. When they +heard that King Canute was coming eastward with his forces +against them, they held a council; and the result was, that King +Olaf with his people went up the country to the forest, and to +the lake out of which the river Helga flows. There at the +riverhead they made a dam of timber and turf, and dammed in the +lake. They also dug a deep ditch, through which they led several +waters, so that the lake waxed very high. In the river-bed they +laid large logs of timber. They were many days about this work, +and King Olaf had the management of this piece of artifice; but +King Onund had only to command the fleet and army. When King +Canute heard of the proceedings of the two kings, and of the +damage they had done to his dominions, he sailed right against +them to where they lay in Helga river. He had a War-force which +was one half greater than that of both the kings together. +Sigvat speaks of these things: -- + + "The king, who shields + His Jutland fields + From scaith or harm + By foeman's arm, + Will not allow + Wild plundering now: + `The greatest he, + On land or sea.'" + + + +160. BATTLE IN HELGA RIVER. + +One day, towards evening, King Onund's spies saw King Canute +coming sailing along, and he was not far off. Then King Onund +ordered the war-horns to sound; on which his people struck their +tents, put on their weapons, rowed out of the harbour and east +round the land, bound their ships together, and prepared for +battle. King Onund made his spies run up the country to look for +King Olaf, and tell him the news. Then King Olaf broke up the +dam, and let the river take its course. King Olaf travelled down +in the night to his ships. When King Canute came outside the +harbour, he saw the forces of the kings ready for battle. He +thought that it would be too late in the day to begin the fight +by the time his forces could be ready; for his fleet required a +great deal of room at sea, and there was a long distance between +the foremost of his ships and the hindmost, and between those +outside and those nearest the land, and there was but little +wind. Now, as Canute saw that the Swedes and Norwegians had +quitted the harbour, he went into it with as many ships as it +could hold; but the main strength of the fleet lay without the +harbour. In the morning, when it was light, a great part of the +men went on shore; some for amusement, some to converse with the +people of other ships. They observed nothing until the water +came rushing over them like a waterfall, carrying huge trees, +which drove in among their ships, damaging all they struck; and +the water covered all the fields. The men on shore perished, and +many who were in the ships. All who could do it cut their +cables; so that the ships were loose, and drove before the +stream, and were scattered here and there. The great dragon, +which King Canute himself was in, drove before the stream; and as +it could not so easily be turned with oars, drove out among +Olaf's and Onund's ships. As they knew the ship, they laid her +on board on all quarters. But the ship was so high in the hull, +as if it were a castle, and had besides such a numerous and +chosen crew on board, well armed and exercised, that it was not +easy to attack her. After a short time also Earl Ulf came up +with his fleet; and then the battle began, and King Canute's +fleet gathered together from all quarters. But the kings Olaf +and Onund, seeing they had for this time got all the victory that +fate permitted them to gain, let their ships retreat, cast +themselves loose from King Canute's ship, and the fleets +separated. But as the attack had not been made as King Canute +had determined, he made no further attempt; and the kings on each +side arranged their fleets and put their ships in order. When +the fleets were parted, and each sailing its course, Olaf and +Onund looked over their forces, and found they had suffered no +loss of men. In the meantime they saw that if they waited until +King Canute got his large fleet in order to attack them, the +difference of force was so great that for them there was little +chance of victory. It was also evident that if the battle was +renewed, they must suffer a great loss of men. They took the +resolution, therefore, to row with the whole fleet eastward along +the coast. Observing that King Canute did not pursue them, they +raised up their masts and set sail. Ottar Svarte tells thus of +it in the poem he composed upon King Canute the Great: -- + + "The king, in battle fray, + Drove the Swedish host away: + The wolf did not miss prey, + Nor the raven on that day. + Great Canute might deride + Two kings if he had pride, + For at Helga river's side + They would not his sword abide." + +Thord Sjarekson also sang these lines in his death song of King +Olaf: -- + + "King Olaf, Agder's lord, + Ne'er shunned the Jutland king, + But with his blue-edged sword + Broke many a panzer ring. + King Canute was not slow: + King Onund filled the plain + With dead, killed by his bow: + The wolf howled o'er the slain." + + + +161. KING OLAF AND KING ONUND'S PLANS. + +King Olaf and King Onund sailed eastward to the Swedish king's +dominions; and one day, towards evening, landed at a place called +Barvik, where they lay all night. But then it was observed of +the Swedes that they were home-sick; for the greater part of +their forces sailed eastward along the land in the night, and did +not stop their course until they came home to their houses. Now +when King Onund observed this he ordered, as soon as the day +dawned, to sound the signal for a House-thing; and the whole +people went on shore, and the Thing sat down. Then King Onund +took up the word, and spake thus: "So it is, King Olaf, that, as +you know, we have been assembled in summer, and have forayed wide +around in Denmark, and have gained much booty, but no land. I +had 350 vessels, and now have not above 100 remaining with me. +Now it appears to me we can make no greater progress than we have +made, although you have still the 60 vessels which have followed +you the whole summer. It therefore appears to me best that we +come back to my kingdom; for it is always good to drive home with +the wagon safe. In this expedition we have won something, and +lost nothing. Now I will offer you, King Olaf, to come with me, +and we shall remain assembled during the winter. Take as much of +my kingdom as you will, so that you and the men who follow you +may support yourselves well; and when spring comes let us take +such measures as we find serviceable. If you, however, will +prefer to travel across our country, and go overland to Norway, +it shall be free for you to do so." + +King Olaf thanked King Onund for his friendly offer. "But if I +may advise," says he, "then we should take another resolution, +and keep together the forces we have still remaining. I had in +the first of summer, before I left Norway, 350 ships; but when I +left the country I chose from among the whole war-levy those I +thought to be the best, and with them I manned 60 ships; and +these I still have. Now it appears to me that the part of your +war-force which has now run away is the most worthless, and of +least resistance; but now I see here all your chiefs and leaders, +and I know well that the people who belong to the court-troops +(1) are by far the best suited to carry arms. We have here +chosen men and superb ships, and we can very well lie all winter +in our ships, as viking's custom is. But Canute cannot lie long +in Helga river; for the harbour will not hold so many vessels as +he has. If he steers eastward after us, we can escape from him, +and then people will soon gather to us; but if he return to the +harbours where his fleet can lie, I know for certain that the +desire to return home will not be less in his army than in ours. +I think, also, we have ravaged so widely in summer, that the +villagers, both in Scania and in Halland, know well whose favour +they have to seek. Canute's army will thus be dispersed so +widely, that it is uncertain to whom fate may at the last give +the victory; but let us first find out what resolution he takes." + +Thus King Olaf ended his speech, and it found much applause, and +his advice was followed. Spies were sent into King Canute's +army, and both the kings Olaf and Onund remained lying where they +were. + + +ENDNOTES: +(1) The thingmen, or hired body-guard attending the court. -- L. + + + +162. OF KING CANUTE AND EARL ULF. + +When King Canute saw that the kings of Norway and Sweden steered +eastward with their forces along the coast, he sent men to ride +night and day on the land to follow their movements. Some spies +went forward, others returned; so that King Canute had news every +day of their progress. He had also spies always in their army. +Now when he heard that a great part of the fleet had sailed away +from the kings, he turned back with his forces to Seeland, and +lay with his whole fleet in the Sound; so that a part lay on the +Scania side, and a part on the Seeland side. King Canute +himself, the day before Michaelmas, rode with a great retinue to +Roeskilde. There his brother-in-law, Earl Ulf, had prepared a +great feast for him. The earl was the most agreeable host, but +the king was silent and sullen. The earl talked to him in every +way to make him cheerful, and brought forward everything which he +thought would amuse him; but the king remained stern, and +speaking little. At last the earl proposed to him a game at +chess, which he agreed to; and a chess-board was produced, and +they played together. Earl Ulf was hasty in temper, stiff, and +in nothing yielding; but everything he managed went on well in +his hands; and he was a great warrior, about whom there are many +stories. He was the most powerful man in Denmark next to the +king. Earl Ulf's sister Gyda was married to Earl Gudin (Godwin) +Ulfnadson; and their sons were Harald king of England, and Earl +Toste, Earl Valthiof, Earl Morukare, and Earl Svein. Gyda was +the name of their daughter, who was married to the English king +Edward the Good. + + + +163. OF THE EARL'S MURDER. + +When they had played a while the king made a false move, at which +the earl took a knight from the king; but the king set the piece +again upon the board, and told the earl to make another move; but +the earl grew angry, threw over the chess-board, stood up, and +went away. The king said, "Runnest thou away, Ulf the coward?" +The earl turned round at the door and said, "Thou wouldst have +run farther at Helga river, if thou hadst come to battle there. +Thou didst not call me Ulf the coward, when I hastened to thy +help while the Swedes were beating thee like a dog." The earl +then went out, and went to bed. A little later the king also +went to bed. The following morning while the king was putting on +his clothes he said to his footboy, "Go thou to Earl Ulf, and +kill him." + +The lad went, was away a while, and then came back. + +The king said, "Hast thou killed the earl?" + +"I did not kill him, for he was gone to Saint Lucius' church." + +There was a man called Ivar White, a Norwegian by birth, who was +the king's courtman and chamberlain. The king said to him, "Go +thou and kill the earl." + +Ivar went to the church, and in at the choir, and thrust his +sword through the earl, who died on the spot. Then Ivar went to +the king, with the bloody sword in his hand. + +The king said, "Hast thou killed the earl?" + +"I have killed him," says he. + +"Thou didst well." + +After the earl was killed the monks closed the church, and locked +the doors. When that was told the king he sent a message to the +monks, ordering them to open the church and sing high mass. They +did as the king ordered; and when the king came to the church he +bestowed on it great property, so that it had a large domain, by +which that place was raised very high; and these lands have since +always belonged to it. King Canute rode down to his ships, and +lay there till late in harvest with a very large army. + + + +164. OF KING OLAF AND THE SWEDES. + +When King Olaf and King Onund heard that King Canute had sailed +to the Sound, and lay there with a great force, the kings held a +House-thing, and spoke much about what resolution they should +adopt. King Olaf wished they should remain there with all the +fleet, and see what King Canute would at last resolve to do. But +the Swedes held it to be unadvisable to remain until the frost +set in, and so it was determined; and King Onund went home with +all his army, and King Olaf remained lying after them. + + + +165. OF EGIL AND TOFE. + +While King Olaf lay there, he had frequently conferences and +consultations with his people. One night Egil Halson and Tofe +Valgautson had the watch upon the king's ship. Tofe came from +West Gautland, and was a man of high birth. While they sat on +watch they heard much lamentation and crying among the people who +had been taken in the war, and who lay bound on the shore at +night. Tofe said it made him ill to hear such distress, and +asked Egil to go with him, and let loose these people. This work +they set about, cut the cords, and let the people escape, and +they looked upon it as a piece of great friendship; but the king +was so enraged at it, that they themselves were in the greatest +danger. When Egil afterwards fell sick the king for a long time +would not visit him, until many people entreated it of him. It +vexed Egil much to have done anything the king was angry at, and +he begged his forgiveness. The king now dismissed his wrath +against Egil, laid his hands upon the side on which Egil's pain +was, and sang a prayer; upon which the pain ceased instantly, and +Egil grew better. Tofe came, after entreaty, into reconciliation +with the king, on condition that he should exhort his father +Valgaut to come to the king. He was a heathen; but after +conversation with the king he went over to Christianity, and died +instantly when he was baptized. + + + +166. TREACHERY TOWARDS KING OLAF. + +King Olaf had now frequent conferences with his people, and asked +advice from them, and from his chiefs, as to what he should +determine upon. But there was no unanimity among them -- some +considering that unadvisable which others considered highly +serviceable; and there was much indecision in their councils. +King Canute had always spies in King Olaf's army, who entered +into conversation with many of his men, offering them presents +and favour on account of King Canute. Many allowed themselves to +be seduced, and gave promises of fidelity, and to be King +Canute's men, and bring the country into his hands if he came to +Norway. This was apparent, afterwards, of many who at first kept +it concealed. Some took at once money bribes, and others were +promised money afterwards; and a great many there were who had +got great presents of money from him before: for it may be said +with truth of King Canute, that every man who came to him, and +who he thought had the spirit of a man and would like his favour, +got his hands full of gifts and money. On this account he was +very popular, although his generosity was principally shown to +foreigners, and was greatest the greater distance they came from. + + + +167. KING OLAF'S CONSULTATIONS. + +King Olaf had often conferences and meetings with his people, and +asked their counsel; but as he observed they gave different +opinions, he had a suspicion that there must be some who spoke +differently from what they really thought advisable for him, and +he was thus uncertain if all gave him due fidelity in council. +Some pressed that with the first fair wind they should sail to +the Sound, and so to Norway. They said the Danes would not dare +to attack them, although they lay with so great a force right in +the way. But the king was a man of too much understanding not to +see that this was impracticable. He knew also that Olaf +Trygvason had found it quite otherwise, as to the Danes not +daring to fight, when he with a few people went into battle +against a great body of them. The king also knew that in King +Canute's army there were a great many Norwegians; therefore he +entertained the suspicion that those who gave this advice were +more favourable to King Canute than to him. King Olaf came at +last to the determination, from all these considerations, that +the people who would follow him should make themselves ready to +proceed by land across Gautland, and so to Norway. "But our +ships," said he, "and all things that we cannot take with us, I +will send eastward to the Swedish king's dominions, and let them +be taken care of for us there." + + + +168. HAREK OF THJOTTA'S VOYAGE. + +Harek of Thjotta replied thus to the king's speech: "It is +evident that I cannot travel on foot to Norway. I am old and +heavy, and little accustomed to walking. Besides, I am unwilling +to part with my ship; for on that ship and its apparel I have +bestowed so much labour, that it would go much against my +inclination to put her into the hands of my enemies." The king +said, "Come along with us, Harek, and we shall carry thee when +thou art tired of walking." Then Harek sang these lines :-- + + "I'11 mount my ocean steed, + And o'er the sea I'll speed; + Forests and hills are not for me, -- + I love the moving sea, + Though Canute block the Sound, + Rather than walk the ground, + And leave my ship, I'll see + What my ship will do for me." + +Then King Olaf let everything be put in order for the journey. +The people had their walking clothing and weapons, but their +other clothes and effects they packed upon such horses as they +could get. Then he sent off people to take his ships east to +Calmar. There he had the vessels laid up, and the ships' apparel +and other goods taken care of. Harek did as he had said, and +waited for a wind, and then sailed west to Scania, until, about +the decline of the day, he came with a fresh and fair wind to the +eastward of Holar. There he let the sail and the vane, and flag +and mast be taken down, and let the upper works of the ship be +covered over with some grey tilt-canvas, and let a few men sit at +the oars in the fore part and aft, but the most were sitting low +down in the vessel. + +When Canute's watchmen saw the ship, they talked with each other +about what ship it might be, and made the guess that it must be +one loaded with herrings or salt, as they only saw a few men at +the oars; and the ship, besides, appeared to them grey, and +wanting tar, as if burnt up by the sun, and they saw also that it +was deeply loaded. Now when Harek came farther through the +Sound, and past the fleet, he raised the mast, hoisted sail, and +set up his gilded vane. The sail was white as snow, and in it +were red and blue stripes of cloth interwoven. When the king's +men saw the ship sailing in this state, they told the king that +probably King Olaf had sailed through them. But King Canute +replies, that King Olaf was too prudent a man to sail with a +single ship through King Canute's fleet, and thought it more +likely to be Harek of Thjotta, or the like of him. Many believed +the truth to be that King Canute knew of this expedition of +Harek, and that it would not have succeeded so if they had not +concluded a friendship beforehand with each other; which seemed +likely, after King Canute's and Harek's friendly understanding +became generally known. + +Harek made this song as he sailed northward round the isle of +Vedrey: -- + + "The widows of Lund may smile through their tears, + The Danish girls may have their jeers; + They may laugh or smile, + But outside their isle + Old Harek still on to his North land steers." + +Harek went on his way, and never stopped till he came north to +Halogaland, to his own house in Thjotta. + + + +169. KING OLAF'S COURSE FROM SVITHJOD. + +When King Olaf began his journey, he came first into Smaland, and +then into West Gautland. He marched quietly and peaceably, and +the country people gave him all assistance on his journey. Thus +he proceeded until he came into Viken, and north through Viken to +Sarpsborg, where he remained, and ordered a winter abode to be +prepared (A.D. 1028). Then he gave most of the chiefs leave to +return home, but kept the lendermen by him whom he thought the +most serviceable. There were with him also all the sons of Arne +Arnmodson, and they stood in great favour with the king. Geller +Thorkelson, who the summer before had come from Iceland, also +came there to the king, as before related. + + + +170. OF SIGVAT THE SKALD. + +Sigvat the skald had long been in King Olaf's household, as +before related, and the king made him his marshal. Sigvat had no +talent for speaking in prose; but in skaldcraft he was so +practised, that the verses came as readily from his tongue as if +he were speaking in usual language. He had made a mercantile +journey to Normandy, and in the course of it had come to England, +where he met King Canute, and obtained permission from him to +sail to Norway, as before related. When he came to Norway he +proceeded straight to King Olaf, and found him at Sarpsborg. He +presented himself before the king just as he was sitting down to +table. Sigvat saluted him. The king looked at Sigvat and was +silent. Then Sigvat sang: -- + + "Great king! thy marshal is come home, + No more by land or sea to roam, + But by thy side + Still to abide. + Great king! what seat here shall be take + For the king's honour -- not his sake? + For all seats here + To me are dear." + +Then was verified the old saying, that "many are the ears of a +king;" for King Olaf had heard all about Sigvat's journey, and +that he had spoken with Canute. He says to Sigvat, "I do not +know if thou art my marshal, or hast become one of Canute's men." +Sigvat said: -- + + "Canute, whose golden gifts display + A generous heart, would have me stay, + Service in his great court to take, + And my own Norway king forsake. + Two masters at a time, I said, + Were one too many for men bred + Where truth and virtue, shown to all, + Make all men true in Olaf's hall." + +Then King Olaf told Sigvat to take his seat where he before used +to sit; and in a short time Sigvat was in as high favour with the +king as ever. + + + +171. OF ERLING SKJALGSON AND HIS SONS. + +Erling Skjalgson and all his sons had been all summer in King +Canute's army, in the retinue of Earl Hakon. Thorer Hund was +also there, and was in high esteem. Now when King Canute heard +that King Olaf had gone overland to Norway, he discharged his +army, and gave all men leave to go to their winter abodes. There +was then in Denmark a great army of foreigners, both English, +Norwegians, and men of other countries, who had joined the +expedition in summer. In autumn (A.D. 1027) Erling Skjalgson +went to Norway with his men, and received great presents from +King Canute at parting; but Thorer Hund remained behind in King +Canute's court. With Erling went messengers from King Canute +well provided with money; and in winter they travelled through +all the country, paying the money which King Canute had promised +to many in autumn for their assistance. They gave presents in +money, besides, to many whose friendship could be purchased for +King Canute. They received much assistance in their travels from +Erling. In this way it came to pass that many turned their +support to King Canute, promised him their services, and agreed +to oppose King Olaf. Some did this openly, but many more +concealed it from the public. King Olaf heard this news, for +many had something to tell him about it; and the conversation in +the court often turned upon it. Sigvat the skald made a song +upon it: -- + + "The base traitors ply + With purses of gold, + Wanting to buy + What is not to be sold, -- + The king's life and throne + Wanting to buy: + But our souls are our own, + And to hell we'll not hie. + No pleasure in heaven, + As we know full well, + To the traitor is given, -- + His soul is his hell." + +Often also the conversation turned upon how ill it beseemed Earl +Hakon to raise his hand in arms against King Olaf, who had given +him his life when he fell into the king's power; but Sigvat was a +particular friend of Earl Hakon, and when he heard the earl +spoken against he sang: -- + + "Our own court people we may blame, + If they take gold to their own shame, + Their king and country to betray. + With those who give it's not the same, + From them we have no faith to claim: + 'Tis we are wrong, if we give way." + + + +172. OF KING OLAF'S PRESENTS AT YULE. + +King Olaf gave a great feast at Yule, and many great people had +come to him. It was the seventh day of Yule, that the king, with +a few persons, among whom was Sigvat, who attended him day and +night, went to a house in which the king's most precious +valuables were kept. He had, according to his custom, collected +there with great care the valuable presents he was to make on New +Year's eve. There was in the house no small number of gold- +mounted swords; and Sigvat sang: -- + + "The swords stand there, + All bright and fair, -- + Those oars that dip in blood: + If I in favour stood, + I too might have a share. + A sword the skald would gladly take, + And use it for his master's sake: + In favour once he stood, + And a sword has stained in blood." + +The king took a sword of which the handle was twisted round with +gold, and the guard was gold-mounted, and gave it to him. It was +a valuable article; but the gift was not seen without envy, as +will appear hereafter. + +Immediately after Yule (1028) the king began his journey to the +Uplands; for he had a great many people about him, but had +received no income that autumn from the North country, for there +had been an armament in summer, and the king had laid out all the +revenues he could command; and also he had no vessels with which +he and his people could go to the North. At the same time he had +news from the North, from which he could see that there would be +no safety for him in that quarter, unless he went with a great +force. For these reasons he determined to proceed through the +Uplands, although it was not so long a time since he had been +there in guest-quarters as the law prescribes, and as the kings +usually had the custom of observing in their visits. When he +came to the Uplands the lendermen and the richest bondes invited +him to be their guest, and thus lightened his expenses. + + + +173. OF BJORN THE BAILIFF. + +There was a man called Bjorn who was of Gautland family, and a +friend and acquaintance of Queen Astrid, and in some way related +to her. She had given him farm-management and other offices in +the upper part of Hedemark. He had also the management of +Osterdal district. Bjorn was not in esteem with the king, nor +liked by the bondes. It happened in a hamlet which Bjorn ruled +over, that many swine and cattle were missing: therefore Bjorn +ordered a Thing to be called to examine the matter. Such pillage +he attributed chiefly to the people settled in forest-farms far +from other men; by which he referred particularly to those who +dwelt in Osterdal, for that district was very thinly inhabited, +and full of lakes and forest-cleanings, and but in few places was +any great neighbourhood together. + + + +174. OF RAUD'S SONS. + +There was a man called Raud who dwelt in Osterdal. His wife was +called Ragnhild; and his sons, Dag and Sigurd, were men of great +talent. They were present at the Thing, made a reply in defence +of the Osterdal people, and removed the accusation from them. +Bjorn thought they were too pert in their answer, and too fine in +their clothes and weapons; and therefore turned his speech +against these brothers, and said it was not unlikely they may +have committed these thefts. They denied it, and the Thing +closed. Soon after King Olaf, with his retinue, came to guest- +quarters in the house of bailiff Bjorn. The matter which had +been before the Thing was then complained of to the king; and +Bjorn said that Raud's sons appeared to him to have committed +these thefts. A messenger was sent for Raud's sons; and when +they appeared before the king he said they had not at all the +appearance of thieves, and acquitted them. Thereupon they +invited the king, with all his retinue, to a three days' +entertainment at their father's; and although Bjorn dissuaded him +from it, the king went. At Raud's there was a very excellent +feast. The king asked Raud what people he and his wife were. +Raud answered that he was originally a Swedish man, rich and of +high birth; "but I ran away with the wife I have ever since had, +and she is a sister of King Hring Dagson." The king then +remembered both their families. He found that father and sons +were men of understanding, and asked them what they could do. +Sigurd said he could interpret dreams, and determine the time of +the day although no heavenly bodies could be seen. The king made +trial of his art, and found it was as Sigurd had said. Dag +stated, as his accomplishment, that he could see the misdeeds and +vices of every man who came under his eye, when he chose to +observe him closely. The king told him to declare what faults of +disposition he saw in the king himself. Dag mentioned a fault +which the king was sensible he really had. Then the king asked +what fault the bailiff Bjorn had. Dag said Bjorn was a thief; +and told also where Bjorn had concealed on his farm the bones, +horns, and hides of the cattle he had stolen in autumn; "for he +committed," said Dag, "all the thefts in autumn which he accuses +other people of." Dag also told the king the places where the +king should go after leaving them. When the king departed from +Raud's house he was accompanied on the way, and presented with +friendly gifts; and Raud's sons remained with the king. The king +went first to Bjorn's, and found there that all Dag had told him +was true. Upon which he drove Bjorn out of the country; and he +had to thank the queen that he preserved life and limbs. + + + +175. THORER'S DEATH. + +Thorer, a son of Olver of Eggja, a stepson of Kalf Arnason, and a +sister's son of Thorer Hund, was a remarkably handsome man, stout +and strong. He was at this time eighteen years old; had made a +good marriage in Hedemark, by which he got great wealth; and was +besides one of the most popular of men, and formed to be a chief. +He invited the king and his retinue home to him to a feast. The +king accepted the invitation, went to Thorer's, and was well +received. The entertainment was very splendid; they were +excellently treated, and all that was set before the guests was +of the best that could be got. The king and his people talked +among themselves of the excellence of everything, and knew not +what they should admire the most, -- whether Thorer's house +outside, or the inside furniture, the table service, or the +liquors, or the host who gave them such a feast. But Dag said +little about it. The king used often to speak to Dag, and ask +him about various things; and he had proved the truth of all that +Dag had said, both of things that had happened or were to happen, +and therefore the king had much confidence in what he said. The +king called Dag to him to have a private conversation together, +and spoke to him about many things. Afterwards the king turned +the conversation on Thorer, -- what an excellent man Thorer was, +and what a superb feast he had made for them. Dag answered but +little to this, but agreed it was true what the king said. The +king then asked Dag what disposition or faith he found in Thorer. +Dag replied that he must certainly consider Thorer of a good +disposition, if he be really what most people believe him to be. +The king told him to answer direct what he was asked, and said +that it was his duty to do so. Dag replies, "Then thou must +allow me to determine the punishment if I disclose his faith." +The king replied that he would not submit his decision to another +man, but again ordered Dag to reply to what he asked. + +Dag replies, "The sovereign's order goes before all. I find this +disposition in Thorer, as in so many others, that he is too +greedy of money." + +The king: "Is he then a thief, or a robber?" + +"He is neither." + +"What is he then?" + +"To win money he is a traitor to his sovereign. He has taken +money from King Canute the Great for thy head." + +The king asks, "What proof hast thou of the truth of this?" + +Dag: "He has upon his right arm, above the elbow, a thick gold +ring, which King Canute gave him, and which he lets no man see." + +This ended their conference, and the king was very wroth. Now as +the king sat at table, and the guests had drunk a while with +great mirth, and Thorer went round to see the guests well served, +the king ordered Thorer to be called to him. He went up before +the table, and laid his hands upon it. + +The king asked, "How old a man art thou, Thorer?" + +He answered, "I am eighteen years old." + +"A stout man thou art for those years, and thou hast been +fortunate also." + +Then the king took his right hand, and felt it towards the elbow. + +Thorer said, "Take care, for I have a boil upon my arm." + +The king held his hand there, and felt there was something hard +under it. "Hast thou not heard," said he, "that I am a +physician? Let me see the boil." + +As Thorer saw it was of no use to conceal it longer, he took off +the ring and laid it on the table. + +The king asked if that was the gift of King Canute. + +Thorer replied that he could not deny it was. + +The king ordered him to be seized and laid in irons. Kalf came +up and entreated for mercy, and offered money for him, which also +was seconded by many; but the king was so wroth that nobody could +get in a word. He said Thorer should suffer the doom he had +prepared for himself. Thereupon he ordered Thorer to be killed. +This deed was much detested in the Uplands, and not less in the +Throndhjem country, where many of Thorer's connections were. +Kalf took the death of this man much to heart, for he had been +his foster-son in childhood. + + + +176. THE FALL OF GRJOTGARD. + +Grjotgard Olverson, Thorer's brother, and the eldest of the +brothers, was a very wealthy man, and had a great troop of people +about him. He lived also at this time in Hedemark. When he +heard that Thorer had been killed, he made an attack upon the +places where the king's goods and men were; but, between whiles, +he kept himself in the forest and other secret places. When the +king heard of this disturbance, he had inquiry made about +Grjotgard's haunts, and found out that he had taken up night- +quarters not far from where the king was. King Olaf set out in +the night-time, came there about day-dawn, and placed a circle of +men round the house in which Grjotgard was sleeping. Grjotgard +and his men, roused by the stir of people and clash of arms, ran +to their weapons, and Grjotgard himself sprang to the front room. +He asked who commanded the troop; and it was answered him, "King +Olaf was come there." Grjotgard asked if the king would hear his +words. The king, who stood at the door, said that Grjotgard +might speak what he pleased, and he would hear his words. +Grjotgard said, "I do not beg for mercy;" and at the same moment +he rushed out, having his shield over his head, and his drawn +sword in his hand. It was not so much light that he could see +clearly. He struck his sword at the king; but Arnbjorn ran in, +and the thrust pierced him under his armour into his stomach, and +Arnbjorn got his deathwound. Grjotgard was killed immediately, +and most of his people with him. After this event the king +turned back to the south to Viken. + + + +177. KING OLAF SENDS FOR HIS SHIPS AND GOODS. + +Now when the king came to Tunsberg he sent men out to all the +districts, and ordered the people out upon a levy. He had but a +small provision of shipping, and there were only bondes' vessels +to be got. From the districts in the near neighbourhood many +people came to him, but few from any distance; and it was soon +found that the people had turned away from the king. King Olaf +sent people to Gautland for his ships, and other goods and wares +which had been left there in autumn; but the progress of these +men was very slow, for it was no better now than in autumn to +sail through the Sound, as King Canute had in spring fitted out +an army throughout the whole of the Danish dominions, and had no +fewer than 1200 vessels. + + + +178. KING OLAF'S COUNSELS. + +The news came to Norway that King Canute had assembled an immense +armament through all Denmark, with which he intended to conquer +Norway. When this became known the people were less willing to +join King Olaf, and he got but little aid from the bondes. The +king's men often spoke about this among themselves. Sigvat tells +of it thus: -- + + "Our men are few, our ships are small, + While England's king is strong in all; + But yet our king is not afraid -- + O! never be such king betrayed! + 'Tis evil counsel to deprive + Our king of countrymen to strive + To save their country, sword in hand: + Tis money that betrays our land." + +The king held meetings with the men of the court, and sometimes +House-things with all his people, and consulted with them what +they should, in their opinion, undertake. "We must not conceal +from ourselves," said he, "that Canute will come here this +summer; and that he has, as ye all know, a large force, and we +have at present but few men to oppose to him; and, as matters now +stand, we cannot depend much on the fidelity of the country +people." The king's men replied to his speech in various ways; +but it is said that Sigvat the skald replied thus, advising +flight, as treachery, not cowardice, was the cause of it: -- + + "We may well fly, when even our foe + Offers us money if we go. + I may be blamed, accused of fear; + But treachery, not faith, rules here. + Men may retire who long have shown + Their faith and love, and now alone + Retire because they cannot save -- + This is no treachery in the brave." + + + +179. HAREK OF THJOTTA BURNS GRANKEL AND HIS MEN. + +The same spring (A.D. 1028) it happened in Halogaland that Harek +of Thjotta remembered how Asmund Grankelson had plundered and +beaten his house-servants. A cutter with twenty rowing-benches, +which belonged to Harek, was afloat in front of the house, with +tent and deck, and he spread the report that he intended to go +south to Throndhjem. One evening Harek went on board with his +house-servants, about eighty men, who rowed the whole night; and +he came towards morning to Grankel's house, and surrounded it +with his men. They then made an attack on the house, and set +fire to it; and Grankel with his people were burnt, and some were +killed outside; and in all about thirty men lost their lives. +After this deed Harek returned home, and sat quietly in his farm. +Asmund was with King Olaf when he heard of it; therefore there +was nobody in Halogaland to sue Harek for mulct for this deed, +nor did he offer any satisfaction. + + + +180. KING CANUTE'S EXPEDITION TO NORWAY. + +Canute the Great collected his forces, and went to Limfjord. +When he was ready with his equipment he sailed from thence with +his whole fleet to Norway; made all possible speed, and did not +land to the eastward of the Fjords, but crossed Folden, and +landed in Agder, where he summoned a Thing. The bondes came down +from the upper country to hold a Thing with Canute, who was +everywhere in that country accepted as king. Then he placed men +over the districts, and took hostages from the bondes, and no man +opposed him. King Olaf was in Tunsberg when Canute's fleet +sailed across the mouth of the fjord. Canute sailed northwards +along the coast, and people came to him from all the districts, +and promised him fealty. He lay a while in Egersund, where +Erling Skjalgson came to him with many people, and King Canute +and Erling renewed their league of friendship. Among other +things, Canute promised Erling the whole country between Stad and +Rygiarbit to rule over. Then King Canute proceeded; and, to be +short in our tale, did not stop until he came to Throndhjem, and +landed at Nidaros. In Throndhjem he called together a Thing for +the eight districts, at which King Canute was chosen king of all +Norway. Thorer Hund, who had come with King Canute from Denmark, +was there, and also Harek of Thjotta; and both were made sheriffs +of the king, and took the oath of fealty to him. King Canute +gave them great fiefs, and also right to the Lapland trade, and +presented them besides with great gifts. He enriched all men who +were inclined to enter into friendly accord with him both with +fiefs and money, and gave them greater power than they had +before. + + + +181. OF KING CANUTE. + +When King Canute had laid the whole of Norway trader his +authority, he called together a numerous Thing, both of his own +people and of the people of the country; and at it he made +proclamation, that he made his relation Earl Hakon the governor- +in-chief of all the land in Norway that he had conquered in this +expedition. In like manner he led his son Hardaknut to the high- +seat at his side, gave him the title of king, and therewith the +whole Danish dominion. King Canute took as hostages from all +lendermen and great bondes in Norway either their sons, brothers, +or other near connections, or the men who were dearest to them +and appeared to him most suitable; by which he, as before +observed, secured their fidelity to him. As soon as Earl Hakon +had attained this power in Norway his brother-in-law, Einar +Tambaskelfer, made an agreement with him, and received back all +the fiefs he formerly had possessed while the earls ruled the +country. King Canute gave Einar great gifts, and bound him by +great kindness to his interests; and promised that Einar should +be the greatest and most important man in Norway, among those who +did not hold the highest dignity, as long as he had power over +the country. He added to this, that Einar appeared to him the +most suitable man to hold the highest title of honour in Norway +if no earls remained, and his son Eindride also, on account of +his high birth. Einar placed a great value on these promises, +and, in return, promised the greatest fidelity. Einar's +chiefship began anew with this. + + + +182. OF THORARIN LOFTUNGA. + +There was a man by name Thorarin Loftunga, an Icelander by birth, +and a great skald, who had been much with the kings and other +great chiefs. He was now with King Canute the Great, and had +composed a flock, or short poem, in his praise. When the king +heard of this he was very angry, and ordered him to bring the +next day a drapa, or long poem, by the time he went to table; and +if he failed to do so, said the king, "he shall be hanged for his +impudence in composing such a small poem about King Canute." +Thorarin then composed a stave as a refrain, which he inserted in +the poem, and also augmented it with several other strophes or +verses. This was the refrain: -- + + "Canute protects his realm, as Jove, + Guardian of Greece, his realm above." + +King Canute rewarded him for the poem with fifty marks of silver. +The poem was called the "Headransom" ("Hofudlausn"). Thorarin +composed another poem about King Canute, which was called the +"Campaign Poem" ("Togdrapa"); and therein he tells King Canute's +expedition when he sailed from Denmark to Norway; and the +following are strophes from one of the parts of this poem: -- + + "Canute with all his men is out, + Under the heavens in war-ships stout, -- + 'Out on the sea, from Limfjord's green, + My good, my brave friend's fleet is seen. + The men of Adger on the coast + Tremble to see this mighty host: + The guilty tremble as they spy + The victor's fleet beneath the sky. + + "The sight surpasses far the tale, + As glacing in the sun they sail; + The king's ship glittering all with gold, + And splendour there not to be told. + Round Lister many a coal-black mast + Of Canute's fleet is gliding past. + And now through Eger sound they ride, + Upon the gently heaving tide. + + "And all the sound is covered o'er + With ships and sails, from shore to shore, + A mighty king, a mighty host, + Hiding the sea on Eger coast. + And peaceful men in haste now hie + Up Hiornagla-hill the fleet to spy, + As round the ness where Stad now lies + Each high-stemmed ship in splendour flies. + + "Nor seemed the voyage long, I trow, + To warrior on the high-built bow, + As o'er the ocean-mountains riding + The land and hill seem past him gliding. + With whistling breeze and flashing spray + Past Stein the gay ships dashed away; + In open sea, the southern gale + Filled every wide out-bellying sail. + + "Still on they fly, still northward go, + Till he who conquers every foe, + The mighty Canute, came to land, + Far in the north on Throndhjem's strand. + There this great king of Jutland race, + Whose deeds and gifts surpass in grace + All other kings, bestowed the throne + Of Norway on his sister's son. + + "To his own son he gave the crown + (This I must add to his renown) + Of Denmark -- land of shadowy vales, + In which the white swan trims her sails." + +Here it is told that King Canute's expedition was grander than +saga can tell; but Thorarin sang thus because he would pride +himself upon being one of King Canute's retinue when he came to +Norway. + + + +153. OF THE MESSENGERS SENT BY KING OLAF FOR HIS SHIPS. + +The men whom King Olaf had sent eastwards to Gautland after his +ships took with them the vessels they thought the best, and burnt +the rest. The ship-apparel and other goods belonging to the king +and his men they also took with them; and when they heard that +King Canute had gone to Norway they sailed west through the +Sound, and then north to Viken to King Olaf, to whom they +delivered his ships. He was then at Tunsberg. When King Olaf +learnt that King Canute was sailing north along the coast, King +Olaf steered with his fleet into Oslo fjord, and into a branch of +it called Drafn, where he lay quiet until King Canute's fleet had +sailed southwards again. On this expedition which King Canute +made from the North along the coast, he held a Thing in each +district, and in every Thing the country was bound by oath in +fealty to him, and hostages were given him. He went eastward +across the mouths of the fjords to Sarpsborg, and held a Thing +there, and, as elsewhere, the country was surrendered to him +under oath of fidelity. King Canute then returned south to +Denmark, after having conquered Norway without stroke of sword, +and he ruled now over three kingdoms. So says Halvard +Hareksblese when he sang of King Canute: -- + + "The warrior-king, whose blood-stain'd shield + Has shone on many a hard-fought field, + England and Denmark now has won, + And o'er three kingdoms rules alone. + Peace now he gives us fast and sure, + Since Norway too is made secure + By him who oft, in days of yore, + Glutted the hawk and wolf with gore." + + + +154. OF KING OLAF IN HIS PROCEEDINGS. + +King Olaf sailed with his ships out to Tunsberg, as soon as he +heard that King Canute had turned back, and was gone south to +Denmark. He then made himself ready with the men who liked to +follow him, and had then thirteen ships. Afterwards he sailed +out along Viken; but got little money, and few men, as those only +followed him who dwelt in islands, or on outlying points of land. +The king landed in such places, but got only the money and men +that fell in his way; and he soon perceived that the country had +abandoned him. He proceeded on according to the winds. This was +in the beginning of winter (A.D. 1029). The wind turned very +late in the season in their favour, so that they lay long in the +Seley islands, where they heard the news from the North, through +merchants, who told the king that Erling Skjalgson had collected +a great force in Jadar, and that his ship lay fully rigged +outside of the land, together with many other vessels belonging +to +the bondes; namely, skiffs, fisher-yachts, and great row-boats. +Then the king sailed with his fleet from the East, and lay a +while in Egersund. Both parties heard of each other now, and +Erling assembled all the men he could. + + + +155. OF KING OLAF'S VOYAGE. + +On Thomasmas, before Yule (Dec. 21), the king left the harbour as +soon as day appeared. With a good but rather strong gale he +sailed northwards past Jadar. The weather was rainy, with dark +flying clouds in the sky. The spies went immediately in through +the Jadar country when the king sailed past it; and as soon as +Erling heard that the king was sailing past from the East, he let +the war-horn call all the people on board, and the whole force +hastened to the ships, and prepared for battle. The king's ship +passed by Jadar at a great rate; but thereafter turned in towards +the land, intending to run up the fjords to gather men and money. +Erling Skjalgson perceived this, and sailed after him with a +great force and many ships. Swiftly their vessels flew, for they +had nothing on board but men and arms: but Erling's ship went +much faster than the others; therefore he took in a reef in the +sails, and waited for the other vessels. Then the king saw that +Erling with his fleet gained upon him fast; for the king's ships +were heavily laden, and were besides water-soaked, having been in +the sea the whole summer, autumn, and winter, up to this time. +He saw also that there would be a great want of men, if he should +go against the whole of Erling's fleet when it was assembled. He +hailed from ship to ship the orders to let the sails gently sink, +and to unship the booms and outriggers, which was done. When +Erling saw this he calls out to his people, and orders them to +get on more sail. "Ye see," says he, "that their sails are +diminishing, and they are getting fast away from our sight." He +took the reef out of the sails of his ship, and outsailed all the +others immediately; for Erling was very eager in his pursuit of +King Olaf. + + + +186. OF ERLING SKJALGSON'S FALL. + +King Olaf then steered in towards the Bokn fjord, by which the +ships came out of sight of each other. Thereafter the king +ordered his men to strike the sails, and row forwards through a +narrow sound that was there, and all the ships lay collected +within a rocky point. Then all the king's men put on their +weapons. Erling sailed in through the sound, and observed +nothing until the whole fleet was before him, and he saw the +king's men rowing towards him with all their ships at once. +Erling and his crew let fall the sails, and seized their weapons; +but the king's fleet surrounded his ship on all sides. Then the +fight began, and it was of the sharpest; but soon the greatest +loss was among Erling's men. Erling stood on the quarter-deck of +his ship. He had a helmet on his head, a shield before him, and +a sword in his hand. Sigvat the skald had remained behind in +Viken, and heard the tidings. He was a great friend of Erling, +had received presents from him, and had been at his house. +Sigvat composed a poem upon Erling's fall, in which there is the +following verse: -- + + "Erling has set his ship on sea -- + Against the king away is he: + He who oft lets the eagle stain + Her yellow feet in blood of slain. + His little war-ship side by side + With the king's fleet, the fray will bide. + Now sword to sword the fight is raging, + + Which Erling with the king is waging." + +Then Erling's men began to fall, and at the same moment his ship +was carried by boarding, and every man of his died in his place. +The king himself was amongst the foremost in the fray. So says +Sigvat: -- + + "The king's men hewed with hasty sword, -- + The king urged on the ship to board, -- + All o'er the decks the wounded lay: + Right fierce and bloody was that fray. + In Tungur sound, on Jadar shore, + The decks were slippery with red gore; + Warm blood was dropping in the sound, + Where the king's sword was gleaming round." + +So entirely had Erling's men fallen, that not a man remained +standing in his ship but himself alone; for there was none who +asked for quarter, or none who got it if he did ask. There was +no opening for flight, for there lay ships all around Erling's +ship on every side, and it is told for certain that no man +attempted to fly; and Sigvat says: -- + + "All Erling's men fell in the fray, + Off Bokn fjord, this hard-fought day. + The brave king boarded, onward cheered, + And north of Tungur the deck was cleared. + Erling alone, the brave, the stout, + Cut off from all, yet still held out; + High on the stern -- a sight to see -- + In his lone ship alone stood he." + +Then Erling was attacked both from the forecastle and from the +other ships. There was a large space upon the poop which stood +high above the other ships, and which nobody could reach but by +arrow-shot, or partly with the thrust of spear, but which he +always struck from him by parrying. Erling defended himself so +manfully, that no example is known of one man having sustained +the attack of so many men so long. Yet he never tried to get +away, nor asked for quarter. So says Sigvat: -- + + "Skjalg's brave son no mercy craves, -- + The battle's fury still he braves; + The spear-storm, through the air sharp singing, + Against his shield was ever ringing. + So Erling stood; but fate had willed + His life off Bokn should be spilled. + No braver man has, since his day, + Past Bokn fjord ta'en his way." + +When Olaf went back a little upon the fore-deck he saw Erling's +behaviour; and the king accosted him thus: -- "Thou hast turned +against me to-day, Erling." + +He replies, "The eagle turns his claws in defence when torn +asunder." Sigvat the skald tells thus of these words of Erling: +-- + + "Erling. our best defence of old, -- + Erling the brave, the brisk, the bold, -- + Stood to his arms, gaily crying, + `Eagles should show their claws, though dying:' + The very words which once before + To Olaf he had said on shore, + At Utstein when they both prepared + To meet the foe, and danger shared." + +Then said the king, "Wilt thou enter into my service, Erling?" + +"That I will," said he; took the helmet off his head, laid down +his sword and shield, and went forward to the forecastle deck. + +The king struck him in the chin with the sharp point of his +battle-axe, and said, "I shall mark thee as a traitor to thy +sovereign." + +Then Aslak Fitiaskalle rose up, and struck Erling in the head +with an axe, so that it stood fast in his brain, and was +instantly his death-wound. Thus Erling lost his life. + +The king said to Aslak, "May all ill luck attend thee for that +stroke; for thou hast struck Norway out of my hands." + +Aslak replied, "It is bad enough if that stroke displease thee, +for I thought it was striking Norway into thy hands; and if I +have given thee offence, sire, by this stroke, and have thy ill- +will for it, it will go badly with me, for I will get so many +men's ill-will and enmity for this deed that I would need all +your protection and favour." + +The king replied that he should have it. + +Thereafter the king ordered every man to return to his ship, and +to get ready to depart as fast as he could. "We will not plunder +the slain," says he, "and each man may keep what he has taken." +The men returned to the ships and prepared themselves for the +departure as quickly as possible; and scarcely was this done +before the vessels of the bondes ran in from the south into the +sound. It went with the bonde-army as is often seen, that the +men, although many in numbers, know not what to do when they have +experienced a check, have lost their chief, and are without +leaders. None of Erling's sons were there, and the bondes +therefore made no attack, and the king sailed on his way +northwards. But the bondes took Erling's corpse, adorned it, and +carried it with them home to Sole, and also the bodies of all who +had fallen. There was great lamentation over Erling; and it has +been a common observation among people, that Erling Skjalgson was +the greatest and worthiest man in Norway of those who had no high +title. Sigvat made these verses upon the occasion: -- + + "Thus Erling fell -- and such a gain + To buy with such a loss was vain; + For better man than he ne'er died, + And the king's gain was small beside. + In truth no man I ever knew + Was, in all ways, so firm and true; + Free from servility and pride, + Honoured by all, yet thus he died." + +Sigvat also says that Aslak had very unthinkingly committed this +murder of his own kinsman: -- + + "Norway's brave defender's dead! + Aslak has heaped on his own head + The guilt of murdering his own kin: + May few be guilty of such sin! + His kinsman's murder on him lies -- + Our forefathers, in sayings wise, + Have said, what is unknown to few, + `Kinsmen to kinsmen should be true.'" + + + +187. OF THE INSURRECTION OF AGDER DISTRICT. + +Of Erling's sons some at that time were north in Throndhjem, some +in Hordaland, and some in the Fjord district, for the purpose of +collecting men. When Erling's death was reported, the news came +also that there was a levy raising in Agder, Hordaland, and +Rogaland. Forces were raised and a great army assembled, under +Erling's sons, to pursue King Olaf. + +When King Olaf retired from the battle with Erling he went +northward through the sounds, and it was late in the day. It is +related that the king then made the following verses: -- + + "This night, with battle sounds wild ringing, + Small joy to the fair youth is bringing + Who sits in Jadar, little dreaming + O'er what this night the raven's screaming. + The far-descended Erling's life + Too soon has fallen; but, in the strife + He met the luck they well deserve + Who from their faith and fealty swerve." + +Afterwards the king sailed with his fleet along the land +northwards, and got certain tidings of the bondes assembling an +army. There were many chiefs and lendermen at this time with +King Olaf, and all the sons of Arne. Of this Bjarne +Gullbrarskald speaks in the poem he composed about Kalf Arnason: +-- + + "Kalf! thou hast fought at Bokn well; + Of thy brave doings all men tell: + When Harald's son his men urged on + To the hard strife, thy courage shone. + Thou soon hadst made a good Yule feast + For greedy wolf there in the East: + Where stone and spear were flying round, + There thou wast still the foremost found. + The people suffered in the strife + When noble Erling lost his life, + And north of Utstein many a speck + Of blood lay black upon the deck. + The king, 'tis clear, has been deceived, + By treason of his land bereaved; + And Agder now, whose force is great. + Will rule o'er all parts of the state." + + +King O1af continued his voyage until he came north of Stad, and +brought up at the Herey Isles. Here he heard the news that Earl +Hakon had a great war-force in Throndhjem, and thereupon the king +held a council with his people. Kalf Arnason urged much to +advance to Throndhjem, and fight Earl Hakon, notwithstanding the +difference of numbers. Many others supported this advice, but +others dissuaded from it, and the matter was left to the king's +judgment. + + + +188. DEATH OF ASLAK FITIASKALLE. + +Afterwards the king went into Steinavag, and remained there all +night; but Aslak Fitiaskalle ran into Borgund, where he remained +the night, and where Vigleik Arnason was before him. In the +morning, when Aslak was about returning on board, Vigleik +assaulted him, and sought to avenge Erling's murder. Aslak fell +there. Some of the king's court-men, who had been home all +summer, joined the king here. They came from Frekeysund, and +brought the king tidings that Earl Hakon, and many lendermen with +him, had come in the morning to Frekeysund with a large force; +"and they will end thy days, sire, if they have strength enough." +Now the king sent his men up to a hill that was near; and when +they came to the top, and looked northwards to Bjarney Island, +they perceived that a great armament of many ships was coming +from the north, and they hastened back to the king with this +intelligence. The king, who was lying there with only twelve +ships, ordered the war-horn to sound, the tents to be taken down +on his ships, and they took to their oars. When they were quite +ready, and were leaving the harbour, the bonde army sailed north +around Thiotande with twenty-five ships. The king then steered +inside of Nyrfe Island, and inside of Hundsver. Now when King +Olaf came right abreast of Borgund, the ship which Aslak had +steered came out to meet him, and when they found the king they +told him the tidings, -- that Vigleik Arnason had killed Aslak +Fitiaskalle, because he had killed Erling Skjalgson. The king +took this news very angrily, but could not delay his voyage on +account of the enemy and he sailed in by Vegsund and Skor. There +some of his people left him; among others, Kalf Arnason, with +many other lendermen and ship commanders, who all went to meet +Earl Hakon. King Olaf, however, proceeded on his way without +stopping until he came to Todar fjord, where he brought up at +Valdal, and landed from his ship. He had then five ships with +him, which he drew up upon the shore, and took care of their +sails and materials. Then he set up his land-tent upon a point +of land called Sult, where there are pretty flat fields, and set +up a cross near to the point of land. A bonde, by name Bruse, +who dwelt there in More, and was chief over the valley, came down +to King Olaf, together with many other bondes, and received him +well, and according to his dignity; and he was friendly, and +pleased with their reception of him. Then the king asked if +there was a passable road up in the country from the valley to +Lesjar; and Bruse replied, that there was an urd in the valley +called Skerfsurd not passable for man or beast. King Olaf +answers, "That we must try, bonde, and it will go as God pleases. +Come here in the morning with your yoke, and come yourself with +it, and let us then see. When we come to the sloping precipice, +what chance there may be, and if we cannot devise some means of +coming over it with horses and people." + + + +189. CLEARING OF THE URD. + +Now when day broke the bondes drove down with their yokes, as the +king had told them. The clothes and weapons were packed upon +horses, but the king and all the people went on foot. He went +thus until he came to a place called Krosbrekka, and when he came +up upon the hill he rested himself, sat down there a while, +looked down over the fjord, and said, "A difficult expedition ye +have thrown upon my hands, ye lendermen, who have now changed +your fealty, although but a little while ago ye were my friends +and faithful to me." There are now two crosses erected upon the +bank on which the king sat. Then the king mounted a horse, and +rode without stopping up the valley, until he came to the +precipice. Then the king asked Bruse if there was no summer hut +of cattle-herds in the neighbourhood, where they could remain. +He said there was. The king ordered his land-tent to be set up, +and remained there all night. In the morning the king ordered +them to drive to the urd, and try if they could get across it +with the waggons. They drove there, and the king remained in the +meantime in his tent. Towards evening the king's court-men and +the bondes came back, and told how they had had a very fatiguing +labour, without making any progress, and that there never could +be a road made that they could get across: so they continued +there the second night, during which, for the whole night, the +king was occupied in prayer. As soon as he observed day dawning +he ordered his men to drive again to the urd, and try once more +if they could get across it with the waggons; but they went very +unwillingly, saying nothing could be gained by it. When they +were gone the man who had charge of the king's kitchen came, and +said there were only two carcasses of young cattle remaining of +provision: "Although you, sire, have 400 men, and there are 100 +bondes besides." Then the king ordered that he should set all +the kettles on the fire, and put a little bit of meat in each +kettle, which was done. Then the king went there, and made the +sign of the cross over each kettle, and told them to make ready +the meat. The king then went to the urd called Skerfsurd, where +a road should be cleared. When the king came all his people were +sitting down, quite worn out with the hard labour. Bruse said, +"I told you, sire, but you would not believe me, that we could +make nothing of this urd." The king laid aside his cloak, and +told them to go to work once more at the urd. They did so, and +now twenty men could handle stones which before 100 men could not +move from the place; and thus before midday the road was cleared +so well that it was as passable for men, and for horses with +packs, as a road in the plain fields. The king, after this, went +down again to where the meat was, which place is called Olaf's +Rock. Near the rock is a spring, at which Olaf washed himself; +and therefore at the present day, when the cattle in the valley +are sick, their illness is made better by their drinking at this +well. Thereafter the king sat down to table with all the others; +and when he was satisfied he asked if there was any other +sheeling on the other side of the urd, and near the mountains, +where they could pass the night. Bruse said there was such a +sheeling, called Groningar; but that nobody could pass the night +there on account of witchcraft, and evil beings who were in the +sheeling. Then the king said they must get ready for their +journey, as he wanted to be at the sheeling for the night. Then +came the kitchen-master to the king, and tells that there was +come an extraordinary supply of provisions, and he did not know +where it had come from, or how. The king thanked God for this +blessing, and gave the bondes who drove down again to their +valley some rations of food, but remained himself all night in +the sheeling. In the middle of the night, while the people were +asleep, there was heard in the cattle-fold a dreadful cry, and +these words: "Now Olaf's prayers are burning me," says the +spirit, "so that I can no longer be in my habitation; now must I +fly, and never more come to this fold." When the king's people +awoke in the morning the king proceeded to the mountains, and +said to Bruse, "Here shall now a farm be settled, and the bonde +who dwells here shall never want what is needful for the support +of life; and never shall his crop be destroyed by frost, although +the crops be frozen on the farms both above it and below it." +Then the king proceeded over the mountains, and came to a farm +called Einby, where he remained for the night. King Olaf had +then been fifteen years king of Norway (A.D. 1015-1029), +including the year both he and Svein were in the country, and +this year we have now been telling about. It was, namely, a +little past Yule when the king left his ships and took to the +land, as before related. Of this portion of his reign the priest +Are Thorgilson the Wise was the first who wrote; and he was both +faithful in his story, of a good memory, and so old a man that he +could remember the men, and had heard their accounts, who were so +old that through their age they could remember these +circumstances as he himself wrote them in his books, and he named +the men from whom he received his information. Otherwise it is +generally said that King Olaf had been fifteen years king of +Norway when he fell; but they who say so reckon to Earl Svein's +government, the last year he was in the country, for King Olaf +lived fifteen years afterwards as king. + + + +190. OLAF'S PROPHECIES. + +When the king had been one night at Lesjar he proceeded on his +journey with his men, day by day; first into Gudbrandsdal, and +from thence out to Redemark. Now it was seen who had been his +friends, for they followed him; but those who had served him with +less fidelity separated from him, and some showed him even +indifference, or even full hostility, which afterwards was +apparent; and also it could be seen clearly in many Upland people +that they took very ill his putting Thorer to death, as before +related. King Olaf gave leave to return home to many of his men +who had farms and children to take care of; for it seemed to them +uncertain what safety there might be for the families and +property of those who left the country with him. Then the king +explained to his friends his intention of leaving the country, +and going first east into Svithjod, and there taking his +determination as to where he should go; but he let his friends +know his intention to return to the country, and regain his +kingdoms, if God should grant him longer life; and he did not +conceal his expectation that the people of Norway would again +return to their fealty to him. "I think," says he, "that Earl +Hakon will have Norway but a short time under his power, which +many will not think an extraordinary expectation, as Earl Hakon +has had but little luck against me; but probably few people will +trust to my prophecy, that Canute the Great will in the course of +a few years die, and his kingdoms vanish; and there will he no +risings in favour of his race." When the king had ended his +speech, his men prepared themselves for their departure. The +king, with the troop that followed him, turned east to Eid +forest. And there were along with him the Queen Astrid; their +daughter Ulfhild; Magnus, King Olaf's son; Ragnvald Brusason; the +three sons of Arne, Thorberg, Fin, and Arne, with many lendermen; +and the king's attendants consisted of many chosen men. Bjorn +the marshal got leave to go home, and he went to his farm, and +many others of the king's friends returned home with his +permission to their farms. The king begged them to let him know +the events which might happen in the country, and which it might +be important for him to know; and now the king proceeded on his +way. + + + +191. KING OLAF PROCEEDS TO RUSSIA. + +It is to be related of King Olaf's journey, that he went first +from Norway eastward through Eid forest to Vermaland, then to +Vatnsby, and through the forests in which there are roads, until +he came out in Nerike district. There dwelt a rich and powerful +man in that part called Sigtryg, who had a son, Ivar, who +afterwards became a distinguished person. Olaf stayed with +Sigtryg all spring (A.D. 1029); and when summer came he made +ready for a journey, procured a ship for himself, and without +stopping went on to Russia to King Jarisleif and his queen +Ingegerd; but his own queen Astrid, and their daughter Ulfhild, +remained behind in Svithjod, and the king took his son Magnus +eastward with him. King Jarisleif received King Olaf in the +kindest manner, and made him the offer to remain with him, and to +have so much land as was necessary for defraying the expense of +the entertainment of his followers. King Olaf accepted this +offer thankfully, and remained there. It is related that King +Olaf was distinguished all his life for pious habits, and zeal in +his prayers to God. But afterwards, when he saw his own power +diminished, and that of his adversaries augmented, he turned all +his mind to God's service; for he was not distracted by other +thoughts, or by the labour he formerly had upon his hands, for +during all the time he sat upon the throne he was endeavouring to +promote what was most useful: and first to free and protect the +country from foreign chiefs' oppressions, then to convert the +people to the right faith; and also to establish law and the +rights of the country, which he did by letting justice have its +way, and punishing evil-doers. + + + +192. CAUSES OF THE REVOLT AGAINST KING OLAF. + +It had been an old custom in Norway that the sons of lendermen, +or other great men, went out in war-ships to gather property, and +they marauded both in the country and out of the country. But +after King Olaf came to the sovereignty he protected the country, +so that he abolished all plundering there; and even if they were +the sons of powerful men who committed any depredation, or did +what the king considered against law, he did not spare them at +all, but they must suffer in life or limbs; and no man's +entreaties, and no offer of money-penalties, could help them. So +says Sigvat: -- + + "They who on viking cruises drove + With gifts of red gold often strove + To buy their safety -- but our chief + Had no compassion for the thief. + He made the bravest lose his head + Who robbed at sea, and pirates led; + And his just sword gave peace to all, + Sparing no robber, great or small." + +And he also says: -- + + "Great king! whose sword on many a field + Food to the wandering wolf did yield, + And then the thief and pirate band + Swept wholly off by sea and land -- + Good king! who for the people's sake + Set hands and feet upon a stake, + When plunderers of great name and bold + Harried the country as of old. + The country's guardian showed his might + When oft he made his just sword bite + Through many a viking's neck and hair, + And never would the guilty spare. + King Magnus' father, I must say, + Did many a good deed in his day. + Olaf the Thick was stern and stout, + Much good his victories brought out." + +He punished great and small with equal severity, which appeared +to the chief people of the country too severe; and animosity rose +to the highest when they lost relatives by the king's just +sentence, although they were in reality guilty. This was the +origin of the hostility of the great men of the country to King +Olaf, that they could not bear his just judgments. He again +would rather renounce his dignity than omit righteous judgment. +The accusation against him, of being stingy with his money, was +not just, for he was a most generous man towards his friends; but +that alone was the cause of the discontent raised against him, +that he appeared hard and severe in his retributions. Besides, +King Canute offered great sums of money, and the great chiefs +were corrupted by this, and by his offering them greater +dignities than they had possessed before. The inclinations of +the people, also, were all in favour of Earl Hakon, who was much +beloved by the country folks when he ruled the country before. + + + +193. OF JOKUL BARDSON. + +Earl Hakon had sailed with his fleet from Throndhjem, and gone +south to More against King Olaf, as before related. Now when the +king bore away, and ran into the fjord, the earl followed him +thither; and then Kalf Arnason came to meet him, with many of the +men who had deserted King Olaf. Kalf was well received. The +earl steered in through Todar fjord to Valdal, where the king had +laid up his ships on the strand. He took the ships which +belonged to the king, had them put upon the water and rigged, and +cast lots, and put commanders in charge of them according to the +lots. There was a man called Jokul, who was an Icelander, a son +of Bard Jokulson of Vatnsdal; the lot fell upon Jokul to command +the Bison, which King Olaf himself had commanded. Jokul made +these verses upon it: -- + + "Mine is the lot to take the helm + Which Olaf owned, who owned the realm; + From Sult King Olaf's ship to steer + (Ill luck I dread on his reindeer). + My girl will never hear the tidings, + Till o'er the wild wave I come riding + In Olaf's ship, who loved his gold, + And lost his ships with wealth untold." + +We may here shortly tell what happened a long time after. -- that +this Jokul fell in with King Olaf's men in the island of Gotland, +and the king ordered him to be taken out to be beheaded. A +willow twig accordingly was plaited in with his hair, and a man +held him fast by it. Jokul sat down upon a bank, and a man swung +the axe to execute him; but Jokul hearing the sound, raised his +head, and the blow struck him in the head, and made a dreadful +wound. As the king saw it would be his death-wound, he ordered +them to let him lie with it. Jokul raised himself up, and he +sang: -- + + "My hard fate I mourn, -- + Alas! my wounds burn, + My red wounds are gaping, + My life-blood escaping. + My wounds burn sore; + But I suffer still more + From the king's angry word, + Than his sharp-biting sword." + + + +194. OF KALF ARNASON. + +Kalf Arnason went with Earl Hakon north to Throndhjem, and the +earl invited him to enter into his service. Kalf said he would +first go home to his farm at Eggja, and afterwards make his +determination; and Kalf did so. When he came home he found his +wife Sigrid much irritated; and she reckoned up all the sorrow +inflicted on her, as she insisted, by King Olaf. First, he had +ordered her first husband Olver to be killed. "And now since," +says she, "my two sons; and thou thyself, Kalf, wert present when +they were cut off, and which I little expected from thee." Kalf +says, it was much against his will that Thorer was killed. "I +offered money-penalty for him," says he; "and when Grjotgard was +killed I lost my brother Arnbjorn at the same time." She +replies, "It is well thou hast suffered this from the king; for +thou mayest perhaps avenge him, although thou wilt not avenge my +injuries. Thou sawest how thy foster-son Thorer was killed, with +all the regard of the king for thee." She frequently brought out +such vexatious speeches to Kalf, to which he often answered +angrily; but yet he allowed himself to be persuaded by her to +enter into the earl's service, on condition of renewing his fiefs +to him. Sigrid sent word to the earl how far she had brought the +matter with Kalf. As soon as the earl heard of it, he sent a +message to Kalf that he should come to the town to him. Kalf did +not decline the invitation, but came directly to Nidaros, and +waited on the earl, who received him kindly. In their +conversation it was fully agreed upon that Kalf should go into +the earl's service, and should receive great fiefs. After this +Kalf returned home, and had the greater part of the interior of +the Throndhjem country under him. As soon as it was spring Kalf +rigged out a ship that belonged to him, and when she was ready he +put to sea, and sailed west to England; for he had heard that in +spring King Canute was to sail from Denmark to England, and that +King Canute had given Harald, a son of Thorkel the High, an +earldom in Denmark. Kalf Arnason went to King Canute as soon as +he arrived in England. Bjarne Gullbrarskald tells of this: -- + + "King Olaf eastward o'er the sea + To Russia's monarch had to flee; + Our Harald's brother ploughed the main, + And furrowed white its dark-blue plain. + Whilst thou -- the truth I still will say, + Nor fear nor favour can me sway -- + Thou to King Canute hastened fast, + As soon as Olaf's luck was past." + +Now when Kalf came to King Canute the king received him +particularly well, and had many conversations with him. Among +other things, King Canute, in a conference, asked Kalf to bind +himself to raise a warfare against King Olaf, if ever he should +return to the country. "And for which," says the king, "I will +give thee the earldom, and place thee to rule over Norway; and my +relation Hakon shall come to me, which will suit him better, for +he is so honourable and trustworthy that I believe he would not +even throw a spear against the person of King Olaf if he came +back to the country." Kalf lent his ear to what the king +proposed, for he had a great desire to attain this high dignity; +and this conclusion was settled upon between King Canute and +Kalf. Kalf then prepared to return home, and on his departure he +received splendid presents from King Canute. Bjarne the skald +tells of these circumstances: -- + + "Sprung from old earls! -- to England's lord + Thou owest many a thankful word + For many a gift: if all be true, + Thy interest has been kept in view; + For when thy course was bent for home, + (Although that luck is not yet come,) + `That Norway should be thine,' 'tis said, + The London king a promise made." + +Kalf thereafter returned to Norway, and came to his farm. + + + +195. OF THE DEATH OF EARL HAKON. + +Earl Hakon left the country this summer (A.D. 1029), and went to +England, and when he came there was well received by the king. +The earl had a bride in England, and he travelled to conclude +this marriage, and as he intended holding his wedding in Norway, +he came to procure those things for it in England which it was +difficult to get in Norway. In autumn he made ready for his +return, but it was somewhat late before he was clear for sea; but +at last he set out. Of his voyage all that can be told is, that +the vessel was lost, and not a man escaped. Some relate that the +vessel was seen north of Caithness in the evening in a heavy +storm, and the wind blowing out of Pentland Firth. They who +believe this report say the vessel drove out among the breakers +of the ocean; but with certainty people knew only that Earl Hakon +was missing in the ocean, and nothing belonging to the ship ever +came to land. The same autumn some merchants came to Norway, who +told the tidings that were going through the country of Earl +Hakon being missing; and all men knew that he neither came to +Norway nor to England that autumn, so that Norway that winter was +without a head. + + + +196. OF BJORN THE MARSHAL. + +Bjorn the marshal sat at home on his farm after his parting from +King Olaf. Bjorn was a celebrated man; therefore it was soon +reported far and wide that he had set himself down in quietness. +Earl Hakon and the other chiefs of the country heard this also, +and sent persons with a verbal message to Bjorn. When the +messengers arrived Bjorn received them well; and afterwards Bjorn +called them to him to a conference, and asked their business. He +who was their foreman presented to Bjorn the salutations of King +Canute, Earl Hakon, and of several chiefs. "King Canute," says +he, "has heard much of thee, and that thou hast been long a +follower of King Olaf the Thick, and hast been a great enemy of +King Canute; and this he thinks not right, for he will be thy +friend, and the friend of all worthy men, if thou wilt turn from +thy friendship to King Olaf and become his enemy. And the only +thing now thou canst do is to seek friendship and protection +there where it is most readily to be found, and which all men in +this northern world think it most honourable to be favoured with. +Ye who have followed Olaf the Thick should consider how he is now +separated from you; and that now ye have no aid against King +Canute and his men, whose lands ye plundered last summer, and +whose friends ye murdered. Therefore ye ought to accept, with +thanks, the friendship which the king offers you; and it would +become you better if you offered money even in mulct to obtain +it." + +When he had ended his speech Bjorn replies, "I wish now to sit +quietly at home, and not to enter into the service of any chief." + +The messenger answers, "Such men as thou art are just the right +men to serve the king; and now I can tell thee there are just two +things for thee to choose, -- either to depart in peace from thy +property, and wander about as thy comrade Olaf is doing; or, +which is evidently better, to accept King Canute's and Earl +Hakon's friendship, become their man, and take the oaths of +fealty to them. Receive now thy reward." And he displayed to +him a large bag full of English money. + +Bjorn was a man fond of money, and self-interested; and when he +saw the silver he was silent, and reflected with himself what +resolution he should take. It seemed to him much to abandon his +property, as he did not think it probable that King Olaf would +ever have a rising in his favour in Norway. Now when the +messenger saw that Bjorn's inclinations were turned towards the +money, he threw down two thick gold rings, and said, "Take the +money at once, Bjorn, and swear the oaths to King Canute; for I +can promise thee that this money is but a trifle, compared to +what thou wilt receive if thou followest King Canute." + +By the heap of money, the fine promises, and the great presents, +he was led by covetousness, took the money, went into King +Canute's service, and gave the oaths of fealty to King Canute and +Earl Hakon, and then the messengers departed. + + + +197. BJORN THE MARSHAL'S JOURNEY. + +When Bjorn heard the tidings that Earl Hakon was missing he soon +altered his mind, and was much vexed with himself for having been +a traitor in his fidelity to King Olaf. He thought, now, that +he was freed from the oath by which he had bound himself to Earl +Hakon. It seemed to Bjorn that now there was some hope that King +Olaf might again come to the throne of Norway if he came back, as +the country was without a head. Bjorn therefore immediately made +himself ready to travel, and took some men with him. He then set +out on his journey, travelling night and day, on horseback when +he could, and by ship when he found occasion; and never halted +until he came, after Yule, east to Russia to King Olaf, who was +very glad to see Bjorn. Then the king inquired much about the +news from Norway. Bjorn tells him that Earl Hakon was missing, +and the kingdom left without a head. At this news the men who +had followed King Olaf were very glad, -- all who had left +property, connections, and friends in Norway; and the longing for +home was awakened in them. Bjorn told King Olaf much news from +Norway, and very anxious the king was to know, and asked much how +his friends had kept their fidelity towards him. Bjorn answered, +it had gone differently with different people. + +Then Bjorn stood up, fell at the king's feet, held his foot, and +said, "All is in your power, sire, and in God's! I have taken +money from King Canute's men, and sworn them the oaths of fealty; +but now will I follow thee, and not part from thee so long as we +both live." + +The king replies, "Stand up, Bjorn' thou shalt be reconciled with +me; but reconcile thy perjury with God. I can see that but few +men in Norway have held fast by their fealty, when such men as +thou art could be false to me. But true it is also that people +sit in great danger when I am distant, and they are exposed to +the wrath of my enemies." + +Bjorn then reckoned up those who had principally bound themselves +to rise in hostility against the king and his men; and named, +among others, Erling's son in Jadar and their connections, Einar +Tambaskelfer, Kalf Arnason, Thorer Hund, and Harek of Thjotta. + + + +105. OF KING OLAF. + +After King Olaf came to Russia he was very thoughtful, and +weighed what counsel he now should follow. King Jarisleif and +Queen Ingegerd offered him to remain with them, and receive a +kingdom called Vulgaria, which is a part of Russia, and in which +land the people were still heathen. King Olaf thought over this +offer; but when he proposed it to his men they dissuaded him from +settling himself there, and urged the king to betake himself to +Norway to his own kingdom: but the king himself had resolved +almost in his own mind to lay down his royal dignity, to go out +into the world to Jerusalem, or other holy places, and to enter +into some order of monks. But yet the thought lay deep in his +soul to recover again, if there should be any opportunity for +him, his kingdom in Norway. When he thought over this, it +recurred to his mind how all things had gone prosperously with +him during the first ten years of his reign, and how afterwards +every thing he undertook became heavy, difficult, and hard; and +that he had been unlucky, on all occasions in which he had tried +his luck. On this account he doubted if it would be prudent to +depend so much upon his luck, as to go with so little strength +into the hands of his enemies, seeing that all the people of the +country had taken part with them to oppose King Olaf. Such cares +he had often on his mind, and he left his cause to God, praying +that He would do what to Him seemed best. These thoughts he +turned over in his mind, and knew not what to resolve upon; for +he saw how evidently dangerous that was which his inclination was +most bent upon. + + + +199. OF KING OLAF'S DREAM. + +One night the king lay awake in his bed, thinking with great +anxiety about his determination, and at last, being tired of +thinking, sleep came over him towards morning; but his sleep was +so light that he thought he was awake, and could see all that was +doing in the house. Then he saw a great and superb man, in +splendid clothes, standing by his bed; and it came into the +king's mind that this was King Olaf Trygvason who had come to +him. This man said to him, "Thou are very sick of thinking about +thy future resolutions; and it appears to me wonderful that these +thoughts should be so tumultuous in thy soul that thou shouldst +even think of laying down the kingly dignity which God hath given +thee, and of remaining here and accepting of a kingdom from +foreign and unknown kings. Go back rather to that kingdom which +thou hast received in heritage, and rule over it with the +strength which God hath given thee, and let not thy inferiors +take it from thee. It is the glory of a king to be victorious +over his enemies, and it is a glorious death to die in battle. +Or art thou doubtful if thou hast right on thy side in the strife +with thine enemies? Thou must have no doubts, and must not +conceal the truth from thyself. Thou must go back to thy +country, and God will give open testimony that the kingdom is +thine by property." When the king awoke he thought he saw the +man's shoulders going out. From this time the king's courage +rose, and he fixed firmly his resolution to return to Norway; to +which his inclination also tended most, and which he also found +was the desire of all his men. He bethought himself also that +the country being without a chief could be easily attacked, from +what he had heard, and that after he came himself many would turn +back towards him. When the king told his determination to his +people they all gave it their approbation joyfully. + + + +200. OF KING OLAF'S HEALING POWERS. + +It is related that once upon a time, while King Olaf was in +Russia, it happened that the son of an honest widow had a sore +boil upon his neck, of which the lad lay very ill; and as he +could not swallow any food, there was little hope of his life. +The boy's mother went to Queen Ingegerd, with whom she was +acquainted, and showed her the lad. The queen said she knew no +remedy for it. "Go," said she, "to King Olaf, he is the best +physician here; and beg him to lay his hands on thy lad, and +bring him my words if he will not otherwise do it." She did as +the queen told her; and when she found the king she says to him +that her son is dangerously ill of a boil in his neck, and begs +him to lay his hand on the boil. The king tells her he is not a +physician, and bids her go to where there were physicians. She +replies, that the queen had told her to come to him; "and told me +to add the request from her, that you would would use the remedy +you understood, and she said that thou art the best physician +here in the town." Then the king took the lad, laid his hands +upon his neck, and felt the boil for a long time, until the boy +made a very wry face. Then the king took a piece of bread, laid +it in the figure of the cross upon the palm of his hand, and put +it into the boy's mouth. He swallowed it down, and from that +time all the soreness left his neck, and in a few days he was +quite well, to the great joy of his mother and all his relations. +Then first came Olaf into the repute of having as much healing +power in his hands as is ascribed to men who have been gifted by +nature with healing by the touch; and afterwards when his +miracles were universally acknowledged, this also was considered +one of his miracles. + + + +201. KING OLAF BURNS THE WOOD SHAVINGS ON HIS HAND FOR HIS + SABBATH BREACH. + +It happened one Sunday that the king sat in his highseat at the +dinner table, and had fallen into such deep thought that he did +not observe how time went. In one hand he had a knife, and in +the other a piece of fir-wood from which he cut splinters from +time to time. The table-servant stood before him with a bowl in +his hands; and seeing what the king was about, and that he was +involved in thought, he said, "It is Monday, sire, to-morrow." +The king looked at him when he heard this, and then it came into +his mind what he was doing on the Sunday. Then the king ordered +a lighted candle to be brought him, swept together all the +shavings he had made, set them on fire, and let them burn upon +his naked hand; showing thereby that he would hold fast by God's +law and commandment, and not trespass without punishment on what +he knew to be right. + + + +202. OF KING OLAF. + +When King Olaf had resolved on his return home, he made known his +intention to King Jarisleif and Queen Ingegerd. They dissuaded +him from this expedition, and said he should receive as much +power in their dominions as he thought desirable; but begged him +not to put himself within the reach of his enemies with so few +men as he had. Then King Olaf told them of his dream; adding, +that he believed it to be God's will and providence that it +should be so. Now when they found he was determined on +travelling to Norway, they offered him all the assistance to his +journey that he would accept from them. The king thanked them in +many fine words for their good will; and said that he accepted +from them, with no ordinary pleasure, what might be necessary for +his undertaking. + + + +203. OF KING OLAF'S JOURNEY FROM RUSSIA. + +Immediately after Yule (A.D. 1080), King Olaf made himself ready; +and had about 200 of his men with him. King Jarisleif gave him +all the horses, and whatever else he required; and when he was +ready he set off. King Jarisleif and Queen Ingegerd parted from +him with all honour; and he left his son Magnus behind with the +king. The first part of his journey, down to the sea-coast, King +Olaf and his men made on the ice; but as spring approached, and +the ice broke up, they rigged their vessels, and when they were +ready and got a wind they set out to sea, and had a good voyage. +When Olaf came to the island of Gotland with his ships he heard +the news -- which was told as truth, both in Svithjod, Denmark, +and over all Norway -- that Earl Hakon was missing, and Norway +without a head. This gave the king and his men good hope of the +issue of their journey. From thence they sailed, when the wind +suited, to Svithjod, and went into the Maelar lake, to Aros, and +sent men to the Swedish King Onund appointing a meeting. King +Onund received his brother-in-law's message in the kindest +manner, and went to him according to his invitation. Astrid also +came to King Olaf, with the men who had attended her; and great +was the joy on all sides at this meeting. The Swedish king also +received his brother-in-law King Olaf with great joy when they +met. + + + +204. OF THE LENDERMEN IN NORWAY. + +Now we must relate what, in the meantime, was going on in Norway. +Thorer Hund, in these two winters (A.D. 1029-1030), had made a +Lapland journey, and each winter had been a long time on the +mountains, and had gathered to himself great wealth by trading in +various wares with the Laplanders. He had twelve large coats of +reindeer-skin made for him, with so much Lapland witchcraft that +no weapon could cut or pierce them any more than if they were +armour of ring-mail, nor so much. The spring thereafter Thorer +rigged a long-ship which belonged to him, and manned it with his +house-servants. He summoned the bondes, demanded a levy from the +most northern Thing district, collected in this way a great many +people, and proceeded with this force southwards. Harek of +Thjotta had also collected a great number of people; and in this +expedition many people of consequence took a part, although these +two were the most distinguished. They made it known publicly +that with this war-force they were going against King Olaf, to +defend the country against him, in case he should come from the +eastward. + + + +205. OF EINAR TAMBASKELFER. + +Einar Tambaskelfer had most influence in the outer part of the +Throndhjem country after Earl Hakon's death was no longer +doubtful; for he and his son Eindride appeared to be the nearest +heirs to the movable property the earl had possessed. Then Einar +remembered the promises and offers of friendship which King +Canute had made him at parting; and he ordered a good vessel +which belonged to him to be got ready, and embarked with a great +retinue, and when he was ready sailed southwards along the coast, +then set out to sea westwards, and sailed without stopping until +he came to England. He immediately waited on King Canute, who +received him well and joyfully. Then Einar opened his business +to the king, and said he was come there to see the fulfillment of +the promises the king had made him; namely, that he, Einar, +should have the highest title of honour in Norway if Earl Hakon +were no more. King Canute replies, that now the circumstances +were altered. "I have now," said he, "sent men and tokens to my +son Svein in Denmark, and promised him the kingdom of Norway; but +thou shalt retain my friendship, and get the dignity and title +which thou art entitled by birth to hold. Thou shalt be +lenderman with great fiefs, and be so much more raised above +other lendermen as thou art more able than they." Einar saw +sufficiently how matters stood with regard to his business, and +got ready to return home; but as he now knew the king's +intentions, and thought it probable if King Olaf came from the +East the country would not be very peaceable, it came into his +mind that it would be better to proceed slowly, and not to be +hastening his voyage, in order to fight against King Olaf, +without his being advanced by it to any higher dignity than he +had before. Einar accordingly went to sea when he was ready; but +only came to Norway after the events were ended which took place +there during that summer. + + + +206. OF THE CHIEF PEOPLE IN NORWAY. + +The chiefs in Norway had their spies east in Svithjod, and south +in Denmark, to find out if King Olaf had come from Russia. As +soon as these men could get across the country, they heard the +news that King Olaf was arrived in Svithjod; and as soon as full +certainty of this was obtained, the war message-token went round +the land. The whole people were called out to a levy, and a +great army was collected. The lendermen who were from Agder, +Rogaland, and Hordaland, divided themselves, so that some went +towards the north, and some towards the east; for they thought +they required people on both sides. Erling's sons from Jadar +went eastward, with all the men who lived east of them, and over +whom they were chiefs; Aslak of Finey, and Erlend of Gerde, with +the lendermen north of them, went towards the north. All those +now named had sworn an oath to King Canute to deprive Olaf of +life, if opportunity should offer. + + + +207. OF HARALD SIGURDSON'S PROCEEDINGS. + +Now when it was reported in Norway that King Olaf was come from +the East to Svithjod, his friends gathered together to give him +aid. The most distinguished man in this flock was Harald +Sigurdson, a brother of King Olaf, who then was fifteen years of +age, very stout, and manly of growth as if he were full-grown. +Many other brave men were there also; and there were in all 600 +men when they proceeded from the uplands, and went eastward with +their force through Eid forest to Vermaland. From thence they +went eastward through the forests to Svithjod and made inquiry +about King Olaf's proceedings. + + + +208. OF KING OLAF'S PROCEEDINGS IN SVITHJOD. + +King Olaf was in Svithjod in spring (A.D. 1030), and had sent +spies from thence to Norway. All accounts from that quarter +agreed that there was no safety for him if he went there, and the +people who came from the north dissuaded him much from +penetrating into the country. But he had firmly resolved within +himself, as before stated, to go into Norway; and he asked King +Onund what strength King Onund would give him to conquer his +kingdom. King Onund replied, that the Swedes were little +inclined to make an expedition against Norway. "We know," says +he, "that the Northmen are rough and warlike, and it is dangerous +to carry hostility to their doors, but I will not be slow in +telling thee what aid I can give. I will give thee 400 chosen +men from my court-men, active and warlike, and well equipt for +battle; and moreover will give thee leave to go through my +country, and gather to thyself as many men as thou canst get to +follow thee." King Olaf accepted this offer, and got ready for +his march. Queen Astrid, and Ulfhild the king's daughter, +remained behind in Svithjod. + + + +209. KING OLAF ADVANCES TO JARNBERALAND. + +Just as King Olaf began his journey the men came to him whom the +Swedish king had given, in all 400 men, and the king took the +road the Swedes showed him. He advanced upwards in the country +to the forests, and came to a district called Jarnberaland. Here +the people joined him who had come out of Norway to meet him, as +before related; and he met here his brother Harald, and many +other of his relations, and it was a joyful meeting. They made +out together 1200 men. + + + +210. OF DAG HRINGSON. + +There was a man called Dag, who is said to have been a son of +King Hring, who fled the country from King Olaf. This Hring, it +is said further, had been a son of Dag, and grandson of Hring, +Harald Harfager's son. Thus was Dag King Olaf's relative. Both +Hring the father, and Dag the son, had settled themselves in +Svithjod, and got land to rule over. In spring, when Olaf came +from the East to Svithjod, he sent a message to his relation Dag, +that he should join him in this expedition with all the force he +could collect; and if they gained the country of Norway again, +Dag should have no smaller part of the kingdom under him than his +forefathers had enjoyed. When this message came to Dag it suited +his inclination well, for he had a great desire to go to Norway +and get the dominion his family had ruled over. He was not slow, +therefore, to reply, and promised to come. Dag was a quick- +speaking, quick-resolving man, mixing himself up in everything; +eager, but of little understanding. He collected a force of +almost 1200 men, with which he joined King Olaf. + + + +211. OF KING OLAF'S JOURNEY. + +King Olaf sent a message before him to all the inhabited places +he passed through, that the men who wished to get goods and +money, and share of booty, and the lands besides which now were +in the hands of his enemies, should come to him, and follow him. +Thereafter King Olaf led his army through forests, often over +desert moors, and often over large lakes; and they dragged, or +carried the boats, from lake to lake. On the way a great many +followers joined the king, partly forest settlers, partly +vagabonds. The places at which he halted for the night are since +called Olaf's Booths. He proceeded without any break upon his +journey until he came to Jamtaland, from which he marched north +over the keel or ridge of the land. The men spread themselves +over the hamlets, and proceeded, much scattered, so long as no +enemy was expected; but always, when so dispersed, the Northmen +accompanied the king. Dag proceeded with his men on another line +of march, and the Swedes on a third with their troop. + + + +212. OF VAGABOND-MEN. + +There were two men, the one called Gauka-Thorer, the other +Afrafaste, who were vagabonds and great robbers, and had a +company of thirty men such as themselves. These two men were +larger and stronger than other men, and they wanted neither +courage nor impudence. These men heard speak of the army that +was crossing the country, and said among themselves it would be a +clever counsel to go to the king, follow him to his country, and +go with him into a regular battle, and try themselves in this +work; for they had never been in any battle in which people were +regularly drawn up in line, and they were curious to see the +king's order of battle. This counsel was approved of by their +comrades, and accordingly they went to the road on which King +Olaf was to pass. When they came there they presented themselves +to the king, with their followers, fully armed. They saluted +him, and he asked what people they were. They told their names, +and said they were natives of the place; and told their errand, +and that they wished to go with the king. The king said, it +appeared to him there was good help in such folks. "And I have a +great inclination," said he, "to take such; but are ye Christian +men?" + +Gauka-Thorer replies, that he is neither Christian nor heathen. +"I and my comrades have no faith but on ourselves, our strength, +and the luck of victory; and with this faith we slip through +sufficiently well." + +The king replies, "A great pity it is that such brave +slaughtering fellows did not believe in Christ their Creator." + +Thorer replies, "Is there any Christian man, king, in thy +following, who stands so high in the air as we two brothers?" + +The king told them to let themselves be baptized, and to accept +the true faith. "Follow me then, and I will advance you to great +dignities; but if ye will not do so, return to your former +vocation." + +Afrafaste said he would not take on Christianity, and he turned +away. + +Then said Gauka-Thorer, "It is a great shame that the king drives +us thus away from his army, and I never before came where I was +not received into the company of other people, and I shall never +return back on this account." They joined accordingly the rear +with other forest-men, and followed the troops. Thereafter the +king proceeded west up to the keel-ridge of the country. + + + +213. OF KING OLAF'S VISION. + +Now when King Olaf, coming from the east, went over the keel- +ridge and descended on the west side of the mountain, where it +declines towards the sea, he could see from thence far over the +country. Many people rode before the king and many after, and he +himself rode so that there was a free space around him. He was +silent, and nobody spoke to him, and thus he rode a great part of +the day without looking much about him. Then the bishop rode up +to him, asked him why he was so silent, and what he was thinking +of; for, in general, he was very cheerful, and very talkative on +a journey to his men, so that all who were near him were merry. +The king replied, full of thought, "Wonderful things have come +into my mind a while ago. As I just now looked over Norway, out +to the west from the mountains, it came into my mind how many +happy days I have had in that land. It appeared to me at first +as if I saw over all the Throndhjem country, and then over all +Norway; and the longer this vision was before my eyes the +farther, methought, I saw, until I looked over the whole wide +world, both land and sea. Well I know the places at which I have +been in former days; some even which I have only heard speak of, +and some I saw of which I had never heard, both inhabited and +uninhabited, in this wide world." The bishop replied that this +was a holy vision, and very remarkable. + + + +214. OF THE MIRACLE ON THE CORN LAND. + +When the king had come lower down on the mountain, there lay a +farm before him called Sula, on the highest part of Veradal +district; and as they came nearer to the house the corn-land +appeared on both sides of the path. The king told his people to +proceed carefully, and not destroy the corn to the bondes. The +people observed this when the king was near; but the crowd behind +paid no attention to it, and the people ran over the corn, so +that it was trodden flat to the earth. There dwelt a bonde there +called Thorgeir Flek, who had two sons nearly grown up. Thorgeir +received the king and his people well, and offered all the +assistance in his power. The king was pleased with his offer, +and asked Thorgeir what was the news of the country, and if any +forces were assembled against him. Thorgeir says that a great +army was drawn together in the Throndhjem country, and that there +were some lendermen both from the south of the country, and from +Halogaland in the north; "but I do not know," says he. "if they +are intended against you, or going elsewhere." Then he +complained to the king of the damage and waste done him by the +people breaking and treading down all his corn fields. The king +said it was ill done to bring upon him any loss. Then the king +rode to where the corn had stood, and saw it was laid flat on the +earth; and he rode round the field, and said, "I expect, bonde, +that God will repair thy loss, so that the field, within a week, +will be better;" and it proved the best of the corn, as the king +had said. The king remained all night there, and in the morning +he made himself ready, and told Thorgeir the bonde to accompany +him and Thorgear offered his two sons also for the journey; and +although the king said that he did not want them with him, the +lads would go. As they would not stay behind, the king's court- +men were about binding them; but the king seeing it said, "Let +them come with us; the lads will come safe back again." And it +was with the lads as the king foretold. + + + +215. OF THE BAPTISM OF THE VAGABOND FOREST-MEN. + +Thereafter the army advanced to Staf, and when the king reached +Staf's moor he halted. There he got the certain information that +the bondes were advancing with an army against him, and that he +might soon expect to have a battle with them. He mustered his +force here, and, after reckoning them up, found there were in +the army 900 heathen men, and when he came to know it he ordered +them to allow themselves to be baptized, saying that he would +have no heathens with him in battle. "We must not," says he, +"put our confidence in numbers, but in God alone must we trust; +for through his power and favour we must be victorious, and I +will not mix heathen people with my own." When the heathens +heard this, they held a council among themselves, and at last 400 +men agreed to be baptized; but 500 men refused to adopt +Christianity, and that body returned home to their land. Then +the brothers Gauka-Thorer and Afrafaste presented themselves to +the king, and offered again to follow him. The king asked if +they had now taken baptism. Gauka-Thorer replied that they had +not. Then the king ordered them to accept baptism and the true +faith, or otherwise to go away. They stepped aside to talk with +each other on what resolution they should take. Afrafaste said, +"To give my opinion, I will not turn back, but go into the +battle, and take a part on the one side or the other; and I don't +care much in which army I am." Gauka-Thorer replies, "If I go +into battle I will give my help to the king, for he has most need +of help. And if I must believe in a God, why not in the white +Christ as well as in any other? Now it is my advice, therefore, +that we let ourselves be baptized, since the king insists so much +upon it, and then go into the battle with him." They all agreed +to this, and went to the king, and said they would receive +baptism. Then they were baptized by a priest, and the baptism +was confirmed by the bishop. The king then took them into the +troop of his court-men, and said they should fight under his +banner in the battle. + + + +216. KING OLAF'S SPEECH. + +King Olaf got certain intelligence now that it would be but a +short time until he had a battle with the bondes; and after he +had mustered his men, and reckoned up the force, he had more than +3000 men, which appears to be a great army in one field. Then +the king made the following speech to the people: "We have a +great army, and excellent troops; and now I will tell you, my +men, how I will have our force drawn up. I will let my banner go +forward in the middle of the army, and my-court-men, and +pursuivants shall follow it, together with the war forces that +joined us from the Uplands, and also those who may come to us +here in the Throndhjem land. On the right hand of my banner +shall be Dag Hringson, with all the men he brought to our aid; +and he shall have the second banner. And on the left hand of our +line shall the men be whom the Swedish king gave us, together +with all the people who came to us in Sweden; and they shall have +the third banner. I will also have the people divide themselves +into distinct flocks or parcels, so that relations and +acquaintances should be together; for thus they defend each other +best, and know each other. We will have all our men +distinguished by a mark, so as to be a field-token upon their +helmets and shields, by painting the holy cross thereupon with +white colour. When we come into battle we shall all have one +countersign and field-cry, -- `Forward, forward, Christian men! +cross men! king's men!' We must draw up our meal in thinner +ranks, because we have fewer people, and I do not wish to let +them surround us with their men. Now let the men divide +themselves into separate flocks, and then each flock into ranks; +then let each man observe well his proper place, and take notice +what banner he is drawn up under. And now we shall remain drawn +up in array; and our men shall be fully armed, night and day, +until we know where the meeting shall be between us and the +bondes." When the king had finished speaking, the army arrayed, +and arranged itself according to the king's orders. + + + +217. KING OLAF'S COUNSEL. + +Thereafter the king had a meeting with the chiefs of the +different divisions, and then the men had returned whom the king +had sent out into the neighbouring districts to demand men from +the bondes. They brought the tidings from the inhabited places +they had gone through, that all around the country was stripped +of all men able to carry arms, as all the people had joined the +bondes' army; and where they did find any they got but few to +follow them, for the most of them answered that they stayed at +home because they would not follow either party: they would not +go out against the king, nor yet against their own relations. +Thus they had got but few people. Now the king asked his men +their counsel, and what they now should do. Fin Arnason answered +thus to the king's question: "I will say what should be done, if +I may advise. We should go with armed hand over all the +inhabited places, plunder all the goods, and burn all the +habitations, and leave not a hut standing, and thus punish the +bondes for their treason against their sovereign. I think many a +man will then cast himself loose from the bondes' army, when he +sees smoke and flame at home on his farm, and does not know how +it is going with children, wives. or old men, fathers, mothers, +and other connections. I expect also," he added, "that if we +succeed in breaking the assembled host, their ranks will soon be +thinned; for so it is with the bondes, that the counsel which is +the newest is always the dearest to them all, and most followed." +When Fin had ended his speech it met with general applause; for +many thought well of such a good occasion to make booty, and all +thought the bondes well deserved to suffer damage; and they also +thought it probable, what Fin said, that many would in this way +be brought to forsake the assembled army of the bondes. + +Now when the king heard the warm expressions of his people he +told them to listen to him, and said, "The bondes have well +deserved that it should be done to them as ye desire. They also +know that I have formerly done so, burning their habitations, and +punishing them severely in many ways; but then I proceeded +against them with fire and sword because they rejected the true +faith, betook themselves to sacrifices, and would not obey my +commands. We had then God's honour to defend. But this treason +against their sovereign is a much less grievous crime, although +it does not become men who have any manhood in them to break the +faith and vows they have sworn to me. Now, however, it is more +in my power to spare those who have dealt ill with me, than those +whom God hated. I will, therefore, that my people proceed +gently, and commit no ravage. First, I will proceed to meet the +bondes; if we can then come to a reconciliation, it is well; but +if they will fight with us, then there are two things before us; +either we fail in the battle, and then it will be well advised +not to have to retire encumbered with spoil and cattle; or we +gain the victory, and then ye will be the heirs of all who fight +now against us; for some will fall, and others will fly, but both +will have forfeited their goods and properties, and then it will +be good to enter into full houses and well-stocked farms; but +what is burnt is of use to no man, and with pillage and force +more is wasted than what turns to use. Now we will spread out +far through the inhabited places, and take with us all the men we +can find able to carry arms. Then men will also capture cattle +for slaughter, or whatever else of provision that can serve for +food; but not do any other ravage. But I will see willingly that +ye kill any spies of the bonde army ye may fall in with. Dag and +his people shall go by the north side down along the valley, and +I will go on along the country road, and so we shall meet in the +evening, and all have one night quarter." + + + +218. OF KING OLAF'S SKALDS. + +It is related that when King Olaf drew up his men in battle +order, he made a shield rampart with his troop that should defend +him in battle, for which he selected the strongest and boldest. +Thereafter he called his skalds, and ordered them to go in within +the shield defence. "Ye shall." says the king, "remain here, and +see the circumstances which may take place, and then ye will not +have to follow the reports of others in what ye afterwards tell +or sing concerning it." There were Thormod Kolbrunarskald, +Gissur Gulbraskald, a foster-son of Hofgardaref, and Thorfin Mun. +Then said Thormod to Gissur, "Let us not stand so close together, +brother, that Sigvat the skald should not find room when he +comes. He must stand before the king, and the king will not have +it otherwise." The king heard this, and said, "Ye need not sneer +at Sigvat, because he is not here. Often has he followed me +well, and now he is praying for us, and that we greatly need." +Thormod replies, "It may be, sire, that ye now require prayers +most; but it would be thin around the banner-staff if all thy +court-men were now on the way to Rome. True it was what we spoke +about, that no man who would speak with you could find room for +Sigvat." + +Thereafter the skalds talked among themselves that it would be +well to compose a few songs of remembrance about the events which +would soon be taking place. + +Then Gissur sang: -- + + "From me shall bende girl never hear + A thought of sorrow, care, or fear: + I wish my girl knew how gay + We arm us for our viking fray. + Many and brave they are, we know, + Who come against us there below; + But, life or death, we, one and all, + By Norway's king will stand or fall." + +And Thorfin Mun made another song, viz.: -- + + "Dark is the cloud of men and shields, + Slow moving up through Verdal's fields: + These Verdal folks presume to bring + Their armed force against their king. + On! let us feed the carrion crow, -- + Give her a feast in every blow; + And, above all, let Throndhjem's hordes + Feel the sharp edge of true men's swords." + +And Thorrood sang: -- + + "The whistling arrows pipe to battle, + Sword and shield their war-call rattle. + Up! brave men, up! the faint heart here + Finds courage when the danger's near. + Up! brave men, up! with Olaf on! + With heart and hand a field is won. + One viking cheer! -- then, stead of words, + We'll speak with our death-dealing swords." + +These songs were immediately got by heart by the army. + + + +219. OF KING OLAF'S GIFTS FOR THE SOULS OF THOSE WHO SHOULD BE + SLAIN. + +Thereafter the king made himself ready, and marched down through +the valley. His whole forces took up their night-quarter in one +place, and lay down all night under their shields; but as soon as +day broke the king again put his army in order, and that being +done they proceeded down through the valley. Many bondes then +came to the king, of whom the most joined his army; and all, as +one man, told the same tale, -- that the lendermen had collected +an enormous army, with which they intended to give battle to the +king. + +The king took many marks of silver, and delivered them into the +hands of a bonde, and said, "This money thou shalt conceal, and +afterwards lay out, some to churches, some to priests, some to +alms-men, -- as gifts for the life and souls of those who fight +against us, and may fall in battle." + +The bonde replies, "Should you not rather give this money for the +soul-mulct of your own men?" + +The king says, "This money shall be given for the souls of those +who stand against us in the ranks of the bondes' army, and fall +by the weapons of our own men. The men who follow us to battle, +and fall therein, will all be saved together with ourself." + + + +220. OF THORMOD KOLBRUNARSKALD. + +This night the king lay with his army around him on the field, as +before related, and lay long awake in prayer to God, and slept +but little. Towards morning a slumber fell on him, and when he +awoke daylight was shooting up. The king thought it too early to +awaken the army, and asked where Thormod the skald was. Thormod +was at hand, and asked what was the king's pleasure. "Sing us a +song," said the king. Thormod raised himself up, and sang so +loud that the whole army could hear him. He began to sing the +old "Bjarkamal", of which these are the first verses: -- + + "The day is breaking, -- + The house cock, shaking + His rustling wings, + While priest-bell rings, + Crows up the morn, + And touting horn + Wakes thralls to work and weep; + Ye sons of Adil, cast off sleep, + Wake up! wake up! + Nor wassail cup, + Nor maiden's jeer, + Awaits you here. + Hrolf of the bow! + Har of the blow! + Up in your might! the day is breaking; + 'Tis Hild's game (1) that bides your waking." + +Then the troops awoke, and when the song was ended the people +thanked him for it; and it pleased many, as it was suitable to +the time and occasion, and they called it the house-carle's whet. +The king thanked him for the pleasure, and took a gold ring that +weighed half a mark and gave it him. Thormod thanked the king +for the gift, and said, "We have a good king; but it is not easy +to say how long the king's life may be. It is my prayer, sire, +that thou shouldst never part from me either in life or death." +The king replies, "We shall all go together so long as I rule, +and as ye will follow me." + +Thormod says, "I hope, sire, that whether in safety or danger I +may stand near you as long as I can stand, whatever we may hear +of Sigvat travelling with his gold-hilted sword." Then Thormod +made these lines: -- + + "To thee, my king, I'll still be true, + Until another skald I view, + Here in the field with golden sword, + As in thy hall, with flattering word. + Thy skald shall never be a craven, + Though he may feast the croaking raven, + The warrior's fate unmoved I view, -- + To thee, my king, I'll still be true." + + +ENDNOTES: +(1) Hild's game is the battle, from the name of the war-goddess + Hild. -- L. + + + +221. KING OLAF COMES TO STIKLESTAD. + +King O1af led his army farther down through the valley, and Dag +and his men went another way, and the king did not halt until he +came to Stiklestad. There he saw the bonde army spread out all +around; and there were so great numbers that people were going on +every footpath, and great crowds were collected far and near. +They also saw there a troop which came down from Veradal, and had +been out to spy. They came so close to the king's people that +they knew each other. It was Hrut of Viggia, with thirty men. +The king ordered his pursuivants to go out against Hrut, and make +an end of him, to which his men were instantly ready. The king +said to the Icelanders, "It is told me that in Iceland it is the +custom that the bondes give their house-servants a sheep to +slaughter; now I give you a ram to slaughter (1). The Icelanders +were easily invited to this, and went out immediately with a few +men against Hrut, and killed him and the troop that followed him. +When the king came to Stiklestad he made a halt, and made the +army stop, and told his people to alight from their horses and +get ready for battle; and the people did as the king ordered. +Then he placed his army in battle array, and raised his banner. +Dag was not yet arrived with his men, so that his wing of the +battle array was wanting. Then the king said the Upland men +should go forward in their place, and raise their banner there. +"It appears to me advisable," says the king, "that Harald my +brother should not be in the battle, for he is still in the years +of childhood only." Harald replies, "Certainly I shall be in the +battle, for I am not so weak that I cannot handle the sword; and +as to that, I have a notion of tying the sword-handle to my hand. +None is more willing than I am to give the bondes a blow; so I +shall go with my comrades." It is said that Harald made these +lines: -- + + "Our army's wing, where I shall stand, + I will hold good with heart and hand; + My mother's eye shall joy to see + A battered, blood-stained shield from me. + The brisk young skald should gaily go + Into the fray, give blow for blow, + Cheer on his men, gain inch by inch, + And from the spear-point never flinch." + +Harald got his will, and was allowed to be in the battle. + + +ENDNOTES: +(1) Hrut means a young ram. -- L. + + + +222. OF THORGILS HALMASON. + +A bonde, by name Thorgils Halmason, father to Grim the Good, +dwelt in Stiklestad farm. Thorgils offered the king his +assistance, and was ready to go into battle with him. The king +thanked him for the offer. "I would rather," says the king, +"thou shouldst not be in the fight. Do us rather the service to +take care of the people who are wounded, and to bury those who +may fall, when the battle is over. Should it happen, bonde, that +I fall in this battle, bestow the care on my body that may be +necessary, if that be not forbidden thee." Thorgils promised the +king what he desired. + + + +223. OLAF'S SPEECH. + +Now when King Olaf had drawn up his army in battle array he made +a speech, in which he told the people to raise their spirit, and +go boldly forward, if it came to a battle. "We have," says he, +"many men, and good; and although the bondes may have a somewhat +larger force than we, it is fate that rules over victory. This I +will make known to you solemnly, that I shall not fly from this +battle, but shall either be victorious over the bondes, or fall +in the fight. I will pray to God that the lot of the two may +befall me which will be most to my advantage. With this we may +encourage ourselves, that we have a more just cause than the +bondes; and likewise that God must either protect us and our +cause in this battle, or give us a far higher recompense for what +we may lose here in the world than what we ourselves could ask. +Should it be my lot to have anything to say after the battle, +then shall I reward each of you according to his service, and to +the bravery he displays in the battle; and if we gain the +victory, there must be land and movables enough to divide among +you, and which are now in the hands of your enemies. Let us at +the first make the hardest onset, for then the consequences are +soon seen. There being a great difference in the numbers, we +have to expect victory from a sharp assault only; and, on the +other hand, it will be heavy work for us to fight until we are +tired, and unable to fight longer; for we have fewer people to +relieve with than they, who can come forward at one time and +retreat and rest at another. But if we advance so hard at the +first attack that those who are foremost in their ranks must turn +round, then the one will fall over the other, and their +destruction will be the greater the greater numbers there are +together." When the king had ended his speech it was received +with loud applause, and the one encouraged the other. + + + +224. OF THORD FOLASON. + +Thord Folason carried King Olaf's banner. So says Sigvat the +skald, in the death-song which he composed about King Olaf, and +put together according to resurrection saga: -- + + "Thord. I have heard, by Olaf's side, + Where raged the battle's wildest tide, + Moved on, and, as by one accord + Moved with them every heart and sword. + The banner of the king on high, + Floating all splendid in the sky + From golden shaft, aloft he bore, -- + The Norsemen's rallying-point of yore." + + + +225. OF KING OLAF'S ARMOUR. + +King Olaf was armed thus: -- He had a gold-mounted helmet on his +head; and had in one hand a white shield, on which the holy cross +was inlaid in gold. In his other hand he had a lance, which to +the present day stands beside the altar in Christ Church. In his +belt he had a sword, which was called Hneiter, which was +remarkably sharp, and of which the handle was worked with gold. +He had also a strong coat of ring-mail. Sigvat the skald, speaks +of this: -- + + "A greater victory to gain, + Olaf the Stout strode o'er the plain + In strong chain armour, aid to bring + To his brave men on either wing. + High rose the fight and battle-heat, -- + the clear blood ran beneath the feet + Of Swedes, who from the East came there, + In Olaf's gain or loss to share." + + + +226. KING OLAF'S DREAM. + +Now when King Olaf had drawn up his men the army of the bondes +had not yet come near upon any quarter, so the king said the +people should sit down and rest themselves. He sat down himself, +and the people sat around him in a widespread crowd. He leaned +down, and laid his head upon Fin Arnason's knee. There a slumber +came upon him, and he slept a little while; but at the same time +the bondes' army was seen advancing with raised banners, and the +multitude of these was very great. + +Then Fin awakened the king, and said that the bonde-army advanced +against them. + +The king awoke, and said, "Why did you waken me, Fin, and did not +allow me to enjoy my dream?" + +Fin: "Thou must not be dreaming; but rather thou shouldst be +awake, and preparing thyself against the host which is coming +down upon us; or, dost thou not see that the whole bonde-crowd is +coming?" + +The king replies, "They are not yet so near to us, and it would +have been better to have let me sleep." + +Then said Fin, "What was the dream, sire, of which the loss +appears to thee so great that thou wouldst rather have been left +to waken of thyself?" + +Now the king told his dream, -- that he seemed to see a high +ladder, upon which he went so high in the air that heaven was +open: for so high reached the ladder. "And when you awoke me, I +was come to the highest step towards heaven." + +Fin replies, "This dream does not appear to me so good as it does +to thee. I think it means that thou art fey (1); unless it be +the mere want of sleep that has worked upon thee." + + +ENDNOTES: +(1) Fey means doomed to die. + + + +227. OF ARNLJOT GELLINE'S BAPTISM. + +When King Olaf was arrived at Stiklestad, it happened, among +other circumstances, that a man came to him; and although it was +nowise wonderful that there came many men from the districts, yet +this must be regarded as unusual, that this man did not appear +like the other men who came to him. He was so tall that none +stood higher than up to his shoulders: very handsome he was in +countenance, and had beautiful fair hair. He was well armed; had +a fine helmet, and ring armour; a red shield; a superb sword in +his belt; and in his hand a gold-mounted spear, the shaft of it +so thick that it was a handful to grasp. The man went before the +king, saluted him, and asked if the king would accept his +services. + +The king asked his name and family, also what countryman he was. + +He replies, "My family is in Jamtaland and Helsingjaland, and my +name is Arnljot Gelline; but this I must not forget to tell you, +that I came to the assistance of those men you sent to Jamtaland +to collect scat, and I gave into their hands a silver dish, which +I sent you as a token that I would be your friend." + +Then the king asked Arnljot if he was a Christian or not. He +replied, "My faith has been this, to rely upon my power and +strength, and which faith hath hitherto given me satisfaction; +but now I intend rather to put my faith, sire, in thee." + +The king replies, "If thou wilt put faith in me thou must also +put faith in what I will teach thee. Thou must believe that +Jesus Christ has made heaven and earth, and all mankind, and to +him shall all those who are good and rightly believing go after +death." + +Arnljot answers, "I have indeed heard of the white Christ, but +neither know what he proposes, nor what he rules over; but now I +will believe all that thou sayest to me, and lay down my lot in +your hands." + +Thereupon Arnljot was baptized. The king taught him so much of +the holy faith as appeared to him needful, and placed him in the +front rank of the order of battle, in advance of his banner, +where also Gauka-Thorer and Afrafaste, with their men, were. + + + +228. CONCERNING THE ARMY COLLECTED IN NORWAY. + +Now shall we relate what we have left behind in our tale, -- that +the lendermen and bondes had collected a vast host as soon as it +was reported that King Olaf was come from Russia, and had arrived +in Svithjod; but when they heard that he had come to Jamtaland, +and intended to proceed westwards over the keel-ridge to Veradal, +they brought their forces into the Throndhjem country, where they +gathered together the whole people, free and unfree, and +proceeded towards Veradal with so great a body of men that there +was nobody in Norway at that time who had seen so large a force +assembled. But the force, as it usually happens in so great a +multitude, consisted of many different sorts of people. There +were many lendermen, and a great many powerful bondes; but the +great mass consisted of labourers and cottars. The chief +strength of this army lay in the Throndhjem land, and it was the +most warm in enmity and opposition to the king. + + + +229. OF BISHOP SIGURD. + +When King Canute had, as before related, laid all Norway under +his power, he set Earl Hakon to manage it, and gave the earl a +court-bishop, by name Sigurd, who was of Danish descent, and had +been long with King Canute. This bishop was of a very hot +temper, and particularly obstinate, and haughty in his speech; +but supported King Canute all he could in conversation, and was a +great enemy of King Olaf. He was now also in the bondes' army, +spoke often before the people, and urged them much to +insurrection against King Olaf. + + + +230. BISHOP SIGURD'S SPEECH. + +At a House-thing, at which a great many people were assembled, +the bishop desired to be heard, and made the following speech: +"Here are now assembled a great many men, so that probably there +will never be opportunity in this poor country of seeing so great +a native army; but it would be desirable if this strength and +multitude could be a protection; for it will all be needed, if +this Olaf does not give over bringing war and strife upon you. +From his very earliest youth he has been accustomed to plunder +and kill: for which purposes he drove widely around through all +countries, until he turned at last against this, where he began +to show hostilities against the men who were the best and most +powerful; and even against King Canute, whom all are bound to +serve according to their ability, and in whose scat-lands he set +himself down. He did the same to Olaf the Swedish king. He +drove the earls Svein and Hakon away from their heritages; and +was even most tyrannical towards his own connections, as he drove +all the kings out of the Uplands: although, indeed, it was but +just reward for having been false to their oaths of fealty to +King Canute, and having followed this King Olaf in all the folly +he could invent; so their friendship ended according to their +deserts, by this king mutilating some of them, taking their +kingdoms himself, and ruining every man in the country who had an +honourable name. Ye know yourselves how he has treated the +lendermen, of whom many of the worthlest have been murdered, and +many obliged to fly from their country; and how he has roamed far +and wide through the land with robber-bands, burning and +plundering houses, and killing people. Who is the man among us +here of any consideration who has not some great injury from him +to avenge? Now he has come hither with a foreign troop, +consisting mostly of forest-men, vagabonds, and such marauders. +Do ye think he will now be more merciful to you, when he is +roaming about with such a bad crew, after committing devastations +which all who followed him dissuaded him from? Therefore it is +now my advice, that ye remember King Canute's words when he told +you, if King Olaf attempted to return to the country ye should +defend the liberty King Canute had promised you, and should +oppose and drive away such a vile pack. Now the only thing to be +done is to advance against them, and cast forth these malefactors +to the wolves and eagles, leaving their corpses on the spot they +cover, unless ye drag them aside to out-of-the-way corners in the +woods or rocks. No man would be so imprudent as to remove them +to churches, for they are all robbers and evil-doers." When he +had ended his speech it was hailed with the loudest applause, and +all unanimously agreed to act according to his recommendation. + + + +231. OF THE LENDERMEN. + +The lendermen who had come together appointed meetings with each +other, and consulted together how they should draw up their +troops, and who should be their leader. Kalf Arnason said that +Harek of Thjotta was best fitted to be the chief of this army, +for he was descended from Harald Harfager's race. "The king also +is particularly enraged against him on account of the murder of +Grankel, and therefore he would be exposed to the severest fate +if Olaf recovered the kingdom; and Harek withal is a man +experienced in battles, and a man who does much for honour +alone." + +Harek replies, that the men are best suited for this who are in +the flower of their age. "I am now," says he, "an old and +decaying man, not able to do much in battle: besides, there is +near relationship between me and King Olaf; and although he seems +not to put great value upon that tie, it would not beseem me to +go as leader of the hostilities against him, before any other in +this meeting. On the other hand, thou, Thorer, art well suited +to be our chief in this battle against King Olaf; and thou hast +distinct grounds for being so, both because thou hast to avenge +the death of thy relation, and also hast been driven by him as an +outlaw from thy property. Thou hast also promised King Canute, +as well as thy connections, to avenge the murder of thy relative +Asbjorn; and dost thou suppose there ever will be a better +opportunity than this of taking vengeance on Olaf for all these +insults and injuries?" + +Thorer replies thus to his speech: "I do not confide in myself so +much as to raise the banner against King Olaf, or, as chief, to +lead on this army; for the people of Throndhjem have the greatest +part in this armament, and I know well their haughty spirit, and +that they would not obey me, or any other Halogaland man, +although I need not be reminded of my injuries to be roused to +vengeance on King Olaf. I remember well my heavy loss when King +Olaf slew four men, all distinguished both by birth and personal +qualities; namely, my brother's son Asbjorn, my sister's sons +Thorer and Grjotgard, and their father Olver; and it is my duty +to take vengeance for each man of them. I will not conceal that +I have selected eleven of my house-servants for that purpose, and +of those who are the most daring; and I do not think we shall be +behind others in exchanging blows with King Olaf, should +opportunity be given." + + + +232. KALF ARNASON'S SPEECH. + +Then Kalf Arnason desired to speak. "It is highly necessary," +says he, "that this business we have on hand do not turn out a +mockery and child-work, now that an army is collected. Something +else is needful, if we are to stand battle with King Olaf, than +that each should shove the danger from himself; for we must +recollect that although King Olaf has not many people compared to +this army of ours, the leader of them is intrepid, and the whole +body of them will be true to him, and obedient in the battle. +But if we who should be the leaders of this army show any fear, +and will not encourage the army and go at the head of it, it must +happen that with the great body of our people the spirit will +leave their hearts, and the next thing will be that each will +seek his own safety. Although we have now a great force +assembled, we shall find our destruction certain, when we meet +King Olaf and his troops, if we, the chiefs of the people, are +not confident in our cause, and have not the whole army +confidently and bravely going along with us. If it cannot be so, +we had better not risk a battle; and then it is easy to see that +nothing would be left us but to shelter ourselves under King +Olaf's mercy, however hard it might be, as then we would be less +guilty than we now may appear to him to be. Yet I know there are +men in his ranks who would secure my life and peace if I would +seek it. Will ye now adopt my proposal -- then shalt thou, +friend Thorer, and thou, Harek, go under the banner which we will +all of us raise up, and then follow. Let us all be speedy and +determined in the resolution we have taken, and put ourselves so +at the head of the bondes' army that they see no distrust in us; +for then will the common man advance with spirit when we go +merrily to work in placing the army in battle-order, and in +encouraging the people to the strife." + +When Kalf had ended they all concurred in what he proposed, and +all would do what Kalf thought of advantage. All desired Kalf to +be the leader of the army, and to give each what place in it he +chose. + + + +233. HOW THE LENDERMEN SET UP THEIR BANNERS. + +Kalf Arnason then raised his banner, and drew up his house- +servants along with Harek of Thjotta and his men. Thorer Hund, +with his troop, was at the head of the order of battle in front +of the banner; and on both sides of Thorer was a chosen body of +bondes, all of them the most active and best armed in the forces. +This part of the array was long and thick, and in it were drawn +up the Throndhjem people and the Halogalanders. On the right +wing was another array; and on the left of the main array were +drawn up the men from Rogaland, Hordaland, the Fjord districts, +and Scgn, and they had the third banner. + + + +234. OF THORSTEIN KNARRARSMID. + +There was a man called Thorstein Knarrarsmid, who was a merchant +and master ship-carpenter, stout and strong, very passionate, and +a great manslayer. He had been in enmity against King Olaf, who +had taken from him a new and large merchant-vessel he had built, +on account of some manslaughter-mulct, incurred in the course of +his misdeeds, which he owed to the king. Thorstein, who was with +the bondes' army, went forward in front of the line in which +Thorer Hund stood, and said, "Here I will be, Thorer, in your +ranks; for I think, if I and King Olaf meet, to be the first to +strive a weapon at him, if I can get so near, to repay him for +the robbery of the ship he took from me, which was the best that +ever went on merchant voyage." Thorer and his men received +Thorstein, and he went into their ranks. + + + +235. OF THE PREPARATIONS OF THE BONDES. + +When the bondes' men and array were drawn up the lendermen +addressed the men, and ordered them to take notice of the place +to which each man belonged, under which banner each should be, +who there were in front of the banner, who were his side-men, and +that they should be brisk and quick in taking up their places in +the array; for the army had still to go a long way, and the array +might be broken in the course of march. Then they encouraged the +people; and Kalf invited all the men who had any injury to avenge +on King Olaf to place themselves under the banner which was +advancing against King Olaf's own banner. They should remember +the distress he had brought upon them; and, he said, never was +there a better opportunity to avenge their grievances, and to +free themselves from the yoke and slavery he had imposed on them. +"Let him," says he, "be held a useless coward who does not fight +this day boldly; and they are not innocents who are opposed to +you, but people who will not spare you if ye spare them." + +Kalf's speech was received with loud applause, and shouts of +encouragement were heard through the whole army. + + + +236. OF THE KING'S AND THE BONDES' ARMIES. + +Thereafter the bondes' army advanced to Stiklestad, where King +Olaf was already with his people. Kalf and Harek went in front, +at the head of the army under their banners. But the battle did +not begin immediately on their meeting; for the bondes delayed +the assault, because all their men were not come upon the plain, +and they waited for those who came after them. Thorer Hund had +come up with his troop the last, for he had to take care that the +men did not go off behind when the battlecry was raised, or the +armies were closing with each other; and therefore Kalf and Harek +waited for Thorer. For the encouragement of their men in the +battle the bondes had the field-cry -- "Forward, forward, +bondemen!" King Olaf also made no attack, for he waited for Dag +and the people who followed him. At last the king saw Dag and +his men approaching. It is said that the army of the bondes was +not less on this day than a hundred times a hundred men. Sigvat +the skald speaks thus of the numbers: -- + + "I grieve to think the king had brought + Too small a force for what he sought: + He held his gold too fast to bring + The numbers that could make him king. + The foemen, more than two to one, + The victory by numbers won; + And this alone, as I've heard say, + Against King Olaf turned the day." + + + +237. MEETING OF THE KING AND THE BONDES. + +As the armies on both sides stood so near that people knew each +other, the king said, "Why art thou here, Kalf, for we parted +good friends south in More? It beseems thee ill to fight against +us, or to throw a spear into our army; for here are four of thy +brothers." + +Kalf replied, "Many things come to pass differently from what may +appear seemly. You parted from us so that it was necessary to +seek peace with those who were behind in the country. Now each +must remain where he stands; but if I might advise, we should be +reconciled." + +Then Fin, his brother, answered, "This is to be observed of Kalf, +that when he speaks fairly he has it in his mind to do ill." + +The king answered, "It may be, Kalf, that thou art inclined to +reconciliation; but, methinks, the bondes do not appear so +peaceful." + +Then Thorgeir of Kviststad said, "You shall now have such peace +as many formerly have received at your hands, and which you shall +now pay for." + +The king replies, "Thou hast no occasion to hasten so much to +meet us; for fate has not decreed to thee to-day a victory over +me, who raised thee to power and dignity from a mean station." + + + +238. BEGINNING OF THE BATTLE OF STIKLESTAD. + +Now came Thorer Hund, went forward in front of the banner with +his troop, and called out, "Forward, forward, bondemen!" +Thereupon the bondemen raised the war-cry, and shot their arrows +and spears. The king's men raised also a war-shout; and that +done, encouraged each other to advance, crying out, "Forward, +forward, Christ-men! cross-men! king's men!" When the bondes +who stood outermost on the wings heard it, they repeated the same +cry; but when the other bondes heard them they thought these were +king's men, turned their arms against them, and they fought +together, and many were slain before they knew each other. The +weather was beautiful, and the sun shone clear; but when the +battle began the heaven and the sun became red, and before the +battle ended it became as dark as at night. King Olaf had drawn +up his army upon a rising ground, and it rushed down from thence +upon the bonde-army with such a fierce assault, that the bondes' +array went before it; so that the breast of the king's array came +to stand upon the ground on which the rear of the bondes' array +had stood, and many of the bondes' army were on the way to fly, +but the lendermen and their house-men stood fast, and the battle +became very severe. So says Sigvat: -- + + "Thundered the ground beneath their tread, + As, iron-clad, thick-tramping, sped + The men-at-arms, in row and rank, + Past Stiklestad's sweet grassy bank. + The clank of steel, the bowstrings' twang, + The sounds of battle, loudly rang; + And bowman hurried on advancing, + Their bright helms in the sunshine glancing." + +The lendermen urged their men, and forced them to advance. +Sigvat speaks of this: -- + + "Midst in their line their banner flies, + Thither the stoutest bonde hies: + But many a bonde thinks of home, + And many wish they ne'er had come." + +Then the bonde-army pushed on from all quarters. They who stood +in front hewed down with their swords; they who stood next thrust +with their spears; and they who stood hindmost shot arrows, cast +spears, or threw stones, hand-axes, or sharp stakes. Soon there +was a great fall of men in the battle. Many were down on both +sides. In the first onset fell Arnljot Gelline, Gauka-Thorer, +and Afrafaste, with all their men, after each had killed a man or +two, and some indeed more. Now the ranks in front of the king's +banner began to be thinned, and the king ordered Thord to carry +the banner forward, and the king himself followed it with the +troop he had chosen to stand nearest to him in battle; and these +were the best armed men in the field, and the most expert in the +use of their weapons. Sigvat the skald tells of this: -- + + "Loud was the battle-storm there, + Where the king's banner flamed in air. + The king beneath his banner stands, + And there the battle he commands." + +Olaf came forth from behind the shield-bulwark, and put himself +at the head of the army; and when the bondes looked him in the +face they were frightened, and let their hands drop. So says +Sigvat: -- + + "I think I saw them shrink with fear + Who would not shrink from foeman's spear, + When Olaf's lion-eye was cast + On them, and called up all the past. + Clear as the serpent's eye -- his look + No Throndhjem man could stand, but shook + Beneath its glance, and skulked away, + Knowing his king, and cursed the day." + +The combat became fierce, and the king went forward in the fray. +So says Sigvat: -- + + "When on they came in fierce array, + And round the king arose the fray, + With shield on arm brave Olaf stood, + Dyeing his sword in their best blood. + For vengeance on his Throndhjem foes, + On their best men he dealt his blows; + He who knew well death's iron play, + To his deep vengeance gave full sway." + + + +239. THORGEIR OF KVISTSTAD'S FALL. + +King Olaf fought most desperately. He struck the lenderman +before mentioned (Thorgeir of Kviststad) across the face, cut off +the nose-piece of his helmet, and clove his head down below the +eyes so that they almost fell out. When he fell the king said, +"Was it not true, Thorgeir, what I told thee, that thou shouldst +not be victor in our meeting?" At the same instant Thord stuck +the banner-pole so fast in the earth that it remained standing. +Thord had got his death-wound, and fell beneath the banner. +There also fell Thorfin Mun, and also Gissur Gullbrarskald, who +was attacked by two men, of whom he killed one, but only wounded +the other before he fell. So says Hofgardaref: -- + + "Bold in the Iron-storm was he, + Firm and stout as forest tree, + The hero who, 'gainst two at once, + Made Odin's fire from sword-edge glance; + Dealing a death-blow to the one, + Known as a brave and generous man, + Wounding the other, ere he fell, -- + His bloody sword his deeds showed well." + +It happened then, as before related, that the sun, although the +air was clear, withdrew from the sight, and it became dark. Of +this Sigvat the skald speaks: -- + + "No common wonder in the sky + Fell out that day -- the sun on high, + And not a cloud to see around, + Shone not, nor warmed Norway's ground. + The day on which fell out this fight + Was marked by dismal dusky light, + This from the East I heard -- the end + Of our great king it did portend." + +At the same time Dag Hringson came up with his people, and began +to put his men in array, and to set up his banner; but on account +of the darkness the onset could not go on so briskly, for they +could not see exactly whom they had before them. They turned, +however, to that quarter where the men of Hordaland and Rogaland +stood. Many of these circumstances took place at the same time, +and some happened a little earlier, and some a little later. + + + +240. KING OLAF'S FALL. + +On the one side of Kalf Arnason stood his two relations, Olaf and +Kalf, with many other brave and stout men. Kalf was a son of +Arnfin Arnmodson, and a brother's son of Arne Arnmodson. On the +other side of Kalf Arnason stood Thorer Hund. King Olaf hewed at +Thorer Hund, and struck him across the shoulders; but the sword +would not cut, and it was as if dust flew from his reindeer-skin +coat. So says Sigvat: -- + + "The king himself now proved the power + Of Fin-folk's craft in magic hour, + With magic song; for stroke of steel + Thor's reindeer coat would never feel, + Bewitched by them it turned the stroke + Of the king's sword, -- a dust-like smoke + Rose from Thor's shoulders from the blow + Which the king though would end his foe." + +Thorer struck at the king, and they exchanged some blows; but the +king's sword would not cut where it met the reindeer skin, +although Thorer was wounded in the hands. Sigvat sang thus of +it: -- + + "Some say that Thorer's not right bold; + Why never yet have I been told + Of one who did a bolder thing + Than to change blows with his true king. + Against his king his sword to wield, + Leaping across the shield on shield + Which fenced the king round in the fight, + Shows the dog's (1) courage -- brave, not bright." + +The king said to Bjorn the marshal, "Do thou kill the dog on whom +steel will not bite." Bjorn turned round the axe in his hands, +and gave Thorer a blow with the hammer of it on the shoulder so +hard that he tottered. The king at the same moment turned +against Kalf and his relations, and gave Olaf his death-wound. +Thorer Hund struck his spear right through the body of Marshal +Bjorn, and killed him outright; and Thorer said, "It is thus we +hunt the bear." (2) Thorstein Knarrarsmid struck at King Olaf +with his axe, and the blow hit his left leg above the knee. Fin +Arnason instantly killed Thorstein. The king after the wound +staggered towards a stone, threw down his sword, and prayed God +to help him. Then Thorer Hund struck at him with his spear, and +the stroke went in under his mail-coat and into his belly. Then +Kalf struck at him on the left side of the neck. But all are not +agreed upon Kalf having been the man who gave him the wound in +the neck. These three wounds were King Olaf's death; and after +the king's death the greater part of the forces which had +advanced with him fell with the king. Bjarne Gullbrarskald sang +these verses about Kalf Arnason: -- + + "Warrior! who Olaf dared withstand, + Who against Olaf held the land, + Thou hast withstood the bravest, best, + Who e'er has gone to his long rest. + At Stiklestad thou wast the head; + With flying banners onwards led + Thy bonde troops, and still fought on, + Until he fell -- the much-mourned one." + +Sigvat also made these verses on Bjorn: -- + + "The marshal Bjorn, too, I find, + A great example leaves behind, + How steady courage should stand proof, + Though other servants stand aloof. + To Russia first his steps he bent, + To serve his master still intent; + And now besides his king he fell, -- + A noble death for skalds to tell." + + +ENDNOTES: +(1) Thorer's name was Hund -- the dog; and a play upon Thorer + Hund's name was intended by the skald. -- L. +(2) Bjorn, the marshal's name, signifies a bear. -- L. + + + +241. BEGINNING OF DAG HRINGSON'S ATTACK. + +Dag Hringson still kept up the battle, and made in the beginning +so fierce an assault that the bondes gave way, and some betook +themselves to flight. There a great number of the bondes fell, +and these lendermen, Erlend of Gerde and Aslak of Finey; and the +banner also which they had stood under was cut down. This onset +was particularly hot, and was called Dag's storm. But now Kalf +Arnason, Harek of Thjotta, and Thorer Hund turned against Dag, +with the array which had followed them, and then Dag was +overwhelmed with numbers; so he betook himself to flight with the +men still left him. There was a valley through which the main +body of the fugitives fled, and men lay scattered in heaps on +both sides; and many were severely wounded, and many so fatigued +that they were fit for nothing. The bondes pursued only a short +way; for their leaders soon returned back to the field of battle, +where they had their friends and relations to look after. + + + +240. KING OLAF'S MIRACLE SHOWN TO THORER HUND. + +Thorer Hund went to where King Olaf's body lay, took care of it, +laid it straight out on the ground, and spread a cloak over it. +He told since that when he wiped the blood from the face it was +very beautiful; and there was red in the cheeks, as if he only +slept, and even much clearer than when he was in life. The +king's blood came on Thorer's hand, and ran up between his +fingers to where he had been wounded, and the wound grew up so +speedily that it did not require to be bound up. This +circumstance was testified by Thorer himself when King Olaf's +holiness came to be generally known among the people; and Thorer +Hund was among the first of the king's powerful opponents who +endeavoured to spread abroad the king's sanctity. + + + +243. OF KALF ARNASON'S BROTHERS. + +Kalf Arnason searched for his brothers who had fallen, and found +Thorberg and Fin. It is related that Fin threw his dagger at +him, and wanted to kill him, giving him hard words, and calling +him a faithless villain, and a traitor to his king. Kalf did not +regard it, but ordered Fin and Thorberg to be carried away from +the field. When their wounds were examined they were found not +to be deadly, and they had fallen from fatigue, and under the +weight of their weapons. Thereafter Kalf tried to bring his +brothers down to a ship, and went himself with them. As soon as +he was gone the whole bonde-army, having their homes in the +neighbourhood, went off also, excepting those who had friends or +relations to look after, or the bodies of the slain to take care +of. The wounded were taken home to the farms, so that every +house was full of them; and tents were erected over some. But +wonderful as was the number collected in the bonde-army, no less +wonderful was the haste with which this vast body was dispersed +when it was once free; and the cause of this was, that the most +of the people gathered together from the country places were +longing for their homes. + + + +244. OF THE BONDES OF VERADAL. + +The bondes who had their homes in Veradal went to the chiefs +Harek and Thorer, and complained of their distress, saying, "The +fugitives who have escaped from the battle have proceeded up over +the valley of Veradal, and are destroying our habitations, and +there is no safety for us to travel home so long as they are in +the valley. Go after them with war-force, and let no mother's +son of them escape with life; for that is what they intended for +us if they had got the upper hand in the battle, and the same +they would do now if they met us hereafter, and had better luck +than we. It may also be that they will linger in the valley if +they have nothing to be frightened for, and then they would not +proceed very gently in the inhabited country." The bondes made +many words about this, urging the chiefs to advance directly, and +kill those who had escaped. Now when the chiefs talked over this +matter among themselves, they thought there was much truth in +what the bondes said. They resolved, therefore, that Thorer Hund +should undertake this expedition through Veradal, with 600 men of +his own troops. Then, towards evening, he set out with his men; +and Thorer continued his march without halt until he came in the +night to Sula, where he heard the news that Dag Hringson had come +there in the evening, with many other flocks of the king's men, +and had halted there until they took supper, but were afterwards +gone up to the mountains. Then Thorer said he did not care to +pursue them up through the mountains, and he returned down the +valley again, and they did not kill many of them this time. The +bondes then returned to their homes, and the following day +Thorer, with his people, went to their ships. The part of the +king's men who were still on their legs concealed themselves in +the forests, and some got help from the people. + + + +245. OF THE KING'S BROTHER, HARALD SIGURDSON. + +Harald Sigurdson was severely wounded; but Ragnvald Brusason +brought him to a bonde's the night after the battle, and the +bonde took in Harald, and healed his wound in secret, and +afterwards gave him his son to attend him. They went secretly +over the mountains, and through the waste forests, and came out +in Jamtaland. Harald Sigurdson was fifteen years old when King +Olaf fell. In Jamtaland Harald found Ragnvald Brusason; and they +went both east to King Jarisleif in Russia, as is related in the +Saga of Harald Sigurdson. + + + +246. OF THORMOD KOLBRUNARSKALD. + +Thormod Kolbrunarskald was under King Olaf's banner in the +battle; but when the king had fallen, the battle was raging so +that of the king's men the one fell by the side of the other, and +the most of those who stood on their legs were wounded. Thormod +was also severely wounded, and retired, as all the others did, +back from where there was most danger of life, and some even +fled. Now when the onset began which is called Dag's storm, all +of the king's men who were able to combat went there; but Thormod +did not come into that combat, being unable to fight, both from +his wound and from weariness, but he stood by the side of his +comrade in the ranks, although he could do nothing. There he was +struck by an arrow in the left side; but he broke off the shaft +of the arrow, went out of the battle, and up towards the houses, +where he came to a barn which was a large building. Thormod had +his drawn sword in his hand; and as he went in a man met him, +coming out, and said, "It is very bad there with howling and +screaming; and a great shame it is that brisk young fellows +cannot bear their wounds: it may be that the king's men have done +bravely to-day, but they certainly bear their wounds very ill." + +Thormod asks. "What is thy name?" + +He called himself Kimbe. + +Thormod: "Wast thou in the battle, too?" + +"I was with the bondes, which was the best side," says he. + +"And art thou wounded any way?" says Thormod. + +"A little," said Kimbe. "And hast thou been in the battle too?" + +Thormod replied, "I was with them who had the best." + +"Art thou wounded?" says Kimbe. + +"Not much to signify," replies Thormod. + +As Kimbe saw that Thormod had a gold ring on his arm, he said, +"Thou art certainly a king's man. Give me thy gold ring, and I +will hide thee. The bondes will kill thee if thou fallest in +their way." + +Thormod says, "Take the ring if thou canst get it: I have lost +that which is more worth." + +Kimbe stretched out his hand, and wanted to take the ring; but +Thormod, swinging his sword, cut off his hand; and it is related +that Kimbe behaved himself no better under his wound than those +he had been blaming just before. Kimbe went off, and Thormod sat +down in the barn, and listened to what people were saying. The +conversation was mostly about what each had seen in the battle, +and about the valour of the combatants. Some praised most King +Olaf's courage, and some named others who stood nowise behind him +in bravery. Then Thormod sang these verses: -- + + "Olaf was brave beyond all doubt, -- + At Stiklestad was none so stout; + Spattered with blood, the king, unsparing, + Cheered on his men with deed and daring. + But I have heard that some were there + Who in the fight themselves would spare; + Though, in the arrow-storm, the most + Had perils quite enough to boast." + + + +247. THORMOD'S DEATH. + +Thormod went out, and entered into a chamber apart, in which +there were many wounded men, and with them a woman binding their +wounds. There was fire upon the floor, at which she warmed water +to wash and clean their wounds. Thormod sat himself down beside +the door, and one came in, and another went out, of those who +were busy about the wounded men. One of them turned to Thormod, +looked at him, and said, "Why art thou so dead-pale? Art thou +wounded? Why dost thou not call for the help of the wound- +healers?" Thormod then sang these verses: -- + + "I am not blooming, and the fair + And slender girl loves to care + For blooming youths -- few care for me; + With Fenja's meal I cannot fee. + This is the reason why I feel + The slash and thrust of Danish steel; + And pale and faint, and bent with pain, + Return from yonder battle-plain." + +Then Thormod stood up and went in towards the fire, and stood +there awhile. The young woman said to him, "Go out, man, and +bring in some of the split firewood which lies close beside the +door." He went out and brought in an armful of wood, which he +threw down upon the floor. Then the nurse-girl looked him in the +face, and said, "Dreadfully pale is this man -- why art thou so?" +Then Thormod sang: -- + + "Thou wonderest, sweet sprig, at me, + A man so hideous to see: + Deep wounds but rarely mend the face, + The crippling blow gives little grace. + The arrow-drift o'ertook me, girl, -- + A fine-ground arrow in the whirl + Went through me, and I feel the dart + Sits, lovely girl, too near my heart." + +The girl said, "Let me see thy wound, and I will bind it." +Thereupon Thormod sat down, cast off his clothes, and the girl +saw his wounds, and examined that which was in his side, and felt +that a piece of iron was in it, but could not find where the iron +had gone in. In a stone pot she had stirred together leeks and +other herbs, and boiled them, and gave the wounded men of it to +eat, by which she discovered if the wounds had penetrated into +the belly; for if the wound had gone so deep, it would smell of +leek. She brought some of this now to Thormod, and told him to +eat of it. He replied, "Take it away, I have no appetite for my +broth." Then she took a large pair of tongs, and tried to pull +out the iron; but it sat too fast, and would in no way come, and +as the wound was swelled, little of it stood out to lay hold of. +Now said Thormod, "Cut so deep in that thou canst get at the iron +with the tongs, and give me the tongs and let me pull." She did +as he said. Then Thormod took a gold ring from his hand, gave it +to the nurse-woman, and told her to do with it what she liked. +"It is a good man's gift," said he: "King Olaf gave me the ring +this morning." Then Thormod took the tongs, and pulled the iron +out; but on the iron there was a hook, at which there hung some +morsels of flesh from the heart, -- some white, some red. When +he saw that, he said, "The king has fed us well. I am fat, even +at the heart-roots;" and so saying he leant back, and was dead. +And with this ends what we have to say about Thormod. + + + +248. OF SOME CIRCUMSTANCES OF THE BATTLE. + +King Olaf fell on Wednesday, the 29th of July (A.D. 1030). It +was near mid-day when the two armies met, and the battle began +before half-past one, and before three the king fell. The +darkness continued from about half-past one to three also. +Sigvat the skald speaks thus of the result of the battle: -- + + "The loss was great to England's foes, + When their chief fell beneath the blows + By his own thoughtless people given, -- + When the king's shield in two was riven. + The people's sovereign took the field, + The people clove the sovereign's shield. + Of all the chiefs that bloody day, + Dag only came out of the fray." + +And he composed these: -- + + "Such mighty bonde-power, I ween, + With chiefs or rulers ne'er was seen. + It was the people's mighty power + That struck the king that fatal hour. + When such a king, in such a strife, + By his own people lost his life, + Full many a gallant man must feel + The death-wound from the people's steel." + +The bondes did not spoil the slain upon the field of battle, for +immediately after the battle there came upon many of them who had +been against the king a kind of dread as it were; yet they held +by their evil inclination, for they resolved among themselves +that all who had fallen with the king should not receive the +interment which belongs to good men, but reckoned them all +robbers and outlaws. But the men who had power, and had +relations on the field, cared little for this, but removed their +remains to the churches, and took care of their burial. + + + +249. A MIRACLE ON A BLIND MAN. + +Thorgils Halmason and his son Grim went to the field of battle +towards evening when it was dusk, took King Olaf's corpse up, and +bore it to a little empty houseman's hut which stood on the other +side of their farm. They had light and water with them. Then +they took the clothes off the body, swathed it in a linen cloth, +laid it down in the house, and concealed it under some firewood +so that nobody could see it, even if people came into the hut. +Thereafter they went home again to the farmhouse. A great many +beggars and poor people had followed both armies, who begged for +meat; and the evening after the battle many remained there, and +sought lodging round about in all the houses, great or small. It +is told of a blind man who was poor, that a boy attended him and +led him. They went out around the farm to seek a lodging, and +came to the same empty house, of which the door was so low that +they had almost to creep in. Now when the blind man had come in, +he fumbled about the floor seeking a place where he could lay +himself down. He had a hat on his head, which fell down over his +face when he stooped down. He felt with his hands that there was +moisture on the floor, and he put up his wet hand to raise his +hat, and in doing so put his fingers on his eyes. There came +immediately such an itching in his eyelids, that he wiped the +water with his fingers from his eyes, and went out of the hut, +saying nobody could lie there, it was so wet. When he came out +of the hut he could distinguish his hands, and all that was near +him, as far as things can be distinguished by sight in the +darkness of light; and he went immediately to the farm-house into +the room, and told all the people he had got his sight again, and +could see everything, although many knew he had been blind for a +long time, for he had been there, before, going about among the +houses of the neighbourhood. He said he first got his sight when +he was coming out of a little ruinous hut which was all wet +inside. "I groped in the water," said he, "and rubbed my eyes +with my wet hands." He told where the hut stood. The people who +heard him wondered much at this event, and spoke among themselves +of what it could be that produced it: but Thorgils the peasant +and his son Grim thought they knew how this came to pass; and as +they were much afraid the king's enemies might go there and +search the hut, they went and took the body out of it, and +removed it to a garden, where they concealed it, and then +returned to the farm, and slept there all night. + + + +250. OF THORER HUND. + +The fifth day (Thursday), Thorer Hund came down the valley of +Veradal to Stiklestad; and many people, both chiefs and bondes, +accompanied him. The field of battle was still being cleared, +and people were carrying away the bodies of their friends and +relations, and were giving the necessary help to such of the +wounded as they wished to save; but many had died since the +battle. Thorer Hund went to where the king had fallen, and +searched for his body; but not finding it, he inquired if any one +could tell him what had become of the corpse, but nobody could +tell him where it was. Then he asked the bonde Thorgils, who +said, "I was not in the battle, and knew little of what took +place there; but many reports are abroad, and among others that +King Olaf has been seen in the night up at Staf, and a troop of +people with him: but if he fell in the battle, your men must +have concealed him in some hole, or under some stone-heap." Now +although Thorer Hund knew for certain that the king had fallen, +many allowed themselves to believe, and to spread abroad the +report, that the king had escaped from the battle, and would in a +short time come again upon them with an army. Then Thorer went +to his ships, and sailed down the fjord, and the bonde-army +dispersed, carrying with them all the wounded men who could bear +to be removed. + + + +251. OF KING OLAF'S BODY. + +Thorgils Halmason and his son Grim had King Olaf's body, and were +anxious about preserving it from falling into the hands of the +king's enemies, and being ill-treated; for they heard the bondes +speaking about burning it, or sinking it in the sea. The father +and son had seen a clear light burning at night over the spot on +the battlefield where King Olaf's body lay, and since, while they +concealed it, they had always seen at night a light burning over +the corpse; therefore they were afraid the king's enemies might +seek the body where this signal was visible. They hastened, +therefore, to take the body to a place where it would be safe. +Thorgils and his son accordingly made a coffin, which they +adorned as well as they could, and laid the king's body in it; +and afterwards made another coffin in which they laid stones and +straw, about as much as the weight of a man, and carefully closed +the coffins. As soon as the whole bonde-army had left +Stiklestad, Thorgils and his son made themselves ready, got a +large rowing-boat, and took with them seven or eight men, who +were all Thorgil's relations or friends, and privately took the +coffin with the king's body down to the boat, and set it under +the foot-boards. They had also with them the coffin containing +the stones, and placed it in the boat where all could see it; and +then went down the fjord with a good opportunity of wind and +weather, and arrived in the dusk of the evening at Nidaros, where +they brought up at the king's pier. Then Thorgils sent some of +his men up to the town to Bishop Sigurd, to say that they were +come with the king's body. As soon as the bishop heard this +news, he sent his men down to the pier, and they took a small +rowing-boat, came alongside of Thorgil's ship, and demanded the +king's body. Thorgils and his people then took the coffin which +stood in view, and bore it into the boat; and the bishop's men +rowed out into the fjord, and sank the coffin in the sea. It was +now quite dark. Thorgils and his people now rowed up into the +river past the town, and landed at a place called Saurhlid, above +the town. Then they carried the king's body to an empty house +standing at a distance from other houses, and watched over it for +the night, while Thorgils went down to the town, where he spoke +with some of the best friends of King Olaf, and asked them if +they would take charge of the king's body; but none of them dared +to do so. Then Thorgils and his men went with the body higher up +the river, buried it in a sand-hill on the banks, and levelled +all around it so that no one could observe that people had been +at work there. They were ready with all this before break of +day, when they returned to their vessel, went immediately out of +the river, and proceeded on their way home to Stiklestad. + + + +252. OF THE BEGINNING OF KING SVEIN ALFIFASON'S GOVERNMENT. + +Svein, a son of King Canute, and of Alfifa, a daughter of Earl +Alfrin, had been appointed to govern Jomsborg in Vindland. There +came a message to him from his father King Canute, that he should +come to Denmark; and likewise that afterwards he should proceed +to Norway, and take that kingdom under his charge, and assume, at +the same time, the title of king of Norway. Svein repaired to +Denmark, and took many people with him from thence, and also Earl +Harald and many other people of consequence attended him. +Thorarin Loftunga speaks of this in the song he composed about +King Svein, called the "Glelogn Song": -- + + "'Tis told by fame, + How grandly came + The Danes to tend + Their young king Svein. + Grandest was he, + That all could see; + Then, one by one, + Each following man + More splendour wore + Than him before." + +Then Svein proceeded to Norway, and his mother Alfifa was with +him; and he was taken to be king at every Law-thing in the +country. He had already come as far as Viken at the time the +battle was fought at Stiklestad, and King Olaf fell. Svein +continued his journey until he came north, in autumn, to the +Throndhjem country; and there, as elsewhere, he was received as +king. + + + +253. OF KING SVEIN'S LAWS. + +King Svein introduced new laws in many respects into the country, +partly after those which were in Denmark, and in part much more +severe. No man must leave the country without the king's +permission; or if he did, his property fell to the king. Whoever +killed a man outright, should forfeit all his land and movables. +If any one was banished the country, and all heritage fell to +him, the king took his inheritance. At Yule every man should pay +the king a meal of malt from every harvest steading, and a leg of +a three-year old ox, which was called a friendly gift, together +with a spand of butter; and every house-wife a rock full of +unspun lint, as thick as one could span with the longest fingers +of the hand. The bondes were bound to build all the houses the +king required upon his farms. Of every seven males one should be +taken for the service of war, and reckoning from the fifth year +of age; and the outfit of ships should be reckoned in the same +proportion. Every man who rowed upon the sea to fish should pay +the king five fish as a tax, for the land defence, wherever he +might come from. Every ship that went out of the country should +have stowage reserved open for the king in the middle of the +ship. Every man, foreigner or native, who went to Iceland, +should pay a tax to the king. And to all this was added, that +Danes should enjoy so much consideration in Norway, that one +witness of them should invalidate ten of Northmen (1). + +When these laws were promulgated the minds of the people were +instantly raised against them, and murmurs were heard among them. +They who had not taken part against King Olaf said, "Now take +your reward and friendship from the Canute race, ye men of the +interior Throndhjem who fought against King Olaf, and deprived +him of his kingdom. Ye were promised peace and justice, and now +ye have got oppression and slavery for your great treachery and +crime." Nor was it very easy to contradict them, as all men saw +how miserable the change had been. But people had not the +boldness to make an insurrection against King Svein, principally +because many had given King Canute their sons or other near +relations as hostages; and also because no one appeared as leader +of an insurrection. They very soon, however, complained of King +Svein; and his mother Alfifa got much of the blame of all that +was against their desire. Then the truth, with regard to Olaf, +became evident to many. + + +ENDNOTES: +(1) This may probably have referred not to witnesses of an act, + but to the class of witnesses in the jurisprudence of the + Middle Ages called compurgators, who testified not the fact, + but their confidence in the statements of the accused; and + from which, possibly, our English bail for offenders arose. + -- L. + + + +254. OF KING OLAF'S SANCTITY. + +This winter (A.D. 1031) many in the Throndhjem land began to +declare that Olaf was in reality a holy man, and his sanctity was +confirmed by many miracles. Many began to make promises and +prayers to King Olaf in the matters in which they thought they +required help, and many found great benefit from these +invocations. Some in respect of health, others of a journey, or +other circumstances in which such help seemed needful. + + + +255. OF EINAR TAMBASKELFER. + +Einar Tambaskelfer was come home from England to his farm, and +had the fiefs which King Canute had given him when they met in +Throndhjem, and which were almost an earldom. Einar had not been +in the strife against King Olaf, and congratulated himself upon +it. He remembered that King Canute had promised him the earldom +over Norway, and at the same time remembered that King Canute had +not kept his promise. He was accordingly the first great person +who looked upon King Olaf as a saint. + + + +256. OF THE SONS OF ARNE. + +Fin Arnason remained but a short time at Eggja with his brother +Kalf; for he was in the highest degree ill-pleased that Kalf had +been in the battle against King Olaf, and always made his brother +the bitterest reproaches on this account. Thorberg Arnason was +much more temperate in his discourse than Fin; but yet he +hastened away, and went home to his farm. Kalf gave the two +brothers a good long-ship, with full rigging and other +necessaries, and a good retinue. Therefore they went home to +their farms, and sat quietly at home. Arne Arnason lay long ill +of his wounds, but got well at last without injury of any limb, +and in winter he proceeded south to his farm. All the brothers +made their peace with King Svein, and sat themselves quietly down +in their homes. + + + +257. BISHOP SIGURD'S FLIGHT. + +The summer after (A.D. 1031) there was much talk about King +Olaf's sanctity, and there was a great alteration in the +expressions of all people concerning him. There were many who +now believed that King Olaf must be a saint, even among those who +had persecuted him with the greatest animosity, and would never +in their conversation allow truth or justice in his favour. +People began then to turn their reproaches against the men who +had principally excited opposition to the king; and on this +account Bishop Sigurd in particular was accused. He got so many +enemies, that he found it most advisable to go over to England to +King Canute. Then the Throndhjem people sent men with a verbal +message to the Uplands, to Bishop Grimkel, desiring him to come +north to Throndhjem. King Olaf had sent Bishop Grimkel back to +Norway when he went east into Russia, and since that time Grimkel +had been in the Uplands. When the message came to the bishop he +made ready to go, and it contributed much to this journey that +the bishop considered it as true what was told of King Olaf's +miracles and sanctity. + + + +258. KING OLAF THE SAINT'S REMAINS DISINTERRED. + +Bishop Grimkel went to Einar Tambaskelfer, who received him +joyfully. They talked over many things, and, among others, of +the important events which had taken place in the country; and +concerning these they were perfectly agreed. Then the bishop +proceeded to the town (Nidaros), and was well received by all the +community. He inquired particularly concerning the miracles of +King Olaf that were reported, and received satisfactory accounts +of them. Thereupon the bishop sent a verbal message to +Stiklestad to Thorgils and his son Grim, inviting them to come to +the town to him. They did not decline the invitation, but set +out on the road immediately, and came to the town and to the +bishop. They related to him all the signs that had presented +themselves to them, and also where they had deposited the king"s +body. The bishop sent a message to Einar Tambaskelfer, who came +to the town. Then the bishop and Einar had an audience of the +king and Alfifa, in which they asked the king's leave to have +King Olaf's body taken up out of the earth. The king gave his +permission, and told the bishop to do as he pleased in the +matter. At that time there were a great many people in the town. +The bishop, Einar, and some men with them, went to the place +where the king's body was buried, and had the place dug; but the +coffin had already raised itself almost to the surface of the +earth. It was then the opinion of many that the bishop should +proceed to have the king buried in the earth at Clement's church; +and it was so done. Twelve months and five days (Aug. 3, A.D. +1031), after King Olaf's death his holy remains were dug up, and +the coffin had raised itself almost entirely to the surface of +the earth; and the coffin appeared quite new, as if it had but +lately been made. When Bishop Grimkel came to King Olaf's opened +coffin, there was a delightful and fresh smell. Thereupon the +bishop uncovered the king's face, and his appearance was in no +respect altered, and his cheeks were as red as if he had but just +fallen asleep. The men who had seen King Olaf when he fell +remarked, also, that his hair and nails had grown as much as if +he had lived on the earth all the time that had passed since his +fall. Thereupon King Svein, and all the chiefs who were at the +place, went out to see King Olaf's body. Then said Alfifa, +"People buried in sand rot very slowly, and it would not have +been so if he had been buried in earth." Afterwards the bishop +took scissors, clipped the king's hair, and arranged his beard; +for he had had a long beard, according to the fashion of that +time. Then said the bishop to the king and Alfifa, "Now the +king's hair and beard are such as when he gave up the ghost, and +it has grown as much as ye see has been cut off." Alfifa +answers, "I will believe in the sanctity of his hair, if it will +not burn in the fire; but I have often seen men's hair whole and +undamaged after lying longer in the earth than this man's." Then +the bishop had live coals put into a pan, blessed it, cast +incense upon it, and then laid King Olaf's hair on the fire. +When all the incense was burnt the bishop took the hair out of +the fire, and showed the king and the other chiefs that it was +not consumed. Now Alfifa asked that the hair should be laid upon +unconsecrated fire; but Einar Tambaskelfer told her to be silent, +and gave her many severe reproaches for her unbelief. After the +bishop's recognition, with the king's approbation and the +decision of the Thing, it was determined that King Olaf should be +considered a man truly holy; whereupon his body was transported +into Clement's church, and a place was prepared for it near the +high altar. The coffin was covered with costly cloth, and stood +under a gold embroidered tent. Many kinds of miracles were soon +wrought by King Olaf's holy remains. + + + +259. OF KING OLAF'S MIRACLES. + +In the sand-hill where King Olaf's body had lain on the ground a +beautiful spring of water came up and many human ailments and +infirmities were cured by its waters. Things were put in order +around it, and the water ever since has been carefully preserved. +There was first a chapel built, and an altar consecrated, where +the king's body had lain; but now Christ's church stands upon the +spot. Archbishop Eystein had a high altar raised upon the spot +where the king's grave had been, when he erected the great temple +which now stands there; and it is the same spot on which the +altar of the old Christ church had stood. It is said that Olaf's +church stands on the spot on which the empty house had stood in +which King Olaf's body had been laid for the night. The place +over which the holy remains of King Olaf were carried up from the +vessel is now called Olaf's Road, and is now in the middle of the +town. The bishop adorned King Olaf's holy remains, and cut his +nails and hair; for both grew as if he had still been alive. So +says Sigvat the skald: -- + + "I lie not, when I say the king + Seemed as alive in every thing: + His nails, his yellow hair still growing, + And round his ruddy cheek still flowing, + As when, to please the Russian queen, + His yellow locks adorned were seen; + Or to the blind he cured he gave + A tress, their precious sight to save." + +Thorarin Loftunga also composed a song upon Svein Alfifason, +called the "Glelogn Song", in which are these verses: -- + + "Svein, king of all, + In Olaf's hall + Now sits on high; + And Olaf's eye + Looks down from heaven, + Where it is given + To him to dwell: + Or here in cell, + As heavenly saint, + To heal men's plaint, + May our gold-giver + Live here for ever! + + "King Olaf there + To hold a share + On earth prepared, + Nor labour spared + A seat to win + From heaven's great King; + Which he has won + Next God's own Son. + + "His holy form, + Untouched by worm, + Lies at this day + Where good men pray, + And nails and hair + Grow fresh and fair; + His cheek is red, + His flesh not dead. + + "Around his bier, + Good people hear + The small bells ring + Over the king, + Or great bell toll; + And living soul + Not one can tell + Who tolls the bell. + + "Tapers up there, + (Which Christ holds dear,) + By day and night + The altar light: + Olaf did so, + And all men know + In heaven he + From sin sits free. + + "And crowds do come, + The deaf and dumb, + Cripple and blind, + Sick of all kind, + Cured to be + On bended knee; + And off the ground + Rise whole and sound. + + "To Olaf pray + To eke thy day, + To save thy land + From spoiler's hand. + God's man is he + To deal to thee + Good crops and peace; + Let not prayer cease. + + "Book-prayers prevail, + If, nail for nail (1), + Thou tellest on, + Forgetting none." + +Thorarin Loftunga was himself with King Svein, and heard these +great testimonials of King Olaf's holiness, that people, by the +heavenly power, could hear a sound over his holy remains as if +bells were ringing, and that candles were lighted of themselves +upon the altar as by a heavenly fire. But when Thorarin says +that a multitude of lame, and blind, and other sick, who came to +the holy Olaf, went back cured, he means nothing more than that +there were a vast number of persons who at the beginning of King +Olaf's miraculous working regained their health. King Olaf's +greatest miracles are clearly written down, although they +occurred somewhat later. + + +ENDNOTES: +(1) Before the entrance of the temples or churches were posts + called Ondveigis-sulor, with nails called Rigin-naglar -- + the gods' nails -- either for ornament, or, as Schoning + suggests, to assist the people in reckoning weeks, months, + festivals, and in reckoning or keeping tale of prayers + repeated, and to recall them to memory, in the same way as + beads are used still by the common people in Catholic + countries for the same purpose. -- L. + + + +260. OF KING OLAF'S AGE AND REIGN. + +It is reckoned by those who have kept an exact account, that Olaf +the Saint was king of Norway for fifteen years from the time Earl +Svein left the country; but he had received the title of king +from the people of the Uplands the winter before. Sigvat the +skald tells this: -- + + "For fifteen winters o'er the land + King Olaf held the chief command, + Before he fell up in the North: + His fall made known to us his worth. + No worthier prince before his day + In our North land e'er held the sway, + Too short he held it for our good; + All men wish now that he had stood." + +Saint Olaf was thirty-five years old when he fell, according to +what Are Frode the priest says, and he had been in twenty pitched +battles. So says Sigvat the skald: -- + + "Some leaders trust in God -- some not; + Even so their men; but well I wot + God-fearing Olaf fought and won + Twenty pitched battles, one by one, + And always placed upon his right + His Christian men in a hard fight. + May God be merciful, I pray, + To him -- for he ne'er shunned his fray." + +We have now related a part of King Olaf's story, namely, the +events which took place while he ruled over Norway; also his +death, and how his holiness was manifested. Now shall we not +neglect to mention what it was that most advanced his honour. +This was his miracles; but these will come to be treated of +afterwards in this book. + + + +261. OF THE THRONDHJEM PEOPLE. + +King Svein, the son of Canute the Great, ruled over Norway for +some years; but was a child both in age and understanding. His +mother Alfifa had most sway in the country; and the people of the +country were her great enemies, both then and ever since. Danish +people had a great superiority given them within the country, to +the great dissatisfaction of the people; and when conversation +turned that way, the people of the rest of Norway accused the +Throndhjem people of having principally occasioned King Olaf the +Holy's fall, and also that the men of Norway were subject, +through them, to the ill government by which oppression and +slavery had come upon all the people, both great and small; +indeed upon the whole community. They insisted that it was the +duty of the Throndhjem people to attempt opposition and +insurrection, and thus relieve the country from such tyranny; +and, in the opinion of the common people, Throndhjem was also +the chief seat of the strength of Norway at that time, both on +account of the chiefs and of the population of that quarter. +When the Throndhjem people heard these remarks of their +countrymen, they could not deny that there was much truth in +them, and that in depriving King Olaf of life and land they had +committed a great crime, and at the same time the misdeed had +been ill paid. The chiefs began to hold consultations and +conferences with each other, and the leader of these was Einar +Tambaskelfer. It was likewise the case with Kalf Arnason, who +began to find into what errors he had been drawn by King Canute's +persuasion. All the promises which King Canute had made to Kalf +had been broken; for he had promised him the earldom and the +highest authority in Norway: and although Kalf had been the +leader in the battle against King Olaf, and had deprived him of +his life and kingdom, Kalf had not got any higher dignity than he +had before. He felt that he had been deceived, and therefore +messages passed between the brothers Kalf, Fin, Thorberg, and +Arne, and they renewed their family friendship. + + + +262. OF KING SVEIN'S LEVY. + +When King Svein had been three years in Norway (A.D. 1031-33), +the news was received that a force was assembled in the western +countries, under a chief who called himself Trygve, and gave out +that he was a son of Olaf Trygvason and Queen Gyda of England. +Now when King Svein heard that foreign troops had come to the +country, he ordered out the people on a levy in the north, and +the most of the lendermen hastened to him; but Einar Tambaskelfer +remained at home, and would not go out with King Svein. When +King Svein's order came to Kalf Arnason at Eggja, that he should +go out on a levy with King Svein, he took a twenty-benched ship +which he owned, went on board with his house-servants, and in all +haste proceeded out of the fjord, without waiting for King Svein, +sailed southwards to More, and continued his voyage south until +he came to Giske to his brother Thorberg. Then all the brothers, +the sons of Arne, held a meeting, and consulted with each other. +After this Kalf returned to the north again; but when he came to +Frekeysund, King Svein was lying in the sound before him. When +Kalf came rowing from the south into the sound they hailed each +other, and the king's men ordered Kalf to bring up with his +vessel, and follow the king for the defence of the country. Kalf +replies, "I have done enough, if not too much, when I fought +against my own countrymen to increase the power of the Canute +family." Thereupon Kalf rowed away to the north until he came +home to Eggja. None of these Arnasons appeared at this levy to +accompany the king. He steered with his fleet southwards along +the land; but as he could not hear the least news of any fleet +having come from the west, he steered south to Rogaland, and all +the way to Agder; for many guessed that Trygve would first make +his attempt on Viken, because his forefathers had been there, and +had most of their strength from that quarter, and he had himself +great strength by family connection there. + + + +263. KING TRYGVE OLAFSON'S FALL. + +When Trygve came from the west he landed first on the coast of +Hordaland, and when he heard King Svein had gone south he went +the same way to Rogaland. As soon as Svein got the intelligence +that Trygve had come from the west he returned, and steered north +with his fleet; and both fleets met within Bokn in Soknarsund, +not far from the place where Erling Skjalgson fell. The battle, +which took place on a Sunday, was great and severe. People tell +that Trygve threw spears with both hands at once. "So my +father," said he, "taught me to celebrate mass." His enemies had +said that he was the son of a priest; but the praise must be +allowed him that he showed himself more like a son of King Olaf +Trygvason, for this Trygve was a slaughtering man. In this +battle King Trygve fell, and many of his men with him; but some +fled, and some received quarter and their lives. It is thus +related in the ballad of Trygve: -- + + "Trygve comes from the northern coast, + King Svein turns round with all his host; + To meet and fight, they both prepare, + And where they met grim death was there. + From the sharp strife I was not far, -- + I heard the din and the clang of war; + And the Hordaland men at last gave way, + And their leader fell, and they lost the day." + +This battle is also told of in the ballad about King Svein, thus: +-- + + "My girl! it was a Sunday morn, + And many a man ne'er saw its eve, + Though ale and leeks by old wives borne + The bruised and wounded did relieve. + 'Twas Sunday morn, when Svein calls out, + `Stem to stem your vessels bind;' + The raven a mid-day feast smells out, + And he comes croaking up the wind." + +After this battle King Svein ruled the country for some time, and +there was peace in the land. The winter after it (A.D. 1034) he +passed in the south parts of the country. + + + +264. OF THE COUNSELS OF EINAR TAMBASKELFER AND KALF ARNASON. + +Einar Tambaskelfer and Kalf Arnason had this winter meetings and +consultations between themselves in the merchant town (1). Then +there came a messenger from King Canute to Kalf Arnason, with a +message to send him three dozen axes, which must be chosen and +good. Kalf replies, "I will send no axes to King Canute. Tell +him I will bring his son Svein so many, that he shall not think +he is in want of any." + + +ENDNOTES: +(1) Nidaros, or Throndhjem, is usually called merely the + merchant town. -- L. + + + +265. OF EINAR TAMBASKELFER AND KALF ARNASON'S JOURNEY. + +Early in spring (A.D. 1034) Einar Tambaskelfer and Kalf Arnason +made themselves ready for a journey, with a great retinue of the +best and most select men that could be found in the Throndhjem +country. They went in spring eastward over the ridge of the +country to Jamtaland, from thence to Helsingjaland, and came to +Svithjod, where they procured ships, with which in summer they +proceeded east to Russia, and came in autumn to Ladoga. They +sent men up to Novgorod to King Jarisleif, with the errand that +they offered Magnus, the son of King Olaf the Saint, to take him +with them, follow him to Norway, and give him assistance to +attain his father's heritage and be made king over the country. +When this message came to King Jarisleif he held a consultation +with the queen and some chiefs, and they all resolved unanimously +to send a message to the Northmen, and ask them to come to King +Jarisleif and Magnus; for which journey safe conduct was given +them. When they came to Novgorod it was settled among them that +the Northmen who had come there should become Magnus's men, and +be his subjects; and to this Kalf and the other men who had been +against King Olaf at Stiklestad were solemnly bound by oath. On +the other hand, King Magnus promised them, under oath, secure +peace and full reconciliation; and that he would be true and +faithful to them all when he got the dominions and kingdom of +Norway. He was to become Kalf Arnason's foster-son; and Kalf +should be bound to do all that Magnus might think necessary for +extending his dominion, and making it more independent than +formerly. + + + +SAGA OF MAGNUS THE GOOD. + + +PRELIMINARY REMARKS. + +Magnus reigned from A.D. 1035 to 1047, when he died. During the +last year of his reign his half-brother Harald Sigurdson was his +co-regent. + +The history of Magnus is treated in "Agrip.", ch. 28-32; in +"Fagrskinna", ch. 119-146; in "Fornmannasogur", part vi., and in +"Knytlinga Saga". + +The skalds quoted in this saga are: Arnor the earls' skald +(Arnor Jarlaskald), Sigvat, Thjodulf, Bjarne Gullbrarskald, +Thorgeir Flek, Od Kikinaskald. + + + +1. MAGNUS OLAFSON'S JOURNEY FROM THE WEST. + +After Yule Magnus Olafson began his journey from the East from +Novgorod to Ladoga, where he rigged out his ships as soon as the +ice was loosened in spring (A.D. 1035). Arnor, the earls' skald, +tells of this in the poem on Magnus: -- + + "It is no loose report that he, + Who will command on land and sea, + In blood will make his foeman feel + Olaf's sword Hneiter's sharp blue steel. + This generous youth, who scatters gold, + Norway's brave son, but ten years old, + Is rigging ships in Russia's lake, + His crown, with friend's support, to take." + +In spring Magnus sailed from the East to Svithjod. So says +Arnor: -- + + "The young sword-stainer called a Thing, + Where all his men should meet their king: + Heroes who find the eagle food + Before their lord in arms stood. + And now the curved plank of the bow + Cleaves the blue sea; the ocean-plough + By grey winds driven across the main, + Reaches Sigtuna's grassy plain." + +Here it is related that when King Magnus and his fellow- +travellers sailed from the East to Svithjod, they brought up at +Sigtuna. Emund Olafson was then king in Svithjod. Queen Astrid, +who had been married to King Olaf the Saint, was also there. She +received very gladly and well her stepson King Magnus, and +summoned immediately a numerous Thing of Swedes at a place called +Hangtar. At the Thing Queen Astrid spoke these words: "Here is +come to us a son of Olaf the Saint, called Magnus, who intends to +make an expedition to Norway to seek his father's heritage. It +is my great duty to give him aid towards this expedition; for he +is my stepson, as is well known to all, both Swedes and +Norwegians. Neither shall he want men or money, in so far as I +can procure them or have influence, in order that his strength +may be as great as possible; and all the men who will support +this cause of his shall have my fullest friendship; and I would +have it known that I intend myself to go with him on this +attempt, that all may see I will spare nothing that is in my +power to help him." She spoke long and cleverly in this strain; +but when she had ended many replied thus: "The Swedes made no +honourable progress in Norway when they followed King Olaf his +father, and now no better success is to be expected, as this man +is but in years of boyhood; and therefore we have little +inclination for this expedition." Astrid replies, "All men who +wish to be thought of true courage must not be deterred by such +considerations. If any have lost connections at the side of King +Olaf, or been themselves wounded, now is the time to show a man's +heart and courage, and go to Norway to take vengeance." Astrid +succeeded so far with words and encouragement that many men +determined to go with her, and follow King Magnus to Norway. +Sigvat the skald speaks of this:-- + + "Now Astrtd, Olaf's widowed Queen, -- + She who so many a change had seen, -- + Took all the gifts of happier days, + Jewels and rings, all she could raise, + And at a Thing at Hangrar, where + The Swedes were numerous, did declare + What Olaf's son proposed to do, + And brought her gifts -- their pay -- in view. + + "And with the Swedes no wiser plan, + To bring out every brave bold man, + Could have been found, had Magnus been + The son himself of the good queen. + With help of Christ, she hoped to bring + Magnus to be the land's sole king, + As Harald was, who in his day + Obtained o'er all the upper sway. + + "And glad are we so well she sped, -- + The people's friend is now their head; + And good King Magnus always shows + How much be to Queen Astrid owes. + Such stepmothers as this good queen + In truth are very rarely seen; + And to this noble woman's praise + The skald with joy his song will raise." + +Thiodolf the skald also says in his song of Magnus: -- + + "When thy brave ship left the land, + The bending yard could scarce withstand + The fury of the whistling gale, + That split thy many-coloured sail; + And many a stout ship, tempest-tost, + Was in that howling storm lost + That brought them safe to Sigtuna's shore, + Far from the sound of ocean's roar." + + + +2. MAGNUS'S EXPEDITION FROM SVITHJOD. + +King Magnus set out on his journey from Sigtuna with a great +force, which he had gathered in Svithjod. They proceeded through +Svithjod on foot to Helsingjaland. So says Arnor, the earl's +skald: -- + + "And many a dark-red Swedish shield + Marched with thee from the Swedish field. + The country people crowded in, + To help Saint Olaf's son to win; + And chosen men by thee were led, + Men who have stained the wolf's tongue red. + Each milk-white shield and polished spear + Came to a splendid gathering there." + +Magnus Olafson went from the East through Jamtaland over the +keel-ridge of the country and came down upon the Throndhjem +district, where all men welcomed the king with joy. But no +sooner did the men of King Svein, the son of Alfifa, hear that +King Magnus Olafson was come to the country, than they fled on +all sides and concealed themselves, so that no opposition was +made to King Magnus; for King Svein was in the south part of the +country. So says Arnor, the earls' skald: -- + + "He who the eagle's talons stains + Rushed from the East on Throndhjem's plains; + The terror of his plumed helm + Drove his pale foemen from the realm. + The lightning of thy eye so near, + Great king! thy foemen could not bear, + Scattered they fled -- their only care + If thou their wretched lives wilt spare." + + + +3. MAGNUS MADE KING. + +Magnus Olafson advanced to the town (Nidaros), where he was +joyfully received. He then summoned the people to the Eyra- +thing (1); and when the bondes met at the Thing, Magnus was taken +to be king over the whole land, as far as his father Olaf had +possessed it. Then the king selected a court, and named +lendermen, and placed bailiffs and officers in all domains and +offices. Immediately after harvest King Magnus ordered a levy +through all Throndhjem land, and he collected men readily; and +thereafter he proceeded southwards along the coast. + + +ENDNOTES: +(1) Eyra Thing, held on the ayr of the river Nid, that is, on + the spit of sand, still called an ayr in the north of + Scotland, dividing a lake, pond, or river-mouth from the + sea. At the Thing held here the kings of Norway were chosen + and proclaimed. It was held to be the proper Thing for + settling disputes between kings in Norway. -- L. + + + +4. KING SVEIN'S FLIGHT. + +King Svein Alfifason was staying in South Hordaland when he heard +this news of war. He immediately sent out war-tokens to four +different quarters, summoned the bondes to him, and made it known +to all that they should join him with men and ships to defend the +country. All the men who were in the neighbourhood of the king +presented themselves; and the king formed a Thing, at which in a +speech he set forth his business, and said he would advance +against Magnus O1afson and have a battle with him, if the bondes +would aid his cause. The king's speech was not very long, and +was not received with much approbation by the bondes. Afterwards +the Danish chiefs who were about the king made long and clever +speeches; but the bondes then took up the word, and answered +them; and although many said they would follow Svein, and fight +on his side, some refused to do so bluntly, some were altogether +silent, and some declared they would join King Magnus as soon as +they had an opportunity. Then King Svein says, "Methinks very +few of the bondes to whom we sent a message have appeared here; +and of those who have come, and tell us to our face that they +will join King Magnus as soon as they can, we shall have as +little benefit as of those who say they will sit at home quietly. +It is the same with those who say nothing at all. But as to +those who promise to help us, there are not more than every other +man; and that force will avail us little against King Magnus. It +is my counsel, therefore, that we do not trust to these bondes; +but let us rather go to the land where all the people are sure +and true to us, and where we will obtain forces to conquer this +country again." As soon as the king had made known this +resolution all his men followed it, turned their ship's bows, and +hoisted sail. King Svein sailed eastward along the land, and +then set right over to Denmark without delay, and Hardaknut +received his brother Svein very kindly. At their first meeting +Hardaknut offered King Svein to divide the kingdom of Denmark +with him, which offer King Svein accepted. + + + +5. KING MAGNUS'S JOURNEY TO NORWAY. + +In autumn (A.D. 1035) King Magnus proceeded eastward to the end +of the country, and was received as king throughout the whole +land, and the country people were rejoiced at his arrival. + + + +6. DEATH OF KING CANUTE THE GREAT AND HIS SON SVEIN. + +King Svein, Canute's son, went to Denmark, as before related, and +took part in the government with his brother Hardaknut. In the +same autumn King Canute the Great died in England, the 13th +November, forty years old, and was buried at Winchester. He had +been king of Denmark for twenty-seven years, and over Denmark and +England together twenty-four years, and also over Norway for +seven years. King Canute's son Harald was then made king in +England. The same winter (A.D. 1036) King Svein, Alfifa's son, +died in Denmark. Thiodolf the skald made these lines concerning +King Magnus: -- + + "Through Sweden's dirty roads the throng + Followed the king in spearmen strong. + Svein doth fly, in truth afraid, + And partly by his men betrayed; + Flying to Denmark o'er the sea, + He leaves the land quite clear to thee." + +Bjarne Gullbrarskald composed the following lines concerning Kalf +Arnason: -- + + "By thee the kings got each his own, -- + Magnus by thee got Norway's throne; + And Svein in Denmark got a seat, + When out of Norway he was beat. + Kalf! It was you who showed the way + To our young king, the battle-lover, -- + From Russia to his father's sway + You showed the way, and brought him over." + +King Magnus ruled over Norway this winter (A.D. 1036), and +Hardaknut over Denmark. + + + +7. RECONCILIATION BETWEEN HARDAKNUT AND KING MAGNUS. + +The following spring (A.D. 1036) the kings on both sides ordered +out a levy, and the news was that they would have a battle at the +Gaut river; but when the two armies approached each other, the +lendermen in the one army sent messengers to their connections +and friends in the other; and it came to a proposal for a +reconciliation between the two kings, especially as, from both +kings being but young and childish, some powerful men, who had +been chosen in each of the countries for that purpose, had the +rule of the country on their account. It thus was brought about +that there was a friendly meeting between the kings, and in this +meeting a peace was proposed; and the peace was to be a brotherly +union under oath to keep the peace towards each other to the end +of their lives; and if one of them should die without leaving a +son, the longest liver should succeed to the whole land and +people. Twelve of the principal men in each kingdom swore to the +kings that this treaty should be observed, so long as any one of +them was in life. Then the kings separated, and each returned +home to his kingdom; and the treaty was kept as long as both +lived. + + + +8. OF QUEEN ASTRID. + +Queen Astrid, who had been married to King Olaf the Saint, came +to Norway with King Magnus her stepson, as before related, and +was held by him deservedly in great honour and esteem. Then came +also Alfhild, King Magnus's mother, to the court, and the king +received her with the greatest affection, and showed her great +respect. But it went with Alfhild, as it does with many who come +to power and honour, that pride keeps pace with promotion. She +was ill pleased that Queen Astrid was treated with more respect, +had a higher seat, and more attention. Alfhild wanted to have a +seat next to the king, but Astrid called Alfhild her slave-woman, +as indeed she had formerly been when Astrid was queen of Norway +and King Olaf ruled the land, and therefore would on no account +let her have a seat beside her, and they could not lodge in the +same house. + + + +9. OF SIGVAT THE SKALD. + +Sigvat the skald had gone to Rome, where he was at the time of +the battle of Stiklestad. + +He was on his way back from the South when he heard tidings of +King O1af's fall, which gave him great grief. He then sang +these lines: -- + + "One morning early on a hill, + The misty town asleep and still, + Wandering I thought upon the fields. + Strewed o'er with broken mail and shields, + Where our king fell, -- our kind good king, + Where now his happy youthful spring? + My father too! -- for Thord was then + One of the good king's chosen men." + +One day Sigvat went through a village, and heard a husband +lamenting grievously over the loss of his wife, striking his +breast, tearing his clothes, weeping bitterly, and saying he +wanted to die; and Sigvat sang these lines: -- + + "This poor man mourns a much-loved wife, + Gladly would he be quit of life. + Must love be paid for by our grief? + The price seems great for joy so brief. + But the brave man who knows no fear + Drops for his king a silent tear, + And feels, perhaps, his loss as deep + As those who clamour when they weep." + +Sigvat came home to Norway to the Throndhjem country, where he +had a farm and children. He came from the South along the coast +in a merchant vessel, and as they lay in Hillarsund they saw a +great many ravens flying about. Then Sigvat said: -- + + "I see here many a croaking raven + Flying about the well-known haven: + When Olaf's ship was floating here, + They knew that food for them was near; + When Olaf's ship lay here wind-bound, + Oft screamed the erne o'er Hillar sound, + Impatient for the expected prey, + And wont to follow to the fray." + +When Sigvat came north to the town of Throndhjem King Svein was +there before him. He invited Sigvat to stay with him, as Sigvat +had formerly been with his father King Canute the Great; but +Sigvat said he would first go home to his farm. One day, as +Sigvat was walking in the street, he saw the king's men at play, +and he sang: -- + + "One day before I passed this way, + When the king's guards were at their play, + Something there was -- I need not tell -- + That made me pale, and feel unwell. + Perhaps it was I thought, just then, + How noble Olaf with his men, + In former days, I oft have seen + In manly games upon this green." + +Sigvat then went to his farm; and as he heard that many men +upbraided him with having deserted King Olaf, he made these +verses: -- + + "May Christ condemn me still to burn + In quenchless fire, if I did turn, + And leave King Olaf in his need, -- + My soul is free from such base deed. + I was at Rome, as men know well + Who saw me there, and who can tell + That there in danger I was then: + The truth I need not hide from men." + +Sigvat was ill at ease in his home. One day he went out and +sang: -- + + "While Olaf lived, how smiled the land! + Mountain and cliff, and pebbly strand. + All Norway then, so fresh, so gay, + On land or sea, where oft I lay. + But now to me all seems so dready, + All black and dull -- of life I'm weary; + Cheerless to-day, cheerless to-morrow -- + Here in the North we have great sorrow." + +Early in winter Sigvat went westward over the ridge of the +country to Jamtaland, and onwards to Helsingjaland, and came to +Svithjod. He went immediately to Queen Astrid, and was with her +a long time, and was a welcome guest. He was also with her +brother King Emund, and received from him ten marks of proved +silver, as is related in the song of Canute. Sigvat always +inquired of the merchants who traded to Novgorod if they could +tell him any news of Magnus Olafson. Sigvat composed these lines +at that time: -- + + "I ask the merchant oft who drives + His trade to Russia, `How he thrives, + Our noble prince? How lives he there? + And still good news -- his praise -- I hear. + To little birds, which wing their way + Between the lands, I fain would say, + How much we long our prince to see, + They seem to hear a wish from me." + + + +10. OF KING MAGNUS'S FIRST ARRIVAL IN SVITHJOD. + +Immediately after Magnus Olafson came to Svithjod from Russia, +Sigvat met him at Queen Astrid's house, and glad they all were at +meeting. Sigvat then sang: -- + + "Thou art come here, prince, young and bold! + Thou art come home! With joy behold + Thy land and people. From this hour + I join myself to thy young power. + I could not o'er to Russie hie, -- + Thy mother's guardian here was I. + It was my punishment for giving + Magnus his name, while scarcely living." + +Afterwards Sigvat travelled with Queen Astrid, and followed +Magnus to Norway. Sigvat sang thus: -- + + "To the crowds streaming to the Thing, + To see and hear Magnus their king, + Loudly, young king, I'll speak my mind -- + `God to His people has been kind.' + If He, to whom be all the praise, + Give us a son in all his ways + Like to his sire, no folk on earth + Will bless so much a royal birth." + +Now when Magnus became king of Norway Sigvat attended him, and +was his dearest friend. Once it happened that Queen Astrid and +Alfhild the king's mother had exchanged some sharp words with +each other, and Sigvat said: -- + + "Alfhild! though it was God's will + To raise thee -- yet remember still + The queen-born Astrid should not be + Kept out of due respect by thee." + + + +11. KING OLAF'S SHRINE. + +King Magnus had a shrine made and mounted with gold and silver, +and studded with jewels. This shrine was made so that in shape +and size it was like a coffin. Under it was an arched way, and +above was a raised roof, with a head and a roof-ridge. Behind +were plaited hangings; and before were gratings with padlocks, +which could be locked with a key. In this shrine King Magnus had +the holy remains of King Olaf deposited, and many were the +miracles there wrought. Of this Sigvat speaks: -- + + "For him a golden shrine is made, + For him whose heart was ne'er afraid + Of mortal man -- the holy king, + Whom the Lord God to heaven did bring. + Here many a man shall feel his way, + Stone-blind, unconscious of the day, + And at the shrine where Olaf lies + Give songs of praise for opened eyes." + +It was also appointed by law that King Olaf's holy day should be +held sacred over all Norway, and that day has been kept ever +afterwards as the greatest of Church days. Sigvat speaks of it: +-- + + "To Olaf, Magnus' father, raise, + Within my house, the song of praise! + With joy, yet grief, we'll keep the day + Olaf to heaven was called away. + Well may I keep within my breast + A day for him in holy rest, -- + My upraised hands a golden ring + On every branch (1) bear from that king." + + +ENDNOTES: +(1) The fingers, the branches of the hand, bore golden fruits + from the generosity of the king. -- L. + + + +12. OF THORER HUND. + +Thorer Hund left the country immediately after King Olaf's fall. +He went all the way to Jerusalem, and many people say he never +came back. Thorer Hund had a son called Sigurd, father of +Ranveig who was married to Joan, a son of Arne Arnason. Their +children were Vidkun of Bjarkey, Sigurd Hund, Erling, and +Jardthrud. + + + +13. OF THE MURDER OF HAREK OF THJOTTA. + +Harek of Thjotta sat at home on his farm, till King Magnus +Olafson came to the country and was made king. Then Harek went +south to Throndhjem to King Magnus. At that time Asmund +Grankelson was in the king's house. When Harek came to Nidaros, +and landed out of the ship, Asmund was standing with the king in +the gallery outside the loft, and both the king and Asmund knew +Harek when they saw him. "Now," says Asmund to the king, "I will +pay Harek for my father's murder." He had in his hand a little +thin hatchet. The king looked at him, and said, "Rather take +this axe of mine." It was thick, and made like a club. "Thou +must know, Asmund," added he, "that there are hard bones in the +old fellow." Asmund took the axe, went down, and through the +house, and when he came down to the cross-road Harek and his men +coming up met him. Asmund struck Harek on the head, so that the +axe penetrated to the brains; and that was Harek's death-wound. +Asmund turned back directly to the king's house, and the whole +edge of the axe was turned with the blow. Then said the king, +"What would thy axe have done, for even this one, I think, is +spoilt?" King Magnus afterwards gave him a fief and office in +Halogaland, and many are the tales about the strife between +Asmund and Harek's sons. + + + +14. OF THORGEIR FLEK. + +Kalf Arnason had at first, for some time, the greatest share of +the government of the country under King Magnus; but afterwards +there were people who reminded the king of the part Kalf had +taken at Stiklestad, and then it became difficult for Kalf to +give the king satisfaction in anything. Once it happened there +were many men with the king bringing their affairs before him; +and Thorgeir Flek from Sula in Veradal, of whom mention is made +before in the history of King Olaf the Saint, came to him about +some needful business. The king paid no attention to his words, +but was listening to people who stood near him. Then Thorgeir +said to the king, so loud that all who were around him could +hear: -- + + "Listen, my lord, to my plain word. + I too was there, and had to bear + A bloody head from Stiklestad: + For I was then with Olaf's men. + Listen to me: well did I see + The men you're trusting the dead corpse thrusting + Out of their way, as dead it lay; + And striking o'er your father's gore." + +There was instantly a great uproar, and some told Thorgeir to go +out; but the king called him, and not only despatched his +business to his satisfaction, but promised him favour and +friendship. + + + +115. KALF ARNASON FLIES THE COUNTRY + +Soon after this the king was at a feast at the farm of Haug in +Veradel, and at the dinner-table Kalf Arnason sat upon one side +of him, and Einar Tambaskelfer on the other. It was already come +so far that the king took little notice of Kalf, but paid most +attention to Einar. The king said to Einar, "Let us ride to-day +to Stiklestad. I should like to see the memorials of the things +which took place there." Einar replies, "I can tell thee nothing +about it; but take thy foster-father Kalf with thee; he can give +thee information about all that took place." When the tables +were removed, the king made himself ready, and said to Kalf, +"Thou must go with me to Stiklestad." + +Kalf replied, "That is really not my duty." + +Then the king stood up in a passion, and said, "Go thou shalt, +Kalf!" and thereupon he went out. + +Kalf put on his riding clothes in all haste, and said to his +foot-boy, "Thou must ride directly to Eggja, and order my house- +servants to ship all my property on board my ship before sunset." + +King Magnus now rides to Stiklestad, and Kalf with him. They +alighted from horseback, and went to the place where the battle +had been. Then said the king to Kalf, "Where is the spot at +which the king fell?" + +Kalf stretched out his spear-shaft, and said, "There he lay when +he fell." + +The king: "And where wast thou, Kalf?" + +Kalf: "Here where I am now standing." + +The king turned red as blood in the face, and said, "Then thy axe +could well have reached him." + +Kalf replied, "My axe did not come near him;" and immediately +went to his horse, sprang on horseback, and rode away with all +his men; and the king rode back to Haug. Kalf did not stop until +he got home in the evening to Eggja. There his ship lay ready at +the shore side, and all his effects were on board, and the vessel +manned with his house-servants. They set off immediately by +night down the fjord, and afterwards proceeded day and night, +when the wind suited. He sailed out into the West sea, and was +there a long time plundering in Ireland, Scotland, and the +Hebudes. Bjarne Gullbrarskald tells of this in the song about +Kalf: -- + + "Brother of Thorberg, who still stood + Well with the king! in angry mood + He is the first to break with thee, + Who well deserves esteemed to be; + He is the first who friendship broke, + For envious men the falsehood spoke; + And he will he the first to rue + The breach of friendship 'twixt you two." + + + +16. OF THE THREATS OF THE BONDES. + +King Magnus added to his property Veggia, which Hrut had been +owner of, and Kviststad, which had belonged to Thorgeir, and also +Eggja, with all the goods which Kalf had left behind him; and +thus he confiscated to the king's estate many great farms, which +had belonged to those of the bonde-army who had fallen at +Stiklestad. In like manner, he laid heavy fined upon many of +those who made the greatest opposition to King Olaf. He drove +some out of the country, took large sums of money from others, +and had the cattle of others slaughtered for his use. Then the +bondes began to murmur, and to say among themselves, "Will he go +on in the same way as his father and other chiefs, whom we made +an end of when their pride and lawless proceedings became +insupportable?" This discontent spread widely through the +country. The people of Sogn gathered men, and, it was said, were +determined to give battle to King Magnus, if he came into the +Fjord district. King Magnus was then in Hordaland, where he had +remained a long time with a numerous retinue, and was now come to +the resolution to proceed north to Sogn. When the king's friends +observed this, twelve men had a meeting, and resolved to +determine by casting lots which of them should inform the king of +the discontent of the people; and it so happened that the lot +fell upon Sigvat. + + + +17. OF THE FREE-SPEAKING SONG ("BERSOGLISVISUR"). + +Sigvat accordingly composed a poem, which he called the "Free- +speaking Song", which begins with saying the king had delayed too +long to pacify the people, who were threatening to rise in tumult +against him. He said: -- + + "Here in the south, from Sogn is spread + The news that strife draws to a head: + The bondes will the king oppose -- + Kings and their folk should ne'er be foes. + Let us take arms, and briskly go + To battle, if it must be so; + Defend our king -- but still deplore + His land plunged in such strife once more." + +In this song are also these verses: -- + + "Hakon. who at Fitiar died, -- + Hakon the Good, could not abide + The viking rule. or robber train, + And all men's love he thus did gain. + The people since have still in mind + The laws of Hakon, just and kind; + And men will never see the day + When Hakon's laws have passed away. + + "The bondes ask but what is fair; + The Olafs and the Earls, when there + Where Magnus sits, confirmed to all + Their lands and gear -- to great and small, + Bold Trygve's son, and Harald's heir, + The Olafs, while on earth they were, + Observed the laws themselves had made, + And none was for his own afraid. + + "Let not thy counsellors stir thy wrath + Against the man who speaks the truth; + Thy honour lies in thy good sword, + But still more in thy royal word; + And, if the people do not lie, + The new laws turn out not nigh + So Just and mild, as the laws given + At Ulfasund in face of heaven. + + "Dread king! who urges thee to break + Thy pledged word, and back to take + Thy promise given? Thou warrior bold; + With thy own people word to hold, + Thy promise fully to maintain, + Is to thyself the greatest gain: + The battle-storm raiser he + Must by his own men trusted be. + + "Who urges thee, who seek'st renown, + The bondes' cattle to cut down? + No king before e'er took in hand + Such viking-work in his own land. + Such rapine men will not long bear, + And the king's counsellors will but share + In their ill-will: when once inflamed, + The king himself for all is blamed. + + "Do cautious, with this news of treason + Flying about -- give them no reason. + We hange the thief, but then we use + Consideration of the excuse. + I think, great king (who wilt rejoice + Eagle and wolf with battle voice), + It would be wise not to oppose + Thy bondes, and make them thy foes. + + "A dangerous sign it is, I fear, + That old grey-bearded men appear + In corners whispering at the Thing, + As if they had bad news to bring. + The young sit still, -- no laugh, or shout, -- + More looks than words passing shout; + And groups of whispering heads are seen, + On buttoned breasts, with lowering mien. + + "Among the udalmen, they say + The king, if he could have his way, + Would seize the bondes' udal land, + And free-born men must this withstand. + In truth the man whose udal field, + By any doom that law can yield + From him adjudged the king would take, + Could the king's throne and power shake." + +This verse is the last: -- + + "A holy bond between us still + Makes me wish speedy end to ill: + The sluggard waits till afternoon, -- + At once great Magnus! grant our boon. + Then we will serve with heart and hand, + With thee we'll fight by sea or land: + With Olaf's sword take Olaf's mind, + And to thy bondes be more kind." + +In this song the king was exhorted to observe the laws which his +father had established. This exhortation had a good effect on +the king, for many others held the same language to him. So at +last the king consulted the most prudent men, who ordered all +affairs according to law. Thereafter King Magnus had the law- +book composed in writing which is still in use in Throndhjem +district, and is called "The Grey Goose" (1). King Magnus +afterwards became very popular, and was beloved by all the +country people, and therefore he was called Magnus the Good. + + +ENDNOTES: +(1) "The Grey Goose", so called probably from the colour of the + parchment on which it is written, is one of the most curious + relics of the Middle Ages, and give us an unexpected view of + the social condition of the Northmen in the eleventh + century. Law appears to have been so far advanced among + them that the forms were not merely established, but the + slightest breach of the legal forms of proceeding involved + the loss of the case. The "Grey Goose" embraces subjects + not dealt with probably by any other code in Europe at that + period. The provision for the poor, the equality of + weights and measures, police of markets and of sea havens, + provision for illegitimate children of the poor, inns for + travellers, wages of servants and support of them in + sickness, protection of pregnant women and even of domestic + animals from injury, roads, bridges, vagrants, beggars, are + subjects treated of in this code. -- "Schlegel." -- L. + + + +18. OF THE ENGLISH KINGS. + +The king of the English, King Harald, died (A.D. 1040) five years +after his father King Canute, and was buried beside his father at +Winchester. After his death his brother Hardaknut, the second +son of the old King Canute, was king of England, and was thus +king both of Denmark and England. He ruled these kingdoms two +years, and then died of sickness in England, leaving no children. +He was buried at Winchester beside his father. After his death +Edward the Good, a son of the English king Ethelred (and Emma, a +daughter of Richard earl of Rouen), was chosen king in England. +King Edward the Good was, on his mother's side, a brother of +Harald and Hardaknut, the sons of Canute the Great; and the +daughter of Canute and Queen Emma was Gunhild, who was married to +the Emperor Henry of Germany, who was called Henry the Mild. +Gunhild had been three years in Germamy when she fell sick, and +she died five years after the death of her father King Canute the +Great. + + + +19. OF KING MAGNUS OLAFSON. + +When King Magnus Olafson heard of Hardaknut's death, he +immediately sent people south to Denmark, with a message to the +men who had bound themselves by oath to the peace and agreement +which was made between King Magnus and Hardaknut, and reminded +them of their pledge. He added, as a conclusion, that in summer +(A.D. 1042.) he would come with his army to Denmark to take +possession of his Danish dominions, in terms of the agreement, or +to fall in the field with his army. So says Arnor, the earls' +skald: -- + + "Wise were the words, exceeding wise, + Of him who stills the hungriest cries + Of beasts of prey -- the earl's lord; + And soon fulfilled will be his word: + `With his good sword he'll Denmark gain, + Or fall upon a bloody plain; + And rather than give up his cause, + Will leave his corpse to raven's claws.'" + + + +20. KING MAGNUS'S ARMAMENT. + +Thereafter King Magnus gathered together a great army, and +summoned to him all lendermen and powerful bondes, and collected +war-ships. When the army was assembled it was very handsome, and +well fitted out. He had seventy large vessels when he sailed +from Norway. So says Thiodolf the skald: -- + + "Brave king! the terror of the foe, + With thee will many a long-ship go. + Full seventy sail are gathered here, + Eastward with their great king to steer. + And southward now the bright keel glides; + O'er the white waves the Bison rides. + Sails swell, yards crack, the highest mast + O'er the wide sea scarce seen at last." + +Here it related that King Magnus had the great Bison, which his +father King Olaf had built. It had more than thirty banks of +rowers; and forward on the bow was a great buffalo head, and aft +on the stern-post was its tail. Both the head and the tail, and +both sides of the ship, were gilded over. Of this speaks Arnor, +the earls' skald: -- + + "The white foam lashing o'er the deck + Oft made the glided head to shake; + The helm down, the vessel's heel + Oft showed her stem's bright-glacing steel. + Around Stavanger-point careering, + Through the wild sea's white flames steering, + Tackle loud singing to the strain, + The storm-horse flies to Denmark's plain." + +King Magnus set out to sea from Agder, and sailed over to +Jutland. So says Arnor: -- + + "I can relate how through the gale + The gallant Bison carried sail. + With her lee gunwale in the wave, + The king on board, Magnus the brave! + The iron-clad Thingmen's chief to see + On Jutland's coast right glad were we, -- + Right glad our men to see a king + Who in the fight his sword could swing." + + + +21. KING MAGNUS COMES TO DENMARK. + +When King Magnus came to Denmark he was joyfully received. He +appointed a Thing without delay, to which he summoned the people +of the country, and desired they would take him as king, +according to the agreement which had been entered into. As the +highest of the chiefs of the country were bound by oath to King +Magnus, and were desirous of keeping their word and oath, they +endeavoured zealously to promote the cause with the people. It +contributed also that King Canute the Great, and all his +descendants, were dead; and a third assistance was, that his +father King Olaf's sanctity and miracles were become celebrated +in all countries. + + + +22. KING MAGNUS CHOSEN KING OF DENMARK. + +King Magnus afterwards ordered the people to be summoned to +Viborg to a Thing. Both in older and later times, the Danes +elected their kings at the Viborg Thing. At this Thing the Danes +chose Magnus Olafson to be king of all the Danish dorninions. +King Magnus remained long in Denmark during the summer (A.D. +1042); and wherever he came the people received him joyfully, and +obeyed him willingly. He divided the country into baronies and +districts, and gave fiefs to men of power in the land. Late in +autumn he returned with his fleet to Norway, but lay for some +time at the Gaut river. + + + +23. OF SVEIN ULFSON. + +There was a man, by name Svein, a son of Earl Ulf, and grandson +of Thorgils Sprakaleg. Svein's mother was Astrid, a daughter of +King Svein Forkbeard. She was a sister of Canute the Great by +the father's side, and of the Swedish King Olaf Eirikson by the +mother's side; for her mother was Queen Sigrid the Haughty, a +daughter of Skoglar Toste. Svein Ulfson had been a long time +living with his relation the Swedish king, ever since King Canute +had ordered his father Ulf to be killed, as is related in the +saga of old King Canute, that he had his brother-in-law, Earl +Ulf, murdered in Roskilde; and on which account Svein had not +since been in Denmark. Svein Ulfson was one of the handsomest +men that could be seen; he was very stout and strong, and very +expert in all exercises, and a well-spoken man withal. Every one +who knew him said he had every quality which became a good chief. +Svein Ulfson waited upon King Magnus while he lay in the Gaut +river, as before mentioned, and the king received him kindly, as +he was by many advised to do; for Svein was a particularly +popular man. He could also speak for himself to the king well +and cleverly; so that it came at lasf to Svein's entering into +King Magnus's service, and becoming his man. They often talked +together afterwards in private concerning many affairs. + + + +24. SVEIN ULFSON CREATED AN EARL. + +One day, as King Magnus sat in his high-seat and many people were +around him, Svein Ulfson sat upon a footstool before the king. +The king then made a speech: "Be it known to you, chiefs, and the +people in general, that I have taken the following resolution. +Here is a distinguished man, both for family and for his own +merits, Svein Ulfson, who has entered into my service, and given +me promise of fidelity. Now, as ye know, the Danes have this +summer become my men, so that when I am absent from the country +it is without a head; and it is not unknown to you how it is +ravaged by the people of Vindland, Kurland, and others from the +Baltic, as well as by Saxons. Therefore I promised them a chief +who could defend and rule their land; and I know no man better +fitted, in all respects, for this than Svein Ulfson, who is of +birth to be chief of the country. I will therefore make him my +earl, and give him the government of my Danish dominions while I +am in Norway; just as King Canute the Great set his father, Earl +Ulf, over Denmark while he was in England." + +Then Einar Tambaskelfer said, "Too great an earl -- too great an +earl, my foster-son!" + +The king replied in a passion, "Ye have a poor opinion of my +judgment, I think. Some consider that ye are too great earls, +and others that ye are fit for nothing." + +Then the king stood up, took a sword, and girt it on the earl's +loins, and took a shield and fastened it on his shoulders, put a +helmet upon his head, and gave him the title of earl, with the +same fiefs in Denmark which his father Earl Ulf had formerly +held. Afterwards a shrine was brought forth containing holy +relics, and Svein laid his hand hereon, and swore the oath of +fidelity to King Magnus; upon which the king led the earl to the +highseat by his side. So says Thiodolf: -- + + "Twas at the Gaut river's shore, + With hand on shrine Svein Ulfson swore. + King Magnus first said o'er the oath, + With which Svein Ulfson pledged his troth. + The vows by Svein solemnly given, + On holy bones of saints in heaven, + To Magnus seemed both fair and fast; + He found they were too fair to last." + +Earl Svein went thereafter to Denmark, and the whole nation +received him well. He established a court about him, and soon +became a great man. In winter (A.D. 1043), he went much about +the country, and made friends among the powerful chiefs; and, +indeed, he was beloved by all the people of the land. + + + +25. KING MAGNUS'S FORAY. + +King Magnus proceeded northward to Norway with his fleet, and +wintered there; but when the spring set in (A.D. 1048) he +gathered a large force, with which he sailed south to Demnark, +having heard the news from Vindland that the Vindland people in +Jomsborg had withdrawn from their submission to him. The Danish +kings had formerly had a very large earldom there, and they first +founded Jomsborg; and now the place was become a very strong +fortress. When King Magnus heard of this, he ordered a large +fleet and army to be levied in Denmark, and sailed in summer to +Vindland with all his forces, which made a very large army +altogether. Arnor, the earls' skald, tells of it thus: -- + + "Now in this strophe, royal youth! + I tell no more than the plain truth. + Thy armed outfit from the strand + Left many a keel-trace on the sand, + And never did a king before + SO many ships to any shore + Lead on, as thou to Vindland's isle: + The Vindland men in fright recoil." + +Now when King Magnus came to Vindland he attacked Jomsborg, and +soon took the fortress, killing' many people, burning and +destroying both in the town and in the courttry all around, and +making the greatest havoc. So says Arnor, the earl's skald: -- + + "The robbers, hemmed 'twixt death and fire, + Knew not how to escape thy ire; + O'er Jomsborg castle's highest towers + Thy wrath the whirlwind-fire pours. + The heathen on his false gods calls, + And trembles even in their halls; + And by the light from its own flame + The king this viking-hold o'ercame." + +Many people in Vindland submitted to King Magnus, but many more +got out of the way and fled. King Magnus returned to Denmark, +and prepared to take his winter abode there, and sent away the +Danish, and also a great many of the Norwegian people he had +brought with him. + + + +26. SVEIN RECEIVES THE TITLE OF KING. + +The same winter (A.D. 1043), in which Svein Ulfson was raised to +the government of the whole Danish dominions, and had made +friends of a great number of the principal chiefs in Denmark, and +obtained the affections of the people, he assumed by the advice +of many of the chiefs the title of king. But when in the spring +thereafter he heard that King Magnus had come from the north with +a great army, Svein went over to Scania, from thence up to +Gautland, and so on to Svithjod to his relation, King Emund, +where he remained all summer, and sent spies out to Denmark, to +inquire about the king's proceedings and the number of his men. +Now when Svein heard that King Magnus had let a great part of his +army go away, and also that he was south in Jutland, he rode from +Svithjod with a great body of peopie which the Swedish king had +given him. When Svein came to Scania the people of that country +received him well, treated him as their king, and men joined him +in crowds. He then went on to Seeland, where he was also well +received, and the whole country joined him. He then went to +Fyen, and laid all the islands under his power; and as the people +also joined him, he collected a great army and many ships of war. + + + +27. OF KING MAGNUS'S MILITARY FORCE. + +King Magnus heard this news, and at the same time that the people +of Vindland had a large force on foot. He summoned people +therefore to come to him, and drew together a great army in +Jutland. Otto, also, the Duke of Brunsvik, who had married +Ulfhild, King Olaf the Saint's daughter, and the sister of King +Magnus, came to him with a great troop. The Danish chiefs +pressed King Magnus to advance against the Vindland army, and not +allow pagans to march over and lay waste the country; so it was +resolved that the king with his army should proceed south to +Heidaby. While King Magnus lay at Skotborg river, on Hlyrskog +Heath, he got intelligence concerning the Vindland army, and that +it was so numerous it could not be counted; whereas King Magnus +had so few, that there seemed no chance for him but to fly. The +king, however, determined on fighting, if there was any +possibility of gaining the victory; but the most dissuaded him +from venturing on an engagement, and all, as one man, said that +the Vindland people had undoubtedly a prodigious force. Duke +Otto, however, pressed much to go to battle. Then the king +ordered the whole army to be gathered by the war trumpets into +battle array, and ordered all the men to arm, and to lie down for +the night under their shields; for he was told the enemy's army +had come to the neighbourhood. The king was very thoughtful; for +he was vexed that he should be obliged to fly, which fate he had +never experienced before. He slept but little all night, and +chanted his prayers. + + + +28. OF KING OLAF'S MIRACLE. + +The following day was Michaelmas eve. Towards dawn the king +slumbered, and dreamt that his father, King Olaf the Saint, +appeared to him, and said, "Art thou so melancholy and afraid, +because the Vindland people come against thee with a great army? +Be not afraid of heathens, although they be many; for I shall be +with thee in the battle. Prepare, therefore, to give battle to +the Vindlanders, when thou hearest my trumpet." When the king +awoke he told his dream to his men, and the day was then dawning. +At that moment all the people heard a ringing of bells in the +air; and those among King Magnus's men who had been in Nidaros +thought that it was the ringing of the bell called Glod, which +King Olaf had presented to the church of Saint Clement in the +town of Nidaros. + + + +29. BATTLE OF HLYRSKOG HEATH. + +Then King Magnus stood up, and ordered the war trumpets to sound, +and at that moment the Vindland army advanced from the south +across the river against him; on which the whole of the king's +army stood up, and advanced against the heathens. King Magnus +threw off from him his coat of ring-mail, and had a red silk +shirt outside over his clothes, and had in his hands the battle- +axe called Hel (1), which had belonged to King Olaf. King Magnus +ran on before all his men to the enemy's army, and instantly +hewed down with both hands every man who came against him. So +says Arnor, the earls' skald: -- + + "His armour on the ground he flung + His broad axe round his head he swung; + And Norway's king strode on in might, + Through ringing swords, to the wild fight. + His broad axe Hel with both hands wielding, + Shields, helms, and skulls before it yielding, + He seemed with Fate the world to share, + And life or death to deal out there." + +This battle was not very long; for the king's men were very +fiery, and where they came the Vindland men fell as thick as +tangles heaped up by the waves on the strand. They who stood +behind betook themselves to flight, and were hewed down like +cattle at a slaughter. The king himself drove the fugitives +eastward over the heath, and people fell all over the moor. So +says Thiodolf: -- + + "And foremost he pursued, + And the flying foe down hewed; + An eagle's feast each stroke, + As the Vindland helms he broke. + He drove them o'er the hearth, + And they fly from bloody death; + But the moor, a mile or more, + With the dead was studded o'er." + +It is a common saying, that there never was so great a slaughter +of men in the northern lands, since the time of Christianity, as +took place among the Vindland people on Hlyrskog's Heath. On the +other side, not many of King Magnus's people were killed, +although many were wounded. After the battle the king ordered +the wounds of his men to be bound; but there were not so many +doctors in the army as were necessary, so the king himself went +round, and felt the hands of those he thought best suited for the +business; and when he had thus stroked their palms, he named +twelve men, who, he thought, had the softest hands, and told them +to bind the wounds of the people; and although none of them had +ever tried it before, they all became afterwards the best of +doctors. There were two Iceland men among them; the one was +Thorkil, a son of Geire, from Lyngar; the other was Atle, father +of Bard Svarte of Selardal, from whom many good doctors are +descended. After this battle, the report of the miracle which +King Olaf the Saint had worked was spread widely through the +country; and it was the common saying of the people, that no man +could venture to fight against King Magnus Olafson, for his +father Saint Olaf stood so near to him that his enemies, on that +account. never could do him harm. + + +ENDNOTES: +(1) Hel -- Death: the goddess of Death. -- L. + + + +30. BATTLE AT RE. + +King Magnus immediately turned round with his army against Svein, +whom he called his earl, although the Danes called him their +king; and he collected ships, and a great force, and on both +sides a great strength was assembled. In Svein's army were many +chiefs from Scania, Halland, Seeland, and Fyen; while King +Magnus, on the other hand, had mostly Norway and Jutland men, and +with that war-force he hastened to meet Svein. They met at Re, +near Vestland; and there was a great battle, which ended in King +Magnus gaining the victory, and Svein taking flight. After +losing many people, Svein fled back to Scania, and from thence to +Gautland, which was a safe refuge if he needed it, and stood open +to him. King Magnus returned to Jutland, where he remained all +winter (A.D. 1044) with many people, and had a guard to watch his +ships. Arnor, the earls' skald, speaks of this: -- + + "At Re our battle-loving lord + In bloody meeting stained his sword, -- + At Re upon the western shore, + In Vestland warrior's blood once more." + + + +31. BATTLE AT AROS. + +Svein Ulfson went directly to his ships as soon as he heard that +King Magnus had left his fleet. He drew to him all the men he +could, and went round in winter among the islands, Seeland, Fyen, +and others. Towards Yule he sailed to Jutland, and went into +Limfjord, where many people submitted to him. He imposed scat +upon some, but some joined King Magnus. Now when King Magnus +heard what Svein was doing, he betook himself to his ships with +all the Northmen then in Denmark, and a part of the Danish +troops, and steered south along the land. Svein was then in Aros +with a great force; and when he heard of King Magnus he laid his +vessels without the town, and prepared for battle. When King +Magnus heard for certain where Svein was, and that the distance +between them was but short, he held a House-thing, and addressed +his people thus: "It is reported to me that the earl and his +fleet are lying not far from us, and that he has many people. +Now I would let you know that I intend to go out against the earl +and fight for it, although, we have fewer people. We will, as +formerly, put our trust in God, and Saint Olaf, my father, who +has given us victory sometimes when we fought, even though we had +fewer men than the enemy. Now I would have you get ready to seek +out the enemy, and give battle the moment we find him by rowing +all to attack, and being all ready for battle." Thereupon the +men put on their weapons, each man making himself and his place +ready; and then they stretched themselves to their oars. When +they saw the earl's ships they rowed towards them, and made ready +to attack. When Svein's men saw the forces they armed +themselves, bound their ships together, and then began one of the +sharpest of battles. So says Thiodolf, the skald: -- + + "Shield against shield, the earl and king + Made shields and swords together ring. + The gold-decked heroes made a play + Which Hild's iron-shirt men say + They never saw before or since + On battle-deck; the brave might wince, + As spear and arrow whistling flew, + Point blank, death-bringing, quick and true." + +They fought at the bows, so that the men only on the bows could +strike; the men on the forecastle thrust with spears: and all who +were farther off shot with light spears or javelins, or war- +arrows. Some fought with stones or short stakes; and those who +were aft of the mast shot with the bow. So Says Thiodolf: -- + + "Steel-pointed spear, and sharpened stake, + Made the broad shield on arm shake: + The eagle, hovering in the air, + Screamed o'er the prey preparing there. + And stones and arrows quickly flew, + And many a warrior bold they slew. + The bowman never twanged his bow + And drew his shaft so oft as now; + And Throndhjem's bowmen on that day + Were not the first tired of this play: + Arrows and darts so quickly fly, + You could not follow with the eye." + +Here it appears how hot the battle was with casting weapons. +King Magnus stood in the beginning of the battle within a shield- +rampart; but as it appeared to him that matters were going on too +slowly, he leaped over the shields, and rushed forward in the +ship, encouraging his men with a loud cheer, and springing to the +bows, where the battle was going on hand to hand. When his men +saw this they urged each other on with mutual cheering, and there +was one great hurrah through all the ships. So says Thiodolf: -- + + "`On with our ships! on to the foe!' + Cry Magnus' men -- on, on they go. + Spears against shields in fury rattle, -- + Was never seen so fierce a battle." + +And now the battle was exceedingly sharp; and in the assault +Svein's ship was cleared of all her forecastle men, upon and on +both sides of the forecastle. Then Magnus boarded Svein's ship, +followed by his men; and one after the other came up, and made so +stout an assault that Svein's men gave way, and King Magnus first +cleared that ship, and then the rest, one after the other. Svein +fled, with a great part of his people; but many fell, and many +got life and peace. Thiodolf tells of this: -- + + "Brave Magnus, from the stern springing + On to the stem, where swords were ringing + From his sea-raven's beak of gold + Deals death around -- the brave! the bold! + The earl's housemen now begin + To shrink and fall: their ranks grow thin -- + The king's luck thrives -- their decks are cleared, + Of fighting men no more appeared. + The earl's ships are driven to flight, + Before the king would stop the fight: + The gold-distributor first then + Gave quarters to the vanquished men." + +This battle was fought on the last Sunday before Yule. So says +Thiodolf: -- + + "'Twas on a Sunday morning bright, + Fell out this great and bloody fight, + When men were arming, fighting, dying, + Or on the red decks wounded lying. + And many a mabn, foredoomed to die, + To save his life o'erboard did fly, + But sank; for swimming could not save, + And dead men rolled in every wave." + +Magnus took seven ships from Svein's people. So says Thiodolf: +-- + + "Thick Olaf's son seven vessels cleared, + And with his fleet the prizes steered. + The Norway girls will not be sad + To hear such news -- each from her lad." + +He also sings: -- + + "The captured men will grieve the most + Svein and their comrades to have lost; + For it went ill with those who fled, + Their wounded had no easy bed. + A heavy storm that very night + O'ertook them flying from the fight; + And skulls and bones are tumbling round, + Under the sea, on sandy ground." + +Svein fled immediately by night to Seeland, with the men who had +escaped and were inclined to follow him; but King Magnus brought +his ships to the shore, and sent his men up the country in the +night-time, and early in the morning they came flown to the +strand with a great booty in cattle. Thiodolf tells about it: -- + + "But yesterday with heavy stones + We crushed their skulls, and broke their bones, + And thinned their ranks; and now to-day + Up through their land we've ta'en our way, + And driven their cattle to the shore, + And filled out ships with food in store. + To save his land from our quick swords, + Svein will need something more than words." + + + +32. SVEIN'S FLIGHT. + +King Magnus sailed with his fleet from the south after Svein to +Seeland; but as soon as the king came there Svein fled up the +country with his men, and Magnus followed them, and pursued the +fugitives, killing all that were laid hold of. So says Thiodolf: +-- + + "The Seeland girl asks with fear, + `Whose blood-bespattered shield and spear -- + The earl's or king's -- up from the shore + Moved on with many a warrior more?' + We scoured through all their muddy lanes, + Woodlands, and fields, and miry plains. + Their hasty footmarks in the clay + Showed that to Ringsted led their way. + + "Spattered with mud from heel to head, + Our gallant lord his true men led. + Will Lund's earl halt his hasty flight, + And try on land another fight? + His banner yesterday was seen, + The sand-bills and green trees between, + Through moss and mire to the strand, + In arrow flight, leaving the land." + +Then Svein fled over to Fyen Island, and King Magnus carried fire +and sword through Seeland, and burnt all round, because their men +had joined Svein's troop in harvest. So says Thiodolf: -- + + "As Svein in winter had destroyed + The royal house, the king employed + No little force to guard the land, + And the earl's forays to withstand. + An armed band one morn he found, + And so beset them round and round, + That Canute's nephew quickly fled, + Or he would have been captive led. + + "Our Throndhjem king in his just ire + Laid waste the land with sword and fire, + Burst every house, and over all + Struck terror into great and small. + To the earl's friends he well repaid + Their deadly hate -- such wild work made + On them and theirs, that from his fury, + Flying for life, away they hurry." + + + +33. BURNING IN FYEN. + +As soon as King Magnus heard that Svein with his troops had gone +across to Fyen, he sailed after them; and when Svein heard this +news he went on board ship and sailed to Scania, and from thence +to Gautland, and at last to the Swedish King. King Magnus landed +in Fyen, and plundered and burned over all; and all of Svein's +men who came there fled far enough. Thiodolf speaks of it thus: +-- + + "Fiona isle, once green and fair, + Lies black and reeking through the air: + The red fog rises, thick and hot, + From burning farm and smouldering cot. + The gaping thralls in terror gaze + On the broad upward-spiring blaze, + From thatched roofs and oak-built walls, + Their murdered masters' stately halls. + + "Svein's men, my girl, will not forget + That thrice they have the Norsemen met, + By sea, by land, with steel, with fire, + Thrice have they felt the Norse king's ire. + Fiona's maids are slim and fair, + The lovely prizes, lads, we'll share: + Some stand to arms in rank and row, + Some seize, bring off, and fend with blow." + +After this the people of Denmark submitted to King Magnus, and +during the rest of the winter, there was peace. King Magnus then +appointed some of his men to govern Denmark; and when spring was +advanced he sailed northwards with his fleet to Norway, where he +remained a great part of the summer. + + + +34. BATTLE AT HELGANES + +Now, when Svein heard that King Magnus had gone to Norway he rode +straight down, and had many people out of Svithjod with him. The +people of Scania received him well, and he again collected an +army, with which he first crossed over into Seeland and seized +upon it and Fyen, and all the other isles. When King Magnus +heard of this he gathered together men and ships, and sailed to +Denmark; and as soon as he knew where Svein was lying with his +ships King Magnus sailed to meet him. They met at a place called +Helganes, and the battle began about the fall of day. King +Magnus had fewer men, but larger and better equipt vessels. So +says Arnor, the earls' skald: -- + + "At Helganes -- so goes the tale -- + The brave wolf-feeder, under sail, + Made many an ocean-elk (1) his prey, + Seized many a ship ere break of day. + When twilight fell he urged the fight, + Close combat -- man to man all night; + Through a long harvest night's dark hours, + Down poured the battle's iron showers." + +The battle was very hot, and as night advanced the fall of men +was great. King Magnus, during the whole night, threw hand- +spears. Thiodolf speaks of this: -- + + "And there at Helganes sunk down, + Sore wounded, men of great renown; + And Svein's retainers lost all heart, + Ducking before the flying dart. + The Norsemen's king let fly his spears, + His death-wounds adding to their fears; + For each spear-blade was wet all o'er, + Up to the shaft in their life-gore." + +To make a short tale, King Magnus won the victory in this battle, +and Svein fled. His ship was cleared of men from stem to stern; +and it went so on board many others of his ships. So says +Thiodolf: -- + + "Earl Svein fled from the empty deck, + His lonely ship an unmann'd wreck; + Magnus the Good, the people's friend, + Pressed to the death on the false Svein. + Hneiter (2), the sword his father bore, + Was edge and point, stained red with gore; + Swords sprinkle blood o'er armour bright, + + When kings for land and power fight." + +And Arnor says :- + + "The cutters of Bjorn's own brother + Soon changed their owner for another; + The king took them and all their gear; + The crews, however, got off clear." + +A great number of Svein's men fell, and King Magnus and his men +had a vast booty to divide. So says Thiodolf: -- + + "Where the Norsemen the Danish slew, + A Gautland shield and breast-plate true + Fell to my share of spoil by lot; + And something more i' the south I got: + (There all the summer swords were ringing) + A helm, gay arms, and gear worth bringing, + Home to my quiet lovely one + I sent -- with news how we had won." + +Svein fled up to Scania with all the men who escaped with him; +and King Magnus and his people drove the fugitives up through the +country without meeting any opposition either from Svein's men or +the bondes. So says Thiodolf: -- + + "Olaf's brave son then gave command, + All his ships' crews should quickly land: + King Magnus, marching at their head, + A noble band of warriors led. + A foray through the land he makes; + Denmark in every quarter shakes. + Up hill and down the horses scour, + Carrying the Danes from Norsemen's power." + +King Magnus drove with fire and sword through the land. So says +Thiodolf: -- + + "And now the Norsemen storm along, + Following their banner in a throng: + King Magnus' banner flames on high, + A star to guide our roaming by. + To Lund, o'er Scania's peaceful field, + My shoulder bore my useless shield; + A fairer land, a better road, + As friend or foe, I never trod." + +They began to burn the habitations all around, and the people +fled on every side. So says Thiodolf: -- + + "Our ice-cold iron in great store, + Our arms, beside the king we bore: + The Scanian rogues fly at the view + Of men and steel all sharp and true. + Their timbered houses flame on high, + Red flashing over half the sky; + The blazing town flings forth its light, + Lighting the cowards on their flight." + +And he also sang: -- + + "The king o'er all the Danish land + Roams, with his fire-bringing band: + The house, the hut, the farm, the town, + All where men dwelt is burned down. + O'er Denmark's plains and corn-fields, + Meadows and moors, are seen our shields: + Victorious over all, we chase + Svein's wounded men from place to place. + + "Across Fiona's moor again, + The paths late trodden by our men + We tread once more, until quite near, + Through morning mist, the foes appear. + Then up our numerous banners flare + In the cold early morning air; + And they from Magnus' power who fly + Cannot this quick war-work deny." + +Then Svein fled eastwards along Scania, and King Magnus returned +to his ships, and steered eastwards also along the Scanian coast, +having got ready with the greatest haste to sail. Thiodolf sings +thus about it: -- + + "No drink but the salt sea + On board our ships had we, + When, following our king, + On board our ships we spring. + Hard work on the salt sea, + Off Scania's coast, had we; + But we laboured for the king, + To his foemen death to bring." + +Svein fled to Gautland, and then sought refuge with the Swedish +king, with whom he remained all winter (A.D. 1046), and was +treated with great respect. + + +ENDNOTES: +(1) Ship. -- L. +(2) This was the name of Saint Olaf's sword, which Magnus had + recovered. -- L. + + + +35. OF KING MAGNUS'S CAMPAIGN. + +When King Magnus had subdued Scania he turned about, and first +went to Falster, where he landed, plundered, and killed many +people who had before submitted to Svein. Arnor speaks of this: +-- + + "A bloody vengeance for their guile + King Magnus takes on Falster Isle; + The treacherous Danes his fury feel, + And fall before his purpled steel. + The battle-field is covered o'er, + With eagle's prey from shore to shore; + And the king's courtmen were the first + To quench with blood the raven's thirst." + +Thereafter Magnus with his fleet proceeded to the isle of Fyen, +went on land, plundered, and made great devastation. So says +Arnor, the earls' skald: -- + + "To fair Fiona's grassy shore + His banner now again he bore: + He who the mail-shirt's linked chains + Severs, and all its lustre stains, -- + He will be long remembered there, + The warrior in his twentieth year, + Whom their black ravens from afar + Saluted as he went to war." + + + +36.---OF KING MAGNUS~S BATTLES. + +King Magnus remained in Denmark all that winter (A.D. 1046), and +sat in peace. He had held many battles, and had gained the +victory in all. So says Od Kikinaskald: -- + + "'Fore Michaelmas was struck the blow, + That laid the Vindland vikings low; + And people learned with joy to hear + The clang of arms, and leaders' cheer. + Short before Yule fell out the day, + Southward of Aros, where the fray, + Though not enough the foe to quell, + Was of the bloodiest men can tell." + +And Arnor says: -- + + "Olaf's avenger who can sing? + The skald cannot o'ertake the king, + Who makes the war-bird daily drain + The corpse-blood of his foemen slain. + Four battles won within a year, -- + Breaker of shields! with swords and spear, + And hand to hand, exalt thy fame + Above the kings of greatest name." + +King Magnus had three battles with Svein Ulfson. So says +Thiodolf: -- + + "To our brave Throndhjem sovereign's praise + The skald may all his skaldcraft raise; + For fortune, and for daring deed, + His song will not the truth exceed. + After three battles to regain + What was his own, unjustly ta'en, + Unjustly kept, and dues denied, + He levied dues in red-blood dyed." + + + +37. OF KING MAGNUS, AND THORFIN AND RAGNVALD, EARLS OF ORKNEY. + +While King Magnus the Good, a son of King Olaf the Saint, ruled +over Norway, as before related, the Earl Ragnvald Brusason lived +with him. Earl Thorfin Sigurdson, the uncle of Ragnvald, ruled +then over Orkney. King Magnus sent Ragnvald west to Orkney, and +ordered that Thorfin should let him have his father's heritage. +Thorfin let Ragnvald have a third part of the land along with +him; for so had Erase, the father of Ragnvald, had it at his +dying day. Earl Thorfin was married to Ingebjorg, the earl- +mother, who was a daughter of Fin Arnason. Earl Ragnvald thought +he should have two-thirds of the land, as Olaf the Saint had +promised to his father Bruse, and as Bruse had enjoyed as long as +Olaf lived. This was the origin of a great strife between these +relations, concerning which we have a long saga. They had a +great battle in Pentland Firth, in which Kalf Arnason was with +Earl Thorfin. So says Bjarne Gullbrarskald: -- + + "Thy cutters, dashing through the tide, + Brought aid to Earl Thorfin's side, + Fin's son-in-law, and people say + Thy aid made Bruse's son give way. + Kalf, thou art fond of warlike toil, + Gay in the strife and bloody broil; + But here 'twas hate made thee contend + Against Earl Ragnvald, the king's friend." + + + +38. OF KING MAGNUS'S LETTER TO ENGLAND. + +King Magnus ruled then both over Denmark and Norway; and when he +had got possession of the Danish dominions he sent ambassadors +over to England to King Edward, who brought to him King Magnus's +letter and seal. And in this letter there stood, along with a +salutation from King Magnus, these words: -- "Ye must have heard +of the agreement which I and Hardaknut made, -- that he of us two +who survived the other should have all the land and people which +the deceased had possessed. Now it has so turned out, as ye have +no doubt heard, that I have taken the Danish dominions as my +heritage after Hardaknut. But before he departed this life he +had England as well as Denmark; therefore I consider myself now, +in consequence of my rights by this agreement, to own England +also. Now I will therefore that thou deliver to me the kingdom; +otherwise I will seek to take it by arms, both from Denmark and +Norway; and let him rule the land to whom fate gives the +victory." + + + +39. KING EDWARD'S ANSWER TO KING MAGNUS'S LETTER. + +Now when King Edward had read this letter, he replied thus: "It +is known to all men in this country that King Ethelred, my +father, was udal-born to this kingdom, both after the old and +new law of inheritance. We were four sons after him; and when he +by death left the throne my brother Edmund took the government +and kingdom; for he was the oldest of us brothers, and I was well +satisfied that it was so. And after him my stepfather, Canute +the Great, took the kingdom, and as long as he lived there was no +access to it. After him my brother Harald was king as long as he +lived; and after him my brother Hardaknut took the kingdoms both +of Denmark and England; for he thought that a just brotherly +division that he should have both England and Denmark, and that I +should have no kingdom at all. Now he died, and then it was the +resolution of all the people of the country to take me for king +here in England. So long as I had no kingly title I served only +superiors in all respects, like those who had no claims by birth +to land or kingdom. Now, however, I have received the kingly +title, and am consecrated king. I have established my royal +dignity and authority, as my father before me; and while I live I +will not renounce my title. If King Magnus come here with an +army, I will gather no army against him; but he shall only get +the opportunity of taking England when he has taken my life. +Tell him these words of mine." The ambassadors went back to King +Magnus, and told him the answer to their message. King Magnus +reflected a while, and answered thus: "I think it wisest, and +will succeed best, to let King Edward have his kingdom in peace +for me, and that I keep the kingdoms God has put into my hands." + + + +SAGA OF HARALD HARDRADE. + + +PRELIMINARY REMARKS. + +Harald, son of Sigurd Syr, was born in the year A.D. 1015, and +left Norway A.D. 1030. He was called Hardrade, that is, the +severe counsellor, the tyrant, though the Icelanders never +applied this epithet to him. Harald helped the Icelanders in the +famine of A.D. 1056, and sent them timber for a church at +Thingvol. It was the Norwegians who gave him the name tyrant in +contrast to the "debonairete" of Magnus. He came to Norway in +A.D. 1046, and became sole king in A.D. 1047. He died in A.D. +1066, and his son and successor Magnus died in A.D. 1069. + +His saga is to be compared with "Agrip", "Fagrskinna", and +"Morkinskinna". + +The skalds quoted are: Thiodolf, Bolverk, Illuge Bryndalaskald, +Stuf the skald, Thorarin Skeggjason, Valgard o' Val, Od +Kikinaskald, Grane Skald, Thorleik the Fair, Stein Herdison, Ulf +the Marshal, Arnor the earls' skald, Thorkel Skallason, and King +Harald Hardrade himself. + + + +1. HARALD ESCAPES FROM THE BATTLE OF STIKLESTAD. + +Harald, son of Sigurd Syr, brother of Olaf the Saint, by the same +mother, was at the battle of Stiklestad, and was fifteen years +old when King Olaf the Saint fell, as was before related. Harald +was wounded, and escaped with other fugitives. So says Thiodolf: +-- + + "At Haug the fire-sparks from his shield + Flew round the king's head on the field, + As blow for blow, for Olaf's sake, + His sword and shield would give and take. + Bulgaria's conqueror, I ween, + Had scarcely fifteen winters seen, + When from his murdered brother's side + His unhelmed head he had to hide." + +Ragnvald Brusason led Harald from the battle, and the night after +the fray took him to a bonde who dwelt in a forest far from other +people. The peasant received Harald, and kept him concealed; and +Harald was waited upon until he was quite cured of his wounds. +Then the bonde's son attended him on the way east over the ridge +of the land, and they went by all the forest paths they could, +avoiding the common road. The bonde's son did not know who it +was he was attending; and as they were riding together between +two uninhabited forests, Harald made these verses: + + "My wounds were bleeding as I rode; + And down below the bondes strode, + Killing the wounded with the sword, + The followers of their rightful lord. + From wood to wood I crept along, + Unnoticed by the bonde-throng; + `Who knows,' I thought, `a day may come + My name will yet be great at home.'" + +He went eastward over the ridge through Jamtaland and +Helsingjaland, and came to Svithjod, where he found Ragnvald +Brusason, and many others of King Olaf's men who had fled from +the battle at Stiklestad, and they remained there till winter was +over. + + + +2. HARALD'S JOURNEY TO CONSTANTINOPLE. + +The spring after (A.D. 1031) Harald and Ragnvald got ships, and +went east in summer to Russia to King Jarisleif, and were with +him all the following winter. So says the skald Bolverk: -- + + "The king's sharp sword lies clean and bright, + Prepared in foreign lands to fight: + Our ravens croak to have their fill, + The wolf howls from the distant hill. + Our brave king is to Russia gone, -- + Braver than he on earth there's none; + His sharp sword will carve many feast + To wolf and raven in the East." + +King Jarisleif gave Harald and Ragnvald a kind reception, and +made Harald and Ellif, the son of Earl Ragnvald, chiefs over the +land-defence men of the king. So says Thiodolf: -- + + "Where Ellif was, one heart and hand + The two chiefs had in their command; + In wedge or line their battle order + Was ranged by both without disorder. + The eastern Vindland men they drove + Into a corner; and they move + The Lesians, although ill at ease, + To take the laws their conquerors please." + +Harald remained several years in Russia, and travelled far and +wide in the Eastern land. Then he began his expedition out to +Greece, and had a great suite of men with him; and on he went to +Constantinople. So says Bolverk: -- + + "Before the cold sea-curling blast + The cutter from the land flew past, + Her black yards swinging to and fro, + Her shield-hung gunwale dipping low. + The king saw glancing o'er the bow + Constantinople's metal glow + From tower and roof, and painted sails + Gliding past towns and wooded vales." + + + +3. OF HARALD. + +At that time the Greek empire was ruled by the Empress Zoe the +Great, and with her Michael Catalactus. Now when Harald came to +Constantinople he presented himself to the empress, and went into +her pay; and immediately, in autumn, went on board the galleys +manned with troops which went out to the Greek sea. Harald had +his own men along with him. Now Harald had been but a short time +in the army before all the Varings flocked to him, and they all +joined together when there was a battle. It thus came to pass +that Harald was made chief of the Varings. There was a chief +over all the troops who was called Gyrger, and who was a relation +of the empress. Gyrger and Harald went round among all the Greek +islands, and fought much against the corsairs. + + + +4. OF HARALD AND GYRGER CASTING LOTS. + +It happened once that Gyrger and the Varings were going through +the country, and they resolved to take their night quarters in a +wood; and as the Varings came first to the ground, they chose the +place which was best for pitching their tents upon, which was the +highest ground; for it is the nature of the land there to be soft +when rain falls, and therefore it is bad to choose a low +situation for your tents. Now when Gyrger, the chief of the +army, came up, and saw where the Varings had set up their tents, +he told them to remove, and pitch their tents elsewhere, saying +he would himself pitch his tents on their ground. Harald +replies, "If ye come first to the night quarter, ye take up your +ground, and we must go pitch our tents at some other place where +we best can. Now do ye so, in the same way, and find a place +where ye will. It is, I think, the privilege of us Varings here +in the dominions of the Greek emperor to be free, and independent +of all but their own commanders, and bound only to serve the +emperor and empress." They disputed long and hotly about this, +and both sides armed themselves, and were on the way to fight for +it; but men of understanding came between and separated them. +They said it would be better to come to an agreement about such +questions, so that in future no dispute could arise. It came +thus to an arbitration between them, at which the best and most +sagacious men should give their judgment in the case. At this +arbitration it was determined, with the consent of all parties, +that lots should be thrown into a box, and the Greeks and Varings +should draw which was first to ride, or to row, or to take place +in a harbour, or to choose tent ground; and each side should be +satisfied with what the drawing of the lots gave them. +Accordingly the lots were made and marked. Harald said to +Gyrger, "Let me see what mark thou hast put upon thy lot, that +we may not both mark our lots in the same way." He did so. Then +Harald marked his lot, and put it into the box along with the +other. The man who was to draw out the lots then took up one of +the lots between his fingers, held it up in the air, and said, +"This lot shall be the first to ride, and to row, and to take +place in harbour and on the tent field." Harald seized his band, +snatched the die, and threw it into the sea, and called out, +"That was our lot!" Gyrger said, "Why did you not let other +people see it?" Harald replies, "Look at the one remaining in +the box, -- there you see your own mark upon it." Accordingly +the lot which was left behind was examined, and all men saw that +Gyrger's mark was upon it, and accordingly the judgment was given +that the Varings had gained the first choice in all they had been +quarrelling about. There were many things they quarrelled about, +but the end always was that Harald got his own way. + + + +5. HARALD'S EXPEDITION IN THE LAND OF THE SARACENS (SERKLAND). + +They went out all on a campaign in summer. When the whole army +was thus assembled Harald kept his men out of the battle, or +wherever he saw the least danger, under pretext of saving his +men; but where he was alone with his own men only, he fought so +desperately that they must either come off victorious or die. It +thus happened often that when he commanded the army he gained +victories, while Gyrger could do nothing. The troops observed +this, and insisted they would be more successful if Harald alone +was chief of the whole army, and upbraided the general with never +effecting anything, neither himself, nor his people. Gyrger +again said that the Varings would give him no assistance, and +ordered Harald to go with his men somewhere else, and he, with +the rest of his army, would win what they could. Harald +accordingly left the army with the Varings and the Latin men, and +Gyrger on his side went off with the Greek troops. Then it was +seen what each could do. Harald always gained victories and +booty; but the Greeks went home to Constantinople with their +army, all except a few brave men, who, to gain booty and money, +joined themselves to Harald, and took him for their leader. He +then went with his troops westward to Africa, which the Varings +call Serkland, where he was strengthened with many men. In +Serkland he took eighty castles, some of which surrendered, and +others were stormed. He then went to Sicily. So says Thiodolf: +-- + + "The serpent's bed of glowing gold + He hates -- the generous king, the bold! + He who four score towers laid low, + Ta'en from the Saracenic foe. + Before upon Sicilian plains, + Shield joined to shield, the fight he gains, + The victory at Hild's war game; + And now the heathens dread his name." + +So says also Illuge Bryndala-skald: -- + + "For Michael's empire Harald fought, + And southern lands to Michael brought; + So Budle's son his friendship showed + When he brought friends to his abode." + +Here it is said that Michael was king of the Greeks at that time. +Harald remained many years in Africa, where he gathered great +wealth in gold, jewels, and all sorts of precious things; and all +the wealth he gathered there which he did not need for his +expenses, he sent with trusty men of his own north to Novgorod to +King Jarisleif's care and keeping. He gathered together there +extraordinary treasure, as is reasonable to suppose; for he had +the plundering of the part of the world richest in gold and +valuable things, and he had done such great deeds as with truth +are related, such as taking eighty strongholds by his valour. + + + +6. BATTLE IN SICILY. + +Now when Harald came to Sicily he plundered there also, and sat +down with his army before a strong and populous castle. He +surrounded the castle; but the walls were so thick there was no +possibility of breaking into it, and the people of the castle had +enough of provisions, and all that was necessary for defence. +Then Harald hit upon an expedient. He made his bird-catchers +catch the small birds which had their nests within the castle, +but flew into the woods by day to get food for their young. He +had small splinters of tarred wood bound upon the backs of the +birds, smeared these over with wax and sulphur, and set fire to +them. As soon as the birds were let loose they all flew at once +to the castle to their young, and to their nests, which they had +under the house roofs that were covered with reeds or straw. The +fire from the birds seized upon the house roofs; and although +each bird could only carry a small burden of fire, yet all at +once there was a mighty flame, caused by so many birds carrying +fire with them and spreading it widely among the house roofs. +Thus one house after the other was set on fire, until the castle +itself was in flames. Then the people came out of the castle and +begged for mercy; the same men who for many days had set at +defiance the Greek army and its leader. Harald granted life and +safety to all who asked quarter, and made himself master of the +place. + + + +7. BATTLE AT ANOTHER CASTLE. + +There was another castle before which Harald had come with his +army. This castle was both full of people and so strong, that +there was no hope of breaking into it. The castle stood upon a +flat hard plain. Then Harald undertook to dig a passage from a +place where a stream ran in a bed so deep that it could not be +seen from the castle. They threw out all the earth into the +stream, to be carried away by the water. At this work they +laboured day and night, and relieved each other in gangs; while +the rest of the army went the whole day against the castle, where +the castle people shot through their loop-holes. They shot at +each other all day in this way, and at night they slept on both +sides. Now when Harald perceived that his underground passage +was so long that it must be within the castle walls, he ordered +his people to arm themselves. It was towards daybreak that they +went into the passage. When they got to the end of it they dug +over their heads until they came upon stones laid in lime which +was the floor of a stone hall. They broke open the floor and +rose into the hall. There sat many of the castle-men eating and +drinking, and not in the least expecting such uninvited wolves; +for the Varings instantly attacked them sword in hand, and killed +some, and those who could get away fled. The Varings pursued +them; and some seized the castle gate, and opened it, so that the +whole body of the army got in. The people of the castle fled; +but many asked quarter from the troops, which was granted to all +who surrendered. In this way Harald got possession of the place, +and found an immense booty in it. + + + +8. BATTLE AT A THIRD CASTLE. + +They came to a third castle, the greatest and strongest of them +all, and also the richest in property and the fullest of people. +Around this castle there were great ditches, so that it evidently +could not be taken by the same device as the former; and they lay +a long time before it without doing anything. When the castle- +men saw this they became bolder, drew up their array on the +castle walls, threw open the castle gates, and shouted to the +Varings, urging them, and jeering at them, and telling them to +come into the castle, and that they were no more fit for battle +than so many poultry. Harald told his men to make as if they did +not know what to do, or did not understand what was said. "For," +says he, "if we do make an assault we can effect nothing, as they +can throw their weapons under their feet among us; and if we get +in the castle with a party of our people, they have it in their +power to shut them in. and shut out the others; for they have all +the castle gates beset with men. We shall therefore show them +the same scorn they show us, and let them see we do not fear +them. Our men shall go out upon the plain nearest to the castle; +taking care, however, to keep out of bow-shot. All our men shall +go unarmed, and be playing with each other, so that the castle- +men may see we do not regard them or their array." Thus it went +on for some days, without anything being done. + + + +9. OF ULF AND HALDOR. + +Two Iceland men were then with Harald; the one was Haldor (1), a +son of the gode Snorre, who brought this account to Iceland; the +other was Ulf Uspakson, a grandson of Usvifer Spake. Both were +very strong men, bold under arms, and Harald's best friends; and +both were in this play. Now when some days were passed the +castle people showed more courage, and would go without weapons +upon the castle wall, while the castle gates were standing open. +The Varings observing this, went one day to their sports with the +sword under their cloaks, and the helmet under their hats. After +playing awhile they observed that the castle people were off +their guard; and instantly seizing their weapons, they made at +the castle gate. When the men of the castle saw this they went +against them armed completely, and a battle began in the castle +gate. The Varings had no shields, but wrapped their cloaks round +their left arms. Some of them were wounded, some killed, and all +stood in great danger. Now came Harald with the men who had +remained in the camp, to the assistance of his people; and the +castle-men had now got out upon the walls, from which they shot +and threw stones down upon them; so that there was a severe +battle, and those who were in the castle gates thought that help +was brought them slower than they could have wished. When Harald +came to the castle gate his standard-bearer fell, and Harald said +to Haldor, "Do thou take up the banner now." Haldor took up the +banner, and said foolishly, "Who will carry the banner before +thee, if thou followest it so timidly as thou hast done for a +while?" But these were words more of anger than of truth; for +Harald was one of the boldest of men under arms. Then they +pressed in, and had a hard battle in the castle; and the end was +that Harald gained the victory and took the castle. Haldor was +much wounded in the face, and it gave him great pain as long as +he lived. + + +ENDNOTES: +(1) One of the descendants of this Haldor was Snorre Sturlason, + the author of "Heimskring1a". + + + +10. BATTLE AT A FOURTH CASTLE. + +The fourth castle which Harald came to was the greatest of all we +have been speaking about. It was so strong that there was no +possibility of breaking into it. They surrounded the castle, so +that no supplies could get into it. When they had remained here +a short time Harald fell sick, and he betook himself to his bed. +He had his tent put up a little from the camp, for he found +quietness and rest out of the clamour and clang of armed men. +His men went usually in companies to or from him to hear his +orders; and the castle people observing there was something new +among the Varings, sent out spies to discover what this might +mean. When the spies came back to the castle they had to tell of +the illness of the commander of the Varings, and that no assault +on that account had been made on the castle. A while after +Harald's strength began to fail, at which his men were very +melancholy and cast down; all which was news to the castle-men. +At last Harald's sickness increased so rapidly that his death was +expected through all the army. Thereafter the Varings went to +the castle-men; told them, in a parley, of the death of their +commander; and begged of the priests to grant him burial in the +castle. When the castle people heard this news, there were many +among them who ruled over cloisters or other great establishments +within the place, and who were very eager to get the corpse for +their church, knowing that upon that there would follow very rich +presents. A great many priests, therefore, clothed themselves in +all their robes, and went out of the castle with cross and shrine +and relics and formed a beautiful procession. The Varings also +made a great burial. The coffin was borne high in the air, and +over it was a tent of costly linen and before it were carried +many banners. Now when the corpse was brought within the castle +gate the Varings set down the coffin right across the entry, +fixed a bar to keep the gates open, and sounded to battle with +all their trumpets, and drew their swords. The whole army of the +Varings, fully armed. rushed from the camp to the assault of the +castle with shout and cry; and the monks and other priests who +had gone to meet the corpse and had striven with each other who +should be the first to come out and take the offering at the +burial, were now striving much more who should first get away +from the Varings; for they killed before their feet every one who +was nearest, whether clerk or unconsecrated. The Varings +rummaged so well this castle that they killed all the men, +pillaged everything and made an enormous booty. + + + +11. OF HARALD. + +Harald was many years in these campaigns, both in Serkland and +in Sicily. Then he came back to Constantinople with his troops +and stayed there but a little time before he began his expedition +to Jerusalem. There he left the pay he had received from the +Greek emperor and all the Varings who accompanied him did the +same. It is said that on all these expeditions Harald had fought +eighteen regular battles. So says Thiodolf: -- + + "Harald the Stern ne'er allowed + Peace to his foemen, false and proud; + In eighteen battles, fought and won, + The valour of the Norseman shone. + The king, before his home return, + Oft dyed the bald head of the erne + With bloody specks, and o'er the waste + The sharp-claw'd wolf his footsteps traced." + + + +10. HARALD'S EXPEDITION TO PALESTINE. + +Harald went with his men to the land of Jerusalem and then up to +the city of Jerusalem, and wheresoever he came in the land all +the towns and strongholds were given up to him. So says the +skald Stuf, who had heard the king himself relate these tidings: +-- + + "He went, the warrior bold and brave, + Jerusalem, the holy grave, + And the interior of the land, + To bring under the Greeks' command; + And by the terror of his name + Under his power the country came, + Nor needed wasting fire and sword + To yield obediance to his word." + +Here it is told that this land came without fire and sword under +Harald's command. He then went out to Jordan and bathed therein, +according to the custom of other pilgrims. Harald gave great +gifts to our Lord's grave, to the Holy Cross, and other holy +relics in the land of Jerusalem. He also cleared the whole road +all the way out to Jordan, by killing the robbers and other +disturbers of the peace. So says the skald Stuf: -- + + "The Agder king cleared far and wide + Jordan's fair banks on either side; + The robber-bands before him fled, + And his great name was widely spread. + The wicked people of the land + Were punished here by his dread hand, + And they hereafter will not miss + Much worse from Jesus Christ than this." + + + +13. HARALD PUT IN PRISON. + +Thereafter he went back to Constantinople. When Harald returned +to Constantinople from Jerusalem he longed to return to the North +to his native land; and when he heard that Magnus Olafson, his +brother's son, had become king both of Norway and Denmark, he +gave up his command in the Greek service. And when the empress +Zoe heard of this she became angry and raised an accusation +against Harald that he had misapplied the property of the Greek +emperor which he had received in the campaigns in which he was +commander of the army. There was a young and beautiful girl +called Maria, a brother's daughter of the empress Zoe, and Harald +had paid his addresses to her; but the empress had given him a +refusal. The Varings, who were then in pay in Constantinople, +have told here in the North that there went a report among +well-informed people that the empress Zoe herself wanted Harald +for her husband, and that she chiefly blamed Harald for his +determination to leave Constantinople, although another reason +was given out to the public. Constantinus Monomachus was at +that time emperor of the Greeks and ruled along with Zoe. On +this account the Greek emperor had Harald made prisoner and +carried to prison. + + + +14. KING OLAF'S MIRACLE AND BLINDING THE GREEK EMPEROR. + +When Harald drew near to the prison King Olaf the Saint stood +before him and said he would assist him. On that spot of the +street a chapel has since been built and consecrated to Saint +Olaf and which chapel has stood there ever since. The prison was +so constructed that there was a high tower open above, but a door +below to go into it from the street. Through it Harald was +thrust in, along with Haldor and Ulf. Next night a lady of +distinction with two servants came, by the help of ladders, to +the top of the tower, let down a rope into the prison and hauled +them up. Saint Olaf had formerly cured this lady of a sickness +and he had appeared to her in a vision and told her to deliver +his brother. Harald went immediately to the Varings, who all +rose from their seats when he came in and received him with joy. +The men armed themselves forthwith and went to where the emperor +slept. They took the emperor prisoner and put out both the eyes +of him. So says Thorarin Skeggjason in his poem: -- + + "Of glowing gold that decks the hand + The king got plenty in this land; + But it's great emperor in the strife + Was made stone-blind for all his life." + +So says Thiodolf, the skald, also: -- + + "He who the hungry wolf's wild yell + Quiets with prey, the stern, the fell, + Midst the uproar of shriek and shout + Stung tho Greek emperor's eyes both out: + The Norse king's mark will not adorn, + The Norse king's mark gives cause to mourn; + His mark the Eastern king must bear, + Groping his sightless way in fear." + +In these two songs, and many others, it is told that Harald +himself blinded the Greek emperor; and they would surely have +named some duke, count, or other great man, if they had not known +this to be the true account; and King Harald himself and other +men who were with him spread the account. + + + +15. HARALD'S JOURNEY FROM CONSTANTINOPLE. + +The same night King Harald and his men went to the house where +Maria slept and carried her away by force. Then they went down +to where the galleys of the Varings lay, took two of them and +rowed out into Sjavid sound. When they came to the place where +the iron chain is drawn across the sound, Harald told his men to +stretch out at their oars in both galleys; but the men who were +not rowing to run all to the stern of the galley, each with his +luggage in his hand. The galleys thus ran up and lay on the iron +chain. As soon as they stood fast on it, and would advance no +farther, Harald ordered all the men to run forward into the bow. +Then the galley, in which Harald was, balanced forwards and swung +down over the chain; but the other, which remained fast athwart +the chain, split in two, by which many men were lost; but some +were taken up out of the sound. Thus Harald escaped out of +Constantinople and sailed thence into the Black Sea; but before +he left the land he put the lady ashore and sent her back with a +good escort to Constantinople and bade her tell her relation, the +Empress Zoe, how little power she had over Harald, and how little +the empress could have hindered him from taking the lady. Harald +then sailed northwards in the Ellipalta and then all round the +Eastern empire. On this voyage Harald composed sixteen songs for +amusement and all ending with the same words. This is one of +them: -- + + "Past Sicily's wide plains we flew, + A dauntless, never-wearied crew; + Our viking steed rushed through the sea, + As viking-like fast, fast sailed we. + Never, I think, along this shore + Did Norsemen ever sail before; + Yet to the Russian queen, I fear, + My gold-adorned, I am not dear." + +With this he meant Ellisif, daughter of King Jarisleif in +Novgorod. + + + +16. OF KING HARALD. + +When Harald came to Novgorod King Jarisleif received him in the +most friendly way and he remained there all winter (A.D. 1045). +Then he took into his own keeping all the gold and the many kinds +of precious things which he had sent there from Constantinople +and which together made up so vast a treasure that no man in the +Northern lands ever saw the like of it in one man's possession. +Harald had been three times in the poluta-svarf while he was in +Constantinople. It is the custom, namely, there, that every time +one of the Greek emperors dies, the Varings are allowed +poluta-svarf; that is, they may go through all the emperor's +palaces where his treasures are and each may take and keep what +he can lay hold of while he is going through them. + + + +17. KING HARALD'S MARRIAGE. + +This winter King Jarisleif gave Harald his daughter Elisabeth in +marriage. She is called by the Northmen Ellisif. This is +related by Stuf the Blind, thus: -- + + "Agder's chief now got the queen + Who long his secret love had been. + Of gold, no doubt, a mighty store + The princess to her husband bore." + +In spring he began his journey from Novgorod and came to +Aldeigjuborg, where he took shipping and sailed from the East in +summer. He turned first to Svithjod and came to Sigtuna. So +says Valgard o' Val: -- + + "The fairest cargo ship e'er bore, + From Russia's distant eastern shore + The gallant Harald homeward brings -- + Gold, and a fame that skald still sings. + The ship through dashing foam he steers, + Through the sea-rain to Svithjod veers, + And at Sigtuna's grassy shores + His gallant vessel safely moors." + + + +18. THE LEAGUE BETWEEN KING HARALD AND SVEIN ULFSON. + +Harald found there before him Svein Ulfson, who the autumn before +(A.D. 1045) had fled from King Magnus at Helganes; and when they +met they were very friendly on both sides. The Swedish king, +Olaf the Swede, was brother of the mother of Ellisif, Harald's +wife; and Astrid, the mother of Svein, was King Olaf's sister. +Harald and Svein entered into friendship with each other and +confirmed it by oath. All the Swedes were friendly to Svein, +because he belonged to the greatest family in the country; and +thus all the Swedes were Harald's friends and helpers also, for +many great men were connected with him by relationship. So says +Thiodolf: + + "Cross the East sea the vessel flew, -- + Her oak-keel a white furrow drew + From Russia's coast to Swedish land. + Where Harald can great help command. + The heavy vessel's leeward side + Was hid beneath the rushing tide; + While the broad sail and gold-tipped mast + Swung to and fro in the hard blast." + + + +19. KING HARALD'S FORAY. + +Then Harald and Svein fitted out ships and gathered together a +great force; and when the troops were ready they sailed from the +East towards Denmark. So says Valgard: -- + + "Brave Yngve! to the land decreed + To thee by fate, with tempest speed + The winds fly with thee o'er the sea -- + To thy own udal land with thee. + As past the Scanlan plains they fly, + The gay ships glances 'twixt sea and sky, + And Scanian brides look out, and fear + Some ill to those they hold most dear." + +They landed first in Seeland with their men and herried and +burned in the land far and wide. Then they went to Fyen, where +they also landed and wasted. So says Valgard: -- + + "Harald! thou hast the isle laid waste, + The Seeland men away hast chased, + And the wild wolf by daylight roams + Through their deserted silent homes. + Fiona too could not withstand + The fury of thy wasting hand. + Helms burst, shields broke, -- Fiona's bounds. + Were filled with death's terrific sounds. + + "Red flashing in the southern sky, + The clear flame sweeping broad and high, + From fair Roeskilde's lofty towers, + On lowly huts its fire-rain pours; + And shows the housemates' silent train + In terror scouring o'er the plain, + Seeking the forest's deepest glen, + To house with wolves, and 'scape from men. + + "Few were they of escape to tell, + For, sorrow-worn, the people fell: + The only captives form the fray + Were lovely maidens led away. + And in wild terror to the strand, + Down to the ships, the linked band + Of fair-haired girls is roughly driven, + Their soft skins by the irons riven." + + + +20. KING MAGNUS'S LEVY. + +King Magnus Olafson sailed north to Norway in the autumn after +the battle at Helganes (A.D. 1045). There he hears the news that +Harald Sigurdson, his relation, was come to Svithjod; and +moreover that Svein Ulfson and Harald had entered into a friendly +bond with each other and gathered together a great force, +intending first to subdue Denmark and then Norway. King Magnus +then ordered a general levy over all Norway and he soon collected +a great army. He hears then that Harald and Svein were come to +Denmark and were burning and laying waste the land and that the +country people were everywhere submitting to them. It was also +told that King Harald was stronger and stouter than other men, +and so wise withal that nothing was impossible to him, and he had +always the victory when he fought a battle; and he was also so +rich in gold that no man could compare with him in wealth. +Thiodolf speaks thus of it: + + "Norsemen, who stand the sword of foe + Like forest-stems unmoved by blow! + My hopes are fled, no peace is near, -- + People fly here and there in fear. + On either side of Seeland's coast + A fleet appears -- a white winged host; + Magnus form Norway takes his course, + Harald from Sweden leads his force. + + + +21. TREATY BETWEEN HARALD AND MAGNUS. + +Those of Harald's men who were in his counsel said that it would +be a great misfortune if relations like Harald and Magnus should +fight and throw a death-spear against each other; and therefore +many offered to attempt bringing about some agreement between +them, and the kings, by their persuasion, agreed to it. +Thereupon some men were sent off in a light boat, in which they +sailed south in all haste to Denmark, and got some Danish men, +who were proven friends of King Magnus, to propose this matter to +Harald. This affair was conducted very secretly. Now when +Harald heard that his relation, King Magnus, would offer him a +league and partition, so that Harald should have half of Norway +with King Magnus, and that they should divide all their movable +property into two equal parts, he accepted the proposal, and the +people went back to King Magnus with this answer. + + + +22. TREATY BETWEEN HARALD AND SVEIN BROKEN. + +A little after this it happened that Harald and Svein one evening +were sitting at table drinking and talking together, and Svein +asked Harald what valuable piece of all his property he esteemed +the most. + +He answered, it was his banner Land-waster. + +Svein asked what was there remarkable about it, that he valued it +so highly. + +Harald replied, it was a common saying that he must gain the +victory before whom that banner is borne, and it had turned out +so ever since he had owned it. + +Svein replies, "I will begin to believe there is such virtue in +the banner when thou hast held three battles with thy relation +Magnus, and hast gained them all." + +Then answered Harald with an angry voice, "I know my relationship +to King Magnus, without thy reminding me of it; and although we +are now going in arms against him, our meeting may be of a better +sort." + +Svein changed colour, and said, "There are people, Harald, who +say that thou hast done as much before as only to hold that part +of an agreement which appears to suit thy own interest best." + +Harald answers, "It becomes thee ill to say that I have not stood +by an agreement, when I know what King Magnus could tell of thy +proceedings with him." + +Thereupon each went his own way. At night, when Harald went to +sleep within the bulwarks of his vessel, he said to his footboy, +"I will not sleep in my bed to-night, for I suspect there may be +treachery abroad. I observed this evening that my friend Svein +was very angry at my free discourse. Thou shalt keep watch, +therefore, in case anything happen in the night." Harald then +went away to sleep somewhere else, and laid a billet of wood in +his place. At midnight a boat rowed alongside to the ship's +bulwark; a man went on board, lifted up the cloth of the tent of +the bulwarks, went up, and struck in Harald's bed with a great +ax, so that it stood fast in the lump of wood. The man instantly +ran back to his boat again, and rowed away in the dark night, for +the moon was set; but the axe remained sticking in the piece of +wood as an evidence. Thereupon Harald waked his men and let them +know the treachery intended. "We can now see sufficiently," said +he, "that we could never match Svein if he practises such +deliberate treachery against us; so it will be best for us to get +away from this place while we can. Let us cast loose our vessel +and row away as quietly as possible." They did so, and rowed +during the night northwards along the land; and then proceeded +night and day until they came to King Magnus, where he lay with +his army. Harald went to his relation Magnus, and there was a +joyful meeting betwixt them. So says Thiodolf: -- + + "The far-known king the order gave, + In silence o'er the swelling wave, + With noiseless oars, his vessels gay + From Denmark west to row away; + And Olaf's son, with justice rare, + Offers with him the realm to share. + People, no doubt, rejoiced to find + The kings had met in peaceful mind." + +Afterwards the two relatives conversed with each other and all +was settled by peaceful agreement. + + + +23. KING MAGNUS GIVES HARALD HALF OF NORWAY. + +King Magnus lay at the shore and had set up tents upon the land. +There he invited his relation, King Harald, to be his guest at +table; and Harald went to the entertainment with sixty of his men +and was feasted excellently. Towards the end of the day King +Magnus went into the tent where Harald sat and with him went men +carrying parcels consisting of clothes and arms. Then the king +went to the man who sat lowest and gave him a good sword, to the +next a shield, to the next a kirtle, and so on, -- clothes, or +weapons, or gold; to all he gave one or the other valuable gift, +and the more costly to the more distinguished men among them. +Then he placed himself before his relation Harald, holding two +sticks in his hand, and said, "Which of these two sticks wilt +thou have, my friend?" + +Harald replies, "The one nearest me." + +"Then," said King Magnus, "with this stick I give thee half of +the Norwegian power, with all the scat and duties, and all the +domains thereunto belonging, with the condition that everywhere +thou shalt be as lawful king in Norway as I am myself; but when +we are both together in one place, I shall be the first man in +seat, service and salutation; and if there be three of us +together of equal dignity, that I shall sit in the middle, and +shall have the royal tent-ground and the royal landing-place. +Thou shalt strengthen and advance our kingdom, in return for +making thee that man in Norway whom we never expected any man +should be so long as our head was above ground." Then Harald +stood up, and thanked him for the high title and dignity. +Thereupon they both sat down, and were very merry together. The +same evening Harald and his men returned to their ships. + + + +24. HARALD GIVES MAGNUS THE HALF OF HIS TREASURES. + +The following morning King Magnus ordered the trumpets to sound +to a General Thing of the people; and when it was seated, he made +known to the whole army the gift he had given to his relation +Harald. Thorer of Steig gave Harald the title of King there at +the Thing; and the same day King Harald invited King Magnus to +table with him, and he went with sixty men to King Harald's +land-tent, where he had prepared a feast. The two kings sat +together on a high-seat, and the feast was splendid; everything +went on with magnificence, and the kings' were merry and glad. +Towards the close of the day King Harald ordered many caskets to +be brought into the tent, and in like manner people bore in +weapons, clothes and other sorts of valuables; and all these King +Harald divided among King Magnus's men who were at the feast. +Then he had the caskets opened and said to King Magnus, +"Yesterday you gave us a large kingdom, which your hand won from +your and our enemies, and took us in partnership with you, which +was well done; and this has cost you much. Now we on our side +have been in foreign parts, and oft in peril of life, to gather +together the gold which you here see. Now, King Magnus, I will +divide this with you. We shall both own this movable property, +and each have his equal share of it, as each has his equal half +share of Norway. I know that our dispositions are different, as +thou art more liberal than I am; therefore let us divide this +property equally between us, so that each may have his share free +to do with as he will." Then Harald had a large ox-hide spread +out, and turned the gold out of the caskets upon it. Then scales +and weights were taken and the gold separated and divided by +weight into equal parts; and all people wondered exceedingly that +so much gold should have come together in one place in the +northern countries. But it was understood that it was the Greek +emperor's property and wealth; for, as all people say, there are +whole houses there full of red gold. The kings were now very +merry. Then there appeared an ingot among the rest as big as a +man's hand. Harald took it in his hands and said, "Where is the +gold, friend Magnus, that thou canst show against this piece?" + +King Magnus replied, "So many disturbances and levies have been +in the country that almost all the gold and silver I could lay up +is gone. I have no more gold in my possession than this ring." +And he took the ring off his hand and gave it to Harald. + +Harald looked at it, and said, "That is but little gold, friend. +for the king who owns two kingdoms; and yet some may doubt +whether thou art rightful owner of even this ring." + +Then King Magnus replied, after a little reflection, "If I be not +rightful owner of this ring, then I know not what I have got +right to; for my father, King Olaf the Saint, gave me this ring +at our last parting." + +Then said King Harald, laughing, "It is true, King Magnus, what +thou sayest. Thy father gave thee this ring, but he took the +ring from my father for some trifling cause; and in truth it was +not a good time for small kings in Norway when thy father was in +full power." + +King Harald gave Thorer of Steig at that feast a bowl of mountain +birch, that was encircled with a silver ring and had a silver +handle, both which parts were gilt; and the bowl was filled with +money of pure silver. With that came also two gold rings, which +together stood for a mark. He gave him also his cloak of dark +purple lined with white skins within, and promised him besides +his friendship and great dignity. Thorgils Snorrason, an +intelligent man, says he has seen an altar-cloth that was made of +this cloak; and Gudrid, a daughter of Guthorm, the son of Thorer +of Steig, said, according to Thorgil's account, that she had seen +this bowl in her father Guthorm's possession. Bolverk also tells +of these matters: -- + + "Thou, generous king, I have been told, + For the green land hast given gold; + And Magnus got a mighty treasure, + That thou one half might'st rule at pleasure. + The people gained a blessed peace, + Which 'twixt the kings did never cease; + While Svein, disturbed with war's alarms, + Had his folk always under arms." + + + +25. OF KING MAGNUS. + +The kings Magnus and Harald both ruled in Norway the winter after +their agreement (A.D. 1047), and each had his court. In winter +they went around the Upland country in guest-quarters; and +sometimes they were both together, sometimes each was for +himself. They went all the way north to Throndhjem, to the town +of Nidaros. King Magnus had taken special care of the holy +remains of King Olaf after he came to the country; had the hair +and nails clipped every twelve month, and kept himself the keys +that opened the shrine. Many miracles were worked by King Olaf's +holy remains. It was not long before there was a breach in the +good understanding between the two kings, as many were so +mischievous as to promote discord between them. + + + +26. OF SVEIN ULFSON. + +Svein Ulfson remained behind in the harbour after Harald had gone +away, and inquired about his proceedings. When he heard at last +of Magnus and Harald having agreed and joined their forces, he +steered with his forces eastward along Scania, and remained there +until towards winter, when he heard that King Magnus and King +Harald had gone northwards to Norway. Then Svein, with his +troops, came south to Denmark and took all the royal income that +winter (A.D. 1047). + + + +27. OF THE LEVY OF THE TWO KINGS. + +Towards spring (A.D. 1047) King Magnus and his relation, King +Harald, ordered a levy in Norway. It happened once that the +kings lay all night in the same harbour and next day, King +Harald, being first ready, made sail. Towards evening he brought +up in the harbour in which Magnus and his retinue had intended to +pass the night. Harald laid his vessel in the royal ground, and +there set up his tents. King Magnus got under sail later in the +day and came into the harbour just as King Harald had done +pitching his tents. They saw then that King Harald had taken up +the king's ground and intended to lie there. After King Magnus +had ordered the sails to be taken in, he said, "The men will now +get ready along both sides of the vessel to lay out their oars, +and some will open the hatches and bring up the arms and arm +themselves; for, if they will not make way for us, we will fight +them." Now when King Harald sees that King Magnus will give him +battle, he says to his men, "Cut our land-fastenings and back the +ship out of the ground, for friend Magnus is in a passion." They +did so and laid the vessel out of the ground and King Magnus laid +his vessel in it. When they were now ready on both sides with +their business, King Harald went with a few men on board of King +Magnus's ship. King Magnus received him in a friendly way, and +bade him welcome. King Harald answered, "I thought we were come +among friends; but just now I was in doubt if ye would have it +so. But it is a truth that childhood is hasty, and I will only +consider it as a childish freak." Then said King Magnus, "It is +no childish whim, but a trait of my family, that I never forget +what I have given, or what I have not given. If this trifle had +been settled against my will, there would soon have followed' +some other discord like it. In all particulars I will hold the +agreement between us; but in the same way we will have all that +belongs to us by that right." King Harald coolly replied, that +it is an old custom for the wisest to give way; and returned to +his ship. From such circumstances it was found difficult to +preserve good understanding between the kings. King Magnus's men +said he was in the right; but others, less wise, thought there +was some slight put upon Harald in the business. King Harald's +men, besides, insisted that the agreement was only that King +Magnus should have the preference of the harbour-ground when they +arrived together, but that King Harald was not bound to draw out +of his place when he came first. They observed, also, that King +Harald had conducted himself well and wisely in the matter. +Those who viewed the business in the worst light insisted that +King Magnus wanted to break the agreement, and that he had done +King Harald injustice, and put an affront on him. Such disputes +were talked over so long among foolish people, that the spirit of +disagreeing affected the kings themselves. Many other things +also occurred, in which the kings appeared determined to have +each his own way; but of these little will be set down here. + + + +25. KING MAGNUS THE GOOD'S DEATH. + +The kings, Magnus and Harald, sailed with their fleet south to +Denmark; and when Svein heard of their approach, he fled away +east to Scania. Magnus and Harald remained in Denmark late in +summer, and subdued the whole country. In autumn they were in +Jutland. One night, as King Magnus lay in his bed, it appeared +to him in a dream that he was in the same place as his father, +Saint Olaf, and that he spoke to him thus: "Wilt thou choose, my +son, to follow me, or to become a mighty king, and have long +life; but to commit a crime which thou wilt never be able to +expiate?" He thought he made the answer, "Do thou, father, +choose for me." Then the king thought the answer was, "Thou +shalt follow me." King Magnus told his men this dream. Soon +after he fell sick and lay at a place called Sudathorp. When he +was near his death he sent his brother, Thorer, with tokens to +Svein Ulfson, with the request to give Thorer the aid he might +require. In this message King Magnus also gave the Danish +dominions to Svein after his death; and said it was just that +Harald should rule over Norway and Svein over Denmark. Then King +Magnus the Good died (A.D. 1047), and great was the sorrow of all +the people at his death. So says Od Kikinaskald: -- + + "The tears o'er good King Magnus' bier, + The people's tears, were all sincere: + Even they to whom he riches gave + Carried him heavily to the grave. + All hearts were struck at the king's end; + His house-thralls wept as for a friend; + His court-men oft alone would muse, + As pondering o'er unthought of news." + + + +29. KING MAGNUS'S FUNERAL. + +After this event King Harald held a Thing of his men-at-arms, and +told them his intention to go with the army to Viborg Thing, and +make himself be proclaimed king over the whole Danish dominions, +to which, he said, he had hereditary right after his relation +Magnus, as well as to Norway. He therefore asked his men for +their aid, and said he thought the Norway man should show himself +always superior to the Dane. Then Einar Tambaskelfer replies +that he considered it a greater duty to bring his foster-son King +Magnus's corpse to the grave, and lay it beside his father, King +Olaf's, north in Throndhjem town, than to be fighting abroad and +taking another king's dominions and property. He ended his +speech with saying that he would rather follow King Magnus dead +than any other king alive. Thereupon he had the body adorned in +the most careful way, so that most magnificent preparations were +made in the king's ship. Then all the Throndhjem people and all +the Northmen made themselves ready to return home with the king's +body, and so the army was broken up. King Harald saw then that +it was better for him to return to Norway to secure that kingdom +first, and to assemble men anew; and so King Harald returned to +Norway with all his army. As soon as he came to Norway he held a +Thing with the people of the country, and had himself proclaimed +king everywhere. He proceeded thus from the East through Viken, +and in every district in Norway he was named king. Einar +Tambaskelfer, and with him all the Throndhjem troops, went with +King Magnus's body and transported it to the town of Nidaros, +where it was buried in St. Clement's church, where also was the +shrine of King Olaf the Saint. King Magnus was of middle size, +of long and clear-complexioned countenance, and light hair, spoke +well and hastily, was brisk in his actions, and extremely +generous. He was a great warrior, and remarkably bold in arms. +He was the most popular of kings, prized even by enemies as well +as friends. + + + +30. OF SVEIN ULFSON. + +Svein Ulfson remained that autumn in Scania (A.D. 1047), and was +making ready to travel eastward to Sweden, with the intention of +renouncing the title of king he had assumed in Denmark; but just +as he was mounting his horse some men came riding to him with the +first news that King Magnus was dead, and all the Northmen had +left Denmark. Svein answered in haste, "I call God to witness +that I shall never again fly from the Danish dominions as long as +I live." Then he got on his horse and rode south into Scania, +where immediately many people crowded to him. That winter he +brought under his power all the Danish dominions, and all the +Danes took him for their king. Thorer, King Magnus's brother, +came to Svein in autumn with the message of King Magnus, as +before related, and was well received; and Thorer remained long +with Svein and was well taken care of. + + + +31. OF KING HARALD SIGURDSON. + +King Harald Sigurdson took the royal power over all Norway after +the death of King Magnus Olafson; and when he had reigned over +Norway one winter and spring was come (A.D. 1048), he ordered a +levy through all the land of one-half of all men and ships and +went south to Jutland. He herried and burned all summer wide +around in the land and came into Godnarfjord, where King Harald +made these verses: -- + + "While wives of husbands fondly dream, + Here let us anchor in the stream, + In Godnarfjord; we'll safely moor + Our sea-homes, and sleep quite secure." + +Then he spoke to Thiodolf, the skald, and asked him to add to it +what it wanted, and he sang: -- + + "In the next summer, I foresee, + Our anchorage in the South will be; + To hold our sea-homes on the ground, + More cold-tongued anchors will be found." + +To this Bolverk alludes in his song also, that Harald went to +Denmark the summer after King Magnus's death. Bolverk sings +thus: -- + + "Next summer thou the levy raised, + And seawards all the people gazed, + Where thy sea-steeds in sunshine glancing + Over the waves were gaily prancing; + While the deep ships that plunder bore + Seemed black specks from the distant shore. + The Danes, from banks or hillocks green, + Looked with dismay upon the scene." + + + +32. OF THORKEL GEYSA'S DAUGHTERS. + +Then they burned the house of Thorkel Geysa, who was a great +lord, and his daughters they carried off bound to their ships. +They had made a great mockery the winter before of King Harald's +coming with war-ships against Denmark; and they cut their cheese +into the shape of anchors, and said such anchors might hold all +the ships of the Norway king. Then this was composed: -- + + "The Island-girls, we were told, + Made anchors all our fleet to hold: + Their Danish jest cut out in cheese + Did not our stern king's fancy please. + Now many a maiden fair, may be, + Sees iron anchors splash the sea, + Who will not wake a maid next morn + To laugh at Norway's ships in scorn." + +It is said that a spy who had seen the fleet of King Harald said +to Thorkel Geysa's daughters, "Ye said, Geysa's daughters, that +King Harald dared not come to Denmark." Dotta, Thorkel's +daughter, replied, "That was yesterday." Thorkel had to ransom +his daughters with a great sum. So says Grane: -- + + "The gold-adorned girl's eye + Through Hornskeg wood was never dry, + As down towards the sandy shore + The men their lovely prizes bore. + The Norway leader kept at bay + The foe who would contest the way, + And Dotta's father had to bring + Treasure to satisfy the king." + +King Harald plundered in Denmark all that summer, and made +immense booty; but he had not any footing in the land that summer +in Denmark. He went to Norway again in autumn and remained there +all winter (A.D. 1049). + + + +33. MARRIAGES AND CHILDREN OF HARALD HARDRADE. + +The winter after King Magnus the Good died, King Harald took +Thora, daughter of Thorberg Arnason, and they had two sons; the +oldest called Magnus, and the other Olaf. King Harald and Queen +Ellisif had two daughters; the one Maria, the other Ingegerd. +The spring after the foray which has just been related King +Harald ordered the people out and went with them to Denmark (A.D. +1049), and herried there, and did so summer after summer +thereafter. So says Stuf, the skald: -- + + "Falster lay waste, as people tell, -- + The raven in other isles fared well. + The Danes were everywhere in fear, + For the dread foray every year." + + + +34. OF THE ARMAMENTS OF SVEIN ULFSON AND HARALD. + +King Svein ruled over all the Danish dominions after King +Magnus's death. He sat quiet all the winter; but in summer he +lay out in his ships with all his people and it was said he would +go north to Norway with the Danish army and make not less havoc +there than King Harald had made in Denmark. King Svein proposed +to King Harald in winter (A.D. 1049) to meet him the following +summer at the Gaut river and fight until in the battle-field +their differences were ended, or they were settled peacefully. +They made ready on both sides all winter with their ships, and +called out in summer one-half of all the fighting men. The same +summer came Thorleik the Fair out of Iceland, and composed a poem +about King Svein Ulfson. He heard, when he arrived in Norway, +that King Harald had sailed south to the Gaut river against King +Svein. Then Thorleik sang this: -- + + "The wily Svein, I think, will meet + These inland Norsemen fleet to fleet; + The arrow-storm, and heaving sea, + His vantage-fight and field will be. + God only knows the end of strife, + Or which shall have his land and life; + This strife must come to such an end, + For terms will never bind King Svein." + +He also sang these verses: -- + + "Harald, whose red shield oft has shone + O'er herried coasts, and fields hard won, + Rides in hot wrath, and eager speeds + O'er the blue waves his ocean-steeds. + Svein, who in blood his arrows stains, + Brings o'er the ocean's heaving plains + His gold-beaked ships, which come in view + Out from the Sound with many a hue." + +King Harald came with his forces to the appointed meeting-place; +but there he heard that King Svein was lying with his fleet at +the south side of Seeland. Then King Harald divided his forces; +let the greater part of the bonde-troops return home; and took +with him his court-men, his lendermen, the best men-at-arms, and +all the bonde-troops who lived nearest to the Danish land. They +sailed over to Jutland to the south of Vendilskage, and so south +to Thioda; and over all they carried fire and sword. So says +Stuf, the skald: -- + + "In haste the men of Thyland fly + From the great monarch's threat'ning eye; + At the stern Harald's angry look + The boldest hearts in Denmark shook." + +They went forward all the way south to Heidaby, took the merchant +town and burnt it. Then one of Harald's men made the following +verses: -- + + "All Heidaby is burned down! + Strangers will ask where stood the town. + In our wild humour up it blazed, + And Svein looks round him all amazed. + All Heidaby is burned down! + From a far corner of the town + I saw, before the peep of morning, + Roofs, walls, and all in flame high burning." + +To this also Thorleik alludes in his verses, when he heard there +had been no battle at the Gaut river: -- + + "The stranger-warrior may inquire + Of Harald's men, why in his ire + On Heidaby his wrath he turns, + And the fair town to ashes burns? + Would that the day had never come + When Harald's ships returned home + From the East Sea, since now the town, + Without his gain, is burned down!" + + + +35. HARALD'S ESCAPE INTO THE JUTLAND SEA. + +Then King Harald sailed north and had sixty ships and the most of +them large and heavily laden with the booty taken in summer; and +as they sailed north past Thioda King Svein came down from the +land with a great force and he challenged King Harald to land and +fight. King Harald had little more than half the force of King +Svein and therefore he challenged Svein to fight at sea. So says +Thorleik the Fair: -- + + "Svein, who of all men under heaven + Has had the luckiest birth-hour given, + Invites his foemen to the field, + There to contest with blood-stained shield. + The king, impatient of delay, + Harald, will with his sea-hawks stay; + On board will fight, and fate decide + If Svein shall by his land abide." + +After that King Harald sailed north along Vendilskage; and the +wind then came against them, and they brought up under Hlesey, +where they lay all night. A thick fog lay upon the sea; and when +the morning came and the sun rose they saw upon the other side of +the sea as if many lights were burning. This was told to King +Harald; and he looked at it, and said immediately, "Strike the +tilts down on the ships and take to the oars. The Danish forces +are coming upon us, and the fog there where they are must have +cleared off, and the sun shines upon the dragon-heads of their +ships, which are gilded, and that is what we see." It was so as +he had said. Svein had come there with a prodigious armed force. +They rowed now on both sides all they could. The Danish ships +flew lighter before the oars; for the Northmen's ships were both +soaked with water and heavily laden, so that the Danes approached +nearer and nearer. Then Harald, whose own dragon-ship was the +last of the fleet, saw that he could not get away; so he ordered +his men to throw overboard some wood, and lay upon it clothes and +other good and valuable articles; and it was so perfectly calm +that these drove about with the tide. Now when the Danes saw +their own goods driving about on the sea, they who were in +advance turned about to save them; for they thought it was easier +to take what was floating freely about, than to go on board the +Northmen to take it. They dropped rowing and lost ground. Now +when King Svein came up to them with his ship, he urged them on, +saying it would be a great shame if they, with so great a force, +could not overtake and master so small a number. The Danes then +began again to stretch out lustily at their oars. When King +Harald saw that the Danish ships went faster he ordered his men +to lighten their ships, and cast overboard malt, wheat, bacon, +and to let their liquor run out, which helped a little. Then +Harald ordered the bulwarkscreens, the empty casks and puncheons +and the prisoners to be thrown overboard; and when all these were +driving about on the sea, Svein ordered help to be given to save +the men. This was done; but so much time was lost that they +separated from each other. The Danes turned back and the +Northmen proceeded on their way. So says Thorleik the Fair: -- + + "Svein drove his foes from Jutland's coast, -- + The Norsemen's ships would have been lost, + But Harald all his vessels saves, + Throwing his booty on the waves. + The Jutlanders saw, as he threw, + Their own goods floating in their view; + His lighten'd ships fly o'er the main + While they pick up their own again." + +King Svein returned southwards with his ships to Hlesey, where he +found seven ships of the Northmen, with bondes and men of the +levy. When King Svein came to them they begged for mercy, and +offered ransom for themselves. So says Thorleik the Fair: -- + + "The stern king's men good offers make, + If Svein will ransom for them take; + Too few to fight, they boldly say + Unequal force makes them give way. + The hasty bondes for a word + Would have betaken them to the sword, + And have prolonged a bloody strife -- + Such men can give no price for life." + + + +36. OF HARALD. + +King Harald was a great man, who ruled his kingdom well in home- +concerns. Very prudent was he, of good understanding; and it is +the universal opinion that no chief ever was in northern lands of +such deep judgment and ready counsel as Harald. He was a great +warrior; bold in arms; strong and expert in the use of his +weapons beyond any others, as has been before related, although +many of the feats of his manhood are not here written down. This +is owing partly to our uncertainty about them, partly to our wish +not to put stories into this book for which there is no +testimony. Although we have heard, many things talked about, and +even circumstantially related, yet we think it better that +something may be added to, than that it should be necessary to +take something away from our narrative. A great part of his +history is put in verse by Iceland men, which poems they +presented to him or his sons, and for which reason he was their +great friend. He was, indeed. a great friend to all the people +of that country; and once, when a very dear time set in, he +allowed four ships to transport meal to Iceland, and fixed that +the shippund should not be dearer than 100 ells of wadmal. He +permitted also all poor people, who could find provisions to keep +them on the voyage across the sea, to emigrate from Iceland to +Norway; and from that time there was better subsistence in the +country, and the seasons also turned out better. King Harold +also sent from Norway a bell for the church of which Olaf the +Saint had sent the timbers to Iceland, and which was erected on +the Thing-plain. Such remembrances of King Harald are found here +in the country, besides many great gifts which he presented to +those who visited him. + + + +37. OF HALDOR SNORRASON. + +Haldor Snorrason and Ulf Uspakson, as before related, came to +Norway with King Harald. They were, in many respects, of +different dispositions. Haldor was very stout and strong, and +remarkably handsome in appearance. King Harald gave him this +testimony, that he, among all his men, cared least about doubtful +circumstances, whether they betokened danger or pleasure; for, +whatever turned up, he was never in higher nor in lower spirits, +never slept less nor more on account of them, nor ate or drank +but according to his custom. Haldor was not a man of many words, +but short in conversation, told his opinion bluntly and was +obstinate and hard; and this could not please the king, who had +many clever people about him zealous in his service. Haldor +remained a short time with the king; and then came to Iceland, +where he took up his abode in Hjardarholt, and dwelt in that farm +to a very advanced age. + + + +38. OF ULF USPAKSON. + +Ulf Uspakson stood in great esteem with King Harald; for he was a +man of great understanding, clever in conversation, active and +brave, and withal true and sincere. King Harald made Ulf his +marshal, and married him to Jorun, Thorberg's daughter, a sister +of Harald's wife, Thora. Ulf and Jorun's children were Joan the +Strong of Rasvol, and Brigida, mother of Sauda-Ulf, who was +father of Peter Byrdar-Svein, father of Ulf Fly and Sigrid. Joan +the Strong's son was Erlend Himalde, father of Archbishop Eystein +and his brothers. King Harald gave Ulf the marshal the rights of +a lenderman and a fief of twelve marks income, besides a half- +district in the Throndhjem land. Of this Stein Herdison speaks +in his song about Ulf. + + + +39. OF THE BUILDING OF CHURCHES AND HOUSES. + +King Magnus Olafson built Olaf's church in the town (Nidaros), on +the spot where Olaf's body was set down for the night, and which, +at that time, was above the town. He also had the king's house +built there. The church was not quite finished when the king +died; but King Harald had what was wanting completed. There, +beside the house, he began to construct a stone hall, but it was +not finished when he died. King Harald had the church called +Mary Church built from the foundations up, at the sandhill close +to the spot where the king's holy remains were concealed in the +earth the first winter after his fall. It was a large temple, +and so strongly built with lime that it was difficult to break it +when the Archbishop Eystein had it pulled down. Olaf's holy +remains were kept in Olaf's church while Mary Church was +building. King Harald had the king's house erected below Mary +Kirk, at the side of the river, where it now is; and he had the +house in which he had made the great hall consecrated and called +Gregorius Church. + + + +40. BEGINNING OF HAKON IVARSON'S STORY. + +There was a man called Ivar the White, who was a brave lenderman +dwelling in the Uplands, and was a daughter's son of Earl Hakon +the Great. Ivar was the handsomest man that could be seen. +Ivar's son was called Hakon; and of him it was said that he was +distinguished above all men then in Norway for beauty, strength +and perfection of figure. In his very youth he had been sent out +on war expeditions, where he acquired great honour and +consideration, and became afterwards one of the most celebrated +men. + + + +41. OF EINAR TAMBASKELFER. + +Einar Tambaskelfer was the most powerful lenderman in the +Throndhjem land. There was but little friendship between him and +King Harald, although Einar retained all the fiefs he had held +while Magnus the Good lived. Einar had many large estates, and +was married to Bergliot, a daughter of Earl Hakon, as related +above. Their son Eindride was grown up, and married to Sigrid, a +daughter of Ketil Kalf and Gunhild, King Harald's sister's +daughter. Eindride had inherited the beauty of his mother's +father, Earl Hakon, and his sons; and in size and strength he +took after his father, Einar, and also in all bodily perfections +by which Einar had been distinguished above other men. He was, +also, as well as his father, the most popular of men, which the +sagas, indeed, show sufficiently. + + + +42. OF EARL ORM. + +Orm was at that time earl in the Uplands. His mother was +Ragnhild, a daughter of Earl Hakon the Great, and Orm was a +remarkably clever man. Aslak Erlingson was then in Jadar at +Sole, and was married to Sigrid, a daughter of Earl Svein +Hakonson. Gunhild, Earl Svein's other daughter, was married to +the Danish king, Svein Ulfson. These were the descendants of +Earl Hakon at that time in Norway, besides many other +distinguished people; and the whole race was remarkable for their +very beautiful appearance, and the most of them were gifted with +great bodily perfection, and were all distinguished and important +men. + + + +43. HARALD'S PRIDE. + +King Harald was very proud, and his pride increased after he was +established in the country; and it came so far that at last it +was not good to speak against him, or to propose anything +different from what he desired. So says Thiodolf, the skald: -- + + "In arms 'tis right the common man + Should follow orders, one by one, -- + Should stoop or rise, or run or stand, + As his war-leader may command; + But now to the king who feeds the ravens + The people bend like heartless cravens -- + Nothing is left them, but consent + To what the king calls his intent." + + + +44. OF THE QUARREL OF KING HARALD AND EINAR TAMBASKELFER. + +Einar Tambaskelfer was the principal man among the bondes all +about Throndhjem, and answered for them at the Things even +against the king's men. Einar knew well the law, and did not +want boldness to bring forward his opinion at Things, even if the +king was present; and all the bondes stood by him. The king was +very angry at this, and it came so far that they disputed eagerly +against each other. Einar said that the bondes would not put up +with any unlawful proceedings from him if he broke through the +law of the land; and this occurred several times between them. +Einar then began to keep people about him at home, and he had +many more when he came into the town if the king was there. It +once happened that Einar came to the town with a great many men +and ships; he had with him eight or nine great war-ships and +nearly 500 men. When he came to the town he went up from the +strand with his attendants. King Harald was then in his house, +standing out in the gallery of the loft; and when he saw Einar's +people going on shore, it is said Harald composed these verses: +-- + + "I see great Tambaskelfer go, + With mighty pomp, and pride, and show, + Across the ebb-shore up the land, -- + Before, behind, an armed band. + This bonde-leader thinks to rule, + And fill himself the royal stool. + A goodly earl I have known + With fewer followers of his own. + He who strikes fire from the shield, + Einar, may some day make us yield, + Unless our axe-edge quickly ends, + With sudden kiss, what he intends." + +Einar remained several days in the town. + + + +45. THE FALL OF EINAR AND EINDRIDE. + +One day there was a meeting held in the town, at which the king +himself was present. A thief had been taken in the town, and he +was brought before the Thing. The man had before been in the +service of Einar, who had been very well satisfied with him. +This was told to Einar, and he well knew the king would not let +the man off, and more because he took an interest in the matter. +Einar, therefore, let his men get under arms, went to the Thing, +and took the man by force. The friends on both sides then came +between and endeavoured to effect a reconciliation; and they +succeeded so far that a meeting-place was appointed, to which +both should come. There was a Thing-room in the king's house at +the river Nid, and the king went into it with a few men, while +the most of his people were out in the yard. The king ordered +the shutters of the loft-opening to be turned, so that there was +but a little space left clear. When Einar came into the yard +with his people, he told his son Eindride to remain outside with +the men, "for there is no danger here for me." Eindride remained +standing outside at the room-door. When Einar came into the +Thing-room, he said, "It is dark in the king's Thing-room." At +that moment some men ran against him and assaulted him, some with +spears, some with swords. When Eindride heard this he drew his +sword and rushed into the room; but he was instantly killed along +with his father. The king's men then ran up and placed +themselves before the door, and the bondes lost courage, having +no leader. They urged each other on, indeed, and said it was a +shame they should not avenge their chief; but it came to nothing +with their attack. The king went out to his men, arrayed them in +battle order, and set up his standard: but the bondes did not +venture to assault. Then the king went with all his men on board +of his ships, rowed down the river, and then took his way out of +the fjord. When Einar's wife Bergliot, who was in the house +which Einar had possessed in the town, heard of Einar's fall, she +went immediately to the king's house where the bondes army was +and urged them to the attack; but at the same moment the king was +rowing out of the river. Then said Bergliot, "Now we want here +my relation, Hakon Ivarson: Einar's murderer would not be rowing +out of the river if Ivar stood here on the riverbank." Then +Bergliot adorned Einar's and Eindride's corpses and buried them +in Olaf's church, beside King Magnus Olafson's burial-place. +After Einar's murder the king was so much disliked for that deed +that there was nothing that prevented the lendermen and bondes +from attacking the king, and giving him battle, but the want of +some leader to raise the banner in the bonde army. + + + +46. OF KING HARALD AND FIN ARNASON. + +Fin Arnason dwelt at Austrat in Yrjar, and was King Harald's +lenderman there. Fin was married to Bergliot, a daughter of +Halfdan, who was a son of Sigurd Syr, and brother of Olaf the +Saint and of King Harald. Thora, King Harald's wife, was Fin +Arnason's brother's daughter: and Fin and all his brothers were +the king's dearest friends. Fin Arnason had been for some +summers on a viking cruise in the West sea; and Fin, Guthorm +Gunhildson and Hakon Ivarson had all been together on that +cruise. King Harald now proceeded out of Throndhjem fjord to +Austrat, where he was well received. Afterwards the king and Fin +conversed with each other about this new event of Einar's and his +son's death, and of the murmuring and threatening which the +bondes made against the king. + +Fin took up the conversation briskly, and said, "Thou art +managing ill in two ways: first, in doing all manner of mischief; +and next, in being so afraid that thou knowest not what to do." + +The king replied, laughing, "I will send thee, friend, into the +town to bring about a reconciliation with the bondes; and if that +will not do, thou must go to the Uplands and bring matters to +such an understanding with Hakon Ivarson that he shall not be my +opponent." + +Fin replies, "And how wilt thou reward me if I undertake this +dangerous errand; for both the people of Throndhjem and the +people of Upland are so great enemies to thee that it would not +be safe for any of thy messengers to come among them, unless he +were one who would be spared for his own sake?" + +The king replies, "Go thou on this embassy, for I know thou wilt +succeed in it if any man can, and bring about a reconciliation; +and then choose whatever favour from us thou wilt." + +Fin says, "Hold thou thy word, king, and I will choose my +petition. I will desire to have peace and safe residence in the +country for my brother Kalf, and all his estates restored; and +also that he receive all the dignity and power he had when he +left the country." + +The king assented to all that Fin laid down, and it was confirmed +by witnesses and shake of hand. + +Then said Fin, "What shall I offer Hakon, who rules most among +his relations in the land, to induce him to agree to a treaty and +reconciliation with thee?" + +The king replies, "Thou shalt first hear what Hakon on his part +requires for making an agreement; then promote my interest as +thou art best able; and deny him nothing in the end short of the +kingdom." + +Then King Harald proceeded southwards to More, and drew together +men in considerable numbers. + + + +47. OF FIN ARNASON'S JOURNEY. + +Fin Arnason proceeded to the town and had with him his house- +servants, nearly eighty men. When he came into the town he held +a Thing with the town's people. Fin spoke long and ably at the +Thing; and told the town's people, and bondes, above all things +not to have a hatred against their king, or to drive him away. +He reminded them of how much evil they had suffered by acting +thus against King Olaf the Saint; and added, that the king was +willing to pay penalty for this murder, according to the judgment +of understanding and good men. The effect of Fin's speech was +that the bondes promised to wait quietly until the messengers +came back whom Bergliot had sent to the Uplands to her relative, +Hakon Ivarson. Fin then went out to Orkadal with the men who had +accompanied him to the town. From thence he went up to +Dovrefield, and eastwards over the mountains. He went first to +his son-in-law, Earl Orm, who was married to Sigrid, Fin's +daughter, and told him his business. + + + +48. OF FIN AND HAKON IVARSON. + +Then Fin and Earl Orm appointed a meeting with Hakon Ivarson; and +when they met Fin explained his errand to Hakon, and the offer +which King Harald made him. It was soon seen, from Hakon's +speech, that he considered it to be his great duty to avenge the +death of his relative, Eindride; and added, that word was come to +him from Throndhjem, from which he might expect help in making +head against the king. Then Fin represented to Hakon how much +better it would be for him to accept of as high a dignity from +the king as he himself could desire, rather than to attempt +raising a strife against the king to whom he was owing service +and duty. He said if he came out of the conflict without +victory, he forfeited life and property: "And even if thou hast +the victory, thou wilt still be called a traitor to thy +sovereign." Earl Orm also supported Fin's speech. After Hakon +had reflected upon this he disclosed what lay on his mind, and +said, "I will be reconciled with King Harald if he will give me +in marriage his relation Ragnhild, King Magnus Olafson's +daughter, with such dower as is suitable to her and she will be +content with." Fin said he would agree to this on the king's +part; and thus it was settled among them. Fin then returned to +Throndhjem, and the disturbance and enmity was quashed, so that +the king could retain his kingdom in peace at home; and the +league was broken which Eindride's relations had made among +themselves for opposing King Harald. + + + +49. OF THE COURTSHIP OF HAKON IVARSON. + +When the day arrived for the meeting at which this agreement with +Harald should be finally concluded, Hakon went to King Harald; +and in their conference the king said that he, for his part, +would adhere to all that was settled in their agreement. "Thou +Hakon," says he, "must thyself settle that which concerns +Ragnhild, as to her accepting thee in marriage; for it would not +be advisable for thee, or for any one, to marry Ragnhild without +her consent." Then Hakon went to Ragnhild, and paid his +addresses to her. She answered him thus: "I have often to feel +that my father, King Magnus, is dead and gone from me, since I +must marry a bonde; although I acknowledge thou art a handsome +man, expert in all exercises. But if King Magnus had lived he +would not have married me to any man less than a king; so it is +not to be expected that I will take a man who has no dignity or +title." Then Hakon went to King Harald and told him his +conversation with Ragnhild, and also repeated the agreement which +was made between him and Fin, who was with him, together with +many others of the persons who had been present at the +conversation between him and Fin. Hakon takes them all to +witness that such was the agreement that the king should give +Ragnhild the dower she might desire. "And now since she will +have no man who has not a high dignity, thou must give me such a +title of honour; and, according to the opinion of the people, I +am of birth, family and other qualifications to be called earl." + +The king replies, "When my brother, King Olaf, and his son, King +Magnus, ruled the kingdom, they allowed only one earl at a time +to be in the country, and I have done the same since I came to +the kingly title; and I will not take away from Orm the title of +honour I had before given him." + +Hakon saw now that his business had not advanced, and was very +ill pleased; and Fin was outrageously angry. They said the king +had broken his word; and thus they all separated. + + + +50. HAKON'S JOURNEY TO DENMARK. + +Hakon then went out of the country with a well-manned ship. When +he came to Denmark he went immediately to his relative, King +Svein, who received him honourably and gave him great fiefs. +Hakon became King Svein's commander of the coast defence against +the vikings, -- the Vindland people, Kurland people, and others +from the East countries, -- who infested the Danish dominions; +and he lay out with his ships of war both winter and summer. + + + +51. MURDER OF ASMUND. + +There was a man called Asmund, who is said to have been King +Svein's sister's son, and his foster-son. This Asmund was +distinguished among all by his boldness and was much disliked by +the king. When Asmund came to years, and to age of discretion, +he became an ungovernable person given to murder and +manslaughter. The king was ill pleased at this, and sent him +away, giving him a good fief, which might keep him and his +followers well. As soon as Asmund had got this property from the +king he drew together a large troop of people; and as the estate +he had got from the king was not sufficient for his expenses he +took as his own much more which belonged to the king. When the +king heard this he summoned Asmund to him, and when they met the +king said that Asmund should remain with the court without +keeping any retinue of his own; and this took place as the king +desired. But when Asmund had been a little time in the king's +court he grew weary of being there, and escaped in the night, +returned to his former companions and did more mischief than +ever. Now when the king was riding through the country he came +to the neighbourhood where Asmund was, and he sent out men-at- +arms to seize him. The king then had him laid in irons, and kept +him so for some time in hope he would reform; but no sooner did +Asmund get rid of his chains than he absconded again, gathered +together people and men-at-arms and betook himself to plunder, +both abroad and at home. Thus he made great forays, killing and +plundering all around. When the people who suffered under these +disturbances came to the king and complained to him of their +losses, he replied, "Why do ye tell me of this? Why don't you go +to Hakon Ivarson, who is my officer for the land-defence, placed +on purpose to keep the peace for you peasants, and to hold the +vikings in check? I was told that Hakon was a gallant and brave +man, but I think he is rather shy when any danger of life is in +the way." These words of the king were brought to Hakon, with +many additions. Then Hakon went with his men in search of +Asmund, and when their ships met Hakon gave battle immediately -- +and the conflict was sharp, and many men were killed. Hakon +boarded Asmund's ship and cut down the men before his feet. At +last he and Asmund met and exchanged blows until Asmund fell. +Hakon cut off his head, went in all haste to King Svein and found +him just sitting down to the dinner-table. Hakon presented +himself before the table, laid Asmund's head upon the table +before the king, and asked if he knew it. The king made no +reply, but became as red as blood in the face. Soon after the +king sent him a message, ordering him to leave his service +immediately. "Tell him I will do him no harm; but I cannot keep +watch over all our relations (1). + + +ENDNOTES: +(1) This incident shows how strong, in those ages, was the tie + of relationship, and the point of honour of avenging its + injuries -- the clanship spirit. -- L. + + + +52. HAKON IVARSON'S MARRIAGE. + +Hakon then left Denmark, and came north to his estates in Norway. +His relation Earl Orm was dead. Hakon's relations and friends +were glad to see Hakon, and many gallant men gave themselves much +trouble to bring about a reconciliation between King Harald and +Hakon. It was at last settled in this way, that Hakon got +Ragnhild, the king's daughter, and that King Harald gave Hakon +the earldom, with the same power Earl Orm had possessed. Hakon +swore to King Harald an oath of fidelity to all the services he +was liable to fulfill. + + + +53. RECONCILIATION OF KING HARALD AND KALF. + +Kalf Arnason had been on a viking cruise to the Western countries +ever since he had left Norway; but in winter he was often in the +Orkney Islands with his relative, Earl Thorfin. Fin Arnason sent +a message to his brother Kalf, and told him the agreement which +he had made with King Harald, that Kalf should enjoy safety in +Norway, and his estates, and all the fiefs he had held from King +Magnus. When this message came to Kalf he immediately got ready +for his voyage, and went east to Norway to his brother Fin. Then +Fin obtained the king's peace for Kalf, and when Kalf and the +king met they went into the agreement which Fin and the king had +settled upon before. Kalf bound himself to the king in the same +way as he had bound himself to serve King Magnus, according to +which Kalf should do all that the king desired and considered of +advantage to his realm. Thereupon Kalf received all the estates +and fiefs he had before. + + + +54. FALL OF KALF ARNASON. + +The summer following (A.D. 1050) King Harald ordered out a levy, +and went to Denmark, where he plundered during the summer; but +when he came south to Fyen he found a great force assembled +against him. Then the king prepared to land his men from the +ships and to engage in a land-fight. He drew up his men on board +in order of battle; set Kalf Arnason at the head of one division; +ordered him to make the first attack, and told him where they +should direct their assault, promising that he would soon make a +landing with the others, and come to their assistance. When Kalf +came to the land with his men a force came down immediately to +oppose them, and Kalf without delay engaged in battle, which, +however, did not last long; for Kalf was immediately overpowered +by numbers, and betook himself to flight with his men. The Danes +pursued them vigorously, and many of the Northmen fell, and among +them Kalf Arnason. Now King Harald landed with his array; and +they soon came on their way to the field of battle, where they +found Kalf's body, and bore it down to the ships. But the king +penetrated into the country, killing many people and destroying +much. So says Arnor: -- + + "His shining sword with blood he stains, + Upon Fyona's grassy plains; + And in the midst of fire and smoke, + The king Fyona's forces broke." + + + +55. FIN ARNASON'S EXPEDITION OUT OF THE COUNTRY. + +After this Fin Arnason thought he had cause to be an enemy of the +king upon account of his brother Kalf's death; and said the king +had betrayed Kalf to his fall, and had also deceived him by +making him entice his brother Kalf to come over from the West and +trust to King Harald's faith. When these speeches came out among +people, many said that it was very foolish in Fin to have ever +supposed that Kalf could obtain the king's sincere friendship and +favour; for they thought the king was the man to seek revenge for +smaller offences than Kalf had committed against the king. The +king let every one say what he chose, and he himself neither said +yes or no about the affair; but people perceived that the king +was very well pleased with what had happened. King Harald once +made these verses: -- + + "I have, in all, the death-stroke given + To foes of mine at least eleven; + Two more, perhaps, if I remember, + May yet be added to this number, + I prize myself upon these deeds, + My people such examples needs. + Bright gold itself they would despise, + Or healing leek-herb underprize, + If not still brought before their eyes." + +Fin Arnason took the business so much to heart that he left the +country and went to Denmark to King Svein, where he met a +friendly reception. They spoke together in private for a long +time; and the end of the business was that Fin went into King +Svein's service, and became his man. King Svein then gave Fin an +earldom, and placed him in Halland, where he was long earl and +defended the country against the Northmen. + + + +56. OF GUTHORM GUNHILDSON. + +Ketil Kalf and Gunhild of Ringanes had a son called Guthorm, and +he was a sister's son to King Olaf and Harald Sigurdson. Guthorm +was a gallant man, early advanced to manhood. He was often with +King Harald, who loved him much, and asked his advice; for he was +of good understanding, and very popular. Guthorm had also been +engaged early in forays, and had marauded much in the Western +countries with a large force. Ireland was for him a land of +peace; and he had his winter quarters often in Dublin, and was in +great friendship with King Margad. + + + +57. GUTHORM'S JUNCTION WITH THE IRISH KING MARGAD. + +The summer after King Margad, and Guthorm with him, went out on +an expedition against Bretland, where they made immense booty. +But when the king saw the quantity of silver which was gathered +he wanted to have the whole booty, and regarded little his +friendship for Guthorm. Guthorm was ill pleased that he and his +men should be robbed of their share; but the king said, "Thou +must choose one of two things, -- either to be content with what +we determine, or to fight; and they shall have the booty who gain +the victory; and likewise thou must give up thy ships, for them I +will have." Guthorm thought there were great difficulties on +both sides; for it was disgraceful to give up ships and goods +without a stroke, and yet it was highly dangerous to fight the +king and his force, the king having sixteen ships and Guthorm +only five. Then Guthorm desired three days' time to consider the +matter with his people, thinking in that time to pacify the king, +and come to a better understanding with him through the mediation +of others; but he could not obtain from the king what he desired. +This was the day before St. Olaf's day. Guthorm chose the +condition that they would rather die or conquer like men, than +suffer disgrace, contempt and scorn, by submitting to so great a +loss. He called upon God, and his uncle Saint Olaf, and +entreated their help and aid; promising to give to the holy man's +house the tenth of all the booty that fell to their share, if +they gained the victory. Then he arranged his men, placed them +in battle order against the great force, prepared for battle, and +gave the assault. By the help of God, and the holy Saint Olaf, +Guthorm won the battle. King Margad fell, and every man, old and +young, who followed him; and after that great victor, Guthorm and +all his people returned home joyfully with all the booty they had +gained by the battle. Every tenth penny of the booty they had +made was taken, according to the vow, to King Olaf the Saint's +shrine; and there was so much silver that Guthorm had an image +made of it, with rays round the head, which was the size of his +own, or of his forecastle-man's head; and the image was seven +feet high. The image thus produced was given by Guthorm to King +Olaf of the Saint's temple, where it has since remained as a +memorial of Guthorm's victory and King Olaf the Saint's miracle. + + + +58. MIRACLE OF KING OLAF IN DENMARK. + +There was a wicked, evil-minded count in Denmark who had a +Norwegian servant-girl whose family belonged to Throndhjem +district. She worshipped King Olaf the Saint, and believed +firmly in his sanctity. But the above mentioned count doubted +all that was told of the holy man's miracles, insisted that it +was nothing but nonsense and idle talk, and made a joke and scorn +of the esteem and honour which all the country people showed the +good king. Now when his holyday came, on which the mild monarch +ended his life, and which all Northmen kept sacred, this +unreasonable count would not observe it, but ordered his servant- +girl to bake and put fire in the oven that day. She knew well +the count's mad passion, and that he would revenge himself +severely on her if she refused doing as he ordered. She went, +therefore, of necessity, and baked in the oven, but wept much at +her work; and she threatened King Olaf that she never would +believe in him, if he did not avenge this misdeed by some +mischance or other. And now shall ye come to hear a well- +deserved vengeance, and a true miracle. It happened, namely, in +the same hour that the count became blind of both eyes, and the +bread which she had shoved into the oven was turned into stone! +Of these stones some are now in St. Olaf's temple, and in other +places; and since that time O1afsmas has been always held holy in +Denmark. + + + +59. KING OLAF'S MIRACLE ON A CRIPPLE. + +West in Valland, a man had such bad health that he became a +cripple, and went on his knees and elbows. One day he was upon +the road, and had fallen asleep. He dreamt that a gallant man +came up to him and asked him where he was going. When he named +the neighbouring town, the man said to him, "Go to Saint Olaf's +church that stands in London, and there thou shalt be cured." +There-upon he awoke, and went straightway to inquire the road to +Olaf's church in London. At last he came to London Bridge, and +asked the men of the castle if they could tell him where Olaf's +church was; but they replied, there were so many churches that +they could not tell to whom each of them was consecrated. Soon +after a man came up and asked him where he wanted to go, and he +answered to Olaf's church. Then said the man, "We shall both go +together to Olaf's church, for I know the way to it." Thereupon +they went over the bridge to the shrine where Olaf's church was; +and when they came to the gates of the churchyard the man mounted +over the half-door that was in the gate, but the cripple rolled +himself in, and rose up immediately sound and strong: when he +looked about him his conductor had vanished. + + + +60. KING HARALD'S FORAY IN DENMARK. + +King Harald had built a merchant town in the East at Oslo, where +he often resided; for there was good supply from the extensive +cultivated district wide around. There also he had a convenient +station to defend the country against the Danes, or to make an +attack upon Denmark, which he was in the custom of doing often, +although he kept no great force on foot. One summer King Harald +went from thence with a few light ships and a few men. He +steered southwards out from Viken, and, when the wind served, +stood over to Jutland, and marauded; but the country people +collected and defended the country. Then King Harald steered to +Limfjord, and went into the fjord. Limfjord is so formed that +its entrance is like a narrow river; but when one gets farther +into the fjord it spreads out into a wide sea. King Harald +marauded on both sides of the land; and when the Danes gathered +together on every side to oppose him, he lay at a small island +which was uncultivated. They wanted drink on board his ships, +and went up into the island to seek water; but finding none, they +reported it to the king. He ordered them to look for some long +earthworms on the island, and when they found one they brought it +to the king. He ordered the people to bring the worm to a fire, +and bake it before it, so that it should be thirsty. Then he +ordered a thread to be tied round the tail of the worm, and to +let it loose. The worm crept away immediately, while thread +wound off from the clew as the worm took it away; and the people +followed the worm until it sought downwards in the earth. There +the king ordered them to dig for water, which they did, and found +so much water that they had no want of it. King Harald now heard +from his spies that King Svein was come with a large armament to +the mouth of the fjord; but that it was too late for him to come +into it, as only one ship at a time can come in. King Harald +then steered with his fleet in through the fjord to where it was +broadest to a place called Lusbreid. In the inmost bight, there +is but a narrow neck of land dividing the fjord from the West +sea. Thither King Harald rowed with his men towards evening; and +at night when it was dark he unloaded his ships, drew them over +the neck of land into the West sea, loaded them again, and was +ready with all this before day. He then steered northwards along +the Jutland coast. People then said that Harald had escaped from +the hands of the Danes. Harald said that he would come to +Denmark next time with more people and larger vessels. King +Harald then proceeded north to Throndhjem. + + + +61. KING HARALD HAD A SHIP BUILT. + +King Harald remained all winter at Nidaros (A.D. 1062) and had a +vessel built out upon the strand, and it was a buss. The ship +was built of the same size as the Long Serpent, and every part of +her was finished with the greatest care. On the stem was a +dragon-head, and on the stern a dragon-tail, and the sides of the +bows of the ship were gilt. The vessel was of thirty-five rowers +benches, and was large for that size, and was remarkably +handsome; for the king had everything belonging to the ship's +equipment of the best, both sails and rigging, anchors and +cables. King Harald sent a message in winter south to Denmark to +King Svein, that he should come northwards in spring; that they +should meet at the Gaut river and fight, and so settle the +division of the countries that the one who gained the victory +should have both kingdoms. + + + +62. KING HARALD'S CHALLENGE. + +King Harald during this winter called out a general levy of all +the people of Norway, and assembled a great force towards spring. +Then Harald had his great ship drawn down and put into the river +Nid, and set up the dragon's head on her. Thiodolf, the skald, +sang about it thus: -- + + "My lovely girl! the sight was grand + When the great war-ships down the strand + Into the river gently slid, + And all below her sides was hid. + Come, lovely girl, and see the show! -- + Her sides that on the water glow, + Her serpent-head with golden mane, + All shining back from the Nid again." + +Then King Harald rigged out his ship, got ready for sea, and when +he had all in order went out of the river. His men rowed very +skilfully and beautifully. So says Thiodolf: -- + + "It was upon a Saturday, + Ship-tilts were struck and stowed away, + And past the town our dragon glides, + That girls might see our glancing sides. + Out from the Nid brave Harald steers; + Westward at first the dragon veers; + Our lads together down with oars, + The splash is echoed round the shores. + + "Their oars our king's men handle well, + One stroke is all the eye can tell: + All level o'er the water rise; + The girls look on in sweet surprise. + Such things, they think, can ne'er give way; + The little know the battle day. + The Danish girls, who dread our shout, + Might wish our ship-gear not so stout. + + "'Tis in the fight, not on the wave, + That oars may break and fail the brave. + At sea, beneath the ice-cold sky, + Safely our oars o'er ocean ply; + And when at Throndhjem's holy stream + Our seventy cars in distance gleam, + We seem, while rowing from the sea, + An erne with iron wings to be." + +King Harald sailed south along the land, and called out the levy +everywhere of men and ships. When they came east to Viken they +got a strong wind against them and the forces lay dispersed about +in the harbour; some in the isles outside, and some in the +fjords. So says Thiodolf: -- + + "The cutters' sea-bleached bows scarce find + A shelter from the furious wind + Under the inland forests' side, + Where the fjord runs its farthest tide. + In all the isles and creeks around + The bondes' ships lie on the ground, + And ships with gunwales hung with shields + Seek the lee-side of the green fields." + +In the heavy storm that raged for some time the great ship had +need of good ground tackle. So says Thiodolf: -- + + "With lofty bow above the seas, + Which curl and fly before the breeze, + The gallant vessel rides and reels, + And every plunge her cable feels. + The storm that tries the spar and mast + Tries the main-anchor at the last: + The storm above, below the rock, + Chafe the thick cable with each shock." + +When the weather became favourable King Harald sailed eastwards +to the Gaut river with his fleet and arrived there in the +evening. So says Thiodolf: -- + + "The gallant Harald now has come + To Gaut, full half way from his home, + And on the river frontier stands, + To fight with Svein for life and lands. + The night passed o'er, the gallant king + Next day at Thumia calls a Thing, + Where Svein is challenged to appear -- + A day which ravens wish were near." + + + +63. OF KING HARALD'S FLEET. + +When the Danes heard that the Northmen's army was come to the +Gaut river they all fled who had opportunity to get away. The +Northmen heard that the Danish king had also called out his +forces and lay in the south, partly at Fyen and partly about +Seeland. When King Harald found that King Svein would not hold a +meeting with him, or a fight, according to what had been agreed +upon between them, he took the same course as before -- letting +the bonde troops return home, but manning 150 ships, with which +he sailed southwards along Halland, where he herried all round, +and then brought up with his fleet in Lofufjord, and laid waste +the country. A little afterwards King Svein came upon them with +all the Danish fleet, consisting of 300 ships. When the Northmen +saw them King Harald ordered a general meeting of the fleet to be +called by sound of trumpet; and many there said it was better to +fly, as it was not now advisable to fight. The king replied, +"Sooner shall all lie dead one upon another than fly." So says +Stein Herdison: -- + + "With falcon eye, and courage bright, + Our king saw glory in the fight; + To fly, he saw, would ruin bring + On them and him -- the folk and king. + `Hands up the arms to one and all!' + Cries out the king; `we'll win or fall! + Sooner than fly, heaped on each other + Each man shall fall across his brother!'" + +Then King Harald drew up his ships to attack, and brought forward +his great dragon in the middle of his fleet. So says Thiodolf: +-- + + "The brave king through his vessels' throng + His dragon war-ship moves along; + He runs her gaily to the front, + To meet the coming battle's brunt." + +The ship was remarkably well equipt, and fully manned. So says +Thiodolf: -- + + "The king had got a chosen crew -- + He told his brave lads to stand true. + The ring of shields seemed to enclose + The ship's deck from the boarding foes. + The dragon, on the Nis-river flood, + Beset with men, who thickly stood, + Shield touching shield, was something rare, + That seemed all force of man to dare." + +Ulf, the marshal, laid his ship by the side of the king's and +ordered his men to bring her well forward. Stein Herdison, who +was himself in Ulf's ship, sings of it thus: -- + + "Our oars were stowed, our lances high, + As the ship moved swung in the sky. + The marshal Ulf went through our ranks, + Drawn up beside the rowers' banks: + The brave friend of our gallant king + Told us our ship well on to bring, + And fight like Norsemen in the cause -- + Our Norsemen answered with huzzas." + +Hakon Ivarson lay outside on the other wing, and had many ships +with him, all well equipt. At the extremity of the other side +lay the Throndhjem chiefs, who had also a great and strong force. + + + +64. OF KING SVEIN'S ARMAMENT. + +Svein, the Danish king, also drew up his fleet, and laid his ship +forward in the center against King Harald's ship, and Fin Arnason +laid his ship next; and then the Danes laid their ships, +according as they were bold or well-equipt. Then, on both sides, +they bound the ships together all through the middle of the +fleets; but as the fleets were so large, very many ships remained +loose, and each laid his ship forward according to his courage, +and that was very unequal. Although the difference among the men +was great, altogether there was a very great force on both sides. +King Svein had six earls among the people following him. So says +Stein Herdison: -- + + "Danger our chief would never shun, + With eight score ships he would not run: + The Danish fleet he would abide, + And give close battle side by side. + From Leire's coast the Danish king + Three hundred ocean steeds could bring, + And o'er the sea-weed plain in haste + Thought Harald's vessels would be chased." + + + +65. BEGINNING OF THE BATTLE OF NIS-RIVER. + +As soon as King Harald was ready with his fleet, he orders the +war-blast to sound, and the men to row forward to the attack. So +says Stein Herdison: -- + + "Harald and Svein first met as foes, + Where the Nis in the ocean flows; + For Svein would not for peace entreat, + But, strong in ships, would Harald meet. + The Norsemen prove, with sword in hand, + That numbers cannot skill withstand. + Off Halland's coast the blood of Danes + The blue sea's calm smooth surface stains." + +Soon the battle began, and became very sharp; both kings urging +on their men. So says Stein Herdison: -- + + "Our king, his broad shield disregarding, + More keen for striking than for warding, + Now tells his lads their spears to throw, -- + Now shows them where to strike a blow. + From fleet to fleet so short the way, + That stones and arrows have full play; + And from the keen sword dropped the blood + Of short-lived seamen in the flood." + +It was late in the day when the battle began, and it continued +the whole night. King Harald shot for a long time with his bow. +So says Thiodolf: -- + + "The Upland king was all the night + Speeding the arrows' deadly flight. + All in the dark his bow-string's twang + Was answered; for some white shield rang, + Or yelling shriek gave certain note + The shaft had pierced some ring-mail coat, + The foemen's shields and bulwarks bore + A Lapland arrow-scat(1) or more." + +Earl Hakon, and the people who followed him, did not make fast +their ships in the fleet, but rowed against the Danish ships that +were loose, and slew the men of all the ships they came up with. +When the Danes observed this each drew his ship out of the way of +the earl; but he set upon those who were trying to escape, and +they were nearly driven to flight. Then a boat came rowing to +the earl's ship and hailed him and said that the other wing of +King Harald's fleet was giving way and many of their people had +fallen. Then the earl rowed thither and gave so severe an +assault that the Danes had to retreat before him. The earl went +on in this way all the night, coming forward where he was most +wanted, and wheresoever he came none could stand against him. +Hakon rowed outside around the battle. Towards the end of the +night the greatest part of the Danish fleet broke into flight, +for then King Harald with his men boarded the vessel of King +Svein; and it was so completely cleared that all the crew fell in +the ship, except those who sprang overboard. So says Arnor, the +earls' skald: -- + + "Brave Svein did not his vessel leave + Without good cause, as I believe: + Oft on his casque the sword-blade rang, + Before into the sea he sprang. + Upon the wave his vessel drives; + All his brave crew had lost their lives. + O'er dead courtmen into the sea + The Jutland king had now to flee." + +And when King Svein's banner was cut down, and his ship cleared +of its crew, all his forces took to flight, and some were killed. +The ships which were bound together could not be cast loose, so +the people who were in them sprang overboard, and some got to the +other ships that were loose; and all King Svein's men who could +get off rowed away, but a great many of them were slain. Where +the king himself fought the ships were mostly bound together, and +there were more than seventy left behind of King Svein's vessels. +So says Thiodolf: -- + + "Svein's ships rode proudly o'er the deep, + When, by a single sudden sweep, + Full seventy sail, as we are told, + Were seized by Norway's monarch bold." + +King Harald rowed after the Danes and pursued them; but that was +not easy, for the ships lay so thick together that they scarcely +could move. Earl Fin Arnason would not flee; and being also +shortsighted, was taken prisoner. So says Thiodolf: -- + + "To the six Danish earls who came + To aid his force, and raise his name, + No mighty thanks King Svein is owing + For mighty actions of their doing. + Fin Arnason, in battle known, + With a stout Norse heart of his own, + Would not take flight his life to gain, + And in the foremost ranks was ta'en." + + +ENDNOTES: +(1) The Laplanders paid their seat, or yearly tax, in bows and + arrows; and the meaning of the skald appears to be, that as + many as were paid in a year were shot at the foe. -- L. + + + +66. KING SVEIN'S FLIGHT. + +Earl Hakon lay behind with his ships, while the king and the rest +of the forces were pursuing the fugitives; for the earls' ships +could not get forward on account of the ships which lay in the +way before him. Then a man came rowing in a boat to the earl's +ship and lay at the bulwarks. The man was stout and had on a +white hat. He hailed the ship, "Where is the earl?" said he. + +The earl was in the fore-hold, stopping a man's blood. The earl +cast a look at the man in the hat and asked what his name was. +He answered, "Here is Vandrad: speak to me, earl." + +The earl leant over the ship's side to him. Then the man in the +boat said, "Earl, I will accept of my life from thee, if thou +wilt give it." + +Then the earl raised himself up, called two men who were friends +dear to him, and said to them, "Go into the boat; bring Vandrad +to the land; attend him to my friend's Karl the bonde; and tell +Karl, as a token that these words come from me, that he let +Vandrad have the horse which I gave to him yesterday, and also +his saddle, and his son to attend him." + +Thereupon they went into the boat and took the oars in hand, +while Vandrad steered. This took place just about daybreak, +while the vessels were in movement, some rowing towards the land, +some towards the sea, both small and great. Vandrad steered +where he thought there was most room between the vessels; and +when they came near to Norway's ships the earl's men gave their +names and then they all allowed them to go where they pleased. +Vandrad steered along the shore, and only set in towards the land +when they had come past the crowd of ships. They then went up to +Karl the bonde's farm, and it was then beginning to be light. +They went into the room where Karl had just put on his clothes. +The earl's men told him their message and Karl said they must +first take some food; and he set a table before them and gave +them water to wash with. + +Then came the housewife into the room and said, "I wonder why we +could get no peace or rest all night with the shouting and +screaming." + +Karl replies, "Dost thou not know that the kings were fighting +all night?" + +She asked which had the better of it. + +Karl answered, "The Northmen gained." + +"Then," said she, "our king will have taken flight." + +"Nobody knows," says Karl, "whether he has fled or is fallen." + +She says, "What a useless sort of king we have! He is both slow +and frightened." + +Then said Vandrad, "Frightened he is not; but he is not lucky." + +Then Vandrad washed his hands; but he took the towel and dried +them right in the middle of the cloth. The housewife snatched +the towel from him, and said, "Thou hast been taught little good; +it is wasteful to wet the whole cloth at one time. + +Vandrad replies, "I may yet come so far forward in the world as +to be able to dry myself with the middle of the towel." + +Thereupon Karl set a table before them and Vandrad sat down +between them. They ate for a while and then went out. The horse +was saddled and Karl's son ready to follow him with another +horse. They rode away to the forest; and the earl's men returned +to the boat, rowed to the earl's ship and told the success of +their expedition. + + + +67. OF KING HARALD. + +King Harald and his men followed the fugitives only a short way, +and rowed back to the place where the deserted ships lay. Then +the battle-place was ransacked, and in King Svein's ship was +found a heap of dead men; but the king's body was not found, +although people believed for certain that he had fallen. Then +King Harald had the greatest attention paid to the dead of his +men, and had the wounds of the living bound up. The dead bodies +of Svein's men were brought to the land, and he sent a message to +the peasants to come and bury them. Then he let the booty be +divided, and this took up some time. The news came now that King +Svein had come to Seeland, and that all who had escaped from the +battle had joined him, along with many more, and that he had a +great force. + + + +68. FIN ARNASON GETS QUARTER. + +Earl Fin Arnason was taken prisoner in the battle, as before +related; and when he was led before King Harald the king was very +merry, and said, "Fin, we meet here now, and we met last in +Norway. The Danish court has not stood very firmly by thee; and +it will be a troublesome business for Northmen to drag thee, a +blind old man, with them, and preserve thy life." + +The earl replies, "The Northmen find it very difficult now to +conquer, and it is all the worse that thou hast the command of +them." + +Then said King Harald, "Wilt thou accept of life and safety, +although thou hast not deserved it?" + +The earl replies, "Not from thee, thou dog." + +The king: "Wilt thou, then, if thy relation Magnus gives thee +quarter?" + +Magnus, King Harald's son, was then steering the ship. + +The earl replies, "Can the whelp rule over life and quarter?" + +The king laughed, as if he found amusement in vexing him. -- +"Wilt thou accept thy life, then, from thy she-relation Thorer?" + +The earl: "Is she here?" + +"She is here," said the king. + +Then Earl Fin broke out with the ugly expressions which since +have been preserved, as a proof that he was so mad with rage that +he could not govern his tongue: -- + +"No wonder thou hast bit so strongly, if the mare was with thee." + +Earl Fin got life and quarter and the king kept him a while about +him. But Fin was rather melancholy and obstinate in +conversation; and King Harald said, "I see, Fin, that thou dost +not live willingly in company with me and thy relations; now I +will give thee leave to go to thy friend King Svein." + +The earl said, "I accept of the offer willingly, and the more +gratefully the sooner I get away from hence." + +The king afterwards let Earl Fin be landed and the traders going +to Halland received him well. King Harald sailed from thence to +Norway with his fleet; and went first to Oslo, where he gave all +his people leave to go home who wished to do so. + + + +69. OF KING SVEIN. + +King Svein, it is told, sat in Denmark all that winter, and had +his kingdom as formerly. In winter he sent men north to Halland +for Karl the bonde and his wife. When Karl came the king called +him to him and asked him if he knew him, or thought he had ever +seen him before. + +Karl replies, "I know thee, sire, and knew thee before, the +moment I saw thee; and God be praised if the small help I could +give was of any use to thee." + +The king replies, "I have to reward thee for all the days I have +to live. And now, in the first place, I will give thee any farm +in Seeland thou wouldst desire to have; and, in the next place, +will make thee a great man, if thou knowest how to conduct +thyself." + +Karl thanked the king for his promise, and said he had now but +one thing to ask. + +The king asked what that was. + +Karl said that he would ask to take his wife with him. + +The king said, "I will not let thee do that; but I will provide +thee a far better and more sensible wife. But thy wife can keep +the bonde-farm ye had before and she will have her living from +it." + +The king gave Karl a great and valuable farm, and provided him a +good marriage; and he became a considerable man. This was +reported far and wide and much praised; and thus it came to be +told in Norway. + + + +70. OF THE TALK OF THE COURT-MEN. + +King Harald stayed in Oslo the winter after the battle at Nis- +river (A.D. 1063). In autumn, when the men came from the south, +there was much talk and many stories about the battle which they +had fought at Nis-river, and every one who had been there thought +he could tell something about it. Once some of them sat in a +cellar and drank, and were very merry and talkative. They talked +about the Nis-river battle, and who had earne'd the greatest +praise and renown. They all agreed that no man there had been at +all equal to Earl Hakon. He was the boldest in arms, the +quickest, and the most lucky; what he did was of the greatest +help, and he won the battle. King Harald, in the meantime, was +out in the yard, and spoke with some people. He went then to the +room-door, and said, "Every one here would willingly be called +Hakon;" and then went his way. + + + +71. OF THE ATTEMPT TO TAKE EARL HAKON. + +Earl Hakon went in winter to the Uplands, and was all winter in +his domains. He was much beloved by all the Uplanders. It +happened, towards spring, that some men were sitting drinking in +the town, and the conversation turned, as usual, on the Nis-river +battle; and some praised Earl Hakon, and some thought others as +deserving of praise as he. When they had thus disputed a while, +one of them said, "It is possible that others fought as bravely +as the earl at Nis-river; but none, I think, has had such luck +with him as he." + +The others replied, that his best luck was his driving so many +Danes to flight along with other men. + +The same man replied, "It was greater luck that he gave King +Svein quarter." + +One of the company said to him, "Thou dost not know what thou art +saying." + +He replied, "I know it for certain, for the man told me himself +who brought the king to the land." + +It went, according to the old proverb, that the king has many +ears. This was told the king, and he immediately ordered horses +to be gathered, and rode away directly with 900 men. He rode all +that night and the following day. Then some men met them who +were riding to the town with mead and malt. In the king's +retinue was a man called Gamal, who rode to one of these bondes +who was an acquaintance of his, and spoke to him privately. "I +will pay thee," said he, "to ride with the greatest speed, by the +shortest private paths that thou knowest, to Earl Hakon, and tell +him the king will kill him; for the king has got to the knowledge +that Earl Hakon set King Svein on shore at Nis-river." They +agreed on the payment. The bonde rode, and came to the earl just +as he was sitting drinking, and had not yet gone to bed. When +the bonde told his errand, the earl immediately stood up with all +his men, had all his loose property removed from the farm to the +forest, and all the people left the house in the night. When the +king came he halted there all night; but Hakon rode away, and +came east to Svithjod to King Steinkel and stayed with him all +summer. King Harald returned to the town, travelled northwards +to Throndhjem district, and remained there all summer; but in +autumn he returned eastwards to Viken. + + + +72. OF EARL HAKON. + +As soon as Earl Hakon heard the king had gone north he returned +immediately in summer to the Uplands (A.D. 1063), and remained +there until the king had returned from the north. Then the earl +went east into Vermaland, where he remained during the winter, +and where the king, Steinkel, gave him fiefs. For a short time +in winter he went west to Raumarike with a great troop of men +from Gautland and Vermaland, and received the scat and duties +from the Upland people which belonged to him, and then returned +to Glutland, and remained there till spring. King Harald had his +seat in Oslo all winter (A.D. 1064), and sent his men to the +Uplands to demand the scat, together with the king's land dues, +and the mulcts of court; but the Uplanders said they would pay +all the scat and dues which they had to pay, to Earl Hakon as +long as he was in life, and had forfeited his life or his fief; +and the king got no dues that winter. + + + +73. AGREEMENT BETWEEN KING HARALD AND KING SVEIN. + +This winter messengers and ambassadors went between Norway and +Denmark, whose errand was that both Northmen and Danes should +make peace, and a league with each other. and to ask the kings to +agree to it. These messages gave favourable hopes of a peace; +and the matter proceeded so far that a meeting for peace was +appointed at the Gaut river between King Harald and King Svein. +When spring approached, both kings assembled many ships and +people for this meeting. So says a skald in a poem on this +expedition of the kings, which begins thus: -- + + "The king, who from the northern sound + His land with war-ships girds around, + The raven-feeder, filled the coast + With his proud ships, a gallant host! + The gold-tipped stems dash through the foam + That shakes the seamen's planked home; + The high wave breaks up to the mast, + As west of Halland on they passed, + + "Harald whose word is fixed and sure, + Whose ships his land from foes secure, + And Svein, whose isles maintain is fleet, + Hasten as friends again to meet; + And every creek with vessels teems, -- + All Denmark men and shipping seems; + And all rejoice that strife will cease, + And men meet now but to make peace." + +Here it is told that the two kings held the meeting that was +agreed upon between them, and both came to the frontiers of their +kingdoms. So says the skald: -- + + "To meet (since peace the Dane now craves) + On to the south upon the waves + Sailed forth our gallant northern king, + Peace to the Danes with him to bring. + Svein northward to his frontier hies + To get the peace his people prize, + And meet King Harald, whom he finds + On land hard used by stormy winds." + +When the kings found each other, people began at once to talk of +their being reconciled. But as soon as peace was proposed, many +began to complain of the damage they had sustained by harrying, +robbing and killing men; and for a long time it did not look very +like peace. It is here related: -- + + "Before this meeting of the kings + Each bende his own losses brings, + And loudly claims some recompense + From his king's foes, at their expense. + It is not easy to make peace, + Where noise and talking never cease: + The bondes' warmth may quickly spread, + And kings be by the people led. + + "When kings are moved, no peace is sure; + For that peace only is secure + Which they who make it fairly make, -- + To each side give, from each side take. + The kings will often rule but ill + Who listen to the people's will: + The people often have no view + But their own interests to pursue." + +At last the best men, and those who were the wisest, came between +the kings, and settled the peace thus: -- that Harald should have +Norway, and Svein Denmark, according to the boundaries of old +established between Denmark and Norway; neither of them should +pay to the other for any damage sustained; the war should cease +as it now stood, each retaining what he had got; and this peace +should endure as long as they were kings. This peace was +confirmed by oath. Then the kings parted, having given each +other hostages, as is here related: -- + + "And I have heard that to set fast + The peace God brought about at last, + Svein and stern Harald pledges sent, + Who witnessed to their sworn intent; + And much I wish that they and all + In no such perjury may fall + That this peace ever should be broken, + And oaths should fail before God spoken." + +King Harald with his people sailed northwards to Norway, and King +Svein southwards to Denmark. + + + +74. KING HARALD'S BATTLE WITH EARL HAKON. + +King Harald was in Viken in the summer (A.D. 1064), and he sent +his men to the Uplands after the scat and duty which belonged to +him; but the bondes paid no attention to the demand, but said +they would hold all for Earl Hakon until he came for it. Earl +Hakon was then up in Gautland with a large armed force. When +summer was past King Harald went south to Konungahella. Then he +took all the light-sailing vessels he could get hold of and +steered up the river. He had the vessels drawn past all the +waterfalls and brought them thus into the Wener lake. Then he +rowed eastward across the lake to where he heard Earl Hakon was; +but when the earl got news of the king's expedition he retreated +down the country, and would not let the king plunder the land. +Earl Hakon had a large armed force which the Gautland people had +raised for him. King Harald lay with his ships up in a river, +and made a foray on land, but left some of his men behind to +protect the ships. The king himself rode up with a part of the +men, but the greater part were on foot. They had to cross a +forest, where they found a mire or lake, and close to it a wood; +and when they reached the wood they saw the earl's men, but the +mire was between them. They drew up their people now on both +sides. Then King Harald ordered his men to sit down on the +hillside. "We will first see if they will attack us. Earl Hakon +does not usually wait to talk." It was frosty weather, with some +snow-drift, and Harald's men sat down under their shields; but it +was cold for the Gautlanders, who had but little clothing with +them. The earl told them to wait until King Harald came nearer, +so that all would stand equally high on the ground. Earl Hakon +had the same banner which had belonged to King Magnus Olafson. + +The lagman of the Gautland people, Thorvid, sat upon a horse, and +the bridle was fastened to a stake that stood in the mire. He +broke out with these words: "God knows we have many brave and +handsome fellows here, and we shall let King Steinkel hear that +we stood by the good earl bravely. I am sure of one thing: we +shall behave gallantly against these Northmen, if they attack us; +but if our young people give way, and should not stand to it, let +us not run farther than to that stream; but if they should give +way farther, which I am sure they will not do, let it not be +farther than to that hill." At that instant the Northmen sprang +up, raised the war-cry, and struck on their shields; and the +Gautland army began also to shout. The lagman's horse got shy +with the war-cry, and backed so hard that the stake flew up and +struck the lagman on the head. He said, "Ill luck to thee, +Northman, for that arrow!" and away fled the lagman. King Harald +had told his people, "If we do make a clash with the weapons, we +shall not however, go down from the hill until they come nearer +to us;" and they did so. When the war-cry was raised the earl +let his banner advance; but when they came under the hill the +king's army rushed down upon them, and killed some of the earl's +people, and the rest fled. The Northmen did not pursue the +fugitives long, for it was the fall of day; but they took Earl +Hakon's banner and all the arms and clothes they could get hold +of. King Harald had both the banners carried before him as they +marched away. They spoke among themselves that the earl had +probably fallen. As they were riding through the forest they +could only ride singly, one following the other. Suddenly a man +came full gallop across the path, struck his spear through him +who was carrying the earl's banner, seized the banner-staff, and +rode into the forest on the other side with the banner. When +this was told the king he said, "Bring me my armour, for the earl +is alive." Then the king rode to his ships in the night; and +many said that the earl had now taken his revenge. But Thiodolf +sang thus: -- + + "Steinkel's troops, who were so bold, + Who the Earl Hakon would uphold, + Were driven by our horsemen's power + To Hel, death goddess, in an hour; + And the great earl, so men say + Who won't admit he ran away, + Because his men fled from the ground, + Retired, and cannot now be found." + + + +75. DEATH OF HAL, THE MURDERER OF KODRAN. + +The rest of the night Harald passed in his ships; but in the +morning, when it was daylight, it was found that so thick ice had +gathered about the vessels that one could walk around them. The +king ordered his men to cut the ice from the ships all the way +out to the clear water; on which they all went to break the ice. +King Harald's son, Magnus, steered the vessel that lay lowest +down the river and nearest the water. When the people had +cleared the ice away almost entirely, a man ran out to the ice, +and began hewing away at it like a madman. Then said one of the +men, "It is going now as usual, that none can do so much as Hal +who killed Kodran, when once he lays himself to the work. See +how he is hewing away at the ice." There was a man in the crew +of Magnus, the king's son, who was called Thormod Eindridason; +and when he heard the name of Kodran's murderer he ran up to Hal, +and gave him a death-wound. Kodran was a son of Gudmund +Eyjolfson; and Valgerd, who was a sister of Gudmund, was the +mother of Jorun, and the grandmother by the mother's side of this +Thormod. Thormod was a year old when Kodran was killed, and had +never seen Hal Utrygson until now. When the ice was broken all +the way out to the water, Magnus drew his ship out, set sail +directly, and sailed westward across the lake; but the king's +ship, which lay farthest up the river, came out the last. Hal +had been in the king's retinue, and was very dear to him; so that +the king was enraged at his death. The king came the last into +the harbour, and Magnus had let the murderer escape into the +forest, and offered to pay the mulct for him; and the king had +very nearly attacked Magnus and his crew, but their friends came +up and reconciled them. + + + +76. OF KING HARALD. + +That winter (A.D. 1065) King Harald went up to Raumarike, and had +many people with him; and he accused the bondes there of having +kept from him his scat and duties, and of having aided his +enemies to raise disturbance against him. He seized on the +bondes and maimed some, killed others, and robbed many of all +their property. They who could do it fled from him. He burned +everything in the districts and laid them altogether waste. So +says Thiodolf: -- + + "He who the island-people drove, + When they against his power strove, + Now bridle's Raumarike's men, + Marching his forces through their glen. + To punish them the fire he lights + That shines afar off in dark nights + From house and yard, and, as he says, + Will warn the man who disobeys." + +Thereafter the king went up to Hedemark, burnt the dwellings, and +made no less waste and havoc there than in Raumarike. From +thence he went to Hadeland and Ringerike, burning and ravaging +all the land. So says Thiodolf: -- + + "The bonde's household goods are seen + Before his door upon the green, + Smoking and singed: and sparks red hot + Glow in the thatched roof of his cot. + In Hedemark the bondes pray + The king his crushing hand to stay; + In Ringerike and Hadeland, + None 'gainst his fiery wrath can stand." + +Then the bondes left all to the king's mercy. After the death of +King Magnus fifteen years had passed when the battle at Nis-river +took place, and afterwards two years elapsed before Harald and +Svein made peace. So says Thiodolf: -- + + "The Hordland king under the land + At anchor lay close to the strand, + At last, prepared with shield and spear + The peace was settled the third year." + +After this peace the disturbances with the people of the Upland +districts lasted a year and a half. So says Thiodolf: -- + + "No easy task it is to say + How the king brought beneath his sway + The Upland bondes, and would give + Nought but their ploughs from which to live. + The king in eighteen months brought down + Their bonde power, and raised his own, + And the great honour he has gained + Will still in memory be retained." + + + +77. OF THE KINGS OF ENGLAND. + +Edward, Ethelred's son, was king of England after his brother +Hardacanute. He was called Edward the Good; and so he was. King +Edward's mother was Queen Emma, daughter of Richard, earl of +Rouen. Her brother was Earl Robert, whose son was William the +Bastard, who at that time was earl at Rouen in Normandy. King +Edward's queen was Gyda, a daughter of Earl Godwin, the son of +Ulfnad. Gyda's brothers were, Earl Toste, the eldest; Earl +Morukare the next; Earl Walter the third; Earl Svein the fourth; +and the fifth was Harald, who was the youngest, and he was +brought up at King Edward's court, and was his foster-son. The +king loved him very much, and kept him as his own son; for he had +no children. + + + +78. OF HARALD GODWINSON. + +One summer it happened that Harald, the son of Godwin, made an +expedition to Bretland with his ships, but when they got to sea +they met a contrary wind, and were driven off into the ocean. +They landed west in Normandy, after suffering from a dangerous +storm. They brought up at Rouen, where they met Earl William, +who received Harald and his company gladly. Harald remained +there late in harvest, and was hospitably entertained; for the +stormy weather continued, and there was no getting to sea, and +this continued until winter set in; so the earl and Harald agreed +that he should remain there all winter. Harald sat on the high- +seat on one side of the earl; and on the other side sat the +earl's wife, one of the most beautiful women that could be seen. +They often talked together for amusement at the drinking-table; +and the earl went generally to bed, but Harald and the earl's +wife sat long in the evenings talking together, and so it went on +for a great part of the winter. In one of their conversations +she said to Harald, "The earl has asked me what it is we have to +talk about so much, for he is angry at it." Harald replies, "We +shall then at once let him know all our conversation." The +following day, Harald asked the earl to a conference, and they +went together into the conference-chamber; where also the queen +was, and some of the councillors. Then Harald began thus: -- "I +have to inform you, earl, that there lies more in my visit here +than I have let you know. I would ask your daughter in marriage, +and have often spoke over this matter with her mother, and she +has promised to support my suit with you." As soon as Harald had +made known this proposal of his, it was well received by all who +were present. They explained the case to the earl; and at last +it came so far that the earl was contracted to Harald, but as she +was very young, it was resolved that the wedding should be +deferred for some years. + + + +79. KING EDWARD'S DEATH. + +When spring came Harald rigged his ships and set off; and he and +the earl parted with great friendship. Harald sailed over to +England to King Edward, but did not return to Valland to fulfill +the marriage agreement. Edward was king over England for twenty- +three years and died on a bed of sickness in London on the 5th of +January, and was buried in Paul's church. Englishmen call him a +saint. + + + +80. HARALD GODWINSON MADE KING OF ENGLAND. + +The sons of Earl Godwin were the most powerful men in England. +Toste was made chief of the English king's army, and was his +land-defence man when the king began to grow old; and he was also +placed above all the other earls. His brother Harald was always +with the court itself, and nearest to the king in all service, +and had the charge of the king's treasure-chamber. It is said +that when the king was approaching his last hour, Harald and a +few others were with him. Harald first leans down over the king, +and then said, "I take you all to witness that the king has now +given me the kingdom, and all the realm of England:" and then the +king was taken dead out of the bed. The same day there was a +meeting of the chiefs, at which there was some talk of choosing a +king; and then Harald brought forward his witnesses that King +Edward had given him the kingdom on his dying day. The meeting +ended by choosing Harald as king, and he was consecrated and +crowned the 13th day of Yule, in Paul's church. Then all the +chiefs and all the people submitted to him. Now when his +brother, Earl Toste, heard of this he took it very ill, as he +thought himself quite as well entitled to be king. "I want," +said he, "that the principal men of the country choose him whom +they think best fitted for it." And sharp words passed between +the brothers. King Harald says he will not give up his kingly +dignity, for he is seated on the throne which kings sat upon, and +is anointed and consecrated a king. On his side also was the +strength of the people, for he had the king's whole treasure. + + + +81. EARL TOSTE'S EXPEDITION TO DENMARK. + +Now when King Harald perceived that his brother Toste wanted to +have him deprived of the kingdom he did not trust him; for Toste +was a clever man, and a great warrior, and was in friendship with +the principal men of the country. He therefore took the command +of the army from Toste, and also all the power he had beyond that +of the other earls of the country. Earl Toste, again, would not +submit to be his own brother's serving man; therefore he went +with his people over the sea to Flanders, and stayed there +awhile, then went to Friesland, and from thence to Denmark to his +relation King Svein. Earl Ulf, King Svein's father, and Gyda, +Earl Toste's mother, were brother's and sister's children. The +earl now asked King Svein for support and help of men; and King +Svein invited him to stay with him, with the promise that he +should get so large an earldom in Denmark that he would be an +important chief. + +The earl replies, "My inclination is to go back to my estate in +England; but if I cannot get help from you for that purpose, I +will agree to help you with all the power I can command in +England, if you will go there with the Danish army, and win the +country, as Canute, your mother's brother, did." + +The king replied, "So much smaller a man am I than Canute the +Great, that I can with difficulty defend my own Danish dominions +against the Northmen. King Canute, on the other hand, got the +Danish kingdom in heritage, took England by slash and blow, and +sometimes was near losing his life in the contest; and Norway he +took without slash or blow. Now it suits me much better to be +guided by my own slender ability than to imitate my relation, +King Canute's, lucky hits." + +Then Earl Toste said, "The result of my errand here is less +fortunate than I expected of thee who art so gallant a man, +seeing that thy relative is in so great need. It may be that I +will seek friendly help where it could less be expected; and that +I may find a chief who is less afraid, king, than thou art of a +great enterprise." + +Then the king and the earl parted, not just the best friends. + + + +82. EARL TOSTE'S EXPEDITION TO NORWAY. + +Earl Toste turned away then and went to Norway, where he +presented himself to King Harald, who was at that time in Viken. +When they met the earl explained his errand to the king. He told +him all his proceedings since he left England, and asked his aid +to recover his dominions in England. + +The king replied that the Northmen had no great desire for a +campaign in England, and to have English chiefs over them there. +"People say," added he, "that the English are not to be trusted." + +The earl replied, "Is it true what I have heard people tell in +England, that thy relative, King Magnus, sent men to King Edward +with the message that King Magnus had right to England as well as +to Denmark, and had got that heritage after Hardacanute, in +consequence of a regular agreement?" + +The king replied, "How came it that he did not get it, if he had +a right to it?" + +"Why," replied the earl, "hast thou not Denmark, as King Magnus, +thy predecessor, had it?" + +The king replies, "The Danes have nothing to brag of over us +Northmen; for many a place have we laid in ashes to thy +relations." + +Then said the earl, "If thou wilt not tell me, I will tell thee. +Magnus subdued Denmark, because all the chiefs of the country +helped him; and thou hast not done it, because all the people of +the country were against thee. Therefore, also, King Magnus did +not strive for England, because all the nation would have Edward +for king. Wilt thou take England now? I will bring the matter +so far that most of the principal men in England shall be thy +friends, and assist thee; for nothing is wanting to place me at +the side of my brother Harald but the king's name. All men allow +that there never was such a warrior in the northern lands as thou +art; and it appears to me extraordinary that thou hast been +fighting for fifteen years for Denmark, and wilt not take England +that lies open to thee." + +King Harald weighed carefully the earl's words, and perceived at +once that there was truth in much of what he said; and he himself +had also a great desire to acquire dominions. Then King Harald +and the earl talked long and frequently together; and at last he +took the resolution to proceed in summer to England, and conquer +the country. King Harald sent a message-token through all Norway +and ordered out a levy of one-half of all the men in Norway able +to carry arms. When this became generally known, there were many +guesses about what might be the end of this expedition. Some +reckoned up King Harald's great achievements, and thought he was +also the man who could accomplish this. Others, again, said that +England was difficult to attack; that it was very full of people; +and the men-at-arms, who were called Thingmen, were so brave, +that one of them was better than two of Harald's best men. Then +said Ulf the marshal: -- + + "I am still ready gold to gain; + But truly it would be in vain, + And the king's marshal in the hall + Might leave his good post once for all, + If two of us in any strife + Must for one Thingman fly for life, + My lovely Norse maid, in my youth + We thought the opposite the truth." + +Ulf the marshal died that spring (A.D. 1066). King Harald stood +over his grave, and said, as he was leaving it, "There lies now +the truest of men, and the most devoted to his king." + +Earl Toste sailed in spring west to Flanders, to meet the people +who had left England with him, and others besides who had +gathered to him both out of England and Flanders. + + + +83. GYRD'S DREAMS. + +King Harald's fleet assembled at the Solunds. When King Harald +was ready to leave Nidaros he went to King Olaf's shrine, +unlocked it, clipped his hair and nails, and locked the shrine +again, and threw the keys into the Nid. Some say he threw them +overboard outside of Agdanes; and since then the shrine of Saint +Olaf, the king, has never been opened. Thirty-five years had +passed since he was slain; and he lived thirty-five years here on +earth (A.D. 1080-1066). King Harald sailed with his ships he had +about him to the south to meet his people, and a great fleet was +collected; so that. according to the people's reckoning, King +Harald had nearly 200 ships beside provision-ships and small +craft. + +While they lay at the Solunds a man called Gyrd, on board the +king's ship, had a dream. He thought he was standing in the +king's ship and saw a great witch-wife standing on the island, +with a fork in one hand and a trough in the other. He thought +also that he saw over all the fleet, and that a fowl was sitting +upon every ship's stern, and that these fowls were all ravens or +ernes; and the witch-wife sang this song: -- + + "From the east I'll 'tice the king, + To the west the king I'll bring; + Many a noble bone will be + Ravens o'er Giuke's ship are fitting, + Eyeing the prey they think most fitting. + Upon the stem I'll sail with them! + Upon the stem I'll sail with them!" + + + +84. THORD'S DREAM. + +There was also a man called Thord, in a ship which lay not far +from the king's. He dreamt one night that he saw King Harald's +fleet coming to land, and he knew the land to be England. He saw +a great battle-array on the land; and he thought both sides began +to fight, and had many banners flapping in the air. And before +the army of the people of the country was riding a huge witch- +wife upon a wolf; and the wolf had a man's carcass in his mouth, +and the blood was dropping from his jaws; and when he had eaten +up one body she threw another into his mouth, and so one after +another, and he swallowed them all. And she sang thus: -- + + "Skade's eagle eyes + The king's ill luck espies: + Though glancing shields + Hide the green fields, + The king's ill luck she spies. + To bode the doom of this great king, + The flesh of bleeding men I fling + To hairy jaw and hungry maw! + To hairy jaw and hungry maw!" + + + +85. KING HARALD'S DREAM. + +King Harald also dreamt one night that he was in Nidaros, and met +his brother, King Olaf, who sang to him these verses: -- + + "In many a fight + My name was bright; + Men weep, and tell + How Olaf fell. + Thy death is near; + Thy corpse, I fear, + The crow will feed, + The witch-wife's steed." + +Many other dreams and forebodings were then told of, and most of +them gloomy. Before King Harald left Throndhjem, he let his son +Magnus be proclaimed king and set him as king over Norway while +he was absent. Thora, the daughter of Thorberg, also remained +behind; but he took with him Queen Ellisif and her two daughters, +Maria and Ingegerd. Olaf, King Harald's son, also accompanied +his father abroad. + + + +86. BATTLE AT SCARBOROUGH. + +When King Harald was clear for sea, and the wind became +favourable, he sailed out into the ocean; and he himself landed +in Shetland, but a part of his fleet in the Orkney Islands. King +Harald stopped but a short time in Shetland before sailing to +Orkney, from whence he took with him a great armed force, and the +earls Paul and Erlend, the sons of Earl Thorfin; but he left +behind him here the Queen Ellisif, and her daughters Maria and +Ingegerd. Then he sailed, leaving Scotland and England westward +of him, and landed at a place called Klifland. There he went on +shore and plundered, and brought the country in subjection to him +without opposition. Then he brought up at Skardaburg, and fought +with the people of the place. He went up a hill which is there, +and made a great pile upon it, which he set on fire; and when the +pile was in clear flame, his men took large forks and pitched the +burning wood down into the town, so that one house caught fire +after the other, and the town surrendered. The Northmen killed +many people there and took all the booty they could lay hold of. +There was nothing left for the Englishmen now, if they would +preserve their lives, but to submit to King Harald; and thus he +subdued the country wherever he came. Then the king proceeded +south along the land, and brought up at Hellornes, where there +came a force that had been assembled to oppose him, with which he +had a battle, and gained the victory. + + + +87. OF HARALD'S ORDER OF BATTLE. + +Thereafter the king sailed to the Humber, and up along the river, +and then he landed. Up in Jorvik were two earls, Earl Morukare, +and his brother, Earl Valthiof, and they had an immense army. +While the army of the earls was coming down from the upper part +of the country, King Harald lay in the Usa. King Harald now went +on the land, and drew up his men. The one arm of this line stood +at the outer edge of the river, the other turned up towards the +land along a ditch; and there was also a morass, deep, broad, and +full of water. The earls let their army proceed slowly down +along the river, with all their troops in line. The king's +banner was next the river, where the line was thickest. It was +thinnest at the ditch, where also the weakest of the men were. +When the earls advanced downwards along the ditch, the arm of the +Northmen's line which was at the ditch gave way; and the +Englishmen followed, thinking the Northmen would fly. The banner +of Earl Morukare advanced then bravely. + + + +88. THE BATTLE AT THE HUMBER. + +When King Harald saw that the English array had come to the ditch +against him, he ordered the charge to be sounded, and urged on +his men. He ordered the banner which was called the Land-ravager +to be carried before him, and made so severe an assault that all +had to give way before it; and there was a great loss among the +men of the earls, and they soon broke into flight, some running +up the river, some down, and the most leaping into the ditch, +which was so filled with dead that the Norsemen could go dry-foot +over the fen. There Earl Morukare fell. So says Stein Herdison: +-- + + "The gallant Harald drove along, + Flying but fighting, the whole throng. + At last, confused, they could not fight, + And the whole body took to flight. + Up from the river's silent stream + At once rose desperate splash and scream; + But they who stood like men this fray + Round Morukare's body lay." + +This song was composed by Stein Herdison about Olaf, son of King +Harald; and he speaks of Olaf being in this battle with King +Harald, his father. These things are also spoken of in the song +called "Harald's Stave": -- + + "Earl Valthiof's men + Lay in the fen, + By sword down hewed, + So thickly strewed, + That Norsemen say + They paved a way + Across the fen + For the brave Norsemen." + +Earl Valthiof, and the people who escaped, fled up to the castle +of York; and there the greatest loss of men had been. This +battle took place upon the Wednesday next Mathias' day (A.D. +1066). + + + +89. OF EARL TOSTE. + +Earl Toste had come from Flanders to King Harald as soon as he +arrived in England, and the earl was present at all these +battles. It happened, as he had foretold the king at their first +meeting, that in England many people would flock to them, as +being friends and relations of Earl Toste, and thus the king's +forces were much strengthened. After the battle now told of, all +people in the nearest districts submitted to Harald, but some +fled. Then the king advanced to take the castle, and laid his +army at Stanforda-bryggiur (Stamford Bridge); and as King Harald +had gained so great a victory against so great chiefs and so +great an army, the people were dismayed, and doubted if they +could make any opposition. The men of the castle therefore +determined, in a council, to send a message to King Harald, and +deliver up the castle into his power. All this was soon settled; +so that on Sunday the king proceeded with the whole army to the +castle, and appointed a Thing of the people without the castle, +at which the people of the castle were to be present. At this +Thing all the people accepted the condition of submitting to +Harald, and gave him, as hostages, the children of the most +considerable persons; for Earl Toste was well acquainted with all +the people of that town. In the evening the king returned down +to his ships, after this victory achieved with his own force, and +was very merry. A Thing was appointed within the castle early on +Monday morning, and then King Harald was to name officers to rule +over the town, to give out laws, and bestow fiefs. The same +evening, after sunset, King Harald Godwinson came from the south +to the castle with a numerous army, and rode into the city with +the good-will and consent of the people of the castle. All the +gates and walls were beset so that the Northmen could receive no +intelligence, and the army remained all night in the town. + + + +90. OF KING HARALD'S LANDING. + +On Monday, when King Harald Sigurdson had taken breakfast, he +ordered the trumpets to sound for going on shore. The army +accordingly got ready, and he divided the men into the parties +who should go, and who should stay behind. In every division he +allowed two men to land, and one to remain behind. Earl Toste +and his retinue prepared to land with King Harald; and, for +watching the ships, remained behind the king's son Olaf; the +earls of Orkney, Paul and Erlend; and also Eystein Orre, a son of +Thorberg Arnason, who was the most able and best beloved by the +king of all the lendermen, and to whom the king had promised his +daughter Maria. The weather was uncommonly fine, and it was hot +sunshine. The men therefore laid aside their armour, and went on +the land only with their shields, helmets and spears, and girt +with swords; and many had also arrows and bows, and all were very +merry. Now as they came near the castle a great army seemed +coming against them, and they saw a cloud of dust as from horses' +feet, and under it shining shields and bright armour. The king +halted his people, and called to him Earl Toste, and asked him +what army this could be. The earl replied that he thought it +most likely to be a hostle army, but possibly it might be some of +his relations who were seeking for mercy and friendship, in order +to obtain certain peace and safety from the king. Then the king +said, "We must all halt, to discover what kind of a force this +is." They did so; and the nearer this force came the greater it +appeared, and their shining arms were to the sight like glancing +ice. + + + +91. OF EARL TOSTE'S COUNSEL. + +Then said King Harald, "Let us now fall upon some good sensible +counsel; for it is not to be concealed that this is an hostile +army and the king himself without doubt is here." + +Then said the earl, "The first counsel is to turn about as fast +as we can to our ships to get our men and our weapons, and then +we will make a defence according to our ability; or otherwise let +our ships defend us, for there these horsemen have no power over +us." + +Then King Harald said, "I have another counsel. Put three of our +best horses under three of our briskest lads and let them ride +with all speed to tell our people to come quickly to our relief. +The Englishmen shall have a hard fray of it before we give +ourselves up for lost." + +The earl said the king must order in this, as in all things, as +he thought best; adding, at the same time, it was by no means his +wish to fly. Then King Harald ordered his banner Land-ravager to +be set up; and Frirek was the name of him who bore the banner. + + + +92. OF KING HARALD'S ARMY. + +Then King Harald arranged his army, and made the line of battle +long, but not deep. He bent both wings of it back, so that they +met together; and formed a wide ring equally thick all round, +shield to shield, both in the front and rear ranks. The king +himself and his retinue were within the circle; and there was the +banner, and a body of chosen men. Earl Toste, with his retinue, +was at another place, and had a different banner. The army was +arranged in this way, because the king knew that horsemen were +accustomed to ride forwards with great vigour, but to turn back +immediately. Now the king ordered that his own and the earl's +attendants should ride forwards where it was most required. "And +our bowmen," said he, "shall be near to us; and they who stand in +the first rank shall set the spear-shaft on the ground, and the +spear-point against the horseman's breast, if he rides at them; +and those who stand in the second rank shall set the spear-point +against the horse's breast." + + + +93. OF KING HARALD GODWINSON. + +King Harald Godwinson had come with an immense army, both of +cavalry and infantry. Now King Harald Sigurdson rode around his +array, to see how every part was drawn up. He was upon a black +horse, and the horse stumbled under him, so that the king fell +off. He got up in haste and said, "A fall is lucky for a +traveller." + +The English king Harald said to the Northmen who were with him, +"Do ye know the stout man who fell from his horse, with the blue +kirtle and the beautiful helmet?" + +"That is the king himself." said they. + +The English king said, "A great man, and of stately appearance is +he; but I think his luck has left him." + + + +94. OF THE TROOP OF THE NOBILITY. + +Twenty horsemen rode forward from the Thing-men's troops against +the Northmen's array; and all of them, and likewise their horses, +were clothed in armour. + +One of the horsemen said, "Is Earl Toste in this army?" + +The earl answered, "It is not to be denied that ye will find him +here." + +The horseman says, "Thy brother, King Harald, sends thee +salutation, with the message that thou shalt have the whole of +Northumberland; and rather than thou shouldst not submit to him, +he will give thee the third part of his kingdom to rule over +along with himself." + +The earl replies, "This is something different from the enmity +and scorn he offered last winter; and if this had been offered +then it would have saved many a man's life who now is dead, and +it would have been better for the kingdom of England. But if I +accept of this offer, what will he give King Harald Sigurdson +for his trouble?" + +The horseman replied, "He has also spoken of this; and will give +him seven feet of English ground, or as much more as he may be +taller than other men." + +"Then," said the earl, "go now and tell King Harald to get ready +for battle; for never shall the Northmen say with truth that Earl +Toste left King Harald Sigurdson to join his enemy's troops, when +he came to fight west here in England. We shall rather all take +the resolution to die with honour, or to gain England by a +victory." + +Then the horseman rode back. + +King Harald Sigurdson said to the earl, "Who was the man who +spoke so well?" + +The earl replied, "That was King Harald Godwinson." + +Then, said King Harald Sigurdson, "That was by far too long +concealed from me; for they had come so near to our army, that +this Harald should never have carried back the tidings of our +men's slaughter." + +Then said the earl, "It was certainly imprudent for such chiefs, +and it may be as you say; but I saw he was going to offer me +peace and a great dominion, and that, on the other hand, I would +be his murderer if I betrayed him; and I would rather he should +be my murderer than I his, if one of two be to die." + +King Harald Sigurdson observed to his men, "That was but a little +man, yet he sat firmly in his stirrups." + +It is said that Harald made these verses at this time: -- + + "Advance! advance! + No helmets glance, + But blue swords play + In our array. + Advance! advance! + No mail-coats glance, + But hearts are here + That ne'er knew fear." + +His coat of mail was called Emma; and it was so long that it +reached almost to the middle of his leg, and so strong that no +weapon ever pierced it. Then said King Harald Sigurdson, "These +verses are but ill composed; I must try to make better;" and he +composed the following: -- + + "In battle storm we seek no lee, + With skulking head, and bending knee, + Behind the hollow shield. + With eye and hand we fend the head; + Courage and skill stand in the stead + Of panzer, helm, and shield, + In hild's bloody field." + +Thereupon Thiodolf sang: -- + + "And should our king in battle fall, -- + A fate that God may give to all, -- + His sons will vengeance take; + And never shone the sun upon + Two nobler eaglet; in his run, + And them we'll never forsake." + + + +95. OF THE BEGINNING OF THE BATTLE. + +Now the battle began. The Englishmen made a hot assault upon the +Northmen, who sustained it bravely. It was no easy matter for +the English to ride against the Northmen on account of their +spears; therefore they rode in a circle around them. And the +fight at first was but loose and light, as long as the Northmen +kept their order of battle; for although the English rode hard +against the Northmen, they gave way again immediately, as they +could do nothing against them. Now when the Northmen thought +they perceived that the enemy were making but weak assaults, they +set after them, and would drive them into flight; but when they +had broken their shield-rampart the Englishmen rode up from all +sides, and threw arrows and spears on them. Now when King Harald +Sigurdson saw this, he went into the fray where the greatest +crash of weapons was, and there was a sharp conflict, in which +many people fell on both sides. King Harald then was in a rage, +and ran out in front of the array, and hewed down with both +hands; so that neither helmet nor armour could withstand him, and +all who were nearest gave way before him. It was then very near +with the English that they had taken to flight. So says Arnor, +the earls' skald: -- + + "Where battle-storm was ringing, + Where arrow-cloud was singing, + Harald stood there, + Of armour bare, + His deadly sword still swinging. + The foeman feel its bite; + His Norsemen rush to fight, + Danger to share, + With Harald there, + Where steel on steel was ringing." + + + +96. FALL OF KING HARALD. + +King Harald Sigurdson was hit by an arrow in the windpipe, and +that was his death-wound. He fell, and all who had advanced with +him, except those who retired with the banner. There was +afterwards the warmest conflict, and Earl Toste had taken charge +of the king's banner. They began on both sides to form their +array again, and for a long time there was a pause in fighting. +Then Thiodolf sang these verses: -- + + "The army stands in hushed dismay; + Stilled is the clamour of the fray. + Harald is dead, and with him goes + The spirit to withstand our foes. + A bloody scat the folk must pay + For their king's folly on this day. + He fell; and now, without disguise, + We say this business was not wise." + +But before the battle began again Harald Godwinson offered his +brother, Earl Toste, peace, and also quarter to the Northmen who +were still alive; but the Northmen called out, all of them +together, that they would rather fall, one across the other, than +accept of quarter from the Englishmen. Then each side set up a +war-shout, and the battle began again. So says Arnor, the earls' +skald: -- + + "The king, whose name would ill-doers scare, + The gold-tipped arrow would not spare. + Unhelmed, unpanzered, without shield, + He fell among us in the field. + The gallant men who saw him fall + Would take no quarter; one and all + Resolved to die with their loved king, + Around his corpse in a corpse-ring." + + + +97. SKIRMISH OF ORRE. + +Eystein Orre came up at this moment from the ships with the men +who followed him, and all were clad in armour. Then Eystein got +King Harald's banner Land-ravager; and now was, for the third +time, one of the sharpest of conflicts, in which many Englishmen +fell, and they were near to taking flight. This conflict is +called Orre's storm. Eystein and his men had hastened so fast +from the ships that they were quite exhausted, and scarcely fit +to fight before they came into the battle; but afterwards they +became so furious, that they did not guard themselves with their +shields as long as they could stand upright. At last they threw +off their coats of ringmail, and then the Englishmen could easily +lay their blows at them; and many fell from weariness, and died +without a wound. Thus almost all the chief men fell among the +Norway people. This happened towards evening; and then it went, +as one might expect, that all had not the same fate, for many +fled, and were lucky enough to escape in various ways; and +darkness fell before the slaughter was altogether ended. + + + +98. OF STYRKAR THE MARSHAL. + +Styrkar, King Harald Sigurdson's marshal, a gallant man, escaped +upon a horse, on which he rode away in the evening. It was +blowing a cold wind, and Styrkar had not much other clothing upon +him but his shirt, and had a helmet on his head, and a drawn +sword in his hand. As soon as his weariness was over, he began +to feel cold. A waggoner met him in a lined skin-coat. Styrkar +asks him, "Wilt thou sell thy coat, friend?" + +"Not to thee," says the peasant: "thou art a Northman; that I +can hear by thy tongue." + +Styrkar replies, "If I were a Northman, what wouldst thou do?" + +"I would kill thee," replied the peasant; "but as ill luck would +have it, I have no weapon just now by me that would do it." + +Then Styrkar says, "As you can't kill me, friend, I shall try if +I can't kill you." And with that he swung his sword, and struck +him on the neck, so that his head came off. He then took the +skin-coat, sprang on his horse, and rode down to the strand. + +Olaf Haraldson had not gone on land with the others, and when he +heard of his father's fall he made ready to sail away with the +men who remained. + + + +99. OF WILLIAM THE BASTARD. + +When the Earl of Rouen, William the Bastard, heard of his +relation, King Edward's, death, and also that Harald Godwinson +was chosen, crowned, and consecrated king of England, it appeared +to him that he had a better right to the kingdom of England than +Harald, by reason of the relationship between him and King +Edward. He thought, also, that he had grounds for avenging the +affront that Harald had put upon him with respect to his +daughter. From all these grounds William gathered together a +great army in Normandy, and had many men, and sufficient +transport-shipping. The day that he rode out of the castle to +his ships, and had mounted his horse, his wife came to him, and +wanted to speak with him; but when he saw her he struck at her +with his heel, and set his spurs so deep into her breast that she +fell down dead; and the earl rode on to his ships, and went with +his ships over to England. His brother, Archbishop Otto, was +with him; and when the earl came to England he began to plunder, +and take possession of the land as he came along. Earl William +was stouter and stronger than other men; a great horseman and +warrior, but somewhat stern; and a very sensible man, but not +considered a man to be relied on. + + + +100. FALL OF KING HARALD GODWINSON. + +King Harald Godwinson gave King Harald Sigurdson's son Olaf leave +to go away, with the men who had followed him and had not fallen +in battle; but he himself turned round with his army to go south, +for he had heard that William the Bastard was overwhelming the +south of England with a vast army, and was subduing the country +for himself. With King Harald went his brothers Svein and Gyrd, +and Earl Valthiof. King Harald and Earl William met each other +south in England at Helsingja-port (Hastings). There was a great +battle in which King Harald and his brother Earl Gyrd and a great +part of his men fell. This was the nineteenth day after the fall +of King Harald Sigurdson. Harald's brother, Earl Valthiof, +escaped by flight, and towards evening fell in with a division of +William's people, consisting of 100 men; and when they saw Earl +Valthiof's troop they fled to a wood. Earl Valthiof set fire to +the wood, and they were all burnt. So says Thorkel Skallason in +Valthiof's ballad: -- + + "Earl Valthiof the brave + His foes a warming gave: + Within the blazing grove + A hundred men he drove. + The wolf will soon return, + And the witch's horse will burn + Her sharp claws in the ash, + To taste the Frenchman's flesh." + + + +101. EARL VALTHIOF'S DEATH. + +William was proclaimed king of England. He sent a message to +Earl Valthiof that they should be reconciled, and gave him +assurance of safety to come to the place of meeting. The earl +set out with a few men; but when he came to a heath north of +Kastala-bryggia, there met him two officers of King William, with +many followers, who took him prisoner, put him in fetters, and +afterwards he was beheaded; and the English call him a saint. +Thorkel tells of this: -- + + "William came o'er the sea, + With bloody sword came he: + Cold heart and bloody hand + Now rule the English land. + Earl Valthiof he slew, -- + Valthiof the brave and true. + Cold heart and bloody hand + Now rule the English land." + +William was after this king of England for twenty-one years, and +his descendants have been so ever since. + + + +102. OF OLAF HARALDSON'S EXPEDITION TO NORWAY. + +Olaf, the son of King Harald Sigurdson, sailed with his fleet +from England from Hrafnseyr, and came in autumn to the Orkney +Isles, where the event had happened that Maria, a daughter of +Harald Sigurdson, died a sudden death the very day and hour her +father, King Harald, fell. Olaf remained there all winter; but +the summer after he proceeded east to Norway, where he was +proclaimed king along with his brother Magnus. Queen Ellisif +came from the West, along with her stepson Olaf and her daughter +Ingegerd. There came also with Olaf over the West sea Skule, a +son of Earl Toste, and who since has been called the king's +foster-son, and his brother Ketil Krok. Both were gallant men, +of high family in England, and both were very intelligent; and +the brothers were much beloved by King Olaf. Ketil Krok went +north to Halogaland, where King Olaf procured him a good +marriage, and from him are descended many great people. Skule, +the king's foster-son, was a very clever man, and the handsomest +man that could be seen. He was the commander of King Olaf's +court-men, spoke at the Things (1) and took part in all the +country affairs with the king. The king offered to give Skule +whatever district in Norway he liked, with all the income and +duties that belonged to the king in it. Skule thanked him very +much for the offer, but said he would rather have something else +from him. "For if there came a shift of kings," said he, "the +gift might come to nothing. I would rather take some properties +lying near to the merchant towns, where you, sire, usually take +up your abode, and then I would enjoy your Yule-feasts." The +king agreed to this, and conferred on him lands eastward at +Konungahella, Oslo, Tunsberg, Sarpsborg, Bergen, and north at +Nidaros. These were nearly the best properties at each place, +and have since descended to the family branches which came from +Skule. King Olaf gave Skule his female relative, Gudrun, the +daughter of Nefstein, in marriage. Her mother was Ingerid, a +daughter of Sigurd Syr and Asta, King Olaf the Saint's mother. +Ingerid was a sister of King Olaf the Saint and of King Harald. +Skule and Gudrun's son was Asolf of Reine, who married Thora, a +daughter of Skopte Ogmundson; Asolf's and Thora's son was Guthorm +of Reine, father of Bard, and grandfather of King Inge and of +Duke Skule. + + +ENDNOTES: +(1) Another instance of the old Norse or Icelandic tongue having + been generally known in a part of England. + + + +103. OF KING HARALD SIGURDSON. + +One year after King Harald's fall his body was transported from +England north to Nidaros, and was buried in Mary church, which he +had built. It was a common observation that King Harald +distinguished himself above all other men by wisdom and resources +of mind; whether he had to take a resolution suddenly for himself +and others, or after long deliberation. He was, also, above all +other men, bold, brave, and lucky, until his dying day, as above +related; and bravery is half victory. So says Thiodolf: -- + + "Harald, who till his dying day + Came off the best in many a fray, + Had one good rule in battle-plain, + In Seeland and elsewhere, to gain -- + That, be his foes' strength more or less, + Courage is always half success." + +King Herald was a handsome man, of noble appearance; his hair and +beard yellow. He had a short beard, and long mustaches. The one +eyebrow was somewhat higher than the other. He had large hands +(1) and feet; but these were well made. His height was five +ells. He was stern and severe to his enemies, and avenged +cruelly all opposition or misdeed. So says Thiodolf: -- + + "Severe alike to friends or foes, + Who dared his royal will oppose; + Severe in discipline to hold + His men-at-arms wild and bold; + Severe the bondes to repress; + Severe to punish all excess; + Severe was Harald -- but we call + That just which was alike to all." + +King Harald was most greedy of power, and of all distinction and +honour. He was bountiful to the friends who suited him. So says +Thiodolf: -- + + "I got from him, in sea-fight strong, + A mark of gold for my ship-song. + Merit in any way + He generously would pay." + +King Harald was fifty years old when he fell. We have no +particular account of his youth before he was fifteen years old, +when he was with his brother, King Olaf, at the battle of +Stiklestad. He lived thirty-five years after that, and in all +that time was never free from care and war. King Harald never +fled from battle, but often tried cunning ways to escape when he +had to do with great superiority of forces. All the men who +followed King Harald in battle or skirmish said that when he +stood in great danger, or anything came suddenly upon him, he +always took that course which all afterwards saw gave the best +hope of a fortunate issue. + + +ENDNOTES: +(1) It is a singular physical circumstance, that in almost all + the swords of those ages to be found in the collection of + weapons in the Antiquarian Museum at Copenhagen, the handles + indicate a size of hand very much smaller than the hands of + modern people of any class or rank. No modern dandy, with + the most delicate hands, would find room for his hand to + grasp or wield with case some of the swords of these + Northmen. -- L. + + + +104. KING HARALD AND KING OLAF COMPARED. + +When Haldor, a son of Brynjolf Ulfalde the Old, who was a +sensible man and a great chief, heard people talk of how unlike +the brothers Saint Olaf and King Harald were in disposition, he +used to say, "I was in great friendship with both the brothers, +and I knew intimately the dispositions of both, and never did I +know two men more like in disposition. Both were of the highest +understanding, and bold in arms, and greedy of power and +property; of great courage, but not acquainted with the way of +winning the favour of the people; zealous in governing, and +severe in their revenge. King Olaf forced the people into +Christianity and good customs, and punished cruelly those who +disobeyed. This just and rightful severity the chiefs of the +country could not bear, but raised an army against him, and +killed him in his own kingdom; and therefore he is held to be a +saint. King Harald, again, marauded to obtain glory and power, +forced all the people he could under his power, and died in +another king's dominions. Both brothers, in daily life, were of +a worthy and considerate manner of living; they were of great +experience, and very laborious, and were known and celebrated far +and wide for these qualities." + + + +105. KING MAGNUS'S DEATH. + +King Magnus Haraldson ruled over Norway the first winter after +King Harald's death (A.D. 1067), and afterwards two years (A.D. +1068-1069) along with his brother, King Olaf. Thus there were +two kings of Norway at that time; and Magnus had the northern and +Olaf the eastern part of the country. King Magnus had a son +called Hakon, who was fostered by Thorer of Steig in +Gudbrandsdal, who was a brother of King Magnus by the mother's +side; and Hakon was a most agreeable man. + +After King Harald Sigurdson's death the Danish king Svein let it +be known that the peace between the Northmen and the Danes was at +an end, and insisted that the league between Harald and Svein was +not for longer time than their lives. There was a levy in both +kingdoms. Harald's sons called out the whole people in Norway +for procuring men and ships, and Svein set out from the south +with the Danish army. Messengers then went between with +proposals for a peace; and the Northmen said they would either +have the same league as was concluded between King Harald and +Svein, or otherwise give battle instantly on the spot. Verses +were made on this occasion, viz.: -- + + "Ready for war or peace, + King Olaf will not cease + From foeman's hand + To guard his land." + +So says also Stein Herdison in his song of Olaf: -- + + "From Throndhjem town, where in repose + The holy king defies his foes, + Another Olaf will defend + His kingdom from the greedy Svein. + King Olaf had both power and right, + And the Saint's favour in the fight. + The Saint will ne'er his kin forsake, + And let Svein Ulfson Norway take." + +In this manner friendship was concluded between the kings and +peace between the countries. King Magnus fell ill and died of +the ringworm disease, after being ill for some time. He died and +was buried at Nidaros. He was an amiable king and bewailed by +the people. + + + +SAGA OF OLAF KYRRE. + + +PRELIMINARY REMARKS. + +Snorri's account of Olaf Kyrre corresponds with the statements +found in "Agrip", "Fagrskinna", and "Morkinskinna". + +There are but few events in Olaf's long reign, and hence he is +very appropriately called the Quiet (Kyrre). As Hildebrand says, +this saga seems to be written simply to fill out the empty space +between Harald Hardrade and Magnus Barefoot. + +Skalds quoted in this saga are: Stein Herdison and Stuf. + + + +1. OLAF'S PERSONAL APPEARANCE. + +Olaf remained sole king of Norway after the death (A.D. 1069) of +his brother King Magnus. Olaf was a stout man, well grown in +limbs; and every one said a handsomer man could not be seen, nor +of a nobler appearance. His hair was yellow as silk, and became +him well; his skin was white and fine over all his body; his eyes +beautiful, and his limbs well proportioned. He was rather silent +in general, and did not speak much even at Things; but he was +merry in drinking parties. He loved drinking much, and was +talkative enough then; but quite peaceful. He was cheerful in +conversation, peacefully inclined during all his reign, and +loving gentleness and moderation in all things. Stein Herdison +speaks thus of him: -- + + "Our Throndhjem king is brave and wise, + His love of peace our bondes prize; + By friendly word and ready hand + He holds good peace through every land. + He is for all a lucky star; + England he frightens from a war; + The stiff-necked Danes he drives to peace; + Troubles by his good influence cease." + + + +2. OF KING OLAF'S MANNER OF LIVING. + +It was the fashion in Norway in old times for the king's high- +seat to be on the middle of a long bench, and the ale was handed +across the fire (1); but King Olaf had his high-seat made on a +high bench across the room; he also first had chimney-places in +the rooms, and the floors strewed both summer and winter. In +King Olaf's time many merchant towns arose in Norway, and many +new ones were founded. Thus King Olaf founded a merchant town at +Bergen, where very soon many wealthy people settled themselves, +and it was regularly frequented by merchants from foreign lands. +He had the foundations laid for the large Christ church, which +was to be a stone church; but in his time there was little done +to it. Besides, he completed the old Christ church, which was of +wood. King Olaf also had a great feasting-house built in +Nidaros, and in many other merchant towns, where before there +were only private feasts; and in his time no one could drink in +Norway but in these houses, adorned for the purpose with branches +and leaves, and which stood under the king's protection. The +great guild-bell in Throndhjem, which was called the pride of the +town, tolled to call together to these guilds. The guild- +brethren built Margaret's church in Nidaros of stone. In King +Olaf's time there were general entertainments and hand-in-hand +feasts. At this time also much unusual splendour and foreign +customs and fashions in the cut of clothes were introduced; as, +for instance, costly hose plaited about the legs. Some had gold +rings about the legs, and also used coats which had lists down +the sides, and arms five ells long, and so narrow that they must +be drawn up with ties, and lay in folds all the way up to the +shoulders. The shoes were high, and all edged with silk, or even +with gold. Many other kinds of wonderful ornaments were used at +that time. + + +ENDNOTES: +(1) We may understand the arrangement by supposing the fire in + the middle of the room, the smoke escaping by a hole in the + roof, and a long bench on each side of the fire; one bench + occupied by the high-seat of the king and great guests, the + other by the rest of the guests; and the cup handed across + the fire, which appears to have had a religious meaning + previous to the introduction of Christianity. -- L. + + + +3. FASHION OF KING OLAF'S COURT. + +King Olaf used the fashion, which was introduced from the courts +of foreign kings, of letting his grand-butler stand at the end of +the table, and fill the table-cups for himself and the other +distinguished guests who sat at the table. He had also torch- +bearers, who held as many candles at the table as there were +guests of distinction present. There was also a marshal's bench +outside of the table-circle, where the marshal and other persons +of distinction sat with their faces towards the high-seat. King +Harald, and the kings before him, used to drink out of deer-horn; +and the ale was handed from the high-seat to the otherside over +the fire, and he drank to the memory of any one he thought of. +So says Stuf the skald: -- + + "He who in battle is the first, + And now in peace is best to trust, + A welcome, hearty and sincere, + Gave to me on my coming here. + He whom the ravens watch with care, + He who the gold rings does not spare, + A golden horn full to the brink + Gave me himself at Haug to drink." + + + +4. ARRANGEMENT OF KING OLAF'S COURT. + +King Olaf had 120 courtmen-at-arms, and 60 pursuivants, besides +60 house-servants, who provided what was wanted for the king's +house wherever it might be, or did other work required for the +king. When the bondes asked why he kept a greater retinue than +the law allowed, or former kings kept when they went in guest- +quarters or feasts which the bondes had to provide for them, the +king answered, "It does not happen that I rule the kingdom +better, or produce greater respect for me than ye had for my +father, although I have one-half more people than he had. I do +not by any means do it merely to plague you, or to make your +condition harder than formerly." + + + +5. KING SVEIN ULFSON'S DEATH. + +King Svein Ulfson died ten years after the fall of both the +Haralds (A.D. 1076). After him his son, Harald Hein, was king +for three years (A.D. 1077-1080); then Canute the Holy for seven +years (A.D. 1081-1087); afterwards Olaf, King Svein's third son, +for eight years (A.D. 1088-1095). Then Eirik the Good, Svein's +fourth son, for eight winters (A.D. 1096-1103). Olaf, the king +of Norway, was married to Ingerid, a daughter of Svein, the +Danish king; and Olaf, the Danish King Svein's son, married +Ingegerd, a daughter of King Harald, and sister of King Olaf of +Norway. King Olaf Haraldson, who was called by some Olaf Kyrre, +but by many Olaf the Bonde, had a son by Thora, Joan's daughter, +who was called Magnus, and was one of the handsomest lads that +could be seen, and was promising in every respect. He was +brought up in the king's court. + + + +6. MIRACLES OF KING OLAF THE SAINT. + +King Olaf had a church of stone built in Nidaros, on the spot +where King Olaf's body had first been buried, and the altar was +placed directly over the spot where the king's grave had been. +This church was consecrated and called Christ Church; and King +Olaf's shrine was removed to it, and was placed before the altar, +and many miracles took place there. The following summer, on the +same day of the year as the church was consecrated, which was the +day before Olafsmas, there was a great assemblage of people, and +then a blind man was restored to sight. And on the mass-day +itself, when the shrine and the holy relics were taken out and +carried, and the shrine itself, according to custom, was taken +and set down in the churchyard, a man who had long been dumb +recovered his speech again, and sang with flowing tongue praise- +hymns to God, and to the honour of King Olaf the Saint. The +third miracle was of a woman who had come from Svithjod, and had +suffered much distress on this pilgrimage from her blindness; but +trusting in God's mercy, had come travelling to this solemnity. +She was led blind into the church to hear mass this day; but +before the service was ended she saw with both eyes, and got her +sight fully and clearly, although she had been blind fourteen +years. She returned with great joy, praising God and King Olaf +the Saint. + + + +7. OF THE SHRINE OF KING OLAF THE SAINT. + +There happened a circumstance in Nidaros, when King Olaf's coffin +was being carried about through the streets, that it became so +heavy that people could not lift it from the spot. Now when the +coffin was set down, the street was broken up to see what was +under it at that spot, and the body of a child was found which +had been murdered and concealed there. The body was carried +away, the street put in order again as it had been before, and +the shrine carried on according to custom. + + + +8. KING OLAF WAS BLESSED WITH PEACE. + +In the days of King O1af there were bountiful harvests in Norway +and many good things. In no man's life had times been so good in +Norway since the days of Harald Harfager. King O1af modified for +the better many a matter that his father had inaugurated and +maintained with severity. He was generous, but a strict ruler, +for he was a wise man, and well understood what was of advantage +to the kingdom. There are many stories of his good works. How +much he loved and how kind he was to the people may be seen from +the following words, which he once spoke at a large banquet. He +was happy and in the best of spirits, when one of his men said, +"It pleases us, sire, to see you so happy." He answered: "I have +reason to be glad when I see my subjects sitting happy and free +in a guild consecrated to my uncle, the sainted King Olaf. In +the days of my father these people were subjected to much terror +and fear; the most of them concealed their gold and their +precious things, but now I see glittering on his person what each +one owns, and your freedom is my gladness. In his reign there +was no strife, and he protected himself and his realm against +enemies abroad; and his nearest neighbours stood in great awe of +him, although he was a most gentle man, as is confirmed by the +skald. + + + +9. MEETING OF OLAF KYRRE AND CANUTE THE SAINT. + +King Olaf Kyrre was a great friend of his brother-in-law, the +Danish king, Canute the holy. They appointed a meeting and met +at the Gaut river at Konungahella, where the kings used to have +their meetings. There King Canute made the proposal that they +should send an army westward to England on account of the revenge +they had to take there; first and foremost King Olaf himself, and +also the Danish king. "Do one of two things," said King Canute, +-- "either take sixty ships, which I will furnish thee with, and +be thou the leader; or give me sixty ships, and I shall be the +leader." Then said King Olaf, "This speech of thine, King +Canute, is altogether according to my mind; but there is this +great difference between us; your family has had more luck in +conquering England with great glory, and, among others, King +Canute the Great; and it is likely that this good fortune follows +your race. On the other hand, when King Harald, my father, went +westward to England, he got his death there; and at that time the +best men in Norway followed him. But Norway was so emptied then +of chosen men, that such men have not since been to find in the +country; for that expedition there was the most excellent outfit, +and you know what was the end of it. Now I know my own capacity, +and how little I am suited to be the leader; so I would rather +you should go, with my help and assistance." + +So King Olaf gave Canute sixty large ships, with excellent +equipment and faithful men, and set his lendermen as chiefs over +them; and all must allow that this armament was admirably equipt. +It is also told in the saga about Canute, that the Northmen alone +did not break the levy when the army was assembled, but the Danes +would not obey their king's orders. This king Canute +acknowledged, and gave them leave to trade in merchandise where +they pleased through his country, and at the same time sent the +king of Norway costly presents for his assistance. On the other +hand he was enraged against the Danes, and laid heavy fines upon +them. + + + +10. A BONDE WHO UNDERSTOOD THE LANGUAGE OF BIRDS. + +One summer, when King Olaf's men had gone round the country +collecting his income and land dues, it happened that the king, +on their return home asked them where on their expedition they +had been best entertained. They said it was in the house of a +bonde in one of the king's districts. "There is an old bonde +there who knows many things before they happen. We asked him +about many things, which he explained to us; nay, we even believe +that he understands perfectly the language of birds." The king +replies, "How can ye believe such nonsense?" and insisted that it +was wrong to put confidence in such things. It happened soon +after that the king was sailing along the coast; and as they +sailed through a Sound the king said, "What is that township up +in the country?" + +They replied, "That is the district, sire, where we told you we +were best entertained." + +Then said the king, "What house is that which stands up there, +not far from the Sound?" + +They replied, "That house belongs to the wise old bonde we told +you of, sire." + +They saw now a horse standing close to the house. Then said the +king, "Go there, and take that horse, and kill him." + +They replied, "We would not like to do him such harm." + +The king: "I will command. Cut off the horse's head; but take +care of yourselves that ye let no blood come to the ground, and +bear the horse out to my ship. Go then and bring to me the old +man; but tell him nothing of what has happened, as ye shall +answer for it with your lives." + +They did as they were ordered, and then came to the old man, and +told him the king's message. When he came before the king, the +king asked him, "Who owns the house thou art dwelling in?" + +He replies, "Sire, you own it, and take rent for it." + +The king: "Show us the way round the ness, for here thou must be +a good pilot." + +The old man went into his boat and rowed before the king's ship; +and when he had rowed a little way a crow came flying over the +ship, and croaking hideously. The peasant listens to the crow. +The king said, "Do you think, bonde, that betokens anything?" + +"Sire, that is certain," said he. + +Then another crow flies over the ship, and screeches dreadfully. +The bonde was so ill hearing this that he could not row, and the +oars hung loose in his hands. + +Then said the king, "Thy mind is turned much to these crows, +bonde, and to what they say." + +The bonde replies, "Now I suspect it is true what they say." + +The third time the crow came flying screeching at its very worst, +and almost settling on the ship. Now the bonde threw down his +oars, regarded them no more, and stood up before the king. + +Then the king said, "Thou art taking this much to heart, bonde; +what is it they say?" + +The peasant -- "It is likely that either they or I have +misunderstood -- " + +"Say on," replied the king. + +The bonde replied in a song: -- + + "The `one-year old' + Mere nonsense told; + The `two-years' chatter + Seemed senseless matter; + The three-years' croak + Of wonders spoke. + The foul bird said + My old mare's head + I row along; + And, in her song, + She said the thief + Was the land's chief." + +The king said, "What is this, bonde! Wilt thou call me a thief?" + +Then the king gave him good presents, and remitted all the land- +rent of the place he lived on. So says Stein: -- + + "The pillar of our royal race + Stands forth adorned with every grace. + What king before e'er took such pride + To scatter bounty far and wide? + Hung round with shields that gleam afar; + The merchant ship on one bestows, + With painted streaks in glowing rows. + + "The man-at-arms a golden ring + Boasts as the present of his king; + At the king's table sits the guest, + By the king's bounty richly drest. + King Olaf, Norway's royal son, + Who from the English glory won, + Pours out with ready-giving hand + His wealth on children of the land. + + "Brave clothes to servants he awards, + Helms and ring-mail coats grace his guards; + Or axe and sword Har's warriors gain, + And heavy armour for the plain. + Gold, too, for service duly paid, + Red gold all pure, and duly weighed, + King Olaf gives -- be loves to pay + All service in a royal way." + + + +11. OF KING OLAF KYRRE'S DEATH. + +King Olaf lived principally in his domains on his large farms. +Once when he was east in Ranrike, on his estate of Haukby, he +took the disease which ended in his death. He had then been king +of Norway for twenty-six years (A.D. 1068-1093); for he was made +king of Norway the year after King Harald's death. King Olaf's +body was taken north to Nidaros, and buried in Christ church, +which he himself had built there. He was the most amiable king +of his time, and Norway was much improved in riches and +cultivation during his reign. + + + +MAGNUS BAREFOOT'S SAGA. + + +PRELIMINARY REMARKS. + +The greater part of the contents of this saga is also found in +"Agrip", "Fagrskinna", and "Morkinskinna". + +Magnus and his cousin Hakon became kings in 1093, but Hakon ruled +only two years and died in 1095. King Magnus fell in the year +1103. + +Skalds quoted are: Bjorn Krephende, Thorkel Hamarskald, and +Eldjarn. + + + +1. BEGINNING OF THE REIGN OF KING MAGNUS AND HIS COUSIN HAKON. + +Magnus, King Olaf's son, was, immediately after King Olaf's +death, proclaimed at Viken king of all Norway; but the Upland +people, on hearing of King Olaf's death, chose Hakon, Thorer's +foster-son, a cousin of King Magnus, as king. Thereupon Hakon +and Thorer went north to the Throndhjem country, and when they +came to Nidaros they summoned the Eyrathing; and at that Thing +Hakon desired the bondes to give him the kingly title, which was +agreed to, and the Throndhjem people proclaimed him king of half +of Norway, as his father, King Magnus, had been before. Hakon +relieved the Throndhjem people of all harbour duties, and gave +them many other privileges. He did away with Yule-gifts, and +gained by this the good-will of all the Throndhjem people. +Thereafter Hakon formed a court, and then proceeded to the +Uplands, where he gave the Upland people the same privileges as +the Throndhjem people; so that they also were perfectly well +affected to him, and were his friends. The people in Throndhjem +sang this ballad about him: -- + + "Young Hakon was the Norseman's pride, + And Steig-Thorer was on his side. + Young Hakon from the Upland came, + With royal birth, and blood, and name. + Young Hakon from the king demands + His royal birthright, half the lands; + Magnus will not the kingdom break, -- + The whole or nothing he will take." + + + +2. HAKON'S DEATH. + +King Magnus proceeded north to the merchant town (Nidaros), and +on his arrival went straight to the king's house, and there took +up his abode. He remained here the first part of the winter +(A.D. 1094), and kept seven longships in the open water of the +river Nid, abreast of the king's house. Now when King Hakon +heard that King Magnus was come to Throndhjem, he came from the +East over the Dovrefield, and thence down from Throndhjem to the +merchant town, where he took up his abode in the house of Skule, +opposite to Clement's church, which had formerly been the king's +house. King Magnus was ill pleased with the great gifts which +Hakon had given to the bondes to gain their favour, and thought +it was so much given out of his own property. This irritated his +mind; and he thought he had suffered injustice from his relative +in this respect, that he must now put up with less income than +his father and his predecessors before him had enjoyed; and he +gave Thorer the blame. When King Hakon and Thorer observed this, +they were alarmed for what Magnus might do; and they thought it +suspicious that Magnus kept long-ships afloat rigged out, and +with tents. The following spring, after Candlemas, King Magnus +left the town in the night with his ships; the tents up, and +lights burning in the tents. They brought up at Hefring, +remained there all night, and kindled a fire on the land. Then +Hakon and the men in the town thought some treachery was on foot, +and he let the trumpets call all the men together out on the +Eyrar, where the whole people of the town came to him, and the +people were gathering together the whole night. When it was +light in the morning, King Magnus saw the people from all +districts gathered together on the Eyrar; and he sailed out of +the fjord, and proceeded south to where the Gulathing is held. +Hakon thanked the people for their support which they had given +him, and got ready to travel east to Viken. But he first held a +meeting in the town, where, in a speech, he asked the people for +their friendship, promising them his; and added, that he had some +suspicions of his relation, King Magnus's intentions. Then King +Hakon mounted his horse, and was ready to travel. All men +promised him their good-will and support whenever he required +them, and the people followed him out to the foot of Steinbjorg. +From thence King Hakon proceeded up the Dovrefield; but as he was +going over the mountains he rode all day after a ptarmigan, which +flew up beside him, and in this chase a sickness overfell him, +which ended in his death; and he died on the mountains. His body +was carried north, and came to the merchant town just half a +month after he left it. The whole townspeople went to meet the +body, sorrowing, and the most of them weeping; for all people +loved him with sincere affection. King Hakon's body was interred +in Christ church, and Hakon and Magnus had ruled the country for +two years. Hakon was a man full twenty-five years old, and was +one of the chiefs the most beloved by all the people. He had +made a journey to Bjarmaland, where he had given battle and +gained a victory. + + + +3. OF A FORAY IN HALLAND. + +King Magnus sailed in winter (A.D. 1095) eastward to Viken; but +when spring approached he went southwards to Halland, and +plundered far and wide. He laid waste Viskardal and many other +districts, and returned with a great booty back to his own +kingdom. So says Bjorn Krephende in his song on Magnus: -- + + "Through Halland wide around + The clang and shriek resound; + The houses burn, + The people mourn, + Through Halland wide around. + The Norse king strides in flame, + Through Viskardal he came; + The fire sweeps, + The widow weeps, + The Norse king strides in flame." + +Here it is told that King Magnus made the greatest devastation +through Halland. + + + +4. OF THORER OF STEIG. + +"There was a man called Svein, a son of Harald Fietter. He was a +Danish man by family, a great viking and champion, and a very +clever man, and of high birth in his own country. He had been +some time with King Hakon Magnuson, and was very dear to him; but +after King Hakon's decease Thorer of Steig, his foster-father, +had no great confidence in any treaty or friendship with King +Magnus, if the whole country came into his power, on account of +the position in which Thorer had stood to King Magnus, and the +opposition he had made to him. Thereupon Thorer and Svein took +counsel with each other, which they afterwards carried into +effect, -- to raise, with Thorer's assistance, and his men, a +troop against Magnus. But as Thorer was old and heavy, Svein +took the command, and name of leader of the troop. In this +design several chiefs took part, among whom the principal was +Egil Aslakson of Aurland. Egil was a lenderman, and married to +Ingebjorg, a daughter of Ogmund Thorbergson, a sister of Skopte +of Giske. The rich and powerful man, Skjalg Erlingson, also +joined their party. Thorkel Hamarskald speaks of this in his +ballad of Magnus: + + "Thorer and Egil were not wise, + They aimed too high to win a prize: + There was no reason in their plan, + And it hurt many a udalman. + The stone, too great for them to throw, + Fell back, and hurt them with the blow, + And now the udalmen must rue + That to their friends they were so true." + +Thorer and Svein collected a troop in the Uplands, and went down +through Raumsdal into Sunmore, and there collected vessels, with +which they afterwards sailed north to Throndhjem. + + + +5. OF THORER'S ADVENTURES. + +The lenderman Sigurd Ulstreng, a son of Lodin Viggiarskalle, +collected men by sending round the war-token, as soon as he heard +of Thorer and the troop which followed him, and had a rendezvous +with all the men he could raise at Viggia. Svein and Thorer also +met there with their people, fought with Sigurd, and gained the +victory after giving him a great defeat; and Sigurd fled, and +joined King Magnus. Thorer and his followers proceeded to the +town (Nidaros), and remained there some time in the fjord, where +many people joined them. King Magnus hearing this news +immediately collected an army, and proceeded north to Throndhjem. +And when he came into the fjord Thorer and his party heard of it +while they lay at Herring, and they were ready to leave the +fjord; and they rowed their ships to the strand at Vagnvik, and +left them, and came into Theksdal in Seliuhverfe, and Thorer was +carried in a litter over the mountains. Then they got hold of +ships and sailed north to Halogaland. As soon as King Magnus was +ready for sea, he sailed from Throndhjem in pursuit of them. +Thorer and his party went north all the way to Bjarkey; and Jon, +with his son Vidkun, fled from thence. Thorer and his men robbed +all the movable goods, and burnt the house, and a good long-ship +that belonged to Vidkun. While the hull was burning the vessel +keeled to one side, and Thorer called out, "Hard to starboard, +Vidkun!" Some verses were made about this burning in Bjarkey: -- + + "The sweetest farm that I have seen + Stood on Bjarkey's island green; + And now, where once this farmhouse stood, + Fire crackles through a pile of wood; + And the clear red flame, burning high, + Flashes across the dark-night sky. + Jon and Vidkun, this dark night, + Will not be wandering without light." + + + +6. DEATH OF THORER AND EGIL. + +Jon and Vidkun travelled day and night till they met King Magnus. +Svein and Thorer proceeded northwards with their men, and +plundered far and wide in Halogaland. But while they lay in a +fjord called Harm, Thorer and his party saw King Magnus coming +under sail towards them; and thinking they had not men enough to +fight him, they rowed away and fled. Thorer and Egil brought up +at Hesjutun; but Svein rowed out to sea, and some of their people +rowed into the fjords. King Magnus pursued Thorer, and the +vessels struck together while they were landing. Thorer stood in +the forecastle of his ship, and Sigurd Ulstreng called out to +him, and asked, "Art thou well, Thorer?" Thorer replied, "I am +well in hands, but ill on my feet." + +Then all Thorer's men fled up the country, and Thorer was taken +prisoner. Egil was also taken prisoner, for he would not leave +his wife. King Magnus then ordered both of them to be taken out +to Vambarholm; and when they were leading Thorer from the ship he +tottered on his legs. Then Vidkun called out, "More to the +larboard, Thorer!" When he was being led to the gallows he sang: +-- + + "We were four comrades gay, -- + Let one by the helm stay." + +When he came to the gallows he said, "Bad counsel comes to a bad +end." Then Thorer was hanged; but when he was hoisted up the +gallows tree he was so heavy that his neck gave way, and the body +fell down to the ground; for Thorer was a man exceedingly stout, +both high of stature and thick. Egil was also led to the +gallows, and when the king's thralls were about hanging him he +said, "Ye should not hang me, for in truth each of you deserves +much more to be hanged." People sang these verses about it: -- + + "I hear, my girl, that Egil said, + When to the gallows he was led, + That the king's thralls far more than he + Deserved to hang on gallows-tree. + It might be so; but, death in view, + A man should to himself be true, -- + End a stout life by death as stout, + Showing no fear; or care, or doubt." + +King Magnus sat near while they were being hanged, and was in +such a rage that none of his men was so bold as to ask mercy for +them. The king said, when Egil was spinning at the gallows, "Thy +great friends help thee but poorly in time of need." From this +people supposed that the king only wanted to have been entreated +to have spared Egil's life. Bjorn Krephende speaks of these +things: -- + + "King Magnus in the robbers' gore + Dyed red his sword; and round the shore + The wolves howled out their wild delight, + At corpses swinging in their sight. + Have ye not heard how the king's sword + Punished the traitors to their lord? + How the king's thralls hung on the gallows + Old Thorer and his traitor-fellows?" + + + +7. OF THE PUNISHMENT OF THE THRONDHJEM PEOPLE. + +After this King Magnus sailed south to Throndhjem, and brought up +in the fjord, and punished severely all who had been guilty of +treason towards him; killing some, and burning the houses of +others. So says Bjorn Krephende: -- + + "He who despises fence of shields + Drove terror through the Throndhjem fields, + When all the land through which he came + Was swimming in a flood of flame. + The raven-feeder, will I know, + Cut off two chieftans at a blow; + The wolf could scarcely ravenous be, + The ernes flew round the gallows-tree." + +Svein Harald Fletter's son, fled out to sea first, and sailed +then to Denmark, and remained there; and at last came into great +favour with King Eystein, the son of King Magnus, who took so +great a liking to Svein that he made him his dish-bearer, and +held him in great respect. King Magnus had now alone the whole +kingdom, and he kept good peace in the land, and rooted out all +vikings and lawless men. He was a man quick, warlike, and able, +and more like in all things to his grandfather, King Harald, in +disposition and talents than to his father. + + + +8. OF THE BONDE SVEINKE, AND SIGURD ULSTRENG. + +There was a man called Sveinke Steinarson, who was very wealthy, +and dwelt in Viken at the Gaut river. He had brought up Hakon +Magnuson before Thorer of Steig took him. Sveinke had not yet +submitted to King Magnus. King Magnus ordered Sigurd Ulstreng to +be called, and told him he would send him to Sveinke with the +command that he should quit the king's land and domain. "He has +not yet submitted to us, or shown us due honour." He added, that +there were some lendermen east in Viken, namely Svein Bryggjufot, +Dag Eilifson, and Kolbjorn Klakke, who could bring this matter +into right bearing. Then Sigurd said, "I did not know there was +the man in Norway against whom three lendermen besides myself +were needful." The king replied, "Thou needst not take this +help, unless it be necessary." Now Sigurd made himself ready for +the journey with a ship, sailed east to Viken, and there summoned +the lendermen to him. Then a Thing was appointed to Viken, to +which the people were called who dwelt on the Gaut river, besides +others; so that it was a numerous assembly. When the Thing was +formed they had to wait for Sveinke. They soon after saw a troop +of men coming along, so well furnished with weapons that they +looked like pieces of shining ice; and now came Sveinke and his +people to the Thing, and set themselves down in a circle. All +were clad in iron, with glowing arms, and 500 in number. Then +Sigurd stood up, and spoke. "My master, King Magnus, sends God's +salutation and his own to all friends, lendermen and others, his +subjects in the kingdom; also to the powerful bondes, and the +people in general, with kind words and offers of friendship; and +to all who will obey him he offers his friendship and good will. +Now the king will, with all cheerfulness and peace, show himself +a gracious master to all who will submit to him, and to all in +his dominions. He will be the leader and defender of all the men +of Norway; and it will be good for you to accept his gracious +speech, and this offer." + +Then stood up a man in the troop of the Elfgrims, who was of +great stature and grim countenance, clad in a leather cloak, with +a halberd on his shoulder, and a great steel hat upon his head. +He looked sternly, and said, "Here is no need of wheels, says the +fox, when he draws the trap over the ice." He said nothing more, +but sat down again. + +Soon after Sigurd Ulstreng stood up again, and spoke thus: "But +little concern or help have we for the king's affairs from you, +Elfgrims, and but little friendship; yet by such means every man +shows how much he respects himself. But now I shall produce more +clearly the king's errand." Thereupon he demanded land-dues and +levy-dues, together with all other rights of the king, from the +great bondes. He bade each of them to consider with himself how +they had conducted themselves in these matters; and that they +should now promote their own honour, and do the king justice, if +they had come short hitherto in doing so. And then he sat down. + +Then the same man got up in the troop of Elfgrims who had spoken +before, lifted his hat a little up, and said, "The lads run well, +say the Laplanders, who have skates for nothing." Then he sat +himself down again. + +Soon after Sigurd arose, after speaking with the lendermen, and +said that so weighty a message as the king's ought not to be +treated lightly as a jest. He was now somewhat angry; and added, +that they ought not to receive the king's message and errand so +scornfully, for it was not decent. He was dressed in a red or +scarlet coat, and had a blue coat over it. He cast off his upper +coat and said, "Now it is come so far that every one must look to +himself, and not loiter and jest with others; for by so doing +every man will show what he is. We do not require now to be +taught by others; for now we can see ourselves how much we are +regarded. But this may be borne with; but not that ye treat so +scornfully the king's message. Thereby every one shows how +highly he considers himself. There is one man called Sveinke +Steinarson, who lives east at the Gaut river; and from him the +king will have his just land-dues, together with his own land, or +will banish him from the country. It is of no use here to seek +excuses, or to answer with sharp words; for people are to be +found who are his equals in power, although he now receives our +speech so unworthily; and it is better now than afterwards to +return to the right way, and do himself honour, rather than await +disgrace for his obstinancy." He then sat down. + +Sveinke then got up, threw back his steel-hat, and gave Sigurd +many scornful words, and said, "Tut! tut! 'tis a shame for the +dogs, says the proverb, when the fox is allowed to cast their +excrements in the peasant's well. Here will be a miracle! Thou +useless fellow! with a coat without arms, and a kirtle with +skirts, wilt thou drive me out of the country? Thy relation, +Sigurd Woolsack, was sent before on this errand, and one called +Gille the Backthief, and one who had still a worse name. They +were a night in every house, and stole wherever they came. Wilt +thou drive me out of the country? Formerly thou wast not so +mighty, and thy pride was less when King Hakon, my foster-son, +was in life. Then thou wert as frightened for him when he met +thee on the road as a mouse in a mouse-trap, and hid thyself +under a heap of clothes, like a dog on board a ship. Thou wast +thrust into a leather-bag like corn in a sack, and driven from +house and farm like a year-old colt from the mares; and dost thou +dare to drive me from the land? Thou shouldst rather think +thyself lucky to escape from hence with life. Let us stand up +and attack him." + +Then all his men stood up, and made a great clash with their +weapons. Then Svein Bryggjufot and the other lendermen saw there +was no other chance for Sigurd but to get him on horseback, which +was done, and he rode off into the forest. The end was that +Sveinke returned home to his farm, and Sigurd Ulstreng came, with +great difficulty, by land north to Throndhjem to King Magnus, and +told the result of his errand. "Did I not say," said the king, +"that the help of my lendermen would be needed?" Sigurd was ill +pleased with his journey; insisted that he would be revenged, +cost what it will; and urged the king much. The king ordered +five ships to be fitted out; and as soon as they were ready for +sea he sailed south along the land, and then east to Viken, where +he was entertained in excellent guest-quarters by his lendermen. +The king told them he would seek out Sveinke. "For I will not +conceal my suspicion that he thinks to make himself king of +Norway." They said that Sveinke was both a powerful and an +ungovernable man. Now the king went from Viken until he came to +Sveinke's farm. Then the lendermen desired that they might be +put on shore to see how matters stood; and when they came to the +land they saw that Sveinke had already come down from the farm, +and was on the road with a number of well-armed men. The +lendermen held up a white shield in the air, as a peace-token; +and when Sveinke saw it he halted his men, and they approached +each other. Then said Kolbjorn Klakke, "King Magnus sends thee +God's salutation and his own, and bids thee consider what becomes +thee, and do him obedience, and not prepare thyself to give him +battle." Kolbjorn offered to mediate peace between them, if he +could, and told him to halt his troops. + +Sveinke said he would wait for them where he was. "We came out to +meet you," he said, "that ye might not tread down our corn- +fields." + +The lendermen returned to the king, and told him all was now at +his pleasure. + +The king said, "My doom is soon delivered. He shall fly the +country, and never come back to Norway as long as the kingdom is +mine; and he shall leave all his goods behind." + +"But will it not be more for thy honour," said Kolbjorn, "and +give thee a higher reputation among other kings, if, in banishing +him from the country, thou shouldst allow him to keep his +property, and show himself among other people? And we shall take +care that he never comes back while we live. Consider of this, +sire, by yourself, and have respect for our assurance." + +The king replied, "Let him then go forth immediately." + +They went back, therefore, to Sveinke, and told him the king's +words; and also that the king had ordered him out of the country, +and he should show his obedience, since he had forgotten himself +towards the king. "It is for the honour of both that thou +shouldst show obedience to the king." + +Then Sveinke said, "There must be some great change if the king +speaks agreeably to me; but why should I fly the country and my +properties? Listen now to what I say. It appears to me better +to die upon my property than to fly from my udal estates. Tell +the king that I will not stir from them even an arrow-flight." + +Kolbjorn replied, "This is scarcely prudent, or right; for it is +better for one's own honour to give way to the best chief, than +to make opposition to one's own loss. A gallant man succeeds +wheresoever he goes; and thou wilt be the more respected +wheresoever thou art, with men of power, just because thou hast +made head so boldly against so powerful a chief. Hear our +promises, and pay some attention to our errand. We offer thee to +manage thy estates, and take them faithfully under our +protection; and also never, against thy will, to pay scat for thy +land until thou comest back. We will pledge our lives and +properties upon this. Do not throw away good counsel from thee, +and avoid thus the ill fortune of other good men." + +Then Sveinke was silent for a short time, and said at last, "Your +endeavours are wise; but I have my suspicions that ye are +changing a little the king's message. In consideration, however, +of the great good-will that ye show me, I will hold your advice +in such respect that I will go out of the country for the whole +winter, if, according to your promises, I can then retain my +estates in peace. Tell the king, also, these my words, that I do +this on your account, not on his." + +Thereupon they returned to the king, and said, that Sveinke left +all in the king's hands. "But entreats you to have respect to +his honour. He will be away for three years, and then come back, +if it be the king's pleasure. Do this; let all things be done +according to what is suitable for the royal dignity and according +to our entreaty, now that the matter is entirely in thy power, +and we shall do all we can to prevent his returning against thy +will." + +The king replied, "Ye treat this matter like men, and, for your +sakes, shall all things be as ye desire. Tell him so." + +They thanked the king, and then went to Sveinke, and told him the +king's gracious intentions. "We will be glad," said they, "if ye +can be reconciled. The king requires, indeed that thy absence +shall be for three years; but, if we know the truth rightly, we +expect that before that time he will find he cannot do without +thee in this part of the country. It will be to thy own future +honour, therefore, to agree to this." + +Sveinke replies, "What condition is better than this? Tell the +king that I shall not vex him longer with my presence here, and +accept of my goods and estates on this condition." + +Thereupon he went home with his men, and set off directly; for he +had prepared everything beforehand. Kolbjorn remains behind, and +makes ready a feast for King Magnus, which also was thought of +and prepared. Sveinke, on the other hand, rides up to Gautland +with all the men he thought proper to take with him. The king +let himself be entertained in guest-quarters at his house, +returned to Viken, and Sveinke's estates were nominally the +king's, but Kolbjorn had them under his charge. The king +received guest-quarters in Viken, proceeded from thence +northwards, and there was peace for a while; but now that the +Elfgrims were without a chief, marauding gangs infested them, and +the king saw this eastern part of the kingdom would be laid +waste. It appeared to him, therefore, most suitable and +advisable to make Sveinke himself oppose the stream, and twice he +sent messages to him. But he did not stir until King Magnus +himself was south in Denmark, when Sveinke and the king met, and +made a full reconciliation; on which Sveinke returned home to his +house and estates, and was afterwards King Magnus's best and +trustiest friend, who strengthened his kingdom on the eastern +border; and their friendship continued as long as they lived. + + + +9. KING MAGNUS MAKES WAR ON THE SOUTHERN HEBUDES. + +King Magnus undertook an expedition out of the country, with many +fine men and a good assortment of shipping. With this armament +he sailed out into the West sea, and first came to the Orkney +Islands. There he took the two earls, Paul and Erlend, +prisoners, and sent them east to Norway, and placed his son +Sigurd as chief over the islands, leaving some counsellors to +assist him. From thence King Magnus, with his followers, +proceeded to the Southern Hebudes, and when he came there began +to burn and lay waste the inhabited places, killing the people +and plundering wherever he came with his men; and the country +people fled in all directions, some into Scotland-fjord, others +south to Cantire, or out to Ireland; some obtained life and +safety by entering into his service. So says Bjorn Krephende: -- + "In Lewis Isle with fearful blaze + The house-destroying fire plays; + To hills and rocks the people fly, + Fearing all shelter but the sky. + In Uist the king deep crimson made + The lightning of his glancing blade; + The peasant lost his land and life + Who dared to bide the Norseman's strife. + The hunger battle-birds were filled + In Skye with blood of foemen killed, + And wolves on Tyree's lonely shore + Dyed red their hairy jaws in gore. + The men of Mull were tired of flight; + The Scottish foemen would not fight, + And many an island-girl's wail + Was heard as through the isles we strife sail." + + + +10. OF LAGMAN, KING GUDROD'S SON. + +King Magnus came with his forces to the Holy Island (Iona), and +gave peace and safety to all men there. It is told that the king +opened the door of the little Columb's Kirk there, but did not go +in, but instantly locked the door again, and said that no man +should be so bold as to go into that church hereafter; which has +been the case ever since. From thence King Magnus sailed to +Islay, where he plundered and burnt; and when he had taken that +country he proceeded south around Cantire, marauding on both +sides in Scotland and Ireland, and advanced with his foray to +Man, where he plundered. So says Bjorn Krephende: -- + + "On Sandey's plain our shield they spy: + From Isla smoke rose heaven-high, + Whirling up from the flashing blaze + The king's men o'er the island raise. + South of Cantire the people fled, + Scared by our swords in blood dyed red, + And our brave champion onward goes + To meet in Man the Norseman's foes." + +Lagman (Lawman) was the name of the son of Gudrod, king of the +Hebudes. Lawman was sent to defend the most northerly islands; +but when King Magnus and his army came to the Hebudes, Lawman +fled here and there about the isles, and at last King Magnus's +men took him and his ship's crew as he was flying over to +Ireland. The king put him in irons to secure him. So says Bjorn +Krephende: -- + + "To Gudrod's son no rock or cave, + Shore-side or hill, a refuge gave; + Hunted around from isle to isle, + This Lawman found no safe asyle. + From isle to isle, o'er firth and sound, + Close on his track his foe he found. + At Ness the Agder chief at length + Seized him, and iron-chained his strength." + + + +11. OF THE FALL OF EARL HUGE THE BRAVE. + +Afterwards King Magnus sailed to Wales; and when he came to the +sound of Anglesey there came against him an army from Wales, +which was led by two earls -- Hugo the brave, and Hugo the Stout. +They began immediately to give battle, and there was a severe +conflict. King Magnus shot with the bow; but Huge the Brave was +all over in armour, so that nothing was bare about him excepting +one eye. King Magnus let fly an arrow at him, as also did a +Halogaland man who was beside the king. They both shot at once. +The one shaft hit the nose-screen of the helmet, which was bent +by it to one side, and the other arrow hit the earl's eye, and +went through his head; and that was found to be the king's. Earl +Huge fell, and the Britons fled with the loss of many people. So +says Bjorn Krephende: -- + + "The swinger of the sword + Stood by Anglesey's ford; + His quick shaft flew, + And Huge slew. + His sword gleamed a while + O'er Anglesey Isle, + And his Norsemen's band + Scoured the Anglesey land." + +There was also sung the following verse about it: -- + + "On the panzers arrows rattle, + Where our Norse king stands in battle; + From the helmets blood-streams flow, + Where our Norse king draws his bow: + His bowstring twangs, -- its biting hail + Rattles against the ring-linked mail. + Up in the land in deadly strife + Our Norse king took Earl Huge's life." + +King Magnus gained the victory in this battle, and then took +Anglesey Isle, which was the farthest south the Norway kings of +former days had ever extended their rule. Anglesey is a third +part of Wales. After this battle King Magnus turned back with +his fleet, and came first to Scotland. Then men went between the +Scottish king, Melkolm and King Magnus, and a peace was made +between them; so that all the islands lying west of Scotland, +between which and the mainland he could pass in a vessel with her +rudder shipped, should be held to belong to the king of Norway. +Now when King Magnus came north to Cantire, he had a skiff drawn +over the strand at Cantire, and shipped the rudder of it. The +king himself sat in the stern-sheets, and held the tiller; and +thus he appropriated to himself the land that lay on the farboard +side. Cantire is a great district, better than the best of the +southern isles of the Hebudes, excepting Man; and there is a +small neck of land between it and the mainland of Scotland, over +which longships are often drawn. + + + +12. DEATH OF THE EARLS OF ORKNEY. + +King Magnus was all the winter in the southern isles, and his men +went over all the fjords of Scotland, rowing within all the +inhabited and uninhabited isles, and took possession for the king +of Norway of all the islands west of Scotland. King Magnus +contracted in marriage his son Sigurd to Biadmynia, King +Myrkjartan's daughter. Myrkjartan was a son of the Irish king +Thialfe, and ruled over Connaught. The summer after, King +Magnus, with his fleet, returned east to Norway. Earl Erland +died of sickness at Nidaros, and is buried there; and Earl Paul +died in Bergen. + +Skopte Ogmundson, a grandson of Thorberg, was a gallant +lenderman, who dwelt at Giske in Sunmore, and was married to +Gudrun, a daughter of Thord Folason. Their children were Ogmund, +Fin, Thord, and Thora, who was married to Asolf Skulason. +Skopte's and Gudrun's sons were the most promising and popular +men in their youth. + + + +13. QUARRELS OF KING MAGNUS AND KING INGE. + +Steinkel, the Swedish king, died about the same time (A.D. 1066) +as the two Haralds fell, and the king who came after him in +Svithjod was called Hakon. Afterwards Inge, a son of Steinkel, +was king, and was a good and powerful king, strong and stout +beyond most men; and he was king of Svithjod when King Magnus was +king of Norway. King Magnus insisted that the boundaries of the +countries in old times had been so, that the Gaut river divided +the kingdoms of the Swedish and Norwegian kings, but afterwards +the Vener lake up to Vermaland. Thus King Magnus insisted that +he was owner of all the places lying west of the Vener lake up to +Vermaland, which are the districts of Sundal, Nordal, Vear, and +Vardyniar, with all the woods belonging thereto. But these had +for a long time been under the Swedish dominion, and with respect +to scat were joined to West Gautland; and, besides, the forest- +settlers preferred being under the Swedish king. King Magnus +rode from Viken up to Gautland with a great and fine army, and +when he came to the forest-settlements he plundered and burnt all +round; on which the people submitted, and took the oath of +fidelity to him. When he came to the Vener lake, autumn was +advanced and he went out to the island Kvaldinsey, and made a +stronghold of turf and wood, and dug a ditch around it. When the +work was finished, provisions and other necessaries that might be +required were brought to it. The king left in it 300 men, who +were the chosen of his forces, and Fin Skoptason and Sigurd +Ulstreng as their commanders. The king himself returned to +Viken. + + + +14. OF THE NORTHMEN. + +When the Swedish king heard this he drew together people, and the +report came that he would ride against these Northmen; but there +was delay about his riding, and the Northmen made these lines: -- + "The fat-hipped king, with heavy sides, + Finds he must mount before he rides." + +But when the ice set in upon the Vener lake King Inge rode down, +and had near 300 men with him. He sent a message to the Northmen +who sat in the burgh that they might retire with all the booty +they had taken, and go to Norway. When the messengers brought +this message, Sigurd Ulstreng replied to it; saying that King +Inge must take the trouble to come, if he wished to drive them +away like cattle out of a grass field, and said he must come +nearer if he wished them to remove. The messengers returned with +this answer to the king, who then rode out with all his army to +the island, and again sent a message to the Northmen that they +might go away, taking with them their weapons, clothes, and +horses; but must leave behind all their booty. This they +refused. The king made an assault upon them, and they shot at +each other. Then the king ordered timber and stones to be +collected, and he filled up the ditch; and then he fastened +anchors to long spars which were brought up to the timber-walls, +and, by the strength of many hands, the walls were broken down. +Thereafter a large pile of wood was set on fire, and the lighted +brands were flung in among them. Then the Northmen asked for +quarter. The king ordered them to go out without weapons or +cloaks. As they went out each of them received a stroke with a +whip, and then they set off for Norway, and all the forest-men +submitted again to King Inge. Sigurd and his people went to King +Magnus, and told him their misfortune. + + + +15. KING MAGNUS AND GIPARDE. + +When King Magnus was east in Viken, there came to him a foreigner +called Giparde. He gave himself out for a good knight, and +offered his services to King Magnus; for he understood that in +the king's dominions there was something to be done. The king +received him well. At that time the king was preparing to go to +Gautland, on which country the king had pretensions; and besides +he would repay the Gautland people the disgrace they had +occasioned him in spring, when he was obliged to fly from them. +He had then a great force in arms, and the West Gautlanders in +the northern districts submitted to him. He set up his camp on +the borders, intending to make a foray from thence. When King +Inge heard of this he collected troops, and hastened to oppose +King Magnus; and when King Magnus heard of this expedition, many +of the chiefs of the people urged him to turn back; but this the +king would not listen to, but in the night time went +unsuspectedly against the Swedish king. They met at Foxerne; and +when he was drawing up his men in battle order he asked, "Where +is Giparde?" but he was not to be found. Then the king made +these verses: -- + + "Cannot the foreign knight abide + Our rough array? -- where does he hide?" + +Then a skald who followed the king replied: -- + + "The king asks where the foreign knight + In our array rides to the fight: + Giparde the knight rode quite away + When our men joined in bloody fray. + When swords were wet the knight was slow + With his bay horse in front to go; + The foreign knight could not abide + Our rough array, and went to hide." + +There was a great slaughter, and after the battle the field was +covered with the Swedes slain, and King Inge escaped by flight. +King Magnus gained a great victory. Then came Giparde riding +down from the country, and people did not speak well of him for +not being in the fight. He went away, and proceeded westward to +England; and the voyage was stormy, and Giparde lay in bed. +There was an Iceland man called Eldjarn, who went to bale out the +water in the ship's hold, and when he saw where Giparde was lying +he made this verse: -- + + "Does it beseem a courtman bold + Here to be dozing in the hold? + The bearded knight should danger face: + The leak gains on our ship apace. + Here, ply this bucket! bale who can; + We need the work of every man. + Our sea-horse stands full to the breast, -- + Sluggards and cowards must not rest." + +When they came west to England, Giparde said the Northmen had +slandered him. A meeting was appointed, and a count came to it, +and the case was brought before him for trial. He said he was +not much acquainted with law cases, as he was but young, and had +only been a short time in office; and also, of all things, he +said what he least understood to judge about was poetry. "But +let us hear what it was." Then Eldjarn sang: -- + + "I heard that in the bloody fight + Giparde drove all our foes to flight: + Brave Giparde would the foe abide, + While all our men ran off to hide. + At Foxerne the fight was won + By Giparde's valour all alone; + Where Giparde fought, alone was he; + Not one survived to fight or flee." + +Then said the count, "Although I know but little about skald- +craft, I can hear that this is no slander, but rather the highest +praise and honour." Giparde could say nothing against it, yet he +felt it was a mockery. + + + +16. BATTLE OF FOXERNE. + +The spring after, as soon as the ice broke up, King Magnus, with +a great army, sailed eastwards to the Gaut river, and went up the +eastern arm of it, laying waste all that belonged to the Swedish +dominions. When they came to Foxerne they landed from their +vessels; but as they came over a river on their way an army of +Gautland people came against them, and there was immediately a +great battle, in which the Northmen were overwhelmed by numbers, +driven to flight, and many of them killed near to a waterfall. +King Magnus fled, and the Gautlanders pursued, and killed those +they could get near. King Magnus was easily known. He was a +very stout man, and had a red short cloak over him, and bright +yellow hair like silk that fell over his shoulders. Ogmund +Skoptason, who was a tall and handsome man, rode on one side of +the king. He said, "Sire, give me that cloak." + +The king said, "What would you do with it?" + +"I would like to have it," said Ogmund; "and you have given me +greater gifts, sire." + +The road was such that there were great and wide plains, so that +the Gautlanders and Northmen were always in sight of each other, +unless where clumps of wood and bushes concealed them from each +other now and then. The king gave Ogmund the cloak and he put it +on. When they came out again upon the plain ground, Ogmund and +his people rode off right across the road. The Gautlanders, +supposing this must be the king, rode all after him, and the king +proceeded to the ships. Ogmund escaped with great difficulty; +however, he reached the ships at last in safety. King Magnus +then sailed down the river, and proceeded north to Viken. + + + +17. MEETING OF THE KINGS AT THE GAUT RIVER. + +The following summer a meeting of the kings was agreed upon at +Konghelle on the Gaut river; and King Magnus, the Swedish king, +Inge, and the Danish king, Eirik Sveinson, all met there, after +giving each other safe conduct to the meeting. Now when the +Thing had sat down the kings went forward upon the plain, apart +from the rest of the people, and they talked with each other a +little while. Then they returned to their people, and a treaty +was brought about, by which each should possess the dominions his +forefathers had held before him; but each should make good to his +own men the waste and manslaughter suffered by them, and then +they should agree between themselves about settling this with +each other. King Magnus should marry King Inge's daughter +Margaret, who afterwards was called Peace-offering. This was +proclaimed to the people; and thus, within a little hour, the +greatest enemies were made the best of friends. + +It was observed by the people that none had ever seen men with +more of the air of chiefs than these had. King Inge was the +largest and stoutest, and, from his age, of the most dignified +appearance. King Magnus appeared the most gallant and brisk, and +King Eirik the most handsome. But they were all handsome men; +stout, gallant, and ready in speech. After this was settled they +parted. + + + +18. KING MAGNUS'S MARRIAGE. + +King Magnus got Margaret, King Inge's daughter, as above related; +and she was sent from Svithjod to Norway with an honourable +retinue. King Magnus had some children before, whose names shall +here be given. The one of his sons who was of a mean mother was +called Eystein; the other, who was a year younger, was called +Sigurd, and his mother's name was Thora. Olaf was the name of a +third son, who was much younger than the two first mentioned, and +whose mother was Sigrid, a daughter of Saxe of Vik, who was a +respectable man in the Throndhjem country; she was the king's +concubine. People say that when King Magnus came home from his +viking cruise to the Western countries, he and many of his people +brought with them a great deal of the habits and fashion of +clothing of those western parts. They went about on the streets +with bare legs, and had short kirtles and over-cloaks; and +therefore his men called him Magnus Barefoot or Bareleg. Some +called him Magnus the Tall, others Magnus the Strife-lover. He +was distinguished among other men by his tall stature. The mark +of his height is put down in Mary church, in the merchant town of +Nidaros, which King Harald built. In the northern door there +were cut into the wall three crosses, one for Harald's stature, +one for Olaf's, and one for Magnus's; and which crosses each of +them could with the greatest ease kiss. The upper was Harald's +cross; the lowest was Magnus's; and Olaf's was in the middle, +about equally distant from both. + +It is said that Magnus composed the following verses about the +emperor's daughter: -- + + "The ring of arms where blue swords gleam, + The battle-shout, the eagle's scream, + The Joy of war, no more can please: + Matilda is far o'er the seas. + My sword may break, my shield be cleft, + Of land or life I may be reft; + Yet I could sleep, but for one care, -- + One, o'er the seas, with light-brown hair." + +He also composed the following: -- + + "The time that breeds delay feels long, + The skald feels weary of his song; + What sweetens, brightens, eases life? + 'Tis a sweet-smiling lovely wife. + My time feels long in Thing affairs, + In Things my loved one ne'er appears. + The folk full-dressed, while I am sad, + Talk and oppose -- can I be glad?" + +When King Magnus heard the friendly words the emperor's daughter +had spoken about him -- that she had said such a man as King +Magnus was appeared to her an excellent man, he composed the +following: -- + + "The lover hears, -- across the sea, + A favouring word was breathed to me. + The lovely one with light-brown hair + May trust her thoughts to senseless air; + Her thoughts will find like thoughts in me; + And though my love I cannot see, + Affection's thoughts fly in the wind, + And meet each other, true and kind." + + + +19. OF THE QUARREL OF KING MAGNUS AND SKOPTE. + +Skopte Ogmundson came into variance with King Magnus, and they +quarrelled about the inheritance of a deceased person which +Skopte retained; but the king demanded it with so much +earnestness, that it had a dangerous appearance. Many meetings +were held about the affair, and Skopte took the resolution that +he and his son should never put themselves into the king's power +at the same time; and besides there was no necessity to do so. +When Skopte was with the king he represented to him that there +was relationship between the king and him; and also that he, +Skopte, had always been the king's friend, and his father's +likewise, and that their friendship had never been shaken. He +added, "People might know that I have sense enough not to hold a +strife, sire, with you, if I was wrong in what I asked; but it is +inherited from my ancestors to defend my rights against any man, +without distinction of persons." The king was just the same on +this point, and his resolution was by no means softened by such a +speech. Then Skopte went home. + + + +20. FIN SKOPTASON'S PROCEEDINGS. + +Then Fin Skoptason went to the king, spoke with him, and +entreated him to render justice to the father and son in this +business. The king answers angrily and sharply. Then said Fin, +"I expected something else, sire, from you, than that you would +use the law's vexations against me when I took my seat in +Kvaldinsey Island, which few of your other friends would do; as +they said, what was true, that those who were left there were +deserted and doomed to death, if King Inge had not shown greater +generosity to us than you did; although many consider that we +brought shame and disgrace only from thence." The king was not +to be moved by this speech, and Fin returned home. + + + +21. OGMUND SKOPTASON'S PROCEEDINGS. + +Then came Ogmund Skoptason to the king; and when he came before +him he produced his errand, and begged the king to do what was +right and proper towards him and his father. The king insisted +that the right was on his side, and said they were "particularly +impudent." + +Then said Ogmund, "It is a very easy thing for thee, having the +power, to do me and my father injustice; and I must say the old +proverb is true, that one whose life you save gives none, or a +very bad return. This I shall add, that never again shall I come +into thy service; nor my father, if I can help it." Then Ogmund +went home, and they never saw each other again. + + + +22. SKOPTE OGMUNDSON'S VOYAGE ABROAD. + +The spring after, Skopte Ogmundson made ready to travel out of +the country. They had five long-ships all well equipped. His +sons, Ogmund, Fin, and Thord, accompanied him on this journey. +It was very late before they were ready, and in autumn they went +over to Flanders, and wintered there. Early in spring they +sailed westward to Valland, and stayed there all summer. Then +they sailed further, and through Norvasund; and came in autumn to +Rome, where Skopte died. All, both father and sons, died on this +journey. Thord, who died in Sicily, lived the longest. It is a +common saying among the people that Skopte was the first Northman +who sailed through Norvasund; and this voyage was much +celebrated. + + + +23. MIRACLE OF KING OLAF THE SAINT AT A FIRE. + +It happened once in the merchant town (Nidaros) where King Olaf +reposes, that there broke out a fire in the town which spread +around. Then Olaf's shrine was taken out of the church, and set +up opposite the fire. Thereupon came a crazy foolish man, struck +the shrine, threatened the holy saint, and said all must be +consumed by the flames, both churches and other houses, if he did +not save them by his prayers. Now the burning of the church did +cease, by the help of Almighty God; but the insane man got sore +eyes on the following night, and he lay there until King Olaf +entreated God A1mighty to be merciful to him; after which he +recovered in the same church. + + + +24. MIRACLE OF KING OLAF ON A LAME WOMAN. + +It happened once in the merchant town that a woman was brought to +the place where the holy King Olaf reposes. She was so miserably +shaped, that she was altogether crumpled up; so that both her +feet lay in a circle against her loins. But as she was diligent +in her prayers, often weeping and making vows to King Olaf, he +cured her great infirmities; so that feet, legs, and other limbs +straightened, and every limb and part came to the right use for +which they were made. Before she could not creep there, and now +she went away active and brisk to her family and home. + + + +25. WAR IN IRELAND. + +When King Magnus had been nine years king of Norway (A.D. 1094- +1102), he equipped himself to go out of the country with a great +force. He sailed out into the West sea with the finest men who +could be got in Norway. All the powerful men of the country +followed him; such as Sigurd Hranason, Vidkun Jonson, Dag +Eilifson, Serk of Sogn, Eyvind Olboge, the king's marshal Ulf +Hranason, brother of Sigurd, and many other great men. With all +this armament the king sailed west to the Orkney Islands, from +whence he took with him Earl Erlend's sons, Magnus and Erling, +and then sailed to the southern Hebudes. But as he lay under the +Scotch land, Magnus Erlendson ran away in the night from the +king's ship, swam to the shore, escaped into the woods, and came +at last to the Scotch king's court. King Magnus sailed to +Ireland with his fleet, and plundered there. King Myrkjartan +came to his assistance, and they conquered a great part of the +country, both Dublin and Dyflinnarskire (Dublin shire). King +Magnus was in winter (A.D. 1102) up in Connaught with King +Myrkjartan, but set men to defend the country he had taken. +Towards spring both kings went westward with their army all the +way to Ulster, where they had many battles, subdued the country, +and had conquered the greatest part of Ulster when Myrkjartan +returned home to Connaught. + + + +26. KING MAGNUS'S FORAY ON THE LAND. + +King Magnus rigged his ships, and intended returning to Norway, +but set his men to defend the country of Dublin. He lay at +Ulster ready for sea with his whole fleet. As they thought they +needed cattle for ship-provision, King Magnus sent a message to +King Myrkjartan, telling him to send some cattle for slaughter; +and appointed the day before Bartholomew's day as the day they +should arrive, if the messengers reached him in safety; but the +cattle had not made their appearance the evening before +Bartholomew's mass. On the mass-day itself, when the sun rose in +the sky, King Magnus went on shore himself with the greater part +of his men, to look after his people, and to carry off cattle +from the coast. The weather was calm, the sun shone, and the +road lay through mires and mosses, and there were paths cut +through; but there was brushwood on each side of the road. When +they came somewhat farther, they reached a height from which they +had a wide view. They saw from it a great dust rising up the +country, as of horsemen, and they said to each other, "That must +be the Irish army;" but others said, "It was their own men +returning with the cattle." They halted there; and Eyvind Olboge +said, "How, sire, do you intend to direct the march? The men +think we are advancing imprudently. You know the Irish are +treacherous; think, therefore, of a good counsel for your men." +Then the king said, "Let us draw up our men, and be ready, if +there be treachery." This was done, and the king and Eyvind went +before the line. King Magnus had a helmet on his head; a red +shield, in which was inlaid a gilded lion; and was girt with the +sword of Legbit, of which the hilt was of tooth (ivory), and +handgrip wound about with gold thread; and the sword was +extremely sharp. In his hand he had a short spear, and a red +silk short cloak, over his coat, on which, both before and +behind, was embroidered a lion in yellow silk; and all men +acknowledged that they never had seen a brisker, statelier man. +Eyvind had also a red silk cloak like the king's; and he also was +a stout, handsome, warlike man. + + + +27. FALL OF KING MAGNUS. + +When the dust-cloud approached nearer they knew their own men, +who were driving the cattle. The Irish king had been faithful to +the promises he had given the king, and had sent them. Thereupon +they all turned towards the ships, and it was mid-day. When they +came to the mires they went but slowly over the boggy places; and +then the Irish started up on every side against them from every +bushy point of land, and the battle began instantly. The +Northmen were going divided in various heaps, so that many of +them fell. + +Then said Eyvind to the king, "Unfortunate is this march to our +people, and we must instantly hit upon some good plan." + +The king answered, "Call all the men together with the war-horns +under the banner, and the men who are here shall make a rampart +with their shields, and thus we will retreat backwards out of the +mires; and we will clear ourselves fast enough when we get upon +firm ground." + +The Irish shot boldly; and although they fell in crowds, there +came always two in the place of one. Now when the king had come +to the nearest ditch there was a very difficult crossing, and few +places were passable; so that many Northmen fell there. Then the +king called to his lenderman Thorgrim Skinhufa, who was an Upland +man, and ordered him to go over the ditch with his division. "We +shall defend you," said he, "in the meantime, so that no harm +shall come to you. Go out then to those holms, and shoot at them +from thence; for ye are good bowmen." + +When Thorgrim and his men came over the ditch they cast their +shields behind their backs, and set off to the ships. + +When the king saw this, he said, "Thou art deserting thy king in +an unmanly way. I was foolish in making thee a lenderman, and +driving Sigurd Hund out of the country; for never would he have +behaved so." + +King Magnus received a wound, being pierced by a spear through +both thighs above the knees. The king laid hold of the shaft +between his legs, broke the spear in two, and said, "Thus we +break spear-shafts, my lads; let us go briskly on. Nothing hurts +me." A little after King Magnus was struck in the neck with an +Irish axe, and this was his death-wound. Then those who were +behind fled. Vidkun Jonson instantly killed the man who had +given the king his death-wound, and fled, after having received +three wounds; but brought the king's banner and the sword Legbit +to the ships. Vidkun was the last man who fled; the other next +to him was Sigurd Hranason, and the third before him, Dag +Eilifson. There fell with King Magnus, Eyvind Olboge, Ulf +Hranason, and many other great people. Many of the Northmen +fell, but many more of the Irish. The Northmen who escaped +sailed away immediately in autumn. Erling, Earl Erlend's'son, +fell with King Magnus in Ireland; but the men who fled from +Ireland came to the Orkney Islands. Now when King Sigurd heard +that his father had fallen, he set off immediately, leaving the +Irish king's daughter behind, and proceeded in autumn with the +whole fleet directly to Norway. + + + +28. OF KING MAGNUS AND VIDKUN JONSON. + +King Magnus was ten years king of Norway (A.D. 1094-1105), and in +his days there was good peace kept within the country; but the +people were sorely oppressed with levies. King Magnus was +beloved by his men, but the bondes thought him harsh. The words +have been transmitted from him that he said when his friends +observed that he proceeded incautiously when he was on his +expeditions abroad, -- "The kings are made for honour, not for +long life." King Magnus was nearly thirty years of age when he +fell. Vidkun did not fly until he had killed the man who gave +the king his mortal wound, and for this cause King Magnus's sons +had him in the most affectionate regard. + + + +SAGA OF SIGURD THE CRUSADER AND HIS BROTHERS EYSTEIN AND OLAF. + + +PRELIMINARY REMARKS. + +"Agrip", "Fagrskinna", and "Morkinskinna" more or less complete +the story of the sons of Magnus. They contain some things omitted +by Snorre, while, on the other hand, some facts related by Snorre +are not found in the above sources. + +Thjodrek the Monk tells of Sigurd that he made a Journey to +Jerusalem, conquered many heathen cities, and among them Sidon; +that he captured a cave defended by robbers, received presents +from Baldwin, returned to Norway in Eystein's lifetime, and +became insane, as a result, as some say, of a poisonous drink. + +The three brothers became kings in the year A.D. 1103. Olaf died +1115, Eystein 1122 or 1123, Sigurd 1130. + +Skalds quoted in this saga are: Thorarin Stutfeld, Einar +Skulason, Haldor Skvaldre, and Arne Fjoruskeif. + + + +1. BEGINNING OF THE REIGN OF KING MAGNUS'S SONS. + +After King Magnus Barefoot's fall, his sons, Eystein, Sigurd, and +Olaf, took the kingdom of Norway. Eystein got the northern, and +Sigurd the southern part of the country. King Olaf was then four +or five years old, and the third part of the country which he had +was under the management of his two brothers. King Sigurd was +chosen king when he was thirteen or fourteen years old, and +Eystein was a year older. King Sigurd left west of the sea the +Irish king's daughter. When King Magnus's sons were chosen +kings, the men who had followed Skopte Ogmundson returned home. +Some had been to Jerusalem, some to Constantinople; and there +they had made themselves renowned, and they had many kinds of +novelties to talk about. By these extraordinary tidings many men +in Norway were incited to the same expedition; and it was also +told that the Northmen who liked to go into the military service +at Constantinople found many opportunities of getting property. +Then these Northmen desired much that one of the two kings, +either Eystein or Sigurd, should go as commander of the troop +which was preparing for this expedition. The kings agreed to +this, and carried on the equipment at their common expense. Many +great men, both of the lendermen and bondes, took part in this +enterprise; and when all was ready for the journey it was +determined that Sigurd should go, and Eystein in the meantime, +should rule the kingdom upon their joint account. + + + +2. OF THE EARLS OF ORKNEY. + +A year or two after King Magnus Barefoot's fall, Hakon, a son of +Earl Paul, came from Orkney. The kings gave him the earldom and +government of the Orkney Islands, as the earls before him, his +father Paul or his Uncle Erland, had possessed it; and Earl Hakon +then sailed back immediately to Orkney. + + + +3. KING SIGURD'S JOURNEY OUT OF THE COUNTRY. + +Four years after the fall of King Magnus (A.D. 1107), King Sigurd +sailed with his people from Norway. He had then sixty ships. So +says Thorarin Stutfeld: -- + + "A young king just and kind, + People of loyal mind: + Such brave men soon agree, -- + To distant lands they sail with glee. + To the distant Holy Land + A brave and pious band, + Magnificent and gay, + In sixty long-ships glide away." + +King Sigurd sailed in autumn to England, where Henry, son of +William the Bastard, was then king, and Sigurd remained with him +all winter. So says Einar Skulason: -- + + "The king is on the waves! + The storm he boldly braves. + His ocean-steed, + With winged speed, + O'er the white-flashing surges, + To England's coast he urges; + And there he stays the winter o'er: + More gallant king ne'er trod that shore." + + + +4. OF KING SIGURD'S JOURNEY. + +In spring King Sigurd and his fleet sailed westward to Valland +(A.D. 1108), and in autumn came to Galicia, where he stayed the +second winter (A.D. 1109). So says Einar Skulason: -- + + "Our king, whose land so wide + No kingdom stands beside, + In Jacob's land next winter spent, + On holy things intent; + And I have heard the royal youth + Cut off an earl who swerved from truth. + Our brave king will endure no ill, -- + The hawks with him will get their fill." + +It went thus: -- The earl who ruled over the land made an +agreement with King Sigurd, that he should provide King Sigurd +and his men a market at which they could purchase victuals all +the winter; but this he did not fulfil longer than to about Yule. +It began then to be difficult to get food and necessaries, for it +is a poor barren land. Then King Sigurd with a great body of men +went against a castle which belonged to the earl; and the earl +fled from it, having but few people. King Sigurd took there a +great deal of victuals and of other booty, which he put on board +of his ships, and then made ready and proceeded westward to +Spain. It so fell out, as the king was sailing past Spain, that +some vikings who were cruising for plunder met him with a fleet +of galleys, and King Sigurd attacked them. This was his first +battle with heathen men; and he won it, and took eight galleys +from them. So says Haldor Skvaldre: -- + + "Bold vikings, not slow + To the death-fray to go, + Meet our Norse king by chance, + And their galleys advance. + The bold vikings lost + Many a man of their host, + And eight galleys too, + With cargo and crew." + +Thereafter King Sigurd sailed against a castle called Sintre and +fought another battle. This castle is in Spain, and was occupied +by many heathens, who from thence plundered Christian people. +King Sigurd took the castle, and killed every man in it, because +they refused to be baptized; and he got there an immense booty. +So says Haldor Skvaldre: -- + + "From Spain I have much news to tell + Of what our generous king befell. + And first he routs the viking crew, + At Cintra next the heathens slew; + The men he treated as God's foes, + Who dared the true faith to oppose. + No man he spared who would not take + The Christian faith for Jesus' sake." + + + +5. LISBON TAKEN. + +After this King Sigurd sailed with his fleet to Lisbon, which is +a great city in Spain, half Christian and half heathen; for there +lies the division between Christian Spain and heathen Spain, and +all the districts which lie west of the city are occupied by +heathens. There King Sigurd had his third battle with the +heathens, and gained the victory, and with it a great booty. So +says Haldor Skvaldre: -- + + "The son of kings on Lisbon's plains + A third and bloody battle gains. + He and his Norsemen boldly land, + Running their stout ships on the strand." + +Then King Sigurd sailed westwards along heathen Spain, and +brought up at a town called Alkasse; and here he had his fourth +battle with the heathens, and took the town, and killed so many +people that the town was left empty. They got there also immense +booty. So says Haldor Skvaldre: -- + + "A fourth great battle, I am told, + Our Norse king and his people hold + At Alkasse; and here again + The victory fell to our Norsemen." + +And also this verse: -- + + "I heard that through the town he went, + And heathen widows' wild lament + Resounded in the empty halls; + For every townsman flies or falls." + + + +3. BATTLE IN THE ISLAND FORMINTERRA. + +King Sigurd then proceeded on his voyage, and came to Norfasund; +and in the sound he was met by a large viking force, and the king +gave them battle; and this was his fifth engagement with heathens +since the time he left Norway. He gained the victory here also. +So says Haldor Skvaldre: -- + + "Ye moistened your dry swords with blood, + As through Norfasund ye stood; + The screaming raven got a feast, + As ye sailed onward to the East." + +King Sigurd then sailed eastward along the coast of Serkland, and +came to an island there called Forminterra. There a great many +heathen Moors had taken up their dwelling in a cave, and had +built a strong stone wall before its mouth. They harried the +country all round, and carried all their booty to their cave. +King Sigurd landed on this island, and went to the cave; but it +lay in a precipice, and there was a high winding path to the +stone wall, and the precipice above projected over it. The +heathens defended the stone wall, and were not afraid of the +Northmen's arms; for they could throw stones, or shoot down upon +the Northmen under their feet; neither did the Northmen, under +such circumstances, dare to mount up. The heathens took their +clothes and other valuable things, carried them out upon the +wall, spread them out before the Northmen, shouted, and defied +them, and upbraided them as cowards. Then Sigurd fell upon this +plan. He had two ship's boats, such as we call barks, drawn up +the precipice right above the mouth of the cave; and had thick +ropes fastened around the stem, stern, and hull of each. In +these boats as many men went as could find room, and then the +boats were lowered by the ropes down in front of the mouth of the +cave; and the men in the boats shot with stones and missiles into +the cave, and the heathens were thus driven from the stone wall. +Then Sigurd with his troops climbed up the precipice to the foot +of the stone wall, which they succeeded in breaking down, so that +they came into the cave. Now the heathens fled within the stone +wall that was built across the cave; on which the king ordered +large trees to be brought to the cave, made a great pile in the +mouth of it, and set fire to the wood. When the fire and smoke +got the upper hand, some of the heathens lost their lives in it; +some fled; some fell by the hands of the Northmen; and part were +killed, part burned; and the Northmen made the greatest booty +they had got on all their expeditions. So says Halder Skvaldre: +-- + + "Forminterra lay + In the victor's way; + His ships' stems fly + To victory. + The bluemen there + Must fire bear, + And Norsemen's steel + At their hearts feel." + +And also thus:-- + + "'Twas a feat of renown, -- + The boat lowered down, + With a boat's crew brave, + In front of the cave; + While up the rock scaling, + And comrades up trailing, + The Norsemen gain, + And the bluemen are slain." + +And also Thorarin Stutfeld says:-- + + "The king's men up the mountain's side + Drag two boats from the ocean's tide; + The two boats lay, + Like hill-wolves grey. + Now o'er the rock in ropes they're swinging + Well manned, and death to bluemen bringing; + They hang before + The robber's door." + + + +7. OF THE BATTLES OF IVIZA AND MINORCA. + +Thereafter King Sigurd proceeded on his expedition, and came to +an island called Iviza (Ivica), and had there his seventh battle, +and gained a victory. So says Haldor Skvaldre: -- + + "His ships at Ivica now ride, + The king's, whose fame spreads far and wide; + And hear the bearers of the shield + Their arms again in battle wield." + +Thereafter King Sigurd came to an island called Manork (Minorca), +and held there his eighth battle with heathen men, and gained the +victory. So says Haldor Skvaldre: -- + + "On green Minorca's plains + The eighth battle now he gains: + Again the heathen foe + Falls at the Norse king's blow." + + + +8. DUKE ROGER MADE A KING. + +In spring King Sigurd came to Sicily (A.D. 1109), and remained a +long time there. There was then a Duke Roger in Sicily, who +received the king kindly, and invited him to a feast. King +Sigurd came to it with a great retinue, and was splendidly +entertained. Every day Duke Roger stood at the company's table, +doing service to the king; but the seventh day of the feast, when +the people had come to table, and had wiped their hands, King +Sigurd took the duke by the hand, led him up to the high-seat, +and saluted him with the title of king; and gave the right that +there should be always a king over the dominion of Sicily, +although before there had only been earls or dukes over that +country. + + + +9. OF KING ROGER. + +King Roger of Sicily was a very great king. He won and subdued +all Apulia, and many large islands besides in the Greek sea; and +therefore he was called Roger the Great. His son was William, +king of Sicily, who for a long time had great hostility with the +emperor of Constantinople. King William had three daughters, but +no son. One of his daughters he married to the Emperor Henry, a +son of the Emperor Frederik; and their son was Frederik, who for +a short time after was emperor of Rome. His second daughter was +married to the Duke of Kipr. The third daughter, Margaret, was +married to the chief of the corsairs; but the Emperor Henry +killed both these brothers-in-law. The daughter of Roger the +Great, king of Sicily, was married to the Emperor Manuel of +Constantinople; and their son was the Emperor Kirjalax. + + + +10. KING SIGURD'S EXPEDITION TO PALESTINE. + +In the summer (A.D. 1110) King Sigurd sailed across the Greek sea +to Palestine, and thereupon went up to Jerusalem, where he met +Baldwin, king of Palestine. King Baldwin received him +particularly well, and rode with him all the way to the river +Jordan, and then back to the city of Jerusalem. Einar Skulason +speaks thus of it: -- + + "Good reason has the skald to sing + The generous temper of the king, + Whose sea-cold keel from northern waves + Ploughs the blue sea that green isles laves. + At Acre scarce were we made fast, + In holy ground our anchors cast, + When the king made a joyful morn + To all who toil with him had borne." + +And again he made these lines: -- + + "To Jerusalem he came, + He who loves war's noble game, + (The skald no greater monarch finds + Beneath the heaven's wide hall of winds) + All sin and evil from him flings + In Jordan's wave: for all his sins + (Which all must praise) he pardon wins." + +King Sigurd stayed a long time in the land of Jerusalem +(Jorsalaland) in autumn, and in the beginning of winter. + + + +11. SIDON TAKEN. + +King Baldwin made a magnificent feast for King Sigurd and many of +his people, and gave him many holy relics. By the orders of King +Baldwin and the patriarch, there was taken a splinter off the +holy cross; and on this holy relic both made oath, that this wood +was of the holy cross upon which God Himself had been tortured. +Then this holy relic was given to King Sigurd; with the condition +that he, and twelve other men with him, should swear to promote +Christianity with all his power, and erect an archbishop's seat +in Norway if he could; and also that the cross should be kept +where the holy King Olaf reposed, and that he should introduce +tithes, and also pay them himself. After this King Sigurd +returned to his ships at Acre; and then King Baldwin prepared to +go to Syria, to a heathen town called Saet. On this expedition +King Sigurd accompanied him, and after the kings had besieged the +town some time it surrendered, and they took possession of it, +and of a great treasure of money; and their men found other +booty. King Sigurd made a present of his share to King Baldwin. +So say Haldor Skvaldre: -- + + "He who for wolves provides the feast + Seized on the city in the East, + The heathen nest; and honour drew, + And gold to give, from those he slew." + +Einar Skulason also tells of it: -- + + "The Norsemen's king, the skalds relate, + Has ta'en the heathen town of Saet: + The slinging engine with dread noise + Gables and roofs with stones destroys. + The town wall totters too, -- it falls; + The Norsemen mount the blackened walls. + He who stains red the raven's bill + Has won, -- the town lies at his will." + +Thereafter King Sigurd went to his ships and made ready to leave +Palestine. They sailed north to the island Cyprus; and King +Sigurd stayed there a while, and then went to the Greek country, +and came to the land with all his fleet at Engilsnes. Here he +lay still for a fortnight, although every day it blew a breeze +for going before the wind to the north; but Sigurd would wait a +side wind, so that the sails might stretch fore and aft in the +ship; for in all his sails there was silk joined in, before and +behind in the sail, and neither those before nor those behind the +ships could see the slightest appearance of this, if the vessel +was before the wind; so they would rather wait a side wind. + + + +12. SIGURD'S EXPEDITION TO CONSTANTINOPLE. + +When King Sigurd sailed into Constantinople, he steered near the +land. Over all the land there are burghs, castles, country +towns, the one upon the other without interval. There from the +land one could see into the bights of the sails; and the sails +stood so close beside each other, that they seemed to form one +enclosure. All the people turned out to see King Sigurd sailing +past. The Emperor Kirjalax had also heard of King Sigurd's +expedition, and ordered the city port of Constantinople to be +opened, which is called the Gold Tower, through which the emperor +rides when he has been long absent from Constantinople, or has +made a campaign in which he has been victorious. The emperor had +precious cloths spread out from the Gold Tower to Laktjarna, +which is the name of the emperor's most splendid hall. King +Sigurd ordered his men to ride in great state into the city, and +not to regard all the new things they might see; and this they +did. King Sigurd and his followers rode with this great +splendour into Constantinople, and then came to the magnificent +hall, where everything was in the grandest style. + +King Sigurd remained here some time. The Emperor Kirjalax sent +his men to him to ask if he would rather accept from the emperor +six lispund of gold, or would have the emperor give the games in +his honour which the emperor was used to have played at the +Padreim. King Sigurd preferred the games, and the messengers +said the spectacle would not cost the emperor less than the money +offered. Then the emperor prepared for the games, which were +held in the usual way; but this day everything went on better for +the king than for the queen; for the queen has always the half +part in the games, and their men, therefore, always strive +against each other in all games. The Greeks accordingly think +that when the king's men win more games at the Padreim than the +queen's, the king will gain the victory when he goes into battle. +People who have been in Constantinople tell that the Padreim is +thus constructed: -- A high wall surrounds a flat plain, which +may be compared to a round bare Thing-place, with earthen banks +all around at the stone wall, on which banks the spectators sit; +but the games themselves are in the flat plain. There are many +sorts of old events represented concerning the Asas, Volsungs, +and Giukungs, in these games; and all the figures are cast in +copper, or metal, with so great art that they appear to be living +things; and to the people it appears as if they were really +present in the games. The games themselves are so artfully and +cleverly managed, that people appear to be riding in the air; and +at them also are used shot-fire (1), and all kinds of harp- +playing, singing, and music instruments. + + +ENDNOTES: +(1) Fireworks, or the Greek fire, probably were used. -- L. + + + +12. SIGURD AND THE EMPEROR OF CONSTANTINOPLE. + +It is related that King Sigurd one day was to give the emperor a +feast, and he ordered his men to provide sumptuously all that was +necessary for the entertainment; and when all things were +provided which are suitable for an entertainment given by a great +personage to persons of high dignity, King Sigurd ordered his +men to go to the street in the city where firewood was sold, as +they would require a great quantity to prepare the feast. They +said the king need not be afraid of wanting firewood, for every +day many loads were brought into the town. When it was +necessary, however, to have firewood, it was found that it was +all sold, which they told the king. He replied, "Go and try if +you can get walnuts. They will answer as well as wood for fuel." +They went and got as many as they needed. Now came the emperor, +and his grandees and court, and sat down to table. All was very +splendid; and King Sigurd received the emperor with great state, +and entertained him magnificently. When the queen and the +emperor found that nothing was wanting, she sent some persons to +inquire what they had used for firewood; and they came to a house +filled with walnuts, and they came back and told the queen. +"Truly," said she, "this is a magnificent king, who spares no +expense where his honour is concerned." She had contrived this +to try what they would do when they could get no firewood to +dress their feast with. + + + +14. KING SIGURD THE CRUSADER'S RETURN HOME. + +King Sigurd soon after prepared for his return home. He gave the +emperor all his ships; and the valuable figureheads which were on +the king's ships were set up in Peter's church, where they have +since been to be seen. The emperor gave the king many horses and +guides to conduct him through all his dominions. Then King +Sigurd left Constantinople; but a great many Northmen remained, +and went into the emperor's pay. Then King Sigurd traveled from +Bulgaria, and through Hungary, Pannonia. Suabia, and Bavaria, +where he met the Roman emperor, Lotharius, who received him in +the most friendly way, gave him guides through his dominions, and +had markets established for him at which he could purchase all he +required. When King Sigurd came to Slesvik in Denmark, Earl +Eilif made a sumptuous feast for him; and it was then midsummer. +In Heidaby he met the Danish king, Nikolas, who received him in +the most friendly way, made a great entertainment for him, +accompanied him north to Jutland, and gave him a ship provided +with everything needful. From thence the king returned to +Norway, and was joyfully welcomed on his return to his kingdom +(A.D. 1110). It was the common talk among the people, that none +had ever made so honourable a journey from Norway as this of King +Sigurd. He was twenty years of age, and had been three years on +these travels. His brother Olaf was then twelve years old. + + + +15. EYSTEIN'S DOINGS IN THE MEANTIME. + +King Eystein had also effected much in the country that was +useful while King Sigurd was on his journey. He established a +monastery at Nordnes in Bergen, and endowed it with much +property. He also built Michael's church, which is a very +splendid stone temple. In the king's house there he also built +the Church of the Apostles, and the great hall, which is the most +magnificent wooden structure that was ever built in Norway. He +also built a church at Agdanes with a parapet; and a harbour, +where formerly there had been a barren spot only. In Nidaros he +built in the king's street the church of Saint Nikolas, which was +particularly ornamented with carved work, and all in wood. He +also built a church north in Vagar in Halogaland, and endowed it +with property and revenues. + + + +16. OF KING EYSTEIN. + +King Eystein sent a verbal message to the most intelligent and +powerful of the men of Jamtaland, and invited them to him; +received them all as they came with great kindness; accompanied +them part of the way home, and gave them presents, and thus +enticed them into a friendship with him. Now as many of them +became accustomed to visit him and receive gifts from him, and he +also sent gifts to some who did not come themselves, he soon +gained the favour of all the people who had most influence in the +country. Then he spoke to the Jamtaland people, and told them +they had done ill in turning away from the kings of Norway, and +withdrawing from them their taxes and allegiance. He began by +saying how the Jamtaland people had submitted to the reign of +Hakon, the foster-son of Athelstane, and had long afterwards been +subjected to the kings of Norway, and he represented to them how +many useful things they could get from Norway, and how +inconvenient it was for them to apply to the Swedish king for +what they needed. By these speeches he brought matters so far +that the Jamtaland people of their own accord offered to be +subject to him, which they said was useful and necessary for +them; and thus, on both sides, it was agreed that the +Jamtalanders should put their whole country under King Eystein. +The first beginning was with the men of consequence, who +persuaded the people to take an oath of fidelity to King Eystein; +and then they went to King Eystein and confirmed the country to +him by oath; and this arrangement has since continued for a long +time. King Eystein thus conquered Jamtaland by his wisdom, and +not by hostile inroads, as some of his forefathers had done. + + + +17. OF KING EYSTEIN'S PERFECTIONS. + +King Eystein was the handsomest man that could be seen. He had +blue open eyes; his hair yellow and curling; his stature not +tall, but of the middle size. He was wise, intelligent, and +acquainted with the laws and history. He had much knowledge of +mankind, was quick in counsel, prudent in words, and very +eloquent and very generous. He was very merry, yet modest; and +was liked and beloved, indeed, by all the people. He was married +to Ingebjorg, a daughter of Guthorm, son of Thorer of Steig; and +their daughter was Maria, who afterwards married Gudbrand +Skafhogson. + + + +18. OF IVAR INGIMUNDSON. + +King Eystein had in many ways improved the laws and priveleges of +the country people, and kept strictly to the laws; and he made +himself acquainted with all the laws of Norway, and showed in +everything great prudence and understanding. What a valuable man +King Eystein was, how full of friendship, and how much he turned +his mind to examining and avoiding everything that could be of +disadvantage to his friends, may be seen from his friendship to +an Iceland man called Ivar Ingimundson. The man was witty, of +great family, and also a poet. The king saw that Ivar was out of +spirits, and asked him why he was so melancholy. "Before, when +thou wast with us, we had much amusement with thy conversation. +I know thou art a man of too good an understanding to believe +that I would do anything against thee. Tell me then what it is." + +He replied, "I cannot tell thee what it is." + +Then said the king, "I will try to guess what it is. Are there +any men who displease thee?" + +To this he replied, "No." + +"Dost thou think thou art held in less esteem by me than thou +wouldst like to be?" + +To this he also replied, "No." + +"Hast thou observed anything whatever that has made an impression +on thee at which thou art ill pleased?" + +He replied, it was not this either. + +The king: "Would you like to go to other chiefs or to other men?" + +To this he answered, "No." + +The king: "It is difficult now to guess. Is there any girl here, +or in any other country, to whom thy affections are engaged?" + +He said it was so. + +The king said, "Do not be melancholy on that account. Go to +Iceland when spring sets in, and I shall give thee money, and +presents, and with these my letters and seal to the men who have +the principal sway there; and I know no man there who will not +obey my persuasions or threats." + +Ivar replied, "My fate is heavier, sire; for my own brother has +the girl." + +Then said the king, "Throw it out of thy mind; and I know a +counsel against this. After Yule I will travel in +guest-quarters. Thou shalt come along with me, and thou will +have an opportunity of seeing many beautiful girls; and, provided +they are not of the royal stock, I will get thee one of them in +marriage." + +Ivar replies, "Sire, my fate is still the heavier; for as oft as +I see beautiful and excellent girls I only remember the more that +girl, and they increase my misery." + +The king: "Then I will give thee property to manage, and estates +for thy amusement." + +He replied, "For that I have no desire." + +The king: "Then I will give thee money, that thou mayest travel +in other countries." + +He said he did not wish this. + +Then said the king, "It is difficult for me to seek farther, for +I have proposed everything that occurs to me. There is but one +thing else; and that is but little compared to what I have +offered thee. Come to me every day after the tables are removed, +and, if I am not sitting upon important business, I shall talk +with thee about the girl in every way that I can think of; and I +shall do so at leisure. It sometimes happens that sorrow is +lightened by being brought out openly; and thou shalt never go +away without some gift." + +He replied, "This I will do, sire, and return thanks for this +inquiry." + +And now they did so constantly; and when the king was not +occupied with weightier affairs he talked with him, and his +sorrow by degrees wore away, and he was again in good spirits. + + + +19. OF KING SIGURD. + +King Sigurd was a stout and strong man, with brown hair; of a +manly appearance, but not handsome; well grown; of little speech, +and often not friendly, but good to his friends, and faithful; +not very eloquent, but moral and polite. King Sigurd was self- +willed, and severe in his revenge; strict in observing the law; +was generous; and withal an able, powerful king. His brother +Olaf was a tall, thin man; handsome in countenance; lively, +modest, and popular. When all these brothers, Eystein, Sigurd +and Olaf were kings of Norway, they did away with many burthens +which the Danes had laid upon the people in the time that Svein +Alfifason ruled Norway; and on this account they were much +beloved, both by the people and the great men of the country. + + + +20. OF KING SIGURD'S DREAM. + +Once King Sigurd fell into low spirits, so that few could get him +to converse, and he sat but a short time at the drinking table. +This was heavy on his counsellors, friends, and court; and they +begged King Eystein to consider how they could discover the cause +why the people who came to the king could get no reply to what +they laid before him. King Eystein answered them, that it was +difficult to speak with the king about this; but at last, on the +entreaty of many, he promised to do it. Once, when they were +both together, King Eystein brought the matter before his +brother, and asked the cause of his melancholy. "It is a great +grief, sire, to many to see thee so melancholy; and we would like +to know what has occasioned it, or if perchance thou hast heard +any news of great weight?" + +King Sigurd replies, that it was not so. + +"Is it then, brother," says King Eystein, "that you would like to +travel out of the country, and augment your dominions as our +father did?" + +He answered, that it was not that either. + +"Is it, then, that any man here in the country has offended?" + +To this also the king said "No." + +"Then I would like to know if you have dreamt anything that has +occasioned this depression of mind?" + +The king answered that it was so. + +"Tell me, then, brother, thy dream." + +King Sigurd said, "I will not tell it, unless thou interpret it +as it may turn out; and I shall be quick at perceiving if thy +interpretation be right or not." + +King Eystein replies, "This is a very difficult matter, sire, on +both sides; as I am exposed to thy anger if I cannot interpret +it, and to the blame of the public if I can do nothing in the +matter; but I will rather fall under your displeasure, even if my +interpretation should not be agreeable." + +King Sigurd replies, "It appeared to me, in a dream, as if we +brothers were all sitting on a bench in front of Christ church in +Throndhjem; and it appeared to me as if our relative, King Olaf +the Saint, came out of the church adorned with the royal raiment +glancing and splendid, and with the most delightful and joyful +countenance. He went to our brother King Olaf, took him by the +hand, and said cheerfully, to him, `Come with me, friend.' On +which he appeared to stand up and go into the church. Soon after +King Olaf the Saint came out of the church, but not so gay and +brilliant as before. Now he went to thee, brother, and said to +thee that thou shouldst go with him; on which he led thee with +him, and ye went into the church. Then I thought, and waited for +it, that he would come to me, and meet me; but it was not so. +Then I was seized with great sorrow, and great dread and anxiety +fell upon me, so that I was altogether without strength; and then +I awoke." + +King Eystein replies, "Thus I interpret your dream, sire, -- That +the bench betokens the kingdom we brothers have; and as you +thought King Olaf came with so glad a countenance to our brother, +King Olaf, he will likely live the shortest time of us brothers, +and have all good to expect hereafter; for he is amiable, young +in years, and has gone but little into excess, and King Olaf the +Saint must help him. But as you thought he came towards me, but +not with so much joy, I may possibly live a few years longer, but +not become old, and I trust his providence will stand over me; +but that he did not come to me with the same splendour and glory +as to our brother Olaf, that will be because, in many ways, I +have sinned and transgressed his command. If he delayed coming +to thee, I think that in no way betokens thy death, but rather a +long life; but it may be that some heavy accident may occur to +thee, as there was an unaccountable dread overpowering thee; but +I foretell that thou will be the oldest of us, and wilt rule the +kingdom longest." + +Then said Sigurd, "This is well and intelligently interpreted, +and it is likely it will be so." And now the king began to be +cheerful again. + + + +21. OF KING SIGURD'S MARRIAGE. + +King Sigurd married Malmfrid, a daughter of King Harald +Valdemarson, eastward in Novgorod. King Harald Valdemarson's +mother was Queen Gyda the Old, a daughter of the Swedish king, +Inge Steinkelson. Harald Valdemarson's other daughter, sister to +Malmfrid, was Ingebjorg, who was married to Canute Lavard, a son +of the Danish king, Eirik the Good, and grandson of King Svein +Ulfson. Canute's and Ingebjorg's children were, the Danish king, +Valdemar, who came to the Danish kingdom after Svein Eirikson; +and daughters Margaret, Christina, and Catherine. Margaret was +married to Stig Hvitaled; and their daughter was Christina, +married to the Swedish king, Karl Sorkvison, and their son was +King Sorkver. + + + +22. OF THE CASES BEFORE THE THING. + +The king's relative, Sigurd Hranason, came into strife with King +Sigurd. He had had the Lapland collectorship on the king's +account, because of their relationship and long friendship, and +also of the many services Sigurd Hranason had done to the kings; +for he was a very distinguished, popular man. But it happened to +him, as it often does to others, that persons more wicked and +jealous than upright slandered him to King Sigurd, and whispered +in the king's ear that he took more of the Laplander's tribute to +himself than was proper. They spoke so long about this, that +King Sigurd conceived a dislike and anger to him, and sent a +message to him. When he appeared before the king, the king +carried these feelings with him, and said, "I did not expect that +thou shouldst have repaid me for thy great fiefs and other +dignities by taking the king's property, and abstracting a +greater portion of it than is allowable." + +Sigurd Hranason replies, "It is not true that has been told you; +for I have only taken such portion as I had your permission to +take." + +King Sigurd replies, "Thou shalt not slip away with this; but the +matter shall be seriously treated before it comes to an end." +With that they parted. + +Soon after, by the advice of his friends, the king laid an action +against Sigurd Hranason at the Thing-meeting in Bergen, and would +have him made an outlaw. Now when the business took this turn, +and appeared so dangerous, Sigurd Hranason went to King Eystein, +and told him what mischief King Sigurd intended to do him, and +entreated his assistance. King Eystein replied, "This is a +difficult matter that you propose to me, to speak against my +brother; and there is a great difference between defending a +cause and pursuing it in law;" and added, that this was a matter +which concerned him and Sigurd equally. "But for thy distress, +and our relationship, I shall bring in a word for thee." + +Soon after Eystein visited King Sigurd, and entreated him to +spare the man, reminding him of the relationship between them and +Sigurd Hranason, who was married to their aunt, Skialdvor; and +said he would pay the penalty for the crime committed against the +king, although he could not with truth impute any blame to him in +the matter. Besides, he reminded the king of the long friendship +with Sigurd Hranason. King Sigurd replied, that it was better +government to punish such acts. Then King Eystein replied, "If +thou, brother, wilt follow the law, and punish such acts +according to the country's privileges, then it would be most +correct that Sigurd Hranason produce his witnesses, and that the +case be judged at the Thing, but not at a meeting; for the case +comes under the law of the land, not under Bjarkey law." Then +said Sigurd, "It may possibly be so that the case belongs to it, +as thou sayest, King Eystein; and if it be against law what has +hitherto been done in this case, then we shall bring it before +the Thing." Then the kings parted, and each seemed determined to +take his own way. King Sigurd summoned the parties in the case +before the Arnarnes Thing, and intended to pursue it there. King +Eystein came also to the Thing-place; and when the case was +brought forward for judgment, King Eystein went to the Thing +before judgment was given upon Sigurd Hranason. Now King Sigurd +told the lagmen to pronounce the judgment; but King Eystein +replied thus: "I trust there are here men acquainted sufficiently +with the laws of Norway, to know that they cannot condemn a +lendermen to be outlawed at this Thing." And he then explained +how the law was, so that every man clearly understood it. Then +said King Sigurd, "Thou art taking up this matter very warmly, +King Eystein, and it is likely the case will cost more trouble +before it comes to an end than we intended; but nevertheless we +shall follow it out. I will have him condemned to be outlawed in +his native place." Then said King Eystein, "There are certainly +not many things which do not succeed with thee, and especially +when there are but few and small folks to oppose one who has +carried through such great things." And thus they parted, +without anything being concluded in the case. Thereafter King +Sigurd called together a Gula Thing, went himself there, and +summoned to him many high chiefs. King Eystein came there also +with his suite; and many meetings and conferences were held among +people of understanding concerning this case, and it was tried +and examined before the lagmen. Now King Eystein objected that +all the parties summoned in any cases tried here belonged to the +Thing-district; but in this case the deed and the parties +belonged to Halogaland. The Thing accordingly ended in doing +nothing, as King Eystein had thus made it incompetent. The kings +parted in great wrath; and King Eystein went north to Throndhjem. +King Sigurd, on the other hand, summoned to him all lendermen, +and also the house-servants of the lendermen, and named out of +every district a number of the bondes from the south parts of the +country, so that he had collected a large army about him; and +proceeded with all this crowd northwards along the coast to +Halogaland, and intended to use all his power to make Sigurd +Hranason an outlaw among his own relations. For this purpose he +summoned to him the Halogaland and Naumudal people, and appointed +a Thing at Hrafnista. King Eystein prepared himself also, and +proceeded with many people from the town of Nidaros to the Thing, +where he made Sigurd Hranason, by hand-shake before witnesses, +deliver over to him the following and defending this case. At +this Thing both the kings spoke, each for his own side. Then +King Eystein asks the lagmen where that law was made in Norway +which gave the bondes the right to judge between the kings of the +country, when they had pleas with each other. "I shall bring +witnesses to prove that Sigurd has given the case into my hands; +and it is with me, not with Sigurd Hranason, that King Sigurd has +to do in this case." The lagmen said that disputes between kings +must be judged only at the Eyra Thing in Nidaros. + +King Eystein said, "So I thought that it should be there, and the +cases must be removed there." + +Then King Sigurd said, "The more difficulties and inconvenience +thou bringest upon me in this matter, the more I will persevere +in it." And with that they parted. + +Both kings then went south to Nidaros town, where they summoned a +Thing from eight districts. King Eystein was in the town with a +great many people, but Sigurd was on board his ships. When the +Thing was opened, peace and safe conduct was given to all; and +when the people were all collected, and the case should be gone +into, Bergthor, a son of Svein Bryggjufot, stood up, and gave his +evidence that Sigurd Hranason had concealed a part of the +Laplanders' taxes. + +Then King Eystein stood up and said, "If thy accusation were +true, although we do not know what truth there may be in thy +testimony, yet this case has already been dismissed from three +Things, and a fourth time from a town meeting; and therefore I +require that the lagmen acquit Sigurd in this case according to +law." And they did so. + +Then said King Sigurd, "I see sufficiently, King Eystein, that +thou hast carried this case by law-quirks (1), which I do not +understand. But now there remains, King Eystein, a way of +determining the case which I am more used to, and which I shall +now apply." + +He then retired to his ships, had the tents taken down, laid his +whole fleet out at the holm, and held a Thing of his people; and +told them that early in the morning they should land at +Iluvellir, and give battle to King Eystein. But in the evening, +as King Sigurd sat at his table in his ship taking his repast, +before he was aware of it a man cast himself on the floor of the +forehold, and at the king's feet. This was Sigurd Hranason, who +begged the king to take what course with regard to him the king +himself thought proper. Then came Bishop Magne and Queen +Malmfrid, and many other great personages, and entreated +forgiveness for Sigurd Hranason; and at their entreaty the king +raised him up, took him by the hand, and placed him among his +men, and took him along with himself to the south part of the +country. In autumn the king gave Sigurd Hranason leave to go +north to his farm, gave him an employment, and was always +afterward his friend. After this day, however, the brothers were +never much together, and there was no cordiality or cheerfulness +among them. + + +ENDNOTES: +(1) These law-quirks show a singularly advanced state of law. + and deference to the Law Things, amidst such social disorder + and misdeeds. -- L. + + + +23. OF KING OLAF'S DEATH. + +King Olaf Magnuson fell into a sickness which ended in his death. +He was buried in Christ church in Nidaros, and many were in great +grief at his death. After Olaf's death, Eystein and Sigurd ruled +the country, the three brothers together having been kings of +Norway for twelve years (A.D. 1104-1115); namely, five years +after King Sigurd returned home, and seven years before. King +Olaf was seventeen years old when he died, and it happened on the +24th of December. + + + +24. MAGNUS THE BLIND; HIS BIRTH. + +King Eystein had been about a year in the east part of the +country at that time, and King Sigurd was then in the north. +King Eystein remained a long time that winter in Sarpsborg. +There was once a powerful and rich bonde called O1af of Dal, who +dwelt in Great Dal in Aumord, and had two children, -- a son +called Hakon Fauk, and a daughter called Borghild, who was a very +beautiful girl, and prudent, and well skilled in many things. +Olaf and his children were a long time in winter in Sarpsborg, +and Borghild conversed very often with King Eystein; so that many +reports were spread about their friendship. The following summer +King Eystein went north, and King Sigurd came eastward, where he +remained all winter, and was long in Konungahella, which town he +greatly enlarged and improved. He built there a great castle of +turf and stone, dug a great ditch around it, and built a church +and several houses within the castle. The holy cross he allowed +to remain at Konungahella, and therein did not fulfill the oath +he had taken in Palestine; but, on the other hand, he established +tithe, and most of the other things to which he had bound himself +by oath. The reason of his keeping the cross east at the +frontier of the country was, that he thought it would be a +protection to all the land; but it proved the greatest misfortune +to place this relic within the power of the heathens, as it +afterwards turned out. + +When Borghild, Olaf's daughter, heard it whispered that people +talked ill of her conversations and intimacy with King Eystein, +she went to Sarpsborg; and after suitable fasts she carried the +iron as proof of her innocence, and cleared herself thereby fully +from all offence. When King Sigurd heard this, he rode one day +as far as usually was two days' travelling, and came to Dal to +Olaf, where he remained all night, made Borghild his concubine, +and took her away with him. They had a son, who was called +Magnus, and he was sent immediately to Halogaland, to be fostered +at Bjarkey by Vidkun Jonson; and he was brought up there. Magnus +grew up to be the handsomest man that could be seen, and was very +soon stout and strong. + + + +25. COMPARISON BETWEEN THE TWO KINGS. + +King Eystein and King Sigurd went both in spring to +guest-quarters in the Uplands; and each was entertained in a +separate house, and the houses were not very distant from each +other. The bondes, however, thought it more convenient that both +should be entertained together by turns in each house; and thus +they were both at first in the house of King Eystein. But in the +evening, when the people began to drink, the ale was not good; so +that the guests were very quiet and still. Then said King +Eystein, "Why are the people so silent? It is more usual in +drinking parties that people are merry, so let us fall upon some +jest over our ale that will amuse people; for surely, brother +Sigurd, all people are well pleased when we talk cheerfully." + +Sigurd replies, bluntly, "Do you talk as much as you please, but +give me leave to be silent." + +Eystein says, "It is a common custom over the ale-table to +compare one person with another, and now let us do so." Then +Sigurd was silent. + +"I see," says King Eystein, "that I must begin this amusement. +Now I will take thee, brother, to compare myself with, and will +make it appear so as if we had both equal reputation and +property, and that there is no difference in our birth and +education." + +Then King Sigurd replies, "Do you remember that I was always able +to throw you when we wrestled, although you are a year older?" + +Then King Eystein replied, "But I remember that you was not so +good at the games which require agility." + +Sigurd: "Do you remember that I could drag you under water, when +we swam together, as often as I pleased?" + +Eystein: "But I could swim as far as you, and could dive as well +as you; and I could run upon snow-skates so well that nobody +could beat me, and you could no more do it than an ox." + +Sigurd: "Methinks it is a more useful and suitable accomplishment +for a chief to be expert at his bow; and I think you could +scarcely draw my bow, even if you took your foot to help." + +Eystein: "I am not strong at the bow as you are, but there is +less difference between our shooting near; and I can use the +skees much better than you, and in former times that was held a +great accomplishment." + +Sigurd: "It appears to me much better for a chief who is to be +the superior of other men, that he is conspicuous in a crowd, and +strong and powerful in weapons above other men; easily seen, and +easily known, where there are many together." + +Eystein: "It is not less a distinction and an ornament that a man +is of a handsome appearance, so as to be easily known from others +on that account; and this appears to me to suit a chief best, +because the best ornament is allied to beauty. I am moreover +more knowing in the law than you, and on every subject my words +flow more easily than yours." + +Sigurd: "It may be that you know more law-quirks, for I have had +something else to do; neither will any deny you a smooth tongue. +But there are many who say that your words are not to be trusted; +that what you promise is little to be regarded; and that you talk +just according to what those who are about you say, which is not +kingly." + +Eystein: "This is because, when people bring their cases before +me, I wish first to give every man that satisfaction in his +affairs which he desires; but afterwards comes the opposite +party, and then there is something to be given or taken away very +often, in order to mediate between them, so that both may be +satisfied. It often happens, too, that I promise whatever is +desired of me, that all may be joyful about me. It would be an +easy matter for me to do as you do, -- to promise evil to all; +and I never hear any complain of your not keeping this promise to +them." + +Sigurd: "It is the conversation of all that the expedition that I +made out of the country was a princely expedition, while you in +the meantime sat at home like your father's daughter." + +Eystein: "Now you touched the tender spot. I would not have +brought up this conversation if I had not known what to reply on +this point. I can truly say that I equipt you from home like a +sister, before you went upon this expedition." + +Sigurd: "You must have heard that on this expedition I was in +many a battle in the Saracen's land, and gained the victory in +all; and you must have heard of the many valuable articles I +acquired, the like of which were never seen before in this +country, and I was the most respected wherever the most gallant +men were; and, on the other hand, you cannot conceal that you +have only a home-bred reputation." + +Eystein: "I have heard that you had several battles abroad, but +it was more useful for the country what I was doing in the +meantime here at home. I built five churches from the +foundations, and a harbour out at Agdanes, where it before was +impossible to land, and where vessels ply north and south along +the coast. I set a warping post and iron ring in the sound of +Sinholm, and in Bergen I built a royal hall, while you were +killing bluemen for the devil in Serkland. This, I think, was of +but little advantage to our kingdom." + +King Sigurd said: "On this expedition I went all the way to +Jordan and swam across the river. On the edge of the river there +is a bush of willows, and there I twisted a knot of willows, and +said this knot thou shouldst untie, brother, or take the curse +thereto attached." + +King Eystein said: "I shall not go and untie the knot which you +tied for me; but if I had been inclined to tie a knot for thee, +thou wouldst not have been king of Norway at thy return to this +country, when with a single ship you came sailing into my fleet." + +Thereupon both were silent, and there was anger on both sides. +More things passed between the brothers, from which it appeared +that each of them would be greater than the other; however, peace +was preserved between them as long as they lived. + + + +26. OF KING SIGURD'S SICKNESS. + +King Sigurd was at a feast in the Upland, and a bath was made +ready for him. When the king came to the bath and the tent was +raised over the bathing-tub, the king thought there was a fish in +the tub beside him; and a great laughter came upon him, so that +he was beside himself, and was out of his mind, and often +afterwards these fits returned. + +Magnus Barefoot's daughter, Ragnhild, was married by her brothers +to Harald Kesia, a son of the Danish king, Eirik the Good; and +their sons were Magnus, Olaf, Knut and Harald. + + + +27. OF KING EYSTEIN'S DEATH. + +King Eystein built a large ship at Nidaros, which, in size and +shape, was like the Long Serpent which King Olaf Trygvason had +built. At the stem there was a dragon's head, and at the stern a +crooked tail, and both were gilded over. The ship was high- +sided; but the fore and aft parts appeared less than they should +be. He also made in Nidaros many and large dry-docks of the best +material, and well timbered. + +Six years after King Olaf's death, it happened that King Eystein, +at a feast at Hustadir in Stim, was seized with an illness which +soon carried him off. He died the 29th of August, 1123, and his +body was carried north to Nidaros, and buried in Christ church; +and it is generally said that so many mourners never stood over +any man's grave in Norway as over King Eystein's, at least since +the time Magnus the Good, Saint Olaf's son, died. Eystein had +been twenty years (A.D. 1104-1123) king of Norway; and after his +decease his brother, King Sigurd, was the sole king of Norway as +long as he lived. + + + +28. BAPTIZING THE PEOPLE OF SMALAND. + +The Danish king, Nikolas, a son of Svein Ulfson, married +afterwards the Queen Margaret, a daughter of King Inge, who had +before been married to King Magnus Barefoot; and their sons were +Nikolas and Magnus the Strong. King Nikolas sent a message to +King Sigurd the Crusader, and asked him if he would go with him +with all his might and help him to the east of the Swedish +dominion, Smaland, to baptize the inhabitants; for the people who +dwelt there had no regard for Christianity, although some of them +had allowed themselves to be baptized. At that time there were +many people all around in the Swedish dominions who were +heathens, and many were bad Christians; for there were some of +the kings who renounced Christianity, and continued heathen +sacrifices, as Blotsvein, and afterwards Eirik Arsale, had done. +King Sigurd promised to undertake this journey, and the kings +appointed their meeting at Eyrarsund. King Sigurd then summoned +all people in Norway to a levy, both of men and ships; and when +the fleet was assembled he had about 300 ships. King Nikolas +came very early to the meeting-place, and stayed there a long +time; and the bondes murmured much, and said the Northmen did not +intend to come. Thereupon the Danish army dispersed, and the +king went away with all his fleet. King Sigurd came there soon +afterwards, and was ill pleased; but sailed east to Svimraros, +and held a House-thing, at which Sigurd spoke about King +Nikolas's breach of faith, and the Northmen, on this account, +determined to go marauding in his country. They first plundered +a village called Tumathorp, which is not far from Lund; and then +sailed east to the merchant-town of Calmar, where they plundered, +as well as in Smaland, and imposed on the country a tribute of +1500 cattle for ship provision; and the people of Smaland +received Christianity. After this King Sigurd turned about with +his fleet, and came back to his kingdom with many valuable +articles and great booty, which he had gathered on this +expedition; and this levy was called the Calmar levy. This was +the summer before the eclipse. This was the only levy King +Sigurd carried out as long as he was king. + + + +29. OF THORARIN STUTFELD. + +It happened once when King Sigurd was going from the drinking- +table to vespers, that his men were very drunk and merry; and +many of them sat outside the church singing the evening song, but +their singing was very irregular. Then the king said, "Who is +that fellow I see standing at the church with a skin jacket on?" +They answered, that they did not know. Then the king said: -- + + "This skin-clad man, in sorry plight, + Puts all our wisdom here to flight." + +Then the fellow came forward and said: -- + + "I thought that here I might be known, + Although my dress is scanty grown. + 'Tis poor, but I must be content: + Unless, great king, it's thy intent + To give me better; for I have seen + When I and rags had strangers been." + +The king answered, "Come to me to-morrow when I am at the drink- +table." The night passed away; and the morning after the +Icelander, who was afterwards called Thorarin Stutfetd, went into +the drinking-room. A man stood outside of the door of the room +with a horn in his hand, and said, "Icelander! the king says +that if thou wilt deserve any gift from him thou shalt compose a +song before going in, and make it about a man whose name is Hakon +Serkson, and who is called Morstrut (1); and speak about that +surname in thy song." The man who spoke to him was called Arne +Fioruskeif. Then they went into the room; and when Thorarin came +before the king's seat he recited these verses: -- + + "Throndhjem's warrior-king has said + The skald should be by gifts repaid, + If he before this meeting gave + The king's friend Serk a passing stave. + The generous king has let me know + My stave, to please, must be framed so + That my poor verse extol the fame + Of one called Hakon Lump by name." + +Then said the king, "I never said so, and somebody has been +making a mock of thee. Hakon himself shall determine what +punishment thou shalt have. Go into his suite." Hakon said, "He +shall be welcome among us, for I can see where the joke came +from;" and he placed the Icelander at his side next to himself, +and they were very merry. The day was drawing to a close, and +the liquor began to get into their heads, when Hakon said, "Dost +thou not think, Icelander, that thou owest me some penalty? and +dost thou not see that some trick has been played upon thee?" + +Thorarin replies, "It is true, indeed, that I owe thee some +compensation." + +Hakon says, "Then we shall be quits, if thou wilt make me another +stave about Arne." + +He said he was ready to do so; and they crossed over to the side +of the room where Arne was sitting, and Thorarin gave these +verses: -- + + "Fioruskeif has often spread, + With evil heart and idle head, + The eagle's voidings round the land, + Lampoons and lies, with ready hand. + Yet this landlouper we all know, + In Africa scarce fed a crow, + Of all his arms used in the field, + Those in most use were helm and shield." + +Arne sprang up instantly, drew his sword, and was going to fall +upon him; but Hakon told him to let it alone and be quiet, and +bade him remember that if it came to a quarrel he would come off +the worst himself. Thorarin afterwards went up to the king, and +said he had composed a poem which he wished the king to hear. +The king consented, and the song is known by the name of the +Stutfeld poem. The king asked Thorarin what he intended to do. +He replied, it was his intention to go to Rome. Then the king +gave him much money for his pilgrimage, and told him to visit him +on his return, and promised to provide for him. + + +ENDNOTES: +(1) Morstrut is a short, fat, punchy fellow. -- L. + + + +30. OF SIGURD AND OTTAR BIRTING. + +It is told that King Sigurd, one Whitsunday, sat at table with +many people, among whom were many of his friends; and when he +came to his high-seat, people saw that his countenance was very +wild, and as if he had been weeping, so that people were afraid +of what might follow. The king rolled his eyes, and looked at +those who were seated on the benches. Then he seized the holy +book which he had brought with him from abroad, and which was +written all over with gilded letters; so that never had such a +costly book come to Norway. His queen sat by his side. Then +said King Sigurd, "Many are the changes which may take place +during a man's lifetime. I had two things which were dear to me +above all when I came from abroad, and these were this book and +the queen; and now I think the one is only worse and more +loathsome than the other, and nothing I have belonging to me that +I more detest. The queen does not know herself how hideous she +is; for a goat's horn is standing out on her head, and the better +I liked her before the worse I like her now." Thereupon he cast +the book on the fire which was burning on the hall-floor, and +gave the queen a blow with his fist between the eyes. The queen +wept; but more at the king's' illness than at the blow, or the +affront she had suffered. + +Then a man stood up before the king; his name was Ottar Birting; +and he was one of the torch-bearers, although a bonde's son, and +was on service that day. He was of small stature, but of +agreeable appearance; lively, bold, and full of fun; black +haired, and of a dark skin. He ran and snatched the book which +the king had cast into the fire, held it out, and said, +"Different were the days, sire, when you came with great state +and splendour to Norway, and with great fame and honour; for then +all your friends came to meet you with joy, and were glad at your +coming. All as one man would have you for king, and have you in +the highest regard and honour. But now days of sorrow are come +over us; for on this holy festival many of your friends have come +to you, and cannot be cheerful on account of your melancholy and +ill health. It is much to be desired that you would be merry +with them; and do, good king, take this saving advice, make peace +first with the queen, and make her joyful whom you have so highly +affronted, with a friendly word; and then all your chiefs, +friends, and servants; that is my advice." + +Then said King Sigurd, "Dost thou dare to give me advice, thou +great lump of a houseman's lad!" And he sprang up, drew his +sword, and swung it with both hands as if going to cut him down. + +But Ottar stood quiet and upright; did not stir from the spot, +nor show the slightest sign of fear; and the king turned round +the sword-blade which he had waved over Ottar's head, and gently +touched him on the shoulder with it. Then he sat down in silence +on his high-seat. + +All were silent who were in the hall, for nobody dared to say a +word. Now the king looked around him, milder than before, and +said, "It is difficult to know what there is in people. Here sat +my friends, and lendermen, marshals and shield-bearers, and all +the best men in the land; but none did so well against me as this +man, who appears to you of little worth compared to any of you, +although now he loves me most. I came here like a madman, and +would have destroyed my precious property; but he turned aside my +deed, and was not afraid of death for it. Then he made an able +speech, ordering his words so that they were honourable to me, +and not saying a single word about things which could increase my +vexation; but even avoiding what might, with truth, have been +said. So excellent was his speech, that no man here, however +great his understanding, could have spoken better. Then I sprang +up in a pretended rage, and made as if I would have cut him down; +but he was courageous as if he had nothing to fear; and seeing +that, I let go my purpose; for he was altogether innocent. Now +ye shall know, my friends, how I intend to reward him; he was +before my torchbearer, and shall now be my lenderman; and there +shall follow what is still more, that he shall be the most +distinguished of my lendermen. Go thou and sit among the +lendermen, and be a servant no longer." + +Ottar became one of the most celebrated men in Norway for various +good and praiseworthy deeds. + + + +31. OF KING SIGURD'S DREAM. + +In King Sigurd's latter days he was once at an entertainment at +one of his farms; and in the morning when he was dressed he was +silent and still, so that his friends were afraid he was not able +to govern himself. Now the farm bailiff, who was a man of good +sense and courage, brought him into conversation, and asked if he +had heard any news of such importance that it disturbed his +mirth; or if the entertainment had not satisfied him; or if there +was anything else that people could remedy. + +King Sigurd said, that none of the things he had mentioned was +the cause. "But it is that I think upon the dream I had in the +night." + +"Sire," replied he, "may it prove a lucky dream! I would gladly +hear it." + +The king: "I thought that I was in Jadar, and looked out towards +the sea; and that I saw something very black moving itself; and +when it came near it appeared to be a large tree, of which the +branches stretched far above the water, and the roots were down +in the sea. Now when the tree came to the shore it broke into +pieces, and drove all about the land, both the mainland and the +out-islands, rocks and strands; and it appeared to me as if I saw +over all Norway along the sea-coast, and saw pieces of that tree, +some small and some large, driven into every bight." + +Then said the bailiff, "It is likely that you an best interpret +this dream yourself; and I would willingly hear your +interpretation of it." + +Then said the king, "This dream appears to me to denote the +arrival in this country of some man who will fix his seat here, +and whose posterity will spread itself over the land; but with +unequal power, as the dream shows." + + + +32. OF ASLAK HANE. + +It so happened once, that King Sigurd sat in a gloomy mood among +many worthy men. It was Friday evening, and the kitchen-master +asked what meat should be made ready. + +The king replies, "What else but flesh-meat?" And so harsh were +his words that nobody dared to contradict him, and all were ill +at ease. Now when people prepared to go to table, dishes of warm +flesh-meat were carried in; but all were silent, and grieved at +the king's illness. Before the blessing was pronounced over the +meat, a man called Aslak Hane spoke. He had been a long time +with King Sigurd on his journey abroad, and was not a man of any +great family; and was small of stature, but fiery. When he +perceived how it was, and that none dared to accost the king, he +asked, "What is it, sire, that is smoking on the dish before +you?" + +The king replies, "What do you mean, Aslak? what do you think it +is?" + +Aslak: "I think it is flesh-meat; and I would it were not so." + +The king: "But if it be so, Aslak?" + +He replied, "It would be vexatious to know that a gallant king, +who has gained so much honour in the world, should so forget +himself. When you rose up out of Jordan, after bathing in the +same waters as God himself, with palm-leaves in your hands, and +the cross upon your breast, it was something else you promised, +sire, than to eat flesh-meat on a Friday. If a meaner man were +to do so, he would merit a heavy punishment. This royal hall is +not so beset as it should be, when it falls upon me, a mean man, +to challenge such an act." + +The king sat silent, and did not partake of the meat; and when +the time for eating was drawing to an end, the king ordered the +flesh dishes to be removed and other food was brought in, such as +it is permitted to use. When the meal-time was almost past, the +king began to be cheerful, and to drink. People advised Aslak to +fly, but he said he would not do so. "I do not see how it could +help me; and to tell the truth, it is as good to die now that I +have got my will, and have prevented the king from committing a +sin. It is for him to kill me if he likes." + +Towards evening the king called him, and said, "Who set thee on, +Aslak Hane, to speak such free words to me in the hearing of so +many people?" + +"No one, sire, but myself." + +The king: "Thou wouldst like, no doubt, to know what thou art to +have for such boldness; what thinkest thou it deserves." + +He replies, "If it be well rewarded, sire, I shall be glad; but +should it be otherwise, then it is your concern." + +Then the king said, "Smaller is thy reward than thou hast +deserved. I give thee three farms. It has turned out, what +could not have been expected, that thou hast prevented me from a +great crime, -- thou, and not the lendermen, who are indebted to +me for so much good." And so it ended. + + + +33. OF A WOMAN BROUGHT TO THE KING. + +One Yule eve the king sat in the hall, and the tables were laid +out, and the king said, "Get me flesh-meat." + +They answered, "Sire, it is not the custom to eat flesh-meat on +Yule eve." + +The king said, "If it be not the custom I will make it the +custom." + +They went out, and brought him a dolphin. The king stuck his +knife into it, but did not eat of it. Then the king said, "Bring +me a girl here into the hall." They brought him a woman whose +head-dress went far down her brows. The king took her hand in +his hands, looked at her, and said, "An ill looking girl!" + +((LACUNA -- The rest of this story is missing)) + + + +34. HARALD GILLE COMES TO NORWAY. + +Halkel Huk, a son of Jon Smiorbalte, who was lenderman in More, +made a voyage in the West sea, all the way to the South Hebudes. +A man came to him out of Ireland called Gillikrist, and gave +himself out for a son of King Magnus Barefoot. His mother came +with him, and said his other name was Harald. Halkel received +the man, brought him to Norway with him, and went immediately to +King Sigurd with Harald and his mother. When they had told their +story to the king, he talked over the matter with his principal +men, and bade them give their opinions upon it. They were of +different opinions, and all left it to the king himself, although +there were several who opposed this; and the king followed his +own counsel. King Sigurd ordered Harald to be called before him, +and told him that he would not deny him the proof, by ordeal, of +who his father was; but on condition that if he should prove his +descent according to his claim, he should not desire the kingdom +in the lifetime of King Sigurd, or of King Magnus: and to this he +bound himself by oath. King Sigurd said he must tread over hot +iron to prove his birth; but this ordeal was thought by many too +severe, as he was to undergo it merely to prove his father, and +without getting the kingdom; but Harald agreed to it, and fixed +on the trial by iron: and this ordeal was the greatest ever made +in Norway; for nine glowing plowshares were laid down, and Harald +went over them with bare feet, attended by two bishops. + +Three days after the iron trial the ordeal was taken to proof, +and the feet were found unburnt. Thereafter King Sigurd +acknowledged Harald's relationship; but his son Magnus conceived +a great hatred of him, and in this many chiefs followed Magnus. +King Sigurd trusted so much to his favour with the whole people +of the country, that he desired all men, under oath, to promise +to accept Magnus after him as their king; and all the people took +this oath. + + + +35. RACE BETWEEN MAGNUS AND HARALD GILLE. + +Harald Gille was a tall, slender-grown man, of a long neck and +face, black eyes, and dark hair, brisk and quick, and wore +generally the Irish dress of short light clothes. The Norse +language was difficult for Harald, and he brought out words which +many laughed at. Harald sat late drinking one evening. He spoke +with another man about different things in the west in Ireland; +and among other things, said that there were men in Ireland so +swift of foot that no horse could overtake them in running. +Magnus, the king's son, heard this, and said, "Now he is lying, +as he usually does." + +Harald replies, "It is true that there are men in Ireland whom no +horse in Norway could overtake." They exchanged some words about +this, and both were drunk. Then said Magnus, "Thou shalt make a +wager with me, and stake thy head if thou canst not run so fast +as I ride upon my horse, and I shall stake my gold ring." + +Harald replies, "I did not say that I could run so swiftly; but I +said that men are to be found in Ireland who will run as fast; +and on that I would wager." + +The king's son Magnus replies, "I will not go to Ireland about +it; we are wagering here, and not there." + +Harald on this went to bed, and would not speak to him more about +it. This was in Oslo. The following morning, when the early +mass was over, Magnus rode up the street, and sent a message to +Harald to come to him. When Harald came he was dressed thus. He +had on a shirt and trousers which were bound with ribands under +his foot-soles, a short cloak, an Irish hat on his head, and a +spear-shaft in his hand. Magnus set up a mark for the race. +Harald said, "Thou hast made the course too long;" but Magnus +made it at once even much longer, and said it was still too +short. There were many spectators. They began the race, and +Harald followed always the horse's pace; and when they came to +the end of the race course, Magnus said, "Thou hadst hold of the +saddle-girth, and the horse dragged thee along." Magnus had his +swift runner, the Gautland horse. They began the race again, and +Harald ran the whole race-course before the horse. When came to +the end Harald asked, "Had I hold of the saddle-girths now?" + +Magnus replied, "Thou hadst the start at first." + +Then Magnus let his horse breathe a while, and when he was ready +he put the spurs to him, and set off in full gallop. Harald +stood still, and Magnus looked back, and called, "Set off now." + +Then Harald ran quickly past the horse, and came to the end of +the course so long before him that he lay down, and got up and +saluted Magnus as he came in." + +Then they went home to the town. In the meantime King Sigurd had +been at high mass, and knew nothing of this until after he had +dined that day. Then he said to Magnus angrily, "Thou callest +Harald useless; but I think thou art a great fool, and knowest +nothing of the customs of foreign people. Dost thou not know +that men in other countries exercise themselves in other feats +than in filling themselves with ale, and making themselves mad, +and so unfit for everything that they scarcely know each other? +Give Harald his ring, and do not try to make a fool of him again, +as long as I am above ground." + + + +36. OF SIGURD'S SWIMMING. + +It happened once that Sigurd was out in his ship, which lay in +the harbour; and there lay a merchant ship, which was an Iceland +trader, at the side of it. Harald Gille was in the forecastle of +the king's ship, and Svein Rimhildson, a son of Knut Sveinson of +Jadar, had his berth the next before him. There was also Sigurd +Sigurdson, a gallant lenderman, who himself commanded a ship. It +was a day of beautiful weather and warm sunshine, and many went +out to swim, both from the long-ship and the merchant vessel. An +Iceland man, who was among the swimmers, amused himself by +drawing those under water who could not swim so well as himself; +and at that the spectators laughed. When King Sigurd saw and +heard this, he cast off his clothes, sprang into the water, and +swam to the Icelander, seized him, and pressed him under the +water, and held him there; and as soon as the Icelander came up +the king pressed him down again, and thus the one time after the +other. + +Then said Sigurd Sigurdson, "Shall we let the king kill this +man?" + +Somebody said, "No one has any wish to interfere." + +Sigurd replies, that "If Dag Eilifson were here, we should not be +without one who dared." + +Then Sigurd sprang overboard, swam to the king, took hold of him, +and said, "Sire, do not kill the man. Everybody sees that you +are a much better swimmer." + +The king replies, "Let me loose, Sigurd: I shall be his death, +for he will destroy our people under water." + +Sigurd says, "Let us first amuse ourselves; and, Icelander, do +thou set off to the land," which he did. The king now got loose +from Sigurd, and swam to his ship, and Sigurd went his way: but +the king ordered that Sigurd should not presume to come into his +presence; this was reported to Sigurd, and so he went up into the +country. + + + +37. OF HARALD AND SVEIN RIMHILDSON. + +In the evening, when people were going to bed, some of the ship's +men were still at their games up in the country. Harald was with +those who played on the land, and told his footboy to go out to +the ship, make his bed, and wait for him there. The lad did as +he was ordered. The king had gone to sleep; and as the boy +thought Harald late, he laid himself in Harald's berth. Svein +Rimhildson said, "It is a shame for brave men to be brought from +their farms at home, and to have here serving boys to sleep +beside them." The lad said that Harald had ordered him to come +there. Svein Rimhildson said, "We do not so much care for Harald +himself lying here, if he do not bring here his slaves and +beggars;" and seized a riding-whip, and struck the boy on the +head until the blood flowed from him. The boy ran immediately up +the country, and told Harald what had happened, who went +immediately out to the ship, to the aft part of the forecastle, +and with a pole-axe struck Svein so that he received a severe +wound on his hands; and then Harald went on shore. Svein ran to +the land after him, and, gathering his friends, took Harald +prisoner, and they were about hanging him. But while they were +busy about this, Sigurd Sigurdson went out to the king's ship and +awoke him. When the king opened his eyes and recognised Sigurd, +he said. "For this reason thou shalt die, that thou hast intruded +into my presence; for thou knowest that I forbade thee:" and with +these words the king sprang up. + +Sigurd replied, "That is in your power as soon as you please; but +other business is more urgent. Go to the land as quickly as +possible to help thy brother; for the Rogaland people are going +to hang him." + +Then said the king, "God give us luck, Sigurd! Call my +trumpeter, and let him call the people all to land, and to meet +me." + +The king sprang on the land, and all who knew him followed him to +where the gallows was being erected. The king instantly took +Harald to him; and all the people gathered to the king in full +armour, as they heard the trumpet. Then the king ordered that +Svein and all his comrades should depart from the country as +outlaws; but by the intercession of good men the king was +prevailed on to let them remain and hold their properties, but no +mulct should be paid for Svein's wound. + +Then Sigurd Sigurdson asked if the king wished that he should go +forth out of the country. + +"That will I not," said the king; "for I can never be without +thee." + + + +38. OF KING OLAF'S MIRACLE. + +There was a young and poor man called Kolbein; and Thora, King +Sigurd the Crusader's mother, had ordered his tongue to be cut +out of his mouth, and for no other cause than that this young man +had taken a piece of meat out of the king-mother's tub which he +said the cook had given him, and which the cook had not ventured +to serve up to her. The man had long gone about speechless. So +says Einar Skulason in Olaf's ballad: -- + + "The proud rich dame, for little cause, + Had the lad's tongue cut from his jaws: + The helpless man, of speech deprived, + His dreadful sore wound scarce survived. + A few weeks since at Hild was seen, + As well as ever he had been, + The same poor lad -- to speech restored + By Olaf's power, whom he adored." + +Afterwards the young man came to Nidaros, and watched in the +Christ church; but at the second mass for Olaf before matins he +fell asleep, and thought he saw King Olaf the Saint coming to +him; and that Olaf talked to him, and took hold with his hands of +the stump of his tongue and pulled it. Now when he awoke he +found himself restored, and joyfully did he thank our Lord and +the holy Saint Olaf, who had pitied and helped him; for he had +come there speechless, and had gone to the holy shrine, and went +away cured, and with his speech clear and distinct. + + + +39. KING OLAF'S MIRACLE WITH A PRISONER. + +The heathens took prisoner a young man of Danish family and +carried him to Vindland, where he was in fetters along with other +prisoners. In the day-time he was alone in irons, without a +guard; but at night a peasant's son was beside him in the chain, +that he might not escape from them. This poor man never got +sleep or rest from vexation and sorrow, and considered in many +ways what could help him; for he had a great dread of slavery, +and was pining with hunger and torture. He could not again +expect to be ransomed by his friends, as they had already +restored him twice from heathen lands with their own money; and +he well knew that it would be difficult and expensive for them to +submit a third time to this burden. It is well with the man who +does not undergo so much in the world as this man knew he had +suffered. He saw but one way; and that was to get off and escape +if he could. He resolved upon this in the night-time, killed +the peasant, and cut his foot off after killing him, and set off +to the forest with the chain upon his leg. Now when the people +knew this, soon after daylight in the morning, they pursued him +with two dogs accustomed to trace any one who escaped, and to +find him in the forest however carefully he might be concealed. +They got him into their hands and beat him, and did him all kinds +of mischief; and dragging him home, left barely alive, and showed +him no mercy. They tortured him severely; put him in a dark +room, in which there lay already sixteen Christian men; and bound +him both with iron and other tyings, as fast as they could. Then +he began to think that the misery and pain he had endured before +were but shadows to his present sufferings. He saw no man before +his eyes in this prison who would beg for mercy for him; no one +had compassion on his wretchedness, except the Christian men who +lay bound with him, who sorrowed with him, and bemoaned his fate +together with their own misfortunes and helplessness. One day +they advised him to make a vow to the holy King Olaf, to devote +himself to some office in his sacred house, if he, by God's +compassion and Saint Olaf's prayers could get away from this +prison. He gladly agreed to this, and made a vow and prepared +himself for the situation they mentioned to him. The night after +he thought in his sleep that he saw a man, not tall, standing at +his side, who spoke to him thus, "Here, thou wretched man, why +dost thou not get up?" + +He replied, "Sir, who are you?" + +"I am King Olaf, on whom thou hast called." + +"Oh, my good lord! gladly would I raise myself; but I lie bound +with iron and with chains on my legs, and also the other men who +lie here." + +Thereupon the king accosts him with the words, "Stand up at once +and be not afraid; for thou art loose." + +He awoke immediately, and told his comrades what, had appeared to +him in his dream. They told him to stand up, and try if it was +true. He stood up, and observed that he was loose. Now said his +fellow-prisoners, this would help him but little, for the door +was locked both on the inside and on the outside. Then an old +man who sat there in a deplorable condition put in his word, and +told him not to doubt the mercy of the man who had loosened his +chains; "For he has wrought this miracle on thee that thou +shouldst enjoy his mercy, and hereafter be free, without +suffering more misery and torture. Make haste, then, and seek +the door; and if thou are able to slip out, thou art saved." + +He did so, found the door open, slipped out, and away to the +forest. As soon as the Vindland people were aware of this they +set loose the dogs, and pursued him in great haste; and the poor +man lay hid, and saw well where they were following him. But now +the hounds lost the trace when they came nearer, and all the eyes +that sought him were struck with a blindness, so that nobody +could find him, although he lay before their feet; and they all +returned home, vexed that they could not find him. King Olaf did +not permit this man's destruction after he had reached the +forest, and restored him also to his health and hearing; for they +had so long tortured and beaten him that he had become deaf. At +last he came on board of a ship, with two other Christian men who +had been long afflicted in that country. All of them worked +zealously in this vessel, and so had a successful flight. Then +he repaired to the holy man's house, strong and fit to bear arms. +Now he was vexed at his vow, went from his promise to the holy +king, ran away one day, and came in the evening to a bonde who +gave him lodging for God's sake. Then in the night he saw three +girls coming to him; and handsome and nobly dressed were they. +They spoke to him directly, and sharply reprimanded him for +having been so bold as to run from the good king who had shown so +much compassion to him, first in freeing him from his irons, and +then from the prison; and yet he had deserted the mild master +into whose service he had entered. Then he awoke full of terror, +got up early, and told the house-father his dream. The good man +had nothing so earnest in life as to send him-back to the holy +place. This miracle was first written down by a man who himself +saw the man, and the marks of the chains upon his body. + + + +40. KING SIGURD MARRIES CECILIA. + +In the last period of King Sigurd's life, his new and +extraordinary resolution was whispered about, that he would be +divorced from his queen, and would take Cecilia, who was a great +man's daughter, to wife. He ordered accordingly a great feast to +be prepared, and intended to hold his wedding with her in Bergen. +Now when Bishop Magne heard this, he was very sorry; and one day +the bishop goes to the king's hall, and with him a priest called +Sigurd, who was afterwards bishop of Bergen. When they came to +the king's hall, the bishop sent the king a message that he would +like to meet him; and asked the king to come out to him. He did +so, and came out with a drawn sword in his hand. He received the +bishop kindly and asked him to go in and sit down to table with +him. + +The bishop replies, "I have other business now. Is it true, +sire, what is told me, that thou hast the intention of marrying, +and of driving away thy queen, and taking another wife?" + +The king said it was true. + +Then the bishop changed countenance, and angrily replied, "How +can it come into your mind, sire, to do such an act in our +bishopric as to betray God's word and law, and the holy church? +It surprises me that you treat with such contempt our episcopal +office, and your own royal office. I will now do what is my +duty; and in the name of God, of the holy King Olaf, of Peter the +apostle, and of the other saints, forbid thee this wickedness." + +While he thus spoke he stood straight up, as if stretching out +his neck to the blow, as if ready if the king chose to let the +sword fall; and the priest Sigurd. who afterwards was bishop, has +declared that the sky appeared to him no bigger than a calf's +skin, so frightful did the appearance of the king present itself +to him. The king returned to the hall, however, without saying a +word; and the bishop went to his house and home so cheerful and +gay that he laughed, and saluted every child on his way, and was +playing with his fingers. Then the priest Sigurd asked him the +reason, saying, "Why are you so cheerful, sir? Do you not +consider that the king may be exasperated against you? and would +it not be better to get out of the way?" + +Then said the bishop, "It appears to me more likely that he will +not act so; and besides, what death could be better, or more +desirable, than to leave life for the honour of God? or to die +for the holy cause of Christianity and our own office, by +preventing that which is not right? I am so cheerful because I +have done what I ought to do." + +There was much noise in the town about this. The king got ready +for a journey, and took with him corn, malt and honey. He went +south to Stavanger, and prepared a feast there for his marriage +with Cecilia. When a bishop who ruled there heard of this he +went to the king, and asked if it were true that he intended to +marry in the lifetime of the queen. + +The king said it was so. + +The bishop answers, "If it be so, sire, you must know how much +such a thing is forbidden to inferior persons. Now it appears as +if you thought it was allowable for you, because you have great +power, and that it is proper for you, although it is against +right and propriety; but I do not know how you will do it in our +bishopric, dishonouring thereby God's command, the holy Church, +and our episcopal authority. But you must bestow a great amount +of gifts and estates on this foundation, and thereby pay the +mulct due to God and to us for such transgression." + +Then said the king, "Take what thou wilt of our possessions. +Thou art far more reasonable than Bishop Magne." + +Then the king went away, as well pleased with this bishop as ill +pleased with him who had laid a prohibition on him. Thereafter +the king married the girl, and loved her tenderly. + + + +41. IMPROVEMENT OF KONUNGAHELLA. + +King Sigurd improved the town of Konungahella so much, that there +was not a greater town in Norway at the time, and he remained +there long for the defence of the frontiers. He built a king's +house in the castle, and imposed a duty on all the districts in +the neighbourhood of the town, as well as on the townspeople, +that every person of nine years of age and upwards should bring +to the castle five missile stones for weapons, or as many large +stakes sharp at one end and five ells long. In the castle the +king built a cross-church of timber, and carefully put together, +as far as regards the wood and other materials. The cross-church +was consecrated in the 24th year of King Sigurd's reign (A.D. +1127). Here the king deposited the piece of the holy cross, and +many other holy relics. It was called the castle church; and +before the high altar he placed the tables he had got made in the +Greek country, which were of copper and silver, all gilt, and +beautifully adorned with jewels. Here was also the shrine which +the Danish king Eirik Eimune had sent to King Sigurd; and the +altar book, written with gold letters, which the patriarch had +presented to King Sigurd. + + + +42. KING SIGURD'S DEATH. + +Three years after the consecration of the cross-church, when King +Sigurd was stopping at Viken, he fell sick (A.D. 1130). He died +the night before Mary's-mass (August 15), and was buried in +Halvard's church, where he was laid in the stone wall without the +choir on the south side. His son Magnus was in the town at the +time and took possession of the whole of the king's treasury when +King Sigurd died. Sigurd had been king of Norway twenty-seven +years (A.D. 1104-1130), and was forty years of age when he died. +The time of his reign was good for the country; for there was +peace, and crops were good. + + + +SAGA OF MAGNUS THE BLIND AND OF HARALD GILLE. + + +PRELIMINARY REMARKS + +An age of conflict now begins in Norway. On his death, in 1130, +Sigurd left his son Magnus and his brother Harald. They soon +divided the government, and then entered upon a five-years' +conflict, until Magnus, in 1135, with eyes picked out, went into +a convent. + +The next year, 1136, a new pretender appeared in the person of +Sigurd Slembe, who took King Harald's life in 1137. Magnus died +in 1139. + +Other literature in regard to this epoch is "Fagrskinna" and +"Morkinskinna". The corresponding part of "Agrip" is lost. + +Skalds quoted are: Haldor Skvaldre, Einar Skulason, and Ivar +Ingemundson. + + + +1. MAGNUS AND HARALD PROCLAIMED KINGS. + +King Sigurd's son Magnus was proclaimed in Oslo king of all the +country immediately after his father's death, according to the +oath which the whole nation had sworn to King Sigurd; and many +went into his service, and many became his lendermen. Magnus was +the handsomest man then in Norway; of a passionate temper, and +cruel, but distinguished in bodily exercises. The favour of the +people he owed most to the respect for his father. He was a +great drinker, greedy of money, hard, and obstinate. + +Harald Gille, on the other hand, was very pleasing in +intercourse, gay, and full of mirth; and so generous that he +spared in nothing for the sake of his friends. He willingly +listened to good advice, so that he allowed others to consult +with him and give counsel. With all this he obtained favour and a +good repute, and many men attached themselves as much to him as +to King Magnus. Harald was in Tunsberg when he heard of his +brother King Sigurd's death. He called together his friends to a +meeting, and it was resolved to hold the Hauga Thing (1) there in +the town. At this Thing, Harald was chosen king of half the +country, and it was called a forced oath which had been taken +from him to renounce his paternal heritage. Then Harald formed a +court, and appointed lendermen; and very soon he had as many +people about him as King Magnus. Then men went between them, and +matters stood in this way for seven days; but King Magnus, +finding he had fewer people, was obliged to give way, and to +divide the kingdom with Harald into two parts. The kingdom +accordingly was so divided (October 3, 1130) that each of them +should have the half part of the kingdom which King Sigurd had +possessed; but that King Magnus alone should inherit the fleet of +ships, the table service, the valuable articles and the movable +effects which had belonged to his father, King Sigurd. He was +notwithstanding the least satisfied with his share. Although +they were of such different dispositions, they ruled the country +for some time in peace. King Harald had a son called Sigurd, by +Thora, a daughter of Guthorm Grabarde. King Harald afterwards +married Ingerid, a daughter of Ragnvald, who was a son of the +Swedish King Inge Steinkelson. King Magnus was married to a +daughter of Knut Lavard, and she was a sister of the Danish King +Valdernar; but King Magnus having no affection for her, sent her +back to Denmark; and from that day everything went ill with him, +and he brought upon himself the enmity of her family. + + +ENDNOTES: +(1) Hauga-thing means a Thing held at the tumuli or burial + mounds. -- L. + + + +2. OF THE FORCES OF HARALD AND MAGNUS. + +When the two relations, Harald and Magnus, had been about three +years kings of Norway (A.D. 1131-1133), they both passed the +fourth winter (A.D. 1134) in the town of Nidaros, and invited +each other as guests; but their people were always ready for a +fight. In spring King Magnus sailed southwards along the land +with his fleet, and drew all the men he could obtain out of each +district, and sounded his friends if they would strengthen him +with their power to take the kingly dignity from Harald, and give +him such a portion of the kingdom, as might be suitable; +representing to them that King Harald had already renounced the +kingdom by oath. King Magnus obtained the consent of many +powerful men. The same spring Harald went to the Uplands, and by +the upper roads eastwards to Viken; and when he heard what King +Magnus was doing, he also drew together men on his side. +Wheresoever the two parties went they killed the cattle, or even +the people, upon the farms of the adverse party. King Magnus had +by far the most people, for the main strength of the country lay +open to him for collecting men from it. King Harald was in Viken +on the east side of the fjord, and collected men, while they were +doing each other damage in property and life. King Harald had +with him Kristrod, his brother by his mother's side, and many +other lendermen; but King Magnus had many more. King Harald was +with his forces at a place called Fors in Ranrike, and went from +thence towards the sea. The evening before Saint Lawrence day +(August 10), they had their supper at a place called Fyrileif, +while the guard kept a watch on horseback all around the house. +The watchmen observed King Magnus's army hastening towards the +house, and consisting of full 6000 men, while King Harald had but +1500. Now come the watchmen who had to bring the news to King +Harald of what was going on and say that King Magnus's army was +now very near the town. + +The king says, "What will my relation King Magnus Sigurdson have? +He wants not surely to fight us." + +Thjostolf Alason replies, "You must certainly, sire, make +preparation for that, both for yourself and your, men. King +Magnus has been drawing together an army all the summer for the +purpose of giving you battle when he meets you." + +Then King Harald stood up, and ordered his men to take their +arms. "We shall fight, if our relative King Magnus wants to +fight us." + +Then the war-horns sounded, and all Harald's men went out from +the house to an enclosed field, and set up their banners. King +Harald had on two shirts of ring-mail, but his brother Kristrod +had no armour on; and a gallant man he was. When King Magnus and +his men saw King Harald's troop they drew up and made their +array, and made their line so long that they could surround the +whole of King Harald's troop. So says Haldor Skvaldre: -- + + "King Magnus on the battle-plain + From his long troop-line had great gain; + The plain was drenched with warm blood, + Which lay a red and reeking flood." + + + +3. BATTLE AT FYRILEIF. + +King Magnus had the holy cross carried before him in this battle, +and the battle was great and severe. The king's brother, +Kristrod, had penetrated with his troop into the middle of King +Magnus's array, and cut down on each side of him, so that people +gave way before him everywhere. But a powerful bonde who was in +King Harald's array raised his spear with both hands, and drove +it through between Kristrod's shoulders, so that it came out at +his breast; and thus fell Kristrod. Many who were near asked the +bonde why he had done so foul a deed. + +The bonde replies, "He knows the consequences now of slaughtering +my cattle in summer, and taking all that was in my house, and +forcing me to follow him here. I determined to give him some +return when the opportunity came." + +After this King Harald's army took to flight, and he fled +himself, with all his men. Many fell; and Ingemar Sveinson of +Ask, a great chief and lenderman, got there his death-wound, and +nearly sixty of King Harald's court-men also fell. Harald +himself fled eastward to Viken to his ships, and went out of the +country to King Eirik Eimune in Denmark, and found him in Seeland +and sought aid from him. King Eirik received him well, and +principally because they had sworn to each other to be as +brothers (1); and gave him Halland as a fief to rule over, and +gave him seven long-ships, but without equipment. Thereafter +King Harald went northwards through Halland, and many Northmen +came to meet him. After this battle King Magnus subdued the +whole country, giving life and safety to all who were wounded, +and had them taken care of equally with his own men. He then +called the whole country his own, and had a choice of the best +men who were in the country. When they held a council among +themselves afterwards, Sigurd Sigurdson, Thorer Ingeridson, and +all the men of most understanding, advised that they should keep +their forces together in Viken, and remain there, in case Harald +should return from the south; but King Magnus would take his own +way, and went north to Bergen. There he sat all winter (A.D. +1135), and allowed his men to leave him; on which the lendermen +returned home to their own houses. + + +ENDNOTES: +(1) These brotherhoods, by which one man was bound by oath to + aid or avenge another, were common in the Middle Ages among + all ranks. "Sworn brothers" is still a common expression + with us. -- L. + + + +4. DEATH OF ASBJORN AND OF NEREID. + +King Harald came to Konungahella with the men who had followed +him from Denmark. The lendermen and town's burgesses collected a +force against him, which they drew up in a thick array above the +town. King Harald landed from his ships, and sent a message to +the bondes, desiring that they would not deny him his land, as he +wanted no more than what of right belonged to him. Then +mediators went between them; and it came to this, that the bondes +dismissed their troops, and submitted to him. Thereupon he +bestowed fiefs and property on the lendermen, that they might +stand by him, and paid the bondes who joined him the lawful +mulcts for what they had lost. A great body of men attached +themselves, therefore, to King Harald; and he proceeded westwards +to Viken, where he gave peace to all men, except to King Magnus's +people, whom he plundered and killed wherever he found them. And +when he came west to Sarpsborg he took prisoners two of King +Magnus s lendermen, Asbjorn and his brother Nereid; and gave them +the choice that one should be hanged, and the other thrown into +the Sarpsborg waterfall, and they might choose as they pleased. +Asbjorn chose to be thrown into the cataract, for he was the +elder of the two, and this death appeared the most dreadful; and +so it was done. Halder Skvaldre tells of this: -- + + "Asbjorn, who opposed the king, + O'er the wild cataract they fling: + Nereid, who opposed the king, + Must on Hagbard's high tree swing. + The king given food in many a way + To foul-mouthed beasts and birds of prey: + The generous men who dare oppose + Are treated as the worst of foes." + +Thereafter King Harald proceeded north to Tunsberg, where he was +well received, and a large force gathered to him. + + + +5. OF THE COUNSELS PROPOSED. + +When King Magnus, who was in Bergen, heard these tidings, he +called together all the chiefs who were in the town, and asked +them their counsel, and what they should now do. Then Sigurd +Sigurdson said, "Here I can give a good advice. Let a ship be +manned with good men, and put me, or any other lenderman, to +command it; send it to thy relation, King Harald, and offer him +peace according to the conditions upright men may determine upon, +and offer him the half of the kingdom. It appears to me probable +that King Harald, by the words and counsel of good men, may +accept this offer, and thus there may be a peace established +between you." + +Then King Magnus replied, "This proposal I will not accept of; +for of what advantage would it be, after we have gained the whole +kingdom in summer to give away the half of it now? Give us some +other counsel." + +Then Sigurd Sigurdson answered, "It appears to me, sire, that +your lendermen who in autumn asked your leave to return home will +now sit at home and will not come to you. At that time it was +much against my advice that you dispersed so entirely the people +we had collected; for I could well suppose that Harald would come +back to Viken as soon as he heard that it was without a chief. +Now there is still another counsel, and it is but a poor one; but +it may turn out useful to us. Send out your pursuivants, and +send other people with them, and let them go against the +lendermen who will not join you in your necessity, and kill them; +and bestow their property on others who will give you help +although they may have been of small importance before. Let them +drive together the people, the bad as well as the good; and go +with the men you can thus assemble against King Harald, and give +him battle." + +The king replies, "It would be unpopular to put to death people +of distinction, and raise up inferior people who often break +faith and law, and the country would be still worse off. I would +like to hear some other counsel still." + +Sigurd replies, "It is difficult for me now to give advice, as +you will neither make peace nor give battle. Let us go north to +Throndhjem, where the main strength of the country is most +inclined to our side; and on the way let us gather all the men we +can. It may be that these Elfgrims will be tired of such a long +stride after us." + +The king replies, "We must not fly from those whom we beat in +summer. Give some better counsel still." + +Then Sigurd stood up and said, while he was preparing to go out, +"I will now give you the counsel which I see you will take, and +which must have its course. Sit here in Bergen until Harald +comes with his troops, and then you will either suffer death or +disgrace." + +And Sigurd remained no longer at that meeting. + + + +6. OF HARALD'S FORCE. + +King Harald came from the East along the coast with a great army, +and this winter (A.D. 1135) is called on that account the +Crowd-winter. King Harald came to Bergen on Christmas eve, and +landed with his fleet at Floruvagar; but would not fight on +account of the sacred time. But King Magnus prepared for defence +in the town. He erected a stone-slinging machine out on the +holm, and had iron chains and wooden booms laid across over the +passage from the king's house to Nordnes, and to the Monks +bridge. He had foot-traps made, and thrown into Saint John's +field, and did not suspend these works except during the three +sacred days of Christmas. The last holyday of Yule, King Harald +ordered his war-horns to sound the gathering of his men for going +to the town; and, during the Yule holydays, his army had been +increased by about 900 men. + + + +7. KING MAGNUS TAKEN PRISONER. + +King Harald made a promise to King Olaf the Saint for victory, +that he would build an Olaf's church in the town at his own +expense. King Magnus drew up his men in the Christ church yard; +but King Harald laid his vessels first at Nordnes. Now when King +Magnus and his people saw that, they turned round towards the +town, and to the end of the shore; but as they passed through the +streets many of the burgesses ran into their houses and homes, +and those who went across the fields fell into the foot-traps. +Then King Magnus and his men perceived that King Harald had rowed +with all his men across to Hegravik, and landed there, and had +gone from thence the upper road up the hill opposite the town. +Now Magnus returned back again through the streets, and then his +men fled from him in all directions; some up to the mountains, +some up to the neighbourhood of the convent of nuns, some to +churches, or hid themselves as they best could. King Magnus fled +to his ship; but there was no possibility of getting away, for +the iron chains outside prevented the passage of vessels. He had +also but few men with him, and therefore could do nothing. Einar +Skulason tells of this in the song of Harald: -- + + "For a whole week an iron chain + Cut off all sailing to the main: + Bergen's blue stable was locked fast, -- + Her floating wains could not get past." + +Soon after Harald's people came out to the ships, and then King +Magnus was made prisoner. He was sitting behind in the +forecastle upon the chests of the high-seat, and at his side +Hakon Fauk, his mother's brother, who was very popular but was +not considered very wise, and Ivar Assurson. They, and many +others of King Magnus's friends, were taken, and some of them +killed on the spot. + + + +8. KING MAGNUS MUTILATED. + +Thereafter King Harald had a meeting of his counsellors, and +desired their counsel; and in this meeting the judgment was given +that Magnus should be deposed from his dominions, and should no +longer be called king. Then he was delivered to the king's +slaves, who mutilated him, picked out both his eyes, cut off one +foot, and at last castrated him. Ivar Assurson was blinded, and +Hakon Fauk killed. The whole country then was reduced to +obedience under King Harald. Afterwards it was diligently +examined who were King Magnus's best friends, or who knew most of +his concealments of treasure or valuables. The holy cross King +Magnus had kept beside him since the battle of Fyrileif, but +would not tell where it was deposited for preservation. Bishop +Reinald of Stavanger, who was an Englishman, was considered very +greedy of money. He was a great friend of King Magnus, and it +was thought likely that great treasure and valuables had been +given into his keeping. Men were sent for him accordingly, and +he came to Bergen, where it was insisted against him that he had +some knowledge of such treasure; but he denied it altogether, +would not admit it, and offered to clear himself by ordeal. King +Harald would not have this, but laid on the bishop a money fine +of fifteen marks of gold, which he should pay to the king. The +bishop declared he would not thus impoverish his bishop's see, +but would rather offer his life. On this they hanged the bishop +out on the holm, beside the sling machine. As he was going to +the gallows he threw the sock from his foot, and said with an +oath, "I know no more about King Magnus's treasure than what is +in this sock;" and in it there was a gold ring. Bishop Reinald +was buried at Nordnes in Michael's church, and this deed was much +blamed. After this Harald Gille was sole king of Norway as long +as he lived. + + + +9. WONDERFUL OMENS IN KONUNGAHELLA. + +Five years after King Sigurd's death remarkable occurrences took +place in Konungahella (A.D. 1135). Guthorm, a son of Harald +Fletter, and Saemund Husfreyja, were at that time the king's +officers there. Saemund was married to Ingebjorg, a daughter of +the priest Andres Brunson. Their sons were Paul Flip and Gunne +Fis. Saemund's natural son was called Asmund. Andres Brunson +was a very remarkable man, who carried on divine service in the +Cross church. His wife (1) was called Solveig. Jon Loptson, who +was then eleven years old, was in their house to be fostered and +educated. The priest Lopt Saemundson, Jon's father, was also in +the town at that time. The priest Andres and Solveig had a +daughter by name Helga, who was Einar's wife. It happened now in +Konungahella, the next Sunday night after Easter week, that there +was a great noise in the streets through the whole town as if the +king was going through with all his court-men. The dogs were so +affected that nobody could hold them, but they slipped loose; and +when they came out they ran mad, biting all that came in their +way, people and cattle. All who were bitten by them till the +blood came turned raging mad; and pregnant women were taken in +labour prematurely, and became mad. From Easter to +Ascension-day, these portentous circumstances took place almost +every night. People were dreadfully alarmed at these wonders; +and many made themselves ready to remove, sold their houses, and +went out to the country districts, or to other towns. The most +intelligent men looked upon it as something extremely remarkable; +were in dread of it; and said, as it proved to be, that it was an +omen of important events which had not yet taken place. And the +priest Andres, on Whit Sunday, made a long and excellent speech, +and turned the conclusion of it to the distressing situation of +the townspeople; telling them to muster courage, and not lay +waste their excellent town by deserting it, but rather to take +the utmost care in all things, and use the greatest foresight +against all dangers, as of fire or the enemy, and to pray to God +to have mercy on them. + + +ENDNOTES: +(1) The Catholic priests appear to have had wives at that time + in Norway, and celibacy to have been confined to the monks. + -- L. + + + +10. THE RISE OF WAR IN KONUNGAHELLA. + +Thirteen loaded merchant ships made ready to leave the town, +intending to proceed to Bergen; but eleven of them were lost, men +and goods, and all that was in them; the twelfth was lost also, +but the people were saved, although the cargo went to the bottom. +At that time the priest Lopt went north to Bergen, with all that +belonged to him, and arrived safely. The merchant vessels were +lost on Saint Lawrence eve (August 10). The Danish king Eirik +and the Archbishop Assur, both sent notice to Konungahella to +keep watch on their town; and said the Vindland people had a +great force on foot with which they made war far around on +Christian people, and usually gained the victory. But the +townspeople attended very little to this warning, were +indifferent, and forgot more and more the dreadful omens the +longer it was since they happened. On the holy Saint Lawrence +day, while the words of high mass were spoken, came to the +Vindland king Rettibur to Konungahella with 550 Vindland cutters, +and in each cutter were forty-four men and two horses. The +king's sister's son Dunimiz, and Unibur, a chief who ruled over +many people, were with him. These two chiefs rowed at once, with +a part of their troops, up the east arm of the Gaut river past +Hising Isle, and thus came down to the town; but a part of the +fleet lay in the western arm, and came so to the town. They made +fast their ships at the piles, and landed their horses, and rode +over the height of Bratsas, and from thence up around the town. +Einar, a relation of priest Andres, brought these tidings up to +the Castle church; for there the whole inhabitants of the town +were gathered to hear high mass. Einar came just as the priest +Andres was holding his discourse; and he told the people that an +army was sailing up against the town with a great number of ships +of war, and that some people were riding over Bratsas. Many said +it must be the Danish king Eirik, and from him they might expect +peace. The people ran down into the town to their properties, +armed themselves, and went down upon the piers, whence they +immediately saw there was an enemy and an immense army. Nine +East-country trading vessels belonging to the merchants were +afloat in the river at the piers. The Vindland people first +directed their course toward these and fought with the merchants, +who armed themselves, and defended themselves long, well, and +manfully. There was a hard battle, and resistance, before the +merchant vessels were cleared of their men; and in this conflict +the Vindland people lost 150 of their ships, with all the men on +board. When the battle was sharpest the townsmen stood upon the +piers, and shot at the heathens. But when the fight slackened +the burgesses fled up to the town, and from thence into the +castle; and the men took with them all their valuable articles, +and such goods as they could carry. Solveig and her daughters, +with two other women, went on shore when the Vindlanders took +possession of the merchant vessels. Now the Vindlanders landed, +and mustered their men, and discovered their loss. Some of them +went up into the town, some on board the merchant ships, and took +all the goods they pleased; and then they set fire to the town, +and burnt it and the ships. They hastened then with all their +army to assault the castle. + + + +11. THE SECOND BATTLE. + +King Rettibur made an offer to those who were in the castle that +they should go out, and he would give them their lives, weapons, +clothes, silver, and gold; but all exclaimed against it, and went +out on the fortification; some shot, some threw stones, some +sharp stakes. It was a great battle, in which many fell on both +sides, but by far the most of the Vindlanders. Solveig came up +to a large farm called Solbjorg, and brought the news. A message +war-token was there split, and sent out to Skurbagar, where there +happened to be a joint ale-drinking feast, and many men were +assembled. A bonde called Olver Miklimun (Mickle Mouth) was +there, who immediately sprang up, took helmet and shield, and a +great axe in his hand, and said, "Stand up, brave lads, and take +your weapons. Let us go help the townspeople; for it would +appear shameful to every man who heard of it, if we sit here +sipping our ale, while good men in the town are losing their +lives by our neglect." + +Many made an objection, and said they would only be losing their +own lives, without being of any assistance to the townspeople. + +Then said Olver, "Although all of you should hold back, I will go +alone; and one or two heathens, at any rate, shall fall before I +fall." + +He ran down to the town, and a few men after him to see what he +would do, and also whether they could assist him in any way. +When he came near the castle, and the heathens saw him, they sent +out eight men fully armed against him; and when they met, the +heathen men ran and surrounded him on all sides. Olver lifted +his axe, and struck behind him with the extreme point of it, +hitting the neck of the man who was coming up behind him, so that +his throat and jawbone were cut through, and he fell dead +backwards. Then he heaved his axe forwards, and struck the next +man in the head, and clove him down to the shoulders. He then +fought with the others, and killed two of them; but was much +wounded himself. The four who remained took to flight, but Olver +ran after them. There was a ditch before them, and two of the +heathens jumped into it, and Olver killed them both; but he stuck +fast himself in the ditch, so that two of the eight heathens +escaped. The men who had followed Olver took him up, and brought +him back to Skurbagar, where his wounds were bound and healed; +and it was the talk of the people, that no single man had ever +made such a bloody onset. Two lendermen, Sigurd Gyrdson, a +brother of Philip, and Sigard, came with 600 men to Skurbagar; on +which Sigurd turned back with 400 men. He was but little +respected afterwards, and soon died. Sigard, on the other hand, +proceeded with 200 men towards the town; and they gave battle to +the heathens, and were all slain. While the Vindlanders were +storming the castle, their king and his chiefs were out of the +battle. At one place there was a man among the Vindlanders +shooting with a bow, and killing a man for every arrow; and two +men stood before him, and covered him with their shields. Then +Saemund Husfreyja said to his son Asmund, that they should both +shoot together at this bowman. "But I will shoot at the man who +holds the shield before him." He did so, and he knocked the +shield down a little before the man; and in the same instant +Asmund shot between the shields, and the arrow hit the bowman in +the forehead, so that it came out at his neck, and he fell down +dead. When the Vindlanders saw it they howled like dogs, or like +wolves. Then King Rettibur called to them that he would give +them safety and life, but they refused terms. The heathens again +made a hard assault. One of the heathens in particular fought so +bravely, and ventured so near, that he came quite up to the +castle-gate, and pierced the man who stood outside the gate with +his sword; and although they used both arrows and stones against +him, and he had neither shield nor helmet, nothing could touch +him, for he was so skilled in witchcraft that weapon could not +wound him. Then priest Andres took consecrated fire; blew upon +it; cut tinder in pieces, and laid it on the fire; and then laid +the tinder on the arrow-point, and gave it to Asmund. He shot +this arrow at the warlock; and the shaft hit so well that it did +its business, and the man of witchcraft fell dead. Then the +heathens crowded together as before, howling and whining +dreadfully; and all gathered about their king, on which the +Christians believed that they were holding a council about +retreating. The interpreters, who understood the Vindland +tongue, heard the chief Unibur make the following speech: "These +people are brave, and it is difficult to make anything of them; +and even if we took all the goods in their town, we might +willingly give as much more that we had never come here, so great +has been our loss of men and chiefs. Early in the day, when we +began to assault the castle, they defended themselves first with +arrows and spears; then they fought against us with stones; and +now with sticks and staves, as against dogs. I see from this +that they are in want of weapons and means of defense; so we +shall make one more hard assault, and try their strength." It +was as he said, that they now fought with stakes; because, in the +first assault, they had imprudently used up all their missile +weapons and stones; and now when the Christians saw the number of +their stakes diminishing, they clave each stake in two. The +heathens now made a very hot attack, and rested themselves +between whiles, and on both sides they were exhausted. During a +rest the Vindland king Rettibur again offered terms, and that +they should retain the weapons, clothes, and silver they could +carry out of the castle. Saemund Husfreyja had fallen, and the +men who remained gave the counsel to deliver up the castle and +themselves into the power of the heathens; but it was a foolish +counsel; for the heathens did not keep their promises, but took +all people, men, women, and children, and killed all of them who +were wounded or young, or could not easily be carried with them. +They took all the goods that were in the castle; went into the +Cross church, and plundered it of all its ornaments. The priest +Andres gave King Rettibur a silver-mounted gilt sceptre, and to +his sister's son Dunimiz he gave a gold ring. They supposed from +this that he was a man of great importance in the town, and held +him in higher respect than the others. They took away with them +the holy cross, and also the tables which stood before the altar, +which Sigurd had got made in the Greek country, and had brought +home himself. These they took, and laid flat down on the steps +before the altar. Then the heathens went out of the church. +Rettibur said, "This house has been adorned with great zeal for +the God to whom it is dedicated; but, methinks, He has shown +little regard for the town or house: so I see their God has been +angry at those who defended them." King Rettibur gave the priest +Andres the church, the shrine, the holy cross, the Bible, the +altar-book, and four clerks (prisoners); but the heathens burnt +the Castle church, and all the houses that were in the castle. +As the fire they had set to the church went out twice, they hewed +the church down, and then it burnt like other houses. Then the +heathens went to their ships with the booty; but when they +mustered their people and saw their loss, they made prisoners of +all the people, and divided them among the vessels. Now priest +Andres went on board the king's ship with the holy cross, and +there came a great terror over the heathens on account of the +portentous circumstance which took place in the king's ship; +namely, it became so hot that all thought they were to be burnt +up. The king ordered the interpreter to ask the priest why this +happened. He replied, that the Almighty God on whom the +Christians believed, sent them a proof of His anger, that they +who would not believe in their Creator presumed to lay hands on +the emblem of His suffering; and that there lay so much power in +the cross, that such, and even clearer miracles, happened to +heathen men who had taken the cross in their hands. The king had +the priest put into the ship's boat, and the priest Andres +carried the holy cross in his grasp. They led the boat along +past the ship's bow, and then along the side of the next ship, +and then shoved it with a boat-hook in beside the pier. Then +Andres went with the cross by night to Solbjorg, in rain and +dreadful weather; but brought it in good preservation. King +Rettibur, and the men he had remaining, went home to Vindland, +and many of the people who were taken at Konungahella were long +afterwards in slavery in Vindland; and those who were ransomed +and came back to Norway to their udal lands and properties, +throve worse than before their capture. The merchant town of +Konungahella has never since risen to the importance it was of +before this event. + + + +12. OF MAGNUS THE BLIND. + +King Magnus, after he was deprived of sight, went north to +Nidaros, where he went into the cloister on the holm, and assumed +the monk's dress. The cloister received the farm of Great Hernes +in Frosta for his support. King Harald alone ruled the country +the following winter, gave all men peace and pardon who desired +it, and took many of the men into his court-service who had been +with King Magnus. Einar Skulason says that King Harald had two +battles in Denmark; the one at Hvedn Isle, and the other at +Hlesey Isle: -- + + "Unwearied champion! who wast bred + To stain thy blue-edged weapons red! + Beneath high Hvedn's rocky shore, + The faithless felt thy steel once more." + +And again, thus: -- + + "On Hlesey's plain the foe must quail + 'Fore him who dyes their shirts of mail. + His storm-stretched banner o'er his head + Flies straight, and fills the foe with dread." + + + +13. OF KING HARALD GILLE AND BISHOP MAGNUS. + +King Harald Gille was a very generous man. It is told that in +his time Magnus Einarson came from Iceland to be consecrated a +bishop, and the king received him well, and showed him much +respect. When the bishop was ready to sail for Iceland again, +and the ship was rigged out for sea, he went to the hall where +the king was drinking, saluted him politely and warmly, and the +king received him joyfully. The queen was sitting beside the +king. + +Then said the king, "Are you ready, bishop, for your voyage?" + +He replied that he was. + +The king said, "You come to us just now at a bad time; for the +tables are just removed, and there is nothing at hand suitable to +present to you. What is there to give the bishop?" + +The treasurer replies, "Sire, as far as I know, all articles of +any value are given away." + +The king: "Here is a drinking goblet remaining; take this, +bishop; it is not without value." + +The bishop expressed his thanks for the honour shown him. + +Then said the queen, "Farewell, bishop! and a happy voyage." + +The king said to her, "When did you ever hear a noble lady say so +to a bishop without giving him something?" + +She replies, "Sire, what have I to give him?" + +The king: "Thou hast the cushion under thee." + +Thereupon this, which was covered with costly cloth, and was a +valuable article, was given to the bishop. When the bishop was +going away the king took the cushion from under himself and gave +it him, saying, "They have long been together." When the bishop +arrived in Iceland to his bishop's see, it was talked over what +should be done with the goblet that would be serviceable for the +king; and when the bishop asked the opinion of other people, many +thought it should be sold, and the value-bestowed on the poor. +Then said the bishop, "I will take another plan. I will have a +chalice made of it for this church, and consecrate it, so that +all the saints of whom there are relics in this church shall let +the king have some good for his gift every time a mass is sung +over it." This chalice has since belonged to the bishopric of +Skalholt; and of the costly cloth with which the cushions given +him by the king were covered, were made the choristers' cloaks +which are now in Skalholt. From this the generous spirit of King +Harald may be seen, as well as from many other things, of which +but a few are set down here. + + + +14. BEGINNING OF SIGURD SLEMBIDJAKN. + +There was a man, by name Sigurd, who was brought up in Norway, +and was called priest Adalbrikt's son. Sigurd's mother was +Thora, a daughter of Saxe of Vik, a sister of Sigrid, who was +mother of King Olaf Magnuson, and of Kare, the king's brother who +married Borghild, a daughter of Dag Eilifson. Their sons were +Sigurd of Austrat and Dag. Sigurd of Austrat's sons were Jon of +Austrat, Thorstein, and Andres the Deaf. Jon was married to +Sigrid, a sister of King Inge and of Duke Skule. This Sigurd, in +his childhood, was kept at his book, became a clerk, and was +consecrated a deacon; but as he ripened in years and strength he +became a very clever man, stout, strong, distinguished for all +perfections and exercises beyond any of his years, -- indeed, +beyond any man in Norway. Sigurd showed early traces of a +haughty ungovernable spirit, and was therefore called +Slembidjakn. He was as handsome a man as could be seen, with +rather thin but beautiful hair. When it came to Sigurd's ears +that his mother said King Magnus was his father, he laid aside +all clerkship; and as soon as he was old enough to be his own +master, he left the country. He was a long time on his travels, +went to Palestine; was at the Jordan river; and visited many holy +places, as pilgrims usually do. When he came back, he applied +himself to trading expeditions. One winter he was in Orkney with +Earl Harald, and was with him when Thorkel Fostre Summarlidason +was killed. Sigurd was also in Scotland with the Scottish king +David, and was held in great esteem by him. Thereafter Sigurd +went to Denmark; and according to the account of himself and his +men, he there submitted to the iron ordeal to confirm his +paternal descent, and proved by it, in the presence of five +bishops, that he was a son of King Magnus Barefoot. So says Ivar +Ingemundson, in Sigurd's song: -- + + "The holiest five + Of men alive, -- + Bishops were they, -- + Solemnly say, + The iron glowing + Red hot, yet showing + No scaith on skin, + Proves cause and kin." + +King Harald Gille's friends, however, said this was only a lie, +and deceit of the Danes. + + + +15. SIGURD IN ICELAND. + +It is told before of Sigurd that he passed some years in merchant +voyages, and he came thus to Iceland one winter, and took up his +lodging with Thorgils Odson in Saurby; but very few knew where he +was. In autumn, when the sheep were being driven into a fold to +be slaughtered, a sheep that was to be caught ran to Sigurd; and +as Sigurd thought the sheep ran to him for protection, he +stretched out his hands to it and lifted it over the fold dyke, +and let it run to the hills, saying, "There are not many who seek +help from me, so I may well help this one." It happened the same +winter that a woman had committed a theft, and Thorgils, who was +angry at her for it, was going to punish her; but she ran to +Sigurd to ask his help, and he set her upon the bench by his +side. Thorgils told him to give her up, and told him what she +had committed; but Sigurd begged forgiveness for her since she +had come to him for protection, and that Thorgils would dismiss +the complaint against her, but Thorgils insisted that she should +receive her punishment. When Sigurd saw that Thorgils would not +listen to his entreaty, he started up, drew his sword, and bade +him take her if he dared; and Thorgils seeing that Sigurd would +defend the woman by force of arms, and observing his commanding +mien, guessed who he must be, desisted from pursuing the woman, +and pardoned her. There were many foreign men there, and Sigurd +made the least appearance among them. One day Sigurd came into +the sitting-room, and a Northman who was splendidly clothed was +playing chess with one of Thorads house-servants. The Northman +called Sigurd, and asked him his advice how to play; but when +Sigurd looked at the board, he saw the game was lost. The man +who was playing against the Northman had a sore foot, so that one +toe was bruised, and matter was coming out of it. Sigurd, who +was sitting on the bench, takes a straw, and draws it along the +floor, so that some young kittens ran after it. He drew the +straw always before them, until they came near the house- +servant's foot, who jumping up with a scream, threw the chessmen +in disorder on the board; and thus it was a dispute how the game +had stood. This is given as a proof of Sigurd's cunning. People +did not know that he was a learned clerk until the Saturday +before Easter, when he consecrated the holy water with chant; and +the longer he stayed there the more he was esteemed. The summer +after, Sigurd told Thorgils before they parted, that he might +with all confidence address his friends to Sigurd Slembidjakn. +Thorgils asked how nearly he was related to him, on which he +replies, "I am Sigurd Slembidjakn, a son of King Magnus +Barefoot." He then left Iceland. + + + +16. OF SIGURD SLEMBE. + +When Harald Gille had been six years (A.D. 1136), king of Norway, +Sigurd came to the country and went to his brother King Harald, +and found him in Bergen. He placed himself entirely in the +king's hands, disclosed who his father was, and asked him to +acknowledge their relationship. The king gave him no hasty or +distinct reply; but laid the matter before his friends in a +conference at a specially appointed meeting. After this +conference it became known that the king laid an accusation +against Sigurd, because he had been at the killing of Thorkel +Fostre in the West. Thorkel had accompanied Harald to Norway +when he first came to the country, and had been one of Harald's +best friends. This case was followed up so severely, that a +capital accusation against Sigurd was made, and, by the advice of +the lendermen, was carried so far, that some of the king's +pursuivants went one evening late to Sigurd, and called him to +them. They then took a boat and rowed away with Sigurd from the +town south to Nordnes. Sigurd sat on a chest in the stern of the +boat, and had his suspicions that foul play was intended. He was +clothed in blue trousers, and over his shirt he had a hood tied +with ribands, which served him for a cloak. He sat looking down, +and holding his hood-strings; and sometimes moved them over his +head, sometimes let them fall again before him. Now when they +had passed the ness, they were drunk, and merry, were rowing so +eagerly that they were not taking notice of anything. Sigurd +stood up, and went on the boat's deck; but the two men who were +placed to guard him stood up also, and followed him to the side +of the vessel, holding by his cloak, as is the custom in guarding +people of distinction. As he was afraid that they would catch +hold of more of his clothes, he seized them both, and leaped +overboard with them. The boat, in the meantime, had gone on a +long way, and it was a long time before those on board could turn +the vessel, and long before they could get their own men taken on +board again; and Sigurd dived under water, and swam so far away +that he reached the land before they could get the boat turned to +pursue him. Sigurd, who was very swift of foot, hied up to the +mountains, and the king's men travelled about the whole night +seeking him without finding him. He lay down in a cleft of the +rocks; and as he was very cold he took off his trousers, cut a +hole in the seat of them, and stuck his head through it, and put +his arms in the legs of them. He escaped with life this time; +and the king's men returned, and could not conceal their +unsuccessful adventure. + + + +17. TREACHERY TOWARDS KING HARALD. + +Sigurd thought now that it would be of no use to seek any help +from King Harald again; and he kept himself concealed all the +autumn and the beginning of the winter. He lay hid in Bergen, in +the house of a priest. King Harald was also in the town, and +many great people with him. Now Sigurd considered how, with his +friends' help, he might take the king by surprise, and make an +end of him. Many men took part in this design; and among them +some who were King Harald's court-men and chamberlains, but who +had formerly been King Magnus's court-men. They stood in great +favour with the king, and some of them sat constantly at the +king's table. On Saint Lucia's day (December 13), in the evening +when they proposed to execute this treason, two men sat at the +king's table talking together; and one of them said to the king, +"Sire, we two table-companions submit our dispute to your +judgment, having made a wager of a basket of honey to him who +guesses right. I say that you will sleep this night with your +Queen Ingerid; and he says that you will sleep with Thora, +Guthorm's daughter." + +The king answered laughing, and without suspecting in the least +that there lay treachery under the question, that he who had +asked had lost his bet. + +They knew thus where he was to be found that night; but the main +guard was without the house in which most people thought the king +would sleep, viz., that which the queen was in. + + + +18. MURDER OF KING HARALD. + +Sigurd Slembe, and some men who were in his design, came in the +night to the lodging in which King Harald was sleeping; killed +the watchman first; then broke open the door, and went in with +drawn swords. Ivar Kolbeinson made the first attack on King +Harald; and as the king had been drunk when he went to bed he +slept sound, and awoke only when the men were striking at him. +Then he said in his sleep, "Thou art treating me hardly, Thora." +She sprang up, saying, "They are treating thee hardly who love +thee less than I do." Harald was deprived of life. Then Sigurd +went out with his helpers, and ordered the men to be called to +him who had promised him their support if he should get King +Harald taken out of the way. Sigurd and his men then went on, +and took a boat, set themselves to the oars, and rowed out in +front of the king's house; and then it was just beginning to be +daylight. Then Sigurd stood up, spoke to those who were standing +on the king's pier, made known to them the murder of King Harald +by his hand, and desired that they would take him, and choose him +as chief according to his birth. Now came many swarming down to +the pier from the king's house; and all with one voice replied, +that they would never give obedience or service to a man who had +murdered his own brother. "And if thou are not his brother, thou +hast no claim from descent to be king." They clashed their +weapons together, and adjudged all murderers to be banished and +outlawed men. Now the king's horn sounded, and all lendermen and +courtmen were called together. Sigurd and his companions saw it +was best for them to get way; and he went northward to North +Hordaland, where he held a Thing with the bondes, who submitted +to him, and gave him the title of king. From thence he went to +Sogn, and held a Thing there with the bondes and was proclaimed +king. Then he went north across the fjords, and most people +supported his cause. So says Ivar Ingemundson: -- + + "On Harald's fall + The bondes all, + In Hord and Sogn, + Took Magnus' son. + The Things swore too + They would be true + To this new head + In Harald's stead." + +King Harald was buried in the old Christ church. + + + +SAGA OF SIGURD, INGE, AND EYSTEIN, THE SONS OF HARALD + + +PRELIMINARY REMARKS. + +Sigurd died A.D. 1155, Eystein 1157, and Inge 1161. + +Other literature is "Morkinskinna" and "Fagrskinna." + +Sigurd Slembe is the subject of a drama by Bjornstjerne Bjornson, +translated into English by William Morton Payne, and published by +Houghton, Mifflin & Co., Boston, 1888. + +Skalds quoted are: Kolle, Einar Skulason, and Thorbjorn +Skakkaskald. + + + +1. HISTORY OF KINGS SIGURD AND INGE. + +Queen Ingerid, and with her the lendermen and the court which had +been with King Harald, resolved to send a fast-sailing vessel to +Throndhjem to make known King Harald's death, and also to desire +the Throndhjem people to take King Harald's son Sigurd for king. +He was then in the north, and was fostered by Sadagyrd Bardson. +Queen Ingerid herself proceeded eastward immediately to Viken. +Inge was the name of her son by King Harald, and he was then +fostered by Amunde Gyrdson, a grandson of Logberse. When they +came to Viken a Borgar-thing was immediately called together, at +which Inge, who was in the second year of his age, was chosen +king. This resolution was supported by Amunde and Thjostolf +Alason, together with many other great chiefs. Now when the +tidings came north to Throndhjem that King Harald was murdered, +the Throndhjem people took Sigurd, King Harald's son, to be the +king; and this resolution was supported by Ottar Birting, Peter +Saudaulfson, the brothers Guthorm of Reine, and Ottar Balle, sons +of Asolf and many other great chiefs. Afterwards the whole +nation almost submitted to the brothers, and principally because +their father was considered holy; and the country took the oath +to them, that the kingly power should not go to any other man as +long as any of King Harald's sons were alive. + + + +2. OF SIGURD SLEMBIDJAKN. + +Sigurd Slembe sailed north around Stad; and when he came to North +More, he found that letters and full powers had arrived before +him from the leaders who had given in their allegiance to +Harald's sons; so that there he got no welcome or help. As +Sigurd himself had but few people with him, he resolved to go +with them to Throndhjem, and seek out Magnus the Blind; for he +had already sent a message before him to Magnus's friends. Now +when they came to the town, they rowed up the river Nid to meet +King Magnus, and fastened their land-ropes on the shore at the +king's house; but were obliged to set off immediately, for all +the people rose against them. They then landed at Monkholm, and +took Magnus the Blind out of the cloister against the will of the +monks; for he had been consecrated a monk. It is said by some +that Magnus willingly went with them; although it was differently +reported, in order to make his cause appear better. Sigurd, +immediately after Yule (January, A.D. 1137), went forth with his +suite, expecting aid from his relations and Magnus's friends, and +which they also got. Sigurd sailed with his men out of the +fjord, and was joined afterwards by Bjorn Egilson, Gunnar of +Gimsar, Haldor Sigurdson, Aslak Hakonson, the brothers Bendikt +and Eirik, and also the court which had before been with King +Magnus, and many others. With this troop they went south to +More, and down to the mouth of Raumsdal fjord. Here Sigurd and +Magnus divided their forces, and Sigurd went immediately +westwards across the sea. King Magnus again proceeded to the +Uplands, where he expected much help and strength, and which he +obtained. He remained there the winter and all the summer (A.D. +1137), and had many people with him; but King Inge proceeded +against him with all his forces, and they met at a place called +Mynne. There was a great battle, at which King Magnus had the +most people. It is related that Thjostolf Alason carried King +Inge in his belt as long as the battle lasted, and stood under +the banner; but Thjostolf was hard pressed by fatigue and +fighting; and it is commonly said that King Inge got his ill +health there, and which he retained as long as he lived, so that +his back was knotted into a hump, and the one foot was shorter +than the other; and he was besides so infirm that he could +scarcely walk as long as he lived. The defeat began to turn upon +Magnus and his men; and in the front rank of his array fell +Haldor Sigurdson, Bjorn Egilson, Gunnar of Gimsar, and a great +number of his men, before he himself would take to his horse and +fly. So says Kolle: -- + + "Thy arrow-storm on Mynne's banks + Fast thinn'd the foemen's strongest ranks; + Thy good sword hewed the raven's feast + On Mynne's banks up in the East. + Shield clashed on shield, and bucklers broke + Under thy battle-axe's stroke; + While thou, uncovered, urged the fray, + Thy shield and mail-coat thrown away." + +And also this: -- + + "The king to heaven belonging fled, + When thou, in war's quick death-game bred, + Unpanzered, shieldless on the plain + His heavy steel-clad guards hadst slain. + The painted shield, and steel-plate mail, + Before thy fierce attack soon fail, + To Magnus who belongs to heaven, + + Was no such fame in battle given." + +Magnus fled eastward to Gautland, and then to Denmark. At that +time there was in Gautland an earl, Karl Sonason, who was a great +and ambitious man. Magnus the Blind and his men said, wherever +they happened to meet with chiefs, that Norway lay quite open to +any great chieftain who would attack it; for it might well be +said there was no king in the country, and the kingdom was only +ruled by lendermen, and, among those who had most sway, there +was, from mutual jealousy, most discord. Now Karl, being +ambitious of power, listens willingly to such speeches; collects +men, and rides west to Viken, where many people, out of fear, +submit to him. When Thjostolf Alason and Amunde heard of this, +they went with the men they could get together, and took King +Inge with them. They met Earl Karl and the Gautland army +eastward in Krokaskog, where there was a great battle and a great +defeat, King Inge gaining the victory. Munan Ogmundson, Earl +Karl's mother's brother, fell there. Ogmund, the father of +Munan, was a son of Earl Orm Eilifson, and Sigrid, a daughter of +Earl Fin Arnason. Astrid, Ogrnund's daughter, was the mother of +Earl Karl. Many others of the Gautland people fell at Krokaskog; +and the earl fled eastward through the forest. King Inge pursued +them all the way out of the kingdom; and this expedition turned +out a great disgrace to them. So says Kolle: -- + + "I must proclaim how our great lord + Coloured deep red his ice-cold sword; + And ravens played with Gautland bones, + And wolves heard Gautlanders' last groans. + Their silly jests were well repaid, -- + In Krokaskog their laugh was laid: + Thy battle power was then well tried, + And they who won may now deride." + + + +3. KING EIRIK'S EXPEDITION TO NORWAY. + +Magnus the Blind then went to Denmark to King Eirik Eimune, where +he was well received. He offered the king to follow him if he +would invade Norway with a Danish army, and subdue the country; +saying, that if he came to Norway with his army, no man in Norway +would venture to throw a spear against him. The king allowed +himself to be moved by Magnus's persuasions, ordered a levy, and +went north to Norway with 200 ships; and Magnus and his men were +with him on this expedition. When they came to Viken, they +proceeded peacefully and gently on the east side of the fjord; +but when the fleet came westward to Tunsberg, a great number of +King Inge's lendermen came against them. Their leader was +Vatnorm Dagson, a brother of Gregorius. The Danes could not land +to get water without many of them being killed; and therefore +they went in through the fjord to Oslo, where Thjostolf Alason +opposed them. It is told that some people wanted to carry the +holy Halvard's coffin out of the town in the evening when the +fleet was first observed, and as many as could took hold of it; +but the coffin became so heavy that they could not carry it over +the church floor. The morning after, however, when they saw the +fleet sailing in past the Hofud Isle, four men carried the coffin +out of the town, and Thjostolf and all the townspeople followed +it. + + + +4. THE TOWN OF OSLO BURNT. + +King Eirik and his army advanced against the town; and some of +his men hastened after Thjostolf and his troop. Thjostolf threw +a spear at a man named Askel, which hit him under the throat, so +that the spear point went through his neck; and Thjostolf thought +he had never made a better spear-cast, for, except the place he +hit, there was nothing bare to be seen. The shrine of St. +Halvard, was taken up to Raumarike, where it remained for three +months. Thjostolf went up to Raumarike, and collected men during +the night, with whom he returned towards the town in the morning. +In the meantime King Eirik set fire to Halvard's church, and to +the town, which was entirely burnt. Thjostolf came soon after to +the town with the men he had assembled, and Eirik sailed off with +his fleet; but could not land anywhere on that side of the fjord, +on account of the troops of the lendermen who came down against +them; and wherever they attempted a landing, they left five or +six men or more upon the strand. King Inge lay with a great +number of people into Hornborusund, but when he learned this, he +turned about southwards to Denmark again. King Inge pursued him, +and took from him all the ships he could get hold of; and it was +a common observation among people, that never was so poor an +expedition made with so great an armament in another king's +dominions. King Eirik was ill pleased at it, and thought King +Magnus and his men had been making a fool of him by encouraging +him to undertake this expedition, and he declared he would never +again besuch friends with them as before. + + + +5. OF SIGURD SLEMBIDJAKN. + +Sigurd Slembidjakn came that summer from the West sea to Norway, +where he heard of his relation King Magnus's unlucky expedition; +so he expected no welcome in Norway, but sailed south, outside +the rocks, past the land, and set over to Denmark, and went into +the Sound. He fell in with some Vindland cutters south of the +islands, gave them battle, and gained the victory. He cleared +eight ships, killing many of the men, and he hanged the others. + +He also had a battle off the Island Mon with the Vindland men, +and gained a victory. He then sailed from the south and came to +the eastern arm of the Gaut river, and took three ships of the +fleet of Thorer Hvinantorde, and Olaf, the son of Harald Kesia, +who was Sigurd's own sister's son; for Ragnhild, the mother of +Olaf, was a daughter of King Magnus Barefoot. He drove Olaf up +the country. + +Thjostolf was at this time in Konungahella, and had collected +people to defend the country, and Sigurd steered thither with his +fleet. They shot at each other, but he could not effect a +landing; and, on both sides, many were killed and many wounded. +Ulfhedin Saxolfson, Sigurd's forecastle man, fell there. He was +an Icelander, from the north quarter. Sigurd continued his +course northwards to Viken and plundered far and wide around. +Now when Sigurd lay in a harbour called Portyrja on Limgard's +coast, and watched the ships going to or coming from Viken to +plunder them, the Tunsberg men collected an armed force against +him, and came unexpectedly upon them while Sigurd and his men +were on shore dividing their booty. Some of the men came down +from the land, but some of the other party laid themselves with +their ships right across the harbour outside of them. Sigurd ran +up into his ship, and rowed out against them. Vatnorm's ship was +the nearest, and he let his ship fall behind the line, and Sigurd +rowed clear past, and thus escaped with one ship and the loss of +many men. This verse was made upon Vatnorm (1): -- + + "The water serpent, people say, + From Portyrja slipped away." + + +ENDNOTES: +(1) Vatnorm, the name of this man, means the water-serpent, and + appears to have been a favourite name for war-ships also; + hence the pun in the lines upon Vatnorm. -- L. + + + +6. THE MURDER OF BEINTEIN. + +Sigurd Slembidjakn sailed from thence to Denmark; and at that +time a man was lost in his ship, whose name was Kolbein +Thorliotson of Batald. He was sitting in a boat which was made +fast to the vessel, and upset because she was sailing quickly. +When they came south to Denmark, Sigurd's ship itself was cast +away; but he got to Alaborg, and was there in winter. The summer +after (A.D. 1138) Magnus and Sigurd sailed together from the +south with seven ships, and came unexpectedly in the night to +Lister, where they laid their ships on the land. Beintein +Kolbeinson, a court-man of King Inge, and a very brave man, was +there. Sigurd and his men jumped on shore at daylight, came +unexpectedly on the people, surrounded the house, and were +setting fire to the buildings; but Beintein came out of a store- +house with his weapons, well armed, and stood within the door +with drawn sword, his shield before him, helmet on, and ready to +defend himself. The door was somewhat low. Sigurd asked which +of his lads had most desire to go in against Beintein, which he +called brave man's work; but none was very hurried to make ready +for it. While they were discussing this matter Sigurd rushed +into the house, past Beintein. Beintein struck at him, but +missed him. Sigurd turned instantly on Beintein; and after +exchanging blows, Sigurd gave him his death-stroke, and came out +presently bearing his head in his hands. + +They took all the goods that were in the farm-house, carried the +booty to their ships, and sailed away. When King Inge and his +friends, and also Kolbein's sons, Sigurd and Gyrd, the brothers +of Beintein, heard of Beintein's murder, the king sent a great +force against Sigurd Slembe and his followers; and also travelled +himself, and took a ship from Hakon Paulson Pungelta, who was a +daughter's son of Aslak, a son of Erling Skjalgson of Sole, and +cousin of Hakon Mage. King Inge drove Hakon and his followers up +the country, and took all their gear. Sigurd Stork, a son of +Eindride of Gautdal, and his brother, Eirik Hael, and Andres +Kelduskit, son of Grim of Vist, all fled away into the fjords. +But Sigurd Slembe, Magnus the Blind and Thorieif Skiappa sailed +outside the isles with three ships north to Halogaland; and +Magnus was in winter (A.D. 1139) north in Bjarkey Isle with +Vidkun Jonson. But Sigurd had the stem and stern-post of his +ship cut out, made a hole in her, and sank her in the inner part +of Egisfjord, and thereafter he passed the winter at Tialdasund +by Gljufrafjord in Hin. Far up the fjord there is a cave in the +rock; in that place Sigurd sat with his followers, who were above +twenty men, secretly, and hung a grey cloth before the mouth of +the hole, so that no person could see them from the strand. +Thorleif Skiappa, and Einar, son of Ogmund of Sand, and of +Gudrun, daughter of Einar Arason of Reikiaholar, procured food +for Sigurd during the winter. It is said that Sigurd made the +Laplanders construct two boats for him during the winter up in +the fjord; and they were fastened together with deer sinews, +without nails, and with twigs of willow instead of knees, and +each boat could carry twelve men. Sigurd was with the Laplanders +while they were making the boats; and the Laplanders had good +ale, with which they entertained Sigurd. Sigurd made these lines +on it: -- + + "In the Lapland tent + Brave days we spent. + Under the grey birch tree; + In bed or on bank + We knew no rank, + And a merry crew were we. + + "Good ale went round + As we sat on the ground, + Under the grey birch tree; + And up with the smoke + Flew laugh and joke, + And a merry crew were we." + +These boats were so light that no ship could overtake them in the +water, according to what was sung at the time: -- + + "Our skin-sewed Fin-boats lightly swim, + Over the sea like wind they skim. + Our ships are built without a nail; + Few ships like ours can row or sail." + +In spring Sigurd and Magnus went south along the coast with the +two boats which the Laplanders had made; and when they came to +Vagar they killed Svein the priest and his two sons. + + + +7. OF SIGURD'S SLEMBE'S CAMPAIGN. + +Thereafter Sigurd came south to Vikar, and seized King Sigurd's +lendermen, William Skinnare and Thorald Kept, and killed them +both. Then Sigurd turned south-wards along the coast, and met +Styrkar Glaesirofa south of Byrda, as he was coming from the +south from the town of Nidaros, and killed him. Now when Sigurd +came south to Valsnes, he met Svinagrim outside of the ness, and +cut off his right hand. From thence he went south to More, past +the mouth of the Throndhjem fjord, where they took Hedin Hirdmage +and Kalf Kringluauge. They let Hedin escape, but killed Kalf. +When King Sigurd, and his foster-father, Sadagyrd, heard of +Sigurd Slembidjakn's proceedings, and what he was doing, they +sent people to search for him; and their leader was Jon Kauda, a +son of Kalf Range. Bishop Ivar's brother, and besides the priest +Jon Smyril. They went on board the ship the Reindeer, which had +twenty-two rowing benches, and was one of the swiftest sailing +vessels, to seek Sigurd; but as they could not find him, they +returned north-wards with little glory; for people said that they +had got sight of Sigurd and his people, and durst not attack +them. Afterwards Sigurd proceeded southwards to Hordaland, and +came to Herdla, where Einar, a son of Laxapaul, had a farm; and +went into Hamar's fjord, to the Gangdaga-thing. They took all +the goods that were at the farm, and a long-ship of twenty-two +benches which belonged to Einar; and also his son, four years +old, who was living with one of his labouring people. Some +wanted to kill the boy, but others took him and carried him with +them. The labouring man said, "It will not be lucky for you to +kill the child; and it will be of no use to you to carry him +away, for it is my son, and not Einar's." And on his word they +let the boy remain, and went away. When Einar came home he gave +the labourer money to the value of two ore of gold, and thanked +him for his clever invention, and promised him his constant +friendship. So says Eirik Odson, who first wrote down this +relation; and he heard himself Einar Paulson telling these +circumstances in Bergen. Sigurd then went southward along the +coast all the way east to Viken, and met Fin Saudaulfson east at +Kvildar, as he was engaged in drawing in King Inge's rents and +duties, and hanged him. Then they sailed south to Denmark. + + + +8. OF KING INGE'S LETTER TO KING SIGURD. + +The people of Viken and of Bergen complained that it was wrong +for King Sigurd and his friends to be sitting quietly north in +the town of Nidaros, while his father's murderer was cruising +about in the ordinary passage at the mouth of the Throndhjem +fjord; and King Inge and his people, on the other hand, were in +Viken in the midst of the danger, defending the country and +holding many battles. Then King Inge sent a letter north to the +merchant-town Nidaros, in which were these words: "King Inge +Haraldson sends his brother King Sigurd, as also Sadagyrd, Ogmund +Svipte, Ottar Birting, and all lendermen, court-men, house- +people, and all the public, rich and poor, young and old, his own +and God's salutation. The misfortune is known to all men that on +account of our childhoods -- thou being five, and I but three +years of age -- we can undertake nothing without the counsel of +our friends and other good men. Now I and my men think that we +stand nearer to the danger and necessity common to us both, than +thou and thy friends; therefore make it so that thou, as soon as +possible, come to me, and as strong in troops as possible, that +we may be assembled to meet whatever may come. He will be our +best friend who does all he can that we may be united, and may +take an equal part in all things. But if thou refuse, and wilt +not come after this message which I send thee in need, as thou +hast done before, then thou must expect that I will come against +thee with an armament; and let God decide between us; for we are +not in a condition to sit here at so great an expense, and with +so numerous a body of troops as are necessary here on account of +the enemy, and besides many other pressing charges, whilst thou +hast half of all the land-tax and other revenues of Norway. Live +in the peace of God!" + + + +9. OTTAR BIRTING'S SPEECH. + +Then Ottar Birting stood up in the Thing, and first of all +answered thus: "This is King Sigurd's reply to his brother King +Inge -- that God will reward him for his good salutation, and +likewise for the trouble and burden which he and his friends have +in this kingdom, and in matters of necessity which effect them +both. Although now some think there is something sharp in King +Inge's message to his brother Sigurd, yet he has in many respects +sufficient cause for it. Now I will make known to you my +opinion, and we will hear if King Sigurd and the other people of +power will agree to it; and it is, that thou, King Sigurd, make +thyself ready, with all the people who will follow thee, to +defend thy country; and go as strong in men as possible to thy +brother King Inge as soon as thou art prepared, in order to +assist each other in all things that are for the common good; and +may God Almighty strengthen and assist you both! Now, king, we +will have thy words." + +Peter, a son of Saudaulf, who was afterwards called Peter +Byrdarsvein, bore King Sigurd to the Thing. Then the king said, +"Ye must know that, if I am to advise, I will go as soon as +possible to my brother King Inge." Then others spoke, one after +the other; but although each began his speech in his own way, he +ended with agreeing to what Ottar Birting had proposed; and it +was determined to call together the war-forces, and go to the +east part of the country. King Sigurd accordingly went with +great armament east to Viken, and there he met his brother King +Inge. + + + +10. FALL OF MAGNUS THE BLIND. + +The same autumn (A.D. 1139) Sigurd Slembe and Magnus the Blind +came from Denmark with thirty ships, manned both with Danes and +Northmen. It was near to winter. When the kings heard of this, +they set out with their people eastwards to meet them. They met +at Hvalar, near Holm the Grey, the day after Martinmas, which was +a Sunday. King Inge and King Sigurd had twenty ships, which were +all large. There was a great battle; but, after the first +assault, the Danes fled home to Denmark with eighteen ships. On +this Sigurd's and Magnus's ships were cleared; and as the last +was almost entirely bare of men, and Magnus was lying in his bed, +Hreidar Griotgardson, who had long followed him, and been his +courtman, took King Magnus in his arms, and tried to run with him +on board some other ship. But Hreidar was struck by a spear, +which went between his shoulders; and people say King Magnus was +killed by the same spear. Hreidar fell backwards upon the deck, +and Magnus upon him; and every man spoke of how honourably he had +followed his master and rightful sovereign. Happy are they who +have such praise! There fell, on King Magnus's ship, Lodin +Saupprud of Linustadar, Bruse Thormodson; and the forecastle-men +to Sigurd Slembidjakn, Ivar Kolbeinson and Halyard Faeger, who +had been in Sigurd Slembe's fore-hold. This Ivar had been the +first who had gone in, in the night, to King Harald, and had laid +hands on him. There fell a great number of the men of King +Magnus and Sigurd Slembe, for Inge's men let not a single one +escape if they got hold of him; but only a few are named here. +They killed upon a holm more than forty men, among whom were two +Icelanders -- the priest Sigurd Bergthorson, a grandson of Mas; +the other Clemet, a son of Are Einarson. But three Icelanders +obtained their lives: namely, Ivar Skrauthanke, a son of Kalf +Range, and who afterwards was bishop of Throndhjem, and was +father of the archbishop Eirik. Ivar had always followed King +Magnus, and he escaped into his brother Jon Kauda's ship. Jon +was married to Cecilia, a daughter of Gyrd Bardson, and was then +in King Inge's and Sigurd's armament. There were three in all +who escaped on board of Jon's ship. The second was Arnbjorn +Ambe, who afterwards married Thorstein's daughter in Audsholt; +the third was Ivar Dynta, a son of Stare, but on the mother's +side of a Throndhjem family, -- a very agreeable man. When the +troops came to know that these three were on board his ship, they +took their weapons and assaulted the vessel, and some blows were +exchanged, and the whole fleet had nearly come to a fight among +themselves; but it came to an agreement, so that Jon ransomed his +brothers Ivar and Arnbjorn for a fixed sum in ransom, which, +however, was afterwards remitted. But Ivar Dynta was taken to +the shore, and beheaded; for Sigurd and Gyrd, the sons of +Kolbein, would not take any mulct for him, as they knew he had +been at their brother Beintein's murder. Ivar the bishop said, +that never was there anything that touched him so nearly, as +Ivar's going to the shore under the axe, and turning to the +others with the wish that they might meet in joy here-after. +Gudrid Birger's daughter, a sister of Archbishop Jon, told Eirik +Odson that she heard Bishop Ivar say this. + + + +11. SIGURD SLEMBE TAKEN PRISONER. + +A man called Thrand Gialdkere was the steersman of King Inge's +ship. It was come so far, that Inge's men were rowing in small +boats between the ships after those who were swimming in the +water, and killed those they could get hold of. Sigurd Slembe +threw himself overboard after his ship had lost her crew, +stripped off his armour under the water, and then swam with his +shield over him. Some men from Thrand's vessel took prisoner a +man who was swimming, and were about to kill him; but he begged +his life, and offered to tell them where Sigurd Slembe was, and +they agreed to it. Shields and spears, dead men, weapons, and +clothes, were floating all around on the sea about the ships, "Ye +can see," said he, "a red shield floating on the water; he is +under it." They rowed to it immediately, took him, and brought +him on board of Thrand's ship. Thrand then sent a message to +Thjostolf, Ottar, and Amunde. Sigurd Slembe had a tinder box on +him; and the tinder was in a walnut-shell, around which there was +wax. This is related, because it seems an ingenious way of +preserving it from ever getting wet. He swam with a shield over +him, because nobody could know one shield from another where so +many were floating about; and they would never have hit upon him, +if they had not been told where he was. When Thrand came to the +land with Sigurd, and it was told to the troops that he was +taken, the army set up a shout of joy. When Sigurd heard it he +said, "Many a bad man will rejoice over my head this day." Then +Thjostolf Alason went to where Sigurd was sitting, struck from +his head a silk hat with silver fringes, and said. "Why wert thou +so impudent, thou son of a slave! to dare to call thyself King +Magnus Barefoot's son?" + +Sigurd replied, "Presume not to compare my father to a slave; for +thy father was of little worth compared to mine." + +Hal, a son of the doctor Thorgeir Steinson, King Inge's court- +man, was present at this circumstance, and told it to Eirik +Odson, who afterwards wrote these relations in a book, which he +called "Hryggjarstykke". In this book is told all concerning +Harald Gille and his sons, and Magnus the Blind, and Sigurd +Slembidjakn, until their deaths. Eirik was a sensible man, who +was long in Norway about that time. Some of his narratives he +wrote down from Hakon Mage's account; some were from lendermen of +Harald's sons, who along with his sons were in all this feud, and +in all the councils. Eirik names, moreover, several men of +understanding and veracity, who told him these accounts, and were +so near that they saw or heard all that happened. Something he +wrote from what he himself had heard or seen. + + + +12. TORTURE OF SIGURD SLEMBE. + +Hal says that the chiefs wished to have Sigurd killed instantly; +but the men who were the most cruel, and thought they had +injuries to avenge, advised torturing him; and for this they +named Beintein's brothers, Sigurd and Gyrd, the sons of Kolbein. +Peter Byrdarsvein would also avenge his brother Fin. But the +chiefs and the greater part of the people went away. They broke +his shin-bones and arms with an axe-hammer. Then they stripped +him, and would flay him alive; but when they tried to take off +the skin, they could not do it for the gush of blood. They took +leather whips and flogged him so long, that the skin was as much +taken off as if he had been flayed. Then they stuck a piece of +wood in his back until it broke, dragged him to a tree and hanged +him; and then cut off his head, and brought the body and head to +a heap of stones and buried them there. All acknowledge, both +enemies and friends, that no man in Norway, within memory of the +living, was more gifted with all perfections, or more +experienced, than Sigurd, but in some respects he was an unlucky +man. Hal says that he spoke little, and answered only a few, and +in single words, under his tortures, although they spoke to him. +Hal says further, that he never moved when they tortured him, +more than if they were striking a stock or a stone. This Hal +alleged as proof that he was a brave hero, who had courage to +endure tortures; for he still held his tongue, and never moved +from the spot. And farther he says, that he never altered his +voice in the least, but spoke with as much ease as if he was +sitting at the ale-table; neither speaking higher nor lower, nor +in a more tremulous voice than he was used to do. He spoke until +he gave up the ghost, and sang between whiles parts of the Psalm- +book, and which Hal considered beyond the powers and strength of +ordinary men. And the priest who had the church in the +neighbourhood let Sigurd's body be transported thither to the +church. This priest was a friend of Harald's sons: but when they +heard it they were angry at him, had the body carried back to +where it had been, and made the priest pay a fine. Sigurd's +friends afterwards came from Denmark with a ship for his body, +carried it to Alaborg, and interred it in Mary church in that +town. So said Dean Ketil, who officiated as priest at Mary +church, to Eirik; and that Sigurd was buried there. Thjostolf +Alason transported Magnus the Blind's body to Oslo, and buried it +in Halvard's church, beside King Sigurd his father. Lodin +Saupprud was transported to Tunsberg; but the others of the slain +were buried on the spot. + + + +13. EYSTEIN HARALDSON COMES TO NORWAY. + +When the kings Sigurd and Inge had ruled over Norway about six +years, Eystein, who was a son of Harald Gille, came in spring +from Scotland (A.D. 1142). Arne Sturla, Thorleif Brynjolfson, +and Kolbein Hruga had sailed westward over the sea after Eystein, +accompanied him to Norway, and sailed immediately with him to +Throndhjem. The Throndhjem people received him well; and at the +Eyra-thing of Ascension-day he was chosen king, so that he should +have the third part of Norway with his brothers Sigurd and Inge. +They were at this time in the east part of the country; and men +went between the kings who brought about a peace, and that +Eystein should have a third part of the kingdom. People believed +what he said of his paternal descent, because King Harald himself +had testified to it, and he did not resort to the ordeal of iron. +King Eystein's mother was called Bjadok, and she followed him to +Norway. Magnus was the name of King Harald Gille's fourth son, +who was fostered by Kyrpingaorm. He also was chosen king, and +got a fourth part of the country; but Magnus was deformed in his +feet, lived but a short time, and died in his bed. Einar +Skulason speaks of them: -- + + "The generous Eystein money gave; + Sigurd in fight was quick and brave; + Inge loved well the war-alarm; + Magnus to save his land from harm. + No country boasts a nobler race + The battle-field, or Thing, to grace. + Four brothers of such high pretence + The sun ne'er shone upon at once." + + + +14. MURDER OF OTTAR BIRTING. + +After King Harald Gille's death Queen Ingerid married Ottar +Birting, who was a lendermen and a great chief, and of a +Throndhjem family, who strengthened King Inge's government much +while he was in his childhood. King Sigurd was not very friendly +to Ottar; because, as he thought, Ottar always took King Inge's +side. Ottar Birting was killed north in the merchant town +(Nidaros), in an assault upon him in the twilight as he was going +to the evening song. When he heard the whistling of the blow he +held up his cloak with his hands against it; thinking, no doubt, +it was a snowball thrown at him, as young boys do in the streets. +Ottar fell by the stroke; but his son, Alf Hrode, who just at the +same moment was coming into the churchyard, saw his father's +fall, and saw that the man who had killed him ran east about the +church. Alf ran after him, and killed him at the corner of the +choir; and people said that he had good luck in avenging his +father, and afterwards was much more respected than he had been +before. + + + +15. BEGINNING OF KING EYSTEIN. + +King Eystein Haraldson was in the interior of the Throndhjem +district when he heard of Ottar's murder, and summoned to him the +bonde-army, with which he proceeded to the town; and he had many +men. Ottar's relations and other friends accused King Sigurd, +who was in the town, of having instigated this deed; and the +bondes were much enraged against him. But the king offered to +clear himself by the ordeal of iron, and thereby to establish the +truth of his denial; and accordingly a peace was made. King +Sigurd went to the south end of the country, and the ordeal was +never afterwards heard of. + + + +16. BEGINNING OF ORM THE KING-BROTHER. + +Queen Ingerid had a son to Ivar Sneis, and he was called Orm, and +got the surname of King-brother. He was a handsome man in +appearance, and became a great chief, as shall be told hereafter. +Ingerid afterwards married Arne of Stodreim, who was from this +called King's-mate; and their children were Inge, Nikolas, Philip +of Herdla, and Margaret, who was first married to Bjorn Buk, and +afterwards to Simon Karason. + + + +17. JOURNEY OF ERLING SKAKKE AND EARL RAGNVALD. + +Kyrpingaorm and Ragnhild, a daughter of Sveinke Steinarson, had a +son called Erling. Kyrpingaorm was a son of Svein Sveinson, who +was a son of Erling of Gerd. Otto's mother was Ragna, a daughter +of Earl Orm Eilifson and Sigrid, a daughter of Earl Fin Arnason. +The mother of Earl Orm was Ragnhild, a daughter of Earl Hakon the +Great. Erling was a man of understanding, and a great friend of +King Inge, by whose assistance and counsel Erling obtained in +marriage Christina, a daughter of King Sigurd the Crusader and +Queen Malmfrid. Erling possessed a farm at Studla in South +Hordaland. Erling left the country; and with him went Eindride +Unge and several lendermen, who had chosen men with them. They +intended to make a pilgrimage to Jerusalem, and went across the +West sea to Orkney. There Earl Ragnvald and Bishop William +joined them; and they had in all fifteen ships from Orkney, with +which they first sailed to the South Hebrides, from thence west +to Valland, and then the same way King Sigurd the Crusader had +sailed to Norvasund; and they plundered all around in the heathen +part of Spain. Soon after they had sailed through the Norvasund, +Eindride Unge and his followers, with six ships, separated from +them; and then each was for himself. Earl Ragnvald and Erling +Skakke fell in with a large ship of burden at sea called a +dromund, and gave battle to it with nine ships. At last they +laid their cutters close under the dromund; but the heathens +threw both weapons and stones, and pots full of pitch and boiling +oil. Erling laid his ship so close under the dromund, that the +missiles of the heathens fell without his ship. Then Erling and +his men cut a hole in the dromund, some working below and some +above the water-mark; and so they boarded the vessel through it. +So says Thorbjorn Skakkaskald, in his poem on Erling: -- + + "The axes of the Northmen bold + A door into the huge ships' hold + Hewed through her high and curved side, + As snug beneath her bulge they ride. + Their spears bring down the astonished foe, + Who cannot see from whence the blow. + The eagle's prey, they, man by man, + Fall by the Northmen's daring plan." + +Audunraude, Erling's forecastle-man, was the first man who got +into the dromund. Then they carried her, killing an immense +number of people; making an extraordinarily valuable booty, and +gaining a famous victory. Earl Ragnvald and Erling Skakke came +to Palestine in the course of their expedition, and all the way +to the river Jordan. From thence they went first to +Constantinople, where they left their ships, travelled northwards +by land, and arrived in safety in Norway, where their journey was +highly praised. Erling Skakke appeared now a much greater man +than before, both on account of his journey and of his marriage; +besides he was a prudent sensible man, rich, of great family, +eloquent, and devoted to King Inge by the strictest friendship +more than to the other royal brothers. + + + +18. BIRTH OF HAKON HERDEBREID. + +King Sigurd went to a feast east in Viken along with his court, +and rode past a house belonging to a great bonde called Simon. +While the king was riding past the house, he heard within such +beautiful singing that he was quite enchanted with it, and rode +up to the house, and saw a lovely girl standing at the handmill +and grinding. The king got off his horse, and went to the girl +and courted her. When the king went away, the bonde Simon came +to know what the object of the king's visit had been. The girl +was called Thora, and she was Simon the bonde's servant-girl. +Simon took good care of her afterwards, and the girl brought +forth a male child (A.D. 1047), who was called Hakon, and was +considered King Sigurd's son. Hakon was brought up by Simon +Thorbergson and his wife Gunhild. Their own sons also, Onund and +Andreas, were brought up with Hakon, and were so dear to him that +death only could have parted them. + + + +19. EYSTEIN AND THE PEASANTS OF HISING ISLE. + +While King Eystein Haraldson was in Viken, he fell into disputes +with the bondes of Reine and the inhabitants of Hising Isle, who +assembled to oppose him; but he gave them battle at a place +called Leikberg, and afterwards burnt and destroyed all around in +Hising; so that the bondes submitted to his will, paid great +fines to the king, and he took hostages from them. So says Einar +Skulason: -- + + "The Viken men + Won't strive again, + With words or blows, + The king to oppose. + None safety found + On Viken's ground, + Till all, afraid, + Pledge and scat paid." + +And further: -- + + "The king came near; + He who is dear + To all good men + Came down the glen, + By Leikberg hill. + They who do ill, + The Reine folk, fly + Or quarter cry." + + + +20. WAR EXPEDITION OF KING HARALDSON. + +Soon after King Eystein began his journey out of the country over +sea to the West (A.D. 1153), and sailed first to Caithness. Here +he heard that Earl Harald Maddad's son was in Thursa, to which he +sailed directly in three small boats. The earl had a ship of +thirty banks of oars, and nearly eighty men in her. But they +were not prepared to make resistance, so that King Eystein was +able to board the ship with his men; and he took the earl +prisoner, and carried him to his own ship, but the earl ransomed +himself with three marks of gold: and thus they parted. Einar +Skulason tells of it thus: -- + + "Earl Harald in his stout ship lay + On the bright sand in Thursa bay; + With fourscore men he had no fear, + Nor thought the Norse king was so near, + He who provides the eagle's meals + In three small boats along-shore steals; + And Maddad's son must ransom pay + For his bad outlook that fair day." + +From thence King Eystein sailed south along the east side of +Scotland, and brought up at a merchant-town in Scotland called +Aberdeen, where he killed many people, and plundered the town. +So says Einar Skulason: -- + + "At Aberdeen, too, I am told, + Fell many by our Norsemen bold; + Peace was disturbed, and blue swords broke + With many a hard and bloody stroke." + +The next battle was at Hartlepool in the south, with a party of +horsemen. The king put them to flight, and seized some ships +there. So says Einar: -- + + "At Hartlepool, in rank and row, + The king's court-men attack the foe. + The king's sharp sword in blood was red, + Blood dropped from every Norse spear-head. + Ravens rejoice o'er the warm food + Of English slain, each where he stood; + And in the ships their thirst was quenched: + The decks were in the foe's blood drenched." + +Then he went southwards to England, and had his third battle at +Whitby, and gained the victory, and burnt the town. So says +Einar: -- + + "The ring of swords, the clash of shields, + Were loud in Whitby's peaceful fields; + For here the king stirred up the strife. -- + Man against man, for death or life. + O'er roof and tower, rose on high + The red wrath-fire in the sky; + House after house the red fiend burns; + By blackened walls the poor man mourns." + +Thereafter he plundered wide around in England, where Stephen was +then the king. After this King Eystein fought with some cavalry +at Skarpasker. So says Einar: -- + + "At Skarpasker the English horse + Retire before the Norse king's force: + The arrow-shower like snow-drift flew, + And the shield-covered foemen slew." + +He fought next at Pilavik, and gained the victory. So says +Einar: -- + + "At Pilavik the wild wolf feeds, + Well furnished by the king's brave deeds + He poured upon the grass-green plain + A red shower from the Perthmen slain. + On westwards in the sea he urges, + With fire and sword the country purges: + Langtown he burns; the country rang, + For sword on shield incessant clang." + + +Here they burnt Langatun, a large village; and people say that +the town has never since risen to its former condition. After +this King Eystein left England in autumn, and returned to Norway. +People spoke in various ways about this expedition. + + + +21. OF HARALD'S SONS. + +There was good peace maintained in Norway in the first years of +the government of Harald's sons; and as long as their old +counsellors were alive, there was some kind of unanimity among +them. While Inge and Sigurd were in their childhood, they had a +court together; but Eystein, who was come to age of discretion, +had a court for himself. But when Inge's and Sigurd's +counsellors were dead, -- namely, Sadagyrd Bardson, Ottar +Birting, Amunde Gyrdson, Thjostolf Alason, Ogmund Svipter, and +Ogmund Denger, a brother of Erling Skakke (Erling was not much +looked up to while Ogmund lived), -- the two kings, Inge and +Sigurd divided their courts. King Inge then got great assistance +from Gregorius Dagson, a son of Dag Eilifson by Ragnhild a +daughter of Skapte Ogmundson. Gregorius had much property, and +was himself a thriving, sagacious man. He presided in the +governing the country under King Inge, and the king allowed him +to manage his property for him according to his own judgment. + + + +22. HABITS AND MANNERS OF HARALD'S SONS. + +When King Sigurd grew up he was a very ungovernable, restless man +in every way; and so was King Eystein, but Eystein was the more +reasonable of the two. King Sigurd was a stout and strong man, +of a brisk appearance; he had light brown hair, an ugly mouth; +but otherwise a well-shaped countenance. He was polite in his +conversation beyond any man, and was expert in all exercises. +Einar Skulason speaks of this: -- + + "Sigurd, expert in every way + To wield the sword in bloody fray, + Showed well that to the bold and brave + God always luck and victory gave. + In speech, as well as bloody deeds, + The king all other men exceeds; + And when he speaks we think that none + Has said a word but he alone." + +King Eystein was dark and dingy in complexion, of middle height, +and a prudent able man; but what deprived him of consideration +and popularity with those under him were his avarice and +narrowness. He was married to Ragna, a daughter of Nicolas Mase. +King Inge was the handsomest among them in countenance. He had +yellow but rather thin hair, which was much curled. His stature +was small; and he had difficulty in walking alone, because he had +one foot withered, and he had a hump both on his back and his +breast. He was of cheerful conversation, and friendly towards +his friends; was generous, and allowed other chiefs to give him +counsel in governing the country. He was popular, therefore, +with the public; and all this brought the kingdom and the mass of +the people on his side. King Harald Gille's daughter Brigida was +first married to the Swedish king Inge Halsteinson, and +afterwards to Earl Karl Sonason, and then to the Swedish king +Magnus. She and King Inge Haraldson were cousins by the mother's +side. At last Brigida married Earl Birger Brose, and they had +four sons, namely, Earl Philip, Earl Knut, Folke, and Magnus. +Their daughters were Ingegerd, who was married to the Swedish +king Sorkver, and their son was King Jon; a second daughter was +called Kristin, and a third Margaret. Harald Gille's second +daughter was called Maria, who was married to Simon Skalp, a son +of Halkel Huk; and their son was called Nikolas. King Harald +Gille's third daughter was called Margaret, who was married to +Jon Halkelson, a brother of Simon. Now many things occurred +between the brothers which occasioned differences and disputes; +but I will only relate what appears to me to have produced the +more important events. + + + +23. CARDINAL NIKOLAS COMES TO THE COUNTRY. + +In the days of Harald's sons Cardinal Nikolas came from Rome to +Norway, being sent there by the pope. The cardinal had taken +offence at the brothers Sigurd and Eystein, and they were obliged +to come to a reconciliation with him; but, on the other hand, he +stood on the most affectionate terms with King Inge, whom he +called his son. Now when they were all reconciled with him, he +moved them to let Jon Birgerson be consecrated archbishop of +Throndhjem and gave him a vestment which is called a pallium; and +settled moreover that the archbishop's seat should be in Nidaros, +in Christ church, where King Olaf the Saint reposes. Before that +time there had only been common bishops in Norway. The cardinal +introduced also the law, that no man should go unpunished who +appeared with arms in the merchant-town, excepting the twelve men +who were in attendancce on the king. He improved many of the +customs of the Northmen while he was in the country. There never +came a foreigner to Norway whom all men respected so highly, or +who could govern the people so well as he did. After some time +he returned to the South with many friendly presents, and +declared ever afterwards that he was the greatest friend of the +people of Norway. When he came south to Rome the former pope +died suddenly, and all the people of Rome would have Cardinal +Nikolas for pope, and he was consecrated under the name of +Adrian; and according to the report of men who went to Rome in +his days, he had never any business, however important, to settle +with other people, but he would break it off to speak with the +Northmen who desired to see him. He was not long pope, and is +now considered a saint. + + + +24. MIRACLE OF KING OLAF. + +In the time of Harald Gille's sons, it happened that a man called +Haldor fell into the hands of the Vindland people, who took him +and mutilated him, cut open his neck, took out the tongue through +the opening, and cut out his tongue root. He afterwards sought +out the holy King Olaf, fixed his mind entirely on the holy man, +and weeping besought King Olaf to restore his speech and health. +Thereupon he immediately recovered his speech by the good king's +compassion, went immediately into his service for all his life, +and became an excellent trustworthy man. This miracle took place +a fortnight before the last Olafsmas, upon the day that Cardinal +Nikolas set foot on the land of Norway. + + + +25. MIRACLES OF KING OLAF ON RICHARD. + +In the Uplands were two brothers, men of great family, and men of +fortune, Einar and Andres, sons of Guthorm Grabard, and brothers +of King Sigurd Haraldson's mother; and they had great properties +and udal estates in that quarter. They had a sister who was very +handsome, but did not pay sufficient regard to the scandal of +evil persons, as it afterwards appeared. She was on a friendly +footing with an English priest called Richard, who had a welcome +to the house of her brothers, and on account of their friendship +for him she did many things to please him, and often to his +advantage; but the end of all this was, that an ugly report flew +about concerning this girl. When this came into the mouth of the +public all men threw the blame on the priest. Her brothers did +the same, and expressed publicly, as soon as they observed it, +that they laid the blame most on him. The great friendship that +was between the earl and the priest proved a great misfortune to +both, which might have been expected, as the brothers were silent +about their secret determination, and let nothing be observed. +But one day they called the priest to them, who went, expecting +nothing but good from them; enticed him from home with them, +saying that they intended to go to another district, where they +had some needful business, and inviting him to go with them. +They had with them a farm-servant who knew their purpose. They +went in a boat along the shore of a lake which is called Rands +lake, and landed at a ness called Skiptisand, where they went on +shore and amused themselves awhile. Then they went to a retired +place, and commanded their servant-man to strike the priest with +an axe-hammer. He struck the priest so hard that he swooned; but +when he recovered he said, "Why are ye playing so roughly with +me?" They replied, "Although nobody has told thee of it before, +thou shalt now find the consequence of what thou hast done." +They then upbraided him; but he denied their accusations, and +besought God and the holy King Olaf to judge between them. Then +they broke his leg-bones, and dragged him bound to the forest +with them; and then they put a string around his head, and put a +board under his head and shoulders, and made a knot on the +string, and bound his head fast to the board. Then the elder +brother, Einar, took a wedge, and put it on the priest's eye, and +the servant who stood beside him struck upon it with an axe, so +that the eye flew out, and fell upon the board. Then he set the +pin upon the other eye, and said to the servant, "Strike now more +softly." He did so, and the wedge sprang from the eye-stone, and +tore the eyelid loose. Then Einar took up the eyelid in his +hand, and saw that the eye-stone was still in its place; and he +set the wedge on the cheek, and when the servant struck it the +eye-stone sprang out upon the cheek-bone. Thereafter they opened +his mouth, took his tongue and cut it off, and then untied his +hands and his head. As soon as he came to himself, he thought of +laying the eye-stones in their place under the eyelids, and +pressing then with both hands as much as he could. Then they +carried him on board, and went to a farm called Saeheimrud, where +they landed. They sent up to the farm to say that a priest was +lying in the boat at the shore. While the message was going to +the farm, they asked the priest if he could talk; and he made a +noise and attempted to speak. Then said Einar to his brother, +"If he recover and the stump of his tongue grow, I am afraid he +will get his speech again." Thereupon they seized the stump with +a pair of tongs, drew it out, cut it twice, and the third time to +the very roots, and left him lying half dead. The housewife in +the farm was poor; but she hastened to the place with her +daughter, and they carried the priest home to their farm in their +cloaks. They then brought a priest, and when he arrived he bound +all his wounds; and they attended to his comfort as much as they +were able. And thus lay the wounded priest grievously handled, +but trusting always to God's grace, and never doubting; and +although he was speechless, he prayed to God in thought with a +sorrowful mind, but with the more confidence the worse he was. +He turned his thoughts also to the mild King Olaf the Saint, +God's dear favourite, of whose excellent deeds he had heard so +much told, and trusted so much more zealously on him with all his +heart for help in his necessity. As he lay there lame, and +deprived of all strength, he wept bitterly, moaned, and prayed +with a sore heart that the dear King Olaf would help him. Now +when this wounded priest was sleeping after midnight, he thought +he saw a gallant man coming to him, who spoke these words, "Thou +art ill off, friend Richard, and thy strength is little." He +thought he replied to this assentingly. Then the man accosted +him again, "Thou requirest compassion?" The priest replies, "I +need the compassion of Almighty God and the holy King Olaf." He +answered, "Thou shalt get it." Thereupon he pulled the tongue- +stump so hard that it gave the priest pain; then he stroked with +his hands his eyes, and legs, and other wounded members. Then +the priest asked who he was. He looked at him, and said, "Olaf, +come here from Throndhjem;" and then disappeared. But the priest +awoke altogether sound, and thus he spoke: "Happy am I, and +thanks be to the Almighty God and the holy King Olaf, who have +restored me!" Dreadfully mishandled as he had been, yet so +quickly was he restored from his misfortune that he scarcely +thought he had been wounded or sick. His tongue was entire; both +his eyes were in their places, and were clear-sighted; his broken +legs and every other wound were healed, or were free from pain; +and, in short, he had got perfect health. But as a proof that +his eyes had been punched out, there remained a white scar on +each eyelid, in order that this dear king's excellence might be +manifest on the man who had been so dreadfully misused. + + + +26. KING INGE AND SIGURD HOLD A THING. + +King Eystein and King Sigurd had quarrelled, because King Sigurd +had killed King Eystein's court-man Harald, the Viken man, who +owned a house in Bergen, and also the priest Jon Tapard, a son of +Bjarne Sigurdson. On account of this affair, a conference to +settle it was appointed in winter in the Uplands. The two sat +together in the conference for a long time, and so much was known +of their conference that all three brothers were to meet the +following summer in Bergen. It was added, that their conference +was to the effect that King Inge should have two or three farms, +and as much income as would keep thirty men beside him, as he had +not health to be a king. When King Inge and Gregorius heard this +report, they came to Bergen with many followers. King Sigurd +arrived there a little later, and was not nearly so strong in +men. Sigurd and Inge had then been nineteen years kings of +Norway (A.D. 1155). King Eystein came later still from the south +than the other two from the north. Then King Inge ordered the +Thing to be called together on the holm by the sound of trumpet; +and Sigurd and Inge came to it with a great many people. +Gregorius had two long-ships, and at the least ninety men, whom +he kept in provisions. He kept his house-men better than other +lendermen; for he never took part in any entertainment where each +guest brings his liquor, without having all his house-men to +drink with him. He went now to the Thing in a gold-mounted +helmet, and all his men had helmets on. Then King Inge stood up, +and told the assembly what he had heard; how his brothers were +going to use him, and depose him from his kingdom; and asked for +their assistance. The assembled people made a good return to his +speech, and declared they would follow him. + + + +27. OF GREGORIUS DAGSON. + +Then King Sigurd stood up and said it was a false accusation that +King Inge had made against him and his brother, and insisted that +Gregorius had invented it; and insinuated that it would not be +long, if he had his will, before they should meet so that the +golden helmet should be doffed; and ended his speech by hinting +that they could not both live. Gregorius replied, that Sigurd +need not long so much for this, as he was ready now, if it must +be so. A few days after, one of Gregorius's house-men was killed +out upon the street, and it was Sigurd's house-men who killed +him. Gregorius would then have fallen upon King Sigurd and his +people; but King Inge, and many others, kept him back. But one +evening, just as Queen Ingerid, King Inge's mother, was coming +from vespers, she came past where Sigurd Skrudhyrna, a courtman +of King Inge, lay murdered. He was then an old man, and had +served many kings. King Sigurd's courtmen, Halyard Gunnarson, +and Sigurd, a son of Eystein Trafale, had killed him; and people +suspected it was done by order of King Sigurd. She went +immediately to King Inge, and told him he would be a little king +if he took no concern, but allowed his court-men to be killed, +the one after the other, like swine. The king was angry at her +speech; and while they were scolding about it, came Gregorius in +helmet and armour, and told the king not to be angry, for she was +only saying the truth. "And I am now," says he, "come to thy +assistance, if thou wilt attack King Sigurd; and here we are, +above 100 men in helmets and armour, and with them we will attack +where others think the attack may be worst." But the most +dissuaded from this course, thinking that Sigurd would pay the +mulct for the slaughter done. Now when Gregorius saw that there +would be no assault, he accosted King Inge thus: "Thou wilt +frighten thy men from thee in this way; for first they lately +killed my house-man, and now thy court-man, and afterwards they +will chase me, or some other of thy lendermen whom thou wouldst +feel the loss of, when they see that thou art indifferent about +such things; and at last, after thy friends are killed, they will +take the royal dignity from thee. Whatever thy other lendermen +may do, I will not stay here longer to be slaughtered like an ox; +but Sigurd the king and I have a business to settle with each +other to-night, in whatever way it may turn out. It is true that +there is but little help in thee on account of thy ill health, +but I should think thy will should not be less to hold thy hand +over thy friends, and I am now quite ready to go from hence to +meet Sigurd, and my banner is flying in the yard." + +Then King Inge stood up, and called for his arms, and ordered +every man who wished to follow him to get ready, declaring it was +of no use to try to dissuade him; for he had long enough avoided +this, but now steel must determine between them. + + + +28. OF KING SIGURD'S FALL. + +King Sigurd sat and drank in Sigrid Saeta's house ready for +battle, although people thought it would not come to an assault +at all. Then came King Inge with his men down the road from the +smithy shops, against the house. Arne, the king's brother-in- +law, came out from the Sand-bridge, Aslak Erlendson from his own +house, and Gregorius from the street where all thought the +assault would be worst. King Sigurd and his men made many shots +from the holes in the loft, broke down the fireplaces, and threw +stones on them. Gregorius and his men cut down the gates of the +yard; and there in the port fell Einar, a son of Laxapaul, who +was of Sigurd's people, together with Halvard Gunnarson, who was +shot in a loft, and nobody lamented his death. They hewed down +the houses, and many of King Sigurd's men left him, and +surrendered for quarter. Then King Sigurd went up into a loft, +and desired to be heard. He had a gilt shield, by which they +knew him, but they would not listen to him, and shot arrows at +him as thick as snow in a snow-shower, so that he could not stay +there. As his men had now left him, and the houses were being +hewn down, he went out from thence, and with him his court-man +Thord Husfreyja from Viken. They wanted to come where King Inge +was to be found, and Sigurd called to his brother King Inge, and +begged him to grant him life and safety; but both Thord and +Sigurd were instantly killed, and Thord fell with great glory. +King Sigurd was interred in the old Christ church out on the +holm. King Inge gave Gregorius the ship King Sigurd had owned. +There fell many of King Sigurd's and King Inge's men, although I +only name a few; but of Gregorius's men there fell four; and also +some who belonged to no party, but were shot on the piers, or out +in the ships. It was fought on a Friday, and fourteen days +before Saint John the Baptist's day (June 10, 1155). Two or +three days after King Eystein came from the eastward with thirty +ships, and had along with him his brother's son Hakon, a son of +King Sigurd. Eystein did not come up to the town, but lay in +Floruvagar, and good men went between to get a reconciliation +made. But Gregorius wanted that they should go out against him, +thinking there never would be a better opportunity; and offered +to be himself the leader. "For thou, king, shalt not go, for we +have no want of men." But many dissuaded from this course, and +it came to nothing. King Eystein returned back to Viken, and +King Inge to Throndhjem, and they were in a sort reconciled; but +they did not meet each other. + + + +29. OF GREGORIUS DAGSON. + +Somewhat later than King Eystein, Gregorius Dagson also set out +to the eastward and came to his farm Bratsberg in Hofund; but +King Eystein was up in the fjord at Oslo, and had his ships drawn +above two miles over the frozen sea, for there was much ice at +that time in Viken. King Eystein went up to Hofund to take +Gregorius; but he got news of what was on foot, and escaped to +Thelemark with ninety men, from thence over the mountains, and +came down in Hardanger; and at last to Studla in Etne, to Erling +Skakke's farm. Erling himself had gone north to Bergen; but his +wife Kristin, a daughter of King Sigurd, was at home, and offered +Gregorius all the assistance he wanted; and he was hospitably +received. He got a long-ship there which belonged to Erling, and +everything else he required. Gregorius thanked her kindly, and +allowed that she had behaved nobly, and as might have been +expected of her. Gregorius then proceeded to Bergen, where he +met Erling, who thought also that his wife had done well. + + + +30. RECONCILIATION OF EYSTEIN AND INGE. + +Then Gregorius went north to Throndhjem, and came there before +Yule. King Inge was rejoiced at his safety, and told him to use +his property as freely as his own, King Eystein having burnt +Gregorius's house, and slaughtered his stock of cattle. The +ship-docks which King Eystein the Elder had constructed in the +merchant town of Nidaros, and which had been exceedingly +expensive, were also burnt this winter, together with some good +vessels belonging to King Inge. This deed was ascribed to King +Eystein and Philip Gyrdson, King Sigurd's foster-brother, and +occasioned much displeasure and hatred. The following summer +King Inge went south with a very numerous body of men; and King +Eystein came northwards, gathering men also. They met in the +east (A.D. 1156) at the Seleys, near to the Naze; but King Inge +was by far the strongest in men. It was nearly coming to a +battle; but at last they were reconciled on these conditions, +that King Eystein should be bound to pay forty-five marks of +gold, of which King Inge should have thirty marks, because King +Eystein had occasioned the burning of the docks and ships; and, +besides, that Philip, and all who had been accomplices in the +deed, should be outlawed. Also that the men should be banished +the country, against whom it could be proved that they gave blow +or wound to King Sigurd; for King Eystein accused King Inge of +protecting these men; and that Gregorius should have fifteen +marks of gold for the value of his property burnt by King +Eystein. King Eystein was ill pleased with these terms, and +looked upon the treaty as one forced upon him. From that meeting +King Inge went eastward to Viken, and King Eystein north to +Throndhjem; and they had no intercourse with each other, nor were +the messages which passed between them very friendly, and on both +sides they killed each other's friends. King Eystein, besides, +did not pay the money; and the one accused the other of not +fulfilling what was promised. King Inge and Gregorius enticed +many people from King Eystein; among others, Bard Standale +Brynjolfson, Simon Skalp, a son of Halkel Huk, Halder +Brynjolfson, Jon Halkelson, and many other lendermen. + + + +31. OF EYSTEIN AND INGE. + +Two years after King Sigurd's fall (A.D. 1157) both kings +assembled armaments; namely, King Inge in the east of the +country, where he collected eighty ships; and King Eystein in the +north, where he had forty-five, and among these the Great Dragon, +which King Eystein Magnuson had built after the Long Serpent; and +they had on both sides many and excellent troops. King Inge lay +with his ships south at Moster Isle, and King Eystein a little to +the north in Graeningasund. King Eystein sent the young Aslak +Jonson, and Arne Sturla, a son of Snaebjorn, with one ship to +meet King Inge; but when the king's men knew them, they assaulted +them, killed many of their people, and took all that was in the +ship belonging to them. Aslak and Arne and a few more escaped to +the land, went to King Eystein, and told him how King Inge had +received them. Thereupon King Eystein held a House-thing, and +told his followers how ill King Inge had treated his men, and +desired the troops to follow him. "I have," said he, "so many, +and such excellent men, that I have no intention to fly, if ye +will follow me." But this speech was not received with much +favour. Halkel Huk was there; but both his sons, Simon and Jon, +were with King Inge. Halkel replied, so loud that many heard +him, "Let thy chests of gold follow thee, and let them defend thy +land." + + + +32. KING EYSTEIN'S DEATH. + +In the night many of King Eystein's ships rowed secretly away, +some of them joining King Inge, some going to Bergen, or up into +the fjords; so that when it was daylight in the morning the king +was lying behind with only ten ships. Then he left the Great +Dragon, which was heavy to row, and several other vessels behind; +and cut and destroyed the Dragon, started out the ale, and +destroyed all that they could not take with them. King Eystein +went on board of the ship of Eindride, a son of Jon Morner, +sailed north into Sogn, and then took the land-road eastwards to +Viken. King Inge took the vessels, and sailed with them outside +of the isles to Viken. King Eystein had then got east as far as +Fold, and had with him 1200 men; but when they saw King Inge's +force, they did not think themselves sufficiently strong to +oppose him, and they retired to the forest. Every one fled his +own way, so that the king was left with but one man. King Inge +and his men observed King Eystein's flight, and also that he had +but few people with him, and they went immediately to search for +him. Simon Skalp met the king just as he was coming out of a +willow bush. Simon saluted him. "God save you, sire," said he. + +The king replied, "I do not know if thou are not sire here." + +Simon replied, "That is as it may happen." + +The king begged him to conceal him, and said it was proper to do +so. "For there was long friendship between us, although it has +now gone differently." + +Simon replied, it could not be. + +Then the king begged that he might hear mass before he died, +which accordingly took place. Then Eystein laid himself down on +his face on the grass, stretched out his hands on each side, and +told them to cut the sign of the cross between his shoulders, and +see whether he could not bear steel as King Inge's followers had +asserted of him. Simon told the man who had to put the king to +death to do so immediately, for the king had been creeping about +upon the grass long enough. He was accordingly slain, and he +appears to have suffered manfully. His body was carried to Fors, +and lay all night under the hill at the south side of the church. +King Eystein was buried in Fors church, and his grave is in the +middle of the church-floor, where a fringed canopy is spread over +it, and he is considered a saint. Where he was executed, and his +blood ran upon the ground, sprang up a fountain, and another +under the hill where his body lay all night. From both these +waters many think they have received a cure of sickness and pain. +It is reported by the Viken people that many miracles were +wrought at King Eystein's grave, until his enemies poured upon it +soup made of boiled dog's flesh. Simon Skalp was much hated for +this deed, which was generally ascribed to him; but some said +that when King Eystein was taken Simon sent a message to King +Inge, and the king commanded that King Eystein should not come +before his face. So King Sverre has caused it to be written; but +Einar Skulason tells of it thus: -- + + "Simon Skalp, the traitor bold, + For deeds of murder known of old, + His king betrayed; and ne'er will he + God's blessed face hereafter see." + + + +SAGA OF HAKON HERDEBREID (HAKON THE BROAD-SHOULDERED) (1) + + +PRELIMINARY REMARKS. + +This saga describes the feud between Hakon Sigurdson and his +uncle Inge. + +The only skald quoted is Einar Skulason. + + +ENDNOTES: +(1) The period is from A.D. 1157 to 1161. -- L. + + + +1. BEGINNING OF HAKON HERDEBREID. + +Hakon, King Sigurd's son, was chosen chief of the troop which had +followed King Eystein, and his adherents gave him the title of +king. He was ten years old. At that time he had with him +Sigurd, a son of Halvard Hauld of Reyr, and Andreas and Onund, +the sons of Simon, his foster-brothers, and many chiefs, friends +of King Sigurd and King Eystein; and they went first up to +Gautland. King Inge took possession of all the estates they had +left behind, and declared them banished. Thereafter King Inge +went to Viken, and was sometimes also in the north of the +country. Gregorius Dagson was in Konungahella, where the danger +was greatest, and had beside him a strong and handsome body of +men, with which he defended the country. + + + +2. OF GREGORIUS DAGSON. + +The summer after (A.D. 1158) Hakon came with his men, and +proceeded to Konungahella with a numerous and handsome troop. +Gregorius was then in the town, and summoned the bondes and +townspeople to a great Thing, at which he desired their aid; but +he thought the people did not hear him with much favour, so he +did not much trust them. Gregorius set off with two ships to +Viken, and was very much cast down. He expected to meet King +Inge there, having heard he was coming with a great army to +Viken. Now when Gregorius had come but a short way north he met +Simon Skalp, Haldor Brynjolfson, and Gyrd Amundason, King Inge's +foster-brothers. Gregorius was much delighted at this meeting, +and turned back with them, being all in one body, with eleven +ships. As they were rowing up to Konungahella, Hakon, with his +followers, was holding a Thing without the town, and saw their +approach; and Sigurd of Reyr said, "Gregorius must be fey to be +throwing himself with so few men into our hands." Gregorius +landed opposite the town to wait for King Inge, for he was +expected, but he did not come. King Hakon put himself in order +in the town, and appointed Thorliot Skaufaskalle, who was a +viking and a robber, to be captain of the men in the merchant +ships that were afloat in the river; and King Hakon and Sigurd +were within the town, and drew up the men on the piers, for all +the townspeople had submitted to King Hakon. + + + +3. KING HAKON'S FLIGHT. + +Gregorius rowed up the river, and let the ship drive down with +the stream against Thorliot. They shot at each other a while, +until Thorliot and his comrades jumped overboard; and some of +them were killed, some escaped to the land. Then Gregorius rowed +to the piers, and let a gangway be cast on shore at the very feet +of Hakon's men. There the man who carried his banner was slain, +just as he was going to step on shore. Gregorius ordered Hal, a +son of Audun Halson, to take up the banner, which he did, and +bore the banner up to the pier. Gregorius followed close after +him, held his shield over his head, and protected him as well as +himself. As soon as Gregorius came upon the pier, and Hakon's +men knew him, they gave way, and made room for him on every side. +Afterwards more people landed from the ships, and then Gregorius +made a severe assault with his men; and Hakon's men first moved +back, and then ran up into the town. Gregorius pursued them +eagerly, drove them twice from the town, and killed many of them. +By the report of all men, never was there so glorious an affair +as this of Gregorius; for Hakon had more than 4000 men, and +Gregorius not full 400. After the battle, Gregorius said to Hal +Audunson, "Many men, in my opinion, are more agile in battle than +ye Icelanders are, for ye are not so exercised as we Norwegians; +but none, I think, are so bold under arms as ye are." King Inge +came up soon after, and killed many of the men who had taken part +with Hakon; made some pay heavy fines, burnt the houses of some, +and some he drove out of the country, or treated otherwise very +ill. Hakon fled at first up to Gautland with all his men; but +the winter after (A.D. 1159), he proceeded by the upper road to +Throndhjem, and came there before Easter. The Throndhjem people +received him well, for they had always served under that shield. +It is said that the Throndhjem people took Hakon as king, on the +terms that he should have from Inge the third part of Norway as +his paternal heritage. King Inge and Gregorius were in Viken, +and Gregorius wanted to make an expedition against the party in +the north; but it came to nothing that winter, as many dissuaded +from it. + + + +4. FALL OF GYRD AND HAVARD. + +King Hakon left Throndhjem in spring with thirty ships nearly; +and some of his men sailed before the rest with seven ships, and +plundered in North and South More. No man could remember that +there ever before had been plundering between the two towns +(Bergen and Nidaros). Jon the son of Halkel Huk collected the +bondes in arms, and proceeded against them; took Kolbein Ode +prisoner, killed every woman's son of them in his ship. Then +they searched for the others, found them all assembled in seven +ships, and fought with them; but his father Halkel not coming to +his assistance as he had promised, many good bondes were killed, +and Jon himself was wounded. Hakon proceeded south to Bergen +with his forces; but when he came to Stiornvelta, he heard that +King Inge and Gregorius had arrived a few nights before from the +east at Bergen, and therefore he did not venture to steer +thither. They sailed the outer course southwards past Bergen, +and met three ships of King Inge's fleet, which had been +outsailed on the voyage from the east. On board of them were +Gyrd Amundason, King Inge's foster-brother, who was married to +Gyrid a sister of Gregorius, and also lagman Gyrd Gunhildson, and +Havard Klining. King Hakon had Gyrd Amundason and Havard Klining +put to death; but took lagman Gyrd southwards, and then proceeded +east to Viken. + + + +5. OF THE CONSULTATIONS OF KING INGE. + +When King Inge heard of this he sailed east after them, and they +met east in the Gaut river. King Inge went up the north arm of +the river, and sent out spies to get news of Hakon and his fleet; +but he himself landed at Hising, and waited for his spies. Now +when the spies came back they went to the king, and said that +they had seen King Hakon's forces, and all his ships which lay at +the stakes in the river, and Hakon's men had bound the stems of +their vessels to them. They had two great East-country trading +vessels, which they had laid outside of the fleet, and on both +these were built high wooded stages (castles). When King Inge +heard the preparations they had made, he ordered a trumpet to +call a House-thing of all the men; and when the Thing was seated +he asked his men for counsel, and applied particularly to +Gregorius Dagson, his brother-in-law Erling Skakke, and other +lendermen and ship-commanders, to whom he related the +preparations of Hakon and his men. + +Then Gregorius Dagson replied first, and made known his mind in +the following words: -- "Sometimes we and Hakon have met, and +generally they had the most people; but, notwithstanding, they +fell short in battle against us. Now, on the other hand, we have +by far the greatest force; and it will appear probable to the men +who a short time ago lost gallant relations by them, that this +will be a good occasion to get vengeance, for they have fled +before us the greater part of the summer; and we have often said +that if they waited for us, as appears now to be the case, we +would have a brush with them. Now I will tell my opinion, which +is, that I will engage them, if it be agreeable to the king's +pleasure; for I think it will go now as formerly, that they must +give way before us if we attack them bravely; and I shall always +attack where others may think it most difficult." + +The speech was received with much applause, and all declared they +were ready to engage in battle against Hakon. Then they rowed +with all the ships up the river, until they came in sight of each +other, and then King Inge turned off from the river current under +the island. Now the king addressed the lendermen again, and told +them to get ready for battle. He turned himself especially to +Erling Skakke, and said, what was true, that no man in the army +had more understanding and knowledge in fighting battles, +although some were more hot. The king then addressed himself to +several of the lendermen, speaking to them by name; and ended by +desiring that each man should make his attack where he thought it +would be of advantage, and thereafter all would act together. + + + +6. ERLING'S SPEECH. + +Erling Skakke replied thus to the king's speech: "It is my duty, +sire, not to be silent; and I shall give my advice, since it is +desired. The resolution now adopted is contrary to my judgment; +for I call it foolhardy to fight under these circumstances, +although we have so many and such fine men. Supposing we make an +attack on them, and row up against this river-current; then one +of the three men who are in each half room must be employed in +rowing only, and another must be covering with the shield the man +who rows; and what have we then to fight with but one third of +our men? It appears to me that they can be of little use in the +battle who are sitting at their oars with their backs turned to +the enemy. Give me now some time for consideration, and I +promise you that before three days are over I shall fall upon +some plan by which we can come into battle with advantage." + +It was evident from Erling's speech that he dissuaded from an +attack; but, notwithstanding, it was urged by many who thought +that Hakon would now, as before, take to the land. "And then," +said they, "we cannot get hold of him; but now they have but few +men, and we have their fate in our own hands." + +Gregorius said but little; but thought that Erling rather +dissuaded from an attack that Gregorius's advice should have no +effect, than that he had any better advice to give. + + + +7. OF HAKON'S FLEET. + +Then said King Inge to Erling, "Now we will follow thy advice, +brother, with regard to the manner of attacking; but seeing how +eager our counsellors are for it, we shall make the attack this +day." + +Erling replied, "All the boats and light vessels we have should +row outside the island, and up the east arm of the river, and +then down with the stream upon them, and try if they cannot cut +them loose from the piles. Then we, with the large ships, shall +row from below here against them; and I cannot tell until it be +tried, if those who are now so furiously warm will be much +brisker at the attack than I am." + +This counsel was approved by all. There was a ness stretched out +between their fleet and Hakon's, so that they could not see each +other. Now when Hakon and his men, who had taken counsel with +each other in a meeting, saw the boat-squadron rowing down the +river, some thought King Inge intended to give them battle; but +many believed they did not dare, for it looked as if the attack +was given up; and they, besides, were very confident, both in +their preparations and men. There were many great people with +Hakon: there were Sigurd of Reyr, and Simon's sons; Nikolas +Skialdvarson; Eindride, a son of Jon Mornef, who was the most +gallant and popular man in the Throndhjem country; and many other +lendermen and warriors. Now when they saw that King Inge's men +with many ships were rowing out of the river, Hakon and his men +believed they were going to fly; and therefore they cut their +land-ropes with which they lay fast at the piles, seized their +oars, and rowed after them in pursuit. The ships ran fast down +with the stream; but when they came further down the river, +abreast of the ness, they saw King Inge's main strength lying +quiet at the island Hising. King Inge's people saw Hakon's ships +under way, and believed they were coming to attack them; and now +there was great bustle and clash of arms, and they encouraged +each other by a great war-shout. Hakon with his fleet turned +northwards a little to the land, where there was a turn in the +bight of the river, and where there was no current. They made +ready for battle, carried land-ropes to the shore, turned the +stems of their ships outwards, and bound them all together. They +laid the large East-country traders without the other vessels, +the one above, the other below, and bound them to the long-ships. +In the middle of the fleet lay the king's ship, and next to it +Sigurd's; and on the other side of the king's ship lay Nikolas, +and next to him Endride Jonson. All the smaller ships lay +farther off, and they were all nearly loaded with weapons and +stones. + + + +8. SIGURD OF REYR'S SPEECH. + +Then Sigurd of Reyr made the following speech: "Now there is hope +that the time is come which has been promised us all the summer, +that we shall meet King Inge in battle. We have long prepared +ourselves for this; and many of our comrades have boasted that +they would never fly from or submit to King Inge and Gregorius, +and now let them remember their words. But we who have sometimes +got the toothache in our conflicts with them, speak less +confidently; for it has happened, as all have heard, that we very +often have come off without glory. But, nevertheless, it is now +necessary to fight manfully, and stand to it with steadiness; for +the only escape for us is in victory. Although we have somewhat +fewer men than they, yet luck determines which side shall have +the advantage, and God knows that the right is on our side. Inge +has killed two of his brothers; and it is obvious to all men that +the mulct he intends to pay King Hakon for his father's murder is +to murder him also, as well as his other relations, which will be +seen this day to be his intent. King Hakon desired from the +beginning no more of Norway than the third part, which his father +had possessed, and which was denied him; and yet, in my opinion, +King Hakon has a better right to inherit after his father's +brother, King Eystein, than Inge or Simon Skalp, or the other men +who killed King Eystein. Many of them who would save their +souls, and yet have defiled their hands with such bloody deeds as +Inge has done, must think it a presumption before God that he +takes the name of king; and I wonder God suffers such monstrous +wickedness as his; but it may be God's will that we shall now put +him down. Let us fight then manfully, and God will give us +victory; and, if we fall, will repay us with joys unspeakable for +now allowing the might of the wicked to prevail over us. Go +forth then in confidence, and be not afraid when the battle +begins. Let each watch over his own and his comrade's safety, +and God protect us all." There went a good report abroad of this +speech of Sigurd, and all promised fairly, and to do their duty. +King Hakon went on board of the great East-country ship, and a +shield-bulwark was made around him; but his standard remained on +the long-ship in which it had been before. + + + +9. OF KING INGE'S MEN. + +Now must we tell about King Inge and his men. When they saw that +King Hakon and his people were ready for battle, and the river +only was between them, they sent a light vessel to recall the +rest of the fleet which had rowed away; and in the meantime the +king waited for them, and arranged the troops for the attack. +Then the chiefs consulted in presence of the army, and told their +opinions; first, which ships should lie nearest to the enemy; and +then where each should attack. + +Gregorius spoke thus: "We have many and fine men; and it is my +advice, King Inge, that you do not go to the assault with us, for +everything is preserved if you are safe. And no man knows where +an arrow may hit, even from the hands of a bad bowman; and they +have prepared themselves so, that missiles and stones can be +thrown from the high stages upon the merchant ships, so that +there is less danger for those who are farthest from them. They +have not more men than we lendermen can very well engage with. I +shall lay my ship alongside their largest ship, and I expect the +conflict between us will be but short; for it has often been so +in our former meetings, although there has been a much greater +want of men with us than now." All thought well of the advice +that the king himself should not take part in the battle. + +Then Erling Skakke said, "I agree also to the counsel that you, +sire, should not go into the battle. It appears to me that their +preparations are such, that we require all our precaution not to +suffer a great defeat from them; and whole limbs are the easiest +cured. In the council we held before to-day many opposed what I +said, and ye said then that I did not want to fight; but now I +think the business has altered its appearance, and greatly to our +advantage, since they have hauled off from the piles, and now it +stands so that I do not dissuade from giving battle; for I see, +what all are sensible of, how necessary it is to put an end to +this robber band who have gone over the whole country with +pillage and destruction, in order that people may cultivate the +land in peace, and serve a king so good and just as King Inge who +has long had trouble and anxiety from the haughty unquiet spirit +of his relations, although he has been a shield of defence for +the whole people, and has been exposed to manifold perils for the +peace of the country." Erling spoke well and long, and many +other chiefs also; and all to the same purpose -- all urging to +battle. In the meantime they waited until all the fleet should +be assembled. King Inge had the ship Baekisudin; and, at the +entreaty of his friends, he did not join the battle, but lay +still at the island. + + + +10. BEGINNING OF THE BATTLE. + +When the army was ready they rowed briskly against the enemy, and +both sides raised a war-shout. Inge's men did not bind their +ships together, but let them be loose; for they rowed right +across the current, by which the large ships were much swayed. +Erling Skakke laid his ship beside King Hakon's ship, and ran the +stem between his and Sigurd's ship, by which the battle began. +But Gregorius's ship swung upon the ground, and heeled very much +over, so that at first she could not come into the battle; and +when Hakon's men saw this they laid themselves against her, and +attacked Gregorius's ship on all sides. Ivar, Hakon Mage's son, +laid his ship so that the stems struck together; and he got a +boat-hook fastened on Gregorius, on that part of his body where +the waist is smallest, and dragged him to him, by which Gregorius +stumbled against the ship's rails; but the hook slipped to one +side, or Gregorius would have been dragged over-board. +Gregorius, however, was but little wounded, for he had on a plate +coat of armour. Ivar called out to him, that he had a "thick +bark." Gregorius replied, that if Ivar went on so he would +"require it all, and not have too much." It was very near then +that Gregorius and his men had sprung overboard; but Aslak Unge +threw an anchor into their ship, and dragged them off the ground. +Then Gregorius laid himself against Ivar's ship, and they fought +a long while; but Gregorius's ship being both higher sided and +more strongly manned, many people fell in Ivar's ship, and some +jumped overboard. Ivar was so severely wounded that he could not +take part in the fight. When his ship was cleared of the men, +Gregorius let Ivar be carried to the shore, so that he might +escape; and from that time they were constant friends. + + + +11. KING HAKON'S FLIGHT. + +When King Inge and his men saw that Gregorius was aground, he +encouraged his crew to row to his assistance. "It was," he said, +"the most imprudent advice that we should remain lying here, +while our friends are in battle; for we have the largest and best +ship in all the fleet. But now I see that Gregorius, the man to +whom I owe the most, is in need of help; so we must hasten to the +fight where it is sharpest. It is also most proper that I should +be in the battle; for the victory, if we win it, will belong to +me. And if I even knew beforehand that our men were not to gain +the battle, yet our place is where our friends are; for I can do +nothing if I lose the men who are justly called the defence of +the country, who are the bravest, and have long ruled for me and +my kingdom." Thereupon he ordered his banner to be set up, which +was done; and they rowed across the river. Then the battle +raged, and the king could not get room to attack, so close lay +the ships before him. First he lay under the East-country +trading ship, and from it they threw down upon his vessel spears, +iron-shod stakes, and such large stones that it was impossible to +hold out longer there, and he had to haul off. Now when the +king's people saw that he was come they made place for him, and +then he laid alongside of Eindride Jonson's ship. Now King +Hakon's men abandoned the small ships, and went on board the +large merchant vessels; but some of them sprang on shore. Erling +Skakke and his men had a severe conflict. Erling himself was on +the forecastle, and called his forecastlemen, and ordered them to +board the king's ship; but they answered, this was no easy +matter, for there were beams above with an iron comb on them. +Then Erling himself went to the bow, and stayed there a while, +until they succeeded in getting on board the king's ship: and +then the ship was cleared of men on the bows, and the whole army +gave way. Many sprang into the water, many fell, but the greater +number got to the land. So says Einar Skulason: -- + + "Men fall upon the slippery deck -- + Men roll off from the blood-drenched wreck; + Dead bodies float down with the stream, + And from the shores witch-ravens scream. + The cold blue river now runs red + With the warm blood of warriors dead, + And stains the waves in Karmt Sound + With the last drops of the death-wound. + + "All down the stream, with unmann'd prow, + Floats many an empty long-ship now, + Ship after ship, shout after shout, + Tell that Kign Hakon can't hold out. + The bowmen ply their bows of elm, + The red swords flash o'er broken helm: + King Hakon's men rush to the strand, + Out of their ships, up through the land." + +Einar composed a song about Gregorius Dagson, which is called the +River-song. King Inge granted life and peace to Nikolas +Skialdvarson when his ship was deserted, and thereupon he went +into King Inge's service, and remained in it as long as the king +lived. Eindride Jonson leaped on board of King Inge's ship when +his own was cleared of men, and begged for his life. King Inge +wished to grant it; but Havard Klining's son ran up, and gave him +a mortal wound, which was much blamed; but he said Eindride had +been the cause of his father's death. There was much lamentation +at Eindride's death, but principally in the Throndhjem district. +Many of Hakon's people fell here, but not many chiefs. Few of +King Inge's people fell, but many were wounded. King Hakon fled +up the country, and King Inge went north to Viken with his +troops; and he, as well as Gregorius, remained in Viken all +winter (A.D. 1160). When King Inge's men, Bergliot and his +brothers, sons of Ivar of Elda, came from the battle to Bergen, +they slew Nickolas Skeg, who had been Hakon's treasurer, and then +went north to Throndhjem. + +King Hakon came north before Yule, and Sigurd was sometimes home +at Reyr; for Gregorius, who was nearly related to Sigurd, had +obtained for him life and safety from King Inge, so that he +retained all his estates. King Hakon was in the merchant-town of +Nidaros in Yule; and one evening in the beginning of Yule his men +fought in the room of the court, and in this affray eight men +were killed, and many were wounded. The eighth day of Yule, King +Hakon's man Alf Rode, son of Ottar Birting, with about eighty +men, went to Elda, and came in the night unexpectedly on the +people, who were very drunk, and set fire to the room; but they +went out, and defended themselves bravely. There fell Bergliot, +Ivar's son, and Ogmund, his brother, and many more. They had +been nearly thirty altogether in number. In winter died, north +in the merchant-town, Andres Simonson, King Hakon's foster- +brother; and his death was much deplored. Erling Skakke and +Inge's men, who were in Bergen, threatened that in winter they +would proceed against Hakon and his men; but it came to nothing. +Gregorius sent word from the east, from Konungahella, that if he +were so near as Erling and his men, he would not sit quietly in +Bergen while Hakon was killing King Inge's friends and their +comrades in war north in the Throndhjem country. + + + +12. THE CONFLICT UPON THE PIERS. + +King Inge and Gregorius left the east in spring, and came to +Bergen; but as soon as Hakon and Sigurd heard that Inge had left +Viken, they went there by land. When King Inge and his people +came to Bergen, a quarrel arose between Haldor Brynjolfson and +Bjorn Nikolason. Bjorn's house-man asked Haldor's when they met +at the pier, why he looked so pale. + +He replied, because he had been bled. + +"I could not look so pale if I tried, at merely being bled." + +"I again think," retorted the other, "that thou wouldst have +borne it worse, and less manfully." And no other beginning was +there for their quarrel than this. Afterwards one word followed +another, till from brawling they came to fighting. It was told +to Haldor Brynjolfson, who was in the house drinking, that his +house-man was wounded down on the pier and he went there +immediately. But Bjorn's house-men had come there before, and as +Haldor thought his house-man had been badly treated, he went up +to them and beat them; and it was told to Bjorn Buk that the +people of Viken were beating his house-men on the pier. Then +Bjorn and his house-men took their weapons, hurried down to the +pier, and would avenge their men; and a bloody strife began. It +was told Gregorius that his relation Haldor required assistance, +and that his house-men were being cut down in the street; on +which Gregorius and his men ran to the place in their armour. +Now it was told Erling Skakke that his sister's son Bjorn was +fighting with Gregorius and Haldor down on the piers, and that he +needed help. Then he proceeded thither with a great force, and +exhorted the people to stand by him; saying it would be a great +disgrace never to be wiped out, if the Viken people should +trample upon them in their own native place. There fell thirteen +men, of whom nine were killed on the spot, and four died of their +wounds, and many were wounded. When the word came to King Inge +that Gregorius and Erling were fighting down on the piers, he +hastened there, and tried to separate them; but could do nothing, +so mad were they on both sides. Then Gregorius called to Inge, +and told him to go away; for it was in vain to attempt coming +between them, as matters now stood. He said it would be the +greatest misfortune if the king mixed himself up with it; for he +could not be certain that there were not people in the fray who +would commit some great misdeed if they had opportunity. Then +King Inge retired; and when the greatest tumult was over, +Gregorius and his men went to Nikolas church, and Erling behind +them, calling to each other. Then King Inge came a second time, +and pacified them; and both agreed that he should mediate between +them. + +When King Inge and Gregorius heard that King Hakon was in Viken, +they went east with many ships; but when they came King Hakon +fled from them, and there was no battle. Then King Inge went to +Oslo, and Gregorius was in Konungahella. + + + +13. MUNAN'S DEATH. + +Soon after Gregorius heard that Hakon and his men were at a farm +called Saurby, which lies up beside the forest. Gregorius +hastened there; came in the night; and supposing that King Hakon +and Sigurd would be in the largest of the houses, set fire to the +buildings there. But Hakon and his men were in the smaller +house, and came forth, seeing the fire, to help their people. +There Munan fell, a son of Ale Uskeynd, a brother of King Sigurd +Hakon's father. Gregorius and his men killed him, because he was +helping those whom they were burning within the house. Some +escaped, but many were killed. Asbjorn Jalda, who had been a +very great viking, escaped from the house, but was grievously +wounded. A bonde met him, and he offered the man money to let +him get away; but the bonde replied, he would do what he liked +best; and, adding that he had often been in fear of his life for +him, he slew him. King Hakon and Sigurd escaped, but many of +their people were killed. Thereafter Gregorius returned home to +Konungahella. Soon after King Hakon and Sigurd went to Haldor +Brynjolfson's farm of Vettaland, set fire to the house, and burnt +it. Haldor went out, and was cut down instantly with his house- +men; and in all there were about twenty men killed. Sigrid, +Haldor's wife, was a sister of Gregorius, and they allowed her to +escape into the forest in her night-shift only; but they took +with them Amunde, who was a son of Gyrd Amundason and of Gyrid +Dag's daughter, and a sister's son of Gregorius, and who was then +a boy about five years old. + + + +14. OF THE FALL OF GREGORIUS DAGSON. + +When Gregorius heard the news he took it much to heart, and +inquired carefully where they were. Gregorius set out from +Konungahella late in Yule, and came to Fors the thirteenth day of +Yule, where he remained a night, and heard vespers the last day +of Yule, which was a Saturday, and the holy Evangel was read +before him. When Gregorius and his followers saw the men of King +Hakon and Sigurd, the king's force appeared to them smaller than +their own. There was a river called Befia between them, where +they met; and there was unsound ice on the river, for there went +a stream under the ice from it. King Hakon and his men had cut a +rent in the ice, and laid snow over it, so that nobody could see +it. When Gregorius came to the ice on the river the ice appeared +to him unsound, he said; and he advised the people to go to the +bridge, which was close by, to cross the river. The bonde-troops +replied, that they did not know why he should be afraid to go +across the ice to attack so few people as Hakon had, and the ice +was good enough. Gregorius said it was seldom necessary to +encourage him to show bravery, and it should not be so now. Then +he ordered them to follow him, and not to be standing on the land +while he was on the ice, and he said it was their council to go +out upon the dangerous ice, but he had no wish to do so, or to be +led by them. Then he ordered the banner to be advanced, and +immediately went out on the ice with the men. As soon as the +bondes found that the ice was unsound they turned back. +Gregorius fell through the ice, but not very deep, and he told +his men to take care. There were not more than twenty men with +him, the others having turned back. A man of King Hakon's troop +shot an arrow at Gregorius, which hit him under the throat, and +thus ended his life. Gregorius fell, and ten men with him. It +is the talk of all men that he had been the most gallant +lenderman in Norway that any man then living could remember; and +also he behaved the best towards us Icelanders of any chief since +King Eystein the Elder's death. Gregorius's body was carried to +Hofund, and interred at Gimsey Isle, in a nunnery which is there, +of which Gregorius's sister, Baugeid, was then the abbess. + + + +15. KING INGE HEARS OF GREGORIUS'S FALL. + +Two bailiffs went to Oslo to bring the tidings to King Inge. +When they arrived they desired to speak to the king: and he +asked, what news they brought. + +"Gregorius Dagson's death," said they. + +"How came that misfortune?" asked the king. + +When they had told him how it happened, he said, "They gave +advice who understood the least." + +It is said he took it so much to heart that he cried like a +child. When he recovered himself he said, "I wanted to go to +Gregorius as soon as I heard of Haldor's murder; for I thought +that Gregorius would not sit long before thinking. of revenge. +But the people here would think nothing so important as their +Yule feasts, and nothing could move them away; and I am confident +that if I had been there, he would either have proceeded more +cautiously, or I and Gregorius would now have shared one lodging. +Now he is gone, the man who has been my best friend, and more +than any other has kept the kingdom in my hands; and I think it +will be but a short space between us. Now I make an oath to go +forth against Hakon, and one of two things shall happen: I shall +either come to my death, or shall walk over Hakon and his people; +and such a man as Gregorius is not avenged, even if all were to +pay the penalty of their lives for him." + +There was a man present who replied, "Ye need not seek after +them, for they intend to seek you." + +Kristin, King Sigurd's daughter and King Inge's cousin, was then +in Oslo. The king heard that she intended going away. He sent a +message to her to inquire why she wished to leave the town. + +She thought it was dangerous and unsafe for a female to be there. +The king would not let her go. "For if it go well with me, as I +hope, you will be well here; and if I fall, my friends may not +get leave to dress my body; but you can ask permission, and it +will not be denied you, and you will thereby best requite what I +have done for you." + + + +16. OF KING INGE. + +On Saint Blasius' day (February 3, 1161), in the evening, King +Inge's spies brought him the news that King Hakon was coming +towards the town. Then King Inge ordered the war-horns to call +together all the troops up from the town; and when he drew them +up he could reckon them to be nearly 4000 men. The king let the +array be long, but not more than five men deep. Then some said +that the king should not be himself in the battle, as they +thought the risk too great; but that his brother Orm should be +the leader of the army. The king replied, "I think if Gregorius +were alive and here now, and I had fallen and was to be avenged, +he would not lie concealed, but would be in the battle. Now, +although I, on account of my ill health, am not fit for the +combat as he was, yet will I show as good will as he would have +had; and it is not to be thought of that I should not be in the +battle." + +People say that Gunhild, who was married to Simon, King Hakon's +foster-brother, had a witch employed to sit out all night and +procure the victory for Hakon; and that the answer was obtained, +that they should fight King Inge by night, and never by day, and +then the result would be favourable. The witch who, as people +say, sat out was called Thordis Skeggia; but what truth there may +be in the report I know not. + +Simon Skalp had gone to the town, and was gone to sleep, when the +war-shouts awoke him. When the night was well advanced, King +Inge's spies came to him, and told him that King Hakon and his +army were coming over the ice; for the ice lay the whole way from +the town to Hofud Isle. + + + +17. KING INGE'S SPEECH. + +Thereupon King Inge went with his army out on the ice, and he +drew it up in order of battle in front of the town. Simon Skalp +was in that wing of the array which was towards Thraelaberg; and +on the other wing, which was towards the Nunnery, was Gudrod, the +king of the South Hebudes, a son of Olaf Klining, and Jon, a son +of Svein Bergthor Buk. When King Hakon and his army came near to +King Inge's array, both sides raised a war-shout. Gudrod and Jon +gave King Hakon and his men a sign, and let them know where they +were in the line; and as soon as Hakon's men in consequence +turned thither, Gudrod immediately fled with 1500 men; and Jon, +and a great body of men with him, ran over to King Hakon's army, +and assisted them in the fight. When this news was told to King +Inge, he said, "Such is the difference between my friends. Never +would Gregorius have done so in his life!" There were some who +advised King Inge to get on horseback, and ride from the battle +up to Raumarike; "where," said they, "you would get help enough, +even this very day." The king replied, he had no inclination to +do so. "I have heard you often say, and I think truly, that it +was of little use to my brother, King Eystein, that he took to +flight; and yet he was a man distinguished for many qualities +which adorn a king. Now I, who labour under so great +decrepitude, can see how bad my fate would be, if I betook myself +to what proved so unfortunate for him; with so great a difference +as there is between our activity, health, and strength. I was in +the second year of my age when I was chosen king of Norway, and I +am now twenty-five; and I think I have had misfortune and sorrow +under my kingly dignity, rather than pleasure and peaceful days. +I have had many battles, sometimes with more, sometimes with +fewer people; and it is my greatest luck that I have never fled. +God will dispose of my life, and of how long it shall be; but I +shall never betake myself to flight." + + + +18. KING INGE'S FALL. + +Now as Jon and his troop had broken the one wing of King Inge's +array, many of those who were nearest to him fled, by which the +whole array was dispersed, and fell into disorder. But Hakon and +his men went briskly forwards; and now it was near daybreak. An +assault was made against King Inge's banner, and in this conflict +King Inge fell; but his brother Orm continued the battle, while +many of the army fled up into the town. Twice Orm went to the +town after the king's fall to encourage the people, and both +times returned, and went out again upon the ice to continue the +battle. Hakon's men attacked the wing of the array which Simon +Skalp led; and in that assault fell of King Inge's men his +brother-in-law, Gudbrand Skafhogson. Simon Skalp and Halvard +Hikre went against each other with their troops, and fought while +they drew aside past Thraelaberg; and in this conflict both Simon +and Halvard fell. Orm, the king's brother, gained great +reputation in this battle; but he at last fled. Orm the winter +before had been contracted with Ragna, a daughter of Nikolas +Mase, who had been married before to King Eystein Haraldson; and +the wedding was fixed for the Sunday after Saint Blasius's mass, +which was on a Friday. Orm fled east to Svithjod, where his +brother Magnus was then king; and their brother Ragnvald was an +earl there at that time. They were the sons of Queen Ingerid and +Henrik Halte, who was a son of the Danish king Svein Sveinson. +The princess Kristin took care of King Inge's body, which was +laid on the stone wall of Halvard's church, on the south side +without the choir. He had then been king for twenty-three years +(A.D. 1137-1161). In this battle many fell on both sides, but +principally of King Inge's men. Of King Hakon's people fell Arne +Frirekson. Hakon's men took all the feast and victuals prepared +for the wedding, and a great booty besides. + + + +19. OF KING HAKON AND QUEEN KRISTIN. + +Then King Hakon took possession of the whole country, and +distributed all the offices among his own friends, both in the +towns and in the country. King Hakon and his men had a meeting +in Halvard's church, where they had a private conference +concerning the management of the country. Kristin the princess +gave the priest who kept the church keys a large sum of money to +conceal one of her men in the church, so that she might know what +Hakon and his counsellors intended. When she learnt what they +had said, she sent a man to Bergen to her husband Erling Skakke, +with the message that he should never trust Hakon or his men. + + + +20. OF OLAF'S MIRACLE. + +It happened at the battle of Stiklestad, as before related, that +King Olaf threw from him the sword called Hneiter when he +received his wound. A Swedish man, who had broken his own sword, +took it up, and fought with it. When this man escaped with the +other fugitives he came to Svithjod, and went home to his house. +From that time he kept the sword all his days, and afterwards his +son, and so relation after relation; and when the sword shifted +its owner, the one told to the other the name of the sword and +where it came from. A long time after, in the days of Kirjalax +the emperor of Constantinople, when there was a great body of +Varings in the town, it happened in the summer that the emperor +was on a campaign, and lay in the camp with his army. The +Varings who had the guard, and watched over the emperor, lay on +the open plain without the camp. They changed the watch with +each other in the night, and those who had been before on watch +lay down and slept; but all completely armed. It was their +custom, when they went to sleep, that each should have his helmet +on his head, his shield over him, sword under the head, and the +right hand on the sword-handle. One of these comrades, whose lot +it was to watch the latter part of the night, found, on awakening +towards morning, that his sword was gone. He looked after it, +and saw it lying on the flat plain at a distance from him. He +got up and took the sword, thinking that his comrades who had +been on watch had taken the sword from him in a joke; but they +all denied it. The same thing happened three nights. Then he +wondered at it, as well as they who saw or heard of it; and +people began to ask him how it could have happened. He said that +his sword was called Hneiter, and had belonged to King Olaf the +Saint, who had himself carried it in the battle of Stiklestad; +and he also related how the sword since that time had gone from +one to another. This was told to the emperor, who called the man +before him to whom the sword belonged, and gave him three times +as much gold as the sword was worth; and the sword itself he had +laid in Saint Olaf's church, which the Varings supported, where +it has been ever since over the altar. There was a lenderman of +Norway while Harald Gille's sons, Eystein, Inge, and Sigurd +lived, who was called Eindride Unge; and he was in Constantinople +when these events took place. He told these circumstances in +Norway, according to what Einar Skulason says in his song about +King Olaf the Saint, in which these events are sung. + + + +21. OLAF'S MIRACLE IN FAVOUR OF THE VARINGS. + +It happened once in the Greek country, when Kirjalax was emperor +there, that he made an expedition against Blokumannaland. When +he came to the Pezina plains, a heathen king came against him +with an innumerable host. He brought with him many horsemen, and +many large waggons, in which were large loop-holes for shooting +through. When they prepared for their night quarters they drew +up their waggons, one by the side of the other, without their +tents, and dug a great ditch without; and all which made a +defence as strong as a castle. The heathen king was blind. Now +when the Greek king came, the heathens drew up their array on the +plains before their waggon-fortification. The Greeks drew up +their array opposite, and they rode on both sides to fight with +each other; but it went on so ill and so unfortunately, that the +Greeks were compelled to fly after suffering a great defeat, and +the heathens gained a victory. Then the king drew up an array of +Franks and Flemings, who rode against the heathens, and fought +with them; but it went with them as with the others, that many +were killed, and all who escaped took to flight. Then the Greek +king was greatly incensed at his men-at-arms; and they replied, +that he should now take his wine-bags, the Varings. The king +says that he would not throw away his jewels, and allow so few +men, however bold they might be, to attack so vast an army. Then +Thorer Helsifig, who at that time was leader of the Varings +replied to the king's words, "If there was burning fire in the +way, I and my people would run into it, if I knew the king's +advantage required it." Then the king replied, "Call upon your +holy King Olaf for help and strength." The Varings, who were 450 +men, made a vow with hand and word to build a church in +Constantinople, at their own expense and with the aid of other +good men, and have the church consecrated to the honour and glory +of the holy King Olaf; and thereupon the Varings rushed into the +plain. When the heathens saw them, they told their king that +there was another troop of the Greek king's army come out upon +the plain; but they were only a handful of people. The king +says, "Who is that venerable man riding on a white horse at the +head of the troop?" They replied, "We do not see him." There +was so great a difference of numbers, that there were sixty +heathens for every Christian man; but notwithstanding the Varings +went boldly to the attack. As soon as they met terror and alarm +seized the army of the heathens, and they instantly began to fly; +but the Varings pursued, and soon killed a great number of them. +When the Greeks and Franks who before had fled from the heathens +saw this, they hastened to take part, and pursue the enemy with +the others. Then the Varings had reached the waggon- +fortification, where the greatest defeat was given to the enemy. +The heathen king was taken in the flight of his people, and the +Varings brought him along with them; after which the Christians +took the camp of the heathens, and their waggon-fortification. + + + +MAGNUS ERLINGSON'S SAGA. + + +PRELIMINARY REMARKS. + +With this saga, which describes a series of conflicts, Snorre's +"Heimskringla" ends. King Eystein died in 1177, but Magnus +Erlingson continued to reign until his death in 1184. The +conflicts continued until the opposition party was led to victory +by King Sverre. + +The only skald quoted is Thorbjorn Skakkaskald. + + + +1. OF MAGNUS ERLINGSON'S BEGINNING. + +When Erling got certain intelligence of the determinations of +Hakon and his counsellors, he sent a message to all the chiefs +who he knew had been steady friends of King Inge, and also to his +court-men and his retinue, who had saved themselves by flight, +and also to all Gregorius's house-men, and called them together +to a meeting. When they met, and conversed with each other, they +resolved to keep their men together; and which resolution they +confirmed by oath and hand-shake to each other. Then they +considered whom they should take to be king. Erling Skakke first +spoke, and inquired if it was the opinion of the chiefs and other +men of power that Simon Skalp's son, the son of the daughter of +King Harald Gille, should be chosen king, and Jon Halkelson be +taken to lead the army; but Jon refused it. Then it was inquired +if Nikolas Skialdvarson, a sister's son of King Magnus Barefoot, +would place himself at the head of the army; but he answered +thus: -- It was his opinion that some one should be chosen king +who was of the royal race; and, for leader of the troops, some +one from whom help and understanding were to be looked for; and +then it would be easier to gather an army. It was now tried +whether Arne would let any of his sons, King Inge's brothers, be +proclaimed king. Arne replies, that Kristin's son, she was the +daughter of King Sigurd the Crusader, was nearest by propinquity +of descent to the crown of Norway. "And here is also a man to be +his adviser, and whose duty it is to take care of him and of the +kingdom; and that man is his father Erling, who is both prudent, +brave, experienced in war, and an able man in governing the +kingdom; he wants no capability of bringing this counsel into +effect, if luck be with him." Many thought well of this advice. + +Erling replied to it, "As far as I can see or hear in this +meeting, the most will rather be excused from taking upon +themselves such a difficult business. Now it appears to me +altogether uncertain, provided we begin this work, whether he who +puts himself at the head of it will gain any honour; or whether +matters will go as they have done before when any one undertakes +such great things, that he loses all his property and possibly +his life. But if this counsel be adopted, there may be men who +will undertake to carry it through; but he who comes under such +an obligation must seek, in every way, to prevent any opposition +or enmity from those who are now in this council." + +All gave assurance that they would enter into this confederacy +with perfect fidelity. Then said Erling, "I can say for myself +that it would almost be my death to serve King Hakon; and however +dangerous it may be, I will rather venture to adopt your advice, +and take upon me to lead this force, if that be the will, +counsel, and desire of you all, and if you will all bind +yourselves to this agreement by oath." + +To this they all agreed; and in this meeting it was determined to +take Erling's son Magnus to be king. They afterwards held a +Thing in the town; and at this Thing Magnus Erlingson, then five +years old, was elected king of the whole country. All who had +been servants of King Inge went into his service, and each of +them retained the office and dignity he had held under King Inge +(A.D. 1161). + + + +2. KING MAGNUS GOES TO DENMARK. + +Erling Skakke made himself ready to travel, fitted out ships, and +had with him King Magnus, together with the household-men who +were on the spot. In this expedition were the king's relatives, +-- Arne; Ingerid, King Inge's mother, with her two sons; besides +Jon Kutiza, a son of Sigurd Stork, and Erling's house-men, as +well as those who had been Gregorius's house-men; and they had in +all ten ships. They went south to Denmark to King Valdemar and +Buriz Heinrekson, King Inge's brother. King Valdemar was King +Magnus's blood-relation; for Ingebjorg, mother of King Valdemar, +and Malmfrid, mother of Kristin, King Magnus's mother, were +cousins. The Danish king received them hospitably, and he and +Erling had private meetings and consultations: and so much was +known of their counsels, that King Valdemar was to aid King +Magnus with such help as might be required from his kingdom to +win and retain Norway. On the other hand, King Valdemar should +get that domain in Norway which his ancestors Harald Gormson and +Svein Forked-beard had possessed; namely, the whole of Viken as +far north as Rygiarbit. This agreement was confirmed by oath and +a fixed treaty. Then Erling and King Magnus made themselves +ready to leave Denmark, and they sailed out of Vendilskage. + + + +3. BATTLE OF TUNSBERG. + +King Hakon went in spring, after the Easter week, north to +Throndhjem, and had with him the whole fleet that had belonged to +King Inge. He held a Thing there in the merchant-town, and was +chosen king of the whole country. Then he made Sigurd of Reyr an +earl, and gave him an earldom, and afterwards proceeded +southwards with his followers all the way to Viken. The king +went to Tunsberg; but sent Earl Sigurd east to Konungahella, to +defend the country with a part of the forces in case Erling +should come from the south. Erling and his fleet came to Agder, +and went straight north to Bergen, where they killed Arne +Brigdarskalle, King Hakon's officer, and came back immediately +against King Hakon. Earl Sigurd, who had not observed the +journey of Erling and his followers from the south, was at that +time east in the Gaut river, and King Hakon was in Tunsberg. +Erling brought up at Hrossanes, and lay there some nights. In +the meantime King Hakon made preparations in the town. When +Erling and his fleet were coming up to the town, they took a +merchant vessel, filled it with wood and straw, and set fire to +it; and the wind blowing right towards the town, drove the vessel +against the piers. Erling had two cables brought on board the +vessel, and made fast to two boats, and made them row along as +the vessel drove. Now when the fire was come almost abreast of +the town, those who were in the boats held back the vessel by the +ropes, so that the town could not be set on fire; but so thick a +smoke spread from it over the town, that one could not see from +the piers where the king's array was. Then Erling drew the whole +fleet in where the wind carried the fire, and shot at the enemy. +When the townspeople saw that the fire was approaching their +houses, and many were wounded by the bowmen, they resolved to +send the priest Hroald, the long-winded speaker, to Erling, to +beg him to spare them and the town; and they dissolved the array +in favour of Hakon, as soon as Hroald told them their prayer was +granted. Now when the array of towns-people had dispersed, the +men on the piers were much thinned: however, some urged Hakon's +men to make resistance: but Onund Simonson, who had most +influence over the army, said, "I will not fight for Earl +Sigurd's earldom, since he is not here himself." Then Onund +fled, and was followed by all the people, and by the king +himself; and they hastened up the country. King Hakon lost many +men here; and these verses were made about it: -- + + "Onund declares he will not go + In battle 'gainst Earl Sigurd's foe, + If Earl Sigurd does not come, + But with his house-men sits at home. + King Magnus' men rush up the street, + Eager with Hakon's troop to meet; + But Hakon's war-hawks, somewhat shy, + Turn quick about, and off they fly." + +Thorbjorn Skakkaskald also said: -- + + "The Tunsberg men would not be slow + In thy good cause to risk a blow; + And well they knew the chief could stain + The wolves' mouths on a battle-plain. + But the town champion rather fears + The sharp bright glance of levelled spears; + Their steel-clad warrior loves no fight + Where bowstring twangs, or fire flies bright." + +King Hakon then took the land-road northwards to Throndhjem. +When Earl Sigurd heard of this, he proceeded with all the ships +he could get the seaway north-wards, to meet King Hakon there. + + + +4. OF ERLING AND HAKON. + +Erling Skakke took all the ships in Tunsberg belonging to King +Hakon, and there he also took the Baekisudin which had belonged +to King Inge. Then Erling proceeded, and reduced the whole of +Viken in obedience to King Magnus, and also the whole country +north wheresoever he appeared up to Bergen, where he remained all +winter. There Erling killed Ingebjorn Sipil, King Hakon's +lenderman of the north part of the Fjord district. In winter +(A.D. 1162) King Hakon was in Throndhjem; but in the following +spring he ordered a levy, and prepared to go against Erling. He +had with him Earl Sigurd, Jon Sveinson, Eindride Unge, Onund +Simonson, Philip Peterson, Philip Gyrdson, Ragnvald Kunta, Sigurd +Kapa, Sigurd Hiupa, Frirek Keina, Asbjorn of Forland, Thorbjorn, +a son of Gunnar the treasurer, and Stradbjarne. + + + +5. OF ERLING'S PEOPLE. + +Erling was in Bergen with a great armament, and resolved to lay a +sailing prohibition on all the merchant vessels which were going +north to Nidaros; for he knew that King Hakon would soon get +tidings of him, if ships were sailing between the towns. +Besides, he gave out that it was better for Bergen to get the +goods, even if the owners were obliged to sell them cheaper than +they wished than that they should fall into the hands of enemies +and thereby strengthen them. And now a great many vessels were +assembled at Bergen, for many arrived every day, and none were +allowed to go away. Then Erling let some of the lightest of his +vessels be laid ashore, and spread the report that he would wait +for Hakon, and, with the help of his friends and relations, +oppose the enemy there. He then one day called a meeting of the +ship-masters, and gave them and all the merchant ships and their +steersmen leave to go where they pleased. When the men who had +charge of the cargoes, and were all ready to sail away with their +goods, some for trade, others on various business, had got leave +from Erling Skakke to depart, there was a soft and favourable +wind for sailing north along the coast. Before the evening all +who were ready had set sail, and hastened on as fast as they +could, according to the speed of their vessels, the one vying +with the other. When this fleet came north to More, Hakon's +fleet had arrived there before them: and he himself was there +fully engaged in collecting people, and summoning to him the +lendermen, and all liable to serve in the levy, without having +for a long time heard any news from Bergen. Now, however, they +heard, as the latest news, that Erling Skakke had laid his ships +up in Bergen, and there they would find him; and also that he had +a large force with him. King Hakon sailed from thence to Veey, +and sent away Earl Sigurd and Onund Simonson to gather people, +and sent men also to both the More districts. After King Hakon +had remained a few days at the town he sailed farther, and +proceeded to the South, thinking that it would both promote his +journey and enable new levies to join him sooner. + +Erling Skakke had given leave on Sunday to all the merchant +vessels to leave Bergen; and on Tuesday, as soon as the early +mass was over, he ordered the warhorns to sound, summoned to him +the men-at-arms and the townsmen, and let the ships which were +laid up on shore be drawn down into the water. Then Erling held +a House-Thing with his men and the people of the levy; told them +his intentions; named ship commanders; and had the names called +over of the men who were to be on board of the king's ship. This +Thing ended with Erling's order to every man to make himself +ready in his berth wherever a place was appointed him; and +declared that he who remained in the town after the Baekisudin +was hauled out, should be punished by loss of life or limb. Orm, +the king's brother, laid his ships out in the harbour immediately +that evening, and many others, and the greater number were afloat +before. + + + +6. OF ERLING SKAKKE. + +On Wednesday, before mass was sung in the town, Erling sailed +from Bergen with all his fleet, consisting of twenty-one ships; +and there was a fresh breeze for sailing northwards along the +coast. Erling had his son King Magnus with him, and there were +many lendermen accompanied by the finest men. When Erling came +north, abreast of the Fjord district, he sent a boat on shore to +Jon Halkelson's farm, and took Nikolas, a son of Simon Skalp and +of Maria, Harald Gille's daughter, and brought him out to the +fleet, and put him on board the king's ship. On Friday, +immediately after matins, they sailed to Steinavag, and King +Hakon, with thirteen ships, was lying in the harbour in the +neighbourhood. He himself and his men were up at play upon the +island, and the lendermen were sitting on the hill, when they saw +a boat rowing from the south with two men in it, who were bending +back deep towards the keel, and taking hasty strokes with their +oars. When they came to the shore they did not belay the boat, +but both ran from it. The great men seeing this, said to each +other, "These men must have some news to tell;" and got up to +meet them. When they met, Onund Simonson asked, "Have ye any +news of Erling Skakke, that ye are running so fast?" + +They answered, as soon as they could get out the words, for they +had lost their breath, "Here comes Erling against you, sailing +from the south, with twenty-one ships, or thereabouts, of which +many are great enough; and now ye will soon see their sails." + +Then said Eindride Unge, "Too near to the nose, said the peasant, +when his eye was knocked out." + +They went in haste now to where the games were playing, and +immediately the war-horns resounded, and with the battle-call all +the people were gathered down to the ships in the greatest haste. +It was just the time of day when their meat was nearly cooked. +All the men rushed to the ships, and each ran on board the vessel +that was nearest to him, so that the ships were unequally manned. +Some took to the oars; some raised the masts, turned the heads of +the vessels to the north, and steered for Veey, where they +expected much assistance from the towns. + + + +7. FALL OF KING HAKON. + +Soon after they saw the sails of Erling's fleet, and both fleets +came in sight of each other. Eindride Unge had a ship called +Draglaun, which was a large buss-like long-ship, but which had +but a small crew; for those who belonged to her had run on board +of other ships, and she was therefore the hindmost of Hakon's +fleet. When Eindride came abreast of the island Sek, the +Baekisudin, which Erling Skakke himself commanded, came up with +her; and these two ships were bound fast together. King Hakon +and his followers had arrived close to Veey; but when they heard +the war-horn they turned again to assist Eindride. Now they +began the battle on both sides, as the vessels came up. Many of +the sails lay midships across the vessels; and the ships were not +made fast to each other, but they lay side by side. The conflict +was not long before there came disorder in Hakon's ship; and some +fell, and others sprang overboard. Hakon threw over him a grey +cloak, and jumped on board another ship; but when he had been +there a short time he thought he had got among his enemies; and +when he looked about him he saw none of his men nor of his ships +near him. Then he went into the Baekisudin to the forecastle- +men, and begged his life. They took him in their keeping, and +gave him quarter. In this conflict there was a great loss of +people, but principally of Hakon's men. In the Baekisudin fell +Nikolas, Simon Skalp's son; and Erling's men are accused of +having killed him themselves. Then there was a pause in the +battle, and the vessels separated. It was now told to Erling +that Hakon was on board of his ship; that the forecastle-men had +taken him, and threatened that they would defend him with arms. +Erling sent men forwards in the ship to bring the forecastle-men +his orders to guard Hakon well, so that he should not get away. +He at the same time let it be understood that he had no objection +to giving the king life and safety, if the other chiefs were +willing, and a peace could be established. All the forecastle- +men gave their chief great credit and honour for these words. +Then Erling ordered anew a blast of the war-horns, and that the +ships should be attacked which had not lost their men; saying +that they would never have such another opportunity of avenging +King Inge. Thereupon they all raised a war-shout, encouraged +each other, and rushed to the assault. In this tumult King Hakon +received his death-wound. When his men knew he had fallen they +rowed with all their might against the enemy, threw away their +shields, slashed with both hands, and cared not for life. This +heat and recklessness, however, proved soon a great loss to them; +for Erling's men saw the unprotected parts of their bodies, and +where their blows would have effect. The greater part of Hakon's +men who remained fell here; and it was principally owing to the +want of numbers, as they were not enough to defend themselves. +They could not get quarter, also excepting those whom the chiefs +took under their protection and bound themselves to pay ransom +for. The following of Hakon's people fell: Sigurd Kapa, Sigurd +Hiupa, and Ragnvald Kunta; but some ships crews got away, rowed +into the fjords, and thus saved their lives. Hakon's body was +carried to Raumsdal, and buried there; but afterwards his +brother, King Sverre, had the body transported north to the +merchant town Nidaros, and laid in the stone wall of Christ +church south of the choir. + + + +8. FLIGHT OF THE CHIEFS OF HAKON'S MEN. + +Earl Sigurd, Eindride Unge, Onund Simonson, Frirek Keina, and +other chiefs kept the troop together, left the ships in Raumsdal, +and went up to the Uplands. King Magnus and his father Erling +sailed with their troops north to Nidaros in Throndhjem, and +subdued the country as they went along. Erling called together +an Eyra-thing, at which King Magnus was proclaimed king of all +Norway. Erling, however, remained there but a short time; for he +thought the Throndhjem people were not well affected towards him +and his son. King Magnus was then called king of the whole +country. + +King Hakon had been a handsome man in appearance, well grown, +tall and thin; but rather broad-shouldered, on which account his +men called him Herdebreid. As he was young in years, his +lendermen ruled for him. He was cheerful and friendly in +conversation, playful and youthful in his ways, and was much +liked by the people. + + + +9. OF KING SIGURD'S BEGINNING. + +There was an Upland man called Markus of Skog, who was a relation +of Earl Sigurd. Markus brought up a son of King Sigurd Mun, who +was also called Sigurd. This Sigurd was chosen king (A.D. 1162) +by the Upland people, by the advice of Earl Sigurd and the other +chiefs who had followed King Hakon. They had now a great army, +and the troops were divided in two bodies; so that Markus and the +king were less exposed where there was anything to do, and Earl +Sigurd and his troop, along with the lendermen, were most in the +way of danger. They went with their troops mostly through the +Uplands, and sometimes eastwards to Viken. Erling Skakke had his +son King Magnus always with him, and he had also the whole fleet +and the land defence under him. He was a while in Bergen in +autumn; but went from thence eastward to Viken, where he settled +in Tunsberg for his winter quarters (A.D. 1163), and collected in +Viken all the taxes and revenues that belonged to Magnus as king; +and he had many and very fine troops. As Earl Sigurd had but a +small part of the country, and kept many men on foot, he soon was +in want of money; and where there was no chief in the +neighbourhood he had to seek money by unlawful ways, -- sometimes +by unfounded accusations and fines, sometimes by open robbery. + + + +10. EARL SIGURD'S CONDEMNATION. + +At that time the realm of Norway was in great prosperity. The +bondes were rich and powerful, unaccustomed to hostilities or +violence, and the oppression of roving troops; so that there was +soon a great noise and scandal when they were despoiled and +robbed. The people of Viken were very friendly to Erling and +King Magnus, principally from the popularity of the late King +Inge Haraldson; for the Viken people had always served under his +banner. Erling kept a guard in the town, and twelve men were on +watch every night. Erling had Things regularly with the bondes, +at which the misdeeds of Sigurd's people were often talked over; +and by the representations of Erling and his adherents, the +bondes were brought unanimously to consider that it would be a +great good fortune if these bands should be rooted out. Arne, +the king's relation, spoke well and long on this subject, and at +last severely; and required that all who were at the Thing, -- +men-at-arms, bondes, towns-men, and merchants, -- should come to +the resolution to sentence according to law Earl Sigurd and all +his troop, and deliver them to Satan, both living and dead. From +the animosity and hatred of the people, this was agreed to by +all; and thus the unheard-of deed was adopted and confirmed by +oath, as if a judgment in the case was delivered there by the +Thing according to law. The priest Hroald the Long-winded, who +was a very eloquent man, spoke in the case; but his speech was to +the same purpose as that of others who had spoken before. Erling +gave a feast at Yule in Tunsberg, and paid the wages of the +men-at-arms at Candlemas. + + + +11. OF ERLING. + +Earl Sigurd went with his best troops down to Viken, where many +people were obliged to submit to his superior force, and many had +to pay money. He drove about thus widely higher up the country, +penetrating into different districts. But there were some in his +troop who desired privately to make peace with Erling; but they +got back the answer, that all who asked for their lives should +obtain quarter, but they only should get leave to remain in the +country who had not been guilty of any great offenses against +Erling. And when Sigurd's adherents heard that they would not +get leave to remain in the country, they held together in one +body; for there were many among them who knew for certain that +Erling would look upon them as guilty of offences against him. +Philip Gyrdson made terms with Erling, got his property back, and +went home to his farm; but soon after Sigurd's men came there, +and killed him. They committed many crimes against each other, +and many men were slain in their mutual persecution; but here +what was committed by the chiefs only is written down. + + + +12. ERLING GETS NEWS OF EARL SIGURD. + +It was in the beginning of Lent that news came to Erling that +Earl Sigurd intended to come upon him; and news of him came here +and there, sometimes nearer, sometimes farther off. Erling sent +out spies in all quarters around to discover where they were. +Every evening he assembled all the men-at-arms by the war-horn +out of the town; and for a long time in the winter they lay under +arms all night, ready to be drawn up in array. At last Erling +got intelligence that Sigurd and his followers were not far +distant, up at the farm Re. Erling then began his expedition out +of the town, and took with him all the towns-people who were able +to carry arms and had arms, and likewise all the merchants; and +left only twelve men behind to keep watch in the town. Erling +went out of the town on Thursday afternoon, in the second week of +Lent (February 19); and every man had two days' provisions with +him. They marched by night, and it was late before they got out +of the town with the men. Two men were with each shield and each +horse; and the people, when mustered, were about 1200 men. When +they met their spies, they were informed that Sigurd was at Re, +in a house called Rafnnes, and had 500 men. Then Erling called +together his people; told them the news he had received, and all +were eager to hasten their march, fall on them in the houses, or +engage them by night. + +Erling replied to them thus: -- "It is probable that we and Earl +Sigurd shall soon meet. There are also many men in this band +whose handy-work remains in our memories; such as cutting down +King Inge, and so many more of our friends, that it would take +long to reckon them up. These deeds they did by the power of +Satan, by witchcraft, and by villainy; for it stands in our laws +and country rights, that however highly a man may have been +guilty, it shall be called villainy and cowardly murder to kill +him in the night. This band has had its luck hitherto by +following the counsel of men acquainted with witchcraft and +fighting by night, and not in the light of day; and by this +proceeding have they been victorious hitherto over the chiefs +whose heads they have laid low on the earth. Now we have often +seen, and proved, how unsuitable and improper it is to go into +battle in the nighttime; therefore let us rather have before our +eyes the example of chiefs better known to us, and who deserve +better to be imitated, and fight by open day in regular battle +array, and not steal upon sleeping men in the night. We have +people enough against them, so few as they are. Let us, +therefore, wait for day and daylight, and keep together in our +array in case they attack us." + +Thereafter the whole army sat down. Some opened up bundles of +hay, and made a bed of it for themselves; some sat upon their +shields, and thus waited the daydawn. The weather was raw, and +there was a wet snowdrift. + + + +13. OF EARL SIGURD'S BATTLE ARRAY. + +Earl Sigurd got the first intelligence of Erling's army, when it +was already near to the house. His men got up, and armed +themselves; but not knowing how many men Erling had with him, +some were inclined to fly, but the most determined to stand. +Earl Sigurd was a man of understanding, and could talk well, but +certainly was not considered brave enough to take a strong +resolution; and indeed the earl showed a great inclination to +fly, for which he got many stinging words from his men-at-arms. +As day dawned, they began on both sides to draw up their battle +array. Earl Sigurd placed his men on the edge of a ridge between +the river and the house, at a place at which a little stream runs +into the river. Erling and his people placed their array on the +other side of the river; but at the back of his array were men on +horseback well armed, who had the king with them. When Earl +Sigurd's men saw that there was so great a want of men on their +side, they held a council, and were for taking to the forest. +But Earl Sigurd said, "Ye alleged that I had no courage, but it +will now be proved; and let each of you take care not to fail, or +fly, before I do so. We have a good battle-field. Let them +cross the bridge; but as soon as the banner comes over it let us +then rush down the hill upon them, and none desert his +neighbour." + +Earl Sigurd had on a red-brown kirtle, and a red cloak, of which +the corners were tied and turned back; shoes on his feet; and a +shield and sword called Bastard. The earl said, "God knows that +I would rather get at Erling Skakke with a stroke of Bastard, +than receive much gold." + + + +14. EARL SIGURD'S FALL. + +Erling Skakke's army wished to go on to the bridge; but Erling +told them to go up along the river, which was small, and not +difficult to cross, as its banks were flat; and they did so. +Earl Sigurd's array proceeded up along the ridge right opposite +to them; but as the ridge ended, and the ground was good and +level over the river, Erling told his men to sing a Paternoster, +and beg God to give them the victory who best deserved it. Then +they all sang aloud "Kyrie Eleison", and struck with their +weapons on their shields. But with this singing 300 men of +Erling's people slipped away and fled. Then Erling and his +people went across the river, and the earl's men raised the +war-shout; but there was no assault from the ridge down upon +Erling's array, but the battle began upon the hill itself. They +first used spears then edge weapons; and the earl's banner soon +retired so far back, that Erling and his men scaled the ridge. +The battle lasted but a short time before the earl's men fled to +the forest, which they had close behind them. This was told Earl +Sigurd, and his men bade him fly; but he replied, "Let us on +while we can." And his men went bravely on, and cut down on all +sides. In this tumult fell Earl Sigurd and Jon Sveinson, and +nearly sixty men. Erling lost few men, and pursued the fugitives +to the forest. There Erling halted his troops, and turned back. +He came just as the king's slaves were about stripping the +clothes off Earl Sigurd, who was not quite lifeless. He had put +his sword in the sheath, and it lay by his side. Erling took it, +struck the slaves with it, and drove them away. Then Erling, +with his troops, returned, and sat down in Tunsberg. Seven days +after Earl Sigurd's fall Erling's men took Eindride Unge +prisoner, and killed him, with all his ship's crew. + + + +15. MARKUS OF SKOG, AND SIGURD SIGURDSON. + +Markus of Skog, and King Sigurd, his foster-son, rode down to +Viken towards spring, and there got a ship; but when Erling heard +it he went eastwards against them, and they met at Konungahella. +Markus fled with his followers to the island Hising; and there +the country people of Hising came down in swarms, and placed +themselves in Markus's and Sigurd's array. Erling and his men +rowed to the shore; but Markus's men shot at them. Then Erling +said to his people, "Let us take their ships, but not go up to +fight with a land force. The Hisingers are a bad set to quarrel +with, -- hard, and without understanding. They will keep this +troop but a little while among them, for Hising is but a small +spot." This was done: they took the ships, and brought them over +to Konungahella. Markus and his men went up to the forest +district, from which they intended to make assaults, and they had +spies out on both sides. Erling had many men-at-arms with him, +whom he brought from other districts, and they made attacks on +each other in turn. + + + +16. BEGINNING OF ARCHBISHOP EYSTEIN. + +Eystein, a son of Erlend Himaide, was selected to be archbishop, +after Archbishop Jon's death; and he was consecrated the same +year King Inge was killed. Now when Archbishop Eystein came to +his see, he made himself beloved by all the country, as an +excellent active man of high birth. The Throndhjem people, in +particular, received him with pleasure; for most of the great +people in the Throndhjem district were connected with the +archbishop by relationship or other connection, and all were his +friends. The archbishop brought forward a request to the bondes +in a speech, in which he set forth the great want of money for +the see, and also how much greater improvement of the revenues +would be necessary to maintain it suitably, as it was now of much +more importance than formerly when the bishop's see was first +established. He requested of the bondes that they should give +him, for determining law-suits, an ore of silver value, instead +of what they had before paid, which was an ore of judgment money, +of that kind which was paid to the king in judging cases; and the +difference between the two kinds of ore was, that the ore he +desired was a half greater than the other. By help of the +archbishop's relations and friends, and his own activity, this +was carried; and it was fixed by law in all the Throndhjem +district, and in all the districts belonging to his +archbishopric. + + + +17. OF MARKUS AND KING SIGURD. + +When Sigurd and Markus lost their ships in the Gaut river, and +saw they could get no hold on Erling, they went to the Uplands, +and proceeded by land north to Throndhjem. Sigurd was received +there joyfully, and chosen king at an Eyra-thing; and many +gallant men, with their sons, attached themselves to his party. +They fitted out ships, rigged them for a voyage, and proceeded +when summer came southwards to More, and took up all the royal +revenues wheresoever they came. At this time the following +lendermen were appointed in Bergen for the defence of the +country: -- Nikolas Sigurdson, Nokve Palson, and several military +leaders; as Thorolf Dryl, Thorbjorn Gjaldkere, and many others. +As Markus and Sigurd sailed south, they heard that Erling's men +were numerous in Bergen; and therefore they sailed outside the +coast-rocks, and southwards past Bergen. It was generally +remarked, that Markus's men always got a fair wind, wherever they +wished to sail to. + + + +18. MARKUS AND KING SIGURD KILLED. + +As soon as Erling Skakke heard that Sigurd and Markus had sailed +southwards, he hastened to Viken, and drew together an armed +force; and he soon had a great many men, and many stout ships. +But when he came farther in Viken, he met with a strong contrary +wind, which kept him there in port the whole summer. Now when +Sigurd and Markus came east to Lister, they heard that Erling had +a great force in Viken; so they turned to the north again. But +when they reached Hordaland, with the intention of sailing to +Bergen, and came opposite the town, Nikolas and his men rowed out +against them, with more men and larger ships than they had. +Sigurd and Markus saw no other way of escaping but to row away +southwards. Some of them went out to sea, others got south to +the sound, and some got into the Fjords. Markus, and some people +with him, sprang upon an isle called Skarpa. Nikolas and his men +took their ships, gave Jon Halkelson and a few others quarter, +but killed the most of them they could get hold of. Some days +after Eindride Heidafylja found Sigurd and Markus, and they were +brought to Bergen. Sigurd was beheaded outside of Grafdal, and +Markus and another man were hanged at Hvarfsnes. This took place +on Michaelmas day (September 29, 1163), and the band which had +followed them was dispersed. + + + +19. ERLING AND THE PEOPLE OF HISING ISLE. + +Frirek Keina and Bjarne the Bad, Onund Simonson and Ornolf Skorpa +had rowed out to sea with some ships, and sailed outside along +the land to the east. Wheresoever they came to the land they +plundered, and killed Erling's friends. Now when Erling heard +that Sigurd and Markus were killed, he gave leave to the +lendermen and people of the levy to return home; but he himself, +with his men, set his course eastward across the Folden fjord, +for he heard of Markus's men there. Erling sailed to +Konungahella, where he remained the autumn; and in the first week +of winter Erling went out to the island Hising with his men, and +called the bondes to a Thing. When the Hising people came to the +Thing, Erling laid his law-suit against them for having joined +the bands of Sigurd and Markus, and having raised men against +him. Assur was the name of one of the greatest of the bondes on +the island, and he answered Erling on account of the others. The +Thing was long assembled; but at the close the bondes gave the +case into Erling's own power, and he appointed a meeting in the +town within one week, and named fifteen bondes who should appear +there. When they came, he condemned them to pay a penalty of 300 +head of cattle; and the bondes returned home ill pleased at this +sentence. Soon after the Gaut river was frozen, and Erling's +ships were fast in the ice; and the bondes kept back the mulct, +and lay assembled for some time. Erling made a Yule feast in the +town; but the Hising people had joint-feasts with each other, and +kept under arms during Yule. The night after the fifth day of +Yule Erling went up to Hising, surrounded Assur's house, and +burnt him in it. He killed one hundred men in all, burnt three +houses, and then returned to Konungahella. The bondes came then, +according to agreement, to pay the mulct. + + + +20. DEATH OF FRIREK KEINA AND BJARNE. + +Erling Skakke made ready to sail in spring as soon as he could +get his ships afloat for ice, and sailed from Konungahella; for +he heard that those who had formerly been Markus's friends were +marauding in the north of Viken. Erling sent out spies to learn +their doings, searched for them, and found them lying in a +harbour. Onund Simonson and Ornolf Skorpa escaped, but Frirek +Keina and Bjarne the Bad were taken, and many of their followers +were killed. Erling had Frirek bound to an anchor and thrown +overboard; and for that deed Erling was much detested in the +Throndhjem country, for the most powerful men there were +relatives of Frirek. Erling ordered Bjarne the Bad to be hanged; +and he uttered, according to his custom, many dreadful +imprecations during his execution. Thorbjorn Skakkaskald tells +of this business: -- + + "East of the Fjord beyond the land, + Unnoticed by the pirate band, + Erling stole on them ere they knew, + And seized and killed all Keina's crew. + Keina, fast to an anchor bound, + Was thrown into the deep-blue Sound; + And Bjarne swung high on gallows-tree, + A sight all good men loved to see." + +Onund and Ornolf, with the band that had escaped, fled to +Denmark; but were sometimes in Gautland, or in Viken. + + + +21. CONFERENCE BETWEEN ERLING AND EYSTEIN. + +Erling Skakke sailed after this to Tunsberg, and remained there +very long in spring (A.D. 1164); but when summer came he +proceeded north to Bergen, where at that time a great many people +were assembled. There was the legate from Rome, Stephanus; the +Archbishop Eystein, and other bishops of the country. There was +also Bishop Brand, who was consecrated bishop of Iceland, and Jon +Loptson, a daughter's son of King Magnus Barefoot; and on this +occasion King Magnus and Jon's other relations acknowledged the +relationship with him. + +Archbishop Eystein and Erling Skakke often conversed together in +private; and, among other things, Erling asked one day, "Is it +true, sir, what people tell me, that you have raised the value of +the ore upon the people north in Throndhjem, in the law cases in +which money-fees are paid you ?" + +"It is so," said the archbishop, "that the bondes have allowed me +an advance on the ore of law casualties; but they did it +willingly, and without any kind of compulsion, and have thereby +added to their honour for God and the income of the bishopric." + +Erling replies, "Is this according to the law of the holy Olaf? +or have you gone to work more arbitrarily in this than is written +down in the lawbook?" + +The archbishop replies, "King Olaf the Holy fixed the laws, to +which he received the consent and affirmative of the people; but +it will not be found in his laws that it is forbidden to increase +God's right." + +Erling: "If you augment your right, you must assist us to augment +as much the king's right." + +The archbishop: "Thou hast already augmented enough thy son's +power and dominion; and if I have exceeded the law in taking an +increase of the ore from the Throndhjem people, it is, I think, a +much greater breach of the law that one is king over the country +who is not a king's son, and which has neither any support in the +law, nor in any precedent here in the country." + +Erling: "When Magnus was chosen king, it was done with your +knowledge and consent, and also of all the other bishops here in +the country." + +Archbishop: "You promised then, Erling, that provided we gave our +consent to electing Magnus king, you would, on all occasions, and +with all your power, strengthen God's rights." + +Erling: "I may well admit that I have promised to preserve and +strengthen God's commands and the laws of the land with all my +power, and with the king's strength; and now I consider it to be +much more advisable, instead of accusing each other of a breach +of our promises, to hold firmly by the agreement entered into +between us. Do you strengthen Magnus in his dominion, according +to what you have promised; and I will, on my part, strengthen +your power in all that can be of advantage or honour." + +The conversation now took a more friendly turn; and Erling said, +"Although Magnus was not chosen king according to what has been +the old custom of this country, yet can you with your power give +him consecration as king, as God's law prescribes, by anointing +the king to sovereignty; and although I be neither a king, nor of +kingly race, yet most of the kings, within my recollection, have +not known the laws or the constitution of the country so well as +I do. Besides, the mother of King Magnus is the daughter of a +king and queen born in lawful wedlock, and Magnus is son of a +queen and a lawfully married wife. Now if you will give him +royal consecration, no man can take royalty from him. William +Bastard was not a king's son; but he was consecrated and crowned +king of England, and the royalty in England has ever since +remained with his race, and all have been crowned. Svein Ulfson +was not a king's son in Denmark, and still he was a crowned king, +and his sons likewise, and all his descendants have been crowned +kings. Now we have here in Norway an archiepiscopal seat, to the +glory and honour of the country; let us also have a crowned king, +as well as the Danes and Englishmen." + +Erling and the archbishop afterwards talked often of this matter, +and they were quite agreed. Then the archbishop brought the +business before the legate, and got him easily persuaded to give +his consent. Thereafter the archbishop called together the +bishops, and other learned men, and explained the subject to +them. They all replied in the same terms, that they would follow +the counsels of the archbishop, and all were eager to promote the +consecration as soon as the archbishop pleased. + + + +22. KING MAGNUS'S CONSECRATION. + +Erling Skakke then had a great feast prepared in the king's +house. The large hall was covered with costly cloth and +tapestry, and adorned with great expense. The court-men and all +the attendants were there entertained, and there were numerous +guests, and many chiefs. Then King Magnus received the royal +consecration from the Archbishop Eystein; and at the consecration +there were five other bishops and the legate, besides a number of +other clergy. Erling Skakke, and with him twelve other +lendermen, administered to the king the oath of the law; and the +day of the consecration the king and Erling had the legate, the +archbishop, and all the other bishops as guests; and the feast +was exceedingly magnificent, and the father and son distributed +many great presents. King Magnus was then eight years of age, +and had been king for three years. + + + +23. KING VALDEMAR'S EMBASSY. + +When the Danish king Valdemar heard the news from Norway that +Magnus was become king of the whole country, and all the other +parties in the country were rooted out, he sent his men with a +letter to King Magnus and Erling, and reminded them of the +agreement which Erling had entered into, under oath, with King +Valdemar, of which we have spoken before; namely, that Viken from +the east to Rygiarbit should be ceded to King Valdemar, if Magnus +became the sole king of Norway. When the ambassadors came +forward and showed Erling the letter of the Danish king, and he +heard the Danish king's demand upon Norway, he laid it before the +other chiefs by whose counsels he usually covered his acts. All, +as one man, replied that the Danes should never hold the +slightest portion of Norway; for never had things been worse in +the land than when the Danes had power in it. The ambassadors of +the Danish king were urgent with Erling for an answer, and +desired to have it decided; but Erling begged them to proceed +with him east to Viken, and said he would give his final answer +when he had met with the men of most understanding and influence +in Viken. + + + +24. ERLING AND THE PEOPLE OF VIKEN. + +Erling Skakke proceeded in autumn to Viken, and stayed in +Tunsberg, from whence he sent people to Sarpsborg to summon a +Thing (1) of four districts; and then Erling went there with his +people. + +When the Thing was seated Erling made a speech in which he +explained the resolutions which had been settled upon between him +and the Danish king, the first time he collected troops against +his enemies. "I will," said Erling, "keep faithfully the +agreement which we then entered into with the king, if it be your +will and consent, bondes, rather to serve the Danish king than +the king who is now consecrated and crowned king of this +country." + +The bondes replied thus to Erling's speech: "Never will we become +the Danish king's men, as long as one of us Viken men is in +life." And the whole assembly, with shouts and cries, called on +Erling to keep the oath he had taken to defend his son's +dominions, "should we even all follow thee to battle." And so +the Thing was dissolved. + +The ambassadors of the Danish king then returned home, and told +the issue of their errand. The Danes abused Erling, and all +Northmen, and declared that evil only proceeded from them; and +the report was spread, that in Spring the Danish king would send +out an army and lay waste Norway. Erling returned in autumn +north to Bergen, stayed there all winter, and gave their pay to +his people. + + +ENDNOTES: +(1) This reference to a Thing of the people in the affairs of + the country is a striking example of the right of the Things + being recognised, in theory at least, as fully as the right + of our parliaments in later times. -- L. + + + +25. LETTERS OF THE THRONDHJEM PEOPLE. + +The same winter (A.D. 1165) some Danish people came by land +through the Uplands, saying they were to go, as was then the +general practice, to the holy King Olaf's festival. But when +they came to the Throndhjem country, they went to many men of +influence, and told their business; which was, that the Danish +king had sent them to desire their friendship, and consent, if he +came to the country, promising them both power and money. With +this verbal message came also the Danish king's letter and seal, +and a message to the Throndhjem people that they should send back +their letters and seals to him. They did so, and the most of +them received well the Danish king's message; whereupon the +messengers returned back towards Lent. Erling was in Bergen; and +towards spring Erling's friends told him the loose reports they +had heard by some merchant vessels that had arrived from +Throndhjem, that the Throndhjem people were in hostility openly +against him; and had declared that if Erling came to Throndhjem, +he should never pass Agdanes in life. Erling said this was mere +folly and idle talk. Erling now made it known that he would go +to Unarheim to the Gangdag-thing; and ordered a cutter of twenty +rowing benches to be fitted out, a boat of fifteen benches, and a +provision-ship. When the vessels were ready, there came a strong +southerly gale. On the Thursday of the Ascension week, Erling +called his people by sound of trumpet to their departure; but the +men were loath to leave the town, and were ill inclined to row +against the wind. Erling brought his vessels to Biskupshafn. +"Well," said Erling, "since ye are so unwilling to row against +the wind, raise the mast, hoist the sails, and let the ship go +north." They did so, and sailed northwards both day and night. +On Wednesday, in the evening, they sailed in past Agdanes, where +they found a fleet assembled of many merchant vessels, rowing +craft, and boats, all going towards the town to the celebration +of the festival, -- some before them, some behind them -- so that +the townspeople paid no attention to the long-ships coming. + + + +26. ERLING AND THE PEOPLE OF THRONDHJEM. + +Erling came to the town just as vespers was being sung in Christ +church. He and his men ran into the town, to where it was told +them that the lenderman, Alf Rode, a son of Ottar Birting, was +still sitting at table, and drinking with his men. Erling fell +upon them; and Alf was killed, with almost all his men. Few +other men were killed; for they had almost all gone to church, as +this was the night before Christ's Ascension-day. In the morning +early, Erling called all the people by sound of trumpet to a +Thing out upon Evrar. At the Thing Erling laid a charge against +the Throndhjem people, accusing them of intending to betray the +country, and take it from the king; and named Bard Standale, Pal +Andreason, and Razabard, who then presided over the town's +affairs, and many others. They, in their defence, denied the +accusation; but Erling's writer stood up, produced many letters +with seals, and asked if they acknowledged their seals which they +had sent to the Danish king; and thereupon the letters were read. +There was also a Danish man with Erling who had gone with the +letters in winter, and whom Erling for that purpose had taken +into his service. He told to these men the very words which each +of them had used. "And you, Razabard, spoke, striking your +breast; and the very words you used were, `Out of this breast are +all these counsels produced.'" Bard replied, "I was wrong in the +head, sirs, when I spoke so." There was now nothing to be done +but to submit the case entirely to the sentence Erling might give +upon it. He took great sums of money from many as fines, and +condemned all those who had been killed as lawless, and their +deeds as lawless; making their deaths thereby not subject to +mulct. Then Erling returned south to Bergen. + + + +27. KING VALDEMAR'S EXPEDITION TO NORWAY. + +The Danish king Valdemar assembled in spring (A.D. 1165) a great +army, and proceeded with it north to Viken. As soon as he +reached the dominions of the king of Norway, the bondes assembled +in a great multitude. The king advanced peacefully; but when +they came to the mainland, the people shot at them even when +there were only two or three together, from which the ill-will of +the country people towards them was evident. When they came to +Tunsberg, King Valdemar summoned a Hauga-thing; but nobody +attended it from the country parts. Then Valdemar spoke thus to +his troops: "It is evident that all the country-people are +against us; and now we have two things to choose: the one to go +through the country, sword in hand, sparing neither man nor +beast; the other is to go back without effecting our object. And +it is more my inclination to go with the army to the East against +the heathens, of whom we have enough before us in the East +country, than to kill Christian people here, although they have +well deserved it." All the others had a greater desire for a +foray; but the king ruled, and they all returned back to Denmark +without effecting their purpose. They pillaged, however, all +around in the distant islands, or where the king was not in the +neighbourhood. They then returned south to Denmark without doing +anything. + + + +28. ERLING'S EXPEDITION TO JUTLAND. + +As soon as Erling heard that a Danish force had come to Viken, he +ordered a levy through all the land, both of men and ships, so +that there was a great assemblage of men in arms; and with this +force he proceeded eastward along the coast. But when he came to +Lidandisnes, he heard that the Danish army had returned south to +Denmark, after plundering all around them in Viken. Then Erling +gave all the people of the levy permission to return home; but he +himself and some lendermen, with many vessels, sailed to Jutland +after the Danes. When they came to a place called Dyrsa, the +Danes who had returned from the expedition lay there with many +ships. Erling gave them battle, and there was a fight, in which +the Danes soon fled with the loss of many people; and Erling and +his men plundered the ships and the town, and made a great booty, +with which they returned to Norway. Thereafter, for a time, +there was hostility between Norway and Denmark. + + + +29. ERLING'S EXPEDITION TO DENMARK. + +The princess Krisfin went south in autumn (A.D. 1165) to Denmark, +to visit her relation King Valdemar, who was her cousin. The +king received her kindly, and gave her fiefs in his kingdom, so +that she could support her household well. She often conversed +with the king, who was remarkably kind towards her. In the +spring following (A.D. 1166) Kristin sent to Erling, and begged +him to pay a visit to the Danish king, and enter into a peace +with him. In summer Erling was in Viken, where he fitted out a +long-ship, manned it with his finest lads, and sailed (a single +ship) over to Jutland. When he heard that the Danish king +Valdemar was in Randaros, Erling sailed thither, and came to the +town just as the king sat at the dinner-table, and most of the +people were taking their meal. When his people had made +themselves ready according to Erling's orders, set up the +ship-tents, and made fast the ship, Erling landed with twelve +men, all in armour, with hats over their helmets, and swords +under their cloaks. They went to the king's lodging, where the +doors stood open, and the dishes were being carried in. Erling +and his people went in immediately, and drew up in front of the +high-seat. Erling said, "Peace and safe conduct we desire, king, +both here and to return home." + +The king looked at him, and said, "Art thou here, Erling?" + +He replies, "Here is Erling; and tell us, at once, if we shall +have peace and safe conduct." + +There were eighty of the king's men in the room, but all unarmed. +The king replies, "Peace ye shall have, Erling, according to thy +desire; for I will not use force or villainy against a man who +comes to visit me." + +Erling then kissed the king's hand, went out, and down to his +ship. Erling stayed at Randaros some time with the king, and +they talked about terms of peace between them and between the +countries. They agreed that Erling should remain as hostage with +the Danish king; and that Asbjorn Snara, Bishop Absalon's +brother, should go to Norway as hostage on the other part. + + + +30. KING VALDEMAR AND ERLING. + +In a conference which King Valdemar and Erling once had together. +Erling said, "Sire, it appears to me likely that it might lead to +a peace between the countries if you got that part of Norway +which was promised you in our agreement; but if it should be so, +what chief would you place over it? Would he be a Dane?" + +"No," replied the king; "no Danish chief would go to Norway, +where he would have to manage an obstinate hard people, when he +has it so easy here with me." + +Erling: "It was on that very consideration that I came here; for +I would not on any account in the world deprive myself of the +advantage of your friendship. In days of old other men, Hakon +Ivarson and Fin Arnason, came also from Norway to Denmark, and +your predecessor, King Svein, made them both earls. Now I am not +a man of less power in Norway than they were then, and my +influence is not less than theirs; and the king gave them the +province of Halland to rule over, which he himself had and owned +before. Now it appears to me, sire, that you, if I become your +man and vassal, can allow me to hold of you the fief which my son +Magnus will not deny me, by which I will be bound in duty, and +ready, to undertake all the service belonging to that title." + +Erling spoke such things, and much more in the same strain, until +it came at last to this, that Erling became Valdemar's man and +vassal; and the king led Erling to the earl's seat one day, and +gave him the title of earl, and Viken as a fief under his rule. +Earl Erling went thereafter to Norway, and was earl afterwards as +long as he lived; and also the peace with the Danish king was +afterwards always preserved. Earl Erling had four sons by his +concubines. The one was called Hreidar, the next Ogmund; and +these by two different mothers: the third was called Fin; the +fourth Sigurd: these were younger, and their mother was Asa the +Fair. The princess Kristin and Earl Erling had a daughter called +Ragnhild, who was married to Jon Thorbergson of Randaberg. +Kristin went away from the country with a man called Grim Rusle; +and they went to Constantinople, where they were for a time, and +had some children. + + + +31. BEGINNING OF OLAF. + +Olaf, a son of Gudbrand Skafhaug, and Maria, a daughter of King +Eystein Magnuson, were brought up in the house of Sigurd Agnhot +in the Uplands. While Earl Erling was in Denmark (A.D. 1166), +Olaf and his foster-father gathered a troop together, and many +Upland people joined them; and Olaf was chosen king by them. +They went with their bands through the Uplands, and sometimes +down to Viken, and sometimes east to the forest settlements; but +never came on board of ships. Now when, Earl Erling got news of +this troop, he hastened to Viken with his forces; and was there +in summer in his ships, and in Oslo in autumn (A.D. 1167) and +kept Yule there. He had spies up the country after this troop, +and went himself, along with Orm, the King-brother, up the +country to follow them. Now when they came to a lake called.... +.... (1) they took all the vessels that were upon the lake. + + +ENDNOTES: +(1) The name of the lake not given. + + + +32. OF ERLING. + +The priest who performed divine service at a place called +Rydiokul, close by the lake, invited the earl to a feast at +Candlemas. The earl promised to come; and thinking it would be +good to hear mass there, he rowed with his attendants over the +lake the night before Candlemas day. But the priest had another +plan on hand. He sent men to bring Olaf news of Earl Erling's +arrival. The priest gave Erling strong drink in the evening, and +let him have an excessive quantity of it. When the earl wished +to lie down and sleep, the beds were made ready in the drinking- +room; but when they had slept a short time the earl awoke, and +asked if it was not the hour for matins. The priest replied, +that only a small part of the night was gone, and told him to +sleep in peace. The earl replied, "I dream of many things +to-night, and I sleep ill." He slumbered again, but awoke soon, +and told the priest to get up and sing mass. The priest told the +earl to sleep, and said it was but midnight. Then the earl again +lay down, slept a little while, and, springing out of bed, +ordered his men to put on their clothes. They did so; took their +weapons, went to the church, and laid their arms outside while +the priest was singing matins. + + + +33. BATTLE AT RYDIOKUL. + +As Olaf got the message in the evening, they travelled in the +night six miles, which people considered an extraordinarily long +march. They arrived at Rydiokul while the priest was still +singing mass, and it was pitch-dark. Olaf and his men went into +the room, raised a war-shout, and killed some of the earl's men +who had not gone to the early mass. Now when Erling and his men +heard the war-shout, they ran to their weapons, and hastened down +to their ships. Olaf and his men met them at a fence, at which +there was a sharp conflict. Erling and his men retreated along +the fence, which protected them. Erling had far fewer men, and +many of them had fallen, and still more were wounded. What +helped Earl Erling and his men the most was, that Olaf's men +could not distinguish them, it was so dark; and the earl's men +were always drawing down to their ships. Are Thorgeirson, father +of Bishop Gudmund fell there, and many other of Erling's court- +men. Erling himself was wounded in the left side; but some say +he did it himself in drawing his sword. Orm the King-brother was +also severely wounded; and with great difficulty they escaped to +their ships, and instantly pushed off from land. It was +generally considered as a most unlucky meeting for Olaf's people, +as Earl Erling was in a manner sold into their hands, if they had +proceeded with common prudence. He was afterwards called Olaf +the Unlucky; but others called his people Hat-lads. They went +with their bands through the Uplands as before. Erling again +went down to Viken to his ships, and remained there all summer. +Olaf was in the Uplands, and sometimes east in the forest +districts, where he and his troop remained all the next winter +(A.D. 1168). + + + +34. BATTLE AT STANGAR. + +The following spring the Hat-lads went down to Viken, and raised +the king's taxes all around, and remained there long in summer. +When Earl Erling heard this, he hastened with his troops to meet +them in Viken, and fell in with them east of the Fjord, at a +place called Stangar; where they had a great battle, in which +Erling was victorious. Sigurd Agnhot, and many others of Olaf's +men, fell there; but Olaf escaped by flight, went south to +Denmark, and was all winter (A.D. 1169) in Alaborg in Jutland. +The following spring Olaf fell into an illness which ended in +death, and he was buried in the Maria church; and the Danes call +him a saint. + + + +35. HARALD'S DEATH. + +King Magnus had a lenderman called Nikolas Kufung, who was a son +of Pal Skaptason. He took Harald prisoner, who called himself a +son of King Sigurd Haraldson and the princess Kristin, and a +brother of King Magnus by the mother's side. Nikolas brought +Harald to Bergen, and delivered him into Earl Erling's hands. It +was Erling's custom when his enemies came before him, that he +either said nothing to them, or very little, and that in all +gentleness, when he had determined to put them to death; or rose +with furious words against them, when he intended to spare their +lives. Erling spoke but little to Harald, and many, therefore, +suspected his intentions; and some begged King Magnus to put in a +good word for Harald with the earl; and the king did so. The +earl replies, "Thy friends advise thee badly. Thou wouldst +govern this kingdom but a short time in peace and safety, if thou +wert to follow the counsels of the heart only." Earl Erling +ordered Harald to be taken to Nordnes, where he was beheaded. + + + +36. EYSTEIN EYSTEINSON AND THE BIRKEBEINS. + +There was a man called Eystein, who gave himself out for a son of +King Eystein Haraldson. He was at this time young, and not full +grown. It is told of him that he one summer appeared in +Svithjod, and went to Earl Birger Brosa, who was then married to +Brigida, Eystein's aunt, a daughter of King Harald Gille. +Eystein explained his business to him, and asked their +assistance. Both Earl Birger and his wife listened to him in a +friendly way, and promised him their confidence, and he stayed +with them a while. Earl Birger gave him some assistance of men, +and a good sum for travelling expenses; and both promised him +their friendship on his taking leave. Thereafter Eystein +proceeded north into Norway (A.D. 1174), and when he came down to +Viken people flocked to him in crowds; and Eystein was there +proclaimed king, and he remained in Viken in winter. As they +were very poor in money, they robbed all around, wherefore the +lendermen and bondes raised men against them; and being thus +overpowered by numbers, they fled away to the forests and +deserted hill grounds, where they lived for a long time. Their +clothes being worn out, they wound the bark of the birch-tree +about their legs, and thus were called by the bondes Birkebeins. +They often rushed down upon the settled districts, pushed on here +or there, and made an assault where they did not find many people +to oppose them. They had several battles with the bondes with +various success; and the Birkebeins held three battles in regular +array, and gained the victory in them all. At Krokaskog they had +nearly made an unlucky expedition, for a great number of bondes +and men-at-arms were assembled there against them; but the +Birkebeins felled brushwood across the roads, and retired into +the forest. They were two years (A.D. 1175-1176) in Viken before +they showed themselves in the northern parts of the country. + + + +37. BIRKEBEINS, KING EYSTEIN, AND SKAKKE. + +Magnus had been king for thirteen years when the Birkebeins first +made their appearance. They got themselves ships in the third +summer (A.D. 1176), with which they sailed along the coast +gathering goods and men. They were first in Viken; but when +summer advanced they proceeded northwards, and so rapidly that no +news preceded them until they came to Throndhjem. The +Birkebeins' troop consisted principally of hill-men and Elfgrims, +and many were from Thelemark; and all were well armed. Their +king, Eystein, was a handsome man, and with a little but good +countenance; and he was not of great stature, for his men called +him Eystein Meyla. King Magnus and Earl Erling were in Bergen +when the Birkebeins sailed past it to the north; but they did not +hear of them. + +Earl Erling was a man of great understanding and power, an +excellent leader in war, and an able and prudent ruler of the +country; but he had the character of being cruel and severe. The +cause of this was principally that he never allowed his enemies +to remain in the country, even when they prayed to him for mercy; +and therefore many joined the bands which were collected against +him. Erling was a tall strong-made man, somewhat short-necked +and high-shouldered; had a long and sharp countenance of a light +complexion, and his hair became very grey. He bore his head a +little on one side; was free and agreeable in his manners. He +wore the old fashion of clothes, -- long body-pieces and long +arms to his coats, foreign cloak, and high shoes. He made the +king wear the same kind of dress in his youth; but when he grew +up, and acted for himself, he dressed very sumptuously. + +King Magnus was of a light turn of mind, full of jokes; a great +lover of mirth, and not less of women. + + + +38. OF NIKOLAS. + +Nikolas was a son of Sigurd Hranason and of Skialdvor, a daughter +of Brynjolf Ulfalde, and a sister of Haldor Brynjolfson by the +father's side, and of King Magnus Barefoot by the mother's side. +Nikolas was a distinguished chief, who had a farm at Ongul in +Halogaland, which was called Steig. Nikolas had also a house in +Nidaros, below Saint Jon's church, where Thorgeir the scribe +lately dwelt. Nikolas was often in the town, and was president +of the townspeople. Skialdvor, Nikolas's daughter, was married +to Eirik Arnason, who was also a lenderman. + + + +39. OF EIRIK AND NIKOLAS. + +As the people of the town were coming from matins the last day of +Marymas (September 8th), Eirik came up to Nikolas, and said, +"Here are some fishermen come from the sea, who report that some +long-ships are sailing into the fjord; and people conjecture that +these may be the Birkebeins. It would be advisable to call the +townspeople together with the war-horns, to meet under arms out +on Eyrar." + +Nikolas replies, "I don't go after fishermen's reports; but I +shall send out spies to the fjord, and in the meantime hold a +Thing to-day." + +Eirik went home; but when they were ringing to high mass, and +Nikolas was going to church, Eirik came to hint again, and said, +"I believe the news to be true; for here are men who say they saw +them under sail; and I think it would be most advisable to ride +out of town, and gather men with arms; for it appears to me the +townspeople will be too few." + +Nikolas replies, "Thou art mixing everything together; let us +first hear mass, and then take our resolution." + +Nikolas then went into the church. When the mass was over Eirik +went to Nikolas, and said, "My horses are saddled; I will ride +away." + +Nikolas replies, "Farewell, then: we will hold a Thing to-day on +the Eyrar, and examine what force of men there may be in the +town." + +Eirik rode away, and Nikolas went to his house, and then to +dinner. + + + +40. THE FALL OF NIKOLAS. + +The meat was scarcely put on the table, when a man came into the +house to tell Nikolas that the Birkebeins were roving up the +river. Then Nikolas called to his men to take their weapons. +When they were armed Nikolas ordered them to go up into the loft. +But that was a most imprudent step; for if they had remained in +the yard, the townspeople might have come to their assistance; +but now the Birkebeins filled the whole yard, and from thence +scrambled from all sides up to the loft. They called to Nikolas, +and offered him quarter, but he refused it. Then they attacked +the loft. Nikolas and his men defended themselves with bow-shot, +hand-shot, and stones of the chimney; but the Birkebeins hewed +down the houses, broke up the loft, and returned shot for shot +from bow or hand. Nikolas had a red shield in which were gilt +nails, and about it was a border of stars. The Birkebeins shot +so that the arrows went in up to the arrow feather. Then said +Nikolas, "My shield deceives me." Nikolas and a number of his +people fell, and his death was greatly lamented. The Birkebeins +gave all the towns-people their lives. + + + +41. EYSTEIN PROCLAIMED KING. + +Eystein was then proclaimed king, and all the people submitted to +him. He stayed a while in the town, and then went into the +interior of the Throndhjem land, where many joined him, and among +them Thorfin Svarte of Snos with a troop of people. When the +Birkebeins, in the beginning of winter (A.D. 1177), came again +into the town, the sons of Gudrun from Saltnes, Jon Ketling, +Sigurd, and William, joined them; and when they proceeded +afterwards from Nidaros up Orkadal, they could number nearly 2000 +men. They afterwards went to the Uplands, and on to Thoten and +Hadaland, and from thence to Ringerike, and subdued the country +wheresover they came. + + + +42. THE FALL OF KING EYSTEIN. + +King Magnus went eastward to Viken in autumn with a part of his +men and with him Orm, the king's brother; but Earl Erling +remained behind in Bergen to meet the Berkebeins in case they +took the sea route. King Magnus went to Tunsberg, where he and +Orm held their Yule (A.D. 1177). When King Magnus heard that the +Birkebeins were up in Re, the king and Orm proceeded thither with +their men. There was much snow, and it was dreadfully cold. +When they came to the farm they left the beaten track on the +road, and drew up their array outside of the fence, and trod a +path through the snow with their men, who were not quite 1500 in +number. The Birkebeins were dispersed here and there in other +farms, a few men in each house. When they perceived King +Magnus's army they assembled, and drew up in regular order; and +as they thought their force was larger than his, which it +actually was, they resolved to fight; but when they hurried +forward to the road only a few could advance at a time, which +broke their array, and the men fell who first advanced upon the +beaten way. Then the Birkebeins' banner was cut down; those who +were nearest gave way and some took to flight. King Magnus's men +pursued them, and killed one after the other as they came up with +them. Thus the Birkebeins could never form themselves in array; +and being exposed to the weapons of the enemy singly, many of +them fell, and many fled. It happened here, as it often does, +that although men be brave and gallant, if they have once been +defeated and driven to flight, they will not easily be brought to +turn round. Now the main body of the Birkebeins began to fly, +and many fell; because Magnus's men killed all they could lay +hold of, and not one of them got quarter. The whole body became +scattered far and wide. Eystein in his flight ran into a house, +and begged for his life, and that the bonde would conceal him; +but the bonde killed him, and then went to King Magnus, whom he +found at Rafnnes, where the king was in a room warming himself by +the fire along with many people. Some went for the corpse, and +bore it into the room, where the king told the people to come and +inspect the body. A man was sitting on a bench in the corner, +and he was a Birkebein, but nobody had observed him; and when he +saw and recognised his chief's body he sprang up suddenly and +actively, rushed out upon the floor, and with an axe he had in +his hands made a blow at King Magnus's neck between the +shoulders. A man saw the axe swinging, and pulled the king to a +side, by which the axe struck lower in the shoulder, and made a +large wound. He then raised the axe again, and made a blow at +Orm, the King-brother, who was lying on a bench, and the blow was +directed at both legs; but Orm seeing the man about to kill him, +drew in his feet instantly, threw them over his head, and the +blow fell on the bench, in which the axe stuck fast; and then the +blows at the Birkebein came so thick that he could scarcely fall +to the ground. It was discovered that he had dragged his +entrails after him over the floor; and this man's bravery was +highly praised. King Magnus's men followed the fugitives, and +killed so many that they were tired of it. Thorfin of Snos, and +a very great number of Throndhjem people, fell there. + + + +43. OF THE BIRKEBEINS. + +The faction which called itself the Birkebeins had gathered +together in great numbers. They were a hardy people, and the +boldest of men under arms; but wild, and going forward madly when +they had a strong force. They had few men in their faction who +were good counsellors, or accustomed to rule a country by law, or +to head an army; and if there were such men among them who had +more knowledge, yet the many would only allow of those measures +which they liked, trusting always to their numbers and courage. +Of the men who escaped many were wounded, and had lost both their +clothes and their arms, and were altogether destitute of money. +Some went east to the borders, some went all the way east to +Svithjod; but the most of them went to Thelemark, where they had +their families. All took flight, as they had no hope of getting +their lives from King Magnus or Earl Erling. + + + +44. OF KING MAGNUS ERLINGSON. + +King Magnus then returned to Tunsberg, and got great renown by +this victory; for it had been an expression in the mouths of all, +that Earl Erling was the shield and support of his son and +himself. But after gaining a victory over so strong and numerous +a force with fewer troops, King Magnus was considered by all as +surpassing other leaders, and that he would become a warrior as +much greater than his father, Earl Erling, as he was younger. + + + + + +End of The Project Gutenberg Etext of Heimskringla, by Snorri Sturlson + diff --git a/old/hmskr10.zip b/old/hmskr10.zip Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..5ab00c7 --- /dev/null +++ b/old/hmskr10.zip |